HomeMy WebLinkAbout03-2737ARCHITECTS
41
PROJECT MANUAL FOR
CATE RENOVATIONS
A&M CONSOLIDATED HIGH SCHOOL
COLLEGE STATION INDEPENDENT SCHOOL DISTRICT
PROJECT NO. 2737.03
FEBRUARY 27, 2009
C9PiM ":
COLLEGE STATION INDEPENDENT SCHOOL DISTRICT
1812 WELSH STREET
COLLEGE STATION, TX 77840
SET NO.
member american institute of architects 7915 FM 1960 west suite 214 houston texas 77070 ph 281 671 2300 fax 281 671 2313 vikarchlects.com
PROJECT MANUAL FOR
PROJECT: CATE RENOVATIONS
A&M CONSOLIDATED HIGH SCHOOL
COLLEGE STATION INDEPENDENT SCHOOL DISTRICT
PROJECT NO: 2737.03
DATE: FEBRUARY 27, 2009
OWNER: COLLEGE STATION INDEPENDENT
SCHOOL DISTRICT
1812 WELSH STREET
COLLEGE STATION, TX 77840
979.764.5400
ARCHITECT: VLK ARCHITECTS, INC. .
STEVE ALOWAY, AIA, LEEDO AP
7915 FM 1960 WEST, SUITE 214
HOUSTON, TX 77070
281.671.2300
281.671.2313 fax
STRUCTURAL MYOD STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS
ENGINEER: MAHENDRA P. YAJNIK, P.E.
305 N.E. LOOP 820, SUITE 507
HURST, TX 76053
817.284.8056
817.284.5075 fax
Copyright* 2009, VLK Architects, Inc
MEP ENGINEER:
KALMANS MARSHALL ENGINEERING, INC.
MELVIN KALMANS, P.E.
10930 W. SAM HOUSTON PARKWAY N., SUITE 901
HOUSTON, TX 77064
281.664.1900
281.664.1912 fax
CONSTRUCTION PEPPER-LAWSON CONSTRUCTION L.P.
MANAGER: JOHN RICHARD
4555 KATY-HOCKLEY CUT-OFF ROAD
KATY, TX 77218-9227
281.371.3100
281.371.2029 fax
Copyright® 2009, VLK Architects, Inc CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
Station Independent School District
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 00 - Not used.
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Section 01 1100 - Summary of Work ....................................
012100-Allowances
01 1100-1-4
.....................................................
01 2100-1-2
012300 - Alternates ............................... ......................
01 2300-1
012900 - Payment Procedures .........................................
01 2900-1-2
013100 - Project Management and Coordination ................................
01 3100-1
01 3119-Project Meetings .................................................
01 3119-1
013120 - Preconstruction Meetings ..........................................
01 3120-1
013216 - Construction Progress Schedules ....................................
01 3216-1-2
013323 - Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples ...........................
01 3323-1-3
01 3500 - Alteration Project Procedures .......................................
01 3500-1-4
014100 - Regulatory Requirements .............................. ....
014200- References
01 4100-1
.................................................
014200-1-5
01 4500 -Quality Control ..................................................
014623 - Testing and Inspection Services
01 4500-1-2
....... ...... ............... .....
015000 - Temporary Facilities and Controls .......... I ............ ... ....
01 4523-1-3
01 5000-1-3
016200 - Product Options .................................................
01 6200-"
016500 - Product Delivery Requirements...................................
01 6500-1
016600 - Product Storage and Handling Requirements ...........................
01 6600-1-2
017329 - Cutting and Patching ..............................................
017413 - Progress Cleaning
01 7329-1-2
...........................................
017700- Closeout Procedures
01 7413-1-2
..............................................
017823 - Operation and Maintenance Data
01 7700-1-3
....................................
01 7823-1-3
017830 - Warranties and Bonds ...........................................
017839 - Project Record Documents
01 7830-1
.........................................
017840 - Spare Parts, Overages and Maintenance Materials ......................
01 7839-1-2
01 7840-1
DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS
Section 02 4119 - Selective Structure Demolition ......................................
02 4119-1-3
DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE
Section 031100 - Concrete Forming and Accessories ...................... . . . . . .
03 1100-1-4
03 2000 - Concrete Reinforcing .............................................
03 3000 - Cast4n-place Concrete
03 2000-1-2
............................................
03 5419 - Self -leveling Underlayment
03 3000-1-8
.........................................
03 5419-1-2
DIVISION 04 - MASONRY
Section 04 2200 - Concrete Unit Masonry ............................................
04 2200-1-6
DIVISION 05 - METALS
Section 05 5000- Metal Fabrications ................................................
05 5000-1-2
DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES
Section 061000 - Rough Carpentry .................................................
06 6200 - Finish Carpentry
061000-1-3
.................................................
06 6200-1-6
TABLE OF CONTENTS
VLK Architects, 2009 TOC -1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School Di
DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
k, _!d ;
Section 07 2100 - i nsulation
. ............ ...................
07 8400 - Firestopping
07 2100-144
...............................
07 9200 - Joint Sealants
07 8400-1-2
...................................................
07 9200-1-3
DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS
Section 081100 = Hollow Metal Doors and Frames
.................
081423 - Plastic -Laminate -Faced Wood Doors
08 1100-1-4
.................................
08 3100-Access Doors
081423-1-4
..........
08 3300 - Coiling Doors
08 3100-1-2
...........................................
08 7100 - Door Hardware .................
08 3300-1-2
08 8000-Glazing
08 7100-1-7
........................................................
...................
08 8000-1-3
DIVISION 09 - FINISHES
Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies
.........................................
09 3013 - Ceramic Tiling
09 2116-1-4
. ..................
09 5100 - Acoustical Ceilings
09 3013-1-4
.......................
. . . . . . . . .
09 5150 - Selective Acoustical Ceiling Demolition
09 5100-1-3
...... ......
09 6500 - Resilient Flooring ........................................
09 5150-1-2
09 6515 - Resilient Sheet Flooring .........................
09 6500-1-3
......
09 6800 - Carpeting
09 6515-1-3
. ..............
09 8413 - Fixed Sound-Absorptive/Sound-Reflective Panels
09 8800-1-4
'8413-1-2
09 9100 - Painting ..............
09
.......................................
09 9100-1-9
DIVISION 10 -SPECIALTIES
Section 101116 - Markerboards and Tackboards
......................................
101316 - Bulletin Boards
101116-1-3
..................................................
10 1400 - Identifying Devices
10 1316-1-2
..........................
10 2800 - Toilet Accessories
10 1400-1-2
.............................................
10 5626 - Metal Storage Shelving ............................................
10 2800-1-2
10 5626-1-2
DIVISION 11 -EQUIPMENT
Section 11 3100-Appliances......................................................
11 3100-1-2
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS
Section 12 2113 - Horizontal Blinds
12 3216 - Manufactured Plastic -Laminate -dad Casework
12 2113-1-2
.......................
12 4813 - Entrance Floor Mats
12 3216-1-7
..............................................
12 4813-1
DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
Section 13 2123 - Insulated Rooms
. ..................
13 3420 - Metal Storage Building
13 2123-1-3
............................................
13 3420-1-2
DIVISION 14 through 20 - Not used.
DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION
Section 21.1000 - Standpipe and Sprinkler Systems
....................................
21 1000-1-11
TABLE OF CONTENTS
VLK Architects, 2009 TOC - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
Station Independent School District
DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING
Section 22 0100 - Plumbing Operating and Maintenance Manuals .........................
22 0100-1-4
22 0500 - Plumbing General Provisions .......................................
22 0500-1-6
22 0510 - Plumbing Contract Quality Control ...................................
22 0510-1-2
22 0512 - Plumbing Shop Drawings, Coordination Drawings & Product Data ..........
22 0512-1-5
22 0513 - Electrical Provisions of Plumbing Work ...............................
22 0513-1-3
22 0515 - Plumbing Earthwork ..............................................
22 0515-1
22 0517 - Plumbing Access Doors ...........................................
22 0517-1 2
22 0519 - Pressure and Temperature Instruments ...............................
22 0519-1-3
22 0523 - Valves, Strainers and Vents ........................................
22 0523-1-5
22 0533 - Pipe Heat Tracing ................................................
22 0533-1-3
22 0719 - Plumbing Piping Insulation .........................................
22 0719-1-6
22 1116 - Domestic Water Piping and Appurtenances ............................
221116-1-4
221123 - Domestic Water Pumps ...........................................
22 1123-1-3
22 1316 - Soil, Waste and Sanitary Drain Piping, Vent Piping and Appurtenances ......
221316-1-4
22 1413 - Roof Drainage Piping and Appurtenances .............................
221413-1-2
22 2000 - Plumbing Pipe and Pipe Fittings - General .............................
22 2000-1-7
22 3333 - Electric Water Heater .... ......................................
22 3333-1-2
22 3436 - Gas -fired Domestic Water Heater (Small Commercial Gas Tank Type) .......
22 3436-1-2
22 4000 - Plumbing Fixtures and Fixture Carriers ................................
22 4000-1-3
DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC)
Section 23 0100 - HVAC Operating and Maintenance Manuals ...........................
23 0100-1-4
23 0500 - Mechanical General Provisions ......................................
23 0500-1-6
23 0510 - HVAC Contract Quality Control ......................................
23 0510-1-2
23 0511- Mechanical Alterations Project Procedures ............................
23 0511-1-4
23 0512 - Shop Drawings, Coordination Drawings & Product Data ..................
23 0512-1-5
23 0513 - Electrical Provisions of HVAC Work ..................................
23 0513-1-3
23 0514 - HVAC Condensate Drain Piping System ..............................
23 0514-1
23 0517 - HVAC Access Doors ..............................................
23 0517-1-2
23 0593 - Testing, Balancing and Adjusting (Tab) of Environmental Systems ..........
23 0593-1-7
23 0594 - Coordination of Testing and Balancing ................................
23 0594-1-3
23 0713 - External Duct Insulation ...........................................
23 0713-1-5
23 0933 - Building Management and Control System .............................
23 0933-1-15
23 1123 - Gas Piping and Appurtenances .....................................
23 1123-1-3
23 3113 - Ductwork.......................................................
23 3113-1-10
23 3416-Fans ..........................................................
23 3416-1-4
23 3713 - Air Devices .....................................................
23 3713-1-2
23 4100 - Air Filtration ....... ............................................
23 4100-1-2
23 8119 - Single Package Rooftop Air Conditioners ..............................
23 8119-1-3
23 8216 - Heating and Cooling Coils ..........................................
23 8216-1-2
DIVISION 24 and 25 - Not used.
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
Section 26 0100 - Electrical Operating and Maintenance Manuals .........................
26 0100-1-4
26 0500 - Electrical General Provisions .......................................
26 0500-1-10
26 0505 - Electrical Alterations Project Procedures ..............................
26 0505-1 -5
26 0510 - Contract Quality Control ...........................................
26 0510-1-2
26 0512 - Shop Drawings, Coordination Drawings & Product Data ..................
26 0512-1-5
26 0519 - Conductors and Connectors — 600 Volt ...............................
26 0519-1-5
26 0520 - Steel Metal Clad Cables ...........................................
26 0520-1-3
26 0527 - Expansion of Existing Electrical Grounding System ......................
26 0527-1-5
TABLE OF CONTENTS
VLK Architects, 2009 TOC - 3
2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M C6nsolidated High School
College Station Independent School DI
26 0533 - Conduit Systems .................................................
26 0534 - Electrical Floor Boxes and Fittings ................... . . . . . . . . . . . . .
26 0535 - Electrical Connections for Equipment ................... .
26 0537 - Electrical Boxes and Fittings ............................ . . .. . . . . . .
26 0540 - Electrical Gutters and Wireways ......................... ........ . .
26 0550 - Firestops ..................................................
26 0923 - Lighting Occupancy Sensors ....... .
26 0925 - Electrical Contactors
26 2416 - Panelboards and Enclosures ..... .
26 2425 - Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers ...... ........... . . . . . . . . . . . . .
26 2430 - Fuses .. .
26 2773- Wiring Devices .................................................
26 2913 - Combination Motor Controllers .......... ................. .
26 4300 - Transient Voltage Surge Suppression and Filtering ......................
26 5113 - Lighting Fixtures and Lamps ........................................
DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS
Section 27 0500 - Communications General Provisions .................................
27 0501 - Telecommunications, CATV, Voice, Data, Video Utility Coordination
and Service Entrance .............................................
. . ...................
27 0507 - Communications Shop Drawings, Coordination Drawings & Product Data . .. .
27 0509 - Contract Quality Control ...........................................
271300 - Data and Voice Structured Cabling System - LAN ........... .... .
27 4133 - Two Way Broadband Television and CATV Distribution System ............
27 5116 - Sound Reinforcement System ......................................
27 5123 - School Communication System .....................................
DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
26 0533-1-11
26 0535-1-3
26 0535-1-2
26 0537-1-4
26 0540-1-2
26 0550-1
26 0923-1-5
26 0925-1-2
26 2416-1-4
26 2425-1-2
26 2430-1-2
26 2773-1-4
26 2913-1-3
26 4300.1-4
26 5113-1-6
27 0500-1-17
27 0501-1-2
27 0507-1-5
27 0509-1-2
271300-1-17
27 4133-1-9
27 5116-1-7
27 5123-1-10
Section 28 0100 - Electronic Safety and Security Operating and Maintenance Manuals ........
28 0100-1-3
28 0500 - Electronic Safety and Security General Provisions .......................
28 0500-1-16
28 0507 - Shop Drawings, Coordination Drawings & Product Data ..................
28 0507-1-5
28 0510 - Contract Quality Control ..........................................
281600 - Intrusion Alarm Security System
28 0510-1-2
...... .... ................
28 3102 - Expansion of Existing Fire Detection and Alann System ..................
281600-1-6
28 3102-1-21
DIVISION 29 and 30 - Not used.
DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK
Section 31 1000 -Site Clearing ............................................ .
312313 - Building Subgrade Preparation ......................................
.
313200 - Soil Stabilization ................................................ .
DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
Section 321313 - Concrete Paving .................................................
32 1723- Pavement Markings ...............................................
32 9223-Sodding ........................................................
DIVISION 33 through 49 - Not used.
31 1000-1
31 2313-1-3
31 3200-1-2
32 1313-1-3
32 1723-1-2
32 9223-1-3
TABLE OF CONTENTS
VLK Architects, 2009 TOC - 4
2737.03
SECTION 01 1100
SUMMARY OF WORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
A. Related Documents/Sections
1. Document 00 2116 - Instructions to Proposers.
2. General Conditions: Provisions for use of site; Owner occupancy; Relations of Contractor- subcontractors.
3. Section 01 3216 - Construction Progress Schedules: Format of work schedule.
4. Section 014523 - Testing and Inspection Services.
5. Section 01 5000 - Temporary Facilities and Controls.
1.02 DESCRIPTION
A. The work comprises the construction of CATE Renovations, A&M Consolidated High School for College Station
Independent School District, College Station,Texas, as shown on the drawings and described in the
specifications. The work shall be done under one lump sum contract.
B. Indication on the drawings or mention in the specifications of articles, materials, operations or methods requires
that the Contractor provide each item indicated or mentioned of the quality or subject to the qualifications noted,
and perform according to the conditions stated each operation described and provide therefor all necessary
labor, equipment, services and incidentals.
1. All subcontractors are responsible for examining the architectural drawings for structural, mechanical,
electrical, and plumbing items. Any items shown on these drawings shall be furnished by the appropriate
subcontractor.
1.03 CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT
A. The General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions, bound herewith as preceding portions of these
specifications, form a part thereof and shall govern the work under each section.
1.04 EXISTING SITE CONDITIONS
A. The Contractor shall visit and examine the site. Upon award of the Contract, the Contractor shall accept the
condition of the site before beginning the work required.
1.05 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Contractor shall make each subcontractor engaged in work on the project aware that the present building
houses an operating facility that must continue in operation during the construction period, except as the
Architect and Owner may otherwise direct. Plumbing, heating, ventilating, electrical and telephone systems
shall continue to function with a minimum of interruptions in service. Do not block any required fire exits.
B. Contractor shall assume responsibility for the protection of all areas of work and shall provide and maintain all
protections required. Contractor shall protect existing surfaces of the building and equipment, both interior and
exterior, as required during the construction period. Provide necessary dustscreens, drop cloths and temporary
walls and/or coverings as may be required for protection. Existing surfaces that are damaged due to
construction shall be patched or replaced to original condition.
C. Where designated on the drawings, the Contractor shall salvage, relocate and reinstall certain items. Existing
items so designated shall be properly installed, securely fastened as required, set plumb and level and left
complete and operational. Exercise extensive care in relocating such items so as to prevent damage. All other
existing building materials indicated to be removed or demolished, unless noted otherwise or claimed by the
Owner shall become property of the Contractor and shall be removed from the site immediately.
D. Wherever exterior walls are to be demolished or existing doors replaced, the exposed portion of the existing
building shall be protected by the Contractor against the elements, construction debris and intrusion by
unauthorized persons, by means subject to approval of the Architect.
E. Execute Certificate of Substantial Completion for each designated portion of work prior to Owner occupancy.
Following execution of a Substantial Completion Certificate fora designated portion of the work, the Contractor
shall permit:
1. Access for Owner personnel.
2. Use of parking facilities for the benefit of the Owner.
SUMMARY OF WORK
VLK Architects, 2009 01 1100 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
3. Operation of HVAC and electrical systems for the benefit of the Owner.
Despite partial Owner occupancy, the Contractor shall remain responsible for all portionsofthe work which have
not attained Substantial Completion and for which a Substantial Completion Certificate, which shall designate
the date on which the Owner shall become responsible for utilities, maintenance, security, damage to the work
and insurance, has not been executed.
F. The loop fire lane and fire hydrants are required by the City to be in place and operational prior to steel erection.
1.06 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES
A. Contractor shall limit use of premises for work, for storage and for access, to allow for Owner occupancy.
B. Coordinate use of premises under direction of Owner.
C. Assume full responsibility for protection and safekeeping of products under this Contract.
D. Obtain and pay for use of additional storage or work areas needed when required for operations under this
Contract.
E. During construction the Owner will continue to perform normal activities in and around the adjacent existing
building. Properand safe access to the Owner -occupied areas shall be maintained at all times. Any interruption
of mechanical and electrical services to the building shall be only at such times and for lengths of time as
approved by the Owner.
F. There shall be no storage of materials orequipment in the occupied portions of the existing building. There shall
be no fires on the site or in the building. There shall be no dumping on Owner's property.
G. Worker Identity Badging Requirements: Contractor must provide all construction personnel (including
subcontractors and suppliers regularly visiting the project site) with identification badges, with photograph.
Identification badges shall be worn visibly at all times by all construction personnel on the construction site or
on Owner's property. NO EMPLOYEE WILL BE PERMITTED ON SITE WITHOUT THIS BADGE DISPLAYED
ON THE EMPLOYEE. Contractor must assure that the Crisis Management contact information is provided on
the reverse side of each worker's badge. Temporary or visitor badges will be provided for persons who are
identified as having an infrequent or temporary legitimate business need for access to the site.
1.07 WORK RESTRICTIONS
A. On -Site Work Hours: Work shall be generally performed on the project site during normal business working
hours of 6:00 a.m. to sundown, Monday through Friday, or City ordinance whichever is more restrictive.
1. Weekend Hours: Comply with City ordinance restrictions for weekend work. No work shall be performed
on Sundays, unless specifically allowed by City and Owner.
2. Early Morning Hours: Comply with City noise ordinances for restriction of early-moming concrete pours and
other noisy construction activities. Owner's testing laboratory personnel will be available onlyduring on -site
work hours listed above.
B. Work Restrictions within Existing Building(s): Work shall be generally performed inside the existing building
during the summer break and after normal school classes Mondaythrough Friday. During student holidays when
the faculty and staff may be on campus, extent of work and utility interruption shall be coordinated with the
Owner in advance. On dates designated as TAAS testing days, work within the existing building is not allowed
and work in other areas may need to be limited to keeping down the amount of noise and distraction for the
students. Work on these days shall be coordinated with the Owner in advance.
08 COORDINATION
A. Drawing details and other sections of these specifications covering work connected with or relating to that
specified under a specific heading shall be examined for conditions which may affect that part of the work.
Failure to do so will not relieve those furnishing materials and/or labor under a specification heading from
supplying materials or performing work reasonably necessary to properly coordinate their work with that of other
trades.
1.09 LAYING OUT WORK, MEASUREMENTS
A. Employ a competent engineer or surveyor to establish and maintain lines and levels. Establish and maintain
at least two elevation bench marks remote from each other and located outside the building area. Set alignment
and location stakes.
SUMMARY OF WORK
VLK Architects, 2009 01 1100 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
ABM Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
B. Verify all measurements at the building. No extra compensation will be allowed for differences between actual
dimensions and dimensions indicated on the drawings. In all cases, figured dimensions and measurements
taken at the site shall take precedence over scaled dimensions.
1.10 DISCREPANCIES
A. In case of discrepancies within the drawings, within the specifications, or between the drawings and
specifications, the better quality and greater quantity, in the opinion of the Architect, shall be furnished and
installed.
1.11 PIPING
A. Should active piping or conduit be encountered below grade within the building structure and be found at
variance with the known conditions indicated by the drawings and specifications, said piping and/or conduit shall
be relocated as required by the Architect, and the contract sum shall be fairly adjusted on the basis of the cost
of labor and materials. The Contractor shall provide temporary support of active piping and conduit encountered
in the excavations until permanently supported or removed. The Contractor shall cut off and cap or plug
abandoned lines at least 3 ft. outside the building lines. In all cases, conform to the applicable requirements
of the locality or governing agency.
1.12 PROTECTION
A. General: Limit use of the premises to construction activities in areas indicated; allow for Owner occupancy in
adjacent spaces and around the site.
1. Confine operations to areas within Contract limits indicated. Portions of the building which are outside the
areas construction operations are indicated, are not to be disturbed.
2. Keep driveways and entrances serving the premises clear and available to the Owner and the Owner's
employees at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials without prior approval.
Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on
site.
3. Do not dispose of organic and hazardous material on site, either by burial or by burning. All disposable
material and trash must be removed properly.
B. Contractor shall take over and assume responsibility for the premises and shall provide and maintain all
protections required by the governing laws, regulations and ordinances. The Contractor shall be responsible
for any loss or damage caused by him or his workmen to the property of the Owner or to the work or materials
installed, and shall make good any loss, damage or injury without cost to the Owner.
C. The protection of adjacent property shall include but will not necessarily be limited to the erection and
maintenance of shoring, underpinning and fences as necessary to protect and support existing work to be left
in place.
D. Finished floors shall be protected against damage by workmen and equipment during the work. Where
materials are carried into the building, the building floors shall be covered to protect the work against dirt or grit
being ground in.
E. Where existing roofing, flashing, exterior walls, doors and windows are removed, the openings and exposed
portions of the construction shall be covered and protected so as to be weathertight until new work is in place.
F. Where work is being done on the existing building, the furniture, fixtures and equipment in the building shall be
covered with heavy plastic sheeting or clean tarpaulins to protect the property against damage and stains. The
furniture and equipment shall not be removed from the building.
G. Trees and shrubs on the site which do not have to be removed for the new work shall be protected against
damage. No Contractor shall remove or trim any trees and shrubs in the area without the express approval of
the Architect.
H. Contractor shall send proper notices, make necessary arrangements and perform other services required for
the care, protection and maintenance of Public Utilities, including fire plugs and wires and all other items of this
character on and around the building site.
1. Contractor shall maintain accessible all building exits required by the City during all phases of construction.
Protection of these exits shall include dust -proof enclosures, illumination and exit lighting required.
J. While school is in session, the Contractor shall provide appropriate measures to control the migration of dust
and odors into occupied areas of the school.
SUMMARY OF WORK
VLK Architects, 2009 01 1100 - 3 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
13 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Cutting and chasing of e)asting construction for relocation of mechanical and electrical work and for installation
of pipes and ducts will be done by the trades concerned. All patching and finishing shall be done by the
Contractor. This work shall be done with proper tools and by careful workmen of the particular trade to which
such work belongs and shall be done without extra cost to the Owner.
14 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Contractor shall maintain a complete clean set of "blueline" prints in the project field office for the sole purpose
of recording "installed" conditions. Installed conditions shall include addendum items, change orders, or any
other items which come up during the construction phase which deviate from the Construction Documents. All
changes made in these drawings in connection with the final construction and installation shall be neatly made
in red ink on the prints. Upon completion of the project, the marked set of prints shall be delivered to the
Architect for subsequent transmittal to the Owner. These drawings shall be maintained to reflect the current
conditions of the work and changes shall be reviewed on a monthly basis with the Architect's representative.
The Contractor's updating of the "installed" condition drawings shall be a prerequisite to the monthly review of
the Contractor's payment request by the Architect's representative.
1.15 INSTRUCTIONS CONCERNING ASBESTOS
A. In the event the Contractor encounters on the site material reasonably believed to be asbestos which has not
been rendered harmless, the Contractor shall immediately stop work in the area affected and report the
condition to the Owner in writing. If, in fact the material is asbestos and has not been rendered harmless, the
work in the affected area shall not thereafter be resumed until the asbestos has been removed or rendered
harmless by the Owner. The work in the affected area shall be resumed in the absence of asbestos, or when
it has been rendered harmless, by written agreement of the Owner and Contractor.
B. The Contractor shall not be required to perform without consent any work relating to asbestos.
END OF SECTION
SUMMARY OF WORK
VLK Architects, 2009 01 1100 - 4 2737.03
SECTION 01 2100
ALLOWANCES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
A. Section Includes: Administrative and procedural requirements governing allowances.
1. Certain materials and equipment are specified in the Contract Documents by allowances. Allowances have
been established in lieu of additional requirements and to deferselection of actual materials and equipment
to a later date when additional information is available for evaluation. If necessary, additional requirements
will be issued by Change Order.
B. Related Documents/Sections:
1. General Conditions of the Contract for Construction.
2. Section 01 3216 -Construction Progress Schedules: Product delivery and installation dates.
3. Individual Specifications Sections Listed Under Schedule of Allowances: Specification of products and
installation under Allowances.
1.02 COSTS INCLUDED IN ALLOWANCES
A. Cost of product to Contractor or subcontractor, less applicable trade discounts.
B. Delivery to site.
C. Applicable taxes.
1.03 CONTRACTOR COSTS INCLUDED IN CONTRACT SUM
A. Products handling at site, including unloading, uncrating and storage.
B. Protection of products from elements and from damage.
C. Labor for installation and finishing.
D. Other expenses required to complete installation.
E. Contractor overhead and profit.
1.04 ADJUSTMENT OF COSTS
A. Should the net cost be more or less than the specified amount of the allowance, the Contract Sum will be
adjusted accordingly by Change Order.
B. Submit any claims for anticipated additional costs at the site, or other expenses caused by the selection under
the allowance, prior to execution of the work.
C. Submit documentation for actual additional costs at the site, or other expenses caused by the selection under
the allowance, prior to execution of the work.
D. Failure to submit claims within the designated time will constitute a waiver of claims for additional costs.
1.05 ARCHITECT RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Consult with Contractor in consideration of products, suppliers and installers.
B. Select products, obtain Owner's written decision, and transmit full information to Contractor as follows
1. Manufacturer, product, model or catalog number, accessories, attachments and finishes.
2. Supplier and installer as applicable.
3. Cost to Contractor, delivered to site (and installed, if so specified).
1.06 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES
A. At the earliest practical date after award of the Contract, advise Architect of the date when final selection and
purchase of each product or system described by an allowance must be completed to avoid delaying the work.
ALLOWANCES
VLK Architects, 2009 01 2100 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
B. Assist Architect in determining suppliers; and installers; obtain proposals when requested.
C. Make recommendations for Architect consideration.
D. Promptly notify Architect of any reasonable objections against supplier or installer.
E. On notification of selection execute purchase agreement with designated supplier and installer.
F. Arrange for and process shop drawings, product data and samples.
G. Arrange for delivery. Promptly inspect products upon delivery for completeness, damage and defects. Submit
claims for transportation damage.
H. Install, adjust and finish products.
I. Provide warranties for products and installation.
1.07 CORRELATION WITH CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
A. Schedule shop drawings, product data, samples and delivery dates, in Progress Schedule for products selected
under allowances.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not applicable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine products covered by an allowance promptly on delivery for damage or defects. Return damaged or
defective products to manufacturer for replacement.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate allowance work with related work to ensure proper integration and interface.
3.03 SCHEDULE OF ALLOWANCES
A. Allowance No. 1: Allow the lump sum of $79,758.00 Owner's Contingency for the changes requested by the
Owner.
END OF SECTION
ALLOWANCES
VLK Architects, 2009 01 2100 - 2 2737.03
SECTION 012300
ALTERNATES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
A. Requirements Included:
1. Identification and description of alternate work.
2. The amount shown in the proposal form for each alternate shall include all overhead, profit, insurance and
other costs incidental to the performance under the alternate.
B. Related Requirements:.
1. Proposal Form: Quotation of cost of each alternate.
2. Contract Form: Alternates by Owner for incorporation into the work.
3. Section of specifications identified in each alternate.
1.02 PROCEDURES
A. Proposers are required to submit alternate amounts to add work or to deduct work from the base proposal as
described below. Failure to submit alternate amounts in spaces provided on proposal form shall be basis for
disqualification of proposal.
B. The successful proposer shall not modify, withdraw or cancel any of the alternate proposals or any part thereof
for 30 days after date of receipt of proposals, unless specifically noted otherwise.
C. Contractor shall be responsible for any changes in the Work affected by acceptance of alternates. Claims for
additional costs or time extensions resulting from changes to the Work as a result of the Owner's election of any
or all alternates will not be allowed.
D. Refer to drawings and technical specifications sections for items of work affected by alternates.
E. Election of alternates will be exercised at the option of Owner.
F. Coordinate related work and modify or adjust surrounding work as required to complete the Work, including
changes under each alternate.
1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects and similar items incidental
to, or required for, a complete installation whether or not indicated as part of alternate.
2. Cost listed for each alternate include cost of related coordination, modification, or adjustment.
G. Notification: Immediately following the award of contract, Contractor shall prepare and distribute to each entity
or person to be involved in the performance of the Work, a notification of the status of each alternate scheduled
herein. Indicate which alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for later consideration. Include
a complete description of negotiated modifications to alternates, If any.
1.03 SELECTION AND AWARD OF ALTERNATES
A. Indicate variation in base proposal amount as a result of the prices for the alternates described below and listed
on the proposal form document or any supplement to it, by adding to, or deducting from, the base proposal
amount or by indicating " No Change."
B. Indicating "No Proposal" as an alternate is unacceptable and is reason for rejection of proposal.
1.04 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES
A. Alternate No. 1: State in the proposal form the amount to be added to the base proposal for removing existing
ceiling grid, acoustic lay -in -panels, and existing sprinkler heads and providing 2 x 2 suspended ceiling grid, new
2 x 2 acoustic lay -in panels, and new concealed sprinkler heads in designated areas. Refer to Section 09 5100 -
Acoustical Ceilings and Section 21 1000 - Standpipe and Sprinkler Systems.
B. Alternate No. 2: State in the proposal form the amount to be added to the base proposal for removing existing
asphalt paving and providing new concrete paving on stabilized subgrade. Refer to Section 31 3200 - Soil
Stabilization and Section 32 1313 - Concrete Paving.
END OF SECTION
ALTERNATES
VLK Architects, 2009 01 2300 - 1 2737.03
SECTION 012900
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Applications and Certificates for Payment.
2. Change Order Procedures.
3. Schedule of Values: Submit to the Architect the Schedule of Values allocated to various portions of the
work within 5 days after "Notice -to -Proceed". Upon request of Architect, supportvalues with data which will
substantiate their correctness.
B. Related Documents/Sections:
1. Conditions of the Contract for Construction.
2. Section 01 3216 - Construction Progress Schedules.
3. Section 01 7700 - Closeout Procedures.
4. Section 01 7839 - Project Record Documents.
1.02 APPLICATIONS AND CERTIFICATES FOR PAYMENT
A. Progress payments shall be made as the work proceeds at intervals stated in the Contract.
B. All work covered by progress payments shall, at the time of payment, become the property of the Owner.
C. Form of Application and Certificate for Payment shall be notarized AIA Document G702 - Application and
Certification for Payment, supported by AIA document G703 - Continuation Sheet, submitted in quintuplicate.
D. Conditions governing regular schedule for applications, payment and retainage are as stated in the Contract.
E. With each Application for Payment, Contractor shall certify that such Application for Payment represents a just
estimate of cost reimbursable to Contractor under terms of Contract.
1.03 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
A. Contractor to submit to Architect within 5 days of execution of Owner/Contractor Agreement name of individual
authorized to accept changes on behalf of Contractor, and to be responsible for informing others in Contractor's
employ of changes in the work.
B. Change Order forms will be furnished and issued by Architect.
C. Contractor Documentation of Changes:
1. Maintain detailed records of work done on an accounting basis acceptable to Architect and Owner. Provide
full information required for evaluation of proposed changes.
2. Document each quotation for a change in cost or time with sufficient data to allow evaluation of quotation.
3. On request, provide additional data to support computations:
a. Quantities of products, labor and equipment.
b. Insurance and bonds.
c. Overhead and profit.
d. Justification for any change in Contract Time.
e. Credit for deletions from Contract, similarly documented.
4. Support each request for additional costs, and for work proposed on a time and material basis, with
description of products, equipment, cost of labor and subcontracts, completely documented.
5. Computation for changes in work will be computed in one of the manners described in the Conditions of
the Contract.
D. Initiation of Changes:
1. Architect may submit Proposal Request which includes detailed description of change with supplementary
or revised drawings and specifications.
2. Contractor may initiate a proposed change by submittal of a request to Architect describing proposed
change with statement of reason for change, and proposed effect on Contract Sum and Contract Time with
full documentation and a statement of the effect on work of separate contractors. Document any requested
substitutions in accordance with SECTION 016200 - PRODUCT OPTIONS. Submission of such requests
and receipt of same by Architect does not mean acceptance, or approval of proposed change.
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
VLK Architects, 2009 01 2900 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
E. Authorization:
1. The Owner may request, through the Architect, a Construction Change Directive, in writing, instructing
Contractor to proceed with changes of all or in part of work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order
that is pending. Directive will propose basis for necessary adjustments, if any, to Contract Sum or Time.
2. All changes that affect Contract Sum and/or Contract Time will require a Change Order signed by the
Owner and the Architect. Contractor's signature indicates agreement. Any other orders, written or oral,
by the Owner through the Architect or by the Architect shall be treated as a Change Order only if Contractor
gives Owner proper written notice as described in Conditions of Contract.
3. Promptly execute the change in work only upon receipt of approved Change Order or Owner's written
Construction Change Directive.
Execution:
1. Architect will issue Change Orders for signatures of parties as provided in Conditions of Contract.
2. Promptly revise Schedule of Values and Application for Payment forms to record each authorized Change
Order as a separate line item and adjust Contract Sum as shown on Change Order.
3. Promptly revise Progress Schedules to reflect any change in Contract Time, revise sub -schedules to adjust
times for other items of work affected by Change, and resubmit Schedule.
4. Promptly enter Changes in Project Record Documents.
1.04 SCHEDULE OF VALUES FORM AND CONTENT
A. Type schedule on 8-1/2" x 11" white paper; Contractors standard forms and automated printout will be
considered for approval by Architect upon Contractor's request. Identify schedule with:
1. Title of project and location.
2. Architect and Architect's project number.
3. Name and address of Contractor.
4. Contract designation.
5. Date of submission.
B. Follow the table of contents of this project manual as the format for listing component items.
1. Identify each fine item with the number and title of the respective major section of the specifications.
C. For each major line item list sub -values of major products or operations under the item.
D. The sum of all values listed in the schedule shall equal the total contract sum.
E. Indicate separate value associated with materials and labor.
F. Resubmittal: After review by Architect, revise and resubmit schedule as necessary.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS & PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not applicable.
END OF SECTION
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
VLK Architects, 2009 01 2900 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 01 3100
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Coordination of work of the contract.
B. Related Sections
1. Section 01 1100 - Summary of Work: Sequence of construction and Owner occupancy.
2. Section 013119 - Project Meetings.
3. Section 016200 - Product Options.
4. Section 01 7329 - Cutting and Patching.
5. Section 01 7700 - Closeout Procedures: Closeout submittals.
1.02 DESCRIPTION
A. Coordinate scheduling, submittals and work of the various sections of Specifications to assure efficient and
orderly sequence of installation of construction elements, with provisions for accommodating items to be
installed later.
B. Coordinate sequence of work to accommodate Owner occupancy as specified in SECTION 01 1100 -
SUMMARY OF WORK.
1.03 MEETINGS
A. In addition to progress meetings specified in SECTION 01 3119 - PROJECT MEETINGS, hold coordination
meetings and pre -installation conferences with personnel and subcontractors to assure coordination of work.
1.04 COORDINATION OF SUBMITTALS
A. Schedule and coordinate submittals specified in SECTION 01 3323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA
AND SAMPLES.
B. Coordinate work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities for equipment, such as installing,
connecting to and placing in service.
C. Coordinate requests for substitutions to assure compatibility of space, of operating elements and effect on work
of other sections.
1.05 COORDINATION OF SPACE
A. Coordinate use of Project space and sequence of installation of mechanical and electrical work which is
indicated diagrammatically on drawings. Follow routings shown for pipes, ducts and conduits as closely as
practicable, with due allowance for available physical space; make runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize
space efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance and for repairs.
B. In finished areas, except as otherwise shown, conceal pipes, ducts and wiring in the construction. Coordinate
locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements.
1.06 COORDINATION OF CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
A. Coordinate completion and cleanup of work of separate sections in preparation for Substantial Completion of
portions of work designated for Owner partial occupancy.
B. After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site by various sections for correction of defective
work and work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of Owner's activities.
C. Assemble and coordinate closeout submittals specified in SECTION 01 7700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS & PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not applicable.
END OF SECTION
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
VLK Architects, 2009 01 3100 - 1 2737.03
SECTION 01 3119
PROJECT MEETINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
A. Section Includes
1. Scheduling and administration of progress meetings.
2. Pre -installation conferences.
B. Related Sections
1. Section 01 3100 - Project Management and Coordination.
2. Section 01 3120 - Preconstruction Meetings: Owner's preconstruction conference and pre -mobilization
conference.
3. Section 013216 - Construction Progress Schedules.
4. Section 013323 - Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples.
5. Section 014500 - Quality Control.
6. Section 01 7823 - Operation and Maintenance Data.
7. Section 017839 - Project Record Documents.
1.02 PROGRESS MEETINGS
A. The Architect will schedule and administer monthly construction progress meetings, throughout progress of
work. He will prepare agenda and distribute notice of each meeting to participants
B. Contractor shall make physical arrangements.
C. Architect will preside at meetings.
D. Location of Meetings: Contractor's field office.
E. Attendance: Contractor, job superintendent, and Architect Owner and professional consultants will attend as
appropriate. Subcontractors and suppliers shall attend as Architect sees necessary to agenda.
Anticipated Agenda
1. Review of Contractor's updated Construction Schedule.
2. Review of work in -progress.
3. Field observations, problems and decisions.
4. Identification of problems which impede planned progress.
5. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals.
6. Review of off -site fabrication and delivery schedules.
7. Maintenance of progress schedule.
8. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules.
9. Planned progress during succeeding work period.
10. Coordination of projected progress.
11. Maintenance of quality and work standards.
12. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination.
13. Other business relating to work.
1.03 PRE -INSTALLATION CONFERENCES
A. When required in individual specification section, convene a pre -installation conference at work site prior to
commencing work of the section.
B. Require attendance of entities directly affecting, or affected by, work of the section.
C. Notify Architect four days in advance of meeting date.
D. Prepare agenda, preside at conference, record minutes and distribute copies within two days after conference
to participants, with two copies to Architect.
E. Review conditions of installation, preparation and installation procedures and coordination with related work.
END OF SECTION
PROJECT MEETINGS
VLK Architects, 2009 01 3119 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 01 3120
PRECONSTRUCTION MEETINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Contractor participation in preconstruction conferences.
B. Related Sections/Documents
1. Section 01 1100 - Summary of Work: Administrative Provisions.
2. Section 01 3100 - Project Management and Coordination: Coordination of multiple -contract work.
3. Section 01 3119 - Project Meetings.
1.02 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE
A. Architect will schedule conference within 15 days after notice of award.
B. Attendance: Owner, Architect, Construction Manager, General Contractor, and representatives of major
subcontractors.
C. Agenda
1. Submittal of executed bonds and insurance certificates.
2. Execution of Owner -Contractor Agreement.
3. Distribution of Contract Documents.
4. Submittal of list of subcontractors, list of products, schedule of values and progress schedule.
5. Designation of responsible personnel.
6. Procedures and processing offield decisions, submittals, substitutions, applications forpayments, proposal
requests, change orders, allowances and Contract closeout procedures.
7. Scheduling.
8. Use of premises by Owner and Contractor.
9. Owner's requirements and occupancy.
10. Temporary facilities.
11. Survey and building layout.
12. Security and housekeeping procedures.
13. Procedures for testing.
14. Procedures for maintaining record documents.
15. Requirements for startup of equipment
16. Accessibility Issues.
17. Inspection and acceptance of equipment put into service during construction period.
18. Notice to proceed.
19. Color samples.
20. Procedures for site meetings.
21. Site access and security.
22. Substantial and final project completion procedures.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS & PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not applicable.
END OF SECTION
PRECONSTRUCTION MEETINGS
VLK Architects, 2009 01 3120 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 01 3216
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Procedures for preparation and submittal of construction progress schedules and periodical
updating.
B. Related Sections
1. Section 01 1100 - Summary of Work: Work sequence.
2. Section 012100 -Allowances.
3. Section 01 3323 - Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples.
4. Section 01 2900 - Payment Procedures: Schedule of Values.
1.02 WORK SCHEDULE FORMAT
A. Within 21 days of the contract date, Contractor shall prepare and submit a Critical Path construction schedule
for the work. The schedule shall not exceed time limits current under the Contract Documents and shall be
subject to the approval of the Architect. The Contractor shall prosecute the work vigorously and make every
effort to start and complete each phase of the work on or before the dates stated.
B. Should actual construction of project vary from the Critical Path schedule, Contractor shall take whatever
actions are necessary to improve progress as quickly as possible in order to meet pre -determined milestones.
Revise and re -submit schedule not less than every 30 calendar days. Presentation of the existing or updated
Critical Path schedule, in three copies, along with the Certificate of Payment Request shall be a prerequisite
to the monthly review of the payment request by the Architect's representative.
C. Sequence of Listings: The chronological order of the start of each item of work.
D. Scale and Spacing: To provide space for notations and revisions.
E. Sheet Size: Minimum 11" x 17".
1.03 CONTENT
A. Show complete sequence of construction by activity, with dates for beginning and completion of each element
of construction.
B. Identify each item by major specification section number.
C. Identify work of separate stages and other logically grouped activities.
D. Provide sub -schedules for each stage of work identified in SECTION 01 1100 - SUMMARY OF WORK.
E. Provide sub -schedules to define critical portions of entire schedule.
F. Show accumulated percentage of completion of each item, and total percentage of work completed, as of the
first day of each month.
G. Provide separate schedule of submittal dates for shop drawings, product data and samples, including Owner
furnished products and products specified under Allowances, and dates reviewed submittals will be required
from Architect. Show decision dates for selection of finishes.
H. Show delivery dates for Owner furnished products and products specified under Allowances.
I. Coordinate content with SECTION 01 2900 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES, Schedule of Values.
1.04 REVISIONS TO SCHEDULES
A. Indicate progress of each activity to date of submittal, and projected completion date of each activity.
B. Identify activities modified since previous submittal, major changes in scope and other identifiable changes.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULES
VLK Architects, 2009 01 3216 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
C. Provide narrative report to define problem areas, anticipated delays and impact on Schedule. Report corrective
action taken, or proposed and its effect.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit initial Schedules within 15 days from Notice to Proceed. After review, resubmit required revised data
within 15 days.
B. Submit revised Critical Path Construction Schedule with each Application for Payment.
C. Submit the number of opaque reproductions which Contractor requires plus two copies which will be retained
by Architect.
D. Submit under transmittal letter specified in SECTION 01 3323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND
SAMPLES.
1.06 DISTRIBUTION
A. Distribute copies of reviewed schedules to job site file, subcontractors, suppliers and other concerned entities.
B. Instruct recipients to promptly report, in writing, problems anticipated by projections shown in schedules.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS & PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not applicable.
END OF SECTION
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULES
VLK Architects, 2009 01 3216 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 01 3323
SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Related Documents/Sections:
1. General Conditions of the Contract for Construction: Definitions and basic responsibilities of entities.
2. Section 01 3100 - Project Management and Coordination: Coordination of submittals.
3. Section 01 3216 - Construction Progress Schedules: Schedules for submittals.
4. Section 014500 - Quality Control: Mockups and samples for testing.
5. Section 01 5000 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Project management software.
6. Section 01 6200 - Product Options.
7. Section 01 7823 - Operation and Maintenance Data.
8. Section 01 7839 - Project Record Documents.
1.02 GENERAL
A. Refer to General Conditions, Paragraph 3.12 Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples.
B. Submit to the Architect, or applicable consultant, shop drawings, product data, and samples required by
specification sections. Do not submit illegible fax copies nor carbon copies of shop drawings and product data.
1. The submittals shall be logged in by the Contractor and tracked using the "Submittal" feature in the
Architect's project management program (Projectmates).
C. Within 30 days of the contract date Contractor shall prepare and submit with the Schedule of Values a
comprehensive list of shop drawings, product data and samples. This list shall include products which are
proposed for substitution. Also include the estimated date of each submittal and anticipated date of submittal
return. Allow the Architect reasonable time to review submittals..
1. The list shall be compiled and submitted using the "Submittal" feature in the Architect's project management
program (Projectmates).
D. Prepare list on basis of each specification section.
E. For products specified under reference standards, include with listing of each product:
1. Name and address of manufacturer.
2. Trade name.
3. Model or catalog designation.
4. Manufacturer's data, including performance and test data, reference standards.
1.03 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Prepared by a qualified detailer.
B. Identify details by reference to sheet and detail numbers shown on contract documents.
C. Reproductions for Submittals: Reproducible transparency and three opaque diazo prints.
D. Present in a clear and thorough manner original drawings which illustrate the portion of the work showing
fabrication, layout, setting, or erection details, prepared by a qualified detailer. Title each drawing with Project
and Contract name and number; identify each element of drawings by reference to sheet number and detail,
schedule, or room number of Contract Documents.
1.04 PRODUCT DATA
A. Manufacturer's standard schematic drawings and diagrams:
1. Modify drawings to delete information which is not applicable to the Murk.
2. Supplement standard information to provide additional information specifically applicable to the work.
B. Manufacturer's catalog sheets, brochures, diagrams, schedules, performance charts, illustrations and other
standard descriptive data:
1. Clearly mark each copy to identify pertinent materials, products or models.
2. Show dimensions and clearances required.
3. Show performance characteristics and capacities.
4. Show wiring or piping diagrams and controls.
SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES
VLK Architects, 2009 01 3323 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
C. Submit only pages which are pertinent; mark each copy of standard printed data to identify pertinent products,
referenced to specification section and Article number. Show reference standards, performance characteristics
and capacities; wiring and piping diagrams and controls; component parts; finishes; dimensions; and required
clearances.
D. Modify manufacturer's standard schematic drawings and diagrams to supplement standard information and to
provide information specifically applicable to the work. Delete information not applicable.
E. Submit number of copies of product data which the Contractor requires for distribution and for the Owner's
record copy (to be turned over at project close-out), plus 2 copies which will be retained by the Architect and
the Architect's Consultants.
1.05 SAMPLES
A. Office samples shall be of sufficient size and quantity to clearly illustrate:
1. Functional characteristics of product or material, with integrally related parts and attachment devices.
2. Full range of color samples.
B. Field Samples and Mock-ups:
1. Erect at project site at location acceptable to Architect.
2. Construct each sample or mock-up complete, including work of all trades required in finish work.
3. Install each sample complete and finished. Acceptable finishes in place may be retained in completed
work.
C. Submit full range of manufacturer's standard finishes except when more restrictive requirements are specified,
indicating colors, textures and patterns, for Architect selection.
D. Submit samples to illustrate functional characteristics of products, including parts and attachments.
E. Approved samples which may be used in the work are indicated in the specification section.
F. Label each sample with identification required for transmittal letter.
1.06 CONTRACTOR REVIEW
A. Review submittals prior to transmittal; determine and verify field measurements, field construction criteria,
quantities and details, manufacturer's catalog numbers and conformance of submittal with requirements of
Contract Documents.
B. Coordinate submittals with requirements of work and of Contract Documents.
C. Sign or initial in a rubber-stamped review block format, each sheet of shop drawings and product data and each
sample label to certify compliance with requirements of Contract Documents. Notify Architect in writing at time
of submittal, of any deviations from requirements of Contract Documents.
D. Do not fabricate products or begin work which requires submittals until return of submittal with Architect
acceptance.
E. Contractor's responsibility for errors and omissions in submittals is not relieved by Architect's review of
submittals.
F. Contractor's responsibility for deviations in submittals from requirements of contract documents is not relieved
by Architect's review of submittals, unless Architect gives specific written acceptance of deviations. Architect
will review submittals for general conformance to design intent only.
1.07 SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS
A. Submit shop drawing and product data as soon as practicable after award of contract but not later than 30 days
before dates reviewed submittals will be needed.
1. The submittals shall be logged in and tracked using the "Submittal" feature in the Architect's project
management program (Projectmates).
B. Submit all office samples as soon as practicable but not later than 60 days after award of contract in order to
facilitate color selections and coordination of the various materials. Final color selections and release of shop
drawings contingent upon color selection will not be made until all office samples have been submitted,
coordinated and approved.
SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES
VLK Architects, 2009 01 3323 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
C. Reference SHOP DRAWINGS Paragraph, PRODUCT DATA Paragraph, and SAMPLES Paragraph within this
specification section for submittal quantity requirements.
D. Submittals to be reviewed by consultants shall be submitted directly to the applicable consultant with a copy of
the transmittal simultaneously forwarded to the Architect's office. Submittals will be reviewed by the consultant
and then delivered to the Architect for his review prior to returning them to the contractor. Submittals to be
reviewed by the testing lab shall be handled in the same manner.
E. Contractor is responsible for the costs associated with the delivery of all submittals to the Architect and the
Architect's consultants and retrieval of all submittals from the Architect.
F. Accompany submittals with transmittal letter containing:
1. Date.
2. Project title and number.
3. Contractor's name and address.
4. Identification of specification section and submittal numbers.
5. The number of each shop drawing, product data and sample submitted.
6. Notification of deviations from contract documents.
7. Other pertinent data.
G. Submittals shall include:
1. Date and revision dates.
2. Project title and number.
3. Names of Architect, Contractor, subcontractor, supplier and manufacturer.
4. Identification of product or material and specification section number.
5. Relation to adjacent structure, materials or other critical features.
6. Field dimensions, clearly identified as such.
7. Applicable reference standards.
8. A blank space 3" x 4" for Architect's stamp.
9. Identification of deviations from contract documents.
10. Contractor's stamp, initialed or signed, certifying to review of submittal, verification of field measurements,
compliance with contract documents and coordination with requirements of the work. Note: Absence of
the Contractor's stamp shall constitute grounds for rejection of the submittal until such time as the submittal
has been processed in accordance with this requirement
11. Other pertinent data required by specifications.
1.08 RE -SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS
A. Re -submission: For shop drawings and product data not approved by Architect, make corrections and changes
in submittals required by Architect and re -submit until approved.
1. The re -submission shall be logged in using the "Resubmit" feature in the Architect's project management
program (Projectmates).
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Revise initial drawings and re -submit as specified for initial submittal.
2. Indicate on drawings any changes which have been made, other than those requested by Architect.
C. Product Data and Samples: Submit new data and samples as specified for initial submittal
1.09 DISTRIBUTION OF SUBMITTALS AFTER REVIEW
A. Distribute reviewed copies of shop drawings and product data which carry Architect's stamp as follows:
Contractor's file, project site file, record documents file, other prime contractors.
B. Keep and maintain a full set of submittals throughout the construction phase to be submitted to the Architect
with other Close-out documents for delivery to the Owner for his permanent record. Set of submittals shall be
delivered to the Architect in cardboard file boxes with string and button type closures. Organize submittals by
CSI divisions, utilizing neatly labeled pressboard dividers to separate the sections. Neatly label short end of
box with project name, contents and duration of construction.
END OF SECTION
SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES
VLK Architects, 2009 01 3323 - 3 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 01 3500
ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
I. General: The procedures and administrative requirements of this section apply to all of the sections of the
specification which are involved in alterations to the existing building.
2. Extent Notes: Cut into or partially remove portions of the existing buildings as necessary to make way for
new construction. Include such work as:
a. Cutting, moving, or removal of items shown to be cut, moved, or removed.
b. Cutting, moving, or removal of items not shown to be cut, moved, or removed, but which must be cut,
moved, or removed to allow the new work to proceed. Work or items which are to remain in the finished
work shall be patched or reinstalled after their cutting, moving, or removal, and their joints and finishes
made to match adjacent or similar work.
c. Removal of existing surface finishes as needed to install new work or finishes.
d. Removal of abandoned items and removal of items serving no useful purpose, such as abandoned
piping.
e. Repair or removal of dangerous or unsanitary conditions resulting from alterations work.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 01 1100 - Summary of Work; Sequence of construction and instructions concerning asbestos.
2. Section 01 5000 - Temporary Facilities and Controls.
3. Section 01 7329 - Cutting and Patching.
4. Section 01 7413 - Progress Cleaning.
5. Section 02 4119 - Selective Structure Demolition.
1.02 SCHEDULING AND ACCESS
A. Maintenance of Access and Operations:
1. During period of construction, do not obstruct in any manner existing exit ways of Owner -occupied areas.
Prior to removal of existing exit ways (stairs, corridors, doors) as part of new work, provide and maintain
new exit ways so as to maintain same number of exit ways. Maintain existing fire doors in an operable
condition.
B. Maintenance of Existing Services:
1. Maintain environmental control in existing buildings, especially temperature, humidity and dust control.
2. Provide temporary lines and connections as required to maintain existing mechanical and electrical services
in buildings.
3. Notify Owner a minimum of seven days prior to each required interruption of mechanical or electrical
services in buildings. Such interruptions shall be only at such times and for lengths of time as approved
by the Owner. In no event shall interruption occur without prior approval of the Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 PRODUCTS FOR PATCHING EXTENDING WORK
A. New Materials: As specked in individual sections.
B. Match existing products and work for patching and extending work.
C. Determine type and quality of existing products by inspection and any necessary testing, and workmanship by
use of existing as a standard. Presence of a product, finish, or type of work, requires that patching, extending,
or matching shall be performed as necessary to make work complete and consistent with existing quality or
specifications if more stringent.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Verify that demolition is complete, and areas are ready for installation of new work.
B. Beginning of restoration work means acceptance of existing conditions.
ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES
VLK Architects, 2009 01 3500 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Cut, move, or remove items as necessary for access to alterations and renovations work; replace and restore
at completion.
B. Remove unsuitable material not marked for salvage, such as rotted wood, rusted materials, and deteriorated
masonry and concrete; replace materials as specified for finished work.
C. Remove debris and abandoned items from area and from concealed spaces.
D. Prepare surfaces and remove surface finishes to provide for proper installation of new work and new finishes.
E. Close openings in exterior surfaces to protect existing work and salvage items from weather and extremes of
temperature and humidity. Insulate ductwork and piping to prevent condensation in exposed areas.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate work of alterations and renovations to expedite completion.
B. Project shall be complete in all respects.
C. Remove, cut, and patch work in a manner to minimize damage and to provide means of restoring products and
finishes to specified condition.
D. Refinish visible existing surfaces to remain in renovated rooms and spaces, to specified condition for each
material, with a neat transition to adjacent new finishes.
E. Install products as specified in individual sections.
3.04 ALTERATIONS, CUTTING AND PROTECTION
A. Extent:
1. Cutting and removal work shall be performed so as not to cut or remove more than is necessary and so as
not to damage adjacent work.
2. Conduct work in such a manner as to minimize noise and to minimize accumulation and spread of dirt and
dust.
3. Perform cutting for ductwork and other rectangular openings with carborundum saw with approved dust
arrestor.
4. Drill holes for conduit and piping using core drills.
B. Shoring, Bracing, and Capping: Provide shores, needling and bracing as needed to keep buildings structurally
secure and free of deflection in all its parts, and as needed for installation of new structural members.
C. Responsibility and Assignment to Trades:
1. Contractor shall assign the work of moving, removal, cutting, patching and repair to trades under his
supervision so as to cause the least damage to each type of work encountered, and so as to return the
buildings as much as possible to the appearance of new work.
2. Patching of finish materials shall be assigned to mechanics skilled in the work of the finish trade involved.
D. Protection:
1. Protect remaining finishes, equipment, and adjacent work from damage caused bycutting, moving, removal
and patching operations. Protect surfaces which will remain a part of the finished work.
2. Protectexisting facilities and features, within designated construction limits and along corridor access route
to construction area.
3. Cover existing wall and floor finishes in work areas, in adjacent areas and along corridor access route to
prevent damage from product delivery and construction operations. Use reinforced sheeting, listed by
Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., as having a flame spread rating of less than 25 and smoke developed
rating of less than 50. Apply double thickness of sheeting, fastened to one side with no -tear fasteners.
Tape joints continuously.
4. During demolition, cutting and construction, provide positive dust control by wetting dust debris and by
completely sealing openings to Owner -occupied areas with temporary partitions, so as to prevent spread
of dust and dirt to adjacent areas.
5. After materials, equipment and machinery are installed, properly protect work until final acceptance.
6. Any damage resulting from construction operations shall be repaired by the Contractor without cost to the
Owner.
7. During non -working hours, provide continuous security at openings cut into existing exterior walls and roofs.
ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES
VLK Architects, 2009 01 3500 - 2 2737.03
Debris:
1. Remove debris promptly from the site each day. Removed
Architect for retention, becomes property of the Contractor.
removal from site. Do not allow debris to enter sewers.
2. Do not let piled material endanger structure.
3. During cutting and coring operations, use metal lined wood
falling debris and water.
3.05 PATCHING, EXTENDING AND MATCHING
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
material, except that listed or marked by the
Load removed material directly on trucks for
box secured tight against surface, to catch
A. Skill: Patch and extend existing work using skilled mechanics who are capable of matching the existing quality
of workmanship. The quality of patched or extended work shall not be less than that specified in the sections
of the product and execution specifications which follow these general requirements.
B. Patching:
1. In areas where any portion of an existing finishing surface is damaged, lifted, stained, or otherwise made
or found to be imperfect, patch or replace the imperfect portion of the surface with matching material.
2. Provide adequate support or substrate for patching of finishes.
3. If the imperfect surface was a painted or coated one, re -paint or re -coat the patched portion in such a way
that uniform color and texture over the entire surface results.
4. If the surrounding surface cannot be matched, re -paint or re -coat the entire surface.
C. Quality:
1. In the sections of the product and execution of specifications which follow these general requirements, no
concerted attempt has been made to describe each of the various existing products that must be used to
patch, match, extend or replace existing work. Obtain all such products in time to complete the work on
schedule. Such products shall be provided in quality which is in no way inferior to the existing products.
2. The quality of the products that existing in the buildings, as apparent during pre -bid site visits, shall serve
as the specification requirement for strength, appearance, and other characteristics.
D. Transitions:
1. Where new work abuts or finishes flush with existing work, make the transition as smooth and workmanlike
as possible. Patched work shall match existing adjacent work in texture and appearance so as to make
the patch or transition invisible to the eye.
2. Where masonry, or other finished surface is cut in such a way that a smooth transition with new work is not
possible, terminate the existing surface in a neat fashion along a straight line at a natural line of division
and provide trim appropriate to the finished surface.
3. Where two or more spaces are indicated to become one space, rework floors and ceilings so that horizontal
planes, without breaks, steps or bulkheads result
4. In cases of extreme change of level (3" or more), obtain instructions from Architect as to method of making
transition. Either stepping, bulkheading, encasement, ramping, sloping or change of transition line shall
be employed, or a combination of these, as directed in each case by the Architect.
E. Matching:
1. Restore existing work that is damaged during construction to a condition equal to its condition at the time
of the start of the work.
2. At locations in existing areas where partitions are removed, patch the floors, walls, and ceilings with finish
materials to match adjacent finishes.
3. Finish patches to produce uniform finish and texture over entire area. When finish cannot be matched,
refinish entire surface to nearest intersections.
3.06 REPAIR
A. Replace work damaged in the course of alterations, except at areas approved by the Architect for repair.
B. Where full removal of extensive amounts of almost -suitable work would be needed to replace damaged portions,
then filling, spackling, straightening, and similar repair techniques, followed by full painting or other finishing,
will be permitted.
C. If the repaired work is not brought up to the standard for newwork, the Architect will direct that it be cut out and
replaced with new work.
3.07 FIRESTOPPING
A. Where existing partitions or walls are penetrated by new work, seal around penetrating conduit or sleeve with
approved and listed safing.
ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES
VLK Architects, 2009 01 3500 - 3 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
3.08 CLEANING
A. In addition to cleaning specified in SECTION 01 7413 -PROGRESS CLEANING clean Owner -occupied areas
of work daily.
END OF SECTION
ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES
VLK Architects, 2009 01 3500 - 4 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 014100
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 CODES
A. Where references are made on drawings or specifications to codes, they shall be considered an integral part
of the contract documents as minimum standards. Nothing contained in the contract documents shall be so
construed as to be in conflictwith any law, bylawor regulation of the municipal, state, federal orother authorities
having jurisdiction.
B. Perform work in compliance with all City of College Station ordinances and requirements.
1.02 GOVERNING LAWS
A. Additional information with legal implications regarding applicable governing laws and jurisdictions can be found
in the conditions of the contract.
1.03 PERMITTING
A. Contractor shall, without additional expense to Owner, obtain necessary licenses and permits, and be
responsible for complying with any federal, state, county and municipal laws, codes and regulations applicable
to the performance of the work, including, but not limited to, any laws or regulations requiring the use of licensed
contractors to perform parts of the work.
END OF SECTION
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
VLK Architects, 2009 01 4100 - 1 2737.03
SECTION 014200
REFERENCES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 INDUSTRY STANDARDS
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the contract documents include more stringent requirements, applicable
construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the contract
documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the contract documents by reference.
B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the contract documents.
C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on project must be familiar with industry standards
applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the contract
documents.
1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly
from publication source.
D. Abbreviations and Acronyms for Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in
specifications or other contract documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and
regulations in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and web -site addresses are subject to change and
are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the contract documents.
ADAAG
Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)
800.872.2253
Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities
202.272.0080
Available from Access Board
www.access-board.gov
CRD
Handbook for Concrete and Cement
601.634.2355
Available from Army Corps of Engineers Waterway
Experiment Station
www.wes.arm.mil
DOD
Department of Defense Military Specifications and Standards
215.697.6257
Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point
www.dodssp.daps.mil
FED -STD
Federal Standard
(See FS)
FS
Federal Specification
215.697.6257
Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point
www.dodssp.daps.mil
Available from General Services Administration
202.501.1021
www.fss.gsa.gov
Available from National Institute of Building Sciences
202.289.7800
www.nibs.org
ICC-ES
ICC Evaluation Services, Inc.
800.423.6587
www.icc-es.org
562.699.0543
MIL
See MILSPEC
MIL -STD
See MILSPEC
MILSPEC
Military Specification and Standards
215.697.6257
Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point
www.dodssp.daps.mil
TAS
Texas Accessibility Standards
512.463.3211
P.O. Box 12157
Austin, TX 78711
www.license.state.b(.us/ab/abtas.htm
REFERENCES
VLK Architects, 2009 01 4200 - 1
2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
1.02 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS
A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in specifications or
other contract documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the
following list. Names, telephone numbers, and web -site addresses are subject to change and
are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the contract documents.
AA Aluminum Association, Inc. (The) 202.862.5100
www.aluminum.org
AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association 847.303.5664
www.aamanet.org
AASHTO American Association of State Highway 202.624.5800
and Transportation Officials
www.transportation.org
ACI
ACllnternational
248.848.3700
(American Concrete Institute)
www.aci-int.org
AGA
American Gas Association
202.824.7000
www.aga.org
AISC
American Institute of Steel Construction
800.644.2400
www.aisc.org
312.670.2400
AISI
American Iron and Steel Institute
202.452.7100
www.steel.org
ANSI
American National Standards Institute
202.293.8020
www.ansi.org
APA
APA-The Engineered Wood Association
253.565.6600
www.apawood.org
ASHRAE
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and
404.636.8400
Air Conditioning Engineers
www.ashrae.org
ASTM
ASTM International
610.832.9585
(American Society for Testing and Materials International)
www.astm.org
AWI
Architectural Woodwork Institute
800.449.8811
www.awinet.org
703.733.0600
AWPA
American Wood -Preservers' Association
334.874.9800
www.awpa.com
AWS
American Welding Society
800.443.9353
www.aws.org
305.443.9353
BHMA
Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association
212.297.2122
www.buildershardware.com
BIA
Brick Industry Association (The)
703.620.0010
www.bia.org
CISCA
Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association
630.584.1919
www.cisca.org
CLFMI
Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute
301.596.2583
www.chainlinkinfo.org
CRSI
Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute
847.517.1200
www.crsi.org
REFERENCES
VLK Architects, 2009 01 4200 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
DHI
Door and Hardware Institute
703.222.2010
www.dhi.org
FM
Factory Mutual System
(See FMG)
FMG
FM Global
401.275.3000
(Formerly: FM - Factory Mutual System)
www.fmglobal.com
GA
Gypsum Association
202.289.5440
www.gypsum.org
GANA
Glass Association of North America
785.271.0208
www.glasswebsite.com
HMMA
Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association
(See NAAMM)
HPVA
Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association
703.435.2900
www.hpva.org
IGCC
Insulating Glass Certification Council
315.646.2234
www.igcc.org
IGMA
Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance (The)
613.233.1510
www.igmaonline.org
MBMA
Metal Building Manufacturers Association
216.241.7333
www.mbma.com
MFMA
Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association
847.480.9138
www.mapiefloor.org
MFMA
Metal Framing Manufacturers Association
312.644.6610
www.metalframingmfg.org
MIA
Masonry Institute of America
440.250.9222
www.marble-institute.com
NAAMM
National Association of Architectural
312.332.0405
Metal Manufacturers
www.naamm.org
NCMA
National Concrete Masonry Association
703.713.1900
www.ncma.org
NeLMA
Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association
207.829.6901
www.nelma.org
NEMA
National Electrical Manufacturers Association
703.841.3200
www.nema.org
NFPA
NFPA (National Fire Protection Association)
800.344-3555
www.nfpa.org
617.770-3000
NFRC
National Fenestration Rating Council
301.589.1776
www.nfrc.org
NHLA
National Hardwood Lumber Association
800.933.0318
www.natlhardwood.org
901.377.1818
NLGA
National Lumber Grades Authority
604.524.2393
www.niga.org
NOFMA
National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association
901.526.5016
www.nofma.org
REFERENCES
VLK Architects, 2009 01 4200 - 3
2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
NRCA
National Roofing Contractors Association
800.323.9545
www.nrGa.net
847.299.9070
NTMA
National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association, Inc.
800.323.9736
www.ntma.com
540.751.0930
NWW DA
National Wood Window and Door Association
(See WDMA)
PCI
Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute
312.786.0300
www.pci.org
PDCA
Painting and Decorating Contractors of America
800.332.7322
www.pdca.com
314.514.7322
SDI
Steel Deck Institute
847.462.1930
www.sdi.org
SDI
Steel Door Institute
440.899.0010
www.steeldoor.org
SEFA
Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association
516.294.6424
www.sefalabs.com
SGCC
Safety Glazing Certification Council
315.646.2234
www.sgcc.org
SIGMA
Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association
(See IGMA)
SJI
Steel Joist Institute
843.626.1995
www.stee[joist.org
SMACNA
Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning
703.803.2980
Contractors' National Association
www.smacna.org
SPIB
Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (The)
850.434.2611
www.spib.org
TCA
Tile Council of America, Inc.
864.646.8453
www.tifeusa.com
TPI
Truss Plate Institute, Inc.
608.833.5900
www.tpinst.org
UL
Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
800.285.4476
www.ul.com
847.272.8800
USGBC
U.S. Green Building Council
202.828.7422
www.usgbc.org
WCLIB
West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau
800.283.1486
www.wclib.org
503.639.0651
WDMA
Window & Door Manufacturers Association
800.223.2301
(Formerly. NWWA - National Wood Window
847.299.5200
and Door Association)
www.wdma.com
WWPA
Western Wood Products Association
503.224.3930
www.wwpa.org
REFERENCES
VLK Architects, 2009 01 4200 - 4 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
B. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in specifications or other
contract documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list.
Names, telephone numbers, and web -site addresses are subject to change and are believed
to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the contract documents.
BOCA BOCA International, Inc.
(See ICC)
CABO Council of American Building Officials
(See ICC)
IAPMO International Association of Plumbing 909.472.4100
and Mechanical Officials
www.iapmo.org
ICBO International Conference of Building Officials
(See ICC)
ICC International Code Council 703.931.4533
(Formerly: CABO - Council of American
Building Officials)
www.iccsafe.org
SBCCI Southern Building Code Congress International, Inc.
(See ICC)
C. Federal GovernmentAgencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in specifications
or other contract documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the
following list. Names, telephone numbers, and web -site addresses are subject to change and
are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the contract documents.
CE Army Corps of Engineers
www.usace.army.mil
CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission 800.638.2772
www.cpsc.gov 301.504.6816
EPA Environmental Protection Agency 202.272.0167
www.epa.gov
OSHA Occupational Safety & Health Administration 800.321.6742
www.osha.gov 202.693.1999
PART 2 - PRODUCTS & PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not applicable.
END OF SECTION
REFERENCES
VLK Architects, 2009 01 4200 - 5 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 01 4500
QUALITY CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes
1. Quality control of products and workmanship.
2. Manufacturer's instructions.
3. Manufacturer's certificates and field services.
4. Mockups.
B. Related Sections
1. Section 013323 - Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples: Feld samples. Submittal of manufacturer's
instructions.
2. Section 014200 - References.
3. Section 014523 - Testing and Inspection Services.
4. Section 016200 - Product Options.
5. Individual Specifications Sections: Mockups required.
1.02 DESCRIPTION
A. Maintain quality control over supervision, subcontractors, suppliers, manufacturers, products, services,
workmanship, and site conditions, to produce work in accordance with Contract Documents.
1.03 WORKMANSHIP
A. Complywith industry standards of the region exceptwhen more restrictive tolerances or specified requirements
indicate more rigid standards or more precise workmanship.
B. Provide suitably qualified personnel to produce work of specified quality.
C. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration,
and racking.
D. Provide finishes to match approved samples.
1.04 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS
A. Require compliance with instructions in full detail, including each step in sequence.
B. Should instruction conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect/Engineer before
proceeding.
1.05 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATES
A. When required in individual Specifications section, submit manufacturer's certificate, in duplicate, certifying that
products meet or exceed specified requirements, executed by responsible officer.
1.06 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES
A. When required in individual Specifications section, have manufacturer or his authorized representative provide
qualified representative to observe field conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of
workmanship, start-up of equipment test, adjust, and balance of equipment as applicable, and to make written
report of observations and recommendations to Architect.
B. Individuals to report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that are
supplemental or contrary to manufacturers' written instructions.
C. Submit report in duplicate within 30 days of observation to Architect/Engineer for review.
1.07 MOCKUPS
A. Tests will be performed under provisions of SECTION 014523 - TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES.
QUALITY CONTROL
VLK Architects, 2009 01 4500 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
B. Assemble and erect complete, with specified attachment and anchorage devices, flashings, seals, and finishes.
C. Acceptable mockups in place may be retained in completed work.
1.08 FIELD SAMPLES
A. Install field samples at the site as required by individual specification sections for review.
B. Acceptable samples represent a quality level for the work.
C. Where field sample is specified in individual sections to be removed, clear area after field sample has been
accepted by Architect/Engineer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS & PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not applicable.
END OF SECTION
QUALITY CONTROL
VLK Architects, 2009 01 4500 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station independent School District
SECTION 014523
TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES (BY OWNER)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Requirements Included: Owner provided materials testing laboratory services.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Terms and Conditions: Inspections, testing, and approvals required by public authorities.
2. Section 014500 - Contract Quality Control: Manufacturer's certificates.
3. Section 01 7839 - Project Record Documents.
4. Individual Specifications Sections: Inspections and tests required, and standards for testing.
1.02 SELECTION AND PAYMENT
A. Owner will employ services of an independent materials testing laboratory to perform specified inspection and
testing and will pay for these services directly to the testing laboratory.
B. Employment of testing laboratory shall in no way relieve Contractor of obligation to perform work in accordance
with requirements of contract documents. Contractor will pay all testing required by local authorities having
jurisdiction.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Laboratory shall comply with requirements of ASTM E 329 and ASTM D 3740 and provide certifications to this
effect.
B. Laboratory shall maintain a full-time registered Engineer on staff to review specific tests required by this
specification.
C. Laboratory shall be authorized to operate in State in which project is located.
D. Testing equipment shall be calibrated to ensure accurate results and values in order to ensure that test results
are true and valid, and at intervals with devices of an accuracy traceable to either NBS Standards or accepted
values of natural physical constants.
1.04 LABORATORY RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Provide qualified personnel at site after due notice from the contractor; cooperate with Architect, Contractor, and
appropriate public authorities having jurisdiction in performance of services.
B. Perform specified inspection, sampling, and testing of products in accordance with latest, up-to-date standards.
C. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of contract documents.
D. Promptly notify Architect, appropriate consultants, Contractor, Owner, and authority having jurisdiction of
observed irregularities or non-conformance of work or products.
E. Perform additional inspections and tests required by Architect, Owner, Contractor, or authority having
jurisdiction.
1.05 LABORATORY REPORTS
A. After each inspection and test, promptly submit two copies of laboratory report to Architect, one to applicable
consultant, one to Owner, one to Contractor, and one to City. Include: Date issued, project title and number,
name of inspector, date and time of sampling or inspection, weather conditions, identification of product and
specifications section, location in the project, type of inspection ortest, date of test, results of tests, and specific
indication of conformance, or lack of such, with contract documents. When requested by Arch itect(E ng in eer,
provide interpretation of test results.
1.06 LIMITS ON TESTING LABORATORY AUTHORITY
A. Laboratory may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of contract documents.
TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES (BY OWNER)
VLK Architects, 2009 01 4523 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
B. Laboratory may not approve or accept any portion of the work.
C. Laboratory may not assume any duties of Contractor.
D. Laboratory has no authority to stop work.
1.07 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Deliver to laboratory at designated location adequate samples of materials proposed to be used which require
testing, together with proposed mix designs.
B. Cooperate with laboratory personnel, and ensure ready access to work and to manufacturer's facilities, if
requested by testing lab.
C. Provide incidental labor and facilities for access to work to be tested, to obtain and handle samples at the site,
or at source of products to be tested, in order to facilitate tests and inspections, and for storage and curing of
test samples.
D. Notify laboratory of material sourcesand furnish lab -determined necessary quantities of representative samples
of materials proposed for use which are required to be tested.
E. Notify Architect and laboratory 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring inspection and testing
services. Cancel notifications in a timely manner if items or systems are not ready for inspection as intended.
Reimburse Owner for trip charges when cancellation notifications are not made in a timely fashion.
F. Advise laboratory in a timely fashion to complete required inspection and testing prior to subsequent work being
performed.
G. Reimburse Owner for all subsequent re -testing of products or systems found to be defective or otherwise not
in accordance with specification requirements, and for any overtime pay required as a result of any inspection
requirements that may fall outside of normal job -site weekday work schedule. Remove rejected products or
work and replace with products or work of specified quality.
H. Notification of Source Change: The Contractorshall be responsible for notifying the Owner, Architect, Engineer,
and Testing Laboratory when the sauce of any material is changed after the original tests or inspections have
been made.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not applicable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EARTHWORK (SITE GENERAL)
A. Make necessary soil tests (Atterbe►g Limit Series ASTM D 4318 and ASTM D 698 Standard Proctor) to
determine moisture content and density of existing subgrade. Perform necessary soil tests (Atterberg Limit
Series and ASTM D 698 Standard Proctorfor each type of imported fill) to determine the moisture content and
to inspect and test the placement of additional fill lifts to verify that all fill materials used are in accordance with
the specifications for that use. Perform one field density test (ASTM D 2922 and ASTM D 3017) per 5,000 S.F.
of site area in the area affected on each lift prior to placement of additional fill material.
B. Imported Topsoil Tests: Testing for topsoil quality compliance shall be performed by the Testing Laboratory.
3.02 PAVING OR SPECIAL SURFACE SUBGRADE PREPARATION
A. Perform one subgrade in -place density test per 7,500 S.F. of subgrade, after subgrade preparation, in
accordance with ASTM D 2922 and ASTM D 3017. Perform tests within 48 hours of pavement construction.
B. Pulverization tests on lime subgrade, TEX101 E, Part III, at same frequency as density tests.
3.03 FORMWORK, REINFORCING STEEL AND INSERTS
A. Make general inspection of formwork.
B. Prior to each concrete pour, inspect fabrication and bending of bars, bar sizes, spacing, placement and tying
in accordance with ACI 315.
TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES (BY OWNER)
VLK Architects, 2009 01 4523 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
C. Prior to each concrete pour, inspect positioning of steel inserts and assemblies, sizes, and spacing, and inspect
fusion -welded anchors and sheer connectors.
3.04 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE
A. Design Mixes:
1. At the beginning of the work, Contractor shall submit proposed concrete mixes for review by the Architect,
structural engineering consultant, and testing laboratory, including the sieve analysis of fine and course
aggregate ASTM C 136, dry rodded weight of coarse aggregate - ASTM C 29, and the specific gravity (bulk
saturated surface dry), of fine and coarse aggregates ASTM C 127 and C 128.
2. The testing laboratory will submit their findings to the structural consultant, who will subsequently forward
this information, with their review of the submittals, to the Architect.
3. Contractor shall not mix concrete for placing in the work until confirmation laboratory reports are supplied
to reflect that each proposed mix will develop the strength required. Successful past history in accordance
with AC1318 will be satisfactory.
B. Test Cylinders: Make at least one (1) test of each day's pouring of concrete or each 100 cubic yards, whichever
is the least, on each different portion or section of the work. Mold and cure specimens in accordance with ASTM
C 31, and test in accordance with ASTM C 39. Test cylinders shall be made and tested by the laboratory.
Footings, walls, and floor systems constitute different sections. Each test shall consist of four (4) specimens,
one (1) of which shall be broken at seven (7) days, two (2) at twenty-eight (28) days and one held in reserve.
Determine temperature and air content for each set of test cylinders in accordance with ASTM C 231.
Field Quality Control:
1. Determine slump for each concrete strength test and whenever consistency of concrete varies, in
accordance with ASTM C 143.
2. Monitor and record addition of water to concrete and length of time concrete is allowed to remain in truck.
3. Verify delivery tickets indicating class of concrete, amount of water added during initial batching, and time
initial batching occurred.
4. Monitorwork being performed in accordance with ACI (American Concrete Institute) recommendations as
a standard of quality.
5. Reference SECTION 03 3000 - CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE for additional requirements.
D. Source Quality Control: An independent testing laboratory representative shall periodically inspect and control
concrete mixing and loading of transit mix trucks at batch plant at intervals appropriate to monitor quality of
material issued on job.
3.05 SMOKE TEST OF DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING
A. Test to check for joint leakage in the sanitary sewer system and vent system.
3.06 OTHER WORK REQUIRING TESTS
A. Referto individual sections covered under Divisions 22, 23, and 26 for other work requiring tests by independent
testing laboratory.
END OF SECTION
TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES (BY OWNER)
VLK Architects, 2009 01 4523 - 3 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 01 5000
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
1.01 GENERAL
A. Provide temporary facilities and controls needed for the work including, but not limited to those described in the
Articles below.
B. Maintain temporary facilities and controls as long as needed for safe and proper completion of the work.
1.02 ACCESS
A. Provide adequate access to and temporary roads to the site of the building if required for the prosecution of the
work.
B. Provide and maintain access to fire hydrants, free of obstructions.
1.03 FIELD OFFICE
A. Provide and maintain a weathertight temporary field office equipped with adequate illumination; with glazed
operable windows; with smooth tables for perusal of drawings and specifications; and with plan rack and metal
legal size four -drawer filing cabinet. During cold weather the field offices shall be equipped with a heating
device to maintain 65°F. temperature during the workday. During hot weather the offices shall be equipped with
an air conditioning device to maintain temperature below 80°F. Provide and pay for fuel and electric energy.
In addition to the above listed equipment, provide a space to accommodate the site meetings and have a
layout/conference table at 28" height and chairs for 12 people. Upon completion of the project, remove offices
from the premises.
1.04 TELEPHONES AND ELECTRONIC COMMUNICATION SERVICE
A. Provide telephones/mobile phones in the field office. Telephone shall be in operation from the commencement
of work until the acceptance of the building. Contractor shall pay for installation, maintenance, and removal of
telephone and for all use charges.
B. Provide facsimile (fax) machine in the field office. Fax machine shall be in operation from the commencement
of work until the acceptance of the building. Contractor shall pay for installation, maintenance, and removal of
telephone line and for all use charges.
C. Electronic Communication Service: Provide a computer, printer, high-speed data connection, and internet
service as required for the Contractor to maintain internet access and e-mail correspondence.
1. The Architect's project management system is Projectmates by Systemates, which can be accessed by
logging in at the following website: www.vlkprojects.com. Contractor shall utilize this system for all formal
and informal correspondence with the Architect and Architect's Consultants, including E-Mails, Requests
for Information, Proposals, Submittals, Submittal Transmittals, Meeting Minutes (for regularly scheduled
meetings), and Warranty Responses (if warranty items are submitted in the system). In addition,
Subcontractor Lists, Project Schedules, Schedule of Values and other documents requiring submission
shall be uploaded in pdf, Word, or Excel format by the Contractor to the appropriate location in
Projectmates. At the Contractor's option, Pay Applications, Project Schedules, and Transmittals, may be
created or imported into the system, as well.
2. While the project management system is very user friendly and easyto learn, Architect will provide informal
training for the Contractor as necessary to expedite the Contractor's familiarity with the program.
3. Contractor shall pay for installation, maintenance, and removal of high-speed data connection and for all
use charges.
1.05 TEMPORARY ELECTRICAL SERVICE
A. Existing Building Areas:
1. At all locations, the Contractor may utilize building electrical power to the extent existing power may be
suitable for construction operations. The contractor shall make all tie-ins and shall maintain utility service
in all occupied areas. Damage, if any, caused by the Contractor use or tie-ins shall be immediately
corrected by the Contractor to as -new conditions. Owner shall pay only the energy charges.
a. Provide GFCI adapters since existing circuits may not be protected.
2. The Contractor shall provide and maintain electrical power to points in the building convenient for and
available to all trades, including mechanical and other subcontractors, so that power may be secured
anywhere in the building with no more than a 100 ft. extension cord. Energy charges for power taken from
existing building electrical system shall be paid by the Owner.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
VLK Architects, 2009 01 5000 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
1.06 TEMPORARY LIGHTING
A. Provide and maintain temporary lighting inside the building for safe and adequate working conditions throughout
all areas where work of any kind is being performed. Provide at least 1 /2 watt of incandescent lighting for each
square foot of space. Where practical, place temporary lights in the locations where the permanent fighting
fixtures are to be installed.
1.07 TEMPORARY HEAT
A. Provide necessary heat during the course of construction, including equipment, fuel and attendance where
required. Equipment for temporary heating shall be of a non -smudging type. The permanent heating system
may be used for temporary heat, when installed. Upon completion and before acceptance of the building,
Contractor shall repair all damage caused by such temporary use and shall clean all filters.
B. When the outside temperature is below freezing, inside of the building shall be kept at or above 40°F. at all
times. While painting and finishing are in progress, the temperature shall be kept at or above 60°F. Contractor
shall make good all damage caused by insufficient heat.
1.08 TEMPORARY VENTILATION
A. Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent accumulation of dust,
fumes, vapors, or gases.
B. Utilize existing ventilation equipment Extend and supplement equipment with temporary fan units as required
to maintain clean air for construction operations.
1.09 TEMPORARY WATER SERVICE
A. Provide and maintain a temporarywater supply during the course of construction and pay water bill and meter
installation or "tap" fee, if any. Include necessary piping and hose connections. Take precautions to avoid
spattering and spilling water in the building.
1.10 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES
A. Provide and maintain adequate sanitary toilet facilities on the project site. The toilet facilities shall meet the
requirements of the public authorities having jurisdiction and their use strictly enforced. Sanitary sewer "tap"
fee and monthly use fees, if any, shall be paid by Contractor if temporary facilities are connected to city sanitary
sewer.
1.11 REFUSE
A. The Contractor shall provide refuse removal service at all times.
1.12 PROTECTIVE FACILITIES
A. Provide and maintain temporary guardrails, handrails and covers for floor, roof and wall openings, vertical shafts
and stairways. If movement of the protective facilities is required by a Subcontractor to perform his work, it will
be the responsibility of that Subcontractor to give prior notification to the Contractor and to replace the protective
facilities in a satisfactory manner.
B. Provide and maintain, as perCity of College Station requirements, fire lane(s) and other required fire protection
at the appropriate time and sequence of construction.
1.13 BARRICADES
A. Provide and maintain lighted barricades and fences for the public protection in accordance with requirements
of the local City ordinances.
1.14 TEMPORARY FENCING
A. Provide and maintain for the duration of construction a temporary fence of design and type needed to prevent
entry onto the work by the public.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
VLK Architects, 2009 01 5000 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
1.15 TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTION
A. Contractor shall provide adequate fire extinguishers on the premises during the course of construction, of the
type and size recommended to control fires, which may result from the particular work being performed in
accordance with the local Fire Marshal and Fire Codes.
B. Provide supervision of welding operations, combustion type temporary heating units, and similar sources of
ignition for possible fires.
1. Keep work area free of combustible material.
2. A fire watch consisting of at least one man furnished by Contractor with a fire extinguisher in hand and with
no other assigned duties, shall be posted to stand by and observe for potential hazards while welding or
cutting is being done. Equip fire watch with suitable personal eye protection and fire extinguishers.
3. At completion of work operations, immediately inspect work and adjacent area for hazards. Reinspect
work for hazards at 1/2 hour and at one hour after completion of welding and cutting operations.
C. No smoking shall be allowed within the building or on the site. Post NO SMOKING signs in areas where work
is in progress.
1.16 ENCLOSURES
A. Provide temporary weathertight closures of openings in exterior surfaces to provide acceptable working
conditions and protection for materials, to allow for temporary heating, and to prevent entry of unauthorized
persons. Provide doors with self -closing hardware and locks.
B. Provide temporary partitions and ceilings as required to separate work areas from Owner occupied areas, to
prevent penetration of dust and moisture into Owner occupied areas, to prevent damage to existing areas and
equipment. Construction: Framing and sheet materials with closed joints and sealed edges at intersections
with existing surfaces; STC rating 35 in accordance with ASTM E 90; Flame Spread Rating of25 in accordance
with ASTM E 84; paint surfaces exposed to view in Owner occupied areas.
1.17 WATER CONTROL
A. Grade site to drain. Maintain excavations free of water. Provide and operate pumping equipment.
B. Protect site from puddling or running water.
1.18 CLEANING DURING CONSTRUCTION
A. Control accumulation of waste materials and rubbish; periodically dispose of off site.
B. Clean interior areas prior to start of finish work, maintain areas free of dust and other contaminants during
finishing operations.
C. Refer to SECTION 01 7413 - PROGRESS CLEANING for additional cleaning requirements.
1.19 REMOVAL OF UTILITIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLS
A. Remove temporary materials, equipment, services, and construction prior to substantial completion inspection.
B. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary facilities. Remove underground
installations to a depth of 2; grade site as indicated. Restore existing facilities used during construction to
specified, or to original, condition.
1.20 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGNS
D. No signs or advertising of any kind, except precautionary warning signs, will be permitted.
END OF SECTION
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
VLK Architects, 2009 01 5000 - 3 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 016200
PRODUCT OPTIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Administrative and procedural requirements for product options and substitutions.
B. Related Sections
1. Section 013100 - Project Management and Coordination: Coordination of construction.
2. Section 013323 - Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples: Product data submittals.
3. Section 014200 - References: Applicability of specified reference standards.
4. Section 01 7823 - Operation and Maintenance Data.
5. Section 01 7839 - Project Record Documents.
1.02 PRODUCT LIST
A. Within 30 days after date of contract, submit to the Architect a list of products and materials which are proposed
for substitution per SECTION 01 3323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES.
1.03 CONTRACTOR'S OPTIONS
A. For products specified only by reference standards, select any product meeting standards, byany manufacturer.
B. For products specified by naming several products or manufacturers, followed by the words "NO
SUBSTITUTIONS", select one of the products/manufacturers named.
C. For products specified by naming only one product and manufacturer, there is no option unless a substitution
is approved as specified below.
D. For products specified by naming only one product and manufacturer, followed by the words "NO
SUBSTITUTIONS", there is no option.
1.04 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Requests for substitution to material, products, or equipment instead of those specified will be considered if
received at least 10 days prior to the bid date. Substitution request received within 10 days of the bid date will
be returned without review. Refer to Substitution Request (During the Bidding Phase) form attached to this
section.
B. Within 30 days after Notice to Proceed, Architect will consider additional formal requests from the Contractor
for substitutions of products in place of those specified. Refer to Substitution Request (After the Bidding Phase)
form attached to this section.
C. Submit a separate request for each substitution on a copy of the "SUBSTITUTION REQUEST" form, attached
to this section. Include in request:
1. Complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with contract documents.
2. For products:
a. Product identification, including manufacturer's name and address.
b. Manufacturer's literature, including product description, performance and test data and reference
standards.
c. Samples, if applicable.
d. Name and address of similar projects on which product was used and date of installation.
3. For construction methods:
a. Detailed written descriptions of proposed method.
b. Complete drawings illustrating methods or revisions.
4. Itemized Comparison of qualities of proposed substitution with product or method specified.
5. Changes required in other elements of work because of substitution.
6. Effect on construction schedule.
D. Request for substitution constitutes a representation that Contractor:
1. Has personally investigated proposed product or method and determined that it is equal to or superior in
all respects to that specified.
2. Will provide same warranties for substitution as for product or method specified.
PRODUCT OPTIONS
VLK Architects, 2009 01 6200 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
3. Will coordinate installation of accepted substitution into the work, making such changes as maybe required
for the work to be complete in all respects.
4. Waives all claims for additional cost, under his responsibility and related to substitution, which subsequently
become apparent.
E. Substitutions will not be considered if:
1. They are indicated or implied on shop drawings or product data submittals without formal request submitted
in accordance with this section.
2. Acceptance will require substantial revision of contract documents.
F. If substitution is not approved or accepted, Contractor shall furnish specified product or method at no additional
cost to the Owner.
G. Acceptance of a proposed substitution prior to the bid date will be in the form of an addendum.
1.05 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. Submit five copies of request for substitution.
B. Architect will review Contractor's requests for substitutions with reasonable promptness.
C. For accepted products, submit shop drawings, product data, and samples under provisions of SECTION
01 3323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES.
END OF SECTION
PRODUCT OPTIONS
VLK Architects, 2009 01 6200 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SUBSTITUTION REQUEST
(During the Bidding Phase)
(submit two copies -must be received 10 days prior to bid/proposal date)
Project: Substitution Request Number:
From:
To: Date:
A/E Project Number.
Re: Contract For.
Specification Title: Description:
Section: Page: Article/Paragraph:
Proposed Substitution:
Manufacturer:
Trade Name:
Address: Phone:
Model No.:
Attached data includes product description, specifications, drawings, custom color/pre-selected color availability, photographs, and
performance and test data adequate for evaluation of the request; applicable portions of the data are clearly identified.
Attached data also includes a description of changes to the Contract Documents that the proposed substitution will require for its proper
installation.
The Undersigned certifies:
• Proposed substitution has been fully investigated and determined to be equal or superior in all respects to specified product.
• Same warranty will be furnished for proposed substitution as for specified product.
• Same maintenance service and source of replacement parts, as applicable, is available.
• Proposed substitution will have no adverse effect on other trades and will not affect or delay progress schedule.
• Proposed substitution does not affect dimensions and functional clearances.
• Payment will be made for changes to building design, including A/E/ design, detailing, and construction costs caused by the
substitution.
Submitted by:
Signed by:
Finn:
Address:
Telephone:
A/E REVIEW AND ACTION
❑ Substitution approved - Submit bid/proposal based on accepted substitution.
❑ Substitution approved as noted - Submit bid/proposal based on accepted substitution - as noted.
❑ Substitution rejected - Submit bid/proposal for specified materials.
❑ Substitution Request received too late - Submit bid/proposal for specified materials.
Signed by:
Date:
Supporting Data Attached: ❑ Drawings ❑ Product Data ❑ Samples ❑ Tests ❑ Reports ❑
PRODUCT OPTIONS
VLK Architects, 2009 01 6200 - 3 2737.03
CATE Renovations
ABM Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SUBSTITUTION REQUEST
(After the Bidding Phase)
(submit five copies - must be received not later than 30 days after Notice to Proceed)
Project: Substitution Request Number:
From:
To: Date:
A/E Project Number:
Re: Contract For:
Specification Title: Description:
Section: Page: Article/Paragraph:
Proposed Substitution:
Manufacturer: Address:
Trade Name:
Installer: Address:
History: ❑ New product ❑ 2-5 years old ❑ 5-10 years old ❑ More than 10 years old
Differences between proposed substitution and specified product:
Phone:
Model No.:
Phone:
For finish materials and pre -finished equipment, list the colors available for the specified item and the colors available
for the proposed substitution.
❑ Point -by -point comparative data attached - REQUIRED BY A/E
Reason for not providing specified item:
Similar Installation:
Project: _
Address:
Architect:
Owner:
Date Installed:
Proposed substitution affects other parts of Work: ❑ No ❑ Yes; explain
Savings to Owner for accepting substitution: _
Proposed substitution changes Contract Time:
❑ No ❑ Yes [Add] [Deduct] days.
Supporting Data Attached: ❑ Drawings ❑ Product Data ❑ Samples ❑ Tests ❑ Reports ❑
PRODUCT OPTIONS
VLK Architects, 2009 01 6200 - 4 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SUBSTITUTION REQUEST - Continued
The Undersigned certifies:
• Proposed substitution has been fully investigated and determined to be equal or superior in all respects to specified
product.
• Same warranty will be furnished for proposed substitution as for specified product.
• Same maintenance service and source of replacement parts, as applicable, is available.
• Proposed substitution will have no adverse effect on other trades and will not affect or delay progress schedule.
• Cost data as stated above is complete. Claims for additional costs related to accepted substitution which may
subsequently become apparent are to be waived.
• Proposed substitution does not affect dimensions and functional clearances.
• Payment will be made for changes to building design, including A/E design, detailing, and construction costs
caused by the substitution.
• Coordination, installation, and changes in the Work as necessary for accepted substitution will be complete in all
respects.
Submitted by:
Signed by:
Firm:
Address:
Telephone:
Attachments:
A/E REVIEW AND ACTION
❑ Substitution approved - Make submittals in accordance with Section 01340.
❑ Substitution approved as noted - Make submittals in accordance with Section 01340.
❑ Substitution rejected - Use specified materials.
❑ Substitution Request received too late - Use specified materials.
Signed by: Date:
Additional Comments: ❑ Contractor ❑ Subcontractor ❑ Supplier ❑ Manufacturer ❑ A/E ❑
PRODUCT OPTIONS
VLK Architects, 2009 01 6200 - 5 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 01 6500
PRODUCT DELIVERY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Requirements Included:
1. Packaging, Transportation.
2. Delivery and Receiving.
3. Product Handling.
B. Related Requirements
1. Section 01 3216 - Construction Progress Schedules.
2. Section 013323 - Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples: Manufacturers' Instructions.
3. Section 01 6600 - Product Storage and Handling Requirements.
4. Individual Sections: Specific requirements for packaging, shipping and handling.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not applicable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PACKAGING, TRANSPORTATION
A. Require supplier to package products in boxes or crates for protection during shipment, handling and storage.
Protect sensitive products against exposure to elements and moisture.
B. Protect sensitive equipment and finishes against impact, abrasion and other damage.
3.02 DELIVERY AND RECEIVING
A. Arrange deliveries of products in accordance with construction progress schedules. Allow time for inspection
prior to installation.
B. Coordinate deliveries to avoid conflict with work and conditions at site; limitations on storage space; availability
of personnel and handling equipment; and Owner's use of premises.
C. Deliver products in undamaged, dry condition, in original unopened containers or packaging with identifying
labels intact and legible.
D. Clearly mark partial deliveries of component parts of equipment to identify equipment and contents to permit
easy accumulation of parts and to facilitate assembly.
E. Immediately on delivery, inspect shipment to assure
1. Product complies with requirements of Contract Documents and reviewed submittals.
2. Quantities are correct.
3. Accessories, and installation hardware are correct.
4. Containers and packages are intact and labels legible.
5. Products are protected and undamaged.
3.03 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling and damage.
B. Provide additional protection during handling to prevent marring and otherwise damaging products, packaging
and surrounding surfaces.
C. Handle product by methods to avoid bending or over -stressing. Lift large and heavy components only at
designated lift points.
END OF SECTION
PRODUCT DELIVERY REQUIREMENTS
VLK Architects, 2009 01 6500 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 016600
PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Requirements Included
1. Storage, General.
2. Enclosed Storage,
3. Exterior Storage.
4. Maintenance of Storage.
B. Related Requirements
I. Section 01 1100 - Summary of Work.
2. Section 015000 - Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls: Storage facilities. Protection of installed
work.
3. Section 016500 - Product Delivery Requirements.
4. Section 01 7839 - Project Record Documents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not applicable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 STORAGE, GENERAL
A. Store products, immediately on delivery, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, with seals and labels
intact. Protect until installed.
B. Arrange storage in a manner to provide access for maintenance of stored items and for inspection.
3.02 ENCLOSED STORAGE
A. Store products, subject to damage by the elements, in substantial weathertight enclosures.
B. Maintain temperature and humidity within ranges stated in manufacturer's instructions.
C. Provide humidity control and ventilation for sensitive products as required by manufacturer's instructions.
D. Store unpacked and loose products on shelves, in bins, or in neat groups of like items.
3.03 EXTERIOR STORAGE
A. Provide substantial platforms, blocking, orskids, to support fabricated products above ground; slope to provide
drainage. Protect products from soiling and staining.
B. For products subject to discoloration or deterioration from exposure to the elements, coverwith impervious sheet
material. Provide ventilation to avoid condensation.
C. Store loose granular materials on clean, solid surfaces such as pavement, or on rigid sheet materials, to prevent
mixing with foreign matter.
D. Provide surface drainage to prevent erosion and ponding of water.
E. Prevent mixing of refuse or chemically injurious materials or liquids.
3.04 MAINTENANCE OF STORAGE
A. Periodically inspect stored products on a scheduled basis.
B. Verify that storage facilities comply with manufacturer's product storage requirements.
C. Verify that manufacturer required environmental conditions are maintained continually.
PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING REQUIREMENTS
VLK Architects, 2009 01 6600 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
D. Verify that surfaces of products exposed to the elements are not adversely affected; that any weathering of
finishes is acceptable under requirements of contract documents.
3.05 MAINTENANCE OF EQUIPMENT STORAGE
A. For mechanical and electrical equipment in long-term storage, provide manufacturer's service instructions to
accompany each item, with notice of enclosed instructions shown on exterior of package.
B. Service equipment on a regularly scheduled basis, maintaining a log of services; submit as a record document.
END OF SECTION
PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING REQUIREMENTS
VLK Architects, 2009 01 6600 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 01 7329
CUTTING AND PATCHING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Requirements and limitations for cutting and patching of work.
B. Related Sections
1. Section 01 1100 - Summary of Work: Work by Owner or by separate contractors.
2. Section 016200 - Product Options.
3. Individual Specifications Sections
a. Cutting and patching incidental to work of the section.
b. Advance notification to other Sections of openings required in work of those sections.
c. Limitations on cutting structural members.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit written request in advance of cutting or alteration which affects
1. Structural integrity of any element of the Project.
2. Integrity of weather -exposed or moisture -resistant element.
3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of any operational element
4. Visual qualities of sight -exposed elements.
5. Work of Owner or separate contractor.
B. Include in request
1. Identification of Project.
2. Location and description of affected work.
3. Necessity for cutting or alteration.
4. Description of proposed work and products to be used.
5. Alternatives to cutting and patching.
6. Effect on work of Owner or separate contractor.
7. Written permission of affected separate contractor.
8. Date and time work will be executed.
1.03 PAYMENT FOR COSTS
A. Costs resulting from ill-timed or defective work, or work not conforming to contract documents, including costs
for additional services of Architect, or other consultants shall be borne by the party responsible for ill-timed,
rejected or non -conforming work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Products: Those required for original installation.
B. For any change in materials, submit request for substitution under provisions of SECTION 01 6200 - PRODUCT
OPTIONS.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Execute cutting, fitting and patching including excavation and fig, to complete work, and to
1. Fit the several parts together, to integrate with other work.
2. Uncover work to install ill-timed work.
3. Remove and replace defective and non -conforming work.
4. Remove samples of installed work for testing.
5. Provide openings in elements of work for penetrations of mechanical and electrical work.
3.02 INSPECTION
A. Inspect existing conditions, including elements subject to damage or movement during cutting and patching.
CUTTING AND PATCHING
VLK Architects, 2009 01 7329 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
B. After uncovering, inspect conditions affecting performance of work.
C. Beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of existing conditions.
3.03 PREPARATION
A. Provide temporary supports to assure structural integrityof surroundings; devices and methods to protect other
portions of Project from damage.
B. Provide protection from elements for areas which may be exposed by uncovering work; maintain excavations
free of water.
C. Maintain excavations free of water.
3.04 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Execute cutting, fitting and patching (including excavation and fill) to complete work.
B. Fit products together, to integrate with other work.
C. Uncover work to install ill-timed work.
D. Remove and replace defective or non -conforming work.
E. Remove samples of installed work for testing when requested.
F. Provide openings in the work for penetration of mechanical and electrical work.
3.05 PERFORMANCE
A. Execute work by methods to avoid damage to other work, and which will provide proper surfaces to receive
patching and finishing.
B. Employ original installerto perform cutting and patching for weather -exposed and moisture -resistant elements,
and sight -exposed surfaces.
C. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic tools not allowed without prior approval.
D. Restore work with new products in accordance with requirements of contract documents.
E. Fit work tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit and other penetrations through surfaces.
F. At penetrations of fire -rated wall, ceiling, or floor construction, completely seal voids with fire -rated packing
material, full thickness of the construction element.
G. Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finishes. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection; for an
assembly, refinish entire unit.
END OF SECTION
CUTTING AND PATCHING
VLK Architects, 2009 01 7329 - 2 2737.03
SECTION 01 7413
PROGRESS CLEANING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
A. Work Included: Throughout the construction period, maintain the building and site in a standard of cleanliness
as described in this section.
B. Related Work: In addition to standards described in this section, comply with requirements for cleaning as
described in other pertinent sections of these specifications.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conduct a daily inspection, and more often if necessary, to verify that requirements for cleanliness are being
met.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 CLEANING MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Provide required personnel, equipment, and materials needed to maintain the specified standard of cleanliness.
2.02 COMPATIBILITY
A. Use only the cleaning materials and equipment which are compatible with the surface being cleaned, as
recommended by the manufacturer of the material.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PROGRESS CLEANING
A. General:
1. Retain stored items in an orderly arrangement allowing maximum access, not impeding traffic or drainage,
and providing required protection of materials.
2. Do not allow accumulation of scrap, debris waste material, and other items not required for construction
of the work.
3. At least twice each month, and more often if necessary, completely remove all scrap, debris, and waste
material from the project site.
4. Provide adequate storage for all items awaiting removal from the project site, observing requirements for
fire protection and protection of the ecology.
B. Site:
1. Daily, and more often if necessary, inspect the site and pick up all scrap, debris, and waste material.
Remove such items to the place designated for their storage.
2. Weekly, and more often if necessary, inspect all arrangements of materials stored on the site. Restack,
tidy, or otherwise service arrangements to meet the requirements of this section.
3. Maintain the site in a neat and orderly condition at all times.
C. Structure:
1. Weekly, and more often if necessary, inspect the structure and pick up all scrap, debris, and waste material.
Remove such items to the place designated for their storage.
2. Weekly, and more often if necessary, sweep interior spaces clean.
a. "Clean", for the purpose of this subparagraph, shall be interpreted as meaning free from dust and other
material capable of being removed by use of reasonable effort and a hand-held broom.
3. As required preparatory to installation of succeeding materials, dean the structure or pertinent portions
thereof to the degree of cleanliness recommended by the manufacturer of the succeeding material, using
equipment and materials required to achieve the necessary cleanliness.
4. Following the installation of finish floor materials, clean the finish floor daily (and more often if necessary)
at all times while work is being performed in the space in which finish materials are installed.
a. "Clean", for the purpose of this subparagraph shall be interpreted as meaning free from foreign material
which, in the opinion of the Architect, may be injurious to the finish floor material.
PROGRESS CLEANING
VLK Architects, 2009 01 7413 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
3.02 FINAL CLEANING
A. "Clean", forthe purpose of this Article, and except as may be specifically provided otherwise, shall be interpreted
as meaning the level of cleanliness generally provide by skilled cleaners using commercial quality building
maintenance equipment and materials.
B. Prior to completion of the work, remove from the project site all tools, surplus materials, equipment, scrap,
debris, and waste. Conduct final progress cleaning as described in this section.
C. Site:
1. Unless otherwise specifically directed by Architect, broom clean paved areas on the site and public paved
areas adjacent to the site.
2. Completely remove resultant debris.
D. Structure:
1. Exterior.
a. Visually inspect exterior surfaces and remove all traces of soil, waste materials, smudges, and other
foreign matter.
b. Remove all traces of splashed materials from adjacent surfaces.
c. If necessary to achieve a uniform degree of cleanliness, hose down the exterior of the structure.
d. In event of stubborn stains not removable with water, Architect may require light sandblasting or other
cleaning at no additional cost to the Owner.
2. Interior:
a. Visually inspect interior surfaces and remove all traces of soil, waste materials, smudges, and other
foreign matter.
b. Remove all traces of splashed material from adjacent surfaces.
c. Remove paint droppings, spots, stains, and dirt from finished surfaces.
3. Glass: Clean inside and outside.
4. Polished Surfaces: To surfaces requiring routine application of buffed polish, apply the polish
recommended by the manufacturer of the material being polished. This does not apply to resilient flooring
surfaces. Reference SECTION 09 6500 - RESILIENT FLOORING for cleaning of resilient flooring.
E. Schedule final cleaning, as approved by the Architect, to enable the Owner to accept a completely clean work.
3.03 CLEANING DURING OWNER'S OCCUPANCY
A. Should the Owner occupy the work, or any portion thereof, prior to its completion by the Contractor and
acceptance by the Owner, responsibilities for interim and final cleaning shall be as determined by the Architect
in accordance with the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction.
END OF SECTION
PROGRESS CLEANING
VLK Architects, 2009 01 7413 - 2 2737.03
SECTION 01 7700
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
A. Section Includes: Administrative and procedural requirements for project closeout, including but not limited to:
1. Inspection procedures.
2. Project record document submittal.
3. Operating and maintenance data submittal, including training sessions for equipment and systems.
4. Submittal of warranties.
5. Submittal of spare parts and maintenance materials.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 01 1100 - Summary of Work: record drawings.
2. Section 01 2100 - Allowances: allowance for indexed electronic archiving of closeout documents.
3. Section 01 3323 - Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples.
4. Section 01 7413 - Progress Cleaning: final cleaning.
5. Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware: keys and keying schedule.
1.02 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A. General: Substantial completion is defined in Paragraph 9.8.1 of the General Conditions.
B. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for certification of substantial completion, complete the
following. List exceptions in the request.
1. In the Application for Payment that coincides with, or first follows, the date substantial completion is
claimed, show 100% completion for the portion of the work claimed as substantially complete. Include
supporting documentation for completion as indicated in these contract documents and a statement
showing an accounting of changes to the contract sum.
a. If 100% completion cannot be shown, include a list of incomplete items, the value of incomplete
construction and reasons the work is not complete.
2. Advise Owner of pending insurance change -over requirements.
3. Submit specific warranties, maintenance agreements, final certifications and similar documents.
4. Obtain and submit releases enabling the Owner unrestricted use of the work and access to services and
utilities; include occupancy permits, operating certificates and similar releases.
5. Submit record drawings, maintenance manuals and similar final record information.
6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra stock and similar items.
7. Make final change -over of permanent locks and transmit keys and keying schedule to the Owner. Advise
the Owners personnel of change -over in security provisions.
8. Complete start-up testing of systems, and training sessions for Owner's operating and maintenance
personnel. Discontinue or change over and remove temporary facilities from the site, along with
construction tools, mock-ups and similar elements.
9. Complete final clean-up requirements, including touch-up painting. Touch-up and otherwise repair and
restore marred exposed finishes.
C. Inspection Procedures: On receipt of a request for inspection, the Architect will either proceed with inspection
or advise the Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. The Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial
Completion following inspection, or advise the Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected
before the certificate will be issued.
1. Architect will repeat the inspection when requested and assured that the work has been substantially
completed.
2. Results of the completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final acceptance.
1.03 FINAL ACCEPTANCE
A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for certification of final acceptance and final
payment, submit the following. List exceptions in the request.
1. Final payment requestwith releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted.
Include certificates of insurance for products and completed operations where required.
2. Updated final statement, accounting for final additional changes to the contract sum.
3. Certified copy of the Architect's final inspection list of items to be completed or corrected, stating that each
item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance, and the list has been endorsed and dated
by the Architect.
4. Consent of surety to final payment.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
VLK Architects, 2009 01 7700 -1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
5. Final Liquidated Damages settlement statement.
6. Evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements.
7. Evidence of Compliance with Requirements of Governing Authorities
a. Certificate of Occupancy.
b. Certificates of Inspection required for mechanical and electrical systems.
8. Operation and Maintenance Data: Under provisions of SECTION 01 7823 - OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE DATA.
9. Warranties and Bonds: Under provisions of SECTION 01 7830 - WARRANTIES AND BONDS.
10. Project Record Documents: Under provisions of SECTION 017839 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS.
11. Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials: Under provisions of SECTION 01 7840 - SPARE PARTS,
OVERAGES AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS.
12. Keys and Keying Schedule: Under provisions of SECTION 08 7100 - DOOR HARDWARE.
13. Evidence of Payment and Release of Liens: In accordance with General Conditions of the Contract for
Construction.
B. Re -inspection Procedures: Architect will re -inspect the work upon receipt of notice that the work, including
inspection list items from earlier inspections, has been complete, except items whose completion has been
delayed because of circumstances acceptable to the Architect.
1. Upon completion of re -inspection, the Architect will advise the Contractor of work that is incomplete or of
obligations that have not been fulfilled but are required for final acceptance.
2. If necessary, re -inspection will be repeated.
C. Reinspection Fees: Should status of completion of work require reinspection by Architect due to failure of work
to comply with Contractor's claims on initial inspection, Owner will deduct the amount of Architect and
appropriate consultants compensation for reinspection services from final payment to Contractor. The
reimbursement transaction shall be executed by change order to the contract.
1.04 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
A. Maintenance Manuals: Organize operating and maintenance data into suitable sets of manageable size. Bind
properly indexed data in three individual heavy-duty 3-1/2", 3-ring vinyl -covered binders, with identification on
front and spine of each binder. Include the following types of information:
1. Emergency instructions.
2. Spare parts list.
3. Copies of warranties.
4. Wiring diagrams.
5. Recommended "turn around" cycles.
6. Inspection procedures.
7. Shop drawings.
8. Fixture lamping schedule.
B. Shop Drawings: Keep and maintain a full set of submittals throughout the construction phase to be submitted
to the Architect with other close-out documents for delivery to the Owner for his permanent record. Set of
submittals shall be delivered to the Architect in cardboard file boxes with string and button type closures.
Organize submittals by CSI divisions, utilizing neatly labeled pressboard dividers to separate the sections.
Neatly label short end of box with project name, contents and duration of construction.
C. Operating and Maintenance Training Sessions: Prepare a written agenda of items to be covered at each
training session. Attendance by Owner's operating and maintenance personnel is mandatory. Notify Owner
not less than 48 hours prior to scheduled training sessions.
1. Arrange for each installer of equipment and systems that requires regular maintenance to meet with the
Owners personnel to provide instruction in proper operation and maintenance. If installers are not
experienced in procedures, provide instruction by manufacturers representatives. Include a detailed review
of the following items:
a. Maintenance manuals.
b. Record documents.
c. Spare parts and materials.
d. Tools.
e. Lubricants.
f. Fuels.
g. Identification systems.
h. Control sequences.
i. Hazards.
j. Cleaning.
k. Warranties and bonds.
I. Maintenance agreements and similar continuing commitments.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
VLK Architects, 2009 01 7700 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
2. Training sessions shall consist of not less than 5 days of not less than 4 hours each day. A copy of
maintenance manuals for equipment or system being demonstrated shall be on hand during training
session. As part of instruction for operating equipment, demonstrate the following procedures:
a. Start-up.
b. Shutdown.
c. Emergency operations.
d. Noise and vibration adjustments.
e. Safety procedures.
f. Economy and efficiency adjustments.
g. Effective energy utilization.
3. Training sessions shall be conducted for:
a. HVAC systems.
b. Energy management controls.
c. Public address system.
d. Fire alarm and smoke detection systems.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS & PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not applicable.
END OF SECTION
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
VLK Architects, 2009 01 7700 - 3 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 01 7823
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Format and content of manuals.
2. Instruction of Owner's personnel.
3. Schedule of submittals.
B. Related Sections
1. Section 013323 - Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples.
2. Section 014500 - Quality Control: Manufacturer's instructions.
3. Section 017700 - Closeout Procedures.
4. Section 017830 - Warranties and Bonds.
5. Section 017839 - Project Record Documents.
6. Individual Specifications Sections: Specific requirements for operation and maintenance data.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Prepare instructions and data by personnel experienced in maintenance and operation of described products.
1.03 FORMAT
A. Prepare data in the form of an instructional manual.
B. Binders: Bind in three individual heavy-duty 8-1/2" x 11" black, three-ring binders with hardback, cleanable,
plastic covers; 3" maximum ring size. When multiple binders are used, correlate data into related consistent
groupings.
C. Cover. Identify each binder with typed or printed title OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS; list
title of project identify subject matter of contents.
D. Arrange content by systems, under section numbers and sequence of table of contents of this project manual.
E. Provide tabbed fly leaf for each separate product and system, with typed description of product and major
component parts of equipment.
F. Text: Manufacturer's printed data, or typewritten data on 20 pound paper.
G. Drawings: Provide with reinforced punched binder tab. Bind in with text; fold larger drawings to size of text
pages.
1.04 CONTENTS, EACH VOLUME
A. Table of Contents: Provide title of project; names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect/Engineer
and Contractor with name of responsible parties; schedule of products and systems, indexed to content of the
volume.
B. For Each Product or System: List names, addresses and telephone numbers of subcontractors and suppliers,
including local source of supplies and replacement parts.
C. Product Data: Mark each sheet to clearly identify specific products and component parts, and data applicable
to installation; delete inapplicable information.
D. Drawings: Supplement product data to illustrate relations of component parts of equipment and systems, to
show control and flow diagrams. Do not use project record documents as maintenance drawings.
E. Typed Text: As required to supplement product data. Provide logical sequence of instructions for each
procedure, incorporating manufacturer's instructions specified in SECTION 014500 - QUALITY CONTROL.
F. Warranties and Bonds: Bind in copy of each.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
VLK Architects, 2009 01 7823 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
1.05 MANUAL FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES
A. Building Products, Applied Materials, and Finishes: Include product data, with catalog number, size,
composition, and color and texture designations. Provide information for re -ordering custom manufactured
products.
B. Instructions for Care and Maintenance: Include manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning agents and
methods, precautions against detrimental agents and methods, and recommended schedule for cleaning and
maintenance.
C. Moisture -protection and Weather -exposed Products: Include product data listing applicable reference
standards, chemical composition, and details of installation. Provide recommendations for inspections,
maintenance, and repair.
D. Additional Requirements: As specified in individual specifications sections.
E. Provide a listing in table of contents for design data, with tabbed fly sheet and space for insertion of data.
1.06 MANUAL FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS
A. Each Item of Equipment and Each System: Include description of unit or system, and component parts. Give
function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. Include performance curves, with engineering
data and tests, and complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts.
B. Panelboard Circuit Directories: Provide electrical service characteristics, controls, and communications.
C. Include as -installed color coded wiring diagrams.
D. Operating Procedures: Include start-up, break-in, and routine normal operating instructions and sequences.
Include regulation, control, stopping, shut -down, and emergency instructions. Include summer, winter, and any
special operating instructions.
E. Maintenance Requirements: Include routine procedures and guide for trouble -shooting; disassembly, repair,
and reassembly instructions; and alignment, adjusting, balancing, and checking instructions.
F. Provide servicing and lubrication schedule, and list of lubricants required.
G. Include manufacturer's printed operation and maintenance instructions.
H. Include sequence of operation by controls manufacturer.
I. Provide original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams required for
maintenance.
J. Provide as -installed control diagrams by controls manufacturer.
K. Provide Contractor's coordination drawings, with as -installed color coded piping diagrams.
L. Provide charts of valve tag numbers, with location and function of each valve, keyed to flow and control
diagrams.
M. Provide list of original manufacturer's spare parts, current prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained
in storage.
N. Additional Requirements: As specified in individual specifications sections.
O. Provide a listing in table of contents for design data, with tabbed fly sheet and space for insertion of data.
1.07 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER PERSONNEL
A. Before final inspection, instruct Owners designated personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of
products, equipment, and systems, at agreed upon times. For equipment requiring seasonal operation, perform
instructions for other seasons within six months.
B. Use operation and maintenance manuals as basis of instruction. Review contents of manual with personnel
in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
VLK Architects, 2009 01 7823 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
C. Prepare and insert additional data in Operation and Maintenance Manual when need for such data becomes
apparent during instruction.
1.08 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit two copies of preliminary draft or proposed formats and outlines of contents before start of work.
Architect/Engineer will review draft and return one copy with comments.
B. For equipment, or component parts of equipment put into service during construction and operated by Owner,
submit documents within 10 days after acceptance.
C. Submit one copy of completed volumes in final form 15 days prior to final inspection. Copy will be returned after
final inspection, with Architect/Engineer comments. Revise content of documents as required prior to final
submittal.
D. Submit two copies of revised volumes of data in final form within 10 days after final inspection.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS & PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not applicable.
END OF SECTION
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
VLK Architects, 2009 01 7823 - 3 2737.03
CATE Renovations
ABM Consolidated High School
College Station independent School District
SECTION 01 7830
WARRANTIES AND BONDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes
1. Preparation and submittal of warranties and bonds.
2. Schedule of submittals.
B. Related Documents/Sections:
1. General Conditions of the Contract for Construction: Performance Bond and Labor and Material Payment
Bonds, Warranty, and Correction of Work.
2. Section 01 7700 - Closeout Procedures.
3. Section 01 7823 - Operation and Maintenance Data.
4. Individual Specifications Sections: Warranties and bonds required for specific products or work.
1.02 FORM OF SUBMITTALS
A. Bind in three individual heavy-duty 8-1/2" x 11" black, three-ring binders, with hardback, cleanable, plastic
covers.
B. Label cover of each binder with typed or printed title WARRANTIES AND BONDS, with title of project; name,
address and telephone number of Contractor; and name of responsible principal.
C. Table of Contents: Neatly typed, in the sequence of the table of contents of the project manual, with each item
identified with the number and title of the specification section in which specified, and the name of product or
work item.
D. Separate each warranty or bond with index tab sheets keyed to the table of contents listing. Provide full
information, using separate typed sheets as necessary. List subcontractor, supplier, and manufacturer, with
name, address, and telephone number of responsible principal.
1.03 PREPARATION OF SUBMITTALS
A. Obtain warranties and bonds, executed in duplicate by responsible subcontractors, suppliers, and
manufacturers, within ten days after completion of the applicable item of work. Except for items put into use with
Owner's permission, leave date of beginning of time of warranty until the date of substantial completion is
determined.
B. Verify that documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized.
C. Co -execute submittals when required.
D. Retain warranties and bonds until time specified for submittal.
1.04 TIME OF SUBMITTALS
A. For equipment or component parts of equipment put into service during construction with Owner's permission,
submit documents within ten days after acceptance.
B. Make other submittals within 10 days after date of substantial completion, prior to final application for payment.
C. For items of work when acceptance is delayed beyond date of substantial completion, submit within ten days
after acceptance, listing the date of acceptance as the beginning of the warranty period.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS & PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not applicable.
END OF SECTION
WARRANTIES AND BONDS
VLK Architects, 2009 01 7830 -1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 017839
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Maintenance and submittal of record documents and samples.
B. Related Sections/Documents
1. General Conditions of the Contract for Construction: Documents at the site.
2. Section 01 3323 - Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples.
3. Section 01 7700 - Closeout Procedures.
4. Section 01 7823 - Operation and Maintenance Data.
5. Individual Specifications Sections: Manufacturer's certificates and certificates of inspection.
1.02 MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES
A. In addition to requirements in General Conditions, maintain at the site for Owner one record copy of:
1. Contract drawings.
2. Specifications.
3. Addenda.
4. Change orders and other modifications to the contract
5. Reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples.
6. Field test records.
7. Inspection certificates.
8. Manufacturer's certificates.
B. Store record documents and samples in field office apart from documents used for construction. Provide files,
racks, and secure storage for record documents and samples.
C. Label and file record documents and samples in accordance with section number listings in table of contents
of this project manual. Label each document "PROJECT RECORD" in neat, large, printed letters.
D. Maintain record documents in a clean, dry and legible condition. Do not use record documents for construction
purposes.
E. Keep record documents and samples available for inspection by Architect.
1.03 RECORDING
A. Record information on a set of blueline opaque drawings, and in a copy of a project manual. All changes made
in these drawings in connection with the final construction and installation shall be neatly made in red ink on the
prints.
B. Provide felt tip marking pens, maintaining separate colors for each major system, for recording information.
C. Contractor shall include with the record documents, all changes and modifications made by addenda, change
orders, supplementary instructions, or other forms of documentation, written or verbal, which alter the
documents.
D. Record information concurrently with construction progress. Do not conceal any work until required information
is recorded.
E. Contract drawings and shop drawings: Legibly mark each item on the drawings to record actual construction,
including:
1. Measured depths of elements of foundation in relation to finish first floor datum.
2. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances, referenced to
permanent surface improvements.
3. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction, referenced to visible
and accessible features of construction.
4. Field changes of dimension and detail.
5. Changes made by addenda and modifications.
6. Details not on original contract drawings.
7. References to related shop drawings and modifications.
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
VLK Architects, 2009 01 7839 -1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
Specifications: Legibly mark each Item in the specifications to record actual construction, including:
1. Manufacturer, trade name, and catalog number of each product actually installed, particularly optional items
and substitute items.
2. Changes made by addenda and modifications.
G. Other Documents: Maintain manufacturer's certifications, inspection certifications, field test records, and other
documents required by individual specifications sections.
H. Maintain these documents to reflect the current conditions of the work. Changes shall be reviewed on a monthly
basis with the Architect's representative. The Contractor's updating of the "installed condition drawings" shall
be a prerequisite to the monthly review of the Contractor's payment request by the Architects representative.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. At contract closeout, deliver record documents and samples under provisions of SECTION 01 7700 -
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES.
B. Transmit with cover letter in duplicate, listing:
1. Date.
2. Project title and number.
3. Contractor's name, address, and telephone number.
4. Number and title of each record document.
5. Signature of Contractor or authorized representative.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS & PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not applicable.
END OF SECTION
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
VLK Architects, 2009 01 7839 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 01 7840
SPARE PARTS, OVERAGES AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Requirements Included
1. Products required.
2. Storage and delivery of products.
B. Related Requirements
1. Section 01 6600 - Product Storage and Handling Requirements.
2. Section 01 7700 - Closeout Procedures.
3. Section 01 7823 - Operation and Maintenance Data.
4. Individual Specifications Sections: Specific spare parts and materials required.
1.02 PRODUCTS REQUIRED
A. Provide quantities of products, spare parts, maintenance tools, and maintenance materials specified in individual
sections to be provided to Owner, in addition to that required for completion of work.
B. Products: Identical to those installed in the work. Include quantities in original purchase from manufacturer to
avoid variations in manufacture.
1.03 STORAGE, MAINTENANCE
A. Store products with products to be installed in the work, under provisions of SECTION 01 6600 - PRODUCT
STORAGE AND HANDLING REQUIREMENTS.
B. When adequate, secure storage facilities are available at site, capable of maintaining conditions required for
storage and not required for contract work or storage, or for Owner's needs, spare products may be stored in
available space.
C. Maintain spare products in original containers with labels intact and legible, until delivery to Owner.
1.04 DELIVERY
A. Coordinate with Owner: Deliver and unload spare products to Owner at Owner's Maintenance Facility and
obtain receipt prior to final payment.
B. For portions of project accepted and occupied by Owner prior to substantial completion, deliver a proportional
part of spare products to Owner, obtain receipt.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS & PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not applicable.
END OF SECTION
SPARE PARTS, OVERAGES AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
VLK Architects, 2009 01 7840 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 02 4119
SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Taking down, cutting away, breaking out and removing portions of the existing building to accommodate
new construction.
2. Disconnecting, capping and removing identified utilities.
3. Offsite disposal and/or salvaging for reinstallation, indicated components.
B. Related Section:
1. Section 01 1100 - Summary of Work: Instructions concerning hazardous materials.
2. Section 01 3500 - Alteration Project Procedures: Re -installation of removed materials.
3. Section 01 5000 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Barricades; Dust control.
4. Section 01 7839 - Project Record Documents.
1.02 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Occupancy: Owner will be continuously occupying portions of the building immediately adjacent to areas of
selective demolition. Conduct selective demolition work in manner that will minimize need for disruption of
Owner's operations.
B. Existing Conditions: Owner assumes no responsibility for actual condition of items or structures to be
demolished. Contractor shall visit the building and verify the nature and extent of demolition required.
Conditions existing at time of commencement of contract will be maintained by Owner insofar as practicable.
However, variations within structures may occur by Owner's removal and salvage operations prior to start of
selective demolition.
C. Property Protection: Contractor shall be responsible for the protection of adjoining property, including all parts
of the building outside the limits of demolition and site improvements outside the limits of the new construction.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit demolition and removal procedures and schedule under provisions of SECTION 01 3323 - SHOP
DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES.
B. Submit record documents under provisions of SECTION 01 7839 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS.
Accurately record actual locations of capped utilities and subsurface obstructions.
1.04 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. Conduct demolition to minimize interference with adjacent portion of structures to remain.
B. Conduct operations with minimum interference with Owner's usage of building. Maintain protected egress and
access at all times and maintain protected egress at fire exits as required by the Fire Marshall.
1.05 PROTECTION
A. It is essential that there be minimal interruptions of existing mechanical and electrical systems in addition to the
normal operation of Owner's facilities.
B. Take care to ensure that there will be no damage to elements or portions thereof which are not required to be
removed. Erect and maintain temporary shoring, bracing, and other means to safeguard the structural integrity
of the existing portions of building and its parts to remain.
C. Erect and maintain temporary bracing, shoring, lights, barricades, signs and other means to protect workers and
other persons, and finishes and improvements to remain from damage; all in accordance with applicable
regulatory requirements.
D. Erect and maintain temporary barriers to confine dust and debris.
E. Protect existing trees to remain. Keep area within the drip line clear of construction traffic, parking, soil
contamination, soil stockpiling, storage of materials, debris and ponding water.
SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
VLK Architects, 2009 02 4119 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Materials designated for demolition shall become the Contractor's property; remove and dispose of such
materials unless otherwise indicated or specified. Sales of salvage materials are not allowed on site.
B. Furnishings and equipment items to remain the Owner's property will be removed by him prior to the start of
demolition (or will be designated on the drawings herein or to be removed and stored by Contractor). Items not
so designated shall be considered debris and shall be removed and disposed of accordingly.
C. Carefully disconnect, remove and protect items directed by the Owner to be salvaged.
D. Transport salvaged items to on -site storage areas designated by the Owner.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTIONS
A. Prior to starting demolition, make inspection and report observable defects and structural weaknesses of
construction designated for demolition, of adjacent structures, and of improvements to remain. If unsatisfactory
conditions exist, do not commence demolition until appropriate determinations have been made.
B. Following demolition, make inspection and report defects and structural weaknesses of items partially
demolished, cut, or removed, of adjacent structures; and of improvements remaining.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Cover and protect furniture, equipment and fixtures to remain from soiling or damage when demolition work is
performed in rooms or areas from which such items have not been removed.
B. Prevent movement or settlement of adjacent structures. Provide bracing, shoring and underpinning as required.
C. Protect existing appurtenances, structures and landscaping which are not to be demolished.
D. Locate, disconnect, remove and cap designated utility lines within demolition areas.
E. Mark location of disconnected utilities. Identify utilities and indicate capping locations on Project Record
Documents.
F. Provide weatherproof closures for exterior openings resulting from demolition work.
3.03 PERFORMANCE
A. Demolition: Carry out the work carefully and in an orderly manner to minimize interference with the daily
operations in the building and to avoid damage to permanent parts of the building and the equipment therein.
Hold noise, dust and vibration to a minimum. Remove all items and parts so shown and noted on the drawings
and as otherwise may be required to be removed to carry out the work.
B. Shoring: Provide temporary shoring for walls and framing wherever present supports are removed or weakened.
Any settling or cracking of the existing construction due to the removal of supports and faulty or insufficient
shoring shall be the responsibility of the contractor and shall be repaired at no additional expense to the Owner.
C. Material and Equipment Disposal:
1. The materials and items of equipment which are noted and shown to be salvaged and re -used in new
locations or re -used for patching shall be carefully removed and safely stored until ready for reinstallation.
2. Other items and all debris shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from the
premises entirely. Under no circumstances shall debris be allowed to accumulate.
D. Damage: Any existing construction to be left in place which is damaged by the demolition operations shall be
refinished or replaced at no additional expense to the Owner. The repair of such damage shall leave the parts
in a condition at least equal to that found at the start of the work.
E. Perform demolition in accordance with ANSI 10.6 and applicable regulatory requirements.
SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
VLK Architects, 2009 02 4119 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
F. Remove items designated for demolition within the limits of work indicated and as required to perform the work.
Do not remove anything beyond the limits of demolition indicated withoutthe prior written approval of Architect.
If in doubt whether to remove an item, obtain written approval prior to proceeding.
G. If in the event hazardous materials (asbestos, PCB's etc.) are encountered during the course of the demolition
work, or if it is even suspected that such materials will or have been encountered cease work immediately in
the affected area and promptly notify the Owner and Architect.
3.04 CUTTING
A. Make new openings neat, as close as possible to profiles indicated and only to extent necessary for new work.
B. Do not cut or alter structural members unless specifically indicated or approved, and do not damage reinforcing
or structural steel to remain.
C. At concrete, masonry, paving and other materials where edges of cuts and holes will remain exposed in the
completed work, make cuts using power -sawing and -coring equipment. Do not over -cut at corners of cut
openings.
D. Upon completion of cutting and coring, clean remaining surfaces of loose particles and dust.
3.05 PIPES, DUCTS AND CONDUITS
A. Remove deactivated mechanical, plumbing and sprinkler piping, ducts and electrical conduit, including
fastenings, connections and other related appurtenances and accessories which would otherwise be exposed
in the completed work or interfere with construction operations.
B. These facilities above ceilings may remain in place if their presence does not result in interference with new
work, in which case they shall be removed to extent necessary.
C. Cap deactivated piping systems at points of cutoff.
3.06 RECONDITIONING EXISTING SUBSTRATES
A. Clean surfaces on which new materials will be applied, removing adhesives, bitumen and other adhering
materials, as necessary to furnish acceptable substrates for new materials.
B. Perform sandblasting, chipping, grinding, acid washing, etching and other work as required by conditions
encountered and new materials involved.
C. Use of acids or other cleaning agents shall include neutralizing, washing, rinsing and drying, as applicable.
D. Determine substrate requirements for reconditioned surfaces in cooperation with the manufacturer's
representative and installer of each new material involved.
3.07 CLEAN UP
A. Upon completion of demolition work, remove tools, equipment and demolished materials from site. Remove
protections and leave interior areas broom clean.
END OF SECTION
SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
VLK Architects, 2009 02 4119 - 3 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 03 1100
CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Formwork with accessories for the cast -in -place concrete and permanent shoring.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 312300 - Excavation and Fill: temporary sheeting for excavations.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Standard: Formwork shall meet the requirements of ACI 347.
B. Surface Tolerances: Allowable tolerances for formed concrete surfaces shall be 3/8" maximum in 20 feet for
vertical surfaces out of plumb and 1/4" maximum in 20 feet for horizontal surfaces out of plane.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 FORM MATERIALS
A. Lumber: S2S&CM or S2S&SL No. 3 Boards or better Southern Pine not less than a nominal 1" thick.
B. Plywood: EXT APA grade -trademarked B-B Plyform, Class I, or High Density Overlaid Plyform, Class I. B-B
Plyform shall be sanded but not mill oiled. Plywood shall be new.
C. Fiberboard: Corrugated fiberboard laminated with waterproof adhesive and coated with water resistant
compound.
1. Forms in a completely dry condition shall be capable of supporting not less than the following loading
without deflection:
a. 1,000 psf for walls/beams V or less in height.
b. 1,600 psf for walls exceeding 5 but less than 8' in height.
c. Greater than 1,600 psf for custom designed walls exceeding 8' in height.
2.02 ACCESSORIES
A. Form Ties: Form ties for exposed concrete surfaces shall be manufactured to allow a positive breakback of at
least 1" inside the concrete surface. Ties shall be equipped with a plastic cone or washer not less than 1" in
diameter and 1" long which will cover the hole and prevent leakage of mortar. Form ties for unexposed surfaces
shall be bolt rods or patented devices having a minimum tensile strength of 3000 pounds when fully assembled.
Ties shall be adjustable in length and free of lugs, cones, washers or other features which would leave a hole
larger than 7/e" in diameter, or depressions back of the exposed surface of the concrete. Ties shall be of such
construction that, when the forms are removed, there will be no metal remaining within 1" of the finished surface
of the concrete.
B. Form Release Agent: Colorless material which will not stain concrete, absorb moisture or affect bond of
subsequent surface finish manufactured by Nox-Crete, Symons, or approved equivalent.
C. Dovetail Anchor Slots: 24 gage galvanized steel anchor slots with %" throat, 1" deep, furnished with foam or
felt fillers to exclude grout seepage.
D. Chamfer Strips: Extruded plastic triangular chamfer with %" face; Burke "CSF-%", Greenstreak Cat. No. 612.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 FORMWORK
A. General: Construct forms in compliance with referenced standard. All forms, shores, falsework, bracing and
other temporary supports shall be engineered by the Contractor to support all loads imposed during
construction, including weight of construction equipment, allowance for live loads and lateral forces due to wind
and temporary imbalance of discontinuity of building components.
CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES
VLK Architects, 2009 03 1100 -1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
ABM Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
B. Construction: Construct forms to the dimensions and shapes of the concrete members as detailed and
scheduled; and to obtain accurate alignment, location, grades, level and plumb work in finished structures. Set,
assemble and brace forms to withstand wet concrete construction loads without deflection, movement, or
leakage. Provide access for placing and adjusting reinforcement and cleaning forms.
1. Recesses and Chases: Form for and provide in their proper locations all slots, chases and recesses
indicated or implied by the drawings and not formed by sleeves, frames, and other equipment furnished
under other sections. The trades requiring such recesses and openings in concrete shall furnish the
necessary information for their correct location and placement.
C. Inserts and Fasteners: Provide for the installation of inserts, conduits, sleeves, drains, hangers, nosings, metal
reglets, nailing strips, and like items required for the attachment of other work and furnished by other trades.
Properly locate in cooperation with other trades and secure in position before concrete is placed.
D. Provide bracing to ensure stability of formwork. Strengthen formwork liable to be overstressed by construction
loads.
E. Provide temporary ports in formwork to facilitate cleaning and inspection. Locate openings at bottom of forms
to allow flushing water to drain. Close ports with tight fitting panels, flush with inside face of forms, neatly fitted
so that joints will not be apparent in exposed concrete surfaces.
3.02 REMOVAL OF FORMS
A. Remove forms with sufficient care to avoid scarring exposed surfaces. Prying against face of concrete will not
be permitted. Remove forms completely so that no wood form material is left in contact with concrete. Only
fiberboard soffit forms may be left in place.
1. General: Formwork for walls, sides of beams, and other parts not supporting the weight of the concrete
may be removed as soon as the concrete has hardened sufficiently to resist damage from removal
operations, but in no event before concrete is 24 hours old. Formwork for beam soffits and other parts that
support the weight of concrete shall remain in place until the concrete has reached its specified 28-day
strength unless otherwise permitted. When shores and other vertical supports are so arranged that the
form facing material maybe removed without loosening or disturbing the shores and supports, the facing
material only maybe removed at an age of 24 hours. Whenever the formwork is removed during the curing
period, the exposed concrete shall be cured.
2. Re -shoring: When re -shoring is permitted orrequired, the operations shall be planned in advance and shall
be subject to review. Re -shoring for the purpose of early form removal shall be performed so that at no
time will large areas of new construction be required to supporttheir own weight. While re -shoring is under
way, no live loads shall be permitted on the new construction. Re -shores shall be tightened to carry their
required loads, but they shall not be over -tightened so that the new construction is over -stressed.
Re -shores shall remain in place until the concrete has reached its specified 28-day strength and while
weights or loads in excess of design live loads are imposed.
3. Permanent shoring shall not be removed.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect erected formwork, shoring, and bracing to ensure that work is in accordance with formwork design, and
that supports, fastenings, wedges, ties, and items are secure.
B. Do not reuse wood formwork more than three times for concrete surfaces to be exposed to view. Do not patch
formwork.
3.04 FORMWORK TOLERANCES
A. Construct formwork to maintain tolerances required by ACI 301.
END OF SECTION
CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES
VLK Architects, 2009 03 1100 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 03 2000
CONCRETE REINFORCING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Reinforcement with accessories for the cast -in -place concrete.
2. Reinforcing steel bars for cast -in -place concrete.
3. Support chairs, bolsters, and spacers, for supporting reinforcement.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 03 1100 - Concrete Forming and Accessories.
2. Section 03 3000 - Cast -in -Place Concrete.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with SECTION 013323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND
SAMPLES. Drawings shall show the size, length, form and position of bar reinforcing and accessories.
B. Certification: Submit a letter certifying that reinforcing bars comply with specified standard for grade.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Standard: Reinforcement shall meet the requirements of ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Structural
Concrete.
1.04 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A. Stack reinforcing steel in tiers and mark so that each length, size, shape and location can be readily determined.
Exercise cane to maintain reinforcement free of dirt, mud, paint or rust.
B. Store materials and accessories on dunnage and under protective sheeting.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60 deformed billet steel.
B. Tie Wire: 16 gage annealed steel wire.
C. Accessories: Anchors, dowels, spacers, chairs, bolsters and other devices for supporting and fastening
reinforcement and normally considered as accessories to the concrete work.
2.02 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate reinforcing bars to conform to the required shapes and dimensions, with fabrication tolerances
complying with the CRSI Manual.
B. In case of fabricating errors, do not straighten or re -bend reinforcement in a manner that will weaken or injure
the material.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Placing Steel:
1. Place reinforcement in accordance with CRSI "Placing Reinforcing Bars" and ACI 318, with provisions of
ACI 318 governing.
2. Assemble reinforcing steel in the forms, wired and fastened securely. Bending shall be done cold. Bars
with kinks or bends not detailed shall be rejected.
3. Clean reinforcing steel of loose rust, mill scale, grease, dirt and other coatings which will reduce or destroy
bond with the concrete. A thin film of tight rust will not be objectionable.
CONCRETE REINFORCING
VLK Architects, 2009 03 2000 -1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
4. Position, support, and secure reinforcement to resist displacement by formwork, construction, and concrete
placing operations.
5. Locate and support reinforcement by metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers, and hangers.
6. Place reinforcement to obtain minimum coverages for concrete protection.
7. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports together with the specified be wire.
8. Set wire ties so twisted ends are directed away from exposed concrete surfaces.
9. Support reinforcement and fasten together to prevent displacement by construction loads of placing
concrete. Use No. 16 gauge black annealed wire at all joints and crosses to accurately position
reinforcement in place.
10. Over formwork, use metal or plastic bar chairs and spacers to support reinforcement.
11. Where concrete surface will be exposed to weather in finished structure, use non -corrosive or corrosion
protected accessories within V of concrete surface.
12. Where successive mats of reinforcing fabric are continuous, overlap welded wire fabric so that overlap
measured between outermost cross wires of each fabric sheet is not less than spacing of cross wires plus
2".
13. Bars having splices not shown on shop drawings will be subject to rejections.
14. Do not bend reinforcement after being embedded in hardened concrete.
15. Do not allow bars to be in contact with dissimilar materials.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspection and Evaluation: The testing and inspection laboratory shall inspect placement of all reinforcing steel
to confirm compliance with the contract documents.
B. Concrete shall not be poured without inspection approval as noted above.
END OF SECTION
CONCRETE REINFORCING
VLK Architects, 2009 03 2000 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 03 3000
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Cast -in -place concrete, including mixing, placing, and finishing.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 014523 -Testing and Inspection Services.
2. Section 03 1000 -Concrete Forming and Accessories.
3. Section 03 2000 - Concrete Reinforcing.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit in accordance with SECTION 01 3323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND
SAMPLES.
B. Product Data:
1. Submit product data for admixture, bonding compound, curing compound, grout, and sealer.
C. Design Mixes:
1. At the beginning of the work, Contractor shall submit proposed concrete mix designs for review by the
Architect, structural engineering consultant, and testing laboratory per SECTION 01 3323 - SHOP
DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES.
a. Include the sieve analysis of fine and course aggregate ASTM C 136, dry rodded weight of coarse
aggregate - ASTM C 29, and the specific gravity (bulk saturated surface dry), of fine and coarse
aggregates ASTM C 127 and C 128,
b. State admixture used and project conditions required for specific admixtures.
c. Proposed concrete mix design shall also include the results of compressive bests.
2. Contractor shall not mix concrete for placing in the work until confirmation laboratory reports are supplied
to reflect that each proposed mix will develop the strength and slump required. Successful past history in
accordance with ACI 318 will be satisfactory.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Standard: Concrete shall meet the requirements of ASTM C 94.
B. Perform work in accordance with ACI 301, 304, 305, 306, and 309.
C. Obtain materials from same source throughout the work.
D. Batch plant shall be able to show a minimum of five -years experience in batching concrete. If required, they
shall furnish a list of similar sized jobs or special condition jobs performed during the last two -years.
E. Surface Tolerances: For all finished concrete wearing surfaces, the variation from level or from elevations
indicated shall not exceed %" in 16'. If variations exceed those as set forth then the wearing surface shall be
filled or ground down as required to meet the stated tolerances.
1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Requirements:
1. Cold Weather Placing: Do not place concrete when the temperature is below 40°F. or is expected to fall
below 40*F. within 24 hours after placing concrete; unless either favorable weather is forecast or adequate
arrangements for protection and heating have been made in accordance with ACI 306.
2. Hot Weather Placing: Do not place concrete when hot weather conditions exist that would impair the quality
and strength of concrete, i.e. any combination of high air temperature, low relative humidity, and wind
velocity, unless adequate arrangements for protection have been made in accordance with ACI 305.
B. Coordination: Notify other trades and contractors well in advance of placing concrete to allow them sufficient
time in which to install work which is to be built-in or cast into the concrete.
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE
VLK Architects, 2009 03 3000 -1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Portland Cements: ASTM C 150, Type I, domestic manufacture.
B. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33, washed sand with a fineness modulus of between 2.50 and 3.00.
C. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33, clean crushed stone or washed gravel. The nominal maximum particle size
shall not exceed 1/5 of the narrowest dimension between forms or % of the minimum clear spacing between
reinforcing bars.
D. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and
that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use
calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride.
1. Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A.
2. Water -Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D.
E. Air -Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260, certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other required
admixtures, equal to Master Builders "Micro Air".
F. Fly Ash - ASTM C 618, Type C or Type F, limit use of fly ash to not -to -exceed 20% of cement content by weight.
G. Water: Clean and potable.
2.02 CONCRETE TREATMENT PRODUCTS
A. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two -component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing and bonding to
damp surfaces, of class suitable for application temperature and of grade to suit requirements. Product/
manufacturer, one of the following:
Sikadur 32, Hi -Mod; Sika Chemical
Sealtight Rea -Weld 1000; W.R. Meadows, Inc.
EpoxealTM GS Structural; Sonneborn Div. of ChemRex Building Products
B. Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B,18 to 25 percent solids, clear, acrylic copolymer based liquid
for curing and sealing concrete. Product/manufacturer, one of the following:
Safe -Cure Clear; ChemMasters
Diamond Clear VOX; Euclid Chemical Co.
Cure & Seal 18 Percent E; Symons Corp., a Dayton Superior Co.
Vocomp-20; W.R. Meadows, Inc.
C. Concrete Sealer at Interior Exposed Concrete: Provide Sealtight Vocomp-25 Acrylic Concrete Sealer as
manufactured by W.R. Meadows, Inc., Fort Worth, Texas (phone 817.834.1969).
D. Non-metallic, Shrinkage -Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory -packaged, non-metallic aggregate grout, non-
corrosive, non -staining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and 30-minute working time.
Product/manufacturer, one of the following:
NS Grout; Euclid Chemical Co.
Sealtight 588 Precision Grout; W.R. Meadows, Inc.
Sonogrout@ 10K; Sonneborn Div. of ChemRex
E. Re -surfacing and/or Self -Leveling Undedayment Material: Provide Ardex K-15 as distributed by Ardex, Inc.
(phone 214.867.5616) or Super Flo -Top as manufactured by The Euclid Chemical Co.
2.03 SELECTING PROPORTIONS FOR CONCRETE
A. Strength: Select proportions for a mix designed to produce concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive
strength of 3000 psi, unless noted otherwise.
B. Admixture:
1. Use admixture in all concrete. Select the type (normal, retarder, or high early) best suited for the
temperature conditions at the time the concrete is placed and finished.
2. Use water reducing admixture only with the permission of the Engineer. Do not use water reducing
admixture and air entrainment together with any slabs to receive a hard trowelled finish. Use air
entrainment in all concrete to be pumped (5%).
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE
VLK Architects, 2009 03 3000 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
C. Use air -entraining admixture in all exterior concrete, including pavement and flatwork. Add air -entraining
admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having total air content
by volume with a tolerance of plus or minus 1'/2 percent within the following limits:
1. 3 to 6 percent, 1'/z" max. aggregate.
2. 3.5 to 6.5 percent, 1" max. aggregate.
3. 4 to 8 percent, %" max. aggregate.
4. 5 to 9 percent,'/2" max. aggregate.
D. Calcium chloride shall not be used.
E. Slump: Select proportions to produce concrete with the following maximum allowable slumps. The slump limits
given shall apply after inclusion of the admixture.
Reinforced walls, beams, slabs 6"
Pavement, flatwork 4"
2.04 MIXING AND DELIVERY
A. Measurement of concrete materials, mixing, and delivery of fresh concrete to the project shall meet the
requirements of ASTM C 94. Transit -mixed concrete supplier shall have a plant with sufficient capacity and
transportation facilities to assure continuous delivery at the rate required.
B. Mix concrete in accordance with ASTM C 94, Alternative No. 2, or ACI 304.
C. Deliver concrete in accordance with ASTM C 94.
D. Select proportions for normal weight concrete in accordance with ACI 301 Method 1. Mix not less than one
minute after materials are in mixer.
E. Do not transport or use concrete after 90 minutes has expired from time of initial mixing.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Before any concrete is placed, the forms and reinforcement shall be inspected by the Contractor and the
Owner's testing laboratory. Notify the Owner's testing laboratory not less than one working day before concrete
is scheduled to be placed. Bucks, sleeves, anchors and other fixtures to be embedded in concrete shall be
properly positioned and anchored. Wash down form surfaces to remove foreign substances. Provide elevated
runways clearing steel and other embedded work.
B. Prepare previously placed concrete by cleaning with steel brush and applying bonding agent. Apply bonding
agent in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. At locations where new concrete is doweled to existing work, drill over -sized holes in existing concrete, insert
steel dowels, and pack solid with non -shrink grout.
3.02 CONVEYING CONCRETE
A. Convey concrete to the place of final deposit by methods which will prevent the separation or loss of the
ingredients. Equipment for chuting, pumping, and pneumatically conveying concrete shall be such as to assure
a continuous flow of concrete at the delivery end without separation. The use of aluminum chutes or pipes for
transporting concrete will not be permitted.
3.03 PLACING CONCRETE
A. Notify Architect and testing laboratorya minimum of 24 hours prior to commencement of concreting operations.
B. General: Place concrete in continuous horizontal lifts no deeper than 24". Avoid inclined lifts and inclined
construction joints and do not cause or allow concrete to flow horizontally in the forms. Keep conveying
equipment clean and free of hardened concrete. Use tremies or suitable chutes for placing concrete in high
narrow walls so that concrete will not have a free vertical fall in excess of 3'.
C. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 301 and as specified below:
1. Unless protection is provided, do not place concrete in rain, sleet, or snow.
2. Regulate rate of placement so concrete remains plastic and flows into position.
3. Deposit concrete continuously until panel or section is completed. Place as near as possible to its final
location; do not rehandle.
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE
VLK Architects, 2009 03 3000 - 3 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
4. Do not place concrete, under any circumstances, except in presence of testing laboratory.
5. When placing concrete in masonry, exercise extreme care to prevent concrete from staining face of
masonry.
6. Consolidation
a. Comply with requirements of ACI 309.
b. Use mechanical vibrating equipment for consolidation.
c. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete in forms.
d. Use vibrators with sufficient speed and amplitude to consolidate effectively.
e. Keep a spare vibrator on site during all concrete pours.
f. Thoroughly consolidate concrete and work around reinforcement, embedded items and into corners of
forms. Thoroughly consolidate layers of concrete with previous layers.
7. Expansion Joint Fillers: Place pre -molded expansion joint fillers at locations as detailed and whenever
required to separate site paving from building slabs. Refer to Drawings for required joint dimensions.
Reference SECTION 031000 - CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES for joint filler products.
8. Bonding: Before depositing any new concrete on or against previously deposited concrete which has
partially or entirely set, thoroughly roughen and clean the surfaces of the latter of all foreign matter, scum,
and laitance. Re -tighten forms and re -coat the surface of the previously deposited concrete with specified
bonding agent per manufacturer's directions.
D. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts, and formed joints are not disturbed during concrete placement.
E. Place concrete continuously between predetermined construction and control joints. Do not break or interrupt
successive pours such that cold joints occur.
F. Saw cut control joints at an optimum time after finishing. Use 3/16" thick blade, cutting Ys into depth of slab
thickness.
G. Separate exterior slabs on fill from vertical surfaces with joint filler. Extend joint filler from bottom of slab to
within%" of finished slab surface.
H. Excessive honeycomb or embedded debris in concrete is not acceptable. Notify Architect/Engineer upon
discovery.
I. Maintain record of concrete placement. Record date, location, quantity, airtemperature and test samples taken.
J. Beams: Place beams continuously where possible. Start placing at ends of section and progress toward the
center.
K. Slabs: Place each slab in one continuous operation withoutjoints within the area established for a continuous
pour. Start placing at the far end of the area and place each load of concrete against previously placed
concrete, not away from it.
L. Drains: Check the setting of floor drains so that they will finish flush with floor surfaces without varying the
intended elevations and slopes. Slope surfaces down to drains at least %" per foot or as shown.
M. Compaction: Compact concrete with ramming and spading tools during placing to work the coarse aggregate
away from the forms and to produce a dense mass without air pockets. Work concrete through and around
reinforcing steel. Do not disturb any embedded work.
N. Consolidation: Use high frequency mechanical vibrators to consolidate concrete and eliminate lift lines in walls
exposed to view. Vibrators shall be operated by skilled mechanics underclose supervision. Insert and withdraw
the vibrator heads at points from 18" to 30" apart for short periods. Do not allow heads to touch the forms.
O. Leveling: Level and grade the top surface of slabs with straight edges over gauge strips. Level the top of
foundations for the reception of subsequent work. Level and line steps in like manner over strips or forms.
Remove wood spreaders, block, and screeds as the concrete is placed and before it sets.
P. Loading: Do not shake or move the forms and reinforcement nor place any strain on projecting metal after the
concrete has taken its initial set. Do not permit loading or traffic of any kind on the construction until the
concrete has fully hardened.
Q. Hot Weather Placement: Take special care to prevent high temperatures in the fresh concrete during hot
weather. Use a set -retarding type admixture to assure that concrete remains workable and lift lines will not be
visible. Forflatwork use a spray -on evaporation retardant as needed during finishing operations.
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE
VLK Architects, 2009 03 3000 - 4 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
3.04 CORRECTING DEFECTIVE CONCRETE
A. Examine concrete for defects as the forms are removed. Concrete out of alignment or with defective surfaces
shall be considered as not conforming to the intent of these specifications. Such concrete shall be removed
from the project site unless the Architect grants permission to patch the defective area.
B. Concrete that does not attain the specified 28-day strength shall be removed from the project site at the
contractor's expense.
C. Formed surfaces exposed to view shall not have fins, offsets, voids, and bulges. Minor grain marks will not be
objectionable, but the texture shall be uniform. Leave comers and other details sharply defined and surfaces
straight and true.
D. Repair honeycomb, pour joints, stone pockets, and like imperfections by wetting and pointing with mortar to
match adjacent concrete. Where unacceptable surface blemishes occur on concrete exposed to view, rub the
entire surface to produce a uniform appearance throughout.
3.05 FILLING TIE ROD AND BOLT HOLES
A. Fill solidly with stiff cement grout the holes in concrete resulting from the removal of bolts and rods. Strike off
flush any excess mortar at the faces of the holes. In concrete exposed to view, holes shall be patched with
mortar to match adjacent concrete.
3.06 CONCRETE FINISHING
A. Rubbed Concrete Finish
1. Exposed non -wearing concrete surfaces noted to be "Rubbed Concrete" shall be given a rubbed finish.
a. Remove the forms as soon as possible and while the concrete is still "green". Level offsets and fins,
and repair surfaces.
b. Wet surfaces and rubwith a carborundum brick or other suitable abrasive to obtain a uniformly textured
and colored finish. Flush the surfaces with clean water to remove slurry and loose particles.
c. After the rough work on the building has been completed, again rub the surfaces with a carborundum
brick. For this rubbing use a slurry made from a patching and repairing compound equal to
"Pave -Crete." Apply the slurry and rub it thoroughly into the concrete to provide the desired finish.
Remove surplus slurry with burlap before it hardens.
d. The finished work shall be free of holes and other unsightly defects and shall be uniform in texture and
color. Leave corners sharply defined and surfaces straight and true.
3.07 CONCRETE FLOOR, SLAB, AND TOPPING FINISHES
A. Steel Trowel: For concrete floor surfaces to be left exposed, to receive resilient tile, or carpet, provide a
standard integral trowel finish. This finish is required on all concrete wearing surfaces for which other specific
finishes are not indicated or scheduled.
1. Strike the surface at the finish floor elevation, and roll and tamp the concrete to force aggregate away from
the surface. Screed to a true, level surface except where slopes are specifically indicated, and float when
hard enough to support knee boards.
2. Bring the surface to a true grade by cutting down high spots and filling low spots with fresh concrete. Test
with a 16 ft. straight edge, or shorter in restricted areas, and limit surface variations to not more than YT
in 16'.
3. Finish the floorwith a steel trowel to a smooth dense surface. When hard enough to ring under the trowel,
burnish the surface to the final polished finish.
B. Smooth: Concrete slab surfaces to be covered with thinset ceramic tile shall receive steel trowel finish, except
that the second burnish troweling shall be omitted. Leave surfaces with some "tooth" for a bond.
C. Rough: Concrete slab surfaces to be covered with quarry and ceramic tile shall be roughened for bond by
scrubbing with stiff brooms to exposed the aggregate before laitance has hardened. Sweep the surfaces to
remove loose material.
D. Brush: Provide a texture finish for exterior concrete except where scheduled otherwise. After floating and an
initial troweling, go overthe surfaces with a soft bristle brush or broom to produce a fine textured non -slip finish.
Exposed vertical surfaces and comers shall be tooled and troweled smooth.
E. Float: Concrete slab surfaces to be covered with membrane waterproofing and with insulation board, or slabs
with sloped surfaces, shall be screeded and floated to a true, relatively smooth finish without sharp projections,
offsets and other irregularities.
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE
VLK Architects, 2009 03 3000 - 5 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
3.08 CURING
A. Cure all concrete at least 7 days. All curing procedures shall prevent evaporation of moisture from the concrete
for the full curing period. Protect surfaces from traffic damage until the curing is complete.
B. Keep exposed vertical surfaces and the tops of beams and walls moist by spraying with water or covering with
saturated burlap, starting as soon as the surfaces will resist erosion.
C. Concrete surfaces to be covered with thinset flooring materials (ceramic tile, vinyl composition tile, etc.),shall
be cured by covering with reinforced 2-ply paper or 4 mil thick polyethylene sheeting laid with joints lapped 3"
and sealed with tape. Do not use curing compound on these surfaces.
D. Coat other concrete wearing surfaces with the curing and sealing compound, using at least 1 gallon per 300 sq.
ft. Areas damaged by traffic or subsequent construction operations shall be re -coated.
09 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Acceptance Tests:
1. Samples for strength tests of concrete shall be taken from each 75 cu. yds., or fraction thereof, of each mix
design of concrete placed in any one day.
2. Sampling procedures shall meet the requirements of ASTM C 172. If concrete is being pumped, take
concrete samples for testing at the point of placement and not at the mixer discharge.
3. Make and record a slump test on each sample. The method of test shall meet the requirements of ASTM
C 143.
4. Make 4 cylinders from each sample for strength tests, 1 for 7-day, 2 for 28-day test, and 1 in reserve. The
cylinders shall be made on the project site by an Independent Testing Laboratory and shall be cured and
tested in conformance with the requirements of ASTM C 31 and C 39.
5. Samples for 3-day strength tests may be taken at the Contractor's discretion and at the Contractor's
expense.
6. Samples for temperature and slump tests of concrete shall be taken from each truck, of each mix design
of concrete placed in any one day.
7. Testing lab representative shall be on site at all times during concrete pours.
8. No water shall be added to concrete mix on project site without approval from Owner's representative.
9. Concrete delivery tickets for all trucks shall be given to General Contractor for later submission to Owner.
Delivery tickets shall record time truck left plant, time truck arrived at site and mix design number being
delivered. A maximum of 90 minutes will be allowed from mixing of concrete to delivery.
3. Evaluation of Test Results:
1. Each strength test result shall be the average of 2 cylinders from the same sample tested at 28 days.
2. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if the average of any 3 consecutive compressive -
strength tests equals or exceeds the specified compressive strength and no individual strength test value
falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi.
3. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results
indicate that compressive strengths or other requirements have not been met. Testing and inspecting
agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C
42. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance
of replaced or additional work.
C. The cost of testing service shall be per SECTION 014523 - TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES.
10 PATCHING
A. Patch and repair existing concrete to restore smooth, uniform surfaces.
B. Prepare the surfaces by removing loose and faulty material down to firm concrete. Edges of concrete exposed
to view shall be saw -cut straight and square. Brush the surfaces free of dirt and debris and flush down with
clean water. After the surfaces are dry, coat them with bonding compound used in conformance with the
manufacturer's instructions.
C. Major patching and deep fills shall be done with a mixture of 1 part Portland cement, 1 Y2 parts sand, and 1 Y2
parts pea gravel. Work and tamp the fill into place, screed the surface and float and trowel to a smooth finish.
Cure as specified above.
D. Minor patching and re -surfacing of concrete to be covered with tile and carpet shall be done using a suitable
re -surfacing material such as Ardex K-15 or Super Flo -Top, which can be carried to a feather edge. Mix and
apply in conformance with the manufacturer's instructions and finish to a smooth surface.
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE
VLK Architects, 2009 03 3000 - 6 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
3.11 SEALING EXPOSED CONCRETE FLOORS
A. Immediately prior to completion of the building, clean exposed concrete floors to remove dirt, stains, paint, oil
and grease. Coat the clean, dry surfaces with a second coat of the curing and sealing compound. Application
shall conform to the manufacturer's instructions. Do not allow to puddle.
3.12 PROTECTION AND CLEAN UP
A. Floor Protection: All concrete floors which will be exposed to view in the completed building shall be covered
with reinforced paper with joints lapped and sealed. Maintain the protective covering until all wet work in the
building (masonry, plaster, and tile) is completed.
B. Clean Up: Excess concrete and wash water from concrete truck drums shall not be dumped anywhere on the
site or on adjoining streets, but shall be disposed of away from the premises.
END OF SECTION
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE
VLK Architects, 2009 03 3000 - 7 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 03 5419
SELF -LEVELING UNDERLAYMENT
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Liquid applied cementitious floor underayment.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator: Company specializing in self -leveling underlayment with 3-years experience.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's mix and installation instructions under provisions of SECTION 01 3323 - SHOP
DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES.
1.04 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Perform work at ambient temperatures at or above 50°F.
B. During cure process, ventilate room spaces to remove moisture.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Gyp Crete® 2000 Floor Underlayment as made by Maxxon Southeast, Inc. (phone 800.247.5266 web site:
www.maxxonse.com/gyperete.htmi).
B. Substitutions: Under provisions of SECTION 01 6200 - PRODUCT OPTIONS.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Underlayment: Gypsum based cementitious mix.
B. Water: Drinkable and not detrimental to underlayment.
C. Primer: To manufacturer's instructions.
D. Joint and Crack Filler: Latex based.
E. Sand: Meeting Gyp. Crete Specification No. 101, using 1.8 cu.ft. of sand per 80 lb. of Gyp Crete.
2.03 MIXING
A. Site mix 1.4 mix design materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Mix to achieve follawing characteristics
1. Density: 115 Ib/sq ft minimum dry density.
2. Compressive Strength: 2000 psi minimum in accordance with ASTM C 472.
3. Fire Hazard Classification: 0/0/0 (Flame/Fuel/Smoke) rating in accordance with ASTM E 286.
C. Mix to consistency to achieve self -levelling.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Verify substrate surface is ready to receive work of this Section.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Remove nubs, projections, irregularities. Fill voids, deck joints and irregularities with filler. Finish smooth.
SELF -LEVELING UNDERLAYMENT
VLK Architects, 2009 03 5419 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
B. Vacuum clean substrate surfaces.
C. Prime wood substrate. Allow to dry.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install underlayment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for minimum and
maximum thicknesses.
B. Install after partition installation.
3.04 CURING
A. Air cure in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
END OF SECTION
SELF -LEVELING UNDERLAYMENT
VLK Architects, 2009 03 5419 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 04 2200
CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Concrete unit masonry construction.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit in accordance with SECTION 01 3323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND
SAMPLES.
B. Test Reports: Manufacturer of the concrete masonry units shall submit:
1. Certified test reports showing that the units to be furnished meet the requirements of ASTM C 90 and C
129, and have the required minimum compressive strengths.
2. Reports certifying concrete masonry units meet or exceed each of the fire resistive ratings.
C. Provide a diagram of proposed control joints and expansion joints.
D. Mortar Mixture Proportions: ASTM C 270, Submit copies of each proposed mix design for review prior to starting
masonry work.
E. Grout Mixture Proportions: ASTM C 476, Submit copies of each proposed mix design for review prior to any
grout placement.
1. Include recent historical grout cylinder strength test reports for each mix design.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: Manufacturer shall have a minimum of 5 years experience manufacturing the specified product.
B. Installer: Masonry contractor shall have a minimum of 5 years experience in similar types of work and be able
to furnish a list of previous jobs and references if requested by the Architect.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store masonry units above ground on wood pallets which allow air circulation under the stacked units.
1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Refer to "Protection" Paragraph for daily activities.
B. Cold Weather Construction: Do no masonry work when freezing weather is expected. If Contractor elects to
lay masonry when air temperature falls or is expected to fall below 40°F., provide construction means and
protection of completed masonry as described in BIA Technical Note 1A Cold Weather Masonry Construction
-- Construction and Protection Recommendations.
1. The use of admixtures or antifreezes to lower the freezing point of mortar shall not be permitted.
C. In hot weather (above 99°F. with less than 50% relative humidity) protect masonry construction from direct
exposure to sun and wind.
D. Temporary Bracing: Take adequate precautions to prevent damage to walls during erection by high winds or
other forces. Where necessary, provide temporary bracing until the designed lateral strength is reached.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.01 MASONRY MATERIALS
A. Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 90, Grade N-I, moisture controlled, for load -bearing units; ASTM C 129,
moisture controlled, Type I, for non -load -bearing units. Provide hollow units made from Portland cement and
lightweight mineral aggregate.
1. All units shall be from the same manufacturing plant and shall have the same surface texture.
2. Use load -bearing units for exterior wall backup and load -bearing partitions, non -load -bearing units
elsewhere. Provide 1" bullnose units for exposed outside corners, unless noted otherwise.
CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
VLK Architects, 2009 04 2200 -1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
3. Provide sash block control joints at all concrete block walls with H&B #VS pre -molded PVC control joint
filler.
4. Provide 5" starter blocks where required.
5. Nominal Size: 8" x 16" face.
6. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net -area compressive strength of 1900
psi.
B. Related Materials:
1. Bond Breaker: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15), non -perforated asphalt -saturated felt.
2.02 REINFORCING AND TIES
A. Triangular Ties and Column Anchors: ASTM A 82 galvanized steel wire, 3/16" diameter ties and Y<" diameter
anchors, for tying masonry walls to steel columns.
B. Joint Reinforcement at Single-wythe Concrete Masonry Uunits: Provide truss type with continuous 9 gage
diagonal cross rods spaced not more than 16" o.c. Product/manufacturer; one of the following:
Truss; Dur-O-Wal Products
#120 Truss -Mesh; Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.
Series 300; Masonry Reinforcing Corp. of America
1. Finish shall be Class 1 mill galvanized.
2. Corners and tees shall be prefabricated.
C. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed billet steel.
2.03 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement ASTM C 150, domestic manufacture, natural Portland cement
B. Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S, with not more than 8% unhydrated oxides.
C. Aggregate for Mortar; Sand: ASTM C 144, well -graded natural sand.
D. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.
E. Water: Clean and free of deleterious amounts of acids, alkalis, or organic materials.
2.04 MORTAR; FIELD PREPARED
A. Mix proportions: ASTM C 270, mortar proportions by volume:
1. Type N Mortar - Exterior and Interior at masonry veneer construction:
1 part Portland cement
1 part lime
6 parts sand
2. Type S Mortar - Exterior and Interior at load -bearing masonry walls:
1 part Portland cement
1/2 part lime
4-1/2 parts sand
3. Bedding Mortar.
1 part Portland cement
1/7 part lime
3 parts sand
B. Mixing:
I. All dry material shall be accurately measured in a leak -proof box. Contractor shall have the option of using
Mix -Rite as manufactured by Giboo (phone 800.822.0802); VOL-CON as manufactured by Vol -Con, Inc.
(phone 319.383.1856); or fabricating a wood box for measuring dry materials. Box may be any convenient
size, but shall be not less than 12" x 12" x 12" inside dimensions. The use of shovels for measuring dry
materials is strictly prohibited.
2. Proportion mortar accurately and mix thoroughly with the maximum amount of water to produce a workable
consistency for at least 5 minutes in a mechanical batch mixer. Keep tools and mixing equipment clean.
3. Do not use mortar which has begun to set, or if more than 2-1/2 hours have elapsed since initial mixing.
Do not re -temper mortar.
C. Use: Lay masonry construction using Type N mortar. Where required use bedding mortar to set and fill hollow
metal frames.
CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
VLK Architects, 2009 04 2200 - 2 2737.03
D. Masonry cement is not acceptable for mortar.
E. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar.
F. Pre -mix, dry or wet, is not acceptable for mortar.
2.05 GROUT
A. Grout shall conform to ASTM C 476.
1. Fine Grout Proportions:
1 part Portland cement
1/10 part lime
3 parts fine aggregate
2. Coarse Grout Proportions
1 part Portland cement
1/10 part lime
3 parts fine aggregate
2 parts coarse aggregate
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
Provide grout for bond beams, masonry lintels, and reinforced masonry.
B. When placing grout in masonry, exercise extreme care to prevent grout from staining face of masonry.
2.06 MASONRY CLEANER
A. Use "Sure Klean 600" at concrete masonry units which are not adjacent to colored mortar and concrete masonry
units which are scheduled to be painted.
2.07 ACCESSORIES
A. Control Joints: Preformed rubber material; RS-Standard Rubber as manufactured by Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.
or comparable products by Dur-O-Wall Inc. or Heckman. Width slightly less than wall thickness to allow for
sealant material.
B. Rebar Positioners: Size and type required to accurately place reinforcing steel in bond beams, concrete
masonry unit lintels and vertically in walls.
C. Joint Stabilization Anchors: Mill -galvanized. Product/manufacturer:
Slip -set Stabilizer, Hohmann and Barnard
D/A 2200; Dur-O-Wall
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Cleaning: Beams, slabs, and lintels on which masonry walls and partitions are to be laid shall be brushed
thoroughly to remove loose dirt and laitance.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Installation Tolerances:
1. Maximum Variation from Plumb:
a. Vertical lines and surfaces of columns and walls:
1) %" in 10'-0".
2) %" in any story or 20'-0" maximum.
3) '/2" in 40'-0".
b. External Corners or Control Joints:
1) %" in any one story or 20'-0" maximum.
2) %:" in 40'-0".
2. Maximum Variation from Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1/32" maximum. Maximum variation is mandatory on walls
where only one surface is exposed. Where two surfaces are exposed to view, the more prominent face,
perArchitect, is to have maximum variation maintained, with the less prominent face allowed toexceed the
maximum tolerance.
3. Maximum Variation from Level or Grades for Exposed Lintels, Sill, Parapets, or Horizontal Grooves:
a. %" in any bay or 20'-0" maximum.
b. %' in 40'-0".
4. Maximum Variation from Plan Location or Linear Building Line or Related Portions of Columns, Walls, and
Partitions:
a. Y2" in any bay or 20'-0" maximum.
CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
VLK Architects, 2009 04 2200 - 3 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
b. %" in 40'-0".
5. Maximum Variation in Cross -sectional Dimension of Columns and Thickness of Walls: ±%".
6. Maximum Variation in Mortar Joint Thickness:
a. Bed Joint: VA".
b. Head Joint: V/s".
B. Dimensions are based on modular units except for special details. If units other than modular size are used,
there shall be no change in story heights or other main dimensions of partition centerlines, and connecting work
shall be adjusted to any changes in unit sizes.
C. Laying Concrete Masonry Units: Spread mortar beds smooth and full to cover all bearing areas. Do not furrow.
Butter head joints and shove units into place. Head joints shall be staggered except where stack bond is
specifically indicated. Make back joints full against the backing materials as each course is laid.
1. Leave pipe spaces open on one full side until pipe work has been completed and inspected.
2. Lay concrete masonrywalls and partitions level, plumb, straight, and true to line within tolerances specified
above.
3. Fill the cells of exposed concrete masonry units with mortar for a width of 8" at the jambs of all openings
in exterior walls.
4. Exposed ends of units at external corners shall be solid.
5. Units shown to be laid in stack bond shall be laid with such accuracythat a plumb line centered on a vertical
joint in an upper course will be entirely within the width of the corresponding vertical joint in every lower
course.
6. Unless shown otherwise, provide vertical control joints every 40'.
7. Maximum pour of grout in vertical cells shall be limited to 5'-0" unless cleanouts are provided at each cell.
8. At veneer construction, install bond breaker between first course of masonry veneer and concrete
foundations and beams. Gaskets at bottom of cavity walls shall not be used as bond breakers unless
gasket occurs under the first course of masonry.
D. Reinforcing Masonry Joints: Reinforce the bed joints of concrete masonry unit walls and partitions with
continuous joint reinforcement strips.
1. Furnish strips in long lengths. Width of strips shall be 2" less than nominal overall width of the wall or
partition.
2. Lap strip ends 12" and bed side rods in mortar for complete cover and bond.
3. Install strips in bed joints spaced 16" o.c. for exteriorwalls and 24" o.c. for interior partitions. Reinforcement
shall extend into and bond the facing wythe in walls.
E. Bonding: Tie together all masonry unit construction within walls and at intersections of walls by masonry bond
and staggered vertical joints. Toothing will not be permitted except where specifically authorized by the
Architect. Where walls must be built in advance of adjacent walls, form the stop -off by racking back.
1. Where bond with joint reinforcement cannot be made, use wall ties spaced not more than 24" o.c.
horizontally and vertically. Ties shall be laid in the joints, not shoved into wet mortar after setting the next
course of masonry.
2. Partitions between rooms without suspended ceilings, and 4" thick partitions with an unsupported length
of more than 12 ft. shall be extended to the floor or roof above and wedged and sealed against it. Extend
all other partitions above the highest adjacent ceiling, unless indicated to extend up to floor or roof above.
F. Joints shall be 3/8" wide. Joints shall be straight and uniform.
1. Tool and work exposed joints to a hard, dense surface with a sled runner and leave without any shrinkage
cracks. Delay tooling until the mortar has set thumbprint hard. Tool the joints in masonry walls behind
chalkboards and tackboards.
2. Rake out the joints to be caulked and keep them free of mortar as the work progresses.
3. Provide control joints at inside corners with backer rod and sealant.
G. Chases: Form chases and recesses to the required dimensions and lines, strike joints flush and remove excess
mortar. Before closing chases and similar inaccessible spaces with masonry, remove all rubbish and sweep
out the area.
H. Lintels and Beams: Provide lintels and beams for openings in masonry walls. This includes lintels at masonry
openings for ducts. Verify duct layouts on the mechanical drawings.
1. Reinforced Masonry Lintels: Construct and reinforce masonry lintels where shown.
a. Make concrete masonry lintel units of the same material and by the same process as the other concrete
masonry units used in the building.
b. Use trough -type units, not regular units with the web knocked out. Fill the troughs with concrete.
c. Build lintels in place where possible and cure at least 14 days before subjecting them to load. Provide
at least 8" bearing at each jamb.
d. Where reinforcing is not specifically called out for masonry lintels, use not less than a #4 bar top and
bottom of 8" high masonry units for each 4" thickness of wall.
CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
VLK Architects, 2009 04 2200 - 4 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
2. Bond Beams: Provide bond beams in masonry walls. Bond beams shall be continuous where possible.
I. Flashing:
1. Build in flashings which enterthe masonry, using the materials and following the instructions of the pertinent
sections of the specifications.
2. Create end dams at ends of window heads, at edges of storefronts, and other vertical elements to channel
water to nearest weep hole away from window mullions and other items which might allow water to travel
vertically.
J. Built-in work:
1. As work progresses, build -in metal door frames, fabricated metal frames, window frames, wood nailing
strips, anchor bolts, plates, and other items to be built in the work supplied by other sections.
2. Build -in items plumb and level.
3. Bed anchors of metal door and glazed frames in mortar joints. Fill frame voids solid with mortar. Fill
masonry cores with mortar minimum 8" from framed openings.
4. Do not build -in organic materials subject to deterioration.
K. Cutting and fitting:
1. Cut and fit for chases, pipes, conduit, sleeves, and grounds. Cooperate with other sections of work to
provide correct size, shape, and location.
2. Obtain approval priorto cutting or fitting anyarea not indicated orwhere appearance or strength of masonry
work may be impaired.
L. Miscellaneous Work:
1. Cooperate with other trades in installing their work in masonry. Fumish bedding mortar and set loose
lintels. Cooperate in setting bucks and frames, maintain them in position and build them in with anchors
properly placed. Do not distort frames by crowding.
2. Cut and form openings for recessed items and for electrical and plumbing installations so that wall plates
and escutcheons will completely cover the openings. Cut edges shall be clean, sharp and straight.
3. Fill solid with mortar the spaces around and behind metal door frames.
4. Point with mortar the openings around flush -mounted electrical outlet boxes.
M. Curing: In dry weather, masonry exposed to wind and sun shall be wet with a fine water spray several times
each day for at least 6 days, starting as soon as the mortar has set sufficiently to resist erosion.
N. Non -Load -Bearing Concrete Masonry Unit Partitions: Partitions which extend up to structure above for fire,
acoustical, or security reasons, shall terminate within 2" of structural deck, joists or beams to allowfor deflection.
Fill 2" gap with sealant and fire safing to achieve proper rating.
3.03 PROTECTION
A. Protect finished installation under provisions of SECTION 01 5000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND
CONTROLS.
B. Maintain protective boards at exposed external corners which may be damaged by construction activities.
C. Provide protection without damaging completed work.
D. At the end of each days work, cover the tops of masonry walls, window sills and jambs, doorjambs, and any
other unfinished exposed cavity wall opening with plastic sheeting or other suitable material. Cover shall extend
a minimum of 2' down both sides of walls and shall be held securely in place with Hohmann & Bamard, Inc.
Masonry Wall Clamp No. HB3000.
E. Keep expansion joint voids clear of mortar.
3.04 POINT AND CLEAN
A. Pointing: Upon completion of the masonry work, fill and neatly point line nail holes and other defects. Remove
mortar droppings from projecting surfaces.
B. Cleaning: Clean exposed concrete masonry units by dry brushing at the end of each days work and after final
pointing to remove mortar spots and droppings.
3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. General: Owner will employ services of an independent materials testing laboratory to perform specified
inspections and testing.
CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
VLK Architects, 2009 04 2200 - 5 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
B. Coordinate with Owner's testing laboratory to provide periodic inspection of the following task:
1. As masonry construction begins, the following shall be verified to ensure compliance:
a. Proportions of site prepared mortar.
b. Construction of mortar joints.
c. Location of reinforcement and connectors.
2. The inspection program shall verify:
a. Size and location of structural elements.
b. Type, size, and location of anchors, including other details of anchorage of masonry to structural
members, frames, or other construction.
c. Specified size, grade, and type of reinforcement.
d. Protection of masonry during cold weather (temperature below 40°F.) or hot weather (temperature
above 90'17.).
3. Prior to grouting, the following shall be verified to ensure compliance:
a. Grout space is clean.
b. Placement of reinforcement and connectors.
c. Proportions of site -prepared grout.
d. Construction of mortar joints.
C. Coordinate with Owner's testing laboratory to provide continuous inspection of the following task:
1. Grout placement shall be verified to ensure compliance with code and construction document provisions.
END OF SECTION
CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
VLK Architects, 2009 04 2200 - 6 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 05 5000
METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Miscellaneous metal work and related items.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with SECTION 01 3323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND
SAMPLES. Include details of each metal fabrication, including setting drawings for anchor bolts and other
required anchors.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Steel: ASTM A 36, shapes, plates and bars.
B. Threaded Fasteners: ASTM A 307, Grade A, bolts and nuts.
C. Stud Anchors: Provide headed stud anchors with a smooth shank of carbon steel with a minimum tensile
strength of 60,000 psi, as manufactured by Nelson Stud Welding Div. or KSM Welding Systems Div.
D. Expansion Bolts: Fed. Spec. FF-S-325, Group 11, Type A, Class 1. Provide Hilti Kwik-bolt or Ramset Trubolt
stud anchors.
E. Galvanizing Repair Paint: Organic Zinc -Rich coating containing 95% metallic zinc, by weight in the dried film;
recognized under the Component Program of Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. as an equivalent to hot -dip
galvanizing; conforming to Federal Specification DOD P-21035A for repair of hot -dip galvanizing; as
manufactured by ZRC Worldwide, Marshfield, MA (phone 800.831.3275 web site: www.zrcworldwide.com).
Provide Z.R.C. Cold Galvanizing Compound.
2.02 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate and assemble metal work in the shop to the greatest extent possible.
1. Metal surfaces shall be clean and free of mill scale and rust pitting, well -formed to shape and size with
sharp lines and angles. Shearing and punching shall leave clean true lines and surfaces. Exposed ends
and edges shall be milled smooth with corners slightly rounded.
2. Weld shop connections to the extent practical; finish exposed welds smooth. Weld joints shall be flush.
3. Cut, drill or punch holes; do not make or enlarge by burning. Provide holes where required for connecting
the work of other trades.
4. Conceal fastenings where practical. Thickness of metal and method of assembly and support shall give
ample strength and rigidity.
5. Assemble parts so that joints are tight, members are in good alignment, and the finished work reproduces
the drawing details as intended.
6. Stud Anchors: Weld stud anchors to miscellaneous shapes using welding equipment and procedures
recommended by the manufacturer of the stud anchors used.
B. Shop Painting:
1. Carbon steel surfaces shall be cleaned, degreased, and shop coated with a straight alkyd, zinc chromate,
rust inhibitive paint applied by brush or spray. Steel to be encased in concrete need not be painted.
2. Aluminum surfaces to be in direct contact with concrete and masonry shall be shop coated with zinc
chromate primer.
C. Galvanizing: Provide a zinc coating for those items indicated or specified to be galvanized, as follows:
1. ASTM A 153 for galvanizing iron and steel hardware.
2. ASTM A 123 for galvanizing rolled, pressed and forged steel shapes, plates, bars and strip 1/8" thick and
heavier, and for galvanizing assembled steel products.
METAL FABRICATIONS
VLK Architects, 2009 05 5000 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Deliver, store and erect metal work in such manner that the parts are not damaged or deformed. Install the work
true to line, plumb, level, in proper alignment with other work, and free of sags, buckles and other objectionable
defects. Anchorage shall be adequate to safely resist all stresses to which the work will normally be subjected.
B. Touch -Up Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of
shop paint and paint exposed areas with same material used for shop painting. Apply by brush or spray to
provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. For galvanized surfaces, apply galvanizing repair paint.
3.02 MISCELLANEOUS METAL SCHEDULE
A. General: The following is a general list of the metal work to be furnished underthis section of the specifications.
Other items of miscellaneous metal work shown and noted on the drawings and not mentioned elsewhere in
the specifications shall be furnished as though specifically described herein.
B. Loose Lintels: Lintels of steel shapes and plates where required at exterior brick veneer and as detailed.
1. End bearing shall be at least 8".
2. Where steel lintels are not specifically called out, furnish at least one steel angle for each 4" thickness of
masonry in the wall.
3. Wrap bearing ends of lintels with felts to achieve a bond breaker between the lintel and the masonry.
4. Galvanize steel lintefs located in exterior walls.
C. Roof Curbs: Fabricate curbs of steel angles, channels and plates at roof openings for ducts, exhaust fans and
other set -on items.
1. Miter and weld corners.
2. Bolt or weld curbs to roof framing members.
D. Ladders: Fabricate ladders of steel bars and shapes.
1. Weld all connections.
2. Bolt ladders to floor and wall with steel brackets and clips.
3. Galvanize exterior ladders after fabrication.
E. Ships Ladder: Provide prefabricated 68-degree steep incline ships ladder as distributed by fslndustires (phone
800.421.0314 web site: www.fsindustries.com).
1. Heavy duty bar grating stair treads.
2. Factory welded handrails of 1-1/2" x 14 ga. square tubing.
3. 10" structural channel stringers.
4. Standard finish gray enamel.
5. Standard 24" wide treads, 27" overall stair width.
6. Tread depth: 6".
F. Bollards: Provide bollards of size indicated, extend 3' below grade and 4' above grade, fabricated of Schedule
40 steel pipe, galvanized with G90 coating. Fill bollards with 3000 psi concrete, finish with domed top.
G. Structural Steel Door Frame for Jamb Mounted Rolling Doors: Frames of carbon steel shapes, bars and plates,
fully welded, uniform, square, and true, as detailed for the rolling doors.
1. Miter and weld corner joints and grind exposed welds smooth.
2. Weld 14 gage strip anchors to frame jambs, spaced 24" o.c. to work masonry bed joints.
3. Continuously weld exposed joints; grind exposed welds smooth.
4. Provide necessary reinforcements and drill and tap as required for finish hardware.
5. Provide steel strap anchors for securing doorframes into adjoining masonry. Weld anchors to frame jambs
no more than 12" from both bottom and head of frame and space anchors not more than 30" apart.
6. Galvanize exterior structural steel door frames and anchors.
H. Miscellaneous Steel Shapes: Channels, wide flange shapes, angles, plates, tubing, connections, and bolts
where shown and detailed on Drawings. Hot -dip galvanize where exposed to weather or touching exterior
masonry after fabrication. Set mechanical unit frames directly on joists, not on deck. Provide an angle frame
supported by structure around all roof penetrations including hatches and ductwork.
END OF SECTION
METAL FABRICATIONS
VLK Architects, 2009 05 5000 - 2 2737.03
SECTION 06 1000
ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
A. Section Includes: Wood blocking and nailers, wood furring and grounds, and plywood backing panels.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 06 2000 - Finish Carpentry.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit in accordance with SECTION 01 3323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND
SAMPLES.
B. Product Data:
1. Include all data for rough carpentry products required for Installation.
2. Fire -retardant -treated wood product data, including certification by treating plant that treated materials
comply with specified standard and other requirements as well as data relative to bending strength,
stiffness, and fastener -holding capacities of treated materials.
C. Warranty: Provide warranty of chemical treatment manufacturer for each type of treatment.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Lumber Grading: Lumber Grading Rules and Wood Species in accordance with Voluntary Product Standards.
Grading rules of following associations apply to materials furnished.
1. Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (SPIB).
2. West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (WCLIBB).
3. Western Wood Products Association (WWPA).
B. Grade Marks: Identify lumber and plywood by official grade mark.
1. Lumber: Include symbol of grading agency, mill name, grade, species, grading rules and condition of
seasoning at time of manufacturer.
2. Plywood: Include type, span rating or group number, exposure durability classification, and agency mark
of APA.
1.04 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Design structural site fabricated items under direct supervision of a professional structural engineer experienced
in design of this work and licensed in the State of Texas.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, handle, and protect products in accordance with SECTION 01 6500 - PRODUCT DELIVERY
REQUIREMENTS and 016600 - PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING REQUIREMENTS.
B. Store products above ground, on platforms or skids, and covered with waterproof coverings. Provide for
adequate air circulation.
C. Do not store seasoned materials in damp or wet locations.
D. Support products in such a way as to prevent warping and distortion.
1.06 WARRANTY
A. Provide a 20-year warranty for each type of chemical treatment.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
VLK Architects, 2009 06 1000 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Wood: Lumber for framing and general carpentry work shall be sound, well manufactured, surfaced S4S
material with a moisture content limit of 19%.
1. Dimension: SPIB grade marked No.2 Dimension Southern Pine or WCLB grade marked No. 2 Dimension
Douglas Fir.
2. Boards: SPIB grade marked No. 2 Boards Southern Pine.
3. Redwood: RIS grade marked Construction Heart California Redwood.
B. Plywood: Plywood for general carpentry work shall be APA trademarked, 23/32" minimum thickness, Tongue
& Groove.
1. Interior: B - D, Group 2, Exposure 1, fire -retardant treated.
2. Exterior. C - C plugged grade, Group 2, Exterior type, fire -retardant treated.
C. Rough Hardware:
1. Anchors, bolts, screws, and spikes shall be of proper types and sizes to support the work, to draw the
members into place, and to hold them securely. Bolt heads and nuts bearing on wood shall have standard
washers.
2. Metal fasteners to secure wood grounds and blocking to masonry and concrete shall be of the type best
suited to the conditions and spaced no more than 16" o.c. Wood plugs and nailing blocks are not
acceptable.
3. Nails shall be of the sizes and types intended for the particular use.
4. Rough hardwareexposed tothe weatheror embedded in exterior masonryand concretewalls or slabs shall
be galvanized.
5. Nails and bolts used with preservative treated lumber shall be galvanized.
2.02 WOOD TREATMENT
A. Fire -Retardant Treatment:
1. Provide fire treated wood and plywood complying with AW PA standards for pressure impregnation with fire -
retardant chemicals.
2. Kiln -dry treated items to maximum moisture content of 19% for lumber and 15% for plywood.
3. Treat all wood framing members, cants, nailers, curbs, blocking, stripping, and similar members.
4. At Interior and Substrate Locations: Wood shall be fire -retardant chemically treated and pressure
impregnated; capable of providing maximum flame spread of 25, fuel contribution of 14, and smoke
developed of 0 per ASTM E 84. Treat in accordance with AW PA C20 for lumber and C27 for plywood and
particleboard.
B. If cut after treatment, coat cut surfaces with heavy brush coat of same chemical used for treatment. Inspect
each piece of lumber or plywood after drying; discard damaged or defective pieces.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. General
1. Discard units of material with defects which might impair quality of work, and units which are too small to
fabricate work with minimum joints or optimum joint arrangement.
2. Set carpentry work accurately to required levels and lines, with members plumb and true and accurately
cut and fitted. Scribe and cope as required.
3. Securely attach carpentry work to substrates by anchoring and fastening as required by recognized
standards and as required to draw members into place and securely hold same unless otherwise indicated.
Use washers under all bolt heads.
4. Select fasteners of size that will not penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will
receive finish materials.
5. Make tight connections between members to develop full strength of members.
6. Install fasteners without splitting of wood.
7. Pre -drill as necessary.
8. Comply with APA E30 requirements for plywood.
9. Install fasteners at spacings recommended by AFPA National Design Specifications for Stress Grade
Lumber and Its Fastening -1973 for lumber and APA Guide E30 for Plywood, unless more restrictive code
requirements dictate tighter spacing or heavier fasteners.
10. Locate members as indicated on the drawings. Size, spacing or spans shall not be changed without
specific approval of Architect. Take care to place proper grades and species of members where indicated
in accordance with the lumber schedule herein.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
VLK Architects, 2009 06 1000 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
11. Temporary brace framing at the end of each days' work until all framing is completed and securely
anchored. Leave temporary bracing in place as long as required for safety. As work progresses, securely
connect work to compensate for dead load, wind and erection stresses.
B. Blocking: Install 2x6 wood blocking between studs to stiffen the structure and for the support of other work.
Provide 2x6 blocking for installation of wall hung objects.
C. Nailers: Install nailers of adequate size where detailed. Nailers shall be bolted in place. Where bolt sizes and
spacing are not specifically noted, use not less than 3/8" bolts at 32" o.c., staggered.
D. Plywood Backing Panels: Screw attach through gypsum board to supports.
3.02 PROTECTION
A. Protect products from moisture absorption and subsequent warping or deterioration until subsequent
construction can proceed.
END OF SECTION
ROUGH CARPENTRY
VLK Architects, 2009 06 1000 - 3 2737.03
SECTION 06 2000
FINISH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Millwork.
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry.
2. Section 08 1423 - Plastic -Laminate -Faced Wood Doors.
3. Section 09 9100 - Painting: applied finishes.
4. Section 10 1200 - Display Cases.
5. Section 12 3216 -Manufactured Plastic -Laminate -Clad Casework.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit following items in accordance with SECTION 013323 -SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA,
AND SAMPLES.
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's technical literature for factory fabricated items and components.
C. Shop Drawings
1. Indicate profiles, sections, and views of stock items as well as specially fabricated items for the work, at
scale large enough to permit checking for design conformity.
2. Indicate sizes, quantifies, markings, materials, wood species, finishes and accessories.
3. Include assembly and installation drawings to show methods of blocking, fastening, bracing, jointing, and
connecting to work of other trades.
D. Samples
1. Two samples of each type and species of plywood, particle board, and finish lumber specified, complete
with applied finish.
2. Each type of hardware and fastening device required in the construction of the work specified herein.
E. Certificate: Submit certification by testing plant stating chemicals and process used, conformance with
referenced standards and governing ordinances, and non -bleeding quality of treatment.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Certification:
1. Work in this section shall be performed by a firm licensed by the AWI Quality Certification Program.
2. Certification shall be evidenced through the application of AWI Quality Certification Labels and/or the
issuance of an AWI Letter of Licensing for the project.
3. Certification labels shall be applied to the work.
B. Material Grading: The grades of lumber and plywood used shall be as defined in the latest edition of AWI
Quality Standards, Sections 100 and 200, and as defined by the rules of the recognized associations of lumber
and plywood manufacturers producing the materials specified.
C. Manufacturing Standards:
1. Woodwork manufacturers shall be licensed by the AWI Quality Certification Program as competent to
perform the work specified.
2. Woodwork shall be manufactured in accordance with the standards in the current edition of the
Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards of the Architectural Woodwork Institute in the grade or grades
hereinafter specified or shown on the drawings. Any item not given a specific quality grade shall be
Premium grade as defined in the latest edition of the AWI "Quality Standards".
D. Color Uniformity: Provide plastic laminate for laminate -clad millwork and plastic faced wood doors from the
same manufacturer.
E. Fabrication Standards: Fabricate items in accordance with AWI standards listed below using Premium Grade
except at millwork scheduled to be installed in Custodian's Closets and storage rooms, which shall be Economy
Grade.
1. Lumber grades: AWI Section 100.
2. Counter tops: AWI Section 400.
FINISH CARPENTRY
VLK Architects, 2009 06 2000 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
3. Painted Millwork: AWI Section 600.
4. Miscellaneous Work: AWI Section 700.
F. Regulatory Requirements: Conform to applicable code for fire retardant requirements.
G. Accessibility Standards: The following special requirements shall be met, where required to comply with Texas
Accessibility Standards (TAS).
1. Countertop height with or without cabinet below, not to exceed a height required by TAS.
2. Kneespace clearance to be minimum clearance as required by TAS.
3. 12" deep shelving, adjustable or fixed not to exceed a range as required by TAS.
4. Wardrobe cabinets to be furnished with rod/shelf adjustable to 48" A.F.F. at a maximum 21" shelf depth.
5. Sink cabinet clearances as required by TAS.
6. Cabinet locks, latches, and other operating mechanisms shall be mounted to comply with forward reach
requirements of TAS; i.e. 15" to 48" above finish floor, except locked bottom drawers at base cabinets.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver woodwork to the project site only when dry and product storage space is available at or in the building
so that it can be kept dry and protected from injury.
1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Protection: Protect finish woodwork surfaces from soiling and damage during handling and installation. Keep
covered with polyethylene film or other protective covering. Woodwork damaged through neglect of the above
requirements shall be repaired or replaced without additional cost to the Owner.
1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Install finish carpentry products only when temperature and humidity conditions have been stabilized and will
be maintained.
B. Maintain temperature and moisture conditions as recommended by woodwork fabricator from date of installation
through remainder of construction period.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. General:
1. Comply with quality and grading standards contained herein for each material.
2. Sizes noted on drawings or indicated herein for lumberare nominal unless detailed by specific dimensions
of actual size.
3. Plywood and particleboard 3/4" thickness unless noted or detailed otherwise.
4. Products surfaced four sides, unless noted otherwise.
B. Softwood Lumber
1. Quality standard: PS 20.
2. Grading Standard: AWI premium grade.
3. Maximum moisture content: 6% for interior work; 10% for exterior work.
4. Species: Douglas fir.
5. Grain: Plain sliced.
C. Softwood Plywood
1. Quality standard: PS 1.
2. Grading standard: AWI premium.
3. Core material: C-D Plugged INT-APA.
4. Face quality: A-B INT-APA.
5. Species: Douglas fir.
6. Ply construction: 3 ply - 3/8"; 5 ply-1/2"; 7 ply - 314".
D. Hardboard
1. Quality standard: PS 58.
2. Grade: Tempered.
3. Face: Both faces sanded.
4. Thickness:1/4".
FINISH CARPENTRY
VLK Architects, 2009 06 2000 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
2.02 ACCESSORIES AND TREATMENT
A. Contact Adhesive: FS MMM-A-130B, of type recommended by millwork manufacturer to suit application.
B. Wall Adhesive: Solvent release cartridge type, compatible with substrate, capable of achieving durable bond.
C. Bob, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins, Nails, and Screws: Size and type to suit application.
D. Nails: Size and type to suit application, plain finish.
2.03 CABINETS AND COUNTERTOPS
A. General: If practical, cabinets not dependent upon job conditions shall be shop assembled.
B. Identification of Cabinet Parts by Surface Visibility:
1. Exposed Surfaces: Surfaces visible when:
a. Drawers and opaque doors (if any) are closed.
b. Behind clear glass doors.
c. Bottoms of cabinets 42" or more above finish floor.
d. Tops of cabinets below 78" above finish floor.
e. Tops of cabinets or millwork are visible from an adjacent higher elevation.
2. Semi -exposed Surfaces: Surfaces which became visible when.
a. Opaque doors are open or drawers are extended.
b. Bottoms of cabinets are more than 30" and less than 42" above finish floor.
3. Concealed Surfaces: Surfaces considered concealed when:
a. Surfaces not visible after installation.
b. Bottoms of cabinets less than 30" above finish floor.
c. Tops of cabinets over 78" above finish floor and not visible from an upper level.
d. Stretchers, blocking, and components concealed by drawers.
C. Millwork for Opaque Finish:
1. AWI quality grade: Custom grade.
2. Construction of Millwork: Details shall conform to reveal overlay design.
3. Exposed Solid Lumber Parts and Semi -exposed Parts: As governed by selected AWI quality grade unless
shown otherwise.
4. Hollow -core Wood Door: Provide institutional hollow -core wood door with medium -density overlay faces
for opaque finish. Provide wood blocking for door hardware.
D. Laminate Clad Cabinets:
1. Quality Standard: AWI Section 400 and its Division 400B Laminate Clad Cabinets, Premium Grade.
2. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Reveal overlay design.
3. Laminate Grade for Exposed Surfaces:
a. Horizontal Surfaces other than Tops: GP-50 (0.050" nominal thickness).
b. Vertical Surfaces: GP-28 (0.028" nominal thickness).
c. Edges: GP-50 (0.050" nominal thickness).
4. Semi -Exposed Surfaces: Provide high pressure laminate, GP-28, including backs of doors and drawers.
Other interior surfaces of drawers may be sealed wood; reference SECTION 09 9100 - PAINTING
5. Shop joints will be allowed only when the required lengths exceed the lengths of plastic regularly available.
Field joints shall be shop prepared and pre -fitted with bolt -up type fasteners.
6. PVC edging banding will not be acceptable.
7. The use of LPDL (Melamine) will not be acceptable.
8. Plastic Laminate: General purpose grade, high pressure decorative laminate meeting the physical
requirements of NEMA LD 3 and with a suede finish. Colors shall be as selected by Architect from
manufacturer's full color and pattern range. Architect reserves the right to select one color for the exposed
surfaces of the basic components of cabinets and a different color forthe following components of cabinets:
door and drawer fronts (including edges ofdoor and drawer fronts), backs of open shelving, and countertop
and backsplash, unless shown otherwise. Prod uct/manufacturer; one of the following:
Formica Brand Laminate; Formica Corp.
Nevamar; Nevamar Co., LLC; Decorative Products Div.
Wilsonart; Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc.
Pionite; Panolam Industries
E. Countertops:
1. Quality Standard: AWI Section 400 and its Division 400C Tops.
2. Type of Top: High pressure decorative laminate complying with Premium Grade.
3. Laminate Cladding for Horizontal Surfaces: High pressure decorative laminate, HGS (0.050" nominal
thickness) Grade. Laminate shall be selected from one of the manufacturers listed above.
FINISH CARPENTRY
VLK Architects, 2009 06 2000 - 3 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
4. Edge Treatment: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces. Plastic laminate edges shall return
across all open ends of cabinets.
5. Joints between tops and backsplash shall be square.
6. PVC edging will not be acceptable.
7. The use of LPDL (Melamine) will not be acceptable.
2.04 SHELVING
A. Exposed shelving shall be of the same AWI quality grade and finish as the cabinets in which installed.
1. Set fixed shelves on cleats where so detailed, and house other fixed shelves into supports.
2. Adjustable Shelf Supports: Provide twin pin design with anti tip -up shelf restraints for both 3/4" and 1"
shelves. Design to include keel to retard shelf slide -off, and slot for ability to mechanically attach shelf to
clip. Load rating to be minimum 300 lbs. each support without failure. Cabinet interior sides shall be flush,
without shelf system permanent projection. Product/manufacturer; one of the following, no substitutions:
a. SC240 Plastic Shelf Clip; Case Systems, Inc.
b. Cat. No. 282A7.402; Hafele
c. Clear Polycarbonate Shelf Clip; TMI System Design Corp.
2.05 SHOP FABRICATION
A. Fabricate millwork to AWI premium standards for reveal overlay construction as detailed (or as indicated in AW I
Architectural Millwork Details if details are not present).
B. Sanding/Filling
1. Perform work in accordance with AWI.
2. Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws.
3. Apply wood filler in exposed nail and screw indentations and leave ready to receive applied finishes.
4. On items to receive transparent finishes, use wood filler which matches surrounding surfaces and of types
recommended for applied finishes.
C. Prime seal concealed and semi -concealed surfaces. Brush apply only.
D. Provide cutouts for plumbing fixtures, inserts, appliances, outlet boxes, and other fixtures. Verify locations of
cutouts from site dimensions. Seal edge surfaces of cutouts.
E. Before proceeding with millwork required to be fitted to other construction, obtain measurements and verify
dimensions of shop drawing details for accurate fit.
F. Fabricate casework to dimensions, profiles, and details shown.
G. Route and groove back of flat trim members, kerf backs of other wide flat members except
plywood or veneered members.
H. Assemble casework in mill in as large of units as practicable to minimize field cutting and fitting.
I. Miter trim joints, where required, by joining, splining, and gluing to complying with requirements for specified
grade.
J. Band exposed plywood and particleboard edges with hardwood trim, 3/8" x width of sheet unless otherwise
noted or shown to be trimmed with plastic or aluminum.
K. On high pressure laminate work:
1. Apply laminate finish in full, uninterrupted sheets of maximum practical lengths. Apply backing sheets to
reverse side of items receiving laminate surfacing. Use decorative vertical grade laminate for cabinet
interiors.
2. Form corners and butt joints with hairline joints.
3. Do not locate joints within 2' of sink cut-out.
4. Cap all exposed edges with laminate.
L. Construction
1. General
a. Unless otherwise indicated, construct millwork bodies, bottoms, dividers, sides, tops, shelves, doors,
drawer fronts and countertops of 3/4" sheet material.
b. Use 1/2" thick solid lumber material for drawer sides, back and sub -front.
c. Use 1/4" veneer core panel product for drawer bottoms and cabinet backs, unless noted otherwise.
2. Overlay reveals
a. Unless shown or noted otherwise, allow 3/4" between adjacent drawers and doors and at vertical edges.
FINISH CARPENTRY
VLK Architects, 2009 06 2000 - 4 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
b. Allow 3/4" reveal at top and bottom of wall cabinets and at bottom of base cabinets.
3. Methods of Joinery
a. Provide face plates, paneled ends, and construction, glued under pressure.
b. Provide body web frames of stile plowed and stub tenoned construction.
c. Join case body members by dado or concealed dowel joints.
d. Do not use mechanical fasteners or metal clips for attachment of body members to other body
members or to web frames.
4. Base cabinets
a. Use finished end panels unless condition will be fully concealed.
b. Provide unfinished toe space, prepared to receive base by others.
c. Construct drawers with Lock Shoulder rabbited (tongue -and -groove) construction.
5. Wall cabinets
a. Use finished end panels unless condition will be fully concealed.
b. Provide continuous 1" x 3" anchor cleat at top and bottom of cabinet interior full width of unit. Secure
cleat in rabbit over back, then glue and spot pin.
6. Countertops
a. Provide with 2" deep face edge, faced with high pressure laminate unless noted or shown otherwise.
b. Provide loose 4" high pressure laminate covered splashes typically at countertops unless taller
splashes shown or noted.
c. Regardless of drawing indications, provide a 1/2" thick wood strip on back side of splash to increase
the splash top thickness for coping the splash to the wall.
d. Countertops containing sinks shall be medium density overlay plywood.
2.06 FINISH
A. Sand work smooth and set exposed nails.
B. Apply wood filler in exposed nail indentations.
C. On items to receive transparent finishes, use wood filler which matches surrounding surfaces and of types
recommended for applied finishes.
D. Refer to SECTION 09 9100 - PAINTING for field applied finish descriptions.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Verify location of wood blocking prior to installation of finish carpentry.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. General: Installation of standing and running trim and millwork shall comply with the applicable requirements
of Section 1700 Installation of Architectural Woodwork (interior) of the AW I Quality Standards.
B. Workmanship: Exposed woodwork shall have a smooth finish, free from machine and tool marks, abrasions,
and raised grain on exposed surfaces. Joints shall be tight and formed so as to conceal shrinkage.
C. Interior Woodwork Installation:
1. Accurately scribe and closely fit face plates, filler strips and trim strips to abutting walls and to irregularities
of adjacent surfaces.
2. Set wood finish straight, plumb, and level, in true alignment, and rigidly fastened in place. Nailing and
fastening shall be concealed where possible. Set exposed nail heads for puttying.
3. Anchor base and wall cabinets to walls with fully threaded oval head wood screws with finishing washers
set at a minimum of 12" o.c.
3.03 CABINET HARDWARE SCHEDULE
A. In addition to the items of hardware specifically noted and shown on the drawing details, furnish and install the
following hardware for cabinets. This schedule is intended to include all hardware needed to completely equip
all cabinets specified in this Section. Verify cabinets shown and detailed on the drawings with cabinets listed
in this schedule. In the event of omissions in the schedule, furnish hardware of the kind and quality scheduled
for similar cabinets.
1. Each 3/4" overlay cabinet door more than X high:
1-1/2 pr. Interleaf design hinges HT1592-4 (Stanley).
1 wire pull4484 satin aluminum (Stanley).
1 pr. Magnetic Catches: 325 (Ives).
FINISH CARPENTRY
VLK Architects, 2009 06 2000 - 5 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
2. Each 3/4" overlay cabinet door less than 3' high:
1 pr. Interleaf design hinges HT1592-4 (Stanley).
1 wire pull 4484 satin aluminum (Stanley).
1 pr. Magnetic Catches: 325 (Ives).
3. Each 1-1/8" overlay cabinet door more than Thigh:
2-1/2 pr. Interleaf design hinges HT1592-4 (Stanley).
1 wire pull 4484 satin aluminum (Stanley).
1 flap stay No. 499.050.02.0215 or 499.050.03.0215 (Mepla)
1 pr. Magnetic Catches: 327 (Ives).
4. Each cabinet drawer:
KV #1300 Extension Drawer Slides.
KV #8400 Extension Drawer Slides at File Drawers.
1 wire pull 4484 satin aluminum (Stanley)
5. Shelf and Rod Hardware:
1 hanger rod KV660SS
1 shelf and rod support KV1195
2 rod Flanges KV734
6. Grommets: Model No. LO-3 (Doug Mockett & Co., Inc.)
7. Casters: Provide light -duty swivel plate casters, product No. HTSSV-100-BR2S-TS as supplied by Casters
of Fort Worth, Inc. (phone 877.227.8377). Casters shall be equipped with manufacturer's standard locking
mechanism.
END OF SECTION
FINISH CARPENTRY
VLK Architects, 2009 06 2000 - 6 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 07 2100
BUILDING INSULATION
PART 1-GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Acoustical and fire safing building insulations.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 07 8400 - Firestopping.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit following items under provisions of SECTION 013323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA,
AND SAMPLES.
B. Product Data: Including performance specifications, composition and applicable standards.
C. Samples: Submit 12" x 12" size samples of each type insulation proposed for use.
D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Written installation instructions, including attachment recommendations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: (See Articles below for specific products)
Fibrex Co.
Manville Building Materials Marketing Division, Manville Corp., Denver, CO
Owens Coming Fiberglas Corp., Toledo, OH
Certainteed Corp., Valley Forge, PA
U.S. Gypsum Co.
2.02 BATT ACOUSTICAL INSULATION
A. Unfaced glass fiber composition, 3-1/2" thick, minimum one IbJc.f. density, meeting following standards:
1. ASTM E 84: FHC 25/50 maximum.
2. ASTM C 518: R value of 3.2 per inch of thickness.
3. ASTM C 665: Type I, Class A.
B. Following products are acceptable
1. Sonobatts by Owens Corning Fiberglas Corp.
2. Sound Control Batts by Certainteed Corp.
2.03 FIRE SAFING INSULATION
A. Mineral fiber composition, 4" thick, 4.0 pcf density, meeting following standards
1. ASTM E 84: FHC 15/10 maximum.
2. ASTM C 665: Type 1, Class A
3. ASTM Ell9: Testing Procedures.
4. FS HH-1-558B: Class 1 and 2.
B. Following products are acceptable
1. Thermafiber Safing Insulation by U.S. Gypsum Co.
2. FBX Safing Insulation by Fibrex Co.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A. Joint Tape: Pressure sensitive type, recommended by insulation manufacturer.
B. Insulation Adhesive: Type recommended by insulation manufacturer.
C. Stick Clips
1. Galvanized sheet metal with impaling pins and retainer washers.
BUILDING INSULATION
VLK Architects, 2009 07 2100 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
2. Size and type to suit application and insulation thickness.
3. Approved by manufacturer of insulation for intended use.
D. Stick Clip Adhesive
1. High strength, resilient adhesive, having drying time of 0 to 30 minutes (rapid initial set), and 24 hours final
set.
2. Compatible with insulation adhesive, insulation and substrate.
3. Non -corrosive to galvanized steel.
E. Supportive Wire Mesh: Hexagonal design, woven mesh "chicken wire" style.
F. Tie wire: Minimum 18 ga. annealed wire.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Examine areas to receive insulation for conditions that will adversely affect the execution and quality ofthe work.
Do not start this work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Fit insulation tight within stud spaces, above soffits, behind fascias, and tight to and behind mechanical and
electric services within plane of insulation, leaving no gaps or voids. Butt insulation tightly. Cut and fit tightly
around items penetrating insulation. Stagger and butt joints, or cavity of a cavity wall system.
B. Install in conformance with the manufacturers recommendations. Cut material to fit closely around obstructions
and projections.
1. Acoustical Insulation:
a. Install acoustical insulation between the studs in those gypsum drywall partitions so detailed and noted
on the drawings. Staple blankets to the gypsum board or otherwise fasten in place as recommended
by the manufacturer of the blankets. Fill all voids.
b. Where indicated at suspended gypsum board ceilings, lay sound attenuation blankets between wire
hangers on back of gypsum board and over cross runners. Do not install on top of or within 3" of light
fixtures.
C. Safing Insulation: Compress and install insulation on wire hangers or clips in spaces between floor slabs and
curtain walls. Also, in openings in floor slabs to seal around telephone cables, piping, ducts and other utilities
per SECTION 07 8400 - FIRESTOPPING.
3.03 SCHEDULES
A. Provide acoustical insulation in thickness and locations as follows:
1. Walls: 3-1/2" (In areas where shown on drawings)
2. Above Ceilings: 3-1/2" (In areas where shown on drawings)
END OF SECTION
BUILDING INSULATION
VLK Architects, 2009 07 2100 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 07 8400
FIRESTOPPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Firestopping for all fire -rated construction complete, including, but not limited to:
1. Firestopping in conjunction with gypsum board, masonry and plaster partitions.
2. Firestopping shall include, but not be limited to the following applications:
a. Sealing gaps between tops of partitions and roof/floor decks.
b. Sealing gaps between structure and glass curtainwalls with fire safing insulation.
c. Other locations where "firestopping", "firestop", or "safing" is indicated.
d. Where required by codes.
e. Control joints and expansion joints in masonry or gypsum board fire -rated partitions.
f. Expansion joints in roof and floor assemblies.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 07 2100 -Thermal Insulation.
2. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants.
3. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies.
4. Divisions 23 and 26.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Refer to SECTION 013323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES.
B. Product Data: Submit copies of manufacturer's literature. Include data substantiating that materials comply with
specified tested system requirements.
C. Samples: Submit duplicate samples of each type of firestopping material and accessories.
D. For those firestop applications that exist for which no UL tested system is available through a manufacturer, an
engineering judgement derived from similar UL system designs or other tests will be submitted to local
authorities having jurisdiction for their review and approval prior to installation. Engineer judgement drawings
must follow requirements set forth by the International Firestop Council.
1.03 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Do not allow firestopping materials to become wet, soiled, or covered with ice or snow. Comply with
manufacturer's recommendations for handling, storage and protection.
1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Do not install firestopping materials until building is completely enclosed and weathertight.
B. Coordinate installation with the worts of other trades. Reference SECTION 013100 -PROJECT MANAGEMENT
AND COORDINATION.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.01 PRODUCT/MATERIAL PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Except as otherwise indicated, firestop materials shall be classified in the Underwriters Laboratories (UL)
Building Materials Directory, "Section XHEZ-Through-Penetration Firestop Systems", and/or "Section XHH W-Fill
Void or Cavity Materials", and "Section XHBN - Joint Systems" for specific project conditions:
1. Time rating ("F", Fire and "T", Temperature) (T rating is only required for construction joint systems).
2. Floor or wall assembly and material.
3. Penetrating materials/items diameters, or void space.
4. Through opening size.
5. Annular space between penetration opening and penetrating item.
B. Firestopping materials shall provide a fire -rating commensurate with the adjacent construction rating.
C. Firestop materials shall comply with ASTM E 84: Surface Burning Characteristics.
FIRESTOPPING
VLK Architects, 2009 07 8400 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
D. Firestop materials shall have been tested in accordance with ASTM E 814, UL 1479 or UL 2079.
E. Firestop materials shall be free of asbestos.
F. Firestop materials shall be paintable or capable of receiving finish materials in those areas which are exposed
to view and which are scheduled to receive finishes.
G. Obtain firestop products from a single manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Installer must examine substrate and conditions under which firestopping work is to be performed, and notify
Contractor in writing of any unsatisfactory conditions.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install firestopping materials including foaming, packing and accessory materials to fill openings around
penetrations in floors and walls, to seal gaps between decks and partitions, gaps between structure and
curtainwall, etc., to provide fire -stops with fire resistance ratings indicated for floor or wall assembly in which
penetration occurs. Use silicone based materials for all wet or damp conditions.
B. Install firestop materials and systems in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and applicable UL
Building Materials Directory assemblies.
C. Cut and friction fit fire safing type insulation firestopping to completely fill all gaps and voids. Provide stick -clips,
sheet metal closures, and any other accessories to support insulation.
D. Where floor openings are 4" or more in width and subject to traffic or loading, install firestopping materials
capable of supporting same loading as floor.
E. Remove damming materials after curing if made of other than fire resistant materials.
F. Protect materials from damage on surfaces subject to traffic.
3.03 FIELD TESTING
A. Firestop materials and installation may be tested by an independent testing laboratory. Refer to SECTION
01 4523 - TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES.
3.04 CLEAN UP
A. Clean up all debris caused by the work of this Section, keeping the premises clean and neat at all times.
B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by the work of this section.
END OF SECTION
FIRESTOPPING
VLK Architects, 2009 07 8400 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 07 9200
JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Sealing and caulking of joints.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 03 3000 - Cast -In -Place Concrete.
2. Section 07 8400 - Firestopping.
3. Section 08 8000 - Glazing.
4. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of SECTION 013323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES.
B. Submit product data indicating sealant chemical characteristics, performance criteria, limitations, color
availability and application instructions.
C. Submit two samples 1/4" diameter x 4" in size illustrating color selections available.
D. Submit manufacturer's certificate under provisions of SECTION 014500 - QUALITY CONTROL that products
meet or exceed specified requirements.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum 3
years documented experience.
B. Applicator: Company specializing in applying the work of this section with minimum 3 years documented
experience and approved by sealant manufacturer.
C. Conform to Sealant and Waterproofers Institute requirements for materials and installation.
1.04 FIELD SAMPLES
A. Provide samples under provisions of SECTION 01 3323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND
SAMPLES.
B. Construct one field sample joint, 5 feet long, illustrating sealant type, color, and tooled surface.
C. Locate where directed.
D. Accepted sample may remain as part of the work.
1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Requirements: No caulking shall be done at temperatures below 40°F.
1.06 WARRANTY
A. Furnish to the Owner a written warranty that the sealants shall remain watertight for a period of 2 years from the
date of acceptance of the building. Joints which prove defective by leaking, cracking, melting or shrinking of
the sealant shall be re -sealed without additional expense to the Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Pourable Urethane (Type 1 Sealant):
1. Multicomponent conforming to ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade P (pourable), Class 25, Use T (traffic).
2. Color. Custom color as selected by Architect.
JOINT SEALANTS
VLK Architects, 2009 07 9200 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
3. Prod uct/manufacturer:
Urexpan NR-200, Pecora Corp.
Sonolastic SL 2 Sealant; Degussa Building Systems
THC 900 (Self leveling) or 901 (low sag), Tremco.
NO SUBSTITUTIONS
B. Silicone, General Purpose (Type 2 Sealant)
1. One -part rubber based silicone conforming to ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50.
2. Color: As selected by Architect.
3. Acceptable products
790 Building Sealant, Dow Corning.
Silpruf LM SCS2799, GE Silicones.
Spectrem 1, Tremco.
C. Silicone, Paintable (Type 3 Sealant):
1. One -part silicone rubber sealant for interior use.
2. Acceptable product:
Silicone Rubber Sealant, Paintable Dow Corning.
D. Acrylic Latex (Type 4 Sealant)
1. One -part, non -sag acrylic latex, conforming to ASTM C 834, Type P, Grade NF.
2. Acceptable products:
AC-20+, Pecora Corp.
Sonolac; Sonnebom, Div. of ChemRex, Inc.
Tremflex 834; Tremco.
NO SUBSTITUTIONS
2.02 ACCESSORIES
A. Primer: Non -staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.
B. Joint Cleaner: Non -corrosive and non -staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with
joint forming materials.
C. Joint Backing: ASTM D 1056 and D 1565 round. In vertical joints use closed cell polyethylene foam rod;
oversized 30 to 50 percent larger than joint width. In horizontal joints, use solid neoprene or butyl rubber, Shore
A hardness of 70.
D. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that surfaces and joint openings are ready to receive work and field measurements are as shown on
drawings and recommended by the manufacturer.
B. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing substrate.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Joint surfaces shall be clean and dry. Remove loose mortar and other material completely with compressed
air or by brushing.
1. Joints to be caulked shall be at least 1 /4" wide unless specifically specified smaller. At any point where the
width of the joint is appreciably less, cut or grind out the joint to that width to assure an adequate volume
of sealant along the length of the joint, except at concrete paving joints, those shall remain 1/8" wide as
indicated.
2. Pack with backing material the voids and recesses around metal frames which are deeper than the depth
required for caulking. Leave the proper depth for the sealant.
3. In open joints and where detailed, install rod stock as backing material. Roll the material into the joints to
avoid stretching. The natural thickness of the rod stock shall be approximately twice the thickness of the
joint in which it is installed.
4. In raked masonryjoints, apply a bondbreaker strip of polyethylene or masking tape along the bottom of the
joints.
5. Where sealant is to be applied against smooth metal surfaces, wipe these surfaces clean with a suitable
ketone solvent immediately prior to caulking.
JOINT SEALANTS
VLK Architects, 2009 07 9200 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
6. Particular attention shall be paid to the preparation of horizontal joints in wear surfaces to be filled with
sealant. Adjust joint depth to comply with sealant manufacturer's recommendations by malleting down the
joint filler or filling in with rod stock as may be required. Joints in concrete paving shall be primed in
accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Perform preparation in accordance with ASTM C 1193 for solvent release sealants, C 1193 for latex base
sealants, C 919 for acoustical applications, and C 1193 for elastomeric sealants.
3.03 APPLICATION
A. Priming: Prime porous joint surfaces, particularly masonry and concrete. Test the primer to make sure it causes
no staining of the material on which it is applied.
B. Depth of Sealant: Seal joints to a depth of approximately 1/2 the joint width, but never less than 1/4" deep.
Follow the sealant manufacturer's recommendations where possible.
C. Apply the sealant in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
1. Force the sealant into joints with enough pressure to expel all air and provide a solid filling. Correct any
flowing or sagging before final inspection is made.
2. Where adjacent surfaces permit, use masking tape to obtain straight, even lines. Remove tape immediately
after the joints have been sealed.
3. Fill joints flush with adjacent surfaces except where a recessed joint is specifically detailed. Tool beads with
a sled runner or similar tool to insure full contact with joint faces.
4. For caulking horizontal joints in wear surfaces, use a gun with a narrow nozzle. Apply the flow type sealant
with the nozzle riding along the bottom so that the sealant is forced up to completely fill the slot without
cavities. Provide and use a portable vacuum cleaner to remove loose dirt from the joints just ahead of the
caulking gun.
D. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags.
E. Tool joints concave. Sealant shall achieve a firm skin before surface coating is applied.
3.04 CLEANING/REPAIRING
A. Clean adjacent surfaces of soiling due to caulking operations. This applicator shall be responsible for and shall
bear the cost of replacing any material damaged or discolored due to caulking operations.
B. Repair or replace defaced or disfigured finishes caused by work of this section.
3.05 SEALANT SCHEDULE
A. Locations specified below for sealants and caulking required under this section are general and shall not be
considered as affecting the required use of sealing compounds specified under other sections of the
specifications.
SEALANT TYPE APPLICATION
1 a. Interior horizontal control and expansion joints in flooring, stone, masonry and
the flooring and at junctures between these materials and other adjacent
materials.
2 a. Sealing of joints between plumbing fixtures and substrates and between
plastic laminate splashes and adjacent tops and walls.
b. Threshold and windowsills set in full bed of sealant.
3 a. General caulking as part of interior painting in joints subject to movement.
4 a. General caulking as part of interior painting.
END OF SECTION
JOINT SEALANTS
VLK Architects, 2009 07 9200 - 3 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 08 1100
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Hollow metal doors and frames.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 08 1423 - Plastic -laminate -faced Wood Doors.
2. Section 08 7100 -Door Hardware: hardware locations.
3. Section 08 8000 - Glazing: glass for doors, sidelights, and borrowed lights.
4. Section 09 9100 -Painting: finishing of hollow metal doors and frames.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with SECTION 01 3323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND
SAMPLES.
1. Include door sizes, construction, frame types, wall anchors, and accessories required for installation.
1.03 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable local building codes for fire rated requirements of metal door/metal frame and wood
door/metal frame assemblies.
B. Fire Rated Door Construction: Conform to NFPA 252 or UL 10C.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Standard: Provide steel doors and frames complying with the Steel Door Institute SDI-100 and as herein
specified.
B. Fire -Rated Door Assemblies: Provide door and frame assemblies which are identical in materials and
construction to units tested in door and frame assemblies per NFPA 252 and which are labeled and listed for
ratings indicated by UL. Metal UL classification markers shall be attached to these doors and frames.
1. Test Pressure (positive -pressure testing): After 5 minutes into the test, the neutral pressure level in furnace
shall be established at 40 inches or less above the sill.
C. Conform to requirements of SDI-100.
D. Installed frame and door assembly to conform to UL 10C for fire -rated class indicated or scheduled.
E. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three
years documented experience.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver metal doors and frames to the project site with no dents or open seams and store upright in a protected
dry area. Provide packaging and wrapping to protect hollow metal items.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Provide steel doors and frames as manufactured by one of the following:
Ceco Door Products; an ASSA ABLOY Group Co.
Curries Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group Co.
Deansteel Mfg., Inc.
Mesker Door, Inc.
Republic Builders Products Co.
Rocky Mountain Metals, Inc.
Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand Co.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
VLK Architects, 2009 08 1100 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008, commercial quality, leveled, cold -rolled steel free of scale and other surface
defects.
2.03 FABRICATION
A. Flush Steel Doors: Full flush type of welded seamless construction with no visible seams or joints on faces or
vertical edges.
1. Face sheets of 18 gage steel reinforced, stiffened and sound -deadened by laminating to small cell
impregnated kraft honeycomb core completely filling the door or by formed steel vertical stiffeners spaced
6" o.c. and attached to face sheets by spot welds and with the spaces between stiffeners filled with
inorganic blanket insulation material. At exterior doors, provide insulation value of R - 8.0 for foamed -in -
place polyurethane. At fire rated doors, provide mineral fiberboard core as scheduled aril/or as required
to meet applicable codes.
2. Continuous vertical interlocking joints on lock and hinge edges with seams continuously welded, filled and
dressed smooth. Bevel vertical edges.
3. Top and bottom edges closed with continuous recessed steel channels spot welded to both faces. Top
edge of exterior doors sealed flush with closing channel to exclude water.
4. Fixed glass moldings welded to security side of door. Loose moldings of 20 gage steel fastened with
countersunk flat head screws. Fabricate stops to receive vinyl gaskets.
5. Overlapping steel astragals for pairs of labeled doors as required by manufacturer to meet codes.
B. Steel Frames: Combination buck, frame and trim type of 16 gage steel for interior frames and 14 gage steel
for exterior frames. Provide frames with face width, throat opening, backbend, and jamb depth as per
dimensions shown.
1. Brake -form to profile free of warp, buckles, and fractures with comers square and sharp. Form stop integral
with frame except where detailed otherwise. Dress sheared edges straight and smooth.
2. Close comerjoints tight with trim faces mitered and continuously welded. Dress exposed welds flush and
smooth.
3. Fabricate frames for large openings in knocked -down sections forfield assembly with buttjoints and internal
reinforcing sleeves. Knocked -down frame assemblies shall be trial assembled in the shop.
4. Loose glazing stops shall be 16 gage steel, mitered comers, fastened with countersunk flathead screws.
Fabricate stops to receive vinyl gaskets.
5. Weld 14 gage steel floor anchors inside each jamb with two holes each anchor for floor anchor bolts.
6. Furnish frames with steel spreader temporarily fastened to the feet of both jambs for rigidity during shipping
and handling.
7. For each jamb in masonry construction provide 3 or more 16 gage adjustable jamb anchors of the T strap
type spaced not more than 30" apart. Furnish yoke type Underwriters anchors for labeled door openings
only.
8. For each jamb in steel stud construction provide 4 or more 18 gage drywall type jamb anchors. Weld
anchors inside each jamb and wire or bolt to the studs.
C. Shop Finish: After fabrication, doors and frames shall be degreased, phosphatized, and factory painted inside
and out with a rust inhibitive synthetic primer. Apply mineral filler to eliminate weld scars and other blemishes.
D. Fabricate frames and doors with hardware reinforcement plates welded in place. Provide mortar guard boxes.
E. Reinforce frames wider than 48" with roll formed steel channels fitted tightly into frame head, flush with top.
F. Prepare frame for silencers. Provide three single rubber silencers for single doors and mullions of double doors
on strike side, and two single silencers on frame head at double doors without mullions.
G. Attach fire -rated label to each frame and door unit.
H. Close top edge of exterior door flush with inverted steel channel closure. Seal joints watertight
I. Fabricate frames for masonry wall coursing with 2" head member.
2.04 HARDWARE PREPARATION
A. Prepare doors and door frames for hardware. Mortising, reinforcing, drilling, and tapping shall be done at the
factory for mortised hardware. Reinforcement shall be provided for surface -applied hardware, and the drilling
and tapping for this hardware shall be done in the field. Provide plaster guards for hinge and strike
reinforcements and cutouts on frames.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
VLK Architects, 2009 08 1100 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
B. Reinforcement plates in doors and frames for hardware shall be 7 gage for hinges and 12 gage for all other
hardware.
C. Punch for and install rubber silencers on all interior hollow metal door frames. Furnish 3 silencers for each
single door and 2 silencers for each pair of doors. Set out and adjust strikes to provide clearance for the
silencers. Omit silencers on exterior door frames.
2.05 CLEARANCES
A. Doors shall have pre -fit clearances of:
1. At Head and Lock Stile: 1/8".
2. At Hinge Stile: 1/16".
3. At Door Sill:
a. Without Threshold: 1/8" from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering.
b. With Threshold: 1/8" from bottom of door to top of threshold.
4. Between meeting edges of pair of doors: 1/8".
B. Fitting Clearances for Fire -Rated Doors: Comply with NFPA 80. Bevel fire -rated doors 1/8" in 2" in lock edge.
2.06 ACCESSORIES
A. Rubber Silencers: Resilient rubber.
B. Anchors: Three per jamb, typically, of type to suit supportive construction.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify substrate conditions under provisions of SECTION 01 3100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND
COORDINATION.
B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.
C. Verify surfaces and conditions are ready to receive work of this section. Notify Architect of any existing
conditions which will adversely affect execution. Beginning of execution will constitute acceptance of existing
conditions.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install frames in accordance with SDI-105.
B. Install doors in accordance with DHI.
C. Install fire -rated frames and place fire -rated doors in accordance with NFPA 80.
D. Coordinate with masonry and wallboard construction for anchor placement.
E. Coordinate installation of glass and glazing.
F. Install doors accurately in frames, maintaining specified clearances.
G. Setting Frames:
1. Check frames for rack, twist and out -of -square, and correct.
2. Set frames accurately to maintain scheduled dimensions, hold head level and maintain jambs plumb and
square.
3. Anchor frames securely to adjacent construction. Anchor to floor at each jamb with two bolts to prevent
twist.
4. Leave spreader bars in place until frames have been permanently built into the walls.
5. Install fire -rated frames in accordance with NFPA 80.
H. Hanging Doors:
1. Fit and hang the doors to maintain specified door clearances. Metal hinge shims are acceptable to
maintain clearances.
2. Doors shall be out of wind and shall operate smoothly and quietly after adjustment.
3. Place fire -rated doors with clearances as specified in NFPA 80.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
VLK Architects, 2009 08 1100 - 3 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
3.03 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/8" measured with straight edge, corner to corner.
END OF SECTION
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
VLK Architects, 2009 08 1100 - 4 2737.03
CATE Renovations
ABM Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 08 1423
PLASTIC -LAMINATE -FACED WOOD DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Solid core plastic -faced wood doors.
2. Fire -rated plastic -faced wood doors.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 08 1100 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: hollow metal frames.
2. Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware: location of hardware.
3. Section 08 8000 - Glazing: glass for doors.
4. Section 12 3216 - Manufactured Plastic -laminate -clad Casework
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit in accordance with SECTION 01 3323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND
SAMPLES.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate sizes, construction, core materials, edge banding dimensions and stop profile.
C. Product Data: Indicate door core materials and construction; type and characteristics.
D. Samples:
1. Submit a sample, 6" by 6", of each plastic laminate finish and color selected.
2. Submit a 12" x 12" sample of solid core door panel indicating construction, core, face and edge detail.
3. Submit 8-1/2" x 11" paint color samples of door glazing frame paint.
E. Certificates: Submit certification that doors comply with reference standards fabrication requirements, signed
by authorized representative of door manufacturer.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Standard: Comply with the requirements of "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards, Guide Specifications
and Quality Certification Program" as published by Architectural Woodwork Institute.
B. Fire -Rated Wood Doors: Provide plastic faced wood doors which are identical in materials and construction to
units tested in door and frame assemblies per NFPA 252 and which are labeled and listed for ratings indicated
by UL or Warnock Hersey. Provide metal UL or Warnock Hersey classification markers attached to door.
1. Test Pressure (positive -pressure testing): After 5 minutes into the test, the neutral pressure level in furnace
shall be established at 40 inches or less above the sill.
C. Color Uniformity: Provide plastic laminate for laminate clad millwork, casework, and plastic faced wood doors
from the same manufacturer.
D. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three
years documented experience.
1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire Door Construction: Conform to NFPA 252.
B. Installed Fire -Rated Door Assembly: Conform to NFPA 80 for fire -rated class as scheduled.
1.05 DELIVERY
A. Deliver doors to the project site ready for installation and to receive hardware. Each unit shall be individually
plastic wrapped at the factory for protection in transit and storage.
PLASTIC -LAMINATE -FACED WOOD DOORS
VLK Architects, 2009 08 1423 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
1.06 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Provide Life -of -Installation warranty on manufacturer's standard form, signed by
manufacturer, installer, and contractor, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that are
defective in materials or workmanship or have warped (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 42-by-84-inch
section. Warranty shall specifically include installation of replacement doors required during term of the
warranty.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Provide plastic laminate faced wood doors as manufactured by one of the following:
Eggers Industries, Architectural Door Div.
Marshfield DoorSystems, Inc.
VT Industries, Inc.
2.02 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION
A. Flush Doors: Premium Grade, PC-HPDL-3 (3-ply), as defined in Section 1300 of AWI Quality Standards.
1. Core: Particleboard meeting Type I, Density C, Class 1 of CS 236.
2. Stiles: Vertical edges at least 1-1/8" and bonded to core. Species shall be close grain hardwood with
factory -painted finish to match faces.
3. Rails: Top and bottom rail edges at least 1-1/8" and bonded to core. Mill option.
4. Faces: HGS (nominal 0.048") high pressure decorative laminated plastic conforming to NEMA LD 3.
Laminate to be bonded to both faces. Fire -rated plastic laminate faced wood doors shall be surfaced with
fire -rated (UL Stamped) laminated plastic sheet. Color shall be as selected by Architect from
manufacturer's full color and pattern range. Product/manufacturer; one of the following:
Formica Brand Laminate; Formica Corp.
Nevamar; TexMar, Inc.
Pionite Decorative Laminate; Pioneer Plastics Corp.
Wilsonart; Ralph Wilson Plastics Co.
5. Stops: Provide shop primed metal glazing frames at all light openings. Fasten by through -bolted
countersunk flathead screws. Field painted color as selected by Architect.
B. Labeled Doors:
1. "B" Label Doors (90-minute and 60-minute): AWI Type FD 1-1/2 or 1 non-combustible solid mineral core
with chemically treated hardwood edge banding and fire -retardant cross banding. Pairs of "B Label" doors
shall be furnished with necessary metal edge and astragal trim if required by door manufacturer to meet
code requirements.
2. "C" Label Doors: AWI Type FD 3/4 non-combustible solid mineral core with chemically treated hardwood
edge banding and fire -retardant cross banding.
3. 20-Minute Label Doors: AWI Type FD 1/3 solid particleboard core with a 20-Minute Fire Label.
4. Cut-outs for vision panels in fire -rated doors shall be factory cut. No field cutting shall be permitted.
5. Stops: Provide listed shop primed metal glazing frames at all light openings. Fasten by through -bolted
countersunk flathead screws. Field painted color as selected by Architect.
C. Fitting:
1. Cutouts for mortise hardware shall be made to template at the factory.
2. Top and bottom rail edges and core exposed by cutouts for hardware shall be factory sealed.
3. Doors shall have pre -fit clearances of:
a. At Head and Lock Stile: 1/8"
b. At Hinge Stile: 1/16"
c. At Door Sill:
1) Without Threshold: 1/8" from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering.
2) With Threshold: 1/8" from bottom of door to top of threshold.
d. Between meeting edges of pair of doors: 1/8"
4. Fitting Clearances for Fire -Rated Doors: Comply with NFPA 80. Bevel fire -rated doors 1/8" in 2" in lock
edge.
2.03 ADHESIVE
A. Facing Adhesive: Type I - waterproof.
PLASTIC -LAMINATE -FACED WOOD DOORS
VLK Architects, 2009 08 1423 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
2.04 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate non -rated doors in accordance with AWI Quality Standards requirements.
B. Fabricate fire -rated doors in accordance with AWI Quality Standards and to UL or Warnock -Hersey
requirements. Attach fire -rating label to door.
C. Provide lock blocks at lock edge and top of door for closer for hardware reinforcement
D. Fit door metal edge trim to edge of stiles after applying veneer facing.
E. Bond edge banding to cores.
F. Factory machine doors forfinish hardware in accordance with hardware requirements and dimensions. Do not
machine for surface hardware. Provide solid blocking for through -bolted hardware.
G. Factory pre -fit doors for frame opening dimensions identified on shop drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify frame opening conditions under provisions of SECTION 01 3100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND
COORDINATION.
B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.
C. Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb or are out -of -tolerance for size or alignment.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Condition plastic faced wood doors to the average prevailing humidity in the building prior to fitting and hanging.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. General: Installation of doors shall comply with the applicable requirements of Section 1700 Installation of
Architectural Woodwork (Interior) of the AWI Quality Standards.
B. Hang doors to maintain uniform clearances. Doors shall be out of wind and shall operate smoothly and quietly
after adjustment. Replace doors damaged during installation.
C. Cutting and fitting of plastic laminate faced doors at the project site will not be permitted. Doors which do not
fit properly shall be replaced.
D. Install fire -rated doors in corresponding fire -rated frames according to NFPA 80. Trim stiles and rails of
fire -rated doors only to extent permitted by labeling agency.
E. Pilot drill screw and bolt holes.
F. Machine cut for hardware. Core for handsets and cylinders.
G. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames specified in SECTION 08 1100 - HOLLOW METAL
DOORS AND FRAMES and hardware specified in SECTION 08 7100 - DOOR HARDWARE.
3.04 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A. Conform to AWI requirements for fit and clearance tolerances.
B. Maximum Diagonal Distortion (Warp): 1/8" measured with straight edge or taut string, corner to comer, over an
imaginary 36" x 84" surface area.
C. Maximum Vertical Distortion (Bow): 1/8" measured with straight edge or taut string, top to bottom, over an
imaginary 36" x 84" surface area.
D. Maximum Width Distortion (Cup): 1/8" measured with straight edge or taut string, edge to edge, over an
imaginary 36" x 84" surface area.
PLASTIC -LAMINATE -FACED WOOD DOORS
VLK Architects, 2009 08 1423 - 3 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
3.05 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust work under provisions of SECTION 01 7700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES.
B. Adjust door for smooth and balanced door movement.
END OF SECTION
PLASTIC -LAMINATE -FACED WOOD DOORS
VLK Architects, 2009 08 1423 - 4 2737.03
SECTION 08 3100
ACCESS DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
CATE Renovations
ABM Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
A. Section Includes: Wall and ceiling access doors.
B. Related Sections
1. Section 03 3000 - Cast -In -Place Concrete: Openings in concrete.
2. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Openings in gypsum board walls and ceilings.
3. Section 09 3013 - Ceramic Tiling.
4. Section 09 9100 -Painting: Field paint finish.
5. Division 22 - Plumbing components requiring access.
6. Division 23 - Mechanical components requiring access.
7. Division 26 - Electrical components requiring access.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit in accordance with SECTION 01 3323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND
SAMPLES. Include manufacturer's installation instructions.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform work in accordance with UL requirements for fire -rated doors.
1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable code for fire -rated access units.
1.05 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify that field measurements are as instructed by the manufacturer.
1.06 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate work under provisions of SECTION 01 3100 - COORDINATION.
B. Coordinate the work with mechanical and electrical work requiring access units.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Provide wall and ceiling access doors as manufactured by one of the following:
J.L. Industries, Inc.
Karp Associates, Inc.
Larsen's Mfg. Co.
Milcor Limited Partnership
Nystrom Building Products Co.
2.02 GENERAL
A. Flush metal panel access doors.
B. Size: As required for ease of access, but not less than 12" x 12".
C. Material:
1. Model W202: Painted steel 14 gauge frame and door.
2. Model MS3202: Stainless steel 16 gauge frame and door.
3. Models DW3203 and K3200: Painted steel 16 gauge frame; 14 gauge door.
4. Model ATR3204: Painted steel 16 gauge frame; 18 gauge door.
5. Fire -Rated Model 3218: Painted and stainless steel 14 gauge frame; 20 gauge door.
D. Lock: Screwdriver operated, with metal cam.
ACCESS DOORS
VLK Architects, 2009 08 3100 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
2.03 ACCESS UNITS - WALLS
A. Non -Fire -Rated Door and Frame Unit:
1. In Cast -in -Place Concrete: Model M3202 (painted) manufactured by Milcor.
2. In Masonry. Model W202 (painted) manufactured by Milcor.
3. In Ceramic Tile on Gypsum Board on Steel Studs: Model MS3202 (stainless steel) manufactured by Milcor.
4. In Gypsum Board on Steel Studs: Model DW3203 (painted) manufactured by Milcor.
5. In Plaster on Metal Furring: Model K3200 (painted) manufactured by Milcor.
B. Fire -Rated Door and Frame Unit: 1-1/2 hour UL B label fire rating
1. In Cast -in -Place Concrete: Model 3218 (painted) manufactured by Milcor.
2. In Masonry. Model 3218 (painted) manufactured by Milcor.
3. In Ceramic Tile on Gypsum Board on Steel Studs: Model 3218 (stainless steel) manufactured by Milcor.
4. In Gypsum Board on Steel Studs: Model 3218 (painted) manufactured by Milcor.
5. In Plaster on Metal Furring: Model 3218 manufactured by Milcor.
2.04 ACCESS UNITS - CEILINGS
A. Non -Fire -Rated Door and Frame Unit:
1. In Gypsum Board on Metal Furring: Model DW 3203 manufactured by Milcor.
2. In Plaster on Metal Furring: Model K3200 manufactured by Milcor.
3. In Metal T-Bar Ceiling: Model ATR 3204 manufactured by Milcor.
B. Fire -Rated Door and Frame Unit: 1-1/2 hour UL B label fire rating
1. In Gypsum Board on Metal Furring: Model 3218 manufactured by Milcor.
2. In Plaster on Metal Furring: Model 3218 manufactured by Milcor.
2.05 FINISHES
A. Painted Finish: One coat baked enamel primer with baked enamel finish, color as selected by Architect.
B. Stainless Steel: No. 4 finish.
C. Aluminum: Mill finish.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify substrate conditions under provisions of SECTION 01 3100 - COORDINATION.
B. Verify that rough openings for door and frame are correctly sized and located.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations.
B. Set frames accurately in position and attach securely to supports with plane of face panels aligned with adjacent
finish surfaces.
C. Position unit to provide convenient access to concealed work requiring access.
END OF SECTION
ACCESS DOORS
VLK Architects, 2009 08 3100 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 08 3300
COILING DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Insulated coiling doors
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 05 5000 - Metal Fabrications: steel frames for coiling door openings.
2. Section 09 9100 - Painting: finish painting of coiling doors.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with SECTION 013323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND
SAMPLES. Include installation details and operating procedures.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Wind Load: Exterior coiling doors shall be constructed to safely resist uniform pressure (velocity pressure) of
22 psf.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 INSULATED COILING DOORS
A. Provide face -of -wall mounted insulated coiling door. Product/manufacturer; one of the following:
Thermal Door, Atlas Door, Div. of Clopay Building Products Co., Inc.
Insulated Rolling Door; Cookson Co.
620 Series Stormtite Service Doors; Overhead Door Corp.
1. Operation: Motor operator.
a. Motor.
1) Provide high starting torque motor of the size and design as recommended by door manufacturer,
reduction gearing, solenoid brake, limit switches, emergency hand chain with electrical interlock,
magnetic relay contactor, overload protection, prewiring to terminal block, stoplock safety bearing
to prevent doors from falling in event of motor damage.
2) 120 V, 1 phase.
3) Provide key operated control switch.
4) Motor operator shall be equipped with electric safety edge in conjunction with the door operator
control.
2. Curtains:
a. Flat -faced interlocking slats cold roll formed of galvanized steel.
b. End of alternate slats to be fitted with malleable iron endlocks.
c. Slat design shall satisfy a windload of 20 psf.
d. Curtain to be reinforced with bottom bar consisting of two angles of galvanized steel. Install
weatherseal on bottom of bars.
e. Polyurethane insulation.
f. Backing slats of galvanized steel.
3. Spring Counterbalance:
a. House in steel pipe of diameter and wall thickness to restrict maximum deflection to 0.03" per foot of
door width.
b. Springs to be helical torsion type.
c. Spring tension to be adjustable by means of external adjustment wheel.
4. Bracket Plates: 1/4" thick min. steel formed to fit contour of end bracket.
5. Guides:
a. Structural galvanized steel angles of 3/16" min. thickness.
b. Fit guides with two flexible weathering strips (both sides).
6. Hoods:
a. Fabricated of galvanized steel sheet metal no lighter than 24 gage, laterally reinforced.
b. Provide intermediate hood supports for hoods exceeding 16-0".
c. Fit with internal neoprene header weather baffle.
7. Locks: Provide cylinder locks on bottom bars less standard cylinder for key operation. Cylinder locking for
motor operated doors to include electrical interlock to prevent operation before door is unlocked.
8. Finish:
a. Galvanized Surfaces: Apply phosphate coating for paint adherence.
COILING DOORS
VLK Architects, 2009 08 3300 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
b. Ungalvanized Surfaces: Shop coat of rust inhibiting metallic primer.
9. Weatherstripping: Door to be fully weatherstripped at sill, hood, and at guides.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Coiling doors shall be installed by skilled mechanics supervised by the manufacturer's authorized
representative.
B. Erect the doors, guides, and accessories in a rigid substantial manner, straight and plumb, and with horizontal
lines level.
3.02 TESTING AND ADJUSTING
A. Upon completion of installation, put all items through at least ten operating cycles. Make required adjustments
and assure that components are in optimum operating condition.
END OF SECTION
COILING DOORS
VLK Architects, 2009 08 3300 - 2 2737.03
SECTION 08 7100
DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
A. Section Includes: Commercial door hardware, weatherstripping, sound seals, smoke seals, and thresholds to
fully equip doors throughout the project.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 08 1100 -Hollow Metal Doors and Frames.
2. Section 08 1423 - Plastic -laminate -faced Wood Doors.
3. Section 12 3216 - Manufactured Plastic -Laminate -Clad Casework: casework hardware.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Hardware Schedule: Submit in accordance with SECTION 01 3323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA,
AND SAMPLES. Hardware schedule shall be in the vertical format as outlined by the Door and Hardware
Institute. Schedule items required for the entire project. Include a picture or catalog cut of each item and list
the finish. Provide manufacturer's installation instructions for closers.
B. Templates: Upon receipt of reviewed hardware schedule, provide one copy of reviewed schedule with templates
to each fabricator of doors and frames and other work effected by the hardware.
C. Accessibility Standards: Submit a letter verifying that the hardware submitted is in conformance with Texas
Accessibility Standards (TAS), Architectural Barriers Act —Article 9102, Vernon's Texas Civil Statutes and Texas
Government Code, Chapter 469.
D. Certifications:
1. Architectural Hardware Consultant shall inspect complete installation and certify that hardware and
installation has been furnished and installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
2. Provide two copies of certifications to Architect.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Departures from Scheduled Designations: Onlythose products listed will be accepted. NO SUBSTITUTIONS
WILL BE ACCEPTED. Manufacturers listed as being acceptable must still meet the conditions of this
specification.
B. Fire -Rated Door Assemblies: Provide door hardware for assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and
labeled for ratings indicated by UL or Warnock Hersey, based on testing according to NFPA 252.
1. Test Pressure (positive -pressure testing): After 5 minutes into the test, the neutral pressure level in fumace
shall be established at 40 inches or less above the sill.
C. Accessibility Standards: Hardware shall be in conformance with Texas Accessibility Standards (TAS),
Architectural Barriers Act —Article 9102, Vernon's Texas Civil Statutes and Texas Government Code, Chapter
469.
1. Handles, Pulls, Latches, Locks, and other Operating Devices: Shape that is easy to grasp with one hand
and does not require tight grasping, tight pinching, or twisting of the wrist.
2. Door Closers: The sweep period of closers shall be adjusted so that from an open position of 70°, the door
will take at least three seconds to move lro an open position of approximately 3" from strike side of door.
3. The maximum force for pushing or pulling open a door shall be as follows:
a. Exterior hinged doors: Reserved.
b. Interior Hinged Doors: Not to exceed 5 Ibf. applied perpendicular to door.
c. Sliding or Folding Doors: Not to exceed 5 Ibf. applied parallel to door at latch.
d. Fire doors: Adqusted to meet minimum closing force permitted by governing fire safety standards.
D. Life Safety Standard; NFPA 101: Comply with the following for means of egress doors:
1. Latches, Locks, and Exit Devices: Not more than 15 Ibf to release the latch. Locks shall not require the
use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation.
2. Door Closers: Not more than 30 Ibf to set door in motion and not more than 15 Ibf to open door to minimum
required width.
DOOR HARDWARE
VLK Architects, 2009 08 7100 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
E. Architectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: A person who is currently certified by DHI as an Architectural
Hardware Consultant (AHC) and who is experienced in providing consulting services for door hardware
installations that are comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this project.
F. Prior to the installation of the finish hardware, it shall be a contract requirement that the hardware supplier and
his representatives be present at the initial installation and to render recommendations as required for the
following hardware installation procedures:
1. Installation of all hardware, except hinges, associated with one pair of exterior aluminum entrances.
2. Installation of all hardware, except hinges, associated with one exterior hollow metal door.
3. Installation of all hardware, except hinges, associated with one pair of fire -rated plastic laminatewood doors
which utilize vertical rod exit devices.
4. Installation of all hardware, except hinges, associated with one fire -rated plastic laminate wood corridor
door.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Material shall be delivered to project site in a timely manner so as not to impede job progress. Factory drop
shipments will not be accepted. Material must be marked with manufacturer's name, number, finish, door
number, and hardware set number.
1.05 WARRANTY
A. Door closers shall cant' a published ten-year limited factory warranty against defects in workmanship and
operation.
B. Door Push and Pull Bars shall carry a published two-year factory warranty against defects in material and
workmanship.
C. Exit devices shall carry a published three-year limited factory warranty against defects in workmanship and
operation.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Hinges:
1. Furnish butt hinges with flat button tips.
2. Provide hinges from one manufacturer.
3. Acceptable manufacturers and respective catalog numbers:
Hager Ives
BB1279 5BB1
BB1168 5BB1 HW
BB1191 513131
BB1199 5BB1 HW
1250 ---
NO SUBSTITUTIONS
4. Furnish hinges in size, weight, and finishes listed in hardware set. Where scheduled as BB, provide ball
bearing hinges. Oil -impregnated porous metal bearing hinges are not acceptable.
B. Continuous -geared Hinges:
1. Provide continuous gear hinges manufactured of extruded 6063-T6 aluminum alloy with anodized finish,
manufactured to template.
2. Hinges shall be non -handed and shall be a pin -less assembly of three interlocking extrusions applied to
the full height of the door and frame.
3. Vertical loads shall be carried on chemically lubricated polyacetal thrust bearings.
4. Provide hinges from one manufacturer.
5. Fasteners shall be stainless steel, plated, and hardened.
6. Where installed on fire rated doors, continuous hinges shall be labeled for this use.
7. The following are acceptable manufacturers:
ABH Manufacturing, Inc.
Hager Hinge Co.
Markar
Pemko Manufacturing Co., Inc.
Select Products Limited
Zero International, Inc.
8. Furnish hinges in size, weight, and finishes listed in hardware set. Hinges with visible knuckle separations
are not acceptable.
DOOR HARDWARE
VLK Architects, 2009 08 7100 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
C. Mortise Locks and Trim:
1. Provide mortise locks with three piece anti -friction latch.
2. Provide ASA 47/a" standardized strikes with lips of sufficient length to protect door jambs and trim from
damage by latch bolt.
3. Furnish strikes with steel wrought boxes.
4. Lock trim and rose shall be cast or solid wrought material.
5. The following are acceptable products:
NT Falcon Lock M Series DN
NO SUBSTITUTIONS
6. Provide mortise lock in functions as listed in hardware sets.
7. Locks and trim shall be from the same manufacturer.
8. All locksets shall be provided with a mortise cylinder.
D. Removable Core Cylinders: Provide Falcon Locking System removable cores at cylinders for locks at all exit
devices, for cylinder dogging, and at all other locks requiring cylinder cores.
NO SUBSTITUTIONS.
E. Exit Devices:
1. Provide exit devices in functions as listed in hardware sets and with cylinder dogging, including cylinder
cores.
2. Provide exit devices with stainless steel touch pads.
3. Provide recessed metal strikes where floor and head strikes are scheduled.
4. For mortise exit devices, furnish strikes with wrought boxes.
5. Provide and install exit devices with sex nuts and bolts.
6. Provide two stabilizers per door.
7. Fire Exit Devices: Complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency
for fire and panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305 and NFPA 252.
8. Removable Mullions: All mullions shall be Arrow Series S21 2" x 3" Steel Tubular Mullion.
9. Provide full -height rod and latch guard protectors as scheduled.
10. The following are acceptable products:
Arrow S3600, S3700, S3800, or S3900 series; in functions and finishes as listed in hardware sets.
F. Door Closers:
1. Provide door closers with a 50% power adjustment and adjustable backcheck.
2. Provide and install door closers with sex nut and bolts.
3. Do not install on the outside of exterior dons nor on the corridor side of room doors. Install door closers so
that the arm is not visible on the public side of the door.
4. Whenever it is necessary to install a closer on the side of the door away from the hinges, use parallel arm,
regardless of model number specified.
5. All closers shall have full covers. Door closer covers shall be attached with a minimum of two screws.
Snap -on covers will not be acceptable.
6. All exterior closers and high traffic closers are required to have extra -duty arms, "EDA" Cush with Hold
Open.
7. Provide all necessary brackets and adaptor plates for a complete installation.
8. Door closers shall be installed to allow for 180° swing.
9. Provide door closers from one manufacturer.
10. The following are acceptable products:
All Closers
LCN Closers 4041 series HCUSH
NO SUBSTITUTIONS
G. Door Pulls and Push Bars:
1. Push and pull bars shall be through bolted or back-to-back mounted as conditions require.
2. Where through bolts are required, provide a cap of the same finish for the head of the exposed bolt.
3. Finish: US32D.
4. Acceptable Manufacturers:
H.B. Ives
Rockwood Mfg. Co., Inc.
Trimco Builders Hardware
H. Push, Pull, and Kick Plates:
1. Provide plates in 0.050" thick stainless steel with countersunk flat -head screws and four edges beveled.
2. Attach pulls with through bolts.
3. Provide kick plates 2" less door width.
DOOR HARDWARE
VLK Architects, 2009 08 7100 - 3 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
Acceptable Manufacturers:
Accent Div. Hager Hinge Co.
H.B. Ives
Rockwood Mfg. Co., Inc.
Trimco Builders Hardware
Overhead Stops:
1. Provide solid brass or bronze units at exterior and interior vestibule doors.
2. Acceptable Manufacturers:
ABH Manufacturing, Inc.
Glynn -Johnson
Rixson-Firemark
Door Stops:
1. Floor Stops:
a. Floor stops shall be solid cast brass or bronze.
b. Furnish and install floor stops with machine screws and expansion shield.
c. As conditions require, provide necessary carpet risers.
2. Acceptable Manufacturers:
Accent Div. Hager Hinge Co.
H.B. Ives
Rockwood Mfg. Co., Inc.
Trimco Builders Hardware
K. Door Bolts:
1. Surface Bolts: Minimum of 1/2-inch diameterrods of brass, bronze, or stainless steel with minimum 12-inch
long rod for doors up to 84 inches in height. Provide longer rods for doors exceeding 84 inches.
2. Flush Bolts: Manual design, minimum 5/8" throw. Equip with extension bolts of lengths to locate operating
mechanism at 12 inches above floor for bottom unit and not over 72 inches above floor for top unit. Provide
dust -proof strikes without thresholds.
3. Acceptable Manufacturers:
ABH Manufacturing, Inc.
Glynn -Johnson
Hager Companies
H.B. Ives
Rockwood Mfg. Co., Inc.
Trimco
L. Fasteners:
1. Furnish necessary screws, bolts, and other fasteners of suitable size and type to anchor the hardware in
position for long life under hard use.
2. Where necessary, furnish fasteners with toggle bolts, expansion shields, sex bolts, and other anchors,
appropriate for the material to which the hardware is to be applied and according to the recommendations
of the hardware manufacturer.
3. Fasteners shall be packaged with hardware.
4. Provide fasteners of the same material and finish as the hardware.
2.02 KEYING REQUIREMENTS
A. Construction Cylinders and Cores: During construction, cylinders shall be keyed alike. Under no circumstances
shall the Contractor receive any of the permanent building masterkeys or change keys. Upon completion of the
building, the hardware supplier shall install the permanent key system.
1. All cylinders shall be keyed at the Falcon Factory. All cores shall be Factory Grandmaster keyed as
instructed by the school district. Stamp change keys with key set symbol. All change keys and master keys
shall be shipped directly to the school district.
2. Furnish construction cores at all doors. Furnish conventional and high -security cylinders as specified under
hardware sets.
B. Master -key locks in one set. Furnish 3 Grandmaster keys, 9 master keys, and 3 change keys for each lock.
1. Keys shall be nickel silver and shall be identified as to location by tagging before delivery to the Owner.
2. Individual keying shall be in accordance with the Owner's wishes and generally shall be as follows.
a. Kitchen doors keyed alike (keyed to district kitchen schedule).
b. Exterior doors to lobbies, corridors, and stairs keyed alike.
c. Doors to any one room keyed alike.
d. Doors to each separate room keyed separately.
e. Keys to closets and storage rooms to pass other doors in the room where located, but not the reverse.
f. Group toilet areas shall be keyed alike to mechanical equipment rooms and custodial area.
DOOR HARDWARE
VLK Architects, 2009 08 7100 - 4 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
3. Hardware supplier shall coordinate with the Owner and the lock manufacture for the purpose of determining
the specific building keying system. The hardware supplier shall be responsible for installing the permanent
cylinders as directed by the Owner.
C. Key Cabinet: Provide keycabinet and complete two -tag key control system, mounted as directed. Provide Lund
Deluxe No. 1204 as manufactured by Lund Equipment Co., Inc.
2.03 FINISHES
A. Comply with base material and finish requirements indicated by the following:
1. Hinges, exterior US32D
2. Hinges, interior US26D
3. Continuous geared hinges US28
4. Locksets US26D
5. Exit Devices US26D x US32D touch bar
6. Closers SBL
7. Push Bars, metal US32D
8. Pulls, metal US32D
9. Push Plates, metal US32D
10. Kick Plates US32D
11. Flush Bolts US26D
12. Dustproof Strike US26D
13. Stops US26D
14. Overhead Stops US26D
2.04 WEATHERSTRIPPING, SOUND SEALS, SMOKE SEALS, AND THRESHOLDS
A. Provide weatherstripping, sound seals, smoke seals, and thresholds as manufactured by one of the following:
Hager Companies
National Guard Products, Inc.
Pemko Mfg. Co.
Reese Weatherstripping & Thresholds
Zero International, Inc.
B. Materials:
1. Extruded Aluminum: Alloy 6063-T5, and compatible with specified finish.
2. Rolled Aluminum: Alloy 5052-H14, mill finish.
3. Gasketing: UL or Warnock Hersey approved material.
4. Fasteners: Stainless steel, cadmium plated steel, or hard aluminum.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Fit and install hardware on doors in conformance with the following hardware schedule. Hardware shall be
installed by tradesmen skilled in the application of commercial grade hardware.
1. Provide properly sized and accurately located mortises and drilled holes for hardware on wood doors, using
appropriate jigs, templates and power equipment.
2. Metal frames shall be drilled and tapped accurately.
3. Fit hardware accurately, remove until painter's finish is applied, and then replace and adjust.
4. Ensure that operating parts move freely and smoothly without binding, sticking, or excessive clearance.
5. Position and install the various hardware items on doors to agree with the locations specified, or as may
be specifically detailed.
6. Floor stops in areas to be carpeted shall be installed directly on the concrete surface before the carpet is
installed.
7. Keep levers and pugs covered with heavy cloth or plastic wraps until final acceptance of the building. Upon
completion, leave hardware clean, undamaged, and in proper working order.
Weatherstripping, Smoke Seals, and Sound Seals: Install weatherstripping, smoke seals, and sound seals along
both jambs and across the head of each door in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
1. Fit tightly at corners for continuity.
2. Adjust so that door closer can fullyclose and latch dooragainst pressure of weatherstripping, smoke seals,
and sound seals.
3. Install astragals at pairs of doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
4. Door Bottom Seals:
a. Attach door bottom seals to lower edge of exterior doors.
DOOR HARDWARE
VLK Architects, 2009 08 7100 - 5 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
b. Mount UL rated automatic door bottom in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Adjust for
desired drop and install end cover plate to lock adjustment in place.
Install thresholds at all exterior doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Set thresholds for
exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of sealant.
3.02 HARDWARE LOCATIONS
A. Locate hardware for doors as follows, unless specifically detailed otherwise:
Locks and Latches
Push Plates
Pulls (interior)
Push/pull (exterior/vestibule)
Deadlocks (with Locks & Latches)
Deadlocks (with Push/Pull)
Panic Hardware
Hinges
3.03 ADJUST AND CLEAN
40" (t1 ") floor to centerline of strike.
45" from floor to centerline of plate.
43" from floor to centerline of grip.
38" from floor to centerline of push bar and pull.
48" from floor to centerline of cylinder.
37" from floor to centerline of cylinder.
38" from floor to centerline of cross bar.
Manufacturer's standard locations.
A. Adjust and clean the operating hardware at each door. Lubricate parts with lubricant recommended by
manufacturer (graphite type, if no other recommended). Replace units which cannot be adjusted to operate
freely and smoothly.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Architect and hardware supplier will review door hardware installation and hardware supplier shall prepare a
written report stating whether installed work complies with ordeviates from requirements, including whether door
hardware is properly installed and adjusted.
3.05 HARDWARE SCHEDULE
A. This schedule is intended to include hardware required. Verify doors shown and scheduled on the drawings
with doors listed in this schedule. In the event of omissions in the schedule, furnish hardware of the kind,
quantity, and quality scheduled for similar locations. Hardware for a complete installation is required, whether
specifically mentioned herein or not
B. Designations in hardware schedule are taken from the following manufacturers:
Arrow
(A)
National Guard Products (N)
Hager
(H)
Schlage (S)
Falcon
(F)
Trimco (T)
LCN
(L)
Hardware Set No. 1: [overhead coiling doors]
2 mortise cylinders
C987
(F)
Remainder of hardware by door manufacturer.
Hardware Set No. 2: [ext HMI
1-1/2 pr. hinges
BB1191 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 NRP
(H)
1 exit device
S3803 x IC x SP-03 x TB
(A)
1 rim cylinder
C953
(F)
1 door closer
4041 x HCUSH
(L)
1 exterior stop
269F
(H)
1 kick plate
K0050 10" x 2" LDW
(T)
1 overhead rain drip
16A
(N)
1 set head &jamb weatherstripping
130SA
(N)
1 bottom rail weatherstripping
20ONA
(N)
1 threshold
8135N
(N)
DOOR HARDWARE
VLK Architects, 2009 08 7100 - 6 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
Hardware Set No. 3: [sgl toilet]
1-1/2 pr. hinges BB1279 4-1/2x4-1/2 (H)
1 lockset M311 x DN (F)
1 lever thumb turn XL1100-800 (S)
1 floor stop 259F (H)
Hardware Set No. 4: (classroom)
1-1/2 pr. hinges
BB1279 4-1/2 x 4-1/2
(H)
1 lockset
M431 x DN
(F)
1 floor stop
259F
(H)
Hardware Set No. 5: (classroom outswing)
1-1/2 pr. hinges
BB1168 4-1/2 x 4-1/2
(H)
1 lockset
M431 x DN
(F)
1 closer
P4041
(L)
1 kick plate
K0050 10" x 2" LDW
(T)
1 floor stop
259F
(H)
Hardware Set No. 6: (classroom w/sound seals)
1-1/2 pr. hinges
BB1168 4-1/2 x 4-1/2
(H)
1 lockset
M431 x DN
(F)
1 closer
4041
(L)
1 kick plate
K0050 10" x 2" LDW
(T)
1 floor stop
259F
(H)
1 set head & jamb sound seals
107NA
(N)
Hardware Set No. 7: [office]
1-1/2 pr. hinges
BB1279 4-1/2 x 4-1/2
(H)
1 lockset
M521 x DN
(F)
1 floor stop
259F
(H)
Hardware Set No. 8: (classroom w/smoke seals)
1-1/2 pr. hinges
BB1168 4-1/2 x 4-1/2
(H)
1 lockset
M431 x DN
(F)
1 closer
4041
(L)
1 floor stop
259F
(H)
1 set head & jamb smoke seals
130SA
(N)
Hardware Set No. 9: [ext HM]
1-1/2 pr. hinges
BB1191 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 NRP
(H)
1 lockset
M521 x DN
(F)
1 door closer
4041 x HCUSH
(L)
1 exterior stop
269F
(H)
1 kick plate
K0050 10" x 2" LDW
(T)
1 overhead rain drip
16A
(N)
1 set head &jamb weatherstripping
130SA
(N)
1 bottom rail weatherstripping
20ONA
(N)
1 threshold
8135N
(N)
DOOR HARDWARE
VLK Architects, 2009 08 7100 - 7 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
Hardware Set No. 10: [ext pr HM w/removable mullion]
3 pr. hinges
BB1191 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 NRP
(H)
1 lockset
M521 x DN
(F)
1 door closer
4041 x HCUSH
(L)
2 flush bolts
3915 x 12" rod
(T)
1 removable mullion
S21
(A)
4 sets stabilizers
S90
(A)
2 exterior stops
269F
(H)
1 kick plate
K0050 10" x 2" LDW
(T)
1 overhead rain drip
16A
(N)
2 set head &jamb weatherstripping
130SA
(N)
2 bottom rail weatherstripping
20ONA
(N)
1 threshold
8135N
(N)
END OF SECTION
DOOR HARDWARE
VLK Architects, 2009 08 7100 - 8 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 08 8000
GLAZING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Glass and glazing accessories.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants
2. Section 08 1100 -Hollow Metal Doors and Frames.
3. Section 08 1423 - Plastic Faced Wood Doors.
1.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Glass and glazing materials of this Section shall provide continuity of building enclosure vapor and air barrier
1. In conjunction with materials described in SECTION 07 9200 - JOINT SEALANTS.
2. Maintain continuous air and vapor barrier throughout glazed assembly from glass pane to heel bead of
glazing sealant.
B. Design and size glass to withstand dead loads and live loads caused by pressure and suction of wind as
calculated in accordance with building code, and measured in accordance with ASTM E 330.
C. Limit glass deflection to 1/200 or flexure limit of glass with full recovery of glazing materials, whichever is less.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data and samples under provisions of SECTION 01 3323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT
DATA AND SAMPLES.
B. Provide structural, physical and environmental characteristics, size limitations, special handling or installation
requirements.
C. Provide data on glazing sealant. Identify colors available.
D. Samples:
1. Submit 2 samples of each type of glass (except clear glass), 12" x 12" in size, illustrating glass unit,
coloration, design.
2. Submit 4" long bead of glazing sealant in color selected.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Glazing Standards: Comply with recommendations of Glass Association of North America (GANA) "Glazing
Manual."
B. Source Quality Control: Glass shall be identified by the manufacturer's labels of grade and quality. Temporary
labels shall not be removed until final cleaning. Permanent labels on tempered glass shall not be removed.
C. Safety Glazing Standard: Where safety glass is indicated or required, provide type of products indicated which
comply with ANSI Z97.1 and testing requirements of CPSC 16 CFR Part 1201 for Category II materials.
D. Fire -Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and
inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing
according to NFPA 252.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:
A. Protect glass and glazing materials during delivery, storage, and handling as required to prevent edge damage
to glass, and damage to glass and glazing materials from effects of moisture including condensation, or
temperature changes, and other causes.
GLAZING
VLK Architects, 2009 08 8000 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:
A. Provide glass as manufactured by one of the following:
Visteon Float Glass Products
Guardian Industries Corp.
Technical Glass Products
Oldcastle Glass
Pilkington Libbey-Owens-Ford
PPG Industries, Glass Group
Nippon Sheet Glass Co., Ltd.
B. Provide wire glass as manufactured by Safti (phone 888.653.3333 web site www.safti.com)
2.02 GLASS
A. Tempered Glass: ASTM C 1048, Type I.
1. Interior: Class 1 (Clear), Quality q3 (Glazing select). Kind FT - Fully Tempered, Condition A - Uncoated
surfaces, %" thickness.
2. Exterior: Class 2-gray [bronze] tint (Tinted Heat -Absorbing and Light- Reducing), Quality q3 (Glazing
select), Kind FT - Fully Tempered, Condition A - Uncoated surfaces, %" thickness.
a. Shading Coefficient: 0.66 t0.05.
b. Solar Heat Gain: 0.57 t0.05.
B. Wire Glass: Propriety Category II safetyglazing product in the form of clear, 1/4" thick, fire -rated wire glass with
safety film applied to meet CPSC 16 CFR 1201, Category If 400 ft. lbs. Product/manufacturer. SuperLite I-W TM;
Safti, a division of O'Keeffe's, Inc.
1. Each piece of fire -rated glazing material shall be labeled with a permanent logo including name of product,
manufacturer, testing laboratory, fire rating period, and safety glazing standards.
3.03 GLAZING MATERIALS
A. Glazing Compound: Comply with ASTM C 1311 or FS TT-S-00230, one -part, non -sag acrylic polymeric sealant.
Product/manufacturer, one of the following:
Acryl-R Acrylic Sealant; Schnee -Moorehead, Inc.
Mono 555; Tremco
B. Channel Glazing Strips; Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Provide black vinyl channel glazing strips, Glazing
Vinyl for 990 Sliders Part #6062-01 as manufactured by Kawneer.
C. Accessories: Setting blocks, tape, vinyl gaskets and spacer strips as required for a complete installation.
D. Glazing Sealant for Fire -Resistive Glazing Products: Identical to product used in test assembly to obtain
fire -protection rating.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Examine areas to receive glass for conditions that will adversely affect the execution and quality of work. Do
not start this work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Setting Glass: Glazing shall be done at the site by skilled glaziers in conformance with the general conditions
governing glazing in the GANA Glazing Manual.
1. Glazing ofaluminum windows and storefrontshall be done in conformance with the methods recommended
by the manufacturer of the aluminum items. Beads or stops furnished with the items to be glazed shall be
used to secure the glass in place.
2. For interior hollowmetal doorand frame glazing, install channel glazing strips and place glass within glazing
strips. Install the removable stop and position the channel glazing strip to seal completely the void around
the glass.
3. Verify glass sizes for required edge clearances by measuring the openings. Cut each piece accurately and
fit to its particular position. Center glass in the opening vertically and horizontally. Use edge blocks in
vertical jambs to prevent lateral "walking" of the glass.
GLAZING
VLK Architects, 2009 08 8000 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
4. Glass shall have clean cut edges. Do not seam, nip, stone or strike edges, or scarf corners, and do not
install glass with flared edges at the bottom. Do not bump, drag, or rest the edge of a glass light against
metal or other hard objects.
5. Set tempered glass with tong marks completely concealed or in as inconspicuous a location as possible.
B. Special requirement for Wire Glass: In fire -rated doors, embed glass in putty with metal stops complying with
NFPA 80.
3.03 CLEANING
A. Upon completion of the building, clean all glass on both sides and remove labels, paint spots, putty and other
defacement. Replace damaged glass with new.
END OF SECTION
GLAZING
VLK Architects, 2009 08 8000 - 3 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 09 2116
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
PART 1-GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Metal stud wall framing.
2. Furred wall framing.
3. Metal channel ceiling framing.
4. Gypsum board partitions, ceilings, and furrings
5. Finishing of panel joints.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 05 4000 - Cold -Formed Metal Framing: exterior wall studs.
2. Section 07 2100 - Thermal Insulation: acoustical insulation.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit in accordance with Section 013323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, SAMPLES.
Submit materials list of items proposed to be provided, manufacturer's data indicating compliance with specified
requirements, and manufacturer's recommended installation procedures.
B. Submit diagrams of proposed control joint and expansion joint layout prior to starting work.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Tolerances for Drywall: Do not exceed a variation of 1/8" in 8'-0" and 1/16" in 4'-0" from plumb, level, and flat
(all directions) and do not exceed 1/16" offset of planes atjoints between panels. Shim panels as necessary
to comply with tolerances.
B. Perform Work in accordance with ASTM C 840, GA-201, GA-216 and GA-600.
1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Requirements: In cold weather, maintain the temperature of the building reasonably constant
at no less than 55° F. during gypsum panel application andjoint finishing. Provide adequate ventilation to carry
off excess moisture.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, handle, and protect products in conformance with manufacturer's instructions and in accordance
with Section 016500 - PRODUCT DELIVERY REQUIREMENTS and Section 016600 - PRODUCT STORAGE
AND HANDLING REQUIREMENTS.
B. Store inside building, on sleepers, and out of water.
1.06 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three years documented
experience.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Gypsum Board (20A): ASTM C 36. Provide Type X fire -rated; 48"w x 5/8" thick by maximum permissible length
gypsum board with tapered edges. Product/manufacturer, one of the following:
ToughRock Fireguard Gypsum Board: G-P Gypsum Corp.
Fire -Shield Gypsum Wallboard; National Gypsum Co.
Type X Gypsum Wallboard; Temple-Inland Forest Products Corp.
Sheetrock Brand Firecode Core Gypsum Panel; United States Gypsum Co.
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
VLK Architects, 2009 09 2116 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
B. Water -Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 630. Provide Type X fire -rated, 48"w x 5/8" thick by maximum
permissible length gypsum board with tapered edges. Gypsum board to be covered with ceramic tile in toilets,
EWC alcoves, and other wet areas (except showers) shall be specially processed moisture -resistant gypsum
board. Product/manufacturer; one of the following:
ToughRock Fireguard Moisture -Guard; G-P Gypsum Corp.
Fire -Shield MR Gypsum Board; National Gypsum Co.
Type X Water -Resistant Gypsum Wallboard; Temple-Inland Forest Products Corp.
Sheetrock Brand Mold Tough Firecode; United States Gypsum Co.
C. Studs: ASTM C 645. Non-loadbearing channel type roll -formed from minimum 25 gage electro- or hot -dipped
galvanized steel.
1. Provide 18 gage studs, per SECTION 05 4000 - COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING, at all X-bracing.
D. Furring, Framing and Accessories: Provide in conformance with ASTM C 645, GA-216, and GA-600 and as
follows:
1. Cold Rolled Channels: 3/4", 1-1/2" and 2" x 9/16", 16 gage, steel channels prime painted.
2. Furring Channels: ASTM 645, 7/8" deep x 1-1/4" face, roll -formed from 25 gage electro-galvanized steel
and furnished with galvanized wire clips.
3. Resilient Furring: 7/8" deep x 1-1/4" face, 25 gage, galvanized with one leg attached only, Style RC-1.
E. Fasteners: ASTM C 514 for nails and C 1002 for screws as follows:
1. Inserts, clips, bolts, nails or otherscrews as recommended by wallboard manufacturer, of type and size to
suit application and to rigidly secure materials in place.
2. Self -drilling, self -tapping bugle head screws for use with power drive tool.
3. Screws: Drywall Screws, Type S Bugle Head.
4. Metal framing to structure: Power driven screw fasteners to withstand 190 lb. single shear resistance and
200 lb. bearing force when drive through structural head or base and without exceeding allowable design
stress in runner, fastener, or structural support.
5. Metal to metal: 3/8", Type S or 5-12, pan head screws.
6. Gypsum board to sheet metal application: Type S Bugle Head screws.
7. Gypsum board to gypsum board application: Type G screws.
F. Adhesive: Utilize adhesive meeting requirements of GA-216 over metal framing.
G. Accessories:
1. Runners: ASTM C 645, channel type sections roll -formed from electro-galvanized steel with unhemmed
edges. Same gage as studs with which used.
2. Hangers: No. 8 gage annealed, galvanized wire.
3. Tie Wire: No. 16 gage annealed, galvanized wire.
4. Trim: Galvanized steel corner reinforcements, edge trim angles and casings; USG No. 200 series.
5. Reinforcing Tape: 2-3/16" minimum width, cross laminated, spark perforated fiber tape.
6. Joint Compound: Quick -drying, polyindurate-type, pre -fill material.
7. Joint Topping: Vinyl base all-purpose finishing material.
8. Acoustical Sealant: A one -part acrylic base sealant designed for use with drywall construction.
9. Edge Sealant: USG Sheetrock Brand W/R Sealant for use in high -moisture room areas.
10. Control Joints: Roll -formed zinc control joints with 1/4" slot (USG #093)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Workmanship: The completed gypsum wallboard surfaces shall be smooth, level or plumb, and acceptable to
the finish material applicators. All joint treatment on exposed wallboard shall be invisible after painting.
B. Ceiling Furring:
1. Install in accordance with ASTM C 754, GA 201, GA-216, and GA-600 and manufacturer's instructions.
2. Space ceiling hangers 48" o.c. along runner channels and within 6" of ends of channel runs. Wrap or
saddle -tie hangers around the runner channels to prevent twisting.
a. Under steel construction, wrap hangers around or clip or bolt hangers to a structural steel member (not
steel deck).
b. Under bar joists suspend hangers from top chord or from bottom chord at panel points only.
c. Under ductwork, employ trapeze system of hangers to support ceiling. Do not suspend hangers from
ducts, piping or conduit
3. Erect runner channels at 48" o.c. maximum and locate a channel within 4" of each parallel wall. Level
channels with hangers taut and do not make kinks or bends in the hangers as a means of leveling. At
channel splices, overlap ends 12" with flanges interlocked; secure each end with tie wire.
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
VLK Architects, 2009 09 2116 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
4. Erect furring channels at 16" o.c. for 1/2" thick gypsum or 24" o.c. for 5/8" thick gypsum board and at right
angles to runner channels or main support members; secure with clips or saddle -tie to supports with be
wire. Make end splices by nesting channels 8" and wire tying each end.
5. At light troffers or other openings that interrupt the runner or furring channels, install additional reinforcing
to restore lateral stability of the grillage.
6. No part of the suspended grillage (main runners and cross furring) shall be permitted to come in contact
with abutting masonry walls and partitions.
C. Wall Furring: For gypsum wallboard over masonry, space furring channels vertically at 24" o.c. maximum and
attach with powerdriven anchors through alternate wing flanges (staggered), spaced 24" o.c. Make end splices
with 8" nested laps anchored to wall with two fasteners in each wing. Where necessary, install furring with
adjustable furring brackets and 1/2" x 3/4" steel channels to which the furring channels shall be clipped or tied.
D. Partitions:
1. Follow recommendations of U.S. Gypsum Co., "Gypsum Construction Handbook".
2. Install studding in accordance with ASTM C 754, GA-201, GA-216, and GA-600.
3. Erect partitions with studs aligned to be plumb and true. Anchor studs top and bottom with runners, shoes
and clips.
4. Attach floor runners to concrete slabs using shielded screws or power driven fasteners. Locate fasteners
at corners and at runner ends and spaced not to exceed 24" o.c.
5. Under drywall ceilings, attach metal runner to ceiling and position studs to engage the ceiling runner.
Elsewhere, extend studs above the ceiling and brace securely to the floor or roof structure above with a
continuous top runner and channel braces unless specifically detailed otherwise. For fire rated partitions
and where specifically detailed or noted, extend studs full height to the floor or roof structure above. Where
studs extend more than 24" above finished ceiling line, provide either 5/8" gypsum board on both sides of
studs or horizontal bracing at 16" o.c. attached with mechanical fasteners to both flanges of studs.
6. Space studs as shown and noted but not more than 16" o.c. Locate studs not more than 2" from abutting
partitions and partition corners. Anchor studs to runner flanges with positive screw engagement where
located at corners and at door frame jambs.
7. At door frame jambs of doorways up to 4'-0" wide, double the studs or reinforce with 20 gage steel studs.
At jambs of doorways over 4'--0" wide, reinforce with two 20 gage steel studs placed back to back. Fasten
reinforcing studs to the anchor clips on each door frame with bolts or screws. Place horizontally over each
frame a cut -to -length section of runner track; attach with screws to the adjacent vertical studs.
8. In chase wall construction, set studs opposite each other with the flanges in the same direction and cross
brace between the rows of studs with three 12" high pieces of gypsum board or three pieces of metal stud
attached to each pair of studs at the quarter points with drive screws.
9. Double the studs at vertical control joints in partitions.
10. Brace partitions to top chord of the structure above with 20 ga. diagonal braces at 4'-0" o.c. minimum.
Where floor to structure height exceeds 16'-0", in addition to extending and fastening studs to structure,
add 20 ga. stud diagonal braces at 4'-0" o.c. minimum.
E. Sealant Application: Caulk those gypsum drywall partitions which have sound attenuation blankets, serving as
sound barriers.
1. Apply sealant in two continuous beads underneath runners at the floor and ceiling and where runners are
used at partition intersections with dissimilar wall construction.
2. Fill with sealant the grooves around the edges of wallboard at the floor, ceiling, and intersections with
dissimilar walls.
3. Caulk fully the openings around all cut-outs at electrical boxes, heating ducts and the like.
F. Wallboard Application:
1. Apply gypsum wallboard first to the ceilings and then to the partitions. Use maximum practical lengths to
minimize end joints. Fit ends and edges closely but not forced together.
2. For single -layer ceiling application, apply wallboard with the long dimension either parallel or at right angles
to the framing members. All abutting ends and edges shall occur over framing members, except in
horizontal application. Stagger end joints in adjacent rows.
3. For single -layer wall application with a ceiling height of 8'-2" or less, use either the horizontal or the vertical
application method. With a ceiling height over 8'-2" and for fire -rated partitions, use only the vertical
application method without any exposed horizontal joints. Stagger the vertical joints on opposite sides of
a partition. Extend wallboard full height to the floor or roof structure above where so detailed.
4. Fasten wallboard firmly to studs and furring channels with power -driven drywall screws. Gypsum board
shall extend to within 1/4" of floor line. Drive screw heads close without cutting the surface paper or
fracturing the core. Maximum screw spacing shall be 12" o.c. for ceilings and 16" o.c. for partitions. For
fire -rated partitions, maximum spacing shall be 12" o.c. Do not drive screws closer than 3/8" from any
edge.
5. For two -layer wall application, apply the base layer of wallboard vertically; attach with screws spaced 16"
o.c. Apply the face layer vertically with joints offset 24" from base layer joints; attach with adhesive and
1-5/8" screws spaced 16" o.c.
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
VLK Architects, 2009 09 2116 - 3 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
6. Wallboard joints in single layer or in face layer of two layer applications shall not occur within 12" of the
comers of doorframe, window frames, and openings largerthan 12" x 12", unless control joints are installed
at the corners.
7. Accurately cut and fit abutting ends, edges and holes for pipes and electrical fixtures. Support the edges
of gypsum wallboard at cutouts and openings.
8. Reinforce exposed external comers with metal corner reinforcement.
9. Where wallboard surfaces abut dissimilar intersecting surfaces such as metal and masonry, trim the
meeting edge with a metal trim angle held approximately 1/4" away from the intersecting surface. Caulk
the joint full with sealant; tool smooth.
10. After application, check all gypsum wallboard for loose fasteners; drive tight any found loose.
G Control Joints:
1. Isolate gypsum wallboard surfaces with control joints where specifically detailed and where the following
conditions exist:
a. Partition or furring run exceeds 30 feet without a corner or a ceiling -height door frame.
b. Ceiling dimensions exceed 50 feet in either direction.
c. Construction changes within the plane of the partition.
d. Each side of column furring within a partition run.
e. Above each doorjamb from head to top of partition.
f. At each side of furr downs.
2. Locate control joints in partitions at less -than -ceiling -height door frames with control joints extending to the
ceiling from both top comers.
3. Make joints with roll -formed zinc control joints (USG #093) with 1/4" slot.
a. Do not install roll -formed joint behind ceramic tile. Provide a 1/4" wide gap in the substrate only.
b. At acoustical partitions, seal behind the joints with acoustical sealant.
4. Back -block ceiling control joints with face panel strips laid over the joints.
5. At acoustical partitions, seal behind partition control joints with batt acoustical insulation stuffed between
the doubled studs.
H. Edge Sealing: On wallboard partitions to be covered with ceramic tile, treat cut edges, holes, corner joints, and
intermediate joints with edge sealant before installation of wallboard panels. Treat all fastener heads with edge
sealant after installation. Caulking of openings through ceramic tile is specified in SECTION 09 3013 -
CERAMIC TILING
Joint Treatment:
1. Finish the joints in exposed wallboard, wallboard which is to be covered with vinyl wall covering and carpet
wall covering, and wallboard in sound partitions to deck. Joints in wall board to be covered with ceramic
the shall be filled but may be left unfinished.
2. Fill the V grooves between boards with quick drying joint compound. Wipe joints clean of excess
compound and allow to harden.
3. Apply a thin layer of joint topping to joints. Immediately embed tape reinforcement over joints, follow with
a skim coat of compound.
4. Apply joint topping over the tape to fill flush with the board surface.
5. Apply joint flopping over the fill coat and feather out smoothly beyond fill coat edge. Sand between coats
as necessary to provide a smooth surface ready for painting.
6. Fill screw head depressions flush with three coats of compound.
7. Finish metal corner reinforcements and edge and control joint trim with two or three coats of joint
compound, using edge of trim as a screed to secure a smooth, flat finish.
3.02 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum variation from true flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet in any direction.
END OF SECTION
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
VLK Architects, 2009 09 2116 - 4 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 09 3013
CERAMIC TILING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Ceramic the and marble thresholds.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Samples: Submit in accordance with SECTION 01 3323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND
SAMPLES. Tile samples shall be size scheduled for each particular type of tile required.
B. Certificate: Furnish one master grade certificate on ceramic the executed prior to delivery of the the to the site.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Standard: Ceramic the shall be Standard Grade complying with the requirements of ANSI A 137.1. Deliver the
to the project site in grade sealed containers.
1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is completed and ambient temperature
and humidity conditions are being maintained.
B. Do not install adhesives in a closed, unventilated environment
C. Maintain 50°F. during installation of mortar materials.
1.05 MAINTENANCE
A. Extra Materials: Upon completion of work, deliver to the project site one box for each type, color, pattern, and
size of ceramic tile installed. Furnish maintenance materials from same manufactured lot as materials installed
and enclose in protective packaging with appropriate identifying labels.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 TILE
A. Ceramic tile and trim as manufactured by American Olean, Dal -Tile Corp., and Crossville Ceramics shall set
all standards in the areas of trim shapes availability, tile size, color, pattern, and texture.
B. Provide factory made fitters and trim shapes required for a finished installation. Keep job -cut fitters and trim
shapes to a minimum. Provide bullnose tile at horizontal and vertical tile edges.
C. Ceramic Tile:
1. Floor Tile (313): 2" x 2" unglazed, impervious, porcelain tile with integral color, smooth all-purpose edges.
Base shall be sanitary cove type unless specifically detailed otherwise. Colors will be selected by Architect
from price groups 1 through 3.
2. Wall Tile (3C): 4-1/4" x 4-1/4" glazed nonvitreous tile with interior natural clay body, cushion edges and
gloss finish. Accent file color shall be selected from American Olean or Dal -Tile's price group 4. Field
colors shall be selected by Architect from American Olean or Dal -Tile's Bright & Matte colors, price groups
1 through 3.
3. Wall Tile (3E): 8" x 8" glazed vitreous tile, 1900 Vitrestone Series, 2000 Designer Tile Series, and 1500
Sierra Series by Dal -Tile with interior natural clay body, cushion edges and gloss finish. Colors as selected
by Architect from full color range.
D. Marble thresholds: Group A domestic white marble with honed finish.
2.02 MORTAR MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement ASTM C 150, domestic manufacture.
CERAMIC TILING
VLK Architects, 2009 09 3013 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
B. Dry -Set Mortar: ANSI A 118.1, factory sanded mortar mix.
C. Adhesive: ANSI A 136.1, Type I, prepared organic adhesive.
D. Grout:
1. Floor: ANSI A118.6, latex modified dry -set Portland cement or commercial waterproof Portland cement
grout. Custom blended color(s) shall be selected by Architect from the Designer and Standard Series of
"Custom Building Products" or approved equivalent. Provide two custom blended colors as selected by
Architect at Porcelain tile areas.
2. Walls: Modified acrylic, premixed Mastic Grout or dry -set grout complying with ANSI A118.6, custom
blended color(s) as selected by Architect from Custom Building Products:, the Designer Series & Standard
Series, or approved equal. If Contractor elects to provide dry -set grout, the installation shall be damp
cured.
E. Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S, hydrated lime.
F. Sand: ASTM C 144, clean, masonry sand.
G. Water: Clean and potable.
H. Reinforcement: 1-1/2" x 17 gage galvanized woven steel wire fabric or 2 x 2 x 16/16 gage galvanized welded
steel wire fabric.
2.03 SETTING BED MORTAR
A. Mix one part Portland cement and 4 parts damp sand, by volume. Hydrated lime may be added for plasticity
in an amount not to exceed 1/10 part by volume.
2.04 CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE
A. General: Manufacturer's standard product that complies with ANSI A118.12 for standard performance and is
recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated.
B. Contractor's Option: Provide either product listed below.
C. Polyethylene Sheet: Polyethylene faced on both sides with fleece webbing; 0.008-inch nominal thickness.
Product/manufacturer; KERDI, Schluter Systems L.P.
D. Chlorinated Polyethylene Sheet: Non -plasticized elastomer with non -woven polyester laminated to both sides,
nominal 0.030" thickness. Product/manufacturer; NobleSeal CIS, Noble Co.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Sweep concrete slab surfaces clean and free of dirt and debris. Remove oil, grease, paint, and dried mortar.
B. Concrete Slab -on -grade: Install crack isolation membrane to comply with ANSI A108.17 and manufacturer's
written instructions and recommendations to produce membrane bonded securely to substrate.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. General Workmanship:
1. Center and balance areas of tile, if possible.
2. Do not make an excessive amount of cuts. Usually, no cuts smaller than half size should be made. Make
all cuts on the outer edges of the field.
3. Smooth cut edges. Install the without jagged or flaked edges.
4. Fit tile closely where edges will be covered by trim, escutcheons or other similar devices.
5. The splitting of tile is expressly prohibited except where no alternative is possible.
6. Maintain the heights of tilework in full courses to the nearest obtainable dimension where heights, given
in feet and inches, are not required to fill vertical spaces exactly.
7. Make comers of all file flush and level with comers of adjacent tile, with due allowance to tolerances for tile
as specified in ANSI A137.1.
8. Keep all joint lines straight and even width, including miters.
9. Thoroughly back-up with thin -set bonding material all thin -set units, molded orshaped pieces; securefirmly
in place.
CERAMIC TILING
VLK Architects, 2009 09 3013 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
10. Thoroughly back-up with mortar -bed mixthick-bed nosings, coves, curbing, gutters, flat the and trimmers,
molded or shaped pieces; secure firmly in place.
11. Bond coat mix shall not be used to back-up thick -bed trim and angles. Coat all thick -bed trim shapes with
1/32" to 1/16 " of bond coat mix.
12. Finish floor and wall areas level and plumb with no variations exceeding 1/8" in 8' from the required plane.
13. Install accessories in tilework to be evenly spaced, properly centered with tile joints, and level, plumb and
true to the correct projection. Install accessories at locations and heights designated.
14. Finished tilework shall be clean. Replace pitted, chipped, cracked and scratched tiles.
B. Setting Floor Tile - Conventional:
1. Set floor tile in straight joint pattern using Portland cement mortar in conformance with ANSI A 108.1.
2. Where the is to be installed over waterproofing membrane, place wire reinforcing and mortar bed over the
membrane. Lap reinforcing one full mesh and support so that it is completely embedded in the mortar bed.
3. Place mortar bed, tamp firmly and screed to true planes and proper slopes. While still plastic, trowel a bond
coat of cement paste over the mortar bed or dust a thin layer of dry cement over the mortar bed and work
lightly until damp.
4. Set tile firmly on the mortar bed with close, uniform joints. Press and thoroughly beat in the while the mortar
bed is still plastic. Bring surfaces to true planes at the proper position of elevation. Slope tile down to floor
drains. Make any adjustment of tile before initial set of the mortar takes place.
C. Setting Floor Tile - Thinset:
1. Set floor tile in straight joint pattern using dry -set cement mortar in conformance with ANSI A 108.5.
2. Mix and apply dry -set mortar in conformance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Cover surface
evenly and comb with a notched trowel not more than 10 minutes before applying tile.
3. Set the before initial set of the mortar has taken place. Press and beat tile firmly into place to establish
proper and complete bond. Joints shall be close and uniform.
D. Setting Wall Tile:
1. Set base and wall file over masonry in straight joint pattern using dry -set cement mortar in conformance
with ANSI A 108.5.
2. Set base and wall tile over gypsum wallboard in straight joint pattern using organic adhesive in
conformance with ANSI A 108.4.
3. Surfaces to be tiled shall be dry, firm and proper for bond.
a. Treat gypsum wallboard surfaces with a primer -sealer, caulk openings around pipes and fixtures with
a non -hardening waterproof sealant
b. Apply leveling coat of sanded dry -set mortar over irregular surfaces if and as required to secure plumb,
flat surfaces for the application of tile.
4. Mix and apply mortar and adhesive in conformance with best trade practice and the recommendations of
the manufacturer of the materials used. Cover surfaces evenly, with no bare spots, and comb with a
notched trowel within 10 minutes of applying tile.
5. Apply tile before skinning of the adhesive or mortar has taken place. Press and beat firmly into place to
obtain at least 75 percent contact area of adhesive or mortar on the tile back.
6. If tile is face mounted, remove paper and glue before the adhesive or mortar is firmly set; adjust tiles that
are out of line.
7. Provide control joints at all inside corners of wall the areas. Install sealant in joint Color as selected by
Architect.
E. Grouting:
1. Force a maximum amount of grout into the joints.
2. Clean the joints of cushion -edge tile to depth of cushion. Fill joints of square -edge file flush with face of tile.
3. Fill all gaps and skips. Mortar shall not show through grouted joints.
4. Finished grout shall be uniform in color, smooth, and without voids and low spots.
5. Grout joint width as recommended by the manufacturer.
6. Damp cure Portland cement grout for at least 72 hours.
Wall Expansion Joints: Where tile on wallboard abuts the on masonry, provide a 1/4" caulked expansion joint
to separate the two areas.
1. After tile work and grout are dry, clean the open expansion joint and roll -in foam rod stock to leave a joint
depth of 1/4".
2. Fill the joint with primerless one -part acrylic polymeric sealant equal to "Mono" by Tremco Manufacturing
Co. Color shall be white.
3. Tool the sealant smooth.
G. Joints at Frames: Where 4-1/4" x 4-1/4" ceramic the abuts frame, provide a 1/8" caulked expansion joint to
separate tile from the frame. Where 8" x 8" ceramic the abuts frame, provide a 1/4" caulked expansion joint to
separate the from the frame.
1. After file work and grout are dry, clean the joint at the frame.
CERAMIC TILING
VLK Architects, 2009 09 3013 - 3 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
2. Fill the joint with primerless one -part acrylic polymeric sealant equal to "Mono 555" by Tremco.
3. Color shall be white at 4-1/4" x 4-1/4" tiles and shall batch adjacent grout at 8" x 8" tiles.
4. Tool the sealant smooth.
H. Setting Marble Thresholds:
1. Set in a cement mortar bed mixed dry for tamping.
2. Press and tamp the marble into place until firmly bedded to the proper level, then lift out, parge the back
with cement paste, butter the edges, and relay.
3. Clean surplus cement from the marble faces immediately.
3.03 CLEANING
A. When the work of other trades is completed, clean damn tile and marble surfaces and leave in first class
condition.
1. The use of wire brushes or acids is expressly prohibited.
2. Replace cracked, broken, and chipped the with new units.
3. Correct uneven and stained joints.
END OF SECTION
CERAMIC TILING
VLK Architects, 2009 09 3013 - 4 2737.03
SECTION 09 5100
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Samples: Submit in accordance with Section 01 3323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, SAMPLES.
Submit a 12" x 12" sample of each type of acoustic panel. Submit a 6" long sample of each component of each
type of exposed suspension system.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Erector Qualifications: This work shall be performed by an experienced erector approved by the acoustical
material manufacturer.
B. Pre -ceiling conference:
1. Prior to start of ceiling grid installation, convene pre -ceiling conference at project site.
2. Attendance is required by Contractor, installer, and Architect.
3. Review specifications and drawings of ceiling installation and layout.
1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Requirements:
1. Before acoustical work is started, all wet work such as concrete and plastering shall be completed and
thoroughly dried out.
2. Acoustical ceiling shall not begin until building has been closed to the weather and suitable mechanical
ventilation is supplied to maintain condition ranges of 60°F. to 85'F. at not more than 70% R.H. These
conditions shall be maintained prior to, during, and after installation.
3. Acoustical panels shall be unpacked and allowed to stabilize for a period of 72 hours, in the environment
as defined above, prior to installation.
B. Work Sequence:
1. Do not start acoustical work until mechanical and electrical work to be covered up has been inspected and
approved.
2. Coordinate the related work of other trades involved in the ceiling installation.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Store tile and panel cartons open at each end to stabilize moisture content.
1.06 WARRANTY
A. Acoustic Lay -in Panels: Submit manufacturer's standard 10-year warranty against sagging orwarping (defined
as greater than 1/8" measured in the panel center) from the date of installation.
1.07 MAINTENANCE
A. Extra Materials: Upon completion of work, deliver maintenance materials to the project site, packaged with
protective covering for storage and identified with appropriate labels. Furnish two boxes of full size acoustical
ceiling units of each type installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Acoustic Lay -in Panels (22A): ASTM E 1264, mineral fiber panels, Class 25 (non-combustible) and having an
NRC range of 0.50-0.60.
1. Sizes: 24" x 24" x 5/8".
2. Design: Fine, non -directional fissured surface.
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
VLK Architects, 2009 09 5100 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
3. Product/manufacturer; standard panels:
Fine Fissured Humiguard; Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
Fine Fissured Safetone; Certain Teed Corporation
Radar ClimaPlus; USG Interiors, Inc.
4. Finish: Washable factory applied vinyl latex paint.
5. Edges: Square.
B. Suspension System; Acoustic Lay -in Panels: Exposed type for panel ceilings as manufactured by the ceiling
panel manufacturer or one of the following:
Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
Chicago Metallic Corp.
USG Interiors, Inc.
1. Components shall be roll -formed from steel to meet ASTM C 635 and conform to the requirements for
Intermediate duty structural classification. Exposed main tee runners shall be double web with capped
face.
2. Components shall be electro-zinc coated or hot -dip galvanized and exposed surfaces shall have white
enamel finish.
3. System shall be designed and sized to support the ceiling assembly with a maximum deflection of U360
of the span.
4. Color shall be white to match color of lay -in panels.
C. Metal Power and Projector Ceiling Panel: The ceiling fixture shall be a Peerless Model CMJ 450 Suspended
Ceiling Kit, or equivalent, and shall be mounted where indicated in the drawings. It shall feature a steel ceiling
plate featuring two electrical box knockouts, one circular knockout, and a tie wire support system with
turnbuckles for precise tensioning of the wires. All hardware for attachment to supporting structure shall be
included. The finish shall be scratch resistant white fused epoxy. It shall be UL Listed. Assembly and installation
shall be done according to the instructions provided by the manufacturer.
D. Hangers: 12 gage annealed and galvanized steel wire.
E. Hold-down Clips: UHDC Universal Hold Down Clip by Armstrong.
F. Direct Load Ceiling Clip: DLCC as manufactured by Armstrong.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Examine areas to receive acoustical treatment for conditions that will adversely affect the execution and quality
of work. Designate any areas of potential interference between ceiling components and components of other
trades. Do not start this work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.02 CEILING INSTALLATION
A. General: Installation procedures shall meet or exceed the manufacturer's recommendations and ASTM C 636.
1. Lay out each area so that the panel patterns are symmetrical, joints parallel to walls and borders generally
equal in width.
2. Coordinate the patterns with ceiling lights and grilles in conformance with the reflected ceiling plans and
as directed.
3. Verify types and sizes of light fixtures and grilles to be accommodated and arrange the work accordingly.
B. Suspension: Locate main and cross tee runners to form the indicated patterns.
1. Use a laser leveling method to direct -suspend the main tees with hangers spaced not more than 48" o.c.
2. Provide hangers within 6" of the corners of recessed lighting fixtures.
3. Under steel construction, wrap hangers around or clip or bolt hangers to a structural steel member (not
steel deck).
4. Under bar joists, suspend hangers from top chord or from bottom chord at panel points only.
5. Under ductwork, employ trapeze system for hanging ceiling.
6. Do not suspend hangers from ducts, piping, conduit, or fireproofing membrane.
7. Use a laser beam system to level the main tee runners to within 1/8" in 12 ft. Level with hangers taut; do
not make kinks or bends in hangers as a means of leveling.
C. Moldings: Install finish channel and angle moldings where ceilings abut walls, furrings and other intersecting
vertical surfaces.
1. Moldings shall be in long lengths, secured to adjoining surfaces with at least two fasteners for each piece
or more as may be required. Pull the molding snugly against the vertical surface without any gaps.
2. No molding length shall be less than 3 ft. except at short offsets.
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
VLK Architects, 2009 09 5100 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
3. Use prefabricated corner pieces where possible to eliminate field mitering.
D. Lay -in Panels: Install the acoustic panels in the exposed suspension system with bottom surfaces flush and in
a true, level plane.
1. Hold-down clips are required at all vinyl covered gypsum panels for cleaning purposes.
2. Provide hold-down clips at lay -in panels within a of exterior exits.
E. Access: Provide access through acoustic panel ceilings with one or more access locations in each room to
maintain a maximum spacing of 30 ft. between access panels.
F. Direct Load Ceiling Clips: Provide 2 direct load ceiling clips and hangerwire at each overhead projection screen.
3.03 TOLERANCES
A. Variation from flat and level surface: 1/8 inch in 10 ft.
B. Variation from plumb of grid members caused by eccentric loads: Two degrees (2°) maximum.
3.04 ADJUSTING AND PATCHING
A. Replace damaged members of exposed suspension system. Replace ceiling board and tile that is damaged,
installed improperly, or shows visible signs of sagging.
3.05 CLEANING
A. After installation, clean soiled and discolored surfaces. Remove damaged units and replace with new.
END OF SECTION
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
VLK Architects, 2009 09 5100 - 3 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 09 5150
SELECTIVE ACOUSTICAL CEILING DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Reclamation plan for acoustical ceiling panels.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 09 5100 -Acoustical Ceilings
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Recycling agreement signed by Owner of ceiling panels to be reclaimed and the local Armstrong representative.
B. LEED Documentation: Submit data and information demonstrating compliance with LEED requirements.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicable LEED Credits: Meet the performance requirements for the following LEED Environmental Categories
and Credits as indicated.
1. Category 4: Material and Resources (MR)
a. Credit MRc2: Construction Waste Management
B. An Armstrong representative must approve the ceiling material for reclamation.
C. Approved ceiling materials shall include:
1. All brands of pulpable mineral fiber ceiling materials
2. Armstrong Optima
3. Ceiling materials with paint not applied by a manufacturer (after testing in Armstrong laboratory to confirm
acceptability.
D. Ceiling materials that are not acceptable include:
1. Vinyl or fabric -faced ceiling materials
2. Foil -backed ceiling materials
3. Ceiling materials with visible wood pulp
4. Armstrong Artran
5. Moldy ceiling materials
6. Asbestos containing ceiling materials
7. Ceiling materials installed below friable asbestos or that are contaminated with any other hazardous
material.
E. Coordination of Work: Coordinate acoustical ceiling demolition work with contractors doing related work in the
building including, but not limited to building insulation, gypsum board, light fixtures, mechanical systems,
electrical systems, and sprinklers.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Ceiling material being reclaimed may not have come into contact or in any way contain hazardous materials or
special waste.
B. Ceiling material being reclaimed must be dry and free from debris.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.05 RECLAMATION PROCEDURE
A. Contractor will remove ceiling tiles to be recycled from grid.
SELECTIVE ACOUSTICAL CEILING DEMOLITION
VLK Architects, 2009 09 5150 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
B. Approved ceiling materials must be packaged in a manner allowing both secure shipment by trailer and the
ability of Armstrong employees to safely inspect and unload the trailers' contents. For this reason, all approved
ceiling materials sent to Armstrong must be neatly stacked in one of the following ways:
1. 4 by 4 pallets stacked with ceiling materials to 6 feet tall.
2. 4 by 4 pallets stacked with ceiling materials to 4 feet tall each and then stacked on top of each other in the
trailer.
3. 2 by 4 pallets stacked with ceiling materials to 6 feet tall.
4. 2 by 4 pallets stacked with ceiling materials to 4 feet tall each and then stacked on top of each other in the
trailer.
C. Contractor will neatly stack ceiling panels on 2 by 4 or 4 by 4 wooden pallets and secure them with metal bands
or stretch wrap for stable shipment. Pallets must be secured within trailers to prevent shifting in transit. Carriers
will provide load stabilizers.
D. Armstrong will pay for the return freight of full trailers, all of which are defined as a minimum of 30,000 square
feet of approved material as follows:
1. Twenty-two 4 by 4 pallets stacked with ceiling material to 6 feet tall.
2. Forty-four 4 by 4 pallets stacked with ceiling material to 4 feet tall each and then stacked on top of each
other in the trailer.
3. Forty-four 2 by 4 pallets stacked with ceiling materials to 6 feet tall.
4. Eighty-eight 2 by 4 pallets stacked with ceiling materials to 4 feet tall each and then stacked on top of each
other in the trailer.
5. Some combination of 2 by 4 and 4 by 4 pallets that contains no fewer ceiling materials than would be
contained in option #1.
It is recycler's responsibility to ensure that onlyfull trailer loads of approved ceiling materials are shipped. Where
the amount of approved ceiling materials from a site is insufficient for a full trailer load, a local distributor or
consolidator may elect to consolidate approved ceiling materials in a secure and dry location, until a full trailer
load is ready for shipment. The consolidator will ensure that all such aggregate shipments are and remain
clearly labeled as to their origin and date of approval by an Armstrong employee.
The recycler retains ownership of approved ceiling materials until it is received and accepted at the destination,
the Armstrong Plant, as defined by the terms of shipment, F.O.B. (Free on board) destination, despite
Armstrong's payment of the freight costs for full trailer loads. While the Armstrong approved common carrier
is not a party to this agreement, the following describes their responsibilities. The common carrier that
Armstrong has selected is responsible for the transport of the approved ceiling materials from the pick up
location to Armstrong's plant. This carrier is an independent contractor utilized by Armstrong and required to
demonstrate general liability insurance coverage that meets or exceeds industry standards.
END OF SECTION
SELECTIVE ACOUSTICAL CEILING DEMOLITION
VLK Architects, 2009 09 5150 - 2 2737.03
SECTION 09 6500
RESILIENT FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
A. Section Includes: Vinyl composition file flooring, rubber base, and accessories.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Samples: Submit in accordance with SECTION 01 3323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND
SAMPLES. Submit manufacturer's standard color samples of tile, not less than 3" x 3", full thickness. Submit
samples of each accessory, full height or width by not less than 2" length.
1.03 DELIVERY
A. Deliver floor materials to the project site in unbroken containers and cartons bearing the manufacturer's labels.
B. Deliver resilient floor materials to an acclimatized building at least 36 hours prior to installation of vinyl
composition tile.
1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Requirements: Maintain the temperature inside the building reasonably constant at not less than
65°F. for 48 hours before installation, during installation, and for 48 hours after installation.
B. After installation, maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55°F.
or more than 95°F.
1.05 WARRANTY
A. Vinyl Composition Tile Warranty Terms: Standard 5-year manufacturer's warranty on defective materials.
Reasonable labor costs will be reimbursed at 100% if the defect is reported within the first year of the original
purchase, and at 50% if the defect is reported within the second year of the original purchase. Labor costs will
not be reimbursed if the defect is reported within the third, fourth, or fi fth year of the original purchase
1.06 MAINTENANCE
A. Extra Materials: Upon completion of work, deliver to the project site not less than one box for each 50 boxes
or fraction thereof, for each type, color, pattern, and size installed. Furnish maintenance materials from same
manufactured lot as materials installed and enclose in protective packaging with appropriate identifying labels.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Vinyl Composition Tile (15A): ASTM F 1066, Class 2 (through -pattern tile), 12" x 12" x 1/8" thick vinyl plastic
composition tile as manufactured by one of the following:
Standard Excelon Imperial Texture and Multicolor, Armstrong Flooring Div.
Essentials and Designer Essentials; Mannington Commercial
Standard Patterns; Azrock by Tarkett
B. Rubber Base (14B): ASTM F 1861, Type TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset), Style Cove (with top -set toe), 1/8"
thick, 4" high, color(s) as selected by Architect. Furnish base in manufacturer's continuous roils. Outside
corners shall be factoryformed pre -molded units matching base in color and finish. Product/manufacturer, one
of the following:
Wallflowers® Premium Wall Base; Flexco
Type TS Rubber Base; Roppe Rubber Corp.
NO SUBSTITUTIONS
C. Edge Strips: 1"wide by 1/8" thick black rubber tile reducer with beveled surface.
RESILIENT FLOORING
VLK Architects, 2009 09 6500 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
D. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex -modified, Portland cement based or blended hydraulic
cement based formulation provided or approved by vinyl composition tile manufacturer.
E. Adhesive: Moisture -resistant type recommended by flooring manufacturer.
F. Cleaner: Neutral, chemical cleaner such as Hillyard "Super Shine -All" designed to be safe to use on any surface
not damaged by water.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas to receive resilient flooring, base, and accessories for conditions that will adversely affect the
execution and quality of work. Do not start this work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.
1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. Surfaces shall be
clean and dry before flooring is laid.
2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain
soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.
3. Sweep the surfaces free of dust and dirt and remove oil, grease, paint, dried mortar and curing compound
residue.
4. Fill low spots, cracks, minor holes and crevices in concrete floors with latex underlayment patching material.
Re -surface rough and irregular surfaces with the same underlayment material.
B. Existing Concrete Substrates:
1. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform test recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only
after substrates pass testing.
2. Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer and as follows. Proceed with installation
only after substrates pass testing.
a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates
have maximum moisture -vapor -emission rate of 3 lb. of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours, unless otherwise
specified by the flooring or adhesive manufacturer.
b. If moisture condition exceeds 3 pounds per 1,000 square feet per 24 hour day and if acceptable to the
vinyl composition file floor manufacturer, apply moisture reduction barrier, Planiseal MRB by Mapei, in
strict accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Laying Flooring:
1. Install floor the in straight joint pattern as directed and in conformance with the manufacturer's
recommended procedure.
2. Start at centerlines of spaces and adjust borders to maintain full tiles in the field and equal borders. Except
as required in irregularly shaped areas, no tile shall be less than one-half the width of field tile, and in no
event shall any tile piece be less than 3" wide.
3. Install tile to square grid pattern with all joints aligned, with pattern grain alternating with adjacent unit to
produce basket weave pattern. Allow minimum 1/2 full size tile width at room or area perimeter. Lay tile
starting at center of room working toward walls, square with room axis. Joints shall be tight butt joints, true
to line.
4. Terminate flooring at centerline of door openings where adjacent floor finish is dissimilar.
5. Install edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges and where flooring terminates.
6. Bed tile firmly and maintain joints tight, straight, and square with the room axes. The completed surfaces
shall be free of buckles, waves, and projecting tile. Scribe tiles neatly at columns, corners, and casework.
7. Where flooring edges are not concealed by thresholds or other materials, install rubber edge strips.
B. Applying Rubber Base:
1. Install coved base after the floor tile, mat, and carpet have been laid. Do not use less than manufacturer's
continuous rolls, except where required for last piece in any one run of wall length.
2. Apply base with adhesive covering 100% of the back surface, not just in spots. Apply adhesive with a
notched trowel. Use headless brads in addition to adhesive where required. Use preformed outside
corners and miter inside corners. Joints shall be tight.
3. Fit joints tight and vertical. Maintain minimum measurement of 18 inches between joints.
RESILIENT FLOORING
VLK Architects, 2009 09 6500 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
3.04 PROTECTION
A. Prohibit traffic on floor finish for 48 hours after installation.
B. Repair or replace damaged surfaces that are soiled or scarred in a manner acceptable to the Owner.
3.05 CLEANING
A. Clean in accordance with Section 01 7413 - PROGRESS CLEANING.
1. Remove excess adhesive and other foreign matter from tile flooring and base.
2. Scrub floor with cleaner in conformance with manufacturer's instructions and rinse.
3. Replace defective or loose material.
END OF SECTION
RESILIENT FLOORING
VLK Architects, 2009 09 6500 - 3 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 09 6516
RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Vinyl sheet flooring, rubber base, and accessories.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Samples: Submit in accordance with SECTION 01 3323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND
SAMPLES. Submit manufacturer's standard color samples of tile, not less than 3" x 3", full thickness. Submit
samples of each accessory, full height or width by not less than 2" length.
1.03 DELIVERY
A. Deliver floor materials to the project site in unbroken containers and cartons bearing the manufacturer's labels.
B. Deliver resilient floor materials to an acclimatized building at least 36 hours prior to installation.
1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Requirements: Maintain the temperature inside the building reasonably constant at not less than
65"F. for 48 hours before installation, during installation, and for 48 hours after installation.
B. After installation, maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55°F.
or more than 95"F.
1.05 MAINTENANCE
A. Extra Materials: Upon completion of work, deliver to the project site not less than one box for each 50 boxes
or fraction thereof, for each type, color, pattern, and size installed. Furnish maintenance materials from same
manufactured lot as materials installed and enclose in protective packaging with appropriate identifying labels.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Resilient Sheet Flooring: Provide Mannington Commercial Assurance II, manufactured in the USA by
Mannington Resilient Floors.
1. Color as selected by Architect from full color and pattern range.
2. 72 in. wide, having a nominal total thickness of 0.080 in.
3. Vinyl sheet flooring shall meet ASTM F 1913, "Standard Specification for Vinyl Sheet Floor Covering
Without Backing."
B. Rubber Base (1413): ASTM F 1861, Type TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset), Style Cove (with top -set toe), 1/8"
thick, 4" high, color(s) as selected by Architect. Furnish base in manufacturer's continuous rolls. Outside
corners shall be factory formed pre -molded units matching base in color and finish. Product/manufacturer; one
of the following:
Wallflowers® Premium Wall Base; Flexco
Type TS Rubber Base; Roppe Rubber Corp.
NO SUBSTITUTIONS
C. Edge Strips: 1" wide by 1/8" thick rubber file reducer with beveled surface. Color as selected by Architect.
D. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex -modified, Portland cement based or blended hydraulic
cement based formulation provided or approved by sheet vinyl manufacturer.
E. Adhesive: Moisture -resistant type recommended by flooring manufacturer.
F. Cleaner: Neutral, chemical cleaner such as Hillyard "Super Shine -All" designed to be safe to use on any surface
not damaged by water.
RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING
VLK Architects, 2009 09 6516 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas to receive resilient flooring, base, and accessories for conditions that will adversely affect the
execution and quality of work. Do not start this work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
B. Examine subfloors priorto installation to determine that surfaces are smooth and free from cracks, holes, ridges,
and other defects that might prevent adhesive bond or impair durability or appearance of the flooring material.
C. Inspect subfloors prior to installation to determine that surfaces are free from curing, sealing, parting and
hardening compounds; residual adhesives; adhesive removers; and other foreign materials that might prevent
adhesive bond. Visually inspect for evidence of moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, dusting, mold, or mildew.
D. Report conditions contrary to contract requirements that would prevent a proper installation. Do not proceed with
the installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
E. Failure to call attention to defects or imperfections will be construed as acceptance and approval of the subfloor.
Installation indicates acceptance of substrates with regard to conditions existing at the time of installation.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Remove paint, varnish, oils, release agents, sealers, and waxes. Remove residual adhesives as recommended
by the flooring manufacturer. Avoid organic solvents.
B. Perform subfloor preparation as recommended by flooring manufacturer to determine if surfaces are dry; free
of curing and hardening compounds, old adhesive, and other coatings; and ready to receive flooring.
C. Vacuum or broom -clean surfaces to be covered immediately before the application of flooring. Make subfloor
free from dust, dirt, grease, and all foreign materials.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Laying Flooring:
I. Install flooring in strict accordance with the latest edition of the flooring manufacturer's recommendations.
2. Install flooring wall to wall before the installation of floor -set cabinets, casework, furniture, equipment,
movable partitions, etc. Extend flooring into toe spaces, door recesses, closets, and similar openings as
shown on the drawings.
3. Scribe, cut, and fit or flash cove to permanent fixtures, columns, walls, partitions, pipes, outlets, and built-in
furniture and cabinets.
4. Adhere flooring to the subfloor without cracks, voids, raising and puckering at the seams. Roll with a 100-
pound roller in the field areas. Hand -roll flooring at the perimeter and the seams to assure adhesion. Refer
to specific rolling instructions of the flooring manufacturer.
5. Lay flooring to provide a minimum number of seams. Avoid cross seams, filler pieces, and strips. Match
edges for color shading and pattern at the seams in compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
6. Install flooring with adhesives, tools, and procedures in strict accordance with the manufacturer's written
instructions. Observe the recommended adhesive trowel notching, open times, and working times.
7. Prepare sealed seams with special seam adhesive supplied for this purpose. Use methods and sequence
of work in conformance with -written instructions of the flooring manufacturer. Finish all seams flush and free
from voids, recesses, and raised areas..
B. Applying Rubber Base:
1. Install coved base after the floor tile, mat, and carpet have been laid. Do not useless than manufacturer's
continuous rolls, except where required for last piece in any one run of wall length.
2. Apply base with adhesive covering 100% of the back surface, not just in spots. Apply adhesive with a
notched trowel. Use headless brads in addition to adhesive where required. Use preformed outside
corners and miter inside corners. Joints shall be tight.
3. Fit joints tight and vertical. Maintain minimum measurement of 18 inches between joints.
3.04 PROTECTION
A. Prohibit traffic on floor finish for 48 hours after installation.
B. Repair or replace damaged surfaces that are soiled or scarred in a manner acceptable to the Owner.
RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING
VLK Architects, 2009 09 6516 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
3.05 CLEANING
A. Clean in accordance with Section 01 7413 - PROGRESS CLEANING.
1. Remove excess adhesive and other foreign matter from tile flooring and base.
2. Scrub floor with cleaner in conformance with manufacturer's instructions and rinse.
3. Replace defective or loose material.
END OF SECTION
RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING
VLK Architects, 2009 09 6516 - 3 2737.03
SECTION 09 6800
CARPETING
PART 1 - GENERAL
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Carpet, installation and accessories.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 09 6500 - Resilient Flooring: rubber base.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit in accordance with SECTION 01 3323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND
SAMPLES.
1. Provide manufacturer's installation instructions, including manufacturer's approved adhesive with carpet.
2. Provide certification of manufacturer's approval of adhesive.
3. Provide warranty information
4. Provide product data for each type of carpet material and accessory required. Products proposed must
meet or exceed the specifications identified in this section. Submit manufacturer's technical specifications,
published standard warranty, attached comparative checklistand the following manufacturer's test reports:
a. Methenamine Pill Test (DOC FF #1-70), Rating Pass.
b. Flooring Radiant Panel Test, NFPA-253, ASTM E 648.
c. Smoke Density, NBS Smoke Density Chamber NFPA-258, 450 or less.
d. Static Test, AATCC Test Method 134-1979, 2.5KV or below under standard test conditions 70° F., 20%
R.H.
B. Samples:
1. For verification purposes in manufacturer's standard size, showing full range of color, texture and pattern
variations expected. Prepare samples from material to be used for the work. Submit the following:
a. 12" square samples of each type of carpet material required.
b. 12" long samples of each type of exposed edge striping and accessory item.
2. Provide manufacturer's approved adhesive with carpet samples.
C. Seaming Diagrams: Submit to the Architect for review.
1. Contractor shall be responsible for conformance with the drawings and specifications relative to the
installation.
2. Architect's review will coverthe sizes of the pieces and location of seams, but not dimensions or quantities.
3. All length seams and cross joints necessary to the layout of the carpet shall be shown on the seaming
diagrams.
D. Maintenance Manual: Provide two copies of a printed maintenance manual, written by the carpet manufacturer's
Technical Service Department delivered to the Owner at the project site.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator Qualifications: The work shall be performed by a skilled applicator specializing in this type of work
who has not less than 5 years experience in carpet installations similar in size and type to the carpet
requirements of this project.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver and handle in accordance with SECTION 016500 - PRODUCT DELIVERY REQUIREMENTS.
B. Delivery: Carpet shall be delivered to the project site in mill wrappings. Each roll shall have register number
tags attached or register number stenciled on bale.
C. Storage:
1. Storage shall be in accordance with SECTION 01 6600 - PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING
REQUIREMENTS.
2. Store materials in original undamaged packages and containers, inside well -ventilated area protected from
weather, moisture, soilage, extreme temperatures and humidity.
3. Lay flat, blocked off ground.
4. Store materials for three days priorto installation in the areas of installation to achieve temperature stability.
CARPETING
VLK Architects, 2009 09 6800 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Measurements: Dimensions supplied on the drawings are approximate. Contractor shall carefully check all
dimensions and other conditions affecting his work in the field and shall be responsible for proper installation.
1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Maintain room temperature at minimum 70° F and relative humidity at approximately that at which the area is
to be maintained for at least 24-hours prior to, during and for 24-hours after installation.
1.07 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of SECTION 01 7823 - OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE DATA.
B. Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials and suggested schedule for cleaning
and shampooing.
C. Extra Materials:
1. Upon completion of work, deliver to the project site not less than 12 sq. yds. of each type, color and pattern
of carpet, exclusive of materials required to properly complete installation.
2. Furnish maintenance materials from same production run as materials installed.
3. Package maintenance materials with protective covering, identified with appropriate labels.
4. Other remnants, usable scraps and overage in carpeting shall be packaged in appropriate wrapping,
labeled and delivered to the Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Carpet (17A): Provide tufted, loop pile carpet, solution dyed or yarn dyed with at least 20% recycled content,
with Infinity or Powerbond RS backing in 6' wide roll goods. Colors) shall be as selected by Architect from
manufacturer's full color range. Product/manufacturer.
Collins & Aikman; Sentinel II
Mannington Commercial; Gametime
B. Adhesive: Type and brand recommended by carpet manufacturer for indoor installation of carpet by the direct
cement method.
C. Edge Strips: Provide two-piece vinyl Snap -Down Std. Edge Unit as manufactured by Mercer Plastics Co., Inc.
Color(s) as selected by Architect.
D. Miscellaneous Materials: Types of seaming tape, thread and other accessoryitems recommended bythe carpet
manufacturer and installer for the conditions of installation and use.
E. Subfloor Filler: White premix latex; type recommended by flooring material manufacturer
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Before commencement of any work the Contractor shall inspect the floors to receive carpet to determine the
condition of those surfaces, and shall furnish and apply suitable primer and otherwise prepare floor surfaces
in accordance with the carpet manufacturer's instruction.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Delay installation until all surrounding work, including painting, has been completed. Vacuum substrate
immediately prior to carpet installation, and remove all deleterious substances which would interfere with
installation or be harmful to the work.
B. Ensure floors are level, with maximum surface variation of 1/4" in 10' noncumulative. Inspect subflooring for
cracks, holes, abrasions, rough spots, ridges orother conditions which will adversely affect execution and quality
of work. When carpet is installed over vinyl composition tile:
CARPETING
VLK Architects, 2009 09 6800 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
1. Remove any loose tiles and infill with Subfloor Filler to be smooth and level. Infill holes, depressions,
cracks, resulting voids from demolition, etc., and smooth out any rough spots or ridges to ensure that floors
are level.
2. Strip wax from tiles with type and brand of wax remover, and prepare surface, as recommended by VCT
flooring manufacturer.
3. Provide smooth transition at locations where carpet is placed partially over existing VCT and partially over
another substrate by removing existing VCT and providing subfloor filler to provide a transition which has
a variation level which does not exceed 1/16" height in 8'-0". If variations exceed those set forth, the
existing material wearing surface shall be filled or ground down as required to meet the stated tolerances.
It is the intent to obtain a surface as smooth and level as possible.
C. Ensure concrete floors are free from scaling and irregularities and exhibit neutrality relative to acidity and
alkalinity.
D. Use an approved cementitious filler to patch cracks, small holes and for leveling.
E. Notify Architect in writing of any condition which will prevent satisfactory completion of work. Do not proceed
until such defects are entirely corrected. Application or installation of carpet shall constitute acceptance of
sub -floors.
F. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing substrate and site conditions.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Carpet (17A). Install carpet using the direct cement method.
1. Comply with carpet manufacturer's instruction and recommendations. Maintain direction of pattern and
texture. Do not seam weft to warp, except as directed.
2. Extend carpet under open -bottomed and raised -bottom obstructions, and under removable flanges of
obstructions. Extend carpet into closets and alcoves of rooms indicated to be carpeted, unless another
floor finish is indicated for such spaces. Extend carpet under all movable furniture and equipment.
3. Install carpet wall to wall, using continuous lengths and as broad widths as possible to minimize the
placement of seams in traffic lanes. Cut edges shall be trued and appropriately treated to form invisible
and non -raveling joints where exposed.
4. Edges of carpet abutting vertical surfaces shall fit tight and meet against such materials. Where carpet
edges are not concealed by thresholds or other materials use vinyl edge strips.
5. Installed carpet shall be free of spots, dirt or soil and shall be without tears, frayed or pulled tufts. Carpet
surfaces shall be smooth and tight, without wrinkles and open seams.
B. Check matching of carpet before cutting and ensure there is no visible variation between dye lots.
C. Cut carpet, where required, in manner to allow proper seam and pattern match. Ensure cuts are straight and
true and unfrayed.
D. Seams
1. Install in accordance with approved seam layout using a minimum of seams. Where possible and practical,
locate seams in areas of least amount of traffic.
2. Do not use small carpet fill strips.
3. Do not place seams perpendicular to doors or entries.
4. Cross joints necessary due to layout of areas shall be at absolute minimum and shall be indicated on shop
drawings.
5. Cross joints necessary due to length of rolls received shall be placed, in the cutting, to avoid occurrence
at conspicuous locations, near doors or at pivot points, and shall be approved prior to seaming.
6. Join seams in recommended mannerso as not to detractfrom the appearance of the carpet installation and
decrease its life expectancy. Ensure seams are straight, not overlapped or peaked and free of gaps.
E. Vacuum clean substrate. Spread adhesive in quantity recommended by manufacturer after primer application
to ensure proper adhesion over full area of installation. Apply only enough adhesive to permit proper adhesion
of carpet before initial set.
F. Lay carpet on floors with the run of the pile in same direction of anticipated traffic.
G. Do not change run of pile in any one room or from one room to next where continuous through a wall opening.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Remove access adhesive from floor, base and wall surfaces without damage.
CARPETING
VLK Architects, 2009 09 6800 - 3 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
B. Clean and vacuum carpet surfaces.
3.06 PROTECTION
A. Prohibit traffic from carpet areas for 24 hours after installation.
END OF SECTION
CARPETING
VLK Architects, 2009 09 6800 - 4 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 09 8413
FIXED SOUND-ABSORPTIVE/SOUND-REFLECTIVE PANELS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Acoustical wall panel and ceiling system.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit in accordance with SECTION 01 3323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND
SAMPLES.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit proposed layout of coverage by acoustical panels, details of proposed mounting
method.
C. Samples:
1. Submit a minimum size of 12" x 12" sample of each proposed panel, to include specified facing, proposed
edge detailing and a mounting element.
2. Submit manufacturer's available sample selections of fabric or color for Architect's selection and approval.
D. Certification: Submit manufacturer's certificates of flame spread rating of selected fabric facings or products,
and independent laboratory tests of sound absorption coefficients for products in thickness specified.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Acoustical Wall Panels (24A): Provide acoustical wall panels as manufactured by one of the following:
AR Acoustical Resources QTS Quiet Technology Systems
AVL Systems, Inc. Tectum, Inc.
Conwed Wall Technology, Inc.
Decoustics. Ltd. Wenger
Golterman & Sabo, Inc.
B. Quality: Custom, fabric covered acoustical wall panels constructed of rigid fiberglass insulation core with fabric
stretched and bonded over core. Panels shall have fully tailored square edges and corners, with fabric wrapped
around edge and secured to back of panel. Edges shall be made rigid and abuse resistant by either chemical
edge -hardening resin or non-ferrous metal framing.
1. Acoustical Wall Panels
a. Panel Core: 5 to 7 pound per cubic foot fiberglass or mineral wool insulation board; or molded rigid
fiberglass honeycomb panels with flat fiberglass faces.
b. Panel Fabric: Guilford Panel Fabric FR701, Style 2100, colors as selected by Architect.
c. Panel Size: Minimum 2" thickness, or as required to meet sound absorption specification, face
dimensions as required. Ceiling panels shall be 2" and 3" thicknesses.
d. Sound Absorption (ASTM C 423): Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC) minimum value 0.85 for a Type
A (#4) mounting or Type D-20 (#2) mounting, whichever mounting method will be used to meet the
specified NRC.
e. Flammability (ASTM E 84): Flame Spread 25 or less.
f. Hardware: Manufacturer's standard concealed mounting hardware consisting of panel, wall and
leveling clips.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine walls for conditions that would prevent proper installation of acoustical products, and report such
conditions to the Architect for correction.
B. Do not proceed until defective conditions are corrected.
FIXED SOUND-ABSORPTIVE/SOUND-REFLECTIVE PANELS
VLK Architects, 2009 09 8413 -1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Securely install acoustical panels aligned plumb and square, with uniform, tight butt joints between adjacent
panels, in accordance with manufacturer's written directions.
B. Contractorshall remove all packing material, construction debris, tools and equipment form site upon completion
of the work, leaving each installation clean and acceptable for use and occupancy by the Owner.
END OF SECTION
FIXED SOUND-ABSORPTIVE/SOUND-REFLECTIVE PANELS
VLK Architects, 2009 09 8413 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
ABM Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 09 9100
PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: On-the-job painting and finishing of exterior and interior surfaces.
1. Included: Paint and finish the following materials, fittings, and equipment items which are exposed -to -view.
a. Iron, steel, and galvanized metal.
b. Wood.
c. Concrete masonry units.
d. Interior concrete ceiling and beam surfaces.
e. Gypsum board.
f. Interior caulked joints.
g. Portland cement plaster.
h. Bare and insulation covered piping and ductwork, conduit, hangers, grilles and registers, and primed
metal surfaces and factory -finished surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment.
2. Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts, and labels,
including the following:
a. Factory -finished metal lockers and finished light fixtures.
b. Architectural aluminum and stainless steel.
c. Interior concrete floors and steps and all exterior concrete.
d. Acoustic panel ceilings, unless noted on drawings.
e. Pre -finished cabinets.
f. Operating parts: Moving parts of operating mechanical and electrical equipment, such as: valve and
damper operators, linkages, sensing devices, motor and fan shafts
g. Labels: UL, FM, or other code -required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating,
or nomenclature plates.
3. Contractor shall examine the drawings for mechanical and electrical work, and all materials installed
throughout the building which require painting shall be painted under this section of the specifications.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 05 5000 - Metal Fabrications: shop priming of metal fabrications.
1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. For purposes of this painting specification, the following areas and spaces are not considered finished, occupied
areas and there will be no painting therein except for doors and frames and as may be specifically scheduled
in article paint schedule.
1. Mechanical chases.
2. Spaces above suspended ceilings.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Samples: Submit in accordance with SECTION 01 3323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND
SAMPLES. Submit two 8-1/2" x 11" samples of each paint color scheduled on the color schedule prepared by
the Architect. Samples shall be on heavy cardboard and shall be made with the actual mixed paints to be used
on the project.
B. Paint Schedule: If painting materials other than those specified are proposed for use, submit a complete
schedule of the materials to be substituted. This schedule, in triplicate, shall be in the same form as the paint
schedule included in this section, and shall list materials by manufacturer, brand name, and type for each
surface to be finished.
C. Close-out Schedule: Upon completion of work, furnish a full schedule of paint types and colors actually used
and formulas for each to the Owner.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Product Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing quality paint and finish products with 3 years
experience.
B. Applicator: Company specializing in commercial painting and finishing with 2 years experience.
PAINTING
VLK Architects, 2009 09 9100 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
C. Product Labels: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, stock number, color and label analysis on label
of containers.
D. Single Source Responsibility: Provide primers and other undercoat paint produced by same manufacturer as
final coats. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer, and use only within recommended limits.
E. V.O.C. (Volatile Organic Compound) Compliance: Products listed in the schedules and/or substitutes proposed
for use by Contractor must be formulated to meet all applicable ordinances and regulations regarding maximum
V.O.C. content Utilize products which have been specially formulated to meet such requirements.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Delivery: Deliver materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact.
B. Storage: Contractor shall designate a specific space at the project site for storing and mixing materials. Protect
this space and repairall damage resulting from use. Do notstore kerosene norgasoline in this space. Remove
oily rags at the end of each days work.
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Requirements: Maintain the temperature inside the building at not less than 60°F. during painting
and finishing.
B. Provide continuous ventilation and heating facilities to maintain surface and ambient temperatures above 65°F.
for 24 hours before, during, and 48 hours after application of finishes, unless required otherwise by
manufacturer's instructions.
C. Minimum application temperatures for latex paints: 45°F. for interiors; 50°F. for exterior; unless required
otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
D. Minimum application temperature for varnish and finishes: 65°F. for interior or exterior, unless required
otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
E. Provide fighting level of 80 ft.-candles measured mid -height at substrate surface.
F. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when the relative humidity exceeds 85%; or to damp or wet
surfaces; unless otherwise permitted by the paint manufacturer's printed instructions. Painting may be
continued during inclement weather only if the areas and surfaces to be painted are enclosed and heated within
the temperature limits specified during application and drying periods of 24 hours between coats and 72 hours
after final coat.
G. Protection: Provide sufficient drop cloths to fully protect adjacent finished work.
1.07 PRECAUTIONS
A. Do not store paints, oils, thinners and other flammable items inside the building. They shall be stored in
approved containers when not in actual use during the painting job. The fire hazard shall be kept at a minimum.
B. Take precautions to protect the public and construction workers during the progress of the work.
C. Furnish a temporary fire extinguisher of suitable chemicals and capacity, located near flammable materials.
1.08 MAINTENANCE
A. Extra Materials: Upon completion of the work, deliver to project site 2 gallons of each type and color of paint
applied to interior and exterior surfaces. Provide formula for custom match colors.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Provide paint as manufactured by one of the following:
ICI Dulux Paints (Formerly The Glidden Company)(http://www.iciduluxpaints.com)
Kelly -Moore Paint Co. (http://www.kellymoore.com)
Pittsburgh Paints (http://www.pittsburghpaints.com)
The Sherwin-Williams Co. (http://www.sherwin.com/default.asp)
PAINTING
VLK Architects, 2009 09 9100 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
B. Materials described are based on the specifications of the above listed manufacturers, and are given to
designate the quality of materials required. Materials of best quality grade are representative of the standard
of quality required. Materials not displaying manufacturer's identification as a first line, best -grade product will
not be acceptable.
C. Colors: The Architect will prepare a color schedule. Regardless of which brand of paint is selected for use the
Contractor shall intermix and blend as required to obtain an exact match to each color on the color schedule.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that surfaces and substrate conditions are ready to receive work as instructed by the product
manufacturer.
B. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report to Architect any condition
that may potentially affect proper application.
C. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes unless moisture
content of surfaces are below the following maximums:
1. Gypsum wallboard: 12 percent.
2. Interior located wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D 4442.
D. Test shop -applied primers for compatibility with subsequent cover materials.
E. Perform the following Test procedure prior to painting. This will determine if Passivators exist on galvanized
metal. This procedure is not necessary on galvanized metal with G 90 Paint Grip.
1. Prepare a solution by dissolving 20 grams of copper sulfate in one liter (1000 grams) of water. Copper
sulfate crystals may be purchased at most drug stores.
2. Solvent wash a small area per the procedure of SSPC-SP1.
3. Sand a small washed area using emery cloth.
4. Using a cotton swabsaturated with the copper sulfate solution, apply a swipe to both sanded and unsanded
washed areas.
5. If the sanded and unsanded surfaces turn black at the same time and that time is less than 10 seconds,
there is no passivation on the surface other than light oil, and a normal degreasinglcleaning operation is
sufficient preparation prior to the coating application. If the unsanded surface turns slower than the sanded
surface, or not at all, a passivator of some type is present on the surface. If neither surface turns, the
surface is probably an alloy of zinc or some other metal.
6. If the galvanized steel has been treated or passivated, the treatment or passivator must be removed by
brush blasting. If this method is prohibited by environmental regulations, then chemical etching with
Amchem's GALVAPREP SG-3 will be acceptable, if previously approved by the Architect. The chemical
etching manufacturer's procedures should be followed carefully.
7. If the surface is determined to be an alloy by this test procedure, notify Architect and adhesion tests of the
proposed coating applied over the proposed surface preparation must be conducted.
8. If no passivators are present, wash galvanized metal surfaces with mineral spirits to remove residual grease
and oil.
F. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing surfaces and substrate.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Perform preparation and cleaning procedures in accordance with coating manufacturer's instructions for each
substrate condition.
B. Fill open joints, cracks and crevices on steel buck frames with metal putty and sand smooth before painting.
C. Sand woodwork surfaces smooth before priming.
D. Coat pine knots and pitch streaks with shellac before painting.
E. Putty nail holes after the prime coat.
F. Remove hardware and accessories, plates, lighting fixtures and similar items which are not to be finish -painted
or provide adequate surface -applied protection for these items in place.
PAINTING
VLK Architects, 2009 09 9100 - 3 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
G. Uncoated steel and iron surfaces: Remove grease, scale, dirt, and rust. Where heavy coatings of scale are
evident, remove by wire brushing or sandblasting; clean by washing with solvent. Apply a treatment of
phosphoric acid solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts, and nuts are similarly cleaned. Spot prime paint after
repairs.
H. Shop primed steel surfaces: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather edges to make touch-
up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steel surfaces.
3.03 APPLICATION
A. Workmanship shall be of the highest quality. Mix and use paint materials in accord with the manufacturer's
directions. Spread materials evenly, flow smoothly, and brush out without sags or runs.
B. Provide finish coats which are compatible with primer paints used. Provide barrier coats over incompatible
primers where required.
C. When undercoats, stains or other conditions show through final paint coat, apply additional coats until paint film
is of uniform color and sheen.
D. Finish the insides of wood cabinets, including backs of cabinet doors, as scheduled for the fronts and ends.
E. Between coats, sand enamel and lacquer finish on wood and metal surfaces to produce a smooth, even finish.
Use #220 grit sandpaper or finer.
F. Tint priming coats and undercoats to approximate shade of final coat to assure uniformity of color in the finish.
Touch up suction spots and "hot spots" before applying the last coat to produce an even result in the finish coat.
G. Exposed ductwork, piping and conduit in finished, occupied areas shall be painted the same color as the wall
or ceiling against which it is installed, unless otherwise noted.
H. Apply the finish coat on gypsum board, plaster, and concrete surfaces with rollers.
I. On concrete masonry unit wall surfaces without a block filler, apply the first coat of paint with a spray gun.
3.04 TOUCH UP AND CLEAN
A. Touching Up: On completion, carefully touch up all holidays, marred and damaged spots, and work over all
surfaces that have been repaired by other trades.
B. Cleaning: Remove spilled, splashed, and splattered paint from all surfaces. Do not mar surface finish of item
being cleaned.
C. Reinstall the items removed under the provisions of paragraph above.
3.05 RE -PAINTING
A. Locations and Extent: The re -painting of existing surfaces shall be as follows:
1. Painted wall, door and frame surfaces which have been reworked, cut into or patched, whether specifically
designated on the drawings or not. Re -painting shall include all openings in existing walls.
2. Entire rooms/areas, as designated on the drawings.
3. Ceiling grid systems in rooms/areas where indicated on the drawings.
B. Colors: Match existing colors of corresponding surfaces except where new colors are scheduled.
C. Preparation:
1. Clean surfaces to remove dust and dirt. Remove oil, grease, wax, loose paint, mill scale dirt, foreign matter,
rust, mold, mildew, mortar, efflorescence, and sealers and other contaminants which would inhibit paint
bonding to the old paint.
2. Remove rust and loose and flaking paint by scraping and sanding.
3. Glossy surfaces of old paint films and ceiling grid must be clean and dull before repainting. Thorough
washing with an abrasive cleanser will clean and dull in one operation, or wash thoroughly and dull by
sanding.
4. Spot prime any bare areas with an appropriate primer in conformance with the following paint schedule for
new work.
5. Check for compatibility by applying a test patch of the recommended coating system, covering at least 2
to 3 Sq.Ft. Allow to dry one week before testing adhesion per ASTM D 3359. If the coating system is
incompatible, complete removal of existing finish is required.
PAINTING
VLK Architects, 2009 09 9100 - 4 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
D. Painting: Generally, apply one coat of finish paint over old surfaces, using the same materials scheduled in the
paint schedule for like new surfaces.
E. Ceiling Grid Re -Painting:
1. Remove grease or oil from ceiling grid with paint thinner.
2. Sand hard, glossy surface until dull or treat with surface conditioner to promote adhesion of new coat of
paint.
3. Use small pure china bristle brush for smooth finish.
4. Use trim roller for large areas.
F. Verification: Verify the extent of re -painting work at the building and make due allowance for cutting and
patching required for installation of mechanical and electrical work.
3.06 PAINT SCHEDULE
A. The products listed below represent top of the line products of each manufacturer. These products are not
presented as being equivalent, as there are too many variables to match each product across the board.
Manufacturer's designations are:
ICI ICI Dulux Paints (Formerly The Glidden Company)
KM Kelly -Moore Paint Co.
PPG Pittsburgh Paints
SWThe Sherwin-Williams Co.
B. Interior Metal
1. Steel door frames, borrowed light frames, louvers and vision panel frames in doors, hollow metal doors,
sound retardant doors, and ladders.
1 primer coat
ICI 4160 Devguard Multi -Purpose Tank & Structural Primer.
KM 1710--Kel-Guard Zinc Chromate Red Oxide Primer
PPG Red Inhibitive Steel Primer, 6-208
SW Kromik Metal Primer E41N1
2 finish coats
ICI 1516 Ultra -Hide Alkyd Semi -Gloss Enamel
KM 1630--Kel-Cote Alkyd Semi Gloss Enamel
PPG Speedhide 6-1110
SW ProMar 200 Alkyd Semi -Gloss Enamel, Series B34 W 200
2. Ceiling grid suspension system.
2 finish coats
ICI 1280-1200 Spraymaster Pro Aquacrylic Dryfall Flat Primer & Finish
PPG Speedhide 6-90
SW ProMar 200 Alkyd Eggshell
3. Steel pipe handrails and railings.
1 primer coat
ICI 4160 Devguard Multi -Purpose Tank & Structural Primer.
KM 1710--Kel-Guard Zinc Chromate Red Oxide Primer
PPG Red Inhibitive Steel Primer, 6-208
SW Kromik Metal Primer E41N1
2 finish coats
ICI 4308 Devguard Alkyd Industrial Gloss Enamel
KM 1700--Kel-Guard Rust Inhibitive Enamel
PPG InUExt Industrial Gloss Alkyd, 7-282 Series
SW Industrial Enamel, Series B54
4. Grilles, diffusers and registers in walls and ceilings.
1 finish coat
ICI 1512 Ultra -Hide Alkyd Egshell Interior Wall & Trim Enamel
KM 1620--Kel-Cote Alkyd Eggshell Enamel
PPG Speedhide Alkyd Lo-Sheen, 6-90
SW ProMar 200 Alkyd Eg-Shei Enamel, Series B33 W 200
5. Other exposed iron and steel.
1 primer coat
ICI 4160 Devguard Multi -Purpose Tank & Structural Primer.
KM 1711--Kel-Guard White Rust -Inhibitive Primer
PPG Speedhide Inhibitive Steel Primer, 6-208
SW Kern Kromik Metal Primer, B50 W 1
PAINTING
VLK Architects, 2009 09 9100 - 5 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
1 finish coat
ICI 1512 Alkyd Egshell Interior Wall & Trim Enamel
KM 1620-4<el-Cote Alkyd Eggshell Enamel
PPG Speedhide Alkyd Lo-Sheen, 6-90
SW ProMar 200 Alkyd Eg-Shel Enamel, Series B33 W 200
6. Metal ductwork, hangers, supports and brackets.
1 primer coat
ICI 4120 Devguard All Purpose Metal & Galvanized Primer
KM 1722--Kel-Guard Galvanized Iron Primer
PPG Speedhide White Galvanized Steel Primer, 6-209
SW Galvite Paint, B50 WZ30
1 finish coat
ICI 1512 Ultra -Hide Alkyd Egshell Interior Wall & Trim Enamel
KM 1620--Kel-Cote Alkyd Eggshell Enamel
PPG Speedhide Alkyd Lo-Sheen, 6-90
SW ProMar 200 Alkyd Eg-Shel Enamel, Series B33 W 200
7. Items of mechanical and electrical machinery and equipment.
1 finish coat
ICI 4308 Devguard Alkyd Industrial Gloss Enamel
KM 1700--Kel-Guard Rust Inhibitive Enamel
PPG Int/Ext Industrial Gloss Alkyd, 7-282 Series
SW Industrial Enamel, Series B54
8. Fire extinguisher cabinets, including door and frame inside and outside.
1 finish coat
ICI 4508 Devoe Tru-Glaze Chemical Resistant Epoxy Coating.
KM 1680 High Gloss Acrylic Enamel DuraPoxy
PPG Aquapon 35 Gloss Polyamide Epoxy Enamel 95-1 Series
SW Tile Clad II Epoxy, Series B62
C. Interior Wood
1. Wood shelving and millwork.
1 primer coat
ICI 1120 Ultra -Hide Oil/Alkyd Interior Wood Undercoater
KM 985-Flo-Cote Enamel Undercoat
PPG Speedhide Quick -Drying Enamel Undercoater, 6-6
SW ProMar 200 Alkyd Enamel Undercoater, B49 W 200
1 finish coat
ICI 1516 Ultra -Hide Alkyd Semi -Gloss Enamel
KM 1630--Kel-Cote Alkyd Semi -Gloss Enamel
PPG Speedhide Interior Semi -Gloss Alkyd Enamel 6-1110 Series
SW ProMar 200 Alkyd Semi -Gloss Enamel, Series B34 W 200
2. Inside of cabinet drawers.
1 finish coat clear satin polyurethane
3. Hardwood millwork, doors, and trim.
1 coat stain; color as selected by Architect.
1 coat clear sanding sealer
2 coats clear satin polyurethane
D. Interior Masonry (At sound absorbing concrete masonry unit blocks, do not paint fibrous fillers)
1. Concrete masonry unit walls scheduled to have Epoxy Paint.
1 filler coat
ICI Devoe 4000 Bloxfil Interior/Exterior Heavy Duty Acrylic Block Filler
KM 521-Acrylic Block Filler
PPG Pitt -Glaze Int/Ext Latex Block Filler 16-90
SW Heavy Duty Block Filler, B42 W 46
2 finish coats
ICI Devoe4408 Tru-Glaze-WB Waterborne Epoxy Gloss Coating
KM 1790 Kel-Guard Acrylic Epoxy
PPG Auquapon WB Waterbome Gloss Epoxy coating 98-1 Series
SW Water -Based Catalyzed Epoxy, Series B70, Gloss Hardener
2. Concrete masonry unit walls in Mechanical Rooms.
2 finish coats
ICI 1416 Ultra -Hide Latex Semi -Gloss Interior Wall & Trim Enamel.
KM 1650--Acry-Plex Latex Semi -Gloss Enamel
PPG Speedhide InteriorAcrylic Latex Semi -Gloss Enamel, 6-510 Series
SW Pro -Mar 200 Latex Semi -Gloss, B31 W 200
PAINTING
VLK Architects, 2009 09 9100 - 6 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
3. Concrete masonry unit walls in Activity Room/Gymnasium
1 filler coat
ICI Devoe 4000 Bloxfil Interior/Exterior Heavy Duty Acrylic Block Filler
KM 521--,Acrylic Block Filler
PPG Pitt -Glaze Int/Ext Latex Block Filler 16-90
SW Heavy Duty Block Filler, B42 W 46
2 finish coats
ICI 1416 Ultra -Hide Latex Semi -Gloss Interior Wall & Trim Enamel.
KM 1650--Acry-Plex Latex Semi -Gloss Enamel
PPG Speedhide Interior Acrylic Latex Semi -Gloss Enamel, 6-510 Series
SW Pro -Mar 200 Latex Semi -Gloss, B31 W 200
4. Other concrete masonry unit walls.
1 filler coat
ICI Devoe 4000 Bloxfil Interior/Exterior Heavy Duty Acrylic Block Filler
KM 521- Acrylic Block Filler
PPG Pitt -Glaze Int/Ext Latex Block Filler 16-90
SW Heavy Duty Block Filler, B42 W 46
2 finish coats
ICI 1416 Ultra -Hide Latex Semi -Gloss Interior Wall & Trim Enamel.
KM 1650-Acry-Plex Latex Semi -Gloss Enamel
PPG Speedhide Interior Acrylic Latex Semi -Gloss Enamel, 6-510 Series
SW Pro -Mar 200 Latex Semi -Gloss, B31 W 200
E. Interior Concrete
1. Concrete floors.
2 finish coats (add anti -slip aggregate to 2nd coat only)
ICI 4508 Tru-Glaze Chemical Resistant Epoxy Coating
KM Labor Saver 9100 System High -Performance Epoxy
PPG Aquapon 35 Gloss Polyamide Epoxy Enamel 95-1 Series
SW ArmorSeal 1000 Industrial Floor Coating
F. Gypsum Wallboard
1. Gypsum board ceilings and Purr downs.
1 texture coat
USG Multi -Purpose Texture - Sprayed Splatter - Light Finish Texture
PPG Speedhide Acrylic Texture Coating 4-50
3 finish coats
ICI 1210 Ultra -Hide Latex Flat Interior Wall Paint
KM 550-Super Latex Flat Wall Paint
PPG Speedhide Interior Flat Latex 6-70 Series
SW ProMar 200 Latex Flat Wall Paint, Series B30 W 200
2. Gypsum board walls scheduled to have Epoxy Paint.
1 primer coat - fine sanded texture
ICI 1000 Vinyl/Acrylic Wall Primer Sealer
KM 970-Acry-Plex Hi -Hide Vinyl Wall Sealer
SW ProMar 200 Latex Wall Primer, B28 W 200
2 finish coats
ICI Devoe 4408 Tru-Glaze-WB Waterborne Epoxy Gloss Coating
KM 1790 Kel-Guard Acrylic Epoxy
PPG Aquapon WB Waterborne Gloss Epoxy Coating 98-1 Series
SW Water -Based Catalyzed Epoxy, Series B70, Gloss Hardener
3. Gypsum board walls above ceramic file wainscot in corridors.
1 texture coat
USG Multi -Purpose Texture - sprayed splatter medium -light finish texture
PPG Speedhide Acrylic Texture Coating 4-50
3 finish coats
ICI Dulux Professional Acrylic Eggshell Wall & Trim Paint 1402 Series
KM A1610 Acry-Plex 100% Acrylic Interior Eggshell Enamel
PPG Speedhide Interior Enamel Eggshell Latex 6411 Series
SW ProMar 200 Interior Latex Eg-Shel B20W2200 Series
4. All other gypsum board walls.
1 texture coat
USG Multi -Purpose Texture - sprayed splatter medium -light finish texture
PPG Speedhide Acrylic Texture Coating 4-50
1 primer coat
ICI 1000-1200 Prep & Prime Hi -Hide Interior Water -based Primer Sealer
SW ProMar 200 Latex Wall Primer B28W200 or approved equivalent
PAINTING
VLK Architects, 2009 09 9100 - 7 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
2 finish coats
ICI 1416 - Ultra -Hide Latex Semi -Gloss Interior Wall & Trim Enamel
KM 1650- Acry-Plex Latex Semi -Gloss Enamel
PPG Speedhide Interior Semi -Gloss Latex Enamel 6-610 Series
SW Pro -Mar 200 Latex Semi -Gloss, B31 W 200
G. Interior Caulked Joints
1. Caulking
2 finish coats
ICI 1416 - Ultra -Hide Latex Semi -Gloss Interior Wall & Trim Enamel
KM 1650-Acry-Plex Latex Semi -Gloss Enamel
PPG Speedhide Interior Semi -Gloss Latex Enamel 6-510 Series
SW Pro -Mar 200 Latex Semi -Gloss, B31 W 200
H. Interior Plaster
1. Smooth plaster finish
1 primer coat
ICI 1030-1200 Ultra -Hide PVA Interior Primer -Sealer
KM 970-Acry-Plex Hi -Hide Vinyl Wall Sealer
SW ProMar 200 Latex Wall Primer, B28 W 200
2 finish coats
ICI Devoe 4408 Tru-Glaze-WB Waterborne Epoxy Gloss Coating
KM 1790 Kel-Guard Acrylic Epoxy
PPG Aquapon WB Waterborne gloss Epoxy Coating 98-1 Series
SW Water -Based Catalyzed Epoxy, Series B70, Gloss Hardener
I. Interior Acoustical Ceiling Tiles
2 finish coats
PPG Speedcraft Interior Wall & Ceiling Flat Latex 5-70 Series
SW ProMar 400 Flat Latex
Exterior Metal
1. Steel door frames and hollow metal doors
1 primer coat
ICI 4130 Devshield Rust Penetrating Metal Primer
KM 1710--Kel-Guard Zinc Chromate Red Oxide Primer
PPG Speedhide Int/Ext Rust Inhibitive Steel Primer 6-208 Series
SW Kromik Metal Primer E41N1
2 finish coats
ICI 4308 Devoe Alkyd Industrial Gloss Enamel
KM 1700--Kel-Guard Rust Inhibitive Enamel
PPG Int/Ext Industrial Gloss Alkyd Enamel 7-282 Series
SW Industrial Enamel, Series B54
2. Steel pipe, conduit, hangers supports and brackets.
1 primer coat
ICI 4120 Devguard All Purpose Metal & Galvanized Primer
KM 1722-4Kel-Guard Galvanized Iron Primer
PPG Speedhide Int/Ext Galvanized Steel Primer 6-209
SW Galvite Paint, B50 WZ30
1 finish coat
ICI 4308 Devoe Alkyd Industrial Gloss Enamel
KM 17004(el-Guard Rust Inhibitive Enamel
PPG Int/Ext Industrial Gloss Alkyd Enamel 7-282 Series
SW Industrial Enamel, Series B54
3. Galvanized steel pipe handrails, railings, lintels, gates, metal fencing, ladders, ductwork, flashings, copings,
roof hatches, tubular steel downspouts, galvanized gutters and downspouts, scuppers, ventilators, and
louvers. (Reference test procedure for Passivators)
1 primer coat
ICI 4120 Devguard All Purpose Metal & Galvanized Primer
KM 1722--Kel-Guard Galvanized Iron Primer
PPG Speedhide Int/Ext Galvanized Steel Primer 6-209
SW Galvite Paint, B50 WZ30
2 finish coats
ICI 4308 Devoe Alkyd Industrial Gloss Enamel
KM 1700- Kel-Guard Rust Inhibitive Enamel
PPG Int/Ext Industrial Gloss Alkyd Enamel 7-282 Series
SW Industrial Enamel, Series B54
PAINTING
VLK Architects, 2009 09 9100 - 8 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
4. Items of mechanical and electrical machinery and equipment, including mechanical and electrical
equipment on the roof which are 12" above roof line and are not concealed by a screen.
1 finish coat
ICI 4308 Devoe Alkyd Industrial Gloss Enamel
KM 1700--Kel-Guard Rust Inhibitive Enamel
PPG Int/Ext Industrial Gloss Alkyd Enamel 7-282 Series
SW Industrial Enamel, Series B54
5. Cast iron downspout boots.
1 primer coat
ICI 4160 Devguard Multi -Purpose Tank & Structural Primer.
KM 1711--Kel-Guard White Rust -Inhibitive Primer
PPG Speedhide Int/Ext Rust Inhibitive Steel Primer 6-208 Series
SW Kern Kromik Metal Primer, B50 W 1
1 finish coat
ICI 4308 Devoe Alkyd Industrial Gloss Enamel
KM 1700--Kel-Guard Rust Inhibitive Enamel
PPG Int/Ext Industrial Gloss Alkyd Enamel 7-282 Series
SW Industrial Enamel, Series B54
K. Exterior Plaster
1. Cement plaster surfaces with integral color.
1 finish coat
ICI 2220 Acrylic House, Stucco & Masonry
KM 1105 Kel-Crete Acrylic Masonry Finish
PPG Speedhide Exterior Flat Acrylic Latex 6-610 Series
SW Weather Perfect Exterior Flat, B36
L. Exterior Concrete Masonry Units
1 filler coat
ICI Devoe Coatings 4000 Bloxfil
KM 521-,Acrylic Block Filler
PPG Pitt -Glaze Int/Ext Latex Block Filler 16-90
SW Heavy Duty Block Filler, B42 W 46
2 finish coats
ICI 2220 Acrylic House, Stucco & Masonry
KM 1105 Kel-Crete Acrylic Masonry Finish
PPG Speedhide Exterior Flat Acrylic Latex 6-610 Series
SW Weather Perfect Exterior Flat, B36
END OF SECTION
PAINTING
VLK Architects, 2009 09 9100 - 9 2737.03
CATE Renovations
ABM Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 10 1116
MARKERBOARDS AND TACKBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Framed markerboards and tackboards.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry; wood grounds.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit in accordance with SECTION 01 3323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND
SAMPLES. Include complete manufacturer's catalog cuts and data sheets of anchors, fasteners, color chips
(photographic reproductions are not acceptable) and installation requirements.
B. Samples: Submit in accordance with SECTION 01 3323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND
SAMPLES. Submit a 12" x 12" sample of each type of markerboard and tackboard. Submit a 6" long sample
of each component of exposed trim.
1.03 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit under provisions of SECTION 017823 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA.
B. Maintenance Data: Include data on regular cleaning, and stain removal.
1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable code forflame/smoke rating for vinyl fabric covered tackboards in accordance with ASTM
E 84.
1.05 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three
years documented experience.
1.06 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. Assembled Units: Manufacturer's standard 5-year warranty against defects in materials and workmanship.
B. Special Warranty for Porcelain -enamel Face Sheets: Manufacturer's standard Life -of -the -building warranty in
which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace porcelain -enamel face sheets that fail in materials or
workmanship. Failures include, but are not limited to: 1) Surface lose original writing and erasing qualities; 2)
Surfaces become slick or shiny; 3) Surfaces exhibit crazing, cracking, or flaking.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Liquid Chalk Type Board: Provide porcelain enamel steel liquid chalk writing system, 4'-0" width by length
indicated. Product/ manufacturer, one of the following:
LCS White Board; Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc.
Porcelain on Steel Markerboards; Platinum Visual SystemsTm; a division of abc School Equipment
P3 ceramicsteel®; Polyvision Corp.
1. Face sheet of 24 gage leveled enameling steel with porcelain enamel writing surface.
2. Core material of nominal 1/2" thick fiberboard or double -ply hardboard.
3. Panel backing of 0.015" sheet aluminum or 26 gage sheet steel.
4. Manufacturer shall factory assemble and bond together the face sheet, core and backing sheet.
5. Colors shall be as selected by Architect.
6. Markerboard panel shall be up to 16'-0" in length without joints.
MARKERBOARDS AND TACKBOARDS
VLK Architects, 2009 10 1116 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
ABM Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
B. Framed Tackboard: Provide vinyl covered tackboards in configuration as shown Product/ manufacturer; one
of the following:
Fabricork Vinyl Bulletin Boards; Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc.
Vinyl Corkboard; Platinum Visual Systems TM'; a division of abc School Equipment
Type I Vinyl; Polyvision Corp.
1. Heavy-duty, self -healing vinyl machine laminated under high pressure to 1/4" thick cork.
2. Rigid backing panel of 1/4" hardboard.
3. Cork and backing panel shall be factory assembled and bonded together.
4. Colors shall be as selected by Architect.
5. Tackboards shall be up to 16'-0" in lengths without joints.
C. Framed Pegboard: 1/4" natural hardboard with 9/32" dia. holes on V centers. Provide board in configuration
as shown.
D. Frames and Trim: Provide extruded aluminum frames and trim. Finish for exposed trim surfaces shall be
Architectural Class II AA-M21A31 natural anodic coating. Snap -on type trim is not acceptable.
Product/manufacturer, one of the following:
Series 185; Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc.
HTS; Platinum Visual SystemsTm; a division of abc School Equipment
555 Series; Polyvision Corp.
E. Joint Strips: H-shaped aluminum in single pieces for full height of boards.
1. At vertical pints within markerboards, color the strips to match the markerboards.
2. At vertical joints between markerboards and tackboards, strips shall be anodized aluminum.
F. Map Rails: 1" wide of extruded aluminum with cork insert and Claridge No. 51 ES type end stops. Furnish one
No. 51 M metal map hook for each linear foot of map rail and two (2) No. 51 FH flag holders for each room with
map rails. Finish map rail to match the markerboard frames."
G. Chalktroughs: Heavy tubular type of extruded aluminum with cast aluminum end caps, finished to match the
markerboard frames.
H. Adhesive: Flash -proof type furnished or recommended by the manufacturer.
2.02 FABRICATION
A. Fabricating Boards: Markerboards and tackboards shall be factory framed units up to 16'-0" one piece in length.
Boards too large to be factory framed shall be assembled on the job to match the factory -built boards.
1. Assemble frames with hairline joints. Corner joints shall be mitered. There shall be no exposed face
fasteners of any sort.
2. Make up boards in single sheets without joints where possible. Where vertical joints are necessary, space
them symmetrically and use joint strips to cover them. Horizontal joints are not acceptable.
3. Verticaljoints between markerboard and tackboard in the same frame shall be covered with single mullion
trim pieces. Double mullions at these joints will not be acceptable.
4. Provide a map rail across the top of each markerboard unit.
5. Provide a chalktrough under each markerboard unit
6. Manufacturer's labels shall not be exposed to view.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Erecting Framed Units: Install framed markerboards and tackboards in conformance with the manufacturer's
instructions using continuous wall hangers and adjustable mounting clip angles.
1. On masonry walls, secure the hangers with screws into metal expansion shields or with toggle bolts.
2. On gypsum wallboard partitions, locate the hangers to engage the steel stud flanges where possible and
secure with molly bolts or self -drilling fasteners into the studs, or attach to wood blocking with suitable
length screws.
3. On back of markerboards, field install blocking pads at 16" on centers horizontally and vertically. Apply
manufacturer's recommended adhesive evenly over entire surface of each pad using a serrated trowel.
4. Behind the tackboards furnish and field install suitable blocking pads 16" o.c. each way to prevent bowing.
5. Behind pegboards, field install blocking pads at 16" on centers.
6. The installed boards shall be flat, plumb, square and rigid.
7. Mounting Height: From finished floor to bottom of chalkrail or bottom of tackboard shall be 36".
MARKERBOARDS AND TACKBOARDS
VLK Architects, 2009 10 1116 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
3.02 CLEANING
A. Remove crates, cartons and rubbish from the premises and leave the rooms broom clean. Clean down board
surfaces to leave them in perfect condition.
END OF SECTION
MARKERBOARDS AND TACKBOARDS
VLK Architects, 2009 10 1116 - 3 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 10 1316
BULLETIN BOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit in accordance with SECTION 01 3323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND
SAMPLES. Include installation instructions.
B. Samples: Submit in accordance with SECTION 01 3323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND
SAMPLES. Submit a 12" square sample of tackboard material and a 12" length of trim.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Provide Contemporary Cabinet Model No. 2041, Th x 4'w bulletin boards as manufactured by Claridge.
Equivalent products of one of the following will be acceptable:
ABC Bulletin and Directory Div. Nelson -Harkins Industries
Andco Industries Corp.
Greensteel, Inc.
Lynn Sign Co.
Nelson -Adams Co.
The Southwell Co.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Extrusions: Provide manufacturer's standard extruded aluminum sections of alloy and temper
recommended by the aluminum producer or finisher for the type of use and finish indicated, and with not less
than the strength and durability properties specified in ASTM B 221 for 6063-T5 alloy.
B. Glass: Provide clear, tempered safety glass complying with the requirements of ASTM C 1048, Type I, Class
1 (Clear), Quality q3 (Glazing select). Kind FT - Fully Tempered, Condition A - Uncoated surfaces.
C. Tackboard: Provide seamless sheet, 1/4" thick ground natural cork compressed with a resinous binder with
washable vinyl finish and integral color throughout, laminated to burlap backing. Provide color and texture as
selected by Architect.
D. Fasteners: Provide screws, bolts, and other exposed fastening devices of the same material as the items being
fastened. Use theft -proof fasteners.
E. Hardware:
1. Hinges: Provide continuous type piano hinges.
2. Lock: Furnish each cover with the manufacturer's standard lock; key all locks alike. Furnish 2 keys per
lock.
2.03 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate bulletin boards to comply with dimensions, design, and details, and quality indicated.
B. Fabricate perimeter and cover frames with reinforced corners, mitered to a hairline fit, with no exposed
fasteners.
C. Hardware for Covers: Equip covers with the manufacturer's standard hardware of the type indicated.
D. Provide the manufacturers standard surface mounted bulletin board assembly, fabricated to sizes indicated,
consisting of the bulletin board housing with perimeter frame, sides and back, tackable surface, and operable
transparent covers with hardware.
E. Perimeter Frame and Cover Design: Provide extruded aluminum perimeterframe of profile indicated. Provide
extruded aluminum door frame of the profile indicated, hung on continuous piano hinges and glazed with Y."
thick clear tempered glass.
F. Finish: Provide AA-M12C22A41 clear satin anodized finish.
BULLETIN BOARDS
VLK Architects, 2009 10 1316 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install units plumb, and level, in locations shown. Securely attach to the supporting structure with concealed
fasteners, in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions.
3.02 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Upon completion of installation, clean surfaces in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Protect units
from damage until acceptance by the Architect.
END OF SECTION
BULLETIN BOARDS
VLK Architects, 2009 10 1316 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 10 1400
IDENTIFYING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Room identification signs.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 01 2100 -Allowances.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit in accordance with SECTION 01 3323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND
SAMPLES.
B. Samples: Submit manufacturer's complete line of color samples, 1" x 3", for initial color selection.
C. Invoices: Submit certified copies of invoices indicating description and quantity of signs delivered and installed.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All interior signs shall be provided by a single source with at least five years experience successfully providing
signs of similar type and scope.
B. All signs shall comply with the Texas Accessibility Standards (TAS) and all other laws and ordinances of
authorities having jurisdiction. Braille shall be Grade II, having dimensions as required to meet TAS.
1.04 PACKING DELIVERY, AND STORAGE
A. Deliver components correctly packaged to prevent damage. Pack modules and back-up plates unassembled
to allow for mechanical mounting of backplate to wall with concealed fasteners.
B. Individually and clearly identify each sign number, type, location to be installed, mounting instructions, and any
other pertinent information.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 INTERIOR IDENTIFICATION GRAPHICS
A. Provide room identification signs as selected by Architect by allowance.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Interior Identification Graphics:
1. On hard surfaces (i.e. ceramic tile, masonry, or plastic laminate), install room identification signs plumb and
square with the "Tuff -bond" silicone adhesive furnished by the manufacturer (foam tape is not allowed).
2. On painted gypsum wallboard orvinyl wallcovering, install room identification signs on backing plates with
the "Tuff -bond" silicone adhesive furnished by the manufacturer (foam tape is not allowed).
a. The backing plate shall bet/8" thick and shall be the same size as the face panel.
b. Screw the backing panel into molly bolts in the wall with two countersunk, flathead screws.
3. Install signs on the wall 60" from floor to centerline of sign, and with the edge closest to the door at 8"
maximum from door frame.
4. Unless noted otherwise, install signs on latch side of the door such that a person can approach within 3"
and avoid door swing and protruding objects.
5. Installation shall comply with ADA requirements.
6. For signs mounted on glass, install matching coverplate on opposite side of glass and aligned with the sign.
3.02 CLEANING
A. On completion, clean exposed surfaces and leave free of defects. Do not use abrasives.
B. Do not use abrasives.
IDENTIFYING DEVICES
VLK Architects, 2009 10 1400 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
3.03 COORDINATION
A. Contractor shall coordinate the installation of the identifying devices with other trades involved in the project.
3.04 DAMAGE
A. Any identifying device which is scratched or defaced will be rejected.
END OF SECTION
IDENTIFYING DEVICES
VLK Architects, 2009 10 1400 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 10 2800
TOILET ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Toilet accessories.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit in accordance with SECTION 01 3323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND
SAMPLES. Include complete manufacturer's catalog cuts and data sheets, complete parts list and installation
requirements for each accessory item specified.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Products: Provide products of the same manufacturer for each type of accessory unit and for units exposed in
the same area.
1. Stamped names or labels on exposed faces of units will not be permitted.
2. Provide locks where specified, with the same keying for all accessory units in the project.
1.04 COORDINATION
A. Accessibility Standards: Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances
required for access under Texas Accessibility Standards (TAS), Architectural Barriers Act --Article 9102, Vernon's
Texas Civil Statutes and Texas Government Code, Chapter 469.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Toilet accessories shall be of the quality manufactured by Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.and are listed by
Bobrick catalog numbers for convenience in identification. The use of a catalog number as a description of an
item shall be taken to include the description or specification for the item in the manufacturer's catalog.
B. Toilet Accessories: Equivalent items of the following manufacturer's are acceptable:
American Specialties, Inc.
Bradley Corp.
General Accessory Manufacturing Co. (GAMCO)
McKinney/Parker Washroom Accessories Corp.
2.02 BASIC MATERIALS
A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304 with No. 4 satin finish.
B. Brass: ASTM B 19, leaded and unleaded flat products; ASTM B 16, rods, shapes, forgings, and flat products
with finished edges; ASTM B 30 castings.
C. Sheet Steel: ASTM A 1008, cold rolled, commercial quality.
D. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, G60 (Z180).
E. Chromium Plating: ASTM B 456, Service Condition Number SC 2 (moderate service), nickel plus chromium
electro-deposited on base metal.
F. Mirror Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Quality q3, nominal 114" thick, with silvering, electroplated copper
coating, and protective organic coating complying with ASTM C 1036.
G. Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153, hot -dip galvanized after fabrication.
H. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and otherdevices of same material as accessory unit, tamper and theft resistant when
exposed, and of galvanized steel when concealed.
I. Keys: Provide universal keys for access to accessories for servicing and resupplying. Provide minimum of six
keys.
TOILET ACCESSORIES
VLK Architects, 2009 10 2800 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Toilet Tissue Dispenser (A): Owner furnished, Contractor installed.
B. Grab Bars (B): Model B-6806, 36" and 42".
C. Mirror (C): Model B-290 2436.
D. Paper Towel Dispenser (D): Owner furnished, Contractor installed.
E. Sanitary Napkin Disposal (E): Rubbermaid Model 6140 w/Liner Model 6141. One carton per napkin disposal
unit.
F. Soap Dispenser (G): Owner furnished, Contractor installed.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions and recommendations, using fasteners
appropriate to substrate and recommended by manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in
locations and at heights indicated. Adhesive mountings and plastic rawl plug mounts will not be acceptable.
B. Secure mirrors to walls in concealed, tamper -resistant mannerwith special hangers, toggle bolts, or screws. Set
units level, plumb, and square.
C. At toilets with wheelchair compartments all toilet accessories shall be installed so that operating areas such as
coin slots, pushbuttons, openings for towels, cups and waste are not more than 48" above finished floor for
frontal approach.
D. Attach dispensers and cabinets to steel stud partitions with suitable hollow wall screw anchors. Attach
dispensers and cabinets to masonry partitions with stainless steel expansion shields and machine screws.
E. Install grab bars to withstand a downward load of at least 250 Ibf. Attach grab bars to toilet partition panels with
stainless steel through bolts and plated hex cap nuts. Attach grab bars to steel stud partitions with connector
assemblies to steel anchors fastened to studs. Attach grab bars to masonry partitions with stainless steel
expansion shields and machine screws.
3.02 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation and verifythat mechanisms function properly. Replace
damaged or defective items.
B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings.
C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommendations.
END OF SECTION
TOILET ACCESSORIES
VLK Architects, 2009 10 2800 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 10 5626
METAL STORAGE SHELVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Metal storage shelving.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit following items in accordance with SECTION 01340 -SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA,
AND SAMPLES.
B. Product Data: Include complete manufacturer's catalog cuts and data sheets, complete parts list, installation
requirements, and all pertinent performance characteristics and criteria.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, construction, sizes, quantities, finishes, and installation details.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Provide metal storage shelving of the same manufacturer throughout the project.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, handle, and protect products in accordance with SECTION 01650 - TRANSPORTATION AND
HANDLING and SECTION 01660 - STORAGE AND PROTECTION.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Provide metal storage shelving as manufactured by one of the following:
Lyon Workspace Products
Penco Products, Inc.
Republic Storage Systems Co.
Richards -Wilcox
Tennsco
Western Pacific Storage Systems
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Provide RiveTier "Long Span H" Shelving as manufactured by Western Pacific Storage Systems (phone
800.732.9777 web site: www.westernpacificstoragesystems.com).
1. Sizes: 7'-0" H x 24"D x width noted on drawings, with a shelf capacity from 500 lbs. (8'-0" length shelf) to
1800 lbs. (4'-0" length shelf)
2. Metal Shelves: 22 gauge steel.
3. Standard Duty Angle Upright Post - LURH - 14 gauge steel.
2.03 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate metal storage shelving square and rigid with posts plumb and true, and shelves flat and free of dents
or distortion. Fabricate exposed metal edges free of sharp edges do burrs. Fabricate connections to form a
rigid structure, free of buckling and warping.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install metal storage shelving in strict accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and
recommendations.
B. Install metal storage shelving level, plumb, square, and true.
C. Install bracing as recommended by manufacturer and as required for stability.
METAL STORAGE SHELVING
VLK Architects, 2009 10 5626 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
3.02 PROTECTION
A. Protect the completed work from damage. Replace damaged items which cannot be repaired. Protectfinished
installation in accordance with SECTION 01660 - STORAGE AND PROTECTION.
3.03 CLEANING
A. Upon completion of the building, clean the metal storage shelving. Leave the metal storage shelving free of
defects and in ready -to -use condition.
B. Perform final cleaning in accordance with SECTION 01740 - CLEANING.
END OF SECTION
METAL STORAGE SHELVING
VLK Architects, 2009 10 5626 - 2 2737.03
SECTION 11 3100
APPLIANCES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Appliances.
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 12 3216 - Manufactured Plastic -laminate -clad Casework
2. Division 22 - Plumbing: plumbing rough -in.
3. Division 26 - Electrical: electrical rough -in.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit in accordance with SECTION 01 3323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND
SAMPLES. Include list of optional features, operating characteristics, and dimensions of individual appliances.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with SECTION 01 3323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND
SAMPLES. Submit rough -in drawings showing dimensioned locations of electrical and plumbing stub -outs for
appliances.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements: Provide electrical components required as part of appliances that are listed and
labeled by UL and that comply with applicable NEMA standards.
B. Accessibility Standards: Where appliances are required to complywith accessibility requirements, comply with
Texas Accessibility Standards (TAS).
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Appliances shall be of the quality manufactured by Whirlpool Corp. and U-Line Corp. and are listed by Whirlpool
and U-Line catalog numbers for convenience in identification. The use of a catalog number as a description
of an item shall be taken to include the description or specification for the item in the manufacturer's catalog.
Equivalent items of the following manufacturer's are acceptable:
Hotpoint
GE Appliances
KitchenAid
Maytag
2.02 EQUIPMENT
A. Microwave: Provide Model GT4175SPQ White -on -White, countertop microwave as manufactured by Whirlpool.
B. Refrigerators: Provide Model ET8WTKXKQ, White -on -White 18.2 cu. ft. freezer -on -top refrigerators as
manufactured by Whirlpool.
C. Disposer: Provide Model GC5000XE 3/4 hp disposer as manufactured by Whirlpool.
D. Electric Cooktop: Provide Model RCS3014LQ, White -on -White 30-inch electric cooktop as manufactured by
Whirlpool.
E. Built-in Combination Oven: Provide Model RMC275PVQ, White -on -White, 27-inch built-in combination oven as
manufactured by Whirlpool. Upper oven shall be 1.4 cu. ft. microwave and lower oven shall be 3.8 cu. ft. self-
cleaning conventional oven.
F. Exhaust Hood: Provide Mod-u-serve Air Systems Model No. W-IM, 5'-0" deep exhaust hood. All welded 18-
gauge stainless steel construction, stainless steel baffle filters, light fixture complete with lamps to provide 50-
foot candles on cooking surface. Trim hood to ceiling with stainless steel closure panels. Exhaust hood
components and accessories shall be UL listed. Exhaust hood shall be fabricated in accordance with NSF
requirements.
APPLIANCES
VLK Architects, 2009 11 3100 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
G. Fire Suppression System: Provide Ansul Model No. R-102, automatic liquid chemical system with all
components required by NFPA Pamphlet No. 96, installed in hood in accordance with manufacturer's written
instructions and recommendations. Provide ductand plenum protection to exhaust hood and surface protection
as required to cooking equipment below. Provide remote manual release in path of egress from protected
exhaust hood area. Provide trim ring around pull. Locate top of chemical cylinders as indicated on the drawings
at ceiling level and install piping to hoods in a totally concealed manner. Any exposed piping and fittings shall
be chrome plated or sleeved with stainless steel tubing. Exposed pipe threads in/above food zone are not
acceptable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.03 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing -in for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before appliance
installation. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.04 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Built-in Appliances: Securely anchor units to supporting cabinets or contertops with concealed fasteners. Verify
that clearances are adequate for proper functioning and rough openings are completely concealed.
C. Freestanding Appliances: Place units in final locations after finishes have been completed in each area. Verify
that clearances are adequate to properly operate appliances.
3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Test each item of appliances to verify proper operation. Make necessary adjustments. Verify that accessories
required have been furnished and installed.
B. Remove packing material from appliances and leave units in clean condition, ready for operation.
C. Protection: Protect the completed work from damage.
END OF SECTION
APPLIANCES
VLK Architects, 2009 11 3100 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 12 2113
HORIZONTAL BLINDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Horizontal blinds.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 08 1100 -Hollow Metal Doors and Frames; glazed openings.
1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Horizontal metal slat louver blinds installed at storefront, curtain wall, glazed openings, and mirrors manual
control of raising and lowering by cord; blade angle adjustable by control wand. Horizontal blinds shall be
Indicated as "HB" on the drawings.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit in accordance with SECTION 01 3323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND
SAMPLES.
B. Product Data: Include manufacturer's catalog cuts and data sheets, and installation instructions and data
certifying blinds are lead-free.
C. Shop Drawings: Include details of attachment and schedule of each size and location.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Measurements: Provide custom size blinds for the openings or mirrors in which they are to be installed. Take
careful measurements of each opening so that the blinds will fit properly. Plan dimensions shall not be used.
Verify head, jamb, and sill conditions.
B. All blinds shall be lead-free.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to site under provisions of SECTION 01 6500 - PRODUCT DELIVERY REQUIREMENTS.
B. Deliver blinds wrapped and crated in a manner to prevent damage to components or marring of surfaces.
C. Store and protect products under provisions of SECTION 016600 - PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING
REQUIREMENTS.
D. Store in a clean, dry area, laid flat and blocked off ground to prevent sagging, twisting, or warping.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Horizontal Blinds: 1" wide by 0.0085" thick slat type, with valance for each blind. Product/manufacturer; one
of the following:
Bali Classics Mini Blinds; Springs Window Fashions Division, Inc.
Levolor 1" (25mm) Riviera Classic Blind; Levolor Corp.
2.02 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION
A. Horizontal Blinds:
1. Head channel shall be 0.025" thick Tomized steel with a plastic type coating. Channel shall be "U" shaped,
approximately 1" high be 1-9116" wide, with flanged edges at the top.
2. Slat supports shall be braided of polyester yam. The vertical component shall have a diameter of not less
than 0.045" nor greater than 0.066". Braiding shall be accurate to hold slats equally spaced, parallel and
straight, and to assure proper tilt control and adequate overlay of slats. Provide 31 rungs per 2 feet of
ladder, equally spaced. Distance between ladders shall not exceed 21 ". The horizontal component shall
consist of not less than four cables interbraided with the vertical component.
HORIZONTAL BLINDS
VLK Architects, 2009 12 2113 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
3. Slats shall be virgin aluminum alloy approximately 1" wide by 0.0085" thick. Slats shall have sufficient
crown to prevent sagging and radius corners.
4. Bottom rail shall be 0.031" thick Tomized steel with a plastic type coating.
5. Tilter shall be Tomized steel of enclosed construction. Unit shall tilt the slats to any desired angle and hold
them at that angle. An automatic disengagement of worm and gear shall eliminate overdrive to prevent
strain or damage to wand, worm, gear, ladder or top slat. Operation shall be by wand of sufficient length
and swivel for easy operation.
6. Lift cord shall be of adequate diameter, braided of high strength synthetic fibers.
7. Finish: The factory finish for the exposed surfaces shall be a plastic type finish coat baked on. Color shall
be as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard color range.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Examine areas to receive blinds for conditions which will adversely affect the installation of the blinds. Do not
proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Attach installation end brackets at each end of blind location. For blinds over 55" long or over 50 square feet
in area, provide intermediate brackets.
B. Blinds shall be mounted in brackets inside frame jambs by skilled mechanics under the supervision of an
authorized representative of the manufacturer. The completed blinds shall be left clean and in perfect working
order. Crates, cartons, and rubbish shall be removed from the premises; rooms shall be left broom clean.
3.03 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation of Gap at Window Opening Perimeter: 1/4".
B. Maximum Offset From Level: 1/8".
3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust work under provisions of SECTION 017700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES.
B. Adjust blinds for smooth operation.
3.05 CLEANING
A. Clean work under provisions of SECTION 017413 - PROGRESS CLEANING.
END OF SECTION
HORIZONTAL BLINDS
VLK Architects, 2009 12 2113 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 12 3216
MANUFACTURED PLASTIC -LAMINATE -CLAD CASEWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Plastic laminate -faced casework as shown on drawings.
2. The fabrication and installation of standard casework components of base cabinets, wall cabinets, storage
cabinets, wardrobe cabinets, shelf units and other units as indicated.
3. The fabrication and installation of custom units, as detailed in the drawings.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry; blocking.
2. Section 08 1423 - Plastic -laminate -faced Wood Doors
3. Section 09 6500 - Resilient Flooring; coved rubber base.
4. Section 11 3100 -Appliances.
5. Section 22 4000 - Plumbing Fixtures
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit in accordance with SECTION 01 3323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND
SAMPLES. Include manufacturer's installation instructions for each type of casework unit.
B. Samples: Submit 6" x 6" samples of specified finishes, including top material. Samples will be reviewed by
Architect for color, texture and pattern only. Compliance with other specified requirements is exclusive
responsibility of contractor.
C. Shop Drawings:
1. Submit shop drawings for plastic laminate -faced casework showing plans, elevations, ends and cross -
sections. Show details and location of anchorages and fitting to floors, walls and base. Include layout of
units with relation to surrounding walls, doors, windows and other building components.
2. Coordinate shop drawings with other work involved.
D. Mock-up Casework:
1. Submit one full-size sample of finished base cabinet unit complete with hardware, doors and drawers,
without finish top.
2. Submit one full-size sample of finished wall -mounted cabinet unit complete with hardware, doors and
adjustable shelves.
3. Furnish both hinged and rolling door samples.
4. Acceptable sample units will be used for comparison inspections at project. Unless otherwise directed,
acceptable sample units may be incorporated in work. Notify Architect of their exact locations. If not
incorporated in work, retain acceptable sample units in building until completion of work and remove sample
units from premises when directed by Architect.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single Source Responsibility: Provide casework with tops and accessories manufactured or furnished by same
casework company for single responsibility.
B. Catalog Standards:
1. The use of catalog numbers and speck requirements set forth in drawings and specifications, are not
intended to preclude the use of any other acceptable manufacturer's product or procedures which may be
equivalent, but are given for purpose of establishing standard of design and quality for materials,
construction and workmanship.
2. Custom units shall be of the same quality as standard units specified.
C. AWI Quality Standard: Comply with applicable requirements of "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards"
published by the Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) except as otherwise indicated.
1. Certification: If a manufacturer, other than the manufacturers listed herein, is proposed and accepted;
submit the following certifications:
a. Work in this section shall be performed by a firm licensed by the AWI Quality Certification Program.
b. Certification shall be evidenced through the application of AWI Quality Certification Labels and/or the
issuance of an AWI Letter of Licensing for the project.
c. Certification labels shall be applied to the work.
MANUFACTURED PLASTIC -LAMINATE -CLAD CASEWORK
VLK Architects, 2009 12 3216 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
D. Color Uniformity: Provide plastic laminate for laminate -clad casework, plastic faced wood doors and plastic
laminate toilet compartments from the same manufacturer.
E. Manufacturer shall have at least 5 years experience and have done installations for similar types of projects.
F. Accessibility Standards: The following special requirements shall be met, where required to comply with Texas
Accessibility Standards (TAS).
1. Countertop height with or without cabinet below, not to exceed a height required by TAS.
2. Kneespace clearance to be minimum clearance as required by TAS.
3. 12" deep shelving, adjustable or fixed not to exceed a range as required by TAS.
4. Wardrobe cabinets to be furnished with rod/shelf adjustable to 48" A.F.F. at a maximum 21" shelf depth.
5. Sink cabinet clearances as required by TAS.
6. Cabinet locks, latches, and other operating mechanisms shall be mounted to comply with forward reach
requirements of TAS; i.e. 15" to 48" above finish floor, except locked bottom drawers at base cabinets.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver plastic laminate -faced casework only after wet operations in building are completed.
B. Store completed plastic laminate -faced casework in a ventilated place, protected from the weather, with relative
humidity therein of 50% or less at 70"F.
C. Protect finished surfaces from soiling and damage during handling and installation. Keep covered with
polyethylene film or other protective covering. Woodwork damaged through neglect of the above requirements
shall be repaired or replaced without additional cost to the Owner.
1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Install finish carpentry products only when temperature and humidity conditions have been stabilized and will
be maintained.
B. Maintain temperature and moisture conditions as recommended by woodwork fabricator from dateof installation
through remainder of construction period.
1.06 GUARANTEE
A. Provide 5-year guarantee against defective materials and workmanship.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer's catalog numbers for LSI Corporation of America, Inc. are shown on drawings for convenience
in identifying certain cabinet work. Unless modified by notation on drawings or otherwise specified, catalog
description for indicated number constitutes requirements for each such cabinet. Subject to compliance with
requirements of this specification, equivalent plastic laminate -faced casework as manufactured by one of the
following will be acceptable:
CIC Concepts in Cabinetry
Case Systems, Inc.
2.02 PLASTIC LAMINATE -FACED CASEWORK
A. Identification of Cabinet Parts by Surface Visibility:
1. Exposed surfaces: Surfaces visible when:
a. Drawers and opaque doors (if any) are closed.
b. Behind clear glass doors.
c. Interior of open shelving cabinet and shelves.
d. Bottoms of cabinets 42" or more above finish floor.
e. Tops of cabinets below 78" above finish floor.
f. Tops of cabinets are visible from an adjacent higher elevation.
2. Semi -exposed surfaces: Surfaces which become visible when.
a. Opaque doors are open or drawers are extended.
b. Bottoms of cabinets are more than 30" and less than 42" above finish floor.
3. Concealed surfaces: Surfaces considered concealed when:
a. Surfaces not visible after installation.
b. Bottoms of cabinets less than 30" above finish floor.
MANUFACTURED PLASTIC -LAMINATE -CLAD CASEWORK
VLK Architects, 2009 12 3216 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
Tops of cabinets over 78" above finish floor and not visible from an upper level.
Stretchers, blocking and components concealed by drawers.
Laminate Cladding:
1. Quality Standard: AWI Section 400 and its Division 400E Laminate Clad Cabinets, Premium Grade.
2. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Reveal overlay design.
3. Laminate Grade for Exposed Surfaces:
a. Horizontal Surfaces other than Tops: HGS (0.050" nominal thickness).
b. Vertical Surfaces: VGS (0.030" nominal thickness).
4. Semi -exposed Surfaces: CLS (0.020" nominal thickness), except back of doors and drawers shall be VGS
(0.028" nominal thickness).
5. Shop joints will be allowed only when the required lengths exceed the lengths of plastic regularly available.
Field joints shall be shop prepared and pre -fitted with bolt -up type fasteners.
6. Edging: FlatEdge PVC, 0.020". Solid, high impact, purified, color-thru, acid resistant PVC edging machine -
applied with hot melt adhesives, automatically trimmed face, back and corners for uniform appearance.
7. Plastic Laminate: General purpose grade, high pressure decorative laminate meeting the physical
requirements of NEMA LD 3 and with a suede finish. Colors shall be as selected by Architect from full color
and pattern range of plastic laminate manufacturers listed. Architect reserves the right to select one color
for the exposed surfaces of the basic components of cabinets and a different color for the following
components of cabinets: door and drawer fronts (including edges of door and drawer fronts), backs of open
shelving and countertop and backsplash, unless shown otherwise. Product/manufacturer; one of the
following:
Formica Brand Laminate; Formica Corp.
Nevamar; TexMar, Inc.
Wilsonart; Ralph Wilson Plastics Co.
Pionite Decorative Laminate; Pioneer Plastics Corp.
Pressure Fused Laminate:
a. Melamine resin impregnated, 80 gram PSM minimum, surface laminated to core under pressure.
b. Shall meet NEMA LD3.3-1991 GP-28 standards and NEMA LD3-1991 CL-20 standards.
c. Shall be balanced at all concealed surfaces with phenolic backer. Unsurfaced coreboard not allowed.
High Performance Particle Board Core:
1. Particleboard to be 47 lb. density, of balanced 3-ply construction with moisture content not to exceed 8%.
Particleboard shall conform to ANSI A208.1-1993, type M-3.
2. Particleboard cabinet components to be of the following minimum core thicknesses prior to lamination:
a. 3/8": cabinet backs and drawer bottoms.
b. 1/2": dividers, as detailed.
c. 3/4": base and tall cabinet tops and bottoms, cabinet sides, drawer spreaders, door, drawer head,
cabinet back rear hangstrips, dividers as detailed, exposed cabinet backs.
d. 1 ": wall cabinet tops and bottoms, door -cabinet shelving 30" width and over, exposed cabinet shelving,
off -wall shelving of all widths, and tall cabinet sides without intermediate fixed shelf.
D. Fiberboard Core:
Uniform, medium density conforming to ANSI A208.2, shall meet the following minimum standards:
Screw holding, face: 355 lbs.
Screw holding, edge: 300 lbs.
Modulus of rupture: 4,500 psi
Modulus of elasticity: 500,000 psi
Internal bond: 100 psi
Fiberboard components to be of the following minimum core thicknesses prior to lamination:
a. 1/2": drawer sides, subfront and back. Drawer under bottom stiffeners.
b. 3/4": framed glass door.
E. Edging Locations: Provide the above specified edging types at the following locations, of the following colors:
1. Door/Drawer front edge: FlatEdge PVC, color matched as selected by Architect to door/drawer face.
2. Cabinet body edge, including door/drawer front spacer rail: FlatEdge PVC, color matched as selected by
Architect to door/drawer face.
3. Interior body component edging, interior dividers, top of drawer body, shelf. FlatEdge PVCto match cabinet
interior surface color as selected by Architect.
2.03 COUNTERTOPS AND ACCESSORIES
A. Countertops:
1. High pressure plastic laminate bonded to 1-1/4" particleboard core.
a. Underside to be properly balanced with plastic laminate backing sheet.
b. Furnish countertops with high pressure plastic laminate edge treatment
MANUFACTURED PLASTIC -LAMINATE -CLAD CASEWORK
VLK Architects, 2009 12 3216 - 3 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
c. Provide loose 4" high pressure laminate covered splashes typically at countertops unless taller
splashes shown or noted.
d. No joints shall be closer than 24" either side of sink cutout.
e. Countertops containing sinks and countertops over dishwashers shall be exterior -grade veneer core
plywood, no substitutions.
f. Joint between backsplash and countertops containing sinks shall be sealed with sanitary, silicone
sealant to ensure a tight seal.
g. Seal substrate at sink cutouts with sanitary, silicone sealant.
B. Tops, Box Curbs, Splash Rims: Provide smooth, clean, exposed tops and edges, in uniform plane free of
defects.
C. Top Sizes: Fumish tops in maximum practicable lengths. Tops shall extend to cover filler panels and corners.
D. Plastic Laminate
1. Quality Standard: AWI Section 400 and its Division 400C Tops.
2. Type of Top: High pressure decorative laminate complying with Premium Grade.
3. Laminate Cladding for Horizontal Surfaces: High pressure decorative laminate, GP-50 (0.050" nominal
thickness) Grade. Laminate shall be selected from one of the manufacturers listed above.
4. Edge Treatment: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces. Plastic laminate edges shall return
across all open ends of cabinets.
5. Joints between tops and backsplash shall be square.
6. PVC edging will not be acceptable.
7. The use of LPDL (Melamine) will not be acceptable.
2.04 CASEWORK HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES
A. Provide manufacturer's standard, satin finish hardware units, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Hinges: Institutional type, 5 knuckle. Provide one pair for doors less than 4 ft. high and 1'V2 pair for doors over
4'. Mill ground hospital tip tight pin feature with all edges eased. Hinge to be full wrap around type of tempered
steel 0.095" thick. Each hinge to have minimum 9 screws, #7, 5/8" FHMS to assure positive door attachment.
C. Wire Pulls: Solid brass with duel chrome finish, 4" wide, (#LK321), for drawers and swing doors, mounted with
two screws fastened from back. Provide two pulls for drawers over 24" wide.
D. Door Catches:
1. Dual self -aligning, heavy-duty permanent magnet type with resistance in compliance with the Americans
with Disabilities Act and Texas Accessibility Standards. Provide two catches on doors over 4' high. At
double -leaf doors, provide Ives No. 2 catch for leaf with the lock.
2. At double -leaf doors, provide Ives No. 2 catch for leaf without the lock.
3. At each 1-1/8" doors, provide 1 flap stay No. 499.050.02.0215 or 499.050.03.0215 (Mepla) or approved
equivalent.
E. Drawer Slides:
1. Standard Drawers: LSI Lab Series Slide, LH-376, self -closing design, White epoxy powder coated with
positive in -stop, out -stop and out -keeper to maintain drawer in 80% open position. Captive nylon rollers,
front and rear. Minimum 100 lb. dynamic load rating at 50,000 cycles. Minimum 150 lb. static load rating.
2. File Drawers: Full extension, 3-part progressive opening slide, minimum 100 lb., zinc plated or epoxy
coated at manufacturer's option.
3. File Drawer Accessory: Knape & Vogt No. 476 follower and track assembly.
4. Paper Storage Drawers: Full extension, 3-part progressive opening slide, minimum 100 lb., zinc plated or
epoxy coated at manufacturer's option.
F. Drawer and Cabinet Locks: Provide National Lock No. C8053-14A, half -mortise type, disc tumbler locks, round
cylinder only exposed. Locks to be keyed differently, with locks in individual rooms keyed alike. Provide a
masterkey.
G. Cabinet Base Molding: To be provided by General Contractor in field.
H. Adjustable Shelf Supports: Provide twin pin design with anti tip -up shelf restraints for both 3/4" and 1" shelves.
Design to include keel to retard shelf slide -off, and slot for ability to mechanically attach shelf to clip. Load rating
to be minimum 300 lbs. each support without failure. Cabinet interior sides shall be flush, without shelf system
permanent projection. Product/manufacturer,, one of the following, no substitutions:
1. SC24 Plastic Shelf Clip; Case Systems, Inc.
2. LH-354; LSI Corporation of America, Inc.
3. Clear Polycarbonate Shelf Clip; TMI System Design Corp.
MANUFACTURED PLASTIC -LAMINATE -CLAD CASEWORK
VLK Architects, 2009 12 3216 - 4 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
I. Wardrobe Rod: To be 1-1/16" rod, LH-362, supported by LH-363 flanges.
J. Shelf and Rod Hardware:
1 hanger rod KV660SS
1 shelf and rod support KV1195
2 rod flanges KV734
wood dowel connectors
K. Homemaking Lab Demonstration Mirror. Provide 22" wide x 48" long chrome plated channel framed 1/4" plate
mirror mounted on 3/8" thick plywood. Suspend mirror by four aluminum rods, securely attached to structure
above the ceiling. Attach mirror to rods with clamps at end of mirror for adjusting tilt angle.
L. Grommets: Model No. LO-3 as manufactured by Doug Mockett & Co., Inc.
M. Countertop Support Bracket: Model #0477, 1/4" steel, welded white enamel finish.
N. Tote Trays: TT150 white polystyrene with permanently attached label holder.
2.05 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate plastic laminate -faced casework to dimensions, profiles and details shown.
B. Assemble units in the shop in as large components as practicable to minimize field jointing.
C. Install hardware uniformly and precisely after final finishing is complete. Set hinges snug and flat in mortises
unless otherwise indicated. Turn screws to a flat seat. Adjust and align hardware so that moving parts operate
freely and contact points meet accurately. Allow for final field adjustment after installation.
D. Provide connecting hardware, closure panel and trim as required for complete and finished installation. Provide
filler panels to cover spaces between casework and adjacent walls at ends of units and elsewhere as may be
required.
E. Detailed Requirements for Cabinet Construction:
1. Sub -Base: To be separate and continuous (no cabinet body sides -to -floor), water resistant exterior grade
plywood with concealed fastening to cabinet bottom. Ladder -type construction of front, back and
intermediates to form a secure and level platform to which cabinets attach.
2. Cabinet Top and Bottom:
a. Solid sub -top to be furnished for all base and tall cabinets.
b. Wall cabinet and library stack bottoms and tops to be 1" thick.
c. Assembly devices to be concealed on bottom side of wall cabinets.
3. Cabinet Ends:
a. Holes drilled for adjustable shelves 1-1/4" o.c.
b. Exposed exterior cabinet ends to be laminated with high pressure laminate.
4. Fixed and Adjustable Shelves:
a. Thickness: Behind doors, to be 3/4" to 27" wide. 1" shelving at 30" wide cabinet and over.
b. Thickness at all widths of open cabinets to be 1 ".
5. Cabinet Backs:
a. Cabinet back to be fully housed into sides, top and bottom, recessed 7/8" from cabinet rear. Rear,
unexposed, side of back to receive continuous bead of hot melt adhesive at joint between back and
sides/top/bottom.
b. Hang rails shall be glued to rear of cabinet back and mechanically fastened to cabinet sides. Provide
minimum of 2 at base, 2 at wall and 3 at tall cabinets.
c. Exposed exterior backs to be high pressure plastic laminate.
6. Door and Drawer Fronts:
a. Laminated door and drawer fronts to be 13/16" thick for all hinged doors. Drawer fronts and hinged
doors are to oveday the cabinet body. Maintain a 1/8" reveal between pairs of doors, between door and
drawer front, or between multiple drawer fronts within the cabinet.
b. Stile and Rail doors to be 13/16" thickwith full 1/4" plate glass. Available hinged or sliding. All exposed
lite-opening edges to be trimmed and glazed with extruded vinyl glazing bead.
7. Drawers:
a. Drawer fronts shall be applied to separate drawer body component sub -front.
b. Drawer sides shall be dadoed and glued to receive front and back, machine squared and held under
pressure while hot melt glued and pinned together.
MANUFACTURED PLASTIC -LAMINATE -CLAD CASEWORK
VLK Architects, 2009 12 3216 - 5 2737.03
CATE Renovations
ABM Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
c. Drawer bottom to be housed into front, sides and back. Underside of drawer to receive continuous
bead of hot melt adhesive at joint between bottom and back/sides/front for sealing and rigidity.
Reinforce drawer bottoms with 1/2" x 4" front -to -back intermediate underbody stiffeners, hot melt glued
and fastened. One at 24", two at 36", four at 48".
d. All drawers to have roller guides as specified.
8. Vertical and Horizontal Dividers: One of the following as indicated by cabinet number:
a. Natural hardboard 1/4" thick, smooth both faces. Secured in cabinet with molded plastic clips.
b. Pressure Fused laminate 3/4" thickness. Secured in cabinet with molded plastic clips or dowels.
9. Door/Drawer Front Rail: Provide minimum 3/4" x 6" x full width cabinet body rails immediately behind all
door/drawer and multiple drawer horizontal joints to maintain exact body dimensions, close off reveal, and
be locator for lock strikes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Verify site dimensions of cabinet locations in building prior to fabrication.
B. Verify location of wood blocking prior to installation of finish carpentry.
3.02 CASEWORK INSTALLATION
A. Installers: Install casework under the supervision of the manufacturer's representative with factory -trained
mechanics certified by manufacturer.
B. Install plumb, level, true and aligned with no distortions. Shim as required, using concealed shims. Where
casework abuts other finished work, scribe and apply filler strips for accurate fit with fasteners concealed where
practicable.
C. Base Cabinets:
1. Set cabinets straight, plumb and level. Adjust sub -tops within 1/16" of a single plane. Fasten each
individual cabinet to blocking in wall with screws and finishing washers spaced 24" o.c. Bolt adjacent
cabinets together into one integral unit withjoints flush, tight, and uniform. Align similar adjoining doors and
drawers to a tolerance of 1/16".
2. Where base cabinets are not installed adjacent to walls, fasten to floor at toe space with fasteners spaced
24" o.c. Secure sides of cabinets to floor, where they do not adjoin other cabinets, with not less than two
fasteners.
D. Wall Cabinets
1. Securely fasten to solid blocking in partitions (not plaster, lath, or wallboard). Anchor, adjust and align wall
cabinets as specified for base cabinets. Using screws with finishing washers, securely fasten each cabinet
through back, near top, at not less than 24" o.c. Align similar adjoining doors to a tolerance of 1/16".
2. Adjust fronts and bottoms within 1/16" of a single plane.
3. Reinforcement of stud walls to support wall -mounted cabinets will be done during wall erection by trade
involved, but responsibility for accurate location and sizing of reinforcement is part of this work.
E. Adjust casework and hardware so that doors and drawers operate smoothly without warp or bind. Lubricate
operating hardware as recommended by manufacturer.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF TOPS
A. Field Jointing: Where practicable, make in same manner as factory jointing using dowels, splines, adhesives
and fasteners recommended by manufacturer. Locate field joints as shown on accepted shop drawings, factory
prepared so there is no jobsite processing of top and edge surfaces.
B. Fastenings: Use concealed clamping devices for field joints, located within 6" of front, at back edges and at
intervals not exceeding 24". Tighten in accordance with manufacturers instructions to exert a constant, heavy
clamping pressure at joints. Secure tops to cabinets with "Z"-type fasteners or equivalent, using two or more
fasteners at each front, end and back.
C. Workmanship:
1. Abut top and edge surfaces in one true plane, with internal supports placed to prevent any deflection.
Provide flush hairline joints in top units using clamping devices.
2. After installation, carefully dress joints smooth, remove any surface scratches, clean and polish entire
surface.
3. Provide holes and cutouts as required for mechanical and electrical service fixtures.
MANUFACTURED PLASTIC -LAMINATE -CLAD CASEWORK
VLK Architects, 2009 12 3216 - 6 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
4. Provide scribe moldings for closures at junctures of top, curb and splash with walls as recommended by
manufacturer for materials involved. Use permanently elastic sealing compound recommended by
manufacturer.
3.04 INSTALLATION OF ACCESSORIES
A. Install in a precise manner in accordancewith manufacturer's directions. Turn screws to a flat seat; do not drive.
Adjust moving parts to operate freely without excessive bind.
B. Install grommets at all knee spaces where electrical/telephone/data outlets are installed below countertop,
whether detailed on drawings or not.
3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean Up: Remove all cartons, debris, sawdust, scraps, etc., and leave spaces clean and all casework ready
for Owner's use.
B. Repair or remove and replace defective work as directed upon completion of installation.
C. Clean shop -finished surfaces, touch-up as required and remove or refinish damaged or soiled areas, as
acceptable to Architect
D. Protection: Advise contractor of procedures and precautions for protection of materials and installed plastic
laminate -faced casework from damage by work of other trades.
END OF SECTION
MANUFACTURED PLASTIC -LAMINATE -CLAD CASEWORK
VLK Architects, 2009 12 3216 - 7 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 12 4813
ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Entrance mats.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 03 3000 - Cast -In -Place Concrete.
2. Section 09 6500 - Resilient Flooring.
3. Section 09 6800 - Carpeting.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit in accordance with SECTION 01 3323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND
SAMPLES.
1. Provide manufacturer's installation instructions, including manufacturer's approved adhesive with mat.
2. Provide certification of manufacturer's approval of adhesive.
3. Provide warranty information.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing layout, profiles and product components.
C. Samples: Submit 124nch square samples of mat materials.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Provide Geo Tile as manufactured by Collins and Aikman. Floor mat construction shall be:
1. Composed of 18" x 18" tiles, 1/4" thickness, and weighing not less than 135 oz./sq.yd.
2. Molded SBR rubber backing with reinforced needle punch 100% Solution -Dyed low static polypropylene
modular tiles with rubber -reinforced pattern to prevent crushing.
3. Color(s) shall be as selected by Architect.
B. Vinyl Reducer: PVC reducer transition strip as recommended by manufacturer.
C. Adhesive: Provide manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Remove tiles from shipping cartons and climatize in installation area. Maintain temperature where products will
be installed before, during and after installation as recommended by manufacturer.
B. Floor area shall be clean, dry and free of foreign substances prior to installation.
C. Examine substrates and conditions where floor mats will be installed. Do no proceed with installation until
unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
D. Verify sizes by field measurement before shop fabrication.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install floor mat to floor with manufacturer's recommended adhesive in accordance with the manufacturer's
installation instructions. Laytile from centermarkers established with principal walls orgeneral entrance area,
discounting minor offsets, so that tile at opposite edges of flooring area are of equal width. Adjust as necessary
to avoid use of cut widths less than 1/2 file at perimeters. Lay tile square to flooring area axis. Tiles must be
quarter -turned when installing. Install by turning each tile 90-degrees in an alternating pattern. Coordinate
installation with adjacent work to ensure proper clearances and to prevent tripping hazards.
B. Provide vinyl transition strips as recommended by manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS
VLK Architects, 2009 12 4813 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 13 2123
INSULATED ROOMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Insulated cold storage rooms.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 26 - Electrical: electrical wiring of and to cold storage room and cold storage refrigeration
equipment, other than factory pre -wiring.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings in accordance with SECTION 01340 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT
DATA AND SAMPLES.
1. Show construction details, finishes, trim and hardware.
2. Furnish complete refrigeration equipment data.
B. Maintenance Data and Operating Instructions: Furnish two bound copies of manufacturer's maintenance data,
parts lists and operating instructions to the Architect for delivery to the Owner.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Design Criteria: Cold storage room shall maintain the required temperature and humidity during hottest weather
when room is fully loaded and with frequent opening of the door.
1. The specified refrigeration equipment is the minimum which will be acceptable, and the Contractor shall
furnish equipment of ample capacity.
2. If the cold storage room fails to meet the design criteria after being placed in service, then the Contractor
shall make the necessary corrections without extra cost to the Owner.
3. Room shall maintain a temperature of plus 35°F.
B. UL Requirements: Electrical components shall be approved by Underwriters' Laboratories.
1.04 WARRANTY
A. Ten -Year Warranty: Provide manufacturers standard ten-year warranty on all parts of the installed walk-in,
except the refrigeration system and its related accessories, to be free from defects in material or workmanship
under normal use and service.
B. Five -Year Warranty: Provide the manufacturers five-year complete system warranty on the refrigeration.
Coverage applies to the compressor and all other parts originally furnished by the manufacturer on the
condensing unit and blower coil.
C. One -Year Guaranty: The Contractor shall make arrangements with an approved local service agency for
repairing equipment malfunctions during the one-year guarantee period required by the Supplementary
Conditions.
1. Furnish name and telephone number of the service agency to the Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 COLD STORAGE ROOMS
A. Type: Sectional prefabricated walkins as manufactured by Bally Refrigerated Boxes, Inc. or approved
equivalent. Length and width of the walk-in shall be per drawings and the height shall be 8'-6"H.
B. Panel Construction: 5" panels shall consist of interior and exterior metal skins with single and double flanges
precisely formed with steel dies and roll -form equipment. The metal skins shall be placed into steel molds and
liquid urethane injected between them. To have no internal wood or metal structural members between the face
panels.
1. Use standard sections where possible, but provide special sections as required by the layout of the plans.
2. Cam -action locking devices of a replaceable type shall be housed in steel pockets connected by a 2" broad
steel strap set into the insulation.
3. Panels shall meet Factory Mutual's #4880 Class I building type, for insulated wall and ceiling construction
in combination.
INSULATED ROOMS
VLK Architects, 2009 13 2123 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
4. Panels shall be UL Classified.
5. Panels shall be of N.S.F. Approved construction.
6. Each panel shall carry labels indicating all such listings or approvals.
C. Coved Corners: Interior corners shall be coved to a 1/2" radius.
D. Insulation: Poured4n-place urethane foam.
1. K-Factor: 0.118 or less.
2. R-Factor: 34 or higher.
3. Insulation must retain dimensional stability in an operating temperature of minus 90°F. to dry heat.
4. Flame Spread Rating: 25 according to ASTM E 84.
2.02 DOORS
A. Type: In -fitting X-6" x T-0" flush -mounted door. Construction of door shall be as stated for panels above. Door
panel shall include a heavy, "U" channel type, reinforced steel frame of not less than 14-gauge thickness,
around the entire perimeter of the door opening to prevent racking or twisting.
B. Hardware: Spring loaded self -closing hinges and latch of polished aluminum. Positive door latch shall have
a cylinder lock with padlock provision and inside safety release.
C. Accessories: Magnetic gaskets and sill wiper strips. Provide clear heavy vinyl overlapping door strips sized 2"
over door size on each side and at top. Each door to have a hydraulic door closer.
2.03 TRIM
A. Provide metal trim as required to cover exposed joints between cold storage rooms and building wall surfaces.
Match adjacent cold storage room panel material and finish.
2.04 FINISHES AND GAGES
A. Exterior and Interior Finish shall be white polyester on smooth Aluminum. Provide edge caps of same finish at
exterior areas where metal is different.
B. Concealed Panels: 24 ga. gals. steel or 0.038" aluminum, except floor panels which shah be stainless steel on
interior top and 24 ga. galy. steel on remaining sides and bottom.
2.05 CAULKING MATERIALS
A. GE Silicone Construction 1200 Sealant in clearcolor, GE recommended primer and polyethylene foam back-up
rod.
2.06 LIGHTS
A. Each door panel shall be provided with an incandescent vaporproof lamp on interior side of panel. A pilot light
and toggle switch shall be mounted on the exterior. All interconnecting wires shall be installed in rigid conduit.
Provide junction box for 120/1/60 service. Provide fluorescent light fixture over working area with moisture
protection.
2.07 REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS
A. General: Provide refrigeration equipment. Units are to be supplied with all components factory -installed and
wired, with the exception of the main power disconnect and vibration eliminators.
B. Condensing Units: Units shall come complete with motor, air-cooled condenser, compressor, sight glass, drier,
time clock, vibration eliminator, suction accumulator, crank -case heater, winter controls, motor starter, main
power fused disconnect and aluminum enclosure cabinet with galvanized steel base.
1. Cooler Unit: 1 HP #RP-100-M2-HT3A, 208/23013/60.
C. Evaporators: Units shall come with motors, multi -fin tube -type coil with grille, expansion valve with strainer, heat
exchanger, inlet and outlet connections, drip pan, drain connection, mounting brackets and all controls.
1. Cooler Coil: #BA-82P-S1, 115/1/60.
D. Accessories: Controls and accessories shall be furnished for a complete system and proper operation of the
equipment. This includes heat exchangers, room thermostats, solenoid valves, flow control valves and shut-off
valves.
INSULATED ROOMS
VLK Architects, 2009 13 2123 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of cold storage room. Do not proceed with
installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B. Examine roughing -in for electrical systems to verify actual locations of electrical connections before installation
C. Vapor barrier shall be in -place and secured before commencing installation of cold storage room.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Cold Storage Rooms: Installation shall be bythe cold storage room manufacturer's authorized representative.
B. Trim: At building walls, secure metal trim to cold storage room assembly with stainless steel screws.
C. Equipment:
1. Secure evaporators to room ceilings in an approved manner.
2. Secure condensing units on building roof where indicated.
3. Install vibration eliminators on condensing units.
D. Piping: Run piping neatly and concealed where possible.
1. Run and insulate refrigerant lines according to best trade practice.
2. From the condensing unit location, extend refrigerant lines to the evaporators.
3. At each evaporator drain connection, install a tee fitting with clean -out plug and extend %" hard copper
drain line through prefabricated panel to floor drain as shown.
4. Drain lines that are exposed on the exterior side of the walk-in box shall be chrome plated.
E. Factory Pre -Wiring: Pre -wire each light fixture, door heater cable and sill heater to junction box on door panel.
F. Field Wiring: (Division 26)
1. Make electric connections to drain line heater cables.
2. Install control wiring from condensing unit location to evaporators, room thermostats and defrost unit.
3. Power connections to light fixture junction boxes, switch junction boxes, evaporators, defrost and
condensing units.
4. Field mount fused disconnects for condensing units on the units themselves.
5. Seal all conduit interiors with "Thiokol" after wires are run, to seal out air.
G. Sleeves and Escutcheons:
1. Install extruded vinyl sleeves for piping and wiring penetrations through the prefabricated panels.
2. Make the penetrations vapor -tight.
3. At piping, trim both ends of each penetration with a stainless steel escutcheon plate.
3.03 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A. Adjusting: Adjust doors and hardware to operate properly. Regulate equipment to meet the specified design
criteria.
B. Cleaning: Upon completion of the building, thoroughly clean cold storage room surfaces and leave free of
defects.
END OF SECTION
INSULATED ROOMS
VLK Architects, 2009 13 2123 - 3 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 13 3420
METAL STORAGE BUILDING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Self -framing pre-engineered storage building.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 03 3000 - Cast -in -place Concrete: concrete foundation.
1.02 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. All buildings shall be designed in accordance with the applicable sections of the latest edition of the AISC
"Specifications for the Design, Fabrication, and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings" and the AISI
"Specifications for the Design of Cold Formed Steel Structural Members". (CAN/CSA-S136 "Cold Formed Steel
Structural Members" and the CAN/CSA-816.1 "Limit States Design of Steel Structures").
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: The building supplier shall furnish a complete set of building erection drawings illustrating the
step by step sequence for the erection of the building. The erection drawings shall be prepared specifically for
the building covered by these specifications showing the exact location of all roof and wall accessories and the
exact anchor bolt locations required for each accessory.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 PRODUCT/MANUFACTURERS
A. Provide Panl-Line 2 Building System self -framing building as manufactured by Butler Manufacturing Co. (phone
816.968.3304 web site: www.butlermfg.com).
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Panl-Line 2 buildings shall be of self -framing design.
B. Each building shall be supplied with all necessary component parts, including foundation anchors, to form a
complete building system. All parts shall be new and free from any defects or imperfections.
C. The building width and length shall be measured from the outside of the building wall panels and the height of
the building shall be the distance measured from the bottom surface of the base channel lo the exterior juncture
of the roof and sidewall panels.
D. Roof Panel Design:
1. Roof panels shall be supplied in a single continuous length from eave line to ridge line and shall be
designed to tightly interlock so that no fasteners are required at intermediate points along the panel side
laps. Roof panels shall be a maximum of 16" wide with a flat surface between the interlocking side ribs.
The interlocking ribs shall be a minimum of 3" high, and shall be turned upward.
2. Roof panels shall be a minimum 24 gauge steel coated on both sides with a Galvalume® coating of
corrosion resistant aluminum -zinc alloy applied by a continuous hot dipping process (ASTM A 792).
Coating weight shall be a minimum of 0.55 oz. of aluminum zinc alloy per square foot of coated sheet (both
sides) -equivalent to about 0.80 mil thickness on each side. Minimum yield strength of panel material shall
be 50,000 psi (345 MPa).
E. Wall Panel Design:
1. Exterior wall panels of the building shall be a single continuous length from the base channel to the roof
line of the building at the sidewalls and endwalls of the building except where interrupted by wall openings.
Wall panels shall be 16" wide with a 3" deep inward turned interlocking side rib. Wall panels shall contain
two V deep by 31/s" wide fluted recesses, each starting 2-7/16" from each panel edge. Wall panels shall
be fastened internally at the base and eave of the building with 3/e" diameter electrogalvanized machine
bolts placed within the panel interlock. The fastening system shall be designed so that no wall fasteners
are exposed on the exterior surfaces of the wall.
METAL STORAGE BUILDING
VLK Architects, 2009 13 3420 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
2. Wall panels shall be minimum 24 gauge galvanized steel conforming to ASTM A 653 Specifications with
the galvanized coating conforming to G90 (11/4 oz.) standards. Minimum yield strength of panel material
shall be 40,000 psi (1275 MPa). Panel material shall be embossed with a random pattern pebble
embossure of approximately 0.007 - 0.008 depth.
3. The bases of the wall panels shall be closed off with closure plugs conforming to the panel profile.
2.03 FINISH
A. Wall Panel Finish Coating: The exterior surface of the wall panels shall be finished with Butler -Cote® 500 FP
finish system, a full strength, 70% Kynar® 500/Hylar5000TM fiuoropolymer coating. Manufacturer warrants that
coating shall not peel (loss of adhesion), crack or check for 20 years. For a period of 20 years, chalking shall
not exceed #8 ASTM and fading shall be 5 AE Color Difference Units or less.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION AND ERECTION
A. General: Install preformed metal roofing and wall panels and related items in accordance with roofing panel
manufacturer's instructions.
B. Panels shall be aligned and attached in accordance with erection drawings furnished by Butler Manufacturing
Company.
C. Sidelaps shall be at least one full corrugation.
D. Panels shall be sealed at the base with metal closures.
END OF SECTION
METAL STORAGE BUILDING
VLK Architects, 2009 13 3420 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 21 1000
STANDPIPE AND SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
PART 1-GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Design coordination of sprinkler work with the installations of other trades as shown on
their drawings; all mechanical, electrical, plumbing and sprinkler work must fit the space
requirements. The sprinkler work shall comply with other Sections of this specification;
and fit the structure finishes. The Sprinkler Contractor will comply with all the codes and
underwriter authorities, and the requirements for the installation of inside and outside
piping; including sprinkler heads, valves, tamper switches, flow switches, hangers and
supports, sleeves, fire department connections, inspector test connections, main drain
and accessories, signs and any other component parts reasonably incidental to providing
a complete protection system. Provide 100 percent coverage for the entire building.
B. A wet system shall be installed in heated areas and dry pipe systems in areas subject to
freezing.
C. Furnish all articles of a completed sprinkler system including all materials, labor, tools,
equipment, transportation services and supervision fees.
D. The plans provide a riser assembly location at water entry into building for flow switch
locations, valve locations (with tamper switches), fire department test assemblies and fire
department Siamese connections. These are a guide for subsequent preparation of the
Contractor's detailed installation drawings of the complete fire protection sprinkler system
which shall be submitted to the Architect / Engineer for review. Submit only drawings and
calculations bearing the approval of the authority having jurisdiction.
E. Do not exceed 52,000 square feet of building for each individual sprinkler system.
F. Install fire protective system identification signs in accordance with NFPA-13, NFPA-14,
and NFPA-20
G. It shall be the fire protection installer's responsibility, prior to bid, to verify pressure at the
project site by performing a flow test. Determine if the available static pressure, residual
pressure and flow rate will adequately provide the fire extinguishing system with the
necessary operating requirements or if a fire pump, storage tank and necessary
appurtenances are required. Notify Architect and Engineer if low water flow / pressure
condition exist and inform them of all options prior to proceeding.
H. The installation of the entire Sprinkler Systems shall comply with all rules and regulations
of the National Board of Fire Underwriters, the Local Building Code, Local Fire Marshall,
and Requirements of NFPA Pamphlet 13, and other local authorities exercising
jurisdiction.
I. Study the general, structural, electrical and mechanical drawings and specifications, in
order to become familiar with the building and details as they apply to the work of this
Section. Cooperate with all Trades so that there will be no conflict of space. Plumbing
flow tines, large ductwork HVAC piping and electrical service feeders shall take
precedence over Fire Protection work, except where it is absolutely necessary to
maintain coverage protection.
J. Provide heat tracing and insulation for wet pipes exposed to freezing conditions.
STANDPIPE AND SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
VLK Architects, 2009 21 1000 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
1.02 BASIS OF DESIGN
A. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), latest edition of NFPA 13, Standard for the
Installation of Sprinkler Systems.
B. Vertical zone valves installed in horizontal position are not acceptable. All zone valves
are to be located at water entry into building and mounted in the vertical riser.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sprinkler equipment and installation to be in accordance with recommendations of and
approved by local, state and federal fire authorities.
B. Equipment and installation to meet requirements of NFPA No. 13, 14, 20, 24, 25, 70 and
72.
C. Use materials and equipment that are new and of unused, approved by NFPA and as
listed in the UL list of "Inspected Fire Protection Equipment and Materials."
1.04 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Make complete shop drawings and working drawings of equipment furnished, including
detailed drawings of piping and sprinkler head locations. Drawings shall show
construction details and dimensions of each piece of equipment and work to be installed.
The location of all heads shall be as approved. Where additional heads are required to
meet NFPA 13, provide at no additional cost.
B. Before the shop drawings are submitted to Architect / Engineer, submit drawings to the
jurisdictions for approval. All approvals shall be noted on the drawings or by letter from
the departments.
C. The Architect's approval of shop drawings shall not relieve the responsibility of correctly
figured dimensions or any errors that may be contained in these drawings. The omission
of any material shown on the contract drawings, or specified from the shop drawings,
even though approved, shall not relieve the responsibility to furnish and erect them.
D. The drawings show the location of the water entry into building. Install all zone valves at
this location. Prepare the sprinkler drawings under the work of this Section.
E. Submit samples of all sprinkler types for approval.
1.05 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Tyco Fire Products
1. Grinnell
2. Gem
3. Central
B. Automatic Sprinkler Company of America
C. Potter Roemer, Inc.
D. The Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Company
E. Viking Corporation
STANDPIPE AND SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
VLK Architects, 2009 21 1000 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
AW Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
F. Victaulic Company of America
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPING AND FITTINGS
A. Above Slab Inside Building
1. Pipe 2" and Smaller. Schedule. 40, black steel pipe conforming to ASTM A 795
or ASTM A135 joined with threaded fittings.
2. Pipe 2-1/2" and larger, provide ASTM A795 or ASTM A135 UL and FM listed.
a. Schedule. 40, black steel pipe joined with rolled grooved fittings.
B. Underground within five feet of building. Provide ductile iron pipe, Class 200 conforming
to ASTM, and ring-tite fittings. Provide concrete thrust blocks at changes in direction,
according to the pipe manufacturer's recommendations.
C. All piping shall be black carbon steel, except in dry systems where pipe shall be
galvanized per ASTM A53.
D. Fittings used to join pipe shall be listed fabricated fittings or manufactured in accordance
to the material and dimension standards listed in table 6.4.1 NFPA 13 AND 2.2.1 nfpa 14.
2.02 SPRINKLER HEAD
A. All sprinklers shall comply with the latest requirements of NFPA 13 with respect to orifice
size.
B. All heads shall be UL listed and FM approved, and comply with the latest requirements of
NFPA 13 with respect to orifice size unless otherwise noted. Sprinkler heads with "O" ring
design shall not be acceptable.
C. Exposed areas:
1. Standard upright type with brass finish with escutcheon, with 165 degree F
temperature
2. Tyco Model B, FRB, or approved equal
D. Sidewall applications:
1. Horizontal sidewall type with brass finishes and chrome escutcheon.
2. Unfinished areas and recessed with chrome plated escutcheon with 155 degree
F temperature rating.
3. Tyco Model B, FRB, or approved equal.
E. Suspended ceilings:
1. Adjustable concealed type heads with manufacturer painted white cover plate
with glass bulb fusible link, with 135 degree F temperature rating.
2. Color of plate, selected by Architect
3. Tyco Model B, FRB, or approved equal.
F. Dry sprinklers heads at freezers and coolers
1. Tyco Model DS-1, DS-2, or approved equal.
G. Sprinklers subject to mechanical injury shall be protected with fusible solder type
sprinklers and listed guards. Bulb type sprinklers will not be acceptable for these
locations.
1. Storage rooms with exposed structure.
STANDPIPE AND SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
VLK Architects, 2009 21 1000 - 3 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
2. Mechanical and Electrical rooms.
3. Below exposed stairs.
4. Exposed structure areas.
H. Systems serving walk-n freezers shall utilize Tyco Model DS-1 or DS-C dry pendent
sprinklers. A Model DSB-1 dry sprinkler boot shall be utilized in conjunction with the dry
sprinkler to eliminate the requirement for insulation and to stop potential air interchange.
Length of dry pendent shall be determined by manufacturer's recommendation with
respect to freezer ambient temperatures expected.
2.03 INSPECTOR'S TEST CONNECTION
A. Provide inspector's test connection as required by NFPA 13.
1. Ductile iron module housing with combination sight glass, orifice and bonnet
assembly
2. UL listed
3. Victaulic No. 718
4. Tyco or approved equal
2.04 TAMPER SWITCH / SUPERVISORY SWITCH
A. Tamper switch on each valve
1. Controlling or shutting off sprinkler system or any portion thereof.
2. Tamper switch with either one single pole, double throw switch or two single
pole, double throw switches as required.
3. Switch shall be compatible with installed valve for standard mounting.
4. Potter -Roemer Fig. 6220, 6221, 6222, 6223 or approved equal.
2.05 FLOW SWITCH
A. Vane type flow switch.
1. Self contained, pneumatic, adjustable retard.
2. Two, single pole, double throw switches.
3. Red enamel tamper proof switch housing with flow paddle.
4. Potter Roemer Model No. 6200, or approved equal.
2.06 FLOORS AND CEILING PLATES
A. Provide chrome -plated floor and ceiling plates around pipes exposed to view when
passing through walls, floors, partitions, or ceilings in finished areas. Size plates to fit
pipe or insulation and lock in place.
2.07 DOMESTIC MANUFACTURE
A. All piping material, pipe and pipe fittings shall be manufactured in the United States of
America.
2.08 GASKETS
A. Use 1/16-inch thick preformed synthetic rubber bonded.
2.09 COUPLINGS
A. Use listed rolled grooved mechanical couplings to engage and lock grooved or
shouldered pipe ends and to allow for some angular deflection, contraction and
expansion. Coupling consists of ductile iron housing, c-shaped composition sealing
STANDPIPE AND SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
VLK Architects, 2009 21 1000 - 4 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
gasket and steel bolts. Gasket Material for dry pipe systems shall be silicone and listed
for dry pipe service.
2.10 VALVES
A. Use valves suitable for 175 psig WOG.
B. Valves to be UL listed and FM approved.
C. Valve Connections:
1. Provide valves suitable to connect adjoining piping as specified for pipe joints.
Use full line size valves unless noted otherwise.
2. Screwed ends for pipe sizes 2 inches and smaller.
3. Flanged ends for pipe sizes 2-1/2 inches and larger.
4. Solder or screw to solder adapters for copper tubing.
5. Use grooved body valves with mechanical grooved jointed piping.
D. Gate Valves:
1. Up to 2 inches, bronze, outside screw and yoke, rising stem, solid wedge,
screwed ends, manufactured by: Mueller, or approved equal.
2. Over 2 inches, iron body, bronze trim, outside screw and yoke, rising stem, solid
wedge, flanged ends; manufactured by Mueller, or approved equal.
E. Check Valves:
1. Up to 2 inch, bronze, regrind bronze swing disk, solder or screwed ends; 200
WOG, manufactured by Mueller, or approved equal.
2. Over 2 inch, iron body bronze trim, swing disk, regrind — renew bronze disk and
seat, flanged ends; 200 WOG, manufactured by Mueller, or approved equal.
F. Butterfly Valve: Lug body style, bubble -tight shutoff, cast iron body, ASTM B 148 bronze
disk, with integral tamper switch, manufactured by Grinnell, Model No. 8000 FP, or
approved equal.
2.11 ELECTRIC ALARM BELL
A. 10-inch round red enamel steel bell with electrically operated vibrating outdoor alarm bell,
UL listed, red enamel steel, manufactured by Simplex, or approved equal.
2.12 GAUGES
A. Gauges shall be bourdon tube type with minimum 4-1/2 inch dial and die cast aluminum
case with screwed ring and black enamel finish. The movement shall be all stainless
steel with Grade A phosphor bronze bourdon tube, brazed at socket and tip. The
accuracy of the gauge shall be within one-half of one percent of the scale range. The
pointer shall be the micrometer adjustment type recalibrated from the front. Pressure and
compound gauges shall have suitable scale ranges and graduations. Suitable for
temperatures up to 120 degrees F.
B. Gauges shall have'/a inch connections and be mounted with combination stop / snubber
needle valve with suitable pressure rating. Scale ranges: 0-200 psi.
C. Gauge range shall be such that system normal operating pressure falls with 25 percent
and 75 percent of the full-scale range.
D. Pressure scale graduations shall read in psig. Figure intervals shall be in — 20 psig
increments, with minor divisions in 2 psig increments.
STANDPIPE AND SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
VLK Architects, 2009 21 1000 - 5 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
E. The accuracy of the gauge shall be at least 0.5 percent of the scale range. Gauge shall
be made in accordance with ASME B40.1 accuracy grade 2A.
F. Manufactured by:
1. Trerice. Model No. 4500 Series
2. Ashcroft
3. Marsh
4. Weksler
2.13 SPARE SPRINKLER HEAD BOX.
A. Provide baked enamel steel box to store 36 sprinkler heads (Minimum of 3 of each type
used) for emergency replacement. Provide sprinkler wrench.
2.14 ALARM CHECK VALVE.
A. Provide UL listed check valve.
1. Variable for City Supplied systems pressure trim set.
2. Constant for Fire Pump Systems pressure trim set.
3. Tyco AV-1 or approved equal.
2.15 WATER MOTOR ALARM.
A. Provide a red enamel motor alarm for installation on exterior wall.
1. Tyco Model WMA-1 or approved equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 DESIGN
A. Design, spacing of sprinkler heads and selection sizes shall conform to the requirements
of NFPA 13 for the indicated occupancy.
B. Uniform discharge density design shall be based on hydraulic calculations using the
method outlined in NFPA 13. Density of discharge from sprinkler heads shall conform to
NFPA 13.
C. Friction losses in pipe will be based on a value of "C" = 120 in the Hazen and Williams
formula.
D. Design and install the system so that no part will interfere with doors, windows, heating,
mechanical, lighting or electrical equipment. Do not locate sprinkler heads closer than 3
feet to lighting fixtures or other obstructions.
3.02 LOCATION
A. Heads shown, if indicated on reflected ceiling plans, are an integral part of the ceiling
design. Where heads are not shown or indicated, locate them in the exact center of
acoustical ceiling the unless noted otherwise. In rooms with monolithic plaster or gypsum
drywall ceilings, locate the sprinkler heads symmetrically arranged with respect to both
axes of the room. Locate sprinkler heads in relation to specialty ceiling elements such as
slats, ribs, panels, grids, etc., if not shown on the drawings. Generally, locate heads in
the exact center of, or spaced between, such elements. Center heads in corridors.
STANDPIPE AND SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
VLK Architects, 2009 21 1000 - 6 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
B. Locate heads as may be required for coordinated ceiling pattern, even through number of
heads exceed minimum code requirements.
C. Sprinkler heads located in utility or mechanical rooms, penthouses, service corridors, or
other such spaces not subject to public view need not be centered in ceiling patterns and
may use a straight drop from branch line.
3.03 PREPARATION
A. Ream pipes and tubes, clean off scale, rust, oxide and dirt, inside and outside, before
assembly. Remove welding slag or other foreign material from piping.
B. Pipe beveled each end, per approved procedures.
C. Hammer clean and flush out piping after welding to remove scale, welding slag and other
debris.
3.04 CONNECTION
A. Make screwed joints with square, clean full cut standard taper pipe threads. Ream after
cutting and threading. Red lead and linseed oil or other approved non -toxic joint
compound applied to male threads only.
B. Nipples: Shoulder type; extra heavy where less than 1-1/2 inch is unthreaded.
C. Clamp cast iron water pipe at fittings with 3/4 inch rods and properly anchor and support.
D. Use grooved mechanical couplings and mechanical fasteners only in accessible
locations.
3.05 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate the installation schedule for this work with the construction schedule for the
Work to ensure orderly progress with minimum delay.
B. Coordinate interface of fire sprinkler system with the work of other trades to ensure
proper and adequate provision for the installation and connection of this system.
C. Coordinate location and quantity of Siamese connections required for fire department
connection with Architect and local fire officials.
3.06 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Before starting each stage of the fire sprinkler systems installation, inspect the installed
work of other trades and determine that work is complete enough to allow installation to
begin. Ensure that work of other trades has been installed in a manner to permit work of
this Section in accordance with approved design.
3.07 INSTALLATION
A. Run piping concealed above furred ceilings and in joists to minimize obstructions. Expose
only heads.
B. Protect sprinkler heads against mechanical injury with standard guards.
STANDPIPE AND SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
VLK Architects, 2009 21 1000 - 7 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
C. Locate system drains and inspector's test connections in utility rooms, mechanical rooms
or other readily accessible areas not requiring access through ceiling. Coordinate
sprinkler system drain flow rates with plumbing system drainage capacities.
D. Where low points, or drains occur above ceilings or in otherwise finished spaces, furnish
drain valve with brass cap and chain.
E. Locate outside alarms on wall of building and coordinate with Architect.
F. Provide on interior wall near sprinkler valve, cabinet containing extra sprinkler heads of
each type and wrench suitable for each head type.
G. Provide a minimum 18-inch radius swing joint for each drop to sprinkler heads located in
ceilings.
H. Install pipe markers to identify fire protection.
1. Provide shield or deflector for sprinklers or equipment where electrical switchgear,
switchboards and motor control centers are in sprinkler protected spaces.
J. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.
K. Sprinkler heads shall be installed above and below ductwork over 48 inches wide, in
exposed areas, per NFPA 13.
L. Install the complete fire sprinkler system in accordance with the approved shop drawings.
M. Perform piping installation in accordance with the provisions of the specifications,
including furnishing of required sleeves for fire sprinkler system pipes passing through
rated walls, floors, and other parts of the building. Provide scheduled 40 galvanized pipe
sleeve for concrete or CMU penetrations. Furnish size required for fireproofing and or
insulation. Furnish and install split wall plates and chrome plated escutcheons for
exposed fire sprinkler system pipes. Where pipes pass through concrete floors, furnish
and install wrought iron or steel pipe sleeves made flush with the ceiling below and
extending 2" above the finished floor.
N. Do not cut or make holes in any part of the building except where shown on the approved
shop drawings.
O. Furnish and install, next to the sprinkler riser main, a print sheet protected by glass or a
transparent plastic cover, giving brief instructions regarding control, emergency
procedure, and other data required by NFPA #13. For hydraulically designed sprinkler
systems, a placard is to be permanently attached to the riser indicating the location, and
the basis of design (discharge density and system demand).
P. Do not install exposed piping below structure in public area.
Q. Provide heat tracing and insulation on wet piping systems exposed to freezing when not
installed in a heated space or installed by other acceptable methods of maintaining the
piping from freezing. Installation of heat tracing and insulation shall be in accordance with
the latest edition of NFPA 13 and the local code authorities. Coordinate electrical
requirements with Division 16000.
STANDPIPE AND SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
VLK Architects, 2009 21 1000 - 8 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
3.08 SECURING AND SUPPORTING
A. Support piping to maintain line and grade, with provision for expansion and contraction.
Use approved clevis-type or trapeze -type hangers connected to structural members of
the building. Single pipe runs to be supported by approved clevis type hangers. Multiple
pipe runs to be supported by approved trapeze type hangers. Do not support piping from
other piping or structural joist bridging.
B. Provide supports both sides of elbows for pipe 6" and larger.
C. Support vertical risers with steel strap pipe clamps of approved design and size,
supported at each floor. Support piping assemblies in chases so they are rigid and self -
supported before the chase is closed.
D. Support spacing: As recommended by the project structural engineer and support
manufacturer, but not more than listed below. Not to exceed spacing requirements of
smallest pipe.
Steel
Minimum Rod
Max. Support
Diameter, Inches
Pipe Size
S acin , Feet
1" & smaller
6
3/8
1-1/4" & 1-1/2"
8
3/8
2"
10
3/8
3"
10
1/2
4" & 5"
10
5/8
6" and above
10
3/4
3.09 PIPE SUPPORTS
A. Provide P1001 or P 5000 Unistrut metal framing members and appurtenances for pipe
support. Hot -dip galvanize members and appurtenances when located outside. Sagging
of pipes or supports is not acceptable.
B. Adjustable clevis hangers shall be used for single pipe supports. Grinnell Fig. 260. When
oversized clevis is used, a nipple shall be placed over the clevis bolt as a spacer to
assure that the lower U-strap will not move in on the bolt. Ring type clevis hangers are
not acceptable.
3.10 PIPE SLEEVES
A. Sleeves through masonry and concrete construction:
1. Fabricate sleeves of Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe.
2. Size sleeve large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and to provide
continuous insulation.
B. Sleeves through gypsum wall construction.
1. Fabricate sleeves of 16 gauge galvanized sheet metal.
C. Sleeves through elevated slab construction.
1. Fabricate sleeves of Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe with welded center flange
in floor.
STANDPIPE AND SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
VLK Architects, 2009 21 1000 - 9 2737.03
CATE Renovations
AW Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
D. Extend each sleeve through the floor or wall. Cut the sleeve flush with each wall surface.
Sleeves through floors shall extend 2" above floor lines for waterproofing purposes. Slab
on grade floors shall not be sleeved except where penetrating waterproofing membrane
or insect control is required.
E. Caulk sleeves water and airtight. Seal annular space between pipes and sleeves with
mastic compound to make the space water and airtight.
F. For sleeves below grades in outside walls, provide Thundedine Link -Seal or Advance
Product and System Interlynx, with 316 stainless steel nuts and bolts, with cast iron
pressure plate.
G. Provide chrome plated escutcheon plates on pipes passing through walls, floors or
ceilings exposed to view. At exterior walls, stainless steel sheet metal is to be used.
H. For sleeves through fire and smoke rated walls, seal with a UL through -penetration
firestop, rated to maintain the integrity of the time rated construction. Install in accordance
with the manufacturer's installation instructions. Comply with UL and NFPA standards for
the installation of firestops. Refer to Architectural drawings for all fire and smoke rated
partitions, walls, floors, etc.
3.11 CLEANING OF PIPING SYSTEMS
A. General cleaning of piping systems. Purge pipe of construction debris and contamination
before placing the systems in service. Provide and install temporary connections as
required to clean, purge and circulate.
3.12 FLUSHING AND TESTING
A. Testing and flushing of installation of sprinkler system shall be in accordance with NFPA
13, and NFPA 25.
B. Flush sprinkler piping in accordance with NFPA 13. Additionally, flush all alarm valves,
and all main piping up to valve.
C. In addition to NFPA 13 required tests, provide flow switch test and tamper switch test for
each device, and verify alarm valve operation.
D. All tests shall be witnessed by Architect / Engineer. Contractor shall notify Architect /
Engineer 7 working days in advance.
3.13 EXCAVATING, TRENCHING, AND BACKFILLING
A. Perform excavation, trenching, and backfilling for this portion of the work in accordance
with the specifications.
3.14 PIPE MARKERS
A. Identify interior exposed piping and piping in accessible chases or plenums with Opti-
Code Brady Pressure Sensitive Adhesive Pipe Markers, consisting of pipe marker and
direction of flow arrow tape. Clean pipe prior to installation. Background colors of
markers, arrows and tape for each type of system shall be the same. Meet ANSI/OSHA
standards and clearly identify each system. Minimum 2-1/4-inch letters through 4-inch
pipe and 4-inch letters for 5-inch pipe and larger.
B. Identify exterior and mechanical room piping with Snap Around pipe markers through 4-
inch pipe and Strap Around markers 5-inch pipe and larger. Pipe markers consisting of
STANDPIPE AND SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
VLK Architects, 2009 21 1000 - 10 2737.03
CATE Renovations
AW Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
pipe marker and direction of flow arrow tape; background colors of markers, arrows and
type for each type of system shall be the same. Meet ANSI / OSHA standards and clearly
identify each system. Minimum 2-1/4-inch letters through 4-inch pipe and 4-inch letters
for 5-inch pipe and larger.
C. Install identification in the following locations:
1. both sides of penetrations through walls, floors and ceilings.
2. Close to valves or flanges.
3. Intervals on straight pipe runs not to exceed 50 feet
4. Apply marker where view is obstructed.
D. Pipe markers shall meet or exceed the specifications of the ASME A13.1 "Scheme for
Identification of Piping Systems".
3.15 TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE
A. Prior to connecting to the overhead sprinkler piping, flush the underground main. Secure
required approvals of the flushing operations.
B. Upon completion of the fire sprinkler system installation, test and retest the complete
installation and make corrections as necessary to obtain acceptance by the Fire Marshall
and/or any other authority having jurisdiction. Furnish test equipment and personnel
required.
3.16 TRAINING
A. At a time mutually agreed upon, provide 4 hours of instruction to the Owner's designated
personnel on the operation and maintenance of the automatic sprinkler system and
associated equipment. Owner's Operation and Maintenance Manual prepared for this
project shall be used during the instruction.
END OF SECTION
STANDPIPE AND SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
VLK Architects, 2009 21 1000 - 11 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 22 0100
PLUMBING OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
PART 1-GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Compilation product data and related information appropriate for Owner's operation and
maintenance of products furnished under Contract. Prepare operating and maintenance data
as specified.
B. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation and maintenance of equipment and systems.
C. Submit three copies of complete manual in final form.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Thirty (30) days after the Contractor has received the final scheduled identified submittals
bearing the Architect/Engineer's stamp of acceptance (including resubmittals), submit for
review one copy of the first draft of the Operating and Maintenance Manual. This copy shall
contain as a minimum:
1. Table of Contents for each element.
2. Contractor information.
3. All submittals, coordination drawings and product data, reviewed by the
Architect/Engineer; bearing the Architect/Engineer's stamp of acceptance. (When
submittals are returned from Engineer "Correct as Noted", corrected inserts shall be
included.)
4. All parts and maintenance manuals for items of equipment.
5. Warranties (without starting dates)
6. Certifications that have been completed. Submit forms and outlines of certifications
that have not been completed.
7. Operating and maintenance procedures.
8. Form of Owner's Training Program Syllabus (including times and dates).
9. Control operations/equipment wiring diagrams.
10. Other required operating and maintenance information that are complete.
B. Copy will be returned to the Contractor within 15 days with comments for corrections.
C. Submit three (3) completed manuals in final form to the Architect/Engineer one day after
substantial completion, and prior to Owner's instructions. Include all specified data, test and
balance reports, drawings, dated warranties, certificates, reports, along with other materials
and information.
D. The Architect/Engineer will review the manuals for completeness within fifteen (15) days.
E. The Contractor shall be notified of any missing or omitted materials. The Manuals shall be
reworked by the Contractor, as required, in the office of the Architect / Engineer. The
manuals will not be retransmitted.
F. Two (2) complete Manuals will be delivered to the Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 BINDERS
PLUMBING OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
VLK Architects, 2009 22 0100 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
A. Commercial quality black three-ring binders with clear overlay plastic covers.
B. Minimum ring size: 1 ".
Maximum ring size: 3".
C. When multiple binders are used, correlate the data into related groupings.
D. Label contents on spine and face of binder with full size insert. Label under plastic cover.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A. Form for Manuals:
1. Prepare data in form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's personnel.
2. Format:
a. Size: 8-1/2" x 11 ".
b. Text: Manufacturer's printed data or neatly typewritten.
3. Drawings:
a. Provide reinforced punched binder tab and bind in text.
b. Fold larger drawings to size of text pages.
4. Provide flyleaf indexed tabs for each separate product or each piece of operating
equipment.
5. Cover: Identify each volume with typed or printed title "Operating and Maintenance
Instructions". List:
a. Title of Project
b. Identity of separate structures as applicable.
C. Identity of general subject matter covered in the manual.
6. Binder as specified.
B. Content of Manual:
i . Neatly typewritten Table of Contents for each volume arranged in systematic order
as outlined in the specifications.
a. Contractor, name of responsible principal, address and telephone number.
b. A list of each product required to be included, indexed to content of the
volume.
C. List with each product, name, address and telephone number of:
1) Subcontractor or installer.
2) Maintenance contractor as appropriate.
3) Identify area of responsibility of each.
4) Local source of supply for parts and replacement.
d. Identify each product by product name and other identifying symbols as set
forth in Contract Documents.
2. Product Data:
a. Include those sheets pertinent to the specific product.
b. Annotate each sheet to:
1) Identify specific product or part installed.
2) Identify data applicable to installation.
3) Delete references to inapplicable information. (All options not
supplied with equipment shall be marked out indicated in some
manner.
3. Drawings:
a. Supplement product data with drawings as necessary to illustrate:
1) Relations of component parts of equipment and systems.
2) Control and flow diagrams.
PLUMBING OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
VLK Architects, 2009 22 0100 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
b. Coordinate drawings with information in Project Record Documents to
assure correct illustration of completed installation.
C. Do not use Project Record Documents as maintenance drawings.
4. Written text, as required to supplement product data for the particular installation:
a. Organize in consistent format under separate headings for different
procedures.
b. Provide logical sequence of instructions for each procedure.
5. Copy of each warranty, bond and service contract issued.
a. Provide information sheet for Owner's personnel, giving:
1) Proper procedures in event of failure.
2) Instances that might affect validity of warranties or bonds.
6. Shop drawings, coordination drawings and product data as specified.
C. Sections for Equipment and Systems.
1. Content for each unit of equipment and system as appropriate:
a. Description of unit and component parts.
1) Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions.
2) Performance curves, engineering data and tests.
3) Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable
parts.
b. Operating procedures:
1) Start up, break-in, routine and normal operating instructions.
2) Regulation, control, stopping, shut down and emergency
instructions.
3) Summer and winter operating instructions.
4) Special operating instructions.
C. Maintenance procedures:
1) Routine operations
2) Guide to trouble -shooting.
3) Disassembly, repair and reassembly.
4) Alignment, adjusting and checking.
5) Routine service based on operating hours.
d. Servicing and lubrication schedule. List of lubricants required.
e. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions.
f. Description of sequence of operation by control manufacturer.
g. Original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings and
diagrams required for maintenance.
1) Predicted life of part subject to wear.
2) Items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.
h. As installed control diagrams by controls manufacturer.
i. Complete equipment internal wiring diagrams.
j. Each Contractor's coordination drawings.
k. As installed color coded piping diagrams.
I. Charts of valve tag number, with location and function of each valve.
M. List of original manufacturer's spare parts and recommended quantities to
be maintained in storage.
n. Other data as required under pertinent sections of the specifications.
2. Prepare and include additional data when the need for such data becomes apparent
during instruction of Owner's personnel.
3. Additional requirements for operating and maintenance data as outlined in respective
sections of specifications.
4. Provide complete information for products specified in Division 23.
5. Provide certificates of compliance as specified in each related section.
6. Provide start up reports as specified in each related section.
7. Provide signed receipts for spare parts and material.
PLUMBING OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
VLK Architects, 2009 22 0100 - 3 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
8. Provide training report and certificates.
9. Provide backfiow preventer certified test reports.
10. Provide gas piping pressure test reports.
END OF SECTION
PLUMBING OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
VLK Architects, 2009 22 0100 - 4 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 22 0500
PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Except as modified in this Section, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions,
applicable provisions of the General Requirements, and other provisions and requirements of
the contract documents apply to work of Division 22 Mechanical.
B. Applicable provisions of this section apply to all sections of Division 22, Mechanical.
1.02 CODE REQUIREMENTS, AND FEES
A. Perform work in accordance with applicable statutes, ordinances, codes and regulations of
governmental authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Mechanical work shall comply with applicable inspection services:
1. Underwriters Laboratories
2. National Fire Protection Association
3. State Health Department
4. Local Municipal Building Inspection Department
5. Texas Department of Licensing & Regulations (ADA)
6. Texas Accessibility Standards (TAS Based on ADA)
C. Resolve any code violations discovered in contract documents with the Engineer prior to
award of the contract. After Contract award, any correction or additions necessary for
compliance with applicable codes shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner.
D. This Contractor shall be responsible for being aware of and complying with asbestos
NESHAP regulations, as well as all other applicable codes, taws and regulations.
E. Obtain all permits required.
1.03 CONTRACTOR'S QUALIFICATIONS
A. An approved contractor for the work under this division shall be:
1. A licensed specialist in this field and have the personnel, experience, training, skill,
and organization to provide a practical working system
2. Able to furnish evidence of having contracted for and installed not less than 3
systems of comparable size and type that have served their Owners satisfactorily for
not less than 3 years
1.04 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS AND STANDARDS
A. Materials which are specified by reference to Federal Specifications; ASTM, ASME, ANSI, or
AW WA Specifications; Federal Standards; or other standard specifications must comply with
latest editions, revisions, amendments or supplements in effect on date bids are received.
Requirements in reference specifications and standards are minimum for all equipment,
material, and work. In instances where specified capacities, size, or other features of
equipment, devices, or materials exceed these minimums, meet specified capacities.
1.05 CONTRACT DRAWINGS
A. Contract drawings are diagrammatic only and do not give fully dimensioned locations of
PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS
VLK Architects, 2009 22 0500 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
various elements of work. Determine exact locations from field measurements.
1.06 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Maintain at the job site a separate set of white prints (blue line or black line) of the contract
drawings for the sole purpose of recording the "as -built" changes and diagrams of those
portions of work in which actual construction is at variance with the contract drawings. Mark
the drawings with a colored pencil. Prepare, as the work progresses and upon completion of
work, reproducible drawings clearly indicating locations of various lines, valves, ductwork,
traps, equipment, and other pertinent items, as installed. Include flow -line elevation of sewer
lines. Record existing and new underground and under slab piping with dimensioned
locations and elevations of such piping.
B. At the conclusion of project, obtain without cost to the Owner, erasable mylars of the original
drawings and transfer as -built changes to these. Prior to transmittal of corrected drawings,
obtain 3 sets of blue -line prints of each drawing, regardless of whether corrections were
necessary and include in the transmittal (2 sets are for the Owner's use and one set is for the
Architect/Engineer's records). Delivery of these as -built prints and reproducibles is a condition
of final acceptance. Provide record drawings on one set each (reproducible Dayrex mylar film
positives) and AutoCad 2000 files on disk (CD Rom).
C. As -Built drawings should indicate the following information as a minimum:
1. Indicate all addendum changes to documents.
2. Remove Engineer's seal, name, address and logo from drawings.
3. Mark documents AS -BUILT DRAWINGS.
4. Clearly indicate: DOCUMENT PRODUCED BY
5. Indicate all changes to construction during construction. Indicate actual routing of all
piping, ductwork, etc. that were deviated from construction drawings.
6. Indicate exact location of all underground plumbing and flow line elevation.
7. Indicate exact location of all underground mechanical piping and elevation.
8. Indicate exact location of all underground electrical raceways and elevations.
9. Correct schedules to reflect (actual) equipment furnished and manufacturer.
10. During the execution of work, maintain a complete set of drawings and specifications
upon which all locations of equipment, ductwork, piping, devices, and all deviations
and changes from the construction documents in the work shall be recorded.
11. Location and size of all ductwork and mechanical piping above ceiling including
exact location of isolation of domestic and mechanical valves.
12. Exact location of all electrical equipment in and outside of the building.
13. - Fire Protection System documents revised to indicate exact location of all sprinkler
heads and zone valves.
14. Exact location of all roof mounted equipment, wall, roof and floor penetrations.
15. Cloud all changes.
1.07 SPACE REQUIREMENTS
A. Consider space limitations imposed by contiguous work in selection and location of
equipment and material. Do not provide equipment or material that is not suitable in this
respect.
1.08 RELATION WITH OTHER TRADES
A. Carefully study all matters and conditions concerning the project. Submit notification of
conflict in ample time to prevent unwarranted changes in any work. Review other Divisions of
these specifications to determine their requirements.
B. Because of the complicated relationship of this work to the total project, conscientiously study
the relation and cooperate as necessary to accomplish the full intent of the documents.
PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS
VLK Architects, 2009 22 0500 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
C. Provide sleeves and inserts in forms as required for the work. Stub up and protect open ends
of pipe before any concrete is placed. Furnish sizes of required equipment pads. Furnish and
locate bolts and fittings required to be cast in them.
D. Locate and size openings required for installation of work specified in this Division in
sufficient time to prevent delay in the work.
E. Refer to other Divisions of the specifications for the scope of required connections to
equipment furnished under that Division. Determine from the Contractor for the various
trades, the Owner, and by direction from the Architect/Engineer, the exact location of all
items.
1.09 CONCEALED AND EXPOSED WORK
A. When the word "concealed" is used in connection with insulating, painting, piping, ducts and
the like, the work is understood to mean hidden from sight as in chases, furred spaces or
above ceilings. "Exposed" is understood to mean open to view.
1.10 GUARANTEE
A. Guarantee work for 1 year from the date of substantial completion of the project. During that
period make good any faults or imperfections that may arise due to defects or omissions in
material, equipment or workmanship. At the Owner's option, replacement of failed parts or
equipment shall be provided.
1.11 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
A. Furnish new and unused materials and equipment meeting the requirements of the
paragraph specifying acceptable manufacturers. Where two or more units of the same type
or class of equipment are required, provide units of a single manufacturer.
1.12 NOISE AND VIBRATION
A. Select equipment to operate with minimum noise and vibration. If objectionable noise or
vibration is produced or transmitted to or through the building structure by equipment, piping,
ducts or other parts of work, rectify such conditions at no additional cost. If the item of
equipment is judged to produce objectionable noise or vibration, demonstrate at no additional
cost that equipment performs within designated limits on a vibration chart.
1.13 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers names and catalog number specified under sections of Division 22 are used
to establish standards of design, performance, quality and serviceability and not to limit
competition. Equipment of similar design, equal to that specified, manufactured by a named
manufacturer will be acceptable on approval. A request for prior approval of equipment not
listed must be submitted ten (10) days before bid due date. Submit complete design and
performance data to the Engineer.
1.14 OPERATING TESTS
A. After all mechanical systems have been completed and put into operation, subject each
system to an operating test under design conditions to ensure proper sequencing and
operation throughout the range of operation. Tests shall be made in the presence of the
Architect/Engineer. Make adjustments as required to ensure proper functioning of all
systems. Special tests on individual systems are specified under individual sections. Submit 3
PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS
VLK Architects, 2009 22 0500 - 3 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
copies of all certifications and test reports adequately in advance of completion of the work to
allow for remedial action as required to correct deficiencies discovered in equipment and
systems.
1.15 WARRANTIES
A. Submit 3 copies of all warranties and guarantees for systems, equipment, devices and
materials. These shall be included in the Operating and Maintenance Manuals.
1.16 BUILDING CONSTRUCTION
A. It shall be the responsibility of each sub -contractor to consult the Architectural and
Engineering drawings, details, and specifications and thoroughly familiarize himself with the
project and all job related requirements. Each sub -contractor shall cooperate with the
General Contractor to verify that all piping and other items are placed in the walls, furred
spaces, chases, etc., so there will be no delays in the job.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS — NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 OPENINGS
A. Framed, cast or masonry openings for ductwork, equipment or piping are specified under
other divisions. Drawings and layout work for exact size and location of all openings are
included under this division.
3.02 HOUSEKEEPING PADS
A. Provide equipment housekeeping pads under all floor mounted and ground mounted
plumbing equipment, and as shown on the drawings.
B. Concrete work as specified.
C. Concrete pads:
1. 4" thick unless otherwise indicated on the drawings.
2. Chamfer strips at edges and corner of forms.
3. Smooth steel trowel finish.
3.03 VANDAL RESISTANT DEVICES
A. Provide a handle for each loose keyed operated valve and hose bibb on the project.
B. Where vandal resistant screws or bolts are employed on the project, deliver to the Owner 2
suitable tools for use with each type of fastener used.
C. Proof of delivery of these items to the Owner shall be included in the Operating and
Maintenance Manuals.
3.04 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL
A. Prior to final inspection, conduct an on -site training program to instruct the Owner's operating
personnel in the operation and maintenance of the mechanical systems.
1. Provide the training during the Owner's regular working day.
2. The Instructors shall each be experienced in their phase of operation and
maintenance of building mechanical systems and with the project.
PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS
VLK Architects, 2009 22 0500 - 4 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
B. Time to be allocated for instructions.
1. Minimum of 8 hours dedicated instructor time.
2. 4 hours on each of 2 days.
C. Before proceeding with the on -site training program, submit the program syllabus; proposed
time and dates; and other pertinent information for review and approval.
1. One copy to the Owner.
2. One copy to the Architect/Engineer.
D. The Owner will provide a list of personnel to receive instructions, and will coordinate their
attendance at the agreed upon times.
E. Use the operation and maintenance manuals as the basis of instruction. Review contents of
manual with personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance.
F. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble -shooting, servicing,
maintenance, and shut down of each item of equipment.
G. Demonstrate equipment functions (both individually and as part of the total integrated
system).
H. Prepare and insert additional data in the operating and maintenance manuals when the need
for additional data becomes apparent during instructions.
Submit a report within one week after completion of the training program that instructions
have been satisfactorily completed. Give time and date of each demonstration and hours
devoted to the demonstration, with a list of people present.
At the conclusion of the on -site training program, have the person designated by the Owner
sign a certificate to certify that he/she has a proper understanding of the system, that the
demonstrations and instructions have been satisfactorily completed, and the scope and
content of the operating and maintenance manuals used for the training program are
satisfactory.
K. Provide a copy of the report and the certificate in an appropriately tabbed section of each
Operating and Maintenance Manual.
3.05 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
A. Provide a laminated engraved plastic nameplate on each piece of equipment and starter,
1. Designation approved by Architect/Engineer.
2. Equipment includes, but is not limited to, water heaters, pumps, boilers and utility
controllers.
3. Submit schedule of equipment to be included and designations.
B. Provide nameplates with 1/2" high letters and fastened with epoxy or screws.
3.06 OBSTRUCTIONS
A. The drawings indicate certain information pertaining to surface and subsurface obstructions
which has been taken from available drawings. Such information is not guaranteed, however,
as to accuracy of location or complete information.
1. Before any cutting or trenching operations are begun, verify with Owner's
representative, utility companies, municipalities, and other interested parties that all
available information has been provided.
PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS
VLK Architects, 2009 22 0500 - 5 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
2. Should obstruction be encountered, whether shown or not, alter routing of new work,
reroute existing lines, remove obstruction where permitted, or otherwise perform
whatever work is necessary to satisfy the purpose of the new work and leave existing
services and structures in a satisfactory and serviceable condition.
B. Assume total responsibility for and repair any damage to existing utilities or construction,
whether or not such existing facilities are shown.
3.07 PROTECTION
A. Protect work, equipment, fixtures, and materials. At work completion, work must be clean and
in original manufacturer's condition.
END OF SECTION
PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS
VLK Architects, 2009 22 0500 - 6 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 22 0510
PLUMBING CONTRACT QUALITY CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Contract quality control including workmanship, manufacturer's instructions, mock-ups and
demonstrations.
1.02 QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAM
A. Maintain quality control over supervision, subcontractors, suppliers, manufacturers, products,
services, site conditions and workmanship to produce work in accordance with contract
documents.
1.03 WORKMANSHIP
A. Comply with industry standards except when more restrictive tolerances or specified
requirements indicate more rigid standards or more precise workmanship.
B. Perform work by persons qualified to produce workmanship of specified quality.
C. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand
stresses, vibration, and racking. Under no conditions shall material or equipment be
suspended from structural bridging.
D. Provide finishes to match approved samples. All exposed finishes shall be approved by the
Architect. Submit color samples as required.
1.04 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS
A. Comply with instructions in full detail, including each step in sequence.
B. Should instruction conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect /
Engineer before proceeding.
1.05 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATES
A. When required in individual Specification Sections, submit manufacturer's certificate in
duplicate, certifying that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
1.06 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES
A. When required in individual Specification Sections, manufacturer shall provide qualified
personnel to observe:
1. Field conditions.
2. Condition of installation.
3. Quality of workmanship.
4. Start-up of equipment.
5. Testing, adjusting, and balancing of equipment.
B. Representative shall make written report of observations and recommendations to Architect /
Engineer.
PLUMBING CONTRACT QUALITY CONTROL
VLK Architects, 2009 22 0510 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
1.07 MOCK-UPS
A. Assemble and erect the specified equipment and products complete, with specified
anchorage and support devices, seals and finishes.
B. Do not proceed with any work involving a mock-up, until the related mock-up has been
approved in writing.
C. Acceptable mock-ups in place shall be retained in the completed work.
D. Perform tests and submit results as specified.
1.08 SCHEDULING OF MOCK-UPS
A. Schedule demonstration and observation of mock-ups, in phases, with Architect / Engineer.
1. Rough -in.
2. Finish with all appurtenances in place.
3. Insulation installed.
4. Demonstrations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 REFERENCE APPLICABLE SPECIFICATION SECTIONS.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PROTECTION OF EQUIPMENT
A. Do not deliver equipment to the project site until progress of construction has reached the
stage where equipment is actually needed or until building is closed in enough to protect the
equipment from weather. Equipment allowed to stand in the weather will be rejected, and the
Contractor is obligated to furnish new equipment of a like kind at no additional cost to the
Owner.
B. Adequately protect equipment from damage after delivery to the project. Cover with heavy
tarpaulins, drop cloths or other protective coverings as required to protect from plaster, paint,
mortar and/or dirt. Do not cover with plastic materials and trap condensate and cause
corrosion.
END OF SECTION
PLUMBING CONTRACT QUALITY CONTROL
VLK Architects, 2009 22 0510 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 22 0512
PLUMBING SHOP DRAWINGS, COORDINATION DRAWINGS & PRODUCT DATA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Prepare submittals as required by Division 1.
B. The term submittal, as used herein, refers to all:
1. Shop Drawings
2. Coordination Drawings
3. Product data
C. Submittals shall be prepared and produced for:
1. Distribution as specified
2. Inclusion in the Operating and Maintenance Manual, as specified, in the related
section
1.02 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Present drawings in a clear and thorough manner. Identify details by reference to sheet and
detail, schedule, or room numbers shown on Contract Drawings.
B. Show all dimensions of each item of equipment on a single composite Shop Drawing. Do not
submit a series of drawings of components.
C. Identify field dimensions; show relationship to adjacent features, critical features, work, or
products.
D. Submit shop drawings in plan, elevation and sections, showing equipment in mechanical
equipment areas.
1.03 COORDINATION DRAWINGS
A. Present in a clear and thorough manner. Title each drawing with project name. Identify each
element of drawings by reference to sheet number and detail, or room number of contract
documents. Minimum drawing scale:'/a" = V-0".
B. Prepare coordination drawings to coordinate installations for efficient use of available space,
for proper sequence of installation, and to resolve conflicts. Coordinate with work specified in
other sections and other divisions of the specifications.
C. For each mechanical room and for each outside equipment pad where equipment is located,
submit plan and elevation drawings. Show:
1. Actual mechanical equipment and components to be furnished
2. Service clearance
3. Relationship to other equipment and components
4. Roof drains and leader piping
5. Fire protection piping and equipment
D. Identify field dimensions. Show relation to adjacent or critical features of work or products.
E. Related requirements:
1. Ductwork shop drawings
2. Coordination drawing specified in Division 26
PLUMBING SHOP DRAWINGS, COORDINATION DRAWINGS & PRODUCT DATA
VLK Architects, 2009 22 0512 -1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
F. Submit shop drawings in plan, elevation and sections, showing equipment in mechanical
equipment areas.
G. Gas piping sketch indicating proposed location of piping prior to proceeding with the
installation.
1.04 PRODUCT DATA AND INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION
A. Submit only pages which are pertinent to the project. All options which are indicated on the
product data shall become part of the contract and shall be required whether specified are
not.
B. Mark each copy of standard printed data to identify pertinent products, referenced to
specification section and article number.
C. Show reference standards, performance characteristics and capacities; wiring and piping
diagrams and controls; component parts; finishes; dimensions and required clearances.
D. Modify manufacturer's standard schematic drawings and diagrams to supplement standard
information and to provide information specifically applicable to the work. Delete information
not applicable.
E. Mark up a copy of the specifications for the product. Indicate in the margin of each paragraph
the following: "Comply, "Do Not Comply", or "Not Applicable". Explain all "Do Not Comply"
statements.
F. Provide a separate transmittal for each submittal item. Transmittals shall indicate product by
specification section name and number. Separate all submittals into appropriate specification
section number. Do not combine specification sections.
1.05 MANUFACTURERS INSTRUCTIONS
A. Submit Manufacturer's instructions for storage, preparation, assembly, installation, start-up,
adjusting, calibrating, balancing and finishing.
1.06 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Review submittals prior to transmittal.
B. Determine and verify:
1. Field measurements
2. Field construction criteria
3. Manufacturer's catalog numbers
4. Conformance with requirements of Contract Documents
C. Coordinate submittals with requirements of the work and of the Contract Documents.
D. Notify the Architect/Engineer in writing at time of submission of any deviations in the
submittals from requirements of the Contract Documents.
E. Do not fabricate products, or begin work for which submittals are specified, until such
submittals have been produced and bear contractor's stamp. Do not fabricate products or
begin work scheduled to have submittals reviewed until return of reviewed submittals with
Architect/Engineer's acceptance.
PLUMBING SHOP DRAWINGS, COORDINATION DRAWINGS & PRODUCT DATA
VLK Architects, 2009 22 0512 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
F. Contractor's responsibility for errors and omissions in submittals is not relieved whether
Architect/Engineer reviews submittals or not.
G. Contractor's responsibility for deviations in submittals from requirements of Contract
Documents is not relieved whether Architect/Engineer reviews submittals or not, unless
Architect/engineer gives written acceptance of the specific deviations on reviewed
documents.
H. Submittals shall show sufficient data to indicate complete compliance with Contract
Documents:
1. Proper sizes and capacities
2. That the item will fit in the available space in a manner that will allow proper service
3. Construction methods, materials and finishes
Schedule submissions at least 15 days before date reviewed submittals will be needed.
1.07 SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS
A. Make submittals promptly in accordance with approved schedule, and in such sequence as
to cause no delay in the Project or in the work of any other Contractor.
B. Number of submittals required:
1. Shop Drawings and Coordination Drawings: Submit one reproducible transparency
and three opaque reproductions.
2. Product Data: Submit the number of copies which the contractor requires, plus those
which will be retained by the Architect/Engineer.
C. Accompany submittals with transmittal letter, in duplicate, containing:
1. Date
2. Project title and number
3. Contractor's name and address
4. The number of each Shop Drawing, Project Datum and Sample submitted
5. Other pertinent data
D. Submittals shall include:
1.
The date of submission
2.
The project title and number
3.
Contract Identification
4.
The names of:
a. Contractor
b. Subcontractor
C. Supplier
d. Manufacturer
5.
Identification of the product
6.
Field dimensions, clearly identified as such
7.
Relation to adjacent or critical features of the work or materials
8.
Applicable standards, such as ASTM or federal specifications numbers
9.
Identification of deviations from contract documents
10.
Suitable blank space for General Contractor and Architect/Engineer stamps
11.
Contractor's signed and dated Stamp of Approval
E. Coordinate submittals into logical groupings to facilitate interrelation of the several items:
1. Finishes which involve Architect/Engineer selection of colors, textures or patterns
2. Associated items which require correlation for efficient function or for installation
1.08 SUBMITTAL SPECIFICATION INFORMATION
PLUMBING SHOP DRAWINGS, COORDINATION DRAWINGS & PRODUCT DATA
VLK Architects, 2009 22 0512 - 3 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
A. Every submittal document shall bear the following information as used in the project manual:
1. The related specification section number
2. The exact specification section title
B. Submittals delivered to the Architect/Engineer without the specified information will not be
processed. The Contractor shall bear the risk of all delays, as if no submittal had been
delivered.
1.09 RESUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS
A. Make re -submittals under procedures specified for initial submittals.
1. Indicate that the document or sample is a re -submittal
2. Identify changes made since previous submittals
B. Indicate any changes which have been made, other than those requested by the
Architect/Engineer.
1.10 CONTRACTOR'S STAMP OF APPROVAL
A. Contractor shall stamp and sign each document certifying to the review of products, field
measurements and field construction criteria, and coordination of the information within the
submittal with requirements of the work and of Contract Documents.
B. Contractor's stamp of approval on any submittal shall constitute a representation to Owner
and Architect/Engineer that Contractor has either determined and verified all quantities,
dimensions, field construction criteria, materials, catalog numbers, and similar data or
assumes full responsibility for doing so, and that Contractor has reviewed or coordinated
each submittal with the requirements of the work and the Contract Documents.
C. Do not deliver any submittals to the Architect/Engineer that do not bear the Contractor's
stamp of approval and signature.
D. Submittals delivered to the Architect/Engineer without Contractor's stamp of approval and
signature will not be processed. The Contractor shall bear the risk of all delays, as if no
submittal had been delivered.
1.11 ARCHITECT/ENGINEER REVIEW OF IDENTIFIED SUBMITTALS
A. The Architect/Engineer will:
1. Review identified submittals with reasonable promptness and in accordance with
schedule
2. Affix stamp and initials or signature, and indicate requirements for re -submittal or
approval of submittal
3. Return submittals to Contractor for distribution or for resubmission
B. Review and approval of submittals will not extend to design data reflected in submittals which
is peculiarly within the special expertise of the Contractor or any party dealing directly with the
Contractor.
C. Architect/Engineer's review and approval is only for conformance with the design concept of
the project and for compliance with the information given in the contract.
1. The review shall not extend to means, methods, sequences, techniques or
procedures of construction or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto.
2. The review shall not extend to review of quantities, dimensions, weights or gauges,
fabrication processes or coordination with the work of other trades.
PLUMBING SHOP DRAWINGS, COORDINATION DRAWINGS & PRODUCT DATA
VLK Architects, 2009 22 0512 - 4 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
D. The review and approval of a separate item as such will not indicate approval of the
assembly in which the item functions.
1.12 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Do not make requests for substitution employing the procedures of this Section.
B. The procedure for making a formal request for substitution is specified in Div. 1.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED.
PART 3 - EXECUTION - NOT USED
END OF SECTION
PLUMBING SHOP DRAWINGS, COORDINATION DRAWINGS & PRODUCT DATA
VLK Architects, 2009 22 0512 - 5 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 22 0513
ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS OF PLUMBING WORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Electrical provisions to be provided as plumbing work are indicated in other Division 22
sections, on drawings, and as specified.
B. Types of work, normally recognized as electrical but provided as plumbing, specified or
partially specified in this Section, include but are not necessarily limited to the following:
1. Motors for plumbing equipment.
2. Starters for motors of plumbing equipment, but only where specifically indicated
to be furnished integrally with equipment.
3. Wiring from motors to disconnect switches or junction boxes for motors of
plumbing equipment, but only where specifically indicated to be furnished
integrally with equipment.
4. Wiring of field -mounted float control switches, flow control switches, and similar
plumbing -electrical devices provided for plumbing systems, to equipment control
panels.
5. Pipe heat tracing.
C. Refer to Division 22 sections for specific individual plumbing equipment electrical
requirements.
F. Refer to Division 26 sections for motor starters and controls not furnished integrally with
plumbing equipment.
G. Refer to Division 26 sections for junction boxes and disconnect switches required for
motors and other electrical units of plumbing equipment.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Wherever possible, match elements of electrical provisions of plumbing work with similar
elements of electrical work specified in Division 26 sections for electrical work not
otherwise specified.
B. For electrical equipment and products, comply with applicable NEMA standards, and
refer to NEMA standards for definitions of terminology. Comply with National Electrical
Code (NFPA 70) for workmanship and installation requirements.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Include in listing of motors, voltage, notation of whether motor starter is furnished or
installed integrally with motor or equipment containing motors.
PART2-PRODUCTS
ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS OF PLUMBING WORK
VLK Architects, 2009 22 0513 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
2.01 MOTORS
A. Provide motors for plumbing equipment manufactured by one of the following:
1.
Baldor Electric Company.
2.
Century Electric Div., Inc.
3.
General Electric Co.
4.
Louis Allis Div.; Litton Industrial Products, Inc.
5.
Lincoln Electric
6.
Marathon Electric Mfg. Corp.
7.
Reliance Electric Co.
8.
Westinghouse Electric Corp.
B. Motor Characteristics. Except where more stringent requirements are indicated, and
except where required items of plumbing equipment cannot be obtained with fully
complying motors, comply with the following requirements for motors of plumbing work:
C. Temperature Rating. Rated for 400 C environment with maximum 5011C temperature rise
for continuous duty at full load (Class A Insulation).
D. Provide each motor capable of making starts as frequently as indicated by automatic
control system, and not less than 5 starts per hour for manually controlled motors.
E. Phases and Current Characteristics. Provide squirrel -cage induction polyphase motors
for 3/4hp and larger, and provide capacitor -start single-phase motors for 1/2hp and
smaller, except 1/6hp and smaller may, at equipment manufacturer's option, be split -
phase type. Coordinate current characteristics with power specified in Division 26
sections, and with individual equipment requirements specified in other Division 22
requirements. For 2-speed motors provide 2 separate windings on polyphase motors. Do
not purchase motors until power characteristics available at locations of motors have
been confirmed, and until rotation directions have been confirmed.
F. Service Factor. 1.15 for polyphase motors and 1.35 for single-phase motors.
G. Motor Construction. Provide general purpose, continuous duty motors, Design "B" except
"C" where required for high starting torque.
1. Frames. NEMA #56.
2. Bearings are to be ball or roller bearings with inner and outer shaft seals,
regreasable except permanently sealed where motor is inaccessible for regular
maintenance. Where belt drives and other drives produce lateral or axial thrust in
motor, provide bearings designed to resist thrust loading. Refer to individual
section of Division 22 for fractional -hp light -duty motors where sleeve -type
bearings are permitted.
3. Except as indicated, provide open drip -proof motors for indoor use where
satisfactorily housed or remotely located during operation, and provide guarded
drip -proof motors where exposed to contact by employees or building occupants.
Provide weather -protected Type I for outdoor use, Type 11 where not housed.
Refer to individual sections of Division 22 for other enclosure requirements.
4. Provide built-in thermal overload protection and, where indicated, provide internal
sensing device suitable for signaling and stopping motor at starter.
5. Noise Rating: Provide "Quiet" rating on motors.
H. All motors shall be premium efficiency.
2.02 EQUIPMENT FABRICATION
ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS OF PLUMBING WORK
VLK Architects, 2009 22 0513 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
A. Fabricate plumbing equipment for secure mounting of motors and other electrical items
included in work. Provide either permanent alignment of motors with equipment, or
adjustable mountings as applicable for belt drives, gear drives, special couplings and
similar indirect coupling of equipment. Provide safe, secure, durable, and removable
guards for motor drives. Arrange for lubrication and similar running -maintenance without
removal of guards.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install motors on motor mounting systems in accordance with motor manufacturer's
instructions, anchored to resist torque, drive thrusts, and other external forces inherent in
plumbing work. Secure sheaves and other drive units to motor shafts with keys and Allen
set screws on flat surface of shaft. Unless otherwise indicated, set motor shafts parallel
with machine shafts.
B. Verify voltage with Electrical Plans.
END OF SECTION
ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS OF PLUMBING WORK
VLK Architects, 2009 22 0513 - 3 2737.03
SECTION 22 0515
PLUMBING EARTHWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
CATE Renovations
AW Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
A. Excavate and backfill for pipe trenches for underground piping, and excavate for structures
installed as part of plumbing work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXCAVATION
A. Excavate trenches for underground piping to the required depth to ensure 2 foot minimum
coverage over piping.
B. Cut the bottom of the trench or excavation to uniform grade.
C. Should rock be encountered, excavate 6 inches below grade, fill with bedding material and
tamp well.
D. Lay out alignment of pipe trenches to avoid obstructions. Assure that proposed route of pipe
will not interfere with building foundation before any cutting is begun. Should interference be
found, contact the Architect/Engineer before proceeding.
3.02 BACKFILL
A. Backfill shall not be placed until the work has been inspected, tested and approved.
Complete backfill to the surface of natural ground or to the lines and grades shown on
drawings. Except where special materials are requested, use suitable friable soils from other
excavation as backfill material. Do not use peat, silt, muck, debris or other organic materials.
Deposit backfill in uniform layers and compact each layer as specified in Division 2.
B. Compacting Backfill. Place material in uniform layers of prescribed maximum thickness and
wet or dry the material to optimum moisture content. Compact with power -driven tampers to
the prescribed density. Place regular backfill in 8 inch maximum layers, loose measure.
Compact to not less than 95% of maximum soil density as determined by ASTM D-698
Standard Proctor.
C. Restoration. Compact backfill, where trenching or excavation is required in improved areas
such as pavements, walks, and similar areas, to a condition equal to the adjacent
undisturbed earth, and restore surface of the area to the condition existing prior to trenching
or excavating operation.
D. Provide 6 inch stabilized sand bed with 4 inch stabilized sand cover around each pipe.
3.03 DISPOSAL OF EXCESS MATERIAL
A. Remove excess excavation material or material unsuitable for backfill. Excess material can
be spread on grade, or shall be removed from site as directed by the Owner/Architect.
END OF SECTION
PLUMBING EARTHWORK
VLK Architects, 2009 22 05 15 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 22 0517
PLUMBING ACCESS DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install access doors in wall or ceiling locations as required or shown for
access to valves, controls, regulating devices, water arresters and other equipment
requiring maintenance, adjustment or operation.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.01 NON -FIRE RATED ACCESS DOORS
A. 16-Gauge frames
B. 14-gauge steel panels
C. Continuous fully concealed hinges
D. Flush screwdriver cam lock & cylinder lock for Owner selection
E. Automatic closing and latching mechanism
F. Prime coat finish
G. Brushed satin stainless steel finish for restroom, kitchen or cafeteria installation
H. Material suitable for wall and/or ceiling mounting
2.02 FIRE RATED ACCESS DOORS
A. UL listed, 1-1/2 hour Label "B", access doors
B. 16-Gauge stainless steel
C. 20-Gauge insulated sandwich -type door panel.
D. Two inch thick with fire rated insulation
E. Continuous fully concealed hinge
F. Automatic closing and latching mechanism
G. Knurled knob and recessed key operation for Owner selection
H. Interior latch release slide for opening from inside
I. Prime coat finish
J. Material suitable for wall and/or ceiling mounting
PLUMBING ACCESS DOORS
VLK Architects, 2009 22 0517 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
2.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Milcor
B. MIFAB
C. Acudor
D. Elmdor
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Access doors specified in Division 22 will be installed by other crafts. Not all required
access doors are shown. Coordinate with the Contractor to locate access doors for ease
of operation and maintenance of concealed equipment.
B. Installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions.
C. Minimum size required:
1. 24" x 24" for plumbing isolation valves and electrical related items
END OF SECTION
PLUMBING ACCESS DOORS
VLK Architects, 2009 22 0517 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 22 0519
PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE INSTRUMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
WORK INCLUDED
A.
This section specifies gauges, thermometers, wells and/or pressure and temperature test
stations to be installed as specified.
1.02
RELATED WORK
A.
Division 22, Plumbing
1. 22 0500 - Plumbing General Provisions
2. 22 2000 — Plumbing Pipe and Pipe Fittings, General
3. 22 0523 - Valves, Strainers and Vents
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
ACCEPTABLE
MANUFACTURERS - GAUGES AND THERMOMETERS
A.
Trerice
B.
Taylor
C.
Marsh
D.
Weksler
E.
Marshalltown
F.
Weiss
G.
Miljoco
2.02
PRESSURE GAUGES
A.
Case and Ring: 4" type 304 stainless steel; liquid filled case with stainless steel bayonet ring.
B.
Dial: White aluminum with black markings
C.
Window: Clear acrylic
D.
Tube: Phosphor bronze and forged brass socket.
E.
Gauge accuracy: +/- 1 % over operating range.
F.
For pulsating service, provide impulse dampers.
G.
Without flange for pipe mounting:
H.
With flange for wall mounting.
I.
Weiss Model: LF44S-1 B or equal.
2.03
THERMOMETER WELLS
PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE INSTRUMENTS
VLK Architects, 2009 22 0519 -1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
A. Brass or type 300 stainless steel Machined bar stock, 1-piece construction.
B. Where installed in insulated piping or vessels, provide with extension neck to match
insulation thickness.
C. Provide metal -to -metal contact with bulb chamber for maximum sensitivity.
D. Wells shall be sized to extend a minimum of 50% into pipe.
2.04 THERMOMETERS IN PIPING SYSTEMS OR VESSELS
A. Die cast aluminum case with baked epoxy finish.
B. Adjustable angle 9" scale length.
C. Clear acrylic window.
D. Brass stem, length to match well.
E. Red reading organic spirit filled -in magnifying glass column.
F. White background with black figures and markings.
G. Brass stems and union connections.
H Accuracy: +/- 1 % of scale range.
1. Range:
01. Hot water lines: 30OF to 240°F.
2.05 PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE TEST STATIONS
A. "Test Station" fitting to receive either a temperature or pressure probe. Fitting shall be solid
brass with two valve cores of Nordel.
1. Fitted with a color coded cap strap with gasket.
2. Acceptable Manufacturer: Peterson Equipment Company.
3. Provide with extension neck to match insulation thickness.
B. Provide to the Owner a fitted case with:
1. Two 0-100 psi pressure gauges as specified and adapters with 1/8" OD probe.
2. Four 5" stem pocket testing thermometers.
a. Two with range 0°F to 220OF for hot water.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with drawing details and manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Provide a ball valve at each gauge.
C. Locate gauges and thermometers to be easily readable from the floor at a 64, eye level.
Use adjustable angle or rigid stem as required. Install gauges in upright position.
D. Install gauges in the following locations: across pumps, storage tanks, heat exchangers.
PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE INSTRUMENTS
VLK Architects, 2009 22 0519 -2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
E. Install thermometer in the following locations: At storage tanks, across heat exchangers,
across boiler, leaving side of water heater, leaving water side of tempered water valves, and
hot water supply and return lines.
1. Hot water lines: 30OF to 240°F.
2. Tempered water valves 0°F to 120°F.
END OF SECTION
PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE INSTRUMENTS
VLK Architects, 2009 22 0519 -3 2737.03
SECTION 22 0523
VALVES, STRAINERS AND VENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Plumbing Valves
B. Pipe strainer
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.01 VALVES
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
A. Pressure Ratings:
1. Unless otherwise indicated, use valves suitable for 125 minimum psig working steam
pressure (WSP) and 450OF.
2. The pressure temperature rating of valves shall be not less than the design criteria
applicable to components of the system.
B. Gate Valves
1 Gate valves shall be designed for repacking under pressure when fully opened.
Equipped with packing suitable for the intended service.
2. When the valve is fully opened, the back seat shall protect the packing and the stem
threads from the fluid.
3. All gate valves shall have a gland follower.
4. Provide solid wedge type gate valves designed and manufactured so that seating
surfaces are prevented from contacting until near the point of closure.
5. Provide a malleable hand -wheel for all gate valves.
6. Provide bronze body, bronze trim, non -rising stem, hand -wheel, inside screw, single
wedge or disc, threaded ends up to 2".
7. Provide iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, hand -wheel, OS&Y, double wedge,
flanged ends over 2".
C. Balancing Valves
1. Provide balancing valves with:
a. Corrosion resistant plug with resilient seal when required.
b. O-ring stem seal.
C. Permanently lubricated, corrosion resistant bearings.
2. Connections
a. Through 2" pipe size use threaded connections.
b. For valves 2-1/2" pipe size and larger shall be provided with 150 psig flange
connections.
3. Provide each valve with:
a. Memory stop.
b. Plastic drip cap.
C. 1/8" gauge tap.
D. Ball Valves
1. Provide ball valves with:
a. Blowout proof stem.
b. Full size port, 316 stainless steel ball and stem.
C. Cast bronze body.
d. Threaded ends.
VALVES, STRAINERS AND VENTS
VLK Architects, 2009 22 0523 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
2. Seat, seals, thrust washers and packing shall be suitable for the intended service.
3. Service rating:
a. 150 psi saturated steam.
b. 600 psi WOG.
4. Where piping is insulated, ball valves shall be equipped with 2" extended handles of
non -thermal conductive material. Provide a protective sleeve that allows operation of
the valve without breaking the vapor seal or disturbing the insulation.
5. Provide with memory stop for balancing valves.
6. Where Viega ProPress fittings are used, Viega ProPress ball valves may be used.
E. Globe and Angle Valves
1. Bronze body 2" and smaller, bronze plug disc and renewable seat ring, union bonnet,
malleable iron hand wheel, standard packing with bronze gland follower.
2. Iron body 2-1/2" and larger, bronze mounted disc and bronze seat ring, outside
screw and yoke, standard packing with gland follower.
3. Globe valves shall be designed for repacking under pressure when fully opened..
a. Equipped with packing suitable for the intended service.
4. When the valve is fully opened, the back seat shall protect the packing and the stem
threads from the fluid.
F. Valve Connections
1. Provide valves suitable to connect to adjoining piping as specified for pipe joints. Use
pipe size valves. Sweated joints are not allowed.
2. Thread pipe sizes 2" and smaller.
3. Flange pipe sizes 2-1/2" and larger.
4. Use screw to solder adapters for copper tubing.
5. Use grooved body valves with mechanical grooved jointed piping.
G. Acceptable Manufacturers
1. Stockham
2.
Dezurik
3.
Hammond
4.
Crane
5.
Nibco
6.
Keystone
7.
Jenkins
H. Check Valves
1. Bronze body, 2" and smaller, bronze disc (Teflon disc for steam service), regrinding
swing check, screw -in cap, threaded connection.
2. Iron body, 2-1/2" and larger, bronze trim, non -slam: stainless steel pins and springs,
and bronze plate or bronze mounted, regrind -renew check, bronze seat ring and
disc. Provide either wafer or threaded lug.
3. Acceptable Manufacturers
a. Mission Duochek
b. Nibco
C. Keystone
I. Provide valves of same manufacturer throughout where possible.
J. Provide valves with manufacturer's name and manufacturing location, duty and pressure
rating clearly marked on outside of body.
K. Where valves are installed in insulated piping, provide with extended neck so valve operator
and stop plate clears the full thickness insulation.
VALVES, STRAINERS AND VENTS
VLK Architects, 2009 22 0523 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
L. Provide valve, seat and trim materials suitable for the intended service.
M. Provide memory stops for all valves used for throttling service. Valves for throttling service
shall be butterfly, plug, caged or ball type.
N. Float Valve
1. On - Off non -modulating action
2. Fully adjustable high and low level settings
3. Float, float linkage and float rod
4. Complete stainless steel material
5. Level differential adjustment minimum to 18" maximum
6. Stilling well
7. Acceptable Manufacturer: CLA-VAL
2.02 PIPE SYSTEMS STRAINERS
A. Body:
1. "Y" pattern or basket as shown on the drawings.
2. Line size.
3. Threaded strainer blow down port.
4. ASTM A #126 Class B Cast Iron Body.
B. Construction:
1. 2" size and smaller with screw connections rated 400 psi WOG.
2. Over 2" size with flanged connections, rated 125 psi WOG.
C. Fabricate screens of Monel or type 304 stainless steel:
1. With 20 mesh woven wire in piping systems through 2".
2. With 0.045 perforations in piping systems 2-1/2" and 3".
3. With 0.125 perforations in piping systems 4" and larger.
D. Start-up:
1. Provide an additional fine mesh disposable screen for use during start-up operations.
2. Remove after 30 days.
3. Attach to piping for owners review.
E. Acceptable Manufacturers
1.
Crane
2.
Keckley
3.
Zurn
4.
Mueller
5.
McAlear
6.
Muesco
2.03 VALVE SCHEDULE
A. Domestic Service
1. Gas shut-off service: UL approved for natural gas service.
a.
Nibco Ball Valve, full port through 1 ": T-585-70-UL
b.
Nibco Ball Valve conventional port 1-1/4" through 3": T-580-70-UL
C.
Resun 2-1/2" and larger: 143 - 1-UL
d.
DeZurick 2-1/2" and larger: Series 425 or 435
e.
Locking Type: Rockford 3/4" and 1" PNP-400
Mueller 1-1/4" through 4": Lub-O-seal
f.
Conbraco Ball Valve, full port through 4": 64-100 Series
VALVES, STRAINERS AND VENTS
VLK Architects, 2009
22 0523 - 3 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
h. Hammond Full Port'/a"-2" #8303A
i. Hammond Standard Port 2-1/2" & 3" #8503
j. Viega ProPress Bronze Ball Valves (where Viega ProPress fittings are used)
2. Cold And Hot water service
a. Nibco Ball Valve full port through 2": T-585-70-66
b. Nibco Ball Valve 2-1/2" and 3" conventional port: T-580-70-66
C. Nibco Butterfly Valve 4" and larger: LD-3022
d. Watts Ball Valve 4" and larger: G-4000-FDA
e. Viega ProPress Bronze Ball Valves (where Viega ProPress fittings are used)
f. Kitz Full Port through 2" - #68M
h. Hammond Full Port t/a"-2" #8303A
i. Hammond Standard Port 2-1/2" & 3" #8503
j. Viega ProPress Bronze Ball Valves (where Viega ProPress fittings are used)
3. Check Valve:
a. Nibco Check Valve: T - 413 - Y (Teflon Seats)
b. Nibco Check Valve 2-1/2" and larger: F - 918 - Y (Teflon Seats)
C. Nibco Check Valve 2-1/2" and larger: W - 920 -W (Wafer)
4. Globe Valve:
a. Nibco Globe Valve: T - 235 - Y (Teflon Seats)
b. Nibco Globe Valve 2-1/2" and larger: F - 718 - B (Bronze Seats)
5. Gate Valve
a. Nibco Gate Valve through 2": T-133
b. Nibco Gate Valve 2-1/2" and Larger: F-617
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.
B. Install valves for shut-off and isolating service at each piece of equipment, at vertical risers,
and where shown on the drawings.
C. Use butterfly valves and ball valves in domestic hot water and domestic cold water systems
interchangeable in place of gate and globe valves.
D. Use butterfly valves and ball valves in circulating water systems, for balancing duty. Provide
infinite position gear operator with memory stop.
E. Provide drain valves at main shut-off valves and low points of piping and apparatus so the
systems can be entirely drained.
1. 1" valve for pipes 6" and larger.
2. 3/4" valve for pipes smaller than 6".
3. Terminate with pipe plug.
4. Drain valves shall be ball valves.
F. Provide isolation valves in domestic water lines to isolate all equipment, restrooms, hose
bibs, and where shown on the drawings.
G. Where valves are installed in insulated pipe, valve operator shall have an insert so the lever
or handle will not damage the insulation. Install handles so the lever or handles will not
damage the insulation.
H. Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access to valves.
VALVES, STRAINERS AND VENTS
VLK Architects, 2009 22 0523 - 4 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
Provide access where valves are not exposed.
J. Float valves / stilling wells provided and installed in fire / domestic water surge tanks for water
level control. Stilling wells provided around float to prevent turbulence ripples or wind from
interference.
K. Where valves are located above ceilings, locate valve handles along side of pipe.
3.02 VALVE TAGS
A. Furnish valves with 1-1/2" diameter brass valve tags with stamped, black or red -filled
numbers. Service designations shall be 1/4" letters, and valve numbers shall be 2" letters.
Engineer shall approve Service designations. Secure tags to valves by use of brass "S"
hooks or brass chain. Secure chain to valve by use of copper or Monel meter seals. Valve
tags are not required if the valve is located within 3' of the equipment being served and the
service is obvious.
B. Mount charts and drawings listing functions of each valve and its location in a metal and
glass frame. Place charts and drawings as directed; in addition, on the record drawings mark
the symbols and furnish a valve schedule properly identifying the valve number, service,
exact location, the material being piped, and the room number of area that the valve services.
This schedule shall be furnished on reproducible drafting paper or film suitable for
reproduction on an Ozalid machine. The Owner shall approve the size of drafting paper.
Provide a copy of the valve chart in the Operating and Maintenance Manuals.
3.03 PIPE SYSTEMS STRAINERS
A. Provide strainers in supply piping to circulating pumps, thermostatic mixing valves, before
solenoid valves and trap primer valves.
END OF SECTION
VALVES, STRAINERS AND VENTS
VLK Architects, 2009 22 0523 - 5 2737.03
SECTION 22 0533
PIPE HEAT TRACING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
A. Furnish and install a complete industrial, constant wattage, UL listed system of electric pipe
heat tracing and controls on all make-up water piping outdoors above grade to prevent
freezing. The heat tracing system shall conform to ANSI/IEEE Standard 515-1989.
B. Protect the pipe, valves, fittings, meters and appurtenances. Apply sufficient cable and
overheat thermostat to protect the entire system.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings and product data as specified in Section 22 0512.
B. Submit detailed calculations for length of heat tracing cable per foot of pipe, based on actual
length of piping installed.
C. Submit manufacturer's certified capacity charts with selections plotted thereon.
D. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
E. Submit full load ampere requirement and voltage for branch circuit.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Raychem Corporation
B. Thermon Manufacturing Company
2.02 COMPONENTS
A. Self-regulating heater.
1. The self-regulating heater shall consist of two 16 AWG tinned -copper bus wires
embedded in parallel in a self-regulating polymer core that varies its power output to
respond to temperature all along its length, allowing the heater to be crossed itself
without overheating and to be cut in the field. The heater shall be covered by a
radiation cross -linked modified polyolefin dielectric jacket.
2. In order to provide energy conservation, and to prevent overheating, the heater shall
have a self-regulating factor of at least 90%.
3. The heater shall operate on a line voltage of 120 VAC without the use of
transformers.
4. The heater shall be sized according to the following. The required heater output
rating is in watts per foot at 50°F (heater selection based on 1-1/2 inch fiberglass
insulation on metal piping).
5. The heater shall be XL -Trace as manufactured by Raychem Corporation or XL-
Econotrace as manufactured by Thermon Manufacturing Company.
PIPE HEAT TRACING
VLK Architects, 2009 22 0533 -1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
6. Power connection, end seal, splice and tee kits components shall be applied in the
field.
7. The system shall be controlled by an ambient sensing thermostat set at 40oF either
directly or through an appropriate contactor.
8. Provide an end -of -circuit voltage indicating light
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install and start up the pipe heat tracing system in accordance with the manufacturer's
Installation, Start-up and Service Instructions.
B. Install the pipe heat tracing cable under the pipe insulation.
C. Apply "Electrically Traced" signs to the outside of the thermal insulation.
D. Ground fault protection of the equipment shall be provided per the 1996 National Electrical
Code, Article 427-22.
E. Provide a cast aluminum weatherproof NEMA-4 rated junction box for installation of the
cable, with pilot light to indicate operation of the cable.
F. Use only electrical components as recommended by the manufacturer.
3.02 ELECTRICAL WORK
A. Furnish and install the wire, conduit and raceway systems required for the automatic
operation of the pipe heat tracing system. Conform to the National Electrical Code.
B. The specified wiring work includes:
1. Wiring of control instruments between thermostat and junction boxes
2. Installation of thermostat and junction boxes
3. Wiring from the heat tracing cable to the junction boxes
C. Related branch circuit power wiring from the junction box to ground fault type circuit is
specified to be provided in Division 26.
D. Provide devices and appurtenances as specified in Division 26.
E. Identify each circuit at each terminal with a separate tag.
F. Color code wires in accordance with IPCEA Standards.
G. Make all joints and connections with approved mechanical connectors.
3.03 TESTING OF THE PIPE HEAT TRACING SYSTEM
A. Test the pipe heat tracing system:
1. Simulate freezing outside air conditions
2. Measure the amperage draw of the heat tracing system
3. Compare to the manufacturer's capacity rating of the actual system
4. After installation and before and after installing the thermal insulation, subject heat
to testing using a 1000 VDC megger. Minimum insulation resistance should be
between 20 to 1000 megohms regardless of the length.
PIPE HEAT TRACING
VLK Architects, 2009 22 0533 -2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
B. Submit records of test for approval prior to substantial completion; insert in the Owner's
Manual.
END SECTION
PIPE HEAT TRACING
VLK Architects, 2009 22 0533 -3 2737.03
SECTION 22 0719
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
A. Furnish and install piping insulation, jackets, accessories and covering of specified materials.
The insulation shall be used for high and low temperature piping applications including
domestic hot and cold water, roof and overflow drain sump bodies and rain leaders,
horizontal sanitary drain piping which receives condensate, and make-up water.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The intent of insulation specifications is to obtain superior quality workmanship resulting in an
installation that is absolutely satisfactory in both function and appearance. Provide insulation
in accordance with the specifications for each type of service and apply as recommended by
the manufacturer and as specified.
B. An approved contractor for this work under this Division shall be:
1. A specialist in this field and have the personnel, experience, training, skill, and the
organization to provide a practical working system.
2. Able to furnish evidence of having contracted for and installed not less than 3
systems of comparable size and type that have served their owners satisfactorily for
not less than 3 years.
C. All piping insulation used on the project inside the building must have a flame spread rating
not exceeding 25 and a smoke developed rating not exceeding 50, as determined by test
procedures ASTM E 84, NFPA 255 and UL 723. These ratings must be as tested on the
composite of insulation, jacket or facing, and adhesive. Components such as adhesives,
mastics and cements must meet the same individual ratings as the minimum requirements
and bear the UL label.
D. Condensation on any insulated piping system is not acceptable.
E. Replace insulation damaged by either moisture or other means. Insulation that has been wet,
whether dried or not, is considered damaged. Make repairs where condensation is caused by
improper installation of insulation. Also repair any damage caused by the condensation.
F. Where existing insulated piping, or other surfaces are tapped, remove existing insulation
back to undamaged sections for hot surfaces or to nearest insulation stop for cold surfaces,
and replace with new insulation of the same type and thickness as existing insulation. Apply
as specified for insulation of the same service.
1.03 APPROVALS
A. Submit product data on each insulation type, adhesive, and finish to be used in the work.
Make the submittal as specified in Division 1 General Requirements and obtain approval
before beginning installation. Include product description, list of materials and thickness for
each service and location and the manufacturer's installation instructions for each product.
B. Make a field application of each type of insulation to display the material, quality and
application method. Obtain approval of the sample application before proceeding with
installation of the work.
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
VLK Architects, 2009 22 0719 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent school District
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Glass fiber pipe insulation:
1. Johns -Manville Micro-Lok AP-T
2. Owens-Corning ASJ/SSL
3. Knauf ASJ/SSL
B. Cellular Glass Insulation (Foamglass):
1. Pittsburg Corning
2. Cell-U-Foam
C. Aluminum Jacketing:
1. Childers
2. Pabco
3. RPR
D. Fiberglass reinforcing cloth mesh:
1. Perma Glass Mesh
2. Alpha Glass Mesh
3. Childers Chil-Glas
4. Vimasco
E. Mastics and Adhesives
1.
Childers
2.
Foster
3.
Vimasco
4.
Armstrong 520 Adhesive
F. Elastomeric Insulation
1.
Armstrong
G. Weather Resistant Coating
1.
WB Armaflex Finish
H. Glass fiber blanket insulation
1. Manville R-series Microlite FSKL
2. Owens-Corning eD75 or ED100 RKF
3. Knauf 0.75 PCF FSK
2.02 FIBERGLASS PIPE INSULATION
A. Heavy density, dual temperature fiberglass insulation with factory applied, all service,
reinforced vapor barrier jacket having integral laminated vapor barrier. Provide with a factory
applied pressure sensitive tape closure system and matching butt strips. Supply in thickness
as shown.
1. Thermal conductivity 0.23 @ 75OF mean (ASTM 335).
2.03 ELASTOMERIC INSULATION
A. insulation material shall be flexible, closed -cell elastomeric insulation in tubular or sheet form.
Material shall have a flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke developed rating of 50 or
less when tested in accordance with ASTM E84, latest revision. Sheet material with a
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
VLK Architects, 2009 22 0719 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A$M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
thickness greater than 3/4" shall have a flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke
developed rating of 100 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E84, latest revision. In
addition, the product, when tested, shall not melt or drip flaming particles, and the flame shall
not be progressive. In addition, all materials shall pass simulated end -use fire test. Minimum
3/4" thick.
1. Thermal conductivity 0.27 at 750F mean (ASTM C177 or C518)
2.04 CELLULAR GLASS INSULATION
A. ASTM C552:
1. "k" value of 0.35 @ 75°F ("ksi" value of 0.047 @ 240C);
2. 8.0 Ib/cu.ft. (128 kg/cu.m.) density
2.05 INSULATION/SHIELD AT HANGERS
A. Field fabricated: Use 3600 sections of rigid foamglass insulation that will support the bearing
area at hangers and supports. Further support insulation at hangers and supports with a
shield of galvanized metal covering at least half of the pipe circumference, and conforming to
the schedule. Insulation shall extend at least 1 " beyond metal shield on each end. When pipe
is guided at top and bottom, metal shields shall cover the whole pipe circumference. Adhere
metal shield to insulation so that metal will not slide with respect to insulation with I/V
aluminum bands (2) per shield.
1. Sections of foam glass insulation may be used of the same outside diameter of the
adjoining pipe insulation.
2. Minimum thickness of foam glass insulation shall not be less than 1 " thick.
B. Pipe saddles: Formed galvanized sheets at each support point for insulated pipe, shaped to
fit pipe, and covering bottom half of pipe. Length at saddle shall be not less than twice the
insulation outside diameter or more than 22". Provide 18 gauge through 4" pipe and 16-
gauge 5" pipe and above.
2.06 SEALANT, ADHESIVE AND FINISH
A. Lap Adhesive. Provide Childers CP-82 adhesive.
B. Vapor Barrier Finish:
1. Indoors: Provide as insulation coating Childers CP-35, white.
2. Outdoors: Provide as insulation coating Childers Encacel X.
3. Underground: Provide Childers CP-22/24 for fittings and areas. Pittwrap cannot be
used.
C. Sealant. Provide Childers CP-76 vapor -barrier sealant.
D. Lagging Adhesive. Provide Childers CP-50.
E. Other products of equal quality will be acceptable only upon approval.
2.07 ALUMINUM JACKETING
A. Finish insulated piping outdoors with a smooth prefabricated Z-lock aluminum jacket 0.016"
thick with factory applied 1 mil polyethylene/40 lb and Fab strap. Kraft moisture barrier.
Childers Lock -On or approved equal.
B. Valves, Fittings and Flanges. For finishing valves, fittings, flanges and similar installations,
provide formed aluminum covers, 0.024" thick.
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
VLK Architects, 2009 22 0719 - 3 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
C. Straps and Seals. Provide �/? x 0.020 stainless steel strapping and seals for jackets and
covers according to manufacturer's recommendations.
2.08 GLASS FIBER BLANKET INSULATION
A. Minimum density of 1.0 PCF, 2" thick, installed R value to be 6.0 or better at 750F mean,
facing of 0.35 mil foil reinforced with glass yarn mesh and laminated to 40 Ibs fire resistant
kraft.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INTERIOR PIPING
A. Cover all piping with glass fiber, heavy density, dual temperature pipe insulation with a vapor
barrier jacket. Apply insulation to clean, dry pipes. Longitudinal seams shall be joined firmly
together and sealed with self-sealing lap joints. Butt insulation joints firmly together and seal
with a 3" wide ASJ butt strip seal. Longitudinal seams and butt strip laps shall be coated and
sealed with CP-35 vapor barrier coating for chilled water piping applications.
B. Install hanger with protective shield, on the outside of all insulation.
C. Where domestic water pipes (1/2" & 3/a" pipe sizes) are installed on trapeze type hangers,
provide galvanized sheet metal protection shields at these locations. Place insulation jacket
directly on hanger. Incompressible, load bearing insulation segments are not required.
D. Pipe Saddles: Formed galvanized sheets at each support point for insulated pipe, shaped to
fit pipe, and covering bottom half of pipe. Length at saddle shall be not less than twice the
insulation outside diameter. Provide 18-gauge through 4" pipe and 16-gauge for 5" pipe and
above.
E. Seal ends of pipe for drinking chilled water insulation with vapor barrier mastic at valves,
flanges, fittings and every 21' on straight runs of piping. Mastic should extend on top of ASJ
jacket, across the glass, down onto the pipe making a complete seal.
F. Apply a smooth flood coat of white lagging Foster 8142W over all exposed insulation.
G. Piping to be insulated as specified above:
1. Domestic hot and cold water
2. Make-up water
3. Horizontal sanitary drain piping that receives condensate
4. Exposed to view storm drainage system including roof and overflow drain bodies,
vertical piping from drain body to elbow, all horizontal rain leaders, and first elbow
turning down
3.02 PIPING OUTDOORS ABOVE GRADE
A. Insulate all water piping exterior of building above grade with rigid foam insulation and
aluminum jacketing.
B. Adhere the vapor barrier jacket longitudinal seam with vapor barrier adhesive.
C. Cover all valves, fittings and flanges with factory made molded or field fabricated segments of
pipe insulation of a thickness and material equal to the adjoining insulation. Adhere segments
together with no voids, using CP-82 adhesive. Secure fitting insulation covers and segments
in place with'/z" wide glass filament tape.
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
VLK Architects, 2009 22 0719 - 4 2737.03
3.03
3.04
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
D. Apply a tack coat of fitting mastic over the insulation and tape.
E. Neatly embed with 10 x 10 fiberglass cloth into the tack coat.
F. Apply mastic over the fiberglass cloth to a thickness where the fabric is not visible after
completion.
G. Seal ends of pipe insulation with vapor barrier mastic at valves, flanges, fittings and every 21'
on straight runs of piping. Mastic should extend on top of ASJ jacket, across the foam, down
onto the pipe, making a complete seal.
H. Finish with aluminum jacketing as specified.
FLANGE, VALVE AND FITTING INSULATION
A. Cover valves and flanges with fabricated segments, fittings with two-piece factory molded
fittings, and both of matching pipe insulation type and thickness equal to that of the adjoining
pipe. Fittings and fabricated segments shall be securely held in place.
1. Apply a tack coat of insulating mastic to the insulated fitting to produce a smooth
surface.
2. After mastic is dry, apply a second coat of vapor barrier mastic. Neatly embed with
10 x 10 fiberglass cloth into the tack coat.
3. Overlap mastic and fiberglass cloth by 2" on adjoining sections of pipe insulation.
4. Apply a second coat of mastic over the fiberglass cloth to present a smooth surface.
5. Apply mastic to a wet film thickness of 3/64".
6. Fabric shall not be visible after completion.
7. Vapor seal flanges, valves and fittings with Childers CP-35.
B. PVC fitting covers are not acceptable.
ALUMINUM JACKETING (Insulated Piping Outdoors Above Grade)
A. Apply smooth aluminum jacket on piping, valves, fittings and flange covers according to
manufacturer's recommendations, using stainless steel strapping and seals, to provide
weather tight covering and to shed water.
B. Aluminum jacketing is not considered as contributing to the vapor barrier or the insulation
jacket. The vapor barrier must be sufficient in itself for this function. Lap each adjoining jacket
section a minimum of 3" to make a weather tight seal.
C. Install straps on 9" centers and at each circumferential lap joint.
D. Cover and seal all exposed surfaces.
E. The use of screws and rivets is not approved.
F. Provide isolation (30# felt) between the aluminum jacket and the sheetmetal protection shield
at each pipe support point.
3.05 CONCEALED STORM DRAIN PIPING
A. Provide flexible glass fiber insulation with factory -applied, reinforced UL labeled Foil-Skrim-
Kraft (FSK) facing. Install insulation of clean, dry piping.
B. Insulation shall be wrapped tightly on the piping with all circumferential joints and longitudinal
joints overlapped a minimum of 2" with facing to the outside to obtain specified R-value using
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
VLK Architects, 2009 22 0719 - 5 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
a maximum of 25% compression.
C. Provide vapor retarder at penetrations, joints, seams and damage to the facing with staples
and FSK foil tape. The facing shall be taped with a minimum 3" wide strip of reinforced foil
tape. Pressure -sensitive tape shall be a minimum 3" (76mm) wide and shall be applied with
moving pressure using an appropriate sealing tool. Staples shall be outward cinch and placed
6° (152mm) on center.
D. Mechanical / Electrical rooms and above ceilings are considered concealed spaces.
3.06 MISCELLANEOUS
A. Install materials after piping has been tested and approved.
B. Apply insulation on clean, dry surfaces only.
C. Apply weather protective finish on elastomeric insulation installed in non -conditioned spaces.
Provide a minimum of three coats.
3.09 INSULATION THICKNESS
THICKNESS
INSULATED UNIT Inches
Exposed Roof Drain Bodies and Horizontal Roof Drain Leaders 1
Exposed Roof Overflow Drain Bodies and Horizontal Drain Leaders 1
Domestic Cold Water/Make-Up Water Piping/Drinking Chilled Water 1
Horizontal Sanitary Drain Piping Which Receives Condensate 1
Domestic Hot Water Piping, 1-1/2" Pipe and Smaller 1
Domestic Hot Water Piping, 2" Pipe and Larger 1-1/2
END OF SECTION
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
VLK Architects, 2009 22 0719 - 6 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 221116
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING AND APPURTENANCES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install domestic hot and cold water piping.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Division 22 Plumbing
1. Valves, Strainers and Vents
2. Pipe and Pipe Fittings - General
3. Plumbing Piping Insulation
4. Plumbing Fixtures and Fixture Carriers
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPING AND FITTINGS
A. Below Slab on Grade Piping for Water Entries:
1. 2-1/2 inch and smaller, provide ASTM B88 Type K annealed tempered (soft)
seamless copper water tube. No joints below slab entries.
2. 3-inch, provide ASTM B88 Type K annealed tempered (soft) seamless copper water
tube. One joint allowed below slab entry using wrought copper, solder -joint pressure
fittings: ASME B16.22 with an approved brazing filler metal or pipe can be shop bent
for no joint installation by using a "bending" temper tubing.
3. 4-inch and larger, provide ductile iron pipe with mechanical joints, ANSI A21.6.
B. Below Grade Piping Outside Building (beyond 5'-0" of building): Provide PVC water main pipe
3 inch through 12 inch in diameter in conformance with AWWA C900. Provide fittings in
conformance with ASTM 2466. Furnish pipe with a minimum pressure rating of 150 lbs. per
square inch. Provide PVC pipe as manufactured by Johns -Manville, CertainTeed, Clow or
approved equal.
C. Below Slab on Grade Piping. Furnish ASTM B 88 and ANSI/NSF Standard 61 annealed
tempered (soft), Type K copper water tube. Run continuous with no joints under the floor
slab. Provide copper pipe corrosion protection as specified in this Section.
D. Above Slab Piping. Provide seamless ASTM B 88 and ANSI/NSF Standard 61 drawn
tempered (hard) Type L copper water tube with wrought copper and bronze solder joint, ANSI
B16.22. Solder material shall be 95-5 (lead free) (Tin -Antimony -Grade 95TA) ASTM B 32.
E. Unions. Provide 150 lb. standard unions with ground joint and bronze seat. Flange joints
larger than 2 inches. Provide dielectric isolating unions at junctions or connection between
metallic piping of dissimilar metal. Provide pipe threads with standard taper pipe threads
ANSI B2.1.
2.02 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS
A. Provide piston type hydraulic engineered/manufactured water hammer arrestors in cold and
hot water supply lines in chases or walls to each fixture branch or battery of fixtures serving
quick closing valves of electrical, pneumatic, spring loaded type, or quick hand closure valves
on fixture trim. Provide water hammer arrestors at the end of the branch line between the last
two fixtures served. Provide Precision Plumbing Products, Inc., or equal. Size units according
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING AND APPURTENANCES
VLK Architects, 2009 22 1116 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
to water hammer arrestor's Standard PDI WH-201; refer to schedule on drawings.
B. Install all water hammer arrestors so as to attain 100%effectiveness according to Plumbing
and Drainage Institute PDI-WH201 Table 5, 6 and 6-A for water hammer arrestors.
C. All water hammer arrestors shall be installed in a vertical position.
D. All water hammer arrestors shall be accessible and shall have access panels where required.
Arrestors located above ceilings in fixture drops will not be acceptable. Refer to sizing and
placement data as indicated in PDI Standard PDI-WH-201.
2.03 AIR CHAMBERS
A. Provide a minimum 18-inch long air chamber, of the same size and connecting pipe material
at each single lavatory, sink, drinking fountain or fixture that does not have a quick -closing
valve or electrical, pneumatic, spring loaded type, or flush valve. Air chambers to be used for
remote fixtures and not mixed with water hammer arrestors at group toilets.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 DRAINAGE
A. Install water piping systems with uniform horizontal grade of 1/8 inch per 10 foot, minimum, to
low points to provide complete system drainage. Where constant pitch cannot be maintained
for long runs, establish intermediate low points and rise to new level. Grade branches to drain
to mains or risers. Unless otherwise indicated, terminate low points of risers with drain valve
piped to nearest hub or floor drain.
3.02 STERILIZATION
A. Prior to starting work, verify system is complete, flushed and clean.
B. Inject chorine disinfectant in liquid, powder, tablet or gas form throughout the system to
obtain 50 to 80 Mg/L residual.
C. Bleed water from outlets to ensure distribution and test for disinfectant residual at minimum
20% of the outlets.
D. Retain disinfectant in system for 8 hours (minimum), 24 hours (maximum). During the
disinfection process, operate all valves and accessories.
E. If final disinfectant residual tests less than 25 Mg/L, repeat treatment.
F. Flush disinfectant from system until chemical and bacteriological tests prove water quality
equal to that of the service main.
G. Take samples no sooner than 24 hours after flushing from at least 10% of the outlets and
from the water entry.
1. Obtain a minimum of one water sample flushing from at least 10% of the outlets and
from the water entry.
2. Take samples from faucets located at highest point in the building, and farthest point
from the main water supply.
H. After final flushing, remove aerators, clean and replace.
I. Chemical and bacteriological tests shall be conducted by a state certified laboratory.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING AND APPURTENANCES
VLK Architects, 2009 22 1116 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
J. The firm performing the disinfection shall have chemical laboratory experience.
K. Provide a laboratory report to indicate the following information.
01. Name and address of the approved laboratory testing the samples.
02. Name and location of the project and date the samples were obtained.
03. Mg/L chlorine during retention.
04. Mg/L chlorine after flushing.
05. The coliform organism count. (An acceptable test shall show absence of coliform
organisms.)
L. If analysis does not satisfy the specified minimum requirements, repeat the disinfection
procedure.
M. Submit for approval to the Architect/Engineer a copy of the laboratory report and the
certification of performance. An approved copy of each document shall be inserted in the
Owner's manual.
3.03 UNDERGROUND WATER PIPING SYSTEM PROCEDURES
A. Lay sewer and water lines in separate trenches, separated by 10 foot of undisturbed or
compacted soil.
3.04 TESTING
A. Test under a cold water hydrostatic pressure of 1-1/2 times operating pressure (150 psig
minimum) and carefully check for leaks. Repair leaks and retest system until proven
watertight.
B. Test the domestic water piping system at 150psig hydrostatic pressure, maintained for 6
hours.
C. Use only potable water for the test.
D. Perform the test before fixtures, faucets, trim or final connections are made to equipment
E. If the system is tested in sections, the entire domestic water piping system shall be submitted
to a final test, employing the specified procedure.
F. Do not insulate or conceal piping systems until tests are satisfactorily complete.
G. If any leaks or other defects are observed, suspend the test and correct the condition at
once. Repeat testing until leaks are eliminated and the full test period is achieved.
H. The satisfactory completion of testing does not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for
ultimate proper and satisfactory operation of piping systems and their accessories.
3.05 COPPER PIPE CORROSION PROTECTION
A. Corrosion protect copper tube piping systems:
1. In the building slab.
2. Beneath the building slab.
3. Buried.
4. Route plasti-sleeve 0.006 thick material entire length of below slab on grade copper
tubing.
B. Cover copper tubing piping system with:
1. 'Tapecoat" TC Primer.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING AND APPURTENANCES
VLK Architects, 2009 22 1116 - 3 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
2. "Tapecoat" CT cold applied coating tape.
C. Install coating system as specified by the manufacturer.
D. Extend the corrosion protection 2 inches above concrete slab on grade.
3.06 TEST OF PIPE CORROSION PROTECTION SYSTEM
A. Test the pipe corrosion protection coating with an approved high voltage tester adjusted to
provide sufficient voltage to produce a spark through a pinhole in the coating (at least 15 kv
AC).
B. Make repairs to small holes in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
C. Retest the repairs using procedures listed above.
D. Furnish certificate of compliance with field testing in Owner's manual.
END OF SECTION
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING AND APPURTENANCES
VLK Architects, 2009 22 1116 - 4 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 22 1123
DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. General characteristics for pumps specified in Division 22 - Plumbing.
1.02 RELATED WORK
Requirements for pumps are specified in other sections of Division 22 - Plumbing, including the
following:
A. Division 22 Plumbing - Electrical Provisions of Plumbing Work.
1.03 PUMP SELECTION
A. Select pumps conservatively for scheduled conditions. Furnish pumps that have
reasonably high efficiencies, with peak efficiency at or near rated conditions. Select
pumps that will operate stably at 15' suction lift despite substantial reduction in head or
substantial increase in delivery.
B. If the pumps proposed are not considered suitable, submit manufacturer's data on other
pumps, for review.
C. Scheduled design flow, design head, pump efficiency, and motor horsepower are the
minimum acceptable.
D. The pump curve shall rise continuously from maximum flow to cut-off.
E. Shut-off head approximately 10 percent greater than design head, unless otherwise
indicated in pump schedules.
F. Pump brake horsepower shall not exceed the motor horsepower rating over the entire
operating range from shut-off to run -out.
G. Select the pump for operation at or near peak efficiency.
H. Cavitation -free at all points on the curve.
I. Impeller diameter shall not exceed 90 percent of the maximum published diameter.
1.04 PUMP SIZE AND TYPE
A. Provide motor -driven pumps of the type and speed scheduled. Select pumps that are not
overloaded throughout the entire range of pump operation. Provide pump connection
sizes as indicated.
B. The head capacities indicated in the schedules are listed for bidding purposes only.
Calculate the operating head at each pump; take into consideration the actual routing of
the various lines, pressure drops in heat exchangers and coils, exact lengths of pipe,
fittings, etc. Submit these calculations, together with copies of manufacturer's
performance curves, as shop drawings on each pump. Clearly mark the curves for each
pump to indicate the diameter of the impeller and the selection point.
DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS
VLK Architects, 2009 22 1123 -1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
1.05 CERTIFIED DATA
A. Submit factory certified pump curves showing pump performance characteristics with
pump and system operating points plotted. Curves shall include as a minimum, flow
(gallons per minute), head (feet of water), all available impeller diameters (inches),
efficiency (percent), net positive suction head required (feet of water), brake horsepower,
pump size and pump model. Show pump curves with system curve plotted.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 DOMESTIC HOT WATER CIRCULATOR
A. Pump construction:
1. Cast iron, designed for 125 psi working pressure
2. Bronze fitted
3. Grease lubricated ball bearings selected for an average life of 150,000 hours
4. Flexible coupled
5. Horizontal or vertical in -line
6. Flanged connections
B. Provide each pump with a mechanical seal. Use seal materials suitable for the pumped
liquid.
C. Paint entire unit with two coats of machinery enamel after completion of installation.
D. Pump motor:
1. NEMA Standard
2. Open drip proof
3. So sized with relation to the pump impeller that the brake horsepower
requirements will not overload the motor at any point on the pump curve.
4. Provide insertion thermostat (Aquastat) or (timer) to control operation of the
domestic hot water return pumps.
E. The schedule on the drawing sets forth the type of pump and GPM required.
1. The head capacities and horsepower are for bidding purposes only.
2. Make pump selection based on actual system calculations.
F. Acceptable manufacturers:
1.
Bell & Gossett
2.
Amtrol/Thrush
3.
Armstrong
4.
Aurora
5.
Taco
6.
Grundfos
2.02 DOMESTIC HOT WATER CIRCULATING PUMPS (SMALL) FRACTIONAL HORSEPOWER
A. Pump Construction:
1. Wet -rotor, in -line, single stage
2. Bronze housings with 1/a" and 3/a" sweat connections
3. Stainless steel housing with union threaded connections
4. Integrated check valve inside union fitting on a sweat pump housing
5. Built-in 5-foot, 115 volt AC line cord with NEMA 3 Prong male plug or line cord
DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS
VLK Architects, 2009 221123 -2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
6. Built-in timer
7. Aquastat thermostatic control
2.03 FLOW INDICATOR
A. Flow Indicator
1. Bronze Construction
2. Rotating wheel
3. Line Size
4. Double Window
5. Ernst Flow Industries Model EFI E-57-3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install the pumps in accordance with Manufacturer's "Installation, Start-up and Service
Instructions".
1. Provide access space around pumps for service.
2. Lubricate pumps prior to start-up.
3. Install hot water circulator horizontally, properly supported to wall, in an
accessible location for testing and maintenance at a height not to exceed 60"
above finished floor. Install line size Ernst bronze rotating wheel, flow indicator
with double window, downstream of circulator.
B. Provide a line size isolation valve and strainer on the pump suction and a line size silent
check valve and balancing valve on the pump discharge.
C. Support piping adjacent to the pump such that no weight is carried on the pump casing.
Decrease from pipe size with eccentric reducer on suction side and concentric increaser
on discharge side.
END OF SECTION
DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS
VLK Architects, 2009 22 1123 -3 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 221316
SOIL, WASTE AND SANITARY DRAIN PIPING, VENT PIPING AND APPURTENANCES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install piping in buildings and underground laterals to 5 foot outside of
building.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Site Work:
1. Sanitary Sewers
2. Excavation, Trenching and Backfilling for Utilities
B. Division 22 Plumbing
1. Pipe and Pipe Fittings
2. Plumbing Fixtures and Fixture Carriers
3. Drains, Cleanouts and Hydrants
4. Earthwork
1.03 REFERENCES
A. CISPI - Cast Iron Soil Pipe institute
B. ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. All No -Hub clamps must have 4 bands minimum. Sizes 5" through 10" shall have six
bands minimum.
1. No -Hub Clamps — Sanitary Waste:
a. Husky SD 4000
b. MiFab MI-XHUB
2. No -Hub Clamps - Vents
a. Husky SD — 2000
b. MiFab MI-XHUB
B. Provide only transition couplings for cast iron to PVC at slab penetrations.
C. Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings:
1. AB&I
2. Charlotte Pipe
3. Tyler
2.02 DRAIN PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Above Slab Pipe:
1. No -hub cast iron soil pipe and fittings shall conform to CISPI 301 and ASTM
A888.
2. Pipe shall conform to ASTM A74.
3. No -hub couplings shall conform to CISPI 310.
SOIL, WASTE AND SANITARY DRAIN PIPING, VENT PIPING AND APPURTENANCES
VLK Architects, 2009 22 1316 -1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
4. Rubber Gaskets for cast iron soil pipe and fittings shall conform to ASTM C564
B. Below Slab on Grade Piping:
1. Schedule 40 PVC plastic pipe and DWV fittings.
2. Solvent welded DWV joints shall conform to IAPMO Installation Standard IS-9.
3. Pipe and fittings shall conform to ASTM D 1784, ASTM D 1785, ASTM D 2665,
ASTM D 3311 and NPS Standard 14 & 61.
2.03 VENT PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Above Slab Pipe:
1. No -hub cast iron soil pipe and fittings shall conform to CISPI 301 and ASTM
A888.
2. Pipe shall conform to ASTM A74.
3. No -hub couplings shall conform to CISPI 310
4. Rubber gaskets for cast iron soil pipe and fittings shall conform to ASTM C564
B. Below Slab on Grade Piping:
1. Same as DRAIN PIPE AND FITTINGS listed above.
C. Above Slab Pipe.
1. Drainage -waste -vent copper pipe and fittings for waste stub -outs for all fixture
locations.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. All above and below slab soil, waste, sanitary drain 'and vent piping installation methods
shall be in accordance with Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute Standards.
B. Tracer wires shall be installed on all underground PVC sanitary sewer lines installed
outside the building slab.
3.02 GRADE
A. Give horizontal pipe grade of 1/4-inch per foot where possible, but not less than 1/8 inch
per foot unless otherwise shown.
3.03 DRAIN PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Offsets and Fittings.
1. Use reduction fittings to connect two pipes of different diameter.
2. Change directions by appropriate use of 45-degree wyes, long -sweep quarter -
bends, and sixth-, eights-, and sixteenth -bends. Sanitary tees can be used on
vertical stacks. Use long sweeps at the base of risers.
3. Provide a separate trap at each fixture, unless a trap is built into the fixture.
Provide a deep seal trap at each floor drain and hub drain. Place traps so that the
discharge from any fixture will pass through only one trap before reaching a
building drain.
B. Hub Drains. Install hub drains where indicated, with the top of the hub 1/2 above the
finished floor, unless otherwise indicated on the drawings.
C. Cleanouts. Install cleanouts the same size as the soil waste lines in which the cleanouts
are placed; however, no cleanout should be larger than 4 inches in diameter.
SOIL, WASTE AND SANITARY DRAIN PIPING, VENT PIPING AND APPURTENANCES
VLK Architects, 2009 22 1316 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
1. Where cleanouts occur in pipe chases, bring the cleanouts through the walls and
install covers. Where cleanouts occur in floor slabs, set flush. Reference drawing
schedule.
2. Provide cleanouts where soil lines change direction, every 50 foot on long runs, or
as shown on the drawings, at the end of each horizontal waste line, and at the
base of each riser (and at each increase in pipe size).
3. Cleanouts shall occur at the end of each battery of water closets, urinals,
lavatories and sinks. Cleanouts shall be installed so as to access the main
sanitary or soil line. Extend and offset above flood rim of water closet.
4. Double sanitary tees and double quarter bends do not allow for easy access to
main lines, therefore these types of fittings are not allowed.
D. Floor Drains. Locate floor drains 1/2-inch below finish floor elevation unless otherwise
shown.
3.04 VENT PIPING
A. Make vent connections to vent stacks with inverted wye fittings. Extend full-size vents
through the roof to at least 6 inches above the roof.
B. Flash the roof penetration with 6 lb. lead flashing approximately 24 inches square. Flange
the flashing to the lead sleeve. Extend the flashing up and around the vent pipe. Turn the
flashing down inside the pipe at least 2 inches to make a watertight joint. Flashing shall
comply with the roofing manufacturer's requirements. Reference the Architectural
Drawings for exact requirements.
C. Locate vent piping through roof a minimum horizontal distance of not less than 20 feet
from any air intake opening or supply fan.
3.04 TESTING
A. Below Slab on Grade and All Floors in Multi -Story Buildings:
1. Test pipe below slab on grade before backfilling and connecting to city sewers.
2. Maintain not less than 10 foot of hydrostatic head fora hour without a leak.
B. System Test. After the various sections of soil, waste and vent piping are installed, but
before fixtures are connected, test the system by:
1. Plugging outlets.
2. Filling vertical sections of multiple story buildings of not less than three floors at a
time with water. Provide wyes as required to facilitate plugging.
3. Test for 6 hours without any drop in the water level.
3.05 RODDING SEWERS
A. All sanitary soil and waste lines, both in the building and out, shall be rodded out and
flushed out after completion of construction and prior to finish floor being installed. All
work must be completed prior to substantial completion. All floor drains and cleanout
locations must be included in this work.
B. All sanitary soil and waste lines below building 3" and larger shall be internally videotaped
at time of substantial completion. All videotaping shall include on -screen date and time,
and include audio narration. All videotaping shall be provided by experienced individual in
videotaping piping systems. An Owner's Representative shall be present during video-
taping. Three copies of the videotape shall be delivered to the Owner for future records.
SOIL, WASTE AND SANITARY DRAIN PIPING, VENT PIPING AND APPURTENANCES
VLK Architects, 2009 22 1316 - 3 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
C. This work shall be done in the presence of the Owner's Representative, as part of the
Contract, to ensure all lines are clear, and any obstruction that may be discovered shall
be removed immediately. Rodding shall be accomplished by utilizing the proper rotary
head to clear sewer. Pipe sizes 8 inches and larger shall be hydro -flushed.
END OF SECTION
SOIL, WASTE AND SANITARY DRAIN PIPING, VENT PIPING AND APPURTENANCES
VLK Architects, 2009 22 1316 - 4 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 221413
ROOF DRAINAGE PIPING AND APPURTENANCES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install roof drains, drain pipes and accessories.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Division 22 Plumbing
1. Pipe and Pipe Fittings - General; for general piping requirements.
2. Drains and Cleanouts.
3. Plumbing Piping Insulation.
4. Earthwork
1.03 REFERENCES
A. CISPI — Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute
B. ASTM — American Society for Testing and Materials
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 STORM PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Above Ground Pipe. Provide service weight cast iron Bell and Spigot soil pipe and fittings
with compression type neoprene gaskets that conform to ASTM C-564. Pipe and fittings
shall meet the requirements of ASTM A 74.
B. Below Slab on Grade: Provide Schedule 40 PVC plastic pipe and DWV fittings with
solvent welded joints. Pipe and fittings shall conform to ASTM D 1784-82.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. All above and below slab storm piping installation methods shall be in accordance with the
Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute Standards.
B. Above ground installation in the horizontal position shall be supported at every hub (hub &
spigot or hubless type). Hangers to be placed within 18" of hub or coupling. For large
diameter fittings, 5 inches and larger shall bebraced to prevent horizontal movement.
Every branch opening or change of direction, braces, blocks, rodding or other suitable
method shall be used to prevent movement. Riser clamps to be used for each floor, not to
exceed 16-0".
3.02 GRADE
A. Give horizontal lines minimum grade of 1/8 inch per foot.
3.03 TESTING
A. Below Floors.
1. Test pipe below floors before backfilling and connecting to sewers.
ROOF DRAINAGE PIPING AND APPURTENANCES
VLK Architects, 2009 221413 -1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
2. Maintain not less than 10 foot of hydrostatic head for 1 hour without a leak.
B. System Test. After all the various sections of soil, waste and vent piping are installed, but
before fixtures are connected, test the system:
1. Plugging outlets.
2. Fill vertical sections with water. Provide wyes as required to facilitate plugging.
3. Test for 6 hours without any drop in the water level.
3.04 RODDING SEWERS
A. All storm sewer lines, both in the building and out, shall be rodded out and flushed out
after completion of construction and prior to finish floor being installed. All work must be
completed prior to substantial completion. All floor drains and cleanout locations must be
included in this work.
B. All storm lines below building 3" and larger shall be internally video-taped at time of
substantial completion. An Owner's Representative shall be present during video-taping.
Three copies of the video-tape shall be delivered to the Owner for future records.
C. This work shall be done in the presence of the Owner's Representative, as part of the
Contract, to ensure all lines are clear, and any obstruction that may be discovered shall
be removed immediately. Rodding shall be accomplished by utilizing a rotary cutter, which
shall be full size of pipe being cleaned for pipe sizes up to 6 inches. Pipe sizes 8 inches
and larger shall be hydro -flushed.
END OF SECTION
ROOF DRAINAGE PIPING AND APPURTENANCES
VLK Architects, 2009 22 1413 -2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 22 2000
PLUMBING PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS - GENERAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install pipe and pipe fittings for piping systems specified in Division 22 -
Plumbing.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Division 22 Plumbing.
1. Earthwork.
2. Insulation.
3. Other Piping Sections
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. The particular type of pipe and fittings for each system is specified in the individual sections.
2.02 JOINTS
A. Make screwed joints using machine cut USASI taper pipe threads. Apply a suitable joint
compound to the male threads only. Ream the pipe to full inside diameter after cutting. All -
thread nipples are not permitted.
B. Dissimilar Metals. Make joints between copper and steel pipe and equipment using insulating
unions or couplings such as Crane Company #1259; EPCO as manufactured by EPCO
Sales, Inc.; or an approved equal.
C. Solder joints.
1. Prior to making joints, cut pipe square and ream to full inside diameter. Clean
exterior of pipe and socket. Apply a thin coat of suitable fluxing compound to both
pipe and socket, and fit parts together immediately.
2. Heat assembled joint only as required to cause the solder to flow. Run the joint full,
slightly beaded on the outside, and wipe to remove excess solder.
3. Use silver brazing alloy or Sil-Fos on underground water entry piping. Use lead free
solder on all other copper piping.
D. Make welded joints as recommended by the standards of the American Welding Society.
Ensure complete penetration of deposited metal with base metal. Provide filler metal suitable
for use with base metal. Keep inside of fittings free from globules of weld metal. The use of
mitered joints is not approved.
E. Flanged.
1. Prior to installation of bolts, center and align flanged joints to prevent mechanical
pre -stressing of flanges, pipe or equipment. Align bolt holes to straddle the vertical,
horizontal or north -south centerline. Do not exceed 3/64" per foot inclination of the
flange face from true alignment.
2. Use flat -face companion flanges only with flat -faced fittings, valves or equipment.
Otherwise, use raised -face flanges.
3. Install gaskets suitable for the intended service and factory cut to proper dimensions.
Secure with manufacturers recommended gasket cement.
PLUMBING PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS — GENERAL
VLK Architects, 2009 22 2000 -1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
4. Use ANSI nuts and bolts, galvanized or black to match flange material. Use ANSI
316 stainless steel nuts and bolts underground. Tighten bolts progressively to
prevent unbalanced stress. Draw bolts tight to ensure proper seating of gaskets.
5. Use carbon steel flanges conforming to ANSI 1316.5 with pipe materials conforming
to ASTM A 105 Grade II or ASTM A 108, Grade II, ASTM A 53, Grade B. Use slip-on
type flanges on pipe only. Use welding neck type flanges on all fittings. Weld slip-on
flanges inside and outside.
6. Keep flange covers on equipment while fabricating piping. Remove when ready to
install in system.
F. No Hub. Hubless joints shall be made with wide body, neoprene sealing sleeve with stainless
steel sleeve, coupling joints conforming to ASTM C 1277.
1. 4" pipe size and smaller coupling housing minimum of 3" width; 24 gauge Series 300
stainless steel with hi -torque clamps; neoprene coupling gasket.
2. 6" through 10" pipe size coupling housing minimum of 4" width.
3. Tighten clamps to within manufacturer's tolerances using preset torque wrench.
G. Mechanical Joints. Provide a stuffing box type mechanical joint adapted to use gasket, cast
iron gland and bolts. Coat bolts with bitumastic enamel. Use joint parts similar in design to
one of the following:
1. Doublex Simplex Joint manufactured by the American Cast Iron Pipe Company,
Birmingham, Alabama.
2. U.S. joints manufactured by the United States Pipe and Foundry Company,
Burlington, New Jersey.
3. Boltite Joint manufactured by the McWane Cast Iron Pipe Company, Birmingham,
Alabama.
4. Flexlamp manufactured by the National Cast Iron Pipe Company, Birmingham,
Alabama.
H. Compression Joints for Cast Iron Water Pipe. Use Beltite, Tyton or Grip-Tite compression
joints. Install in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations for compression joints.
Provide adequate concrete thrust blocks at changes of direction, as recommended by the
manufacturer.
Compression Gasket System. Bell and spigot cast iron pipe 4" and smaller, use flax -base
lubricant, Tyler Ty -Seal Lubricant or Charlotte Regular Lubricant. 6" and larger use a
neoprene base lubricant, Charlotte Adhesive Lubricant.
Ring-Tite Joints: Furnish joints for installation according to manufacturer's recommendations.
Provide adequate concrete thrust blocks at changes in direction, as recommended by
manufacturer.
K. Ball Joints. Where shown, provide flexible ball joints, made of carbon steel. Ball joints must
have 150 of angular flexibility. Use welded or flanged ends, as required. Furnish with 11 N
gaskets.
2.03 UNIONS
A. Use 150 lb. standard (300 lb. WOG) malleable iron, ground joint unions with bronze seat.
Provide flanged joints on piping 2-1/2" and larger.
1. Where pipe material of different types join, use a dielectric union. Union shall be
threaded, solder or as required for its intended use.
2.04 BRANCH CONNECTIONS
A. Pipe 2" and Smaller. For threaded piping, use straight size reducing tee. When branch is
smaller than header, a nipple and reducing coupling or swagged nipple may be used.
PLUMBING PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS — GENERAL
VLK Architects, 2009 22 2000 -2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
B. 2-1/2" through 36". For welding piping, when branch size is the same as header size, use
welding tee. Use Weld-o-let when branch is smaller than header. For threaded branch
connections, use 3000 lb. full coupling or Thread-o-let welded to header.
2.05 GASKETS
A. High Temperature Piping. Provide 1/16" thick ring gaskets of aramid reinforced SBR such as
Garlock #3200 or 3400 or equal by Advanced Products and Systems.
B. Other Piping. Provide ring rubber gaskets, Garlock #7992 or equal by Advanced Products
and Systems. Use 1/8" thick cloth reinforced neoprene gaskets. For smaller than 6", use
1/16" thick gasket.
2.06 FLOORS AND CEILING PLATES
A. Provide chrome -plated floor and ceiling plates around pipes exposed to view when passing
through walls, floors, partitions, or ceilings in finished areas. Size plates to fit pipe or
insulation and lock in place.
2.07 DOMESTIC MANUFACTURE
A. All piping material, pipe and pipe fittings shall be manufactured in the United States of
America.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PIPE FABRICATION AND INSTALLATION
A. Make piping layout and installation in the most advantageous manner possible with respect to
headroom, valve access, opening and equipment clearance, and clearance for other work.
Give particular attention to piping in the vicinity of equipment. Preserve the required minimum
access clearances to various equipment parts, as recommended by the equipment
manufactured, for maintenance.
B. Cut all pipes to measurement determined at the site. After cutting pipe, remove burrs by
reaming. Bevel plain ends of ferrous pipe.
C. Install piping neatly, free from unnecessary traps and pockets. Work into place without
springing or forcing. Use fittings to make changes in direction. Field bending and mitering is
prohibited. Make connections to equipment using flanged joints, unions or couplings. Make
reducing connections with reducing fittings only.
D. Install piping without tapping out of the bottom of pipe.
3.02 WELD
A. Weld and fabricate piping in accordance with ANSI Standard B31.1, latest edition, Code for
Pressure Piping.
B. Align piping and equipment so that no part is offset more than 1/16". Set fittings and joints
square and true, and preserve alignment during welding operation. Use of alignment rods
inside pipe is prohibited.
C. Do not permit any weld to project within the pipe so as to restrict flows. Tack welds, if used,
must be of the same material and made by the same procedure as the completed weld.
PLUMBING PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS — GENERAL
VLK Architects, 2009 22 2000 -3 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
Otherwise, remove tack welds during welding operation.
D. Do not split, bend, flatten or otherwise damage piping before, during or after installation.
E. Remove dirt, scale and other foreign matter from inside piping before tying into existing piping
sections, fittings, valves or equipment.
F. Bevel ends of ferrous pipe.
3.03 OFFSETS AND FITTINGS
A. Due to the small scale of drawings, the indication of offsets and fittings is not possible.
Investigate the structural and finish conditions affecting the work and take steps required to
meet these conditions.
B. Install pipe close to wails, ceilings and columns so pipe will occupy minimum space. Provide
proper spacing for insulation coverings, removal of pipe, special clearances, and offsets and
fittings.
3.04 SECURING AND SUPPORTING
A. Support piping to maintain line and grade, with provision for expansion and contraction. Use
approved clevis-type or trapeze -type hangers connected to structural members of the
building. Single pipe runs to be supported by approved clevis type hangers. Multiple pipe runs
to be supported by approved trapeze type hangers. Do not support piping from other piping or
structural joist bridging.
B. Provide supports both sides of elbows for pipe 6" and larger. '
C. Support vertical risers with steel strap pipe clamps of approved design and size, supported at
each floor. Support piping assemblies in chases so they are rigid and self -supported before
the chase is closed. Provide structural support for piping penetrating chase walls to fixtures.
On chilled water pipe supports shall be outside the insulation.
D. Where insulation occurs, design hangers to protect insulation from damage. Pipe saddles
and insulation shields, where required, are specified in the appropriate insulation section and
are sized in accordance with the schedule on the drawings.
E. Install trapeze hangers, properly sized, to support the intended load without distortion.
F. Use electro-galvanized or zinc plated threaded rods, nuts, washers and hangers.
G. At outdoor locations, all supports, brackets and structural members shall be hot -dipped
galvanized.
H. Provide hangers within 3' of pipe length from all coil connections.
Support spacing: As recommended by the project structural engineer and support
manufacturer, but not more than listed below. Not to exceed spacing requirements of
smallest Dipe.
Copper & Steel
Cast Iron
Minimum Rod
Pipe Size
Max. Support
Spacing, Feet
Max. Support
Spacing, Feet
Diameter, Inches
1" & smaller
1-1/4" & 1-1/2"
2"
3"
4" & 5"
6
8
10
10
10
5
5
5
5
3/8
3/8
3/8
1 /2
5/8
PLUMBING PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS — GENERAL
VLK Architects, 2009 22 2000 -4 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
6" and above 10 15 13/4
3.05 PIPE SUPPORTS
A. Provide P1001 or P 5000 Unistrut metal framing members and appurtenances for pipe
support. Hot -dip galvanize members and appurtenances when located outside. Sagging of
pipes or supports is not acceptable.
3.06 ANCHORS
A. Provide anchors as required. Use pipe anchors consisting of heavy steel collars with lugs and
bolts for clamping to pipe and attaching anchor braces. Install anchor braces in the most
effective manner to secure desired results. Do not install supports, anchors or similar devices
where they will damage construction during installation or because of the weight or the
expansion of the pipe. When possible, install sleeves in structural concrete prior to pouring of
concrete.
3.07 PIPE SLEEVES
A. Sleeves through masonry and concrete construction:
1. Fabricate sleeves of Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe.
2. Size sleeve large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and to provide
continuous insulation.
B. Sleeves through gypsum wall construction.
1. Fabricate sleeves of 16 gauge galvanized sheet metal.
C. Sleeves through elevated slab construction.
1. Fabricate sleeves of Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe with welded center flange in
floor.
D. Extend each sleeve through the floor or wall. Cut the sleeve flush with each wall surface.
Sleeves through floors shall extend 2" above floor lines for waterproofing purposes. Slab on
grade floors shall not be sleeved except where penetrating waterproofing membrane or
insect control is required.
C. Caulk sleeves water and airtight. Seal annular space between pipes and sleeves with mastic
compound to make the space water and airtight.
D. For sleeves below grades in outside walls, provide Thundedine Link -Seal or Advance Product
and System Interlynx, with 316 stainless steel nuts and bolts, with cast iron pressure plate.
E. Provide chrome plated escutcheon plates on pipes passing through walls, floors or ceilings
exposed to view. At exterior walls, stainless steel sheet metal is to be used.
F. For sleeves through fire and smoke rated walls, seal with a UL through -penetration firestop,
rated to maintain the integrity of the time rated construction. Install in accordance with the
manufacturer's installation instructions. Comply with UL and NFPA standards for the
installation of firestops. Refer to Architectural drawings for all fire and smoke rated partitions,
walls, floors, etc.
3.08 ISOLATION VALVES
A. Provide piping systems with line size shutoff valves located at the risers, at main branch
connections to mains for equipment, to isolate central plant, and at other locations.
PLUMBING PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS — GENERAL
VLK Architects, 2009 22 2000 -5 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
3.09 DRAIN VALVES
A. Install drain valves at low points of water piping systems so that these systems can be
entirely drained. Install a line size drain valve for pipes smaller than 2" unless indicated
otherwise. For pipes 2-1/2" and larger, provide 2" drain valves unless indicated otherwise.
Drain valves shall be plugged when not in use and at completion.
3.10 CLEANING OF PIPING SYSTEMS
A. General cleaning of piping systems. Purge pipe of construction debris and contamination
before placing the systems in service. Provide and install temporary connections as required
to clean, purge and circulate.
B. Install temporary strainers at the inlet of pumps and other equipment as necessary where
permanent strainers are not indicated. Keep strainers in service until the equipment has been
tested, then remove either entire strainer or straining element only. Fit strainers with a line
size blow down ball valve and pipe to nearest drain. Blow down strainers, remove and clean
as frequently as necessary.
C. Phase One: Initial flushing of system. Remove loose dirt, mill scale, weld beads, rust and
other deleterious substances without damage to system components. Open valves, drains,
vents and strainers at all system levels during flushing procedures. Flush until "potable water
clear" and particles larger than 5 microns are removed.
D. Connect dead-end supply and return headers, even if not shown on the drawings, and
provide terminal drains in bottom of pipe end caps or blind flanges.
E. Dispose of water in approved manner.
F. Phase Two: Cleaning of Piping Systems. Remove, without chemical or mechanical damage
to any system component, adherent dirt (organic soil), oil, grease, (hydrocarbons), soldering
flux, mill varnish, piping compounds, rust (iron oxide) and other deleterious substances not
removed by initial flushing. Flush system and replace with clean water.
G. Phase Three: Final flushing and rinsing: Flush and rinse until "potable water clear" and
particles larger than 5 microns are removed. Operate valves to dislodge any debris in valve
body. Dispose of water in approved manner.
H. Submit status reports upon completion of each phase of work on each system.
3.11 PIPE MARKERS
A. Identify interior exposed piping and piping in accessible chases or plenums with Opti-Code
Brady Pressure Sensitive Adhesive Pipe Markers, consisting of pipe marker and direction of
flow arrow tape. Clean pipe prior to installation. Background colors of markers, arrows and
tape for each type of system shall be the same. Meet ANSI/OSHA standards and clearly
identify each system. Minimum 2-1/4-inch letters through 4-inch pipe and 4-inch letters for 5-
inch pipe and larger.
B. Identify exterior and mechanical room piping with Snap Around pipe markers through 4-inch
pipe and Strap Around markers 5-inch pipe and larger. Pipe markers consisting of pipe
marker and direction of flow arrow tape; background colors of markers, arrows and type for
each type of system shall be the same. Meet ANSI / OSHA standards and clearly identify
each system. Minimum 2-1/4-inch letters through 4-inch pipe and 4-inch letters for 5-inch
pipe and larger.
PLUMBING PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS — GENERAL
VLK Architects, 2009 22 2000 -6 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
C. Install identification in the following locations:
1. both sides of penetrations through walls, floors and ceilings.
2. Close to valves or flanges.
3. Intervals on straight pipe runs not to exceed 50 feet
4. Apply marker where view is obstructed.
D. Pipe markers shall meet or exceed the specifications of the ASME A13.1 "Scheme for
Identification of Piping Systems".
END OF SECTION
PLUMBING PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS — GENERAL
VLK Architects, 2009 22 2000 -7 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 22 3333
ELECTRIC WATER HEATER
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Electric water heaters for domestic water systems.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Division 22 Plumbing:
1. Domestic Water Piping.
2. Mechanical Piping Insulation.
3. Division 26 Electrical.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. A. O. Smith
B. Lochinvar
2.02 PRODUCTS
A. Provide electric water heaters with kilowatt, recovery ratings, and storage capacities as
scheduled on drawings.
B. Provide an ASME code construction tank designed for 150 psig working pressure. Furnish
glass -lined tank. Lining shall be corrosion -resistant.
C. Furnish factory -assembled, integral units equipped as follows:
1. Immersion thermostat.
2. High temperature limit switch (energy cutout).
3. Low-water cutoff.
4. Heavy duty UL rated for 100,000 cycles.
5. Temperature and pressure relief valve.
6. Anode rod.
D. Provide heavy-duty, medium watt density elements having nickel alloy sheathing and
prewired leads.
E. The entire vessel shall be enclosed in a round steel enclosure with baked enamel finish and
shall enclose the tank with R-16 foam insulation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Provide at each heater an automatic temperature and pressure relief valve with rating
matching or exceeding the energy input rate.
B. Pipe the discharge port to a point of visible and safe disposal required by codes and the
drawings.
ELECTRIC WATER HEATER
VLK Architects, 2009 22 3333 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
C. Provide temperature gauges.
D. Install water heater in galvanized drain pan piped to floor drain. Provide 3/a" outlet connection.
END OF SECTION
ELECTRIC WATER HEATER
VLK Architects, 2009 22 3333 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 22 3436
GAS -FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATER
(Small Commercial Gas Tank Type)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Gas -fired domestic hot water heating systems, including hot water heaters, storage tanks,
control valves, and pressure and temperature relief valves, as required.
1.02 RELATED ITEMS
A. Division 22 Plumbing
1. Domestic Water Piping.
2. Gas Piping
3. Flue Piping
4. Plumbing Piping Insulation.
1.03 CERTIFICATION
A. Provide water heater listed by the American Gas Association Laboratories as a circulating -
tank water heater and automatic storage water heater for outlet water temperature of 140°F.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 CAPACITY
A. Water heaters shall have the storage capacity and gallons per hour recovery at 100°F rise as
scheduled.
2.02 TANK
A. Construct the tank with a 125 psi ASME rating in accordance with the ASME Code, Section
IV. Tank lining shall be epoxy or glass.
2.03 BURNER
A. Multiple tubular constructed steel burner, mounted in a removable tray to permit field
replacement.
2.04 INSULATION
A. Insulate the water heater with factory applied fiberglass or foam and trim with a heavy -gauge,
enameled steel jacket.
2.05 CONTROLS
A. Furnish 120V controls for heaters of 100,000 BTUH and above. Provide controls designed to
shut off the gas to main burners and pilot burners in the event of gas or pilot failure.
B. Include a temperature limiting device with automatic reset, an ASME-rated pressure relief
valve, and a manual gas shut-off valve.
2.06 FLUE
A. Use water heater flues of indicated sizes and as specified in other sections. Extend flues
GAS -FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATER (Small Commercial Gas Tank Type)
VLK Architects, 2009 22 3436 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
from the diverter through the roof and terminate with a vacuum cap of approved design.
Include an approved flashing where the flue pierces the roof.
2.07 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Lochinvar
B. A. O. Smith
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install a line size valve in the cold water supply close to each heater and a line size plug cock
in the gas supply close to each heater.
B. Provide approved dielectric couplings at all cold water and hot water connections to storage
tank, and at pressure and temperature relief valve connection.
C. Install according to manufacturer's specifications and pipe as shown.
D. Install water heater in galvanized drain pan piped to floor drain. Provide 3/4" outlet connection.
END OF SECTION
GAS -FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATER (Small Commercial Gas Tank Type)
VLK Architects, 2009 22 3436 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 22 4000
PLUMBING FIXTURES AND FIXTURE CARRIERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install water closets, urinals, lavatories, electric drinking fountains, fixture carriers
and plumbing appurtenances.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Division 22 Plumbing
1. Drains, Hydrants and Cleanouts.
2. Domestic Water Piping.
3. Soil, Waste and Sanitary Drain Piping and Vent Piping.
1.03 JOB REQUIREMENTS
A. Furnish plumbing fixtures and trim as shown and specified. Provide faucets, fittings, supply
stops and similar devices of a single manufacturer. Furnish faucets and supply stops with
renewable seats. Porcelain to steel and enameled cast iron fixtures shall be acid resistant.
Wall hung fixtures shall be installed with a fixture carrier.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Plumbing Fixtures (Vitreous China):
1.
American Standard.
2.
Eljer.
3.
Kohler.
4.
Toto
5.
Zurn
B. Plumbing Faucets:
1.
American Standard.
2.
Chicago.
3.
T&S Brass.
4.
Zurn.
5.
Symmons
6.
Speakman
C. Supports and Carriers:
1.
Zurn.
2.
J.R. Smith.
3.
Josam.
4.
MIFAB
D. Flush Valves:
1. Sloan
2. Zurn
E. Supplies, Stops and Chrome Plated Tubular Brass:
1. McGuire
2. Kohler
3. Chicago
PLUMBING FIXTURES AND FIXTURE CARRIERS
VLK Architects, 2009 22 4000 -1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
4. Zurn
F. Water Closet Seats:
1. Beneke
2. Church
3. Olsonite
4. Bemis
5. Centoco
G. Electric Drinking Fountains:
1. Halsey Taylor
2. Elkay
3. Oasis
4. Haws
5. Acorn Aqua
H. Floor Drains:
1. Zurn
2. J.R. Smith
3. Josam
4. Sioux Chief
5. MIFAB
I. Cleanouts:
1. Zurn
2. J.R. Smith
3. Josam
4. MIFAB
5. Sioux Chief
J. Shower Valves
1. Chicago
2. Acorn
3. Symmons
4. Bradley
K. Stainless Steel Sinks:
1. Elkay
2. Just
3. Griffin
L. Mop Sinks:
1. Crane Fiat
2. Stern Williams
3. CECO
M. Roof Drains:
1. J.R. Smith
2. Josam
3. Zurn
4. MIFAB
N. Thermostatic Mixing Valves
1. Lawler
2. Symmons
3. Leonard
4. Powers
PLUMBING FIXTURES AND FIXTURE CARRIERS
VLK Architects, 2009 22 4000 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
O. Shock Arrestors:
1. Precision Products
2. Sioux Chief
P. Backflow Preventors
1. Wafts
2. Febco
3. Wilkins
Q. Hose Bibbs
1.
Chicago
2.
Josam
3.
Woodford
4.
Zurn
5.
J.R. Smith
5.
MIFAB
R. Wall
Hydrants
1.
Woodford
2.
MIFAB
3.
Zurn
4.
J.R. Smith
5.
Josam
2.02 REQUIREMENTS
A. Refer to the drawings for equipment to be supplied.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
B. Make rough -in and final connection of service to each fixture provided under this Section and
other Sections or Architectural or Plumbing Drawings.
C. Provide necessary stops, valves, traps, unions, vents, cold water, hot water, sanitary, etc. for
a complete installation.
D. Remove piping and services roughed -in incorrectly and install correctly, without cost.
E. Exposed piping, fittings and appurtenances shall be chrome -plated brass.
F. Coordinate with the Contractor for locations and service required for each plumbing fixture.
G. All floor drains and floor sinks shall have Pro -Set "Trap Guard" for trap seal protection.
H. All floor drains and floor sink locations are to be coordinated with all equipment. Locate drains
in mechanical equipment spaces to conform to drain locations of equipment furnished.
Coordinate drain location with food service equipment and Architectural Drawings.
I. All floor drains, floor sinks and cleanout covers are to be provided with stainless steel vandal
resistant screws.
END OF SECTION
PLUMBING FIXTURES AND FIXTURE CARRIERS
VLK Architects, 2009 22 4000 - 3 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 23 0100
HVAC OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Compilation product data and related information appropriate for Owner's operation and
maintenance of products furnished under Contract. Prepare operating and maintenance data
as specified.
B. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation and maintenance of equipment and systems.
C. Submit three copies of complete manual in final form.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Thirty (30) days after the Contractor has received the final scheduled identified submittals
bearing the Architect/Engineer's stamp of acceptance (including resubmittals), submit for
review one copy of the first draft of the Operating and Maintenance Manual. This copy shall
contain as a minimum:
1. Table of Contents for each element.
2. Contractor information.
3. All submittals, coordination drawings and product data, reviewed by the
Architect/Engineer; bearing the Architect/Engineer's stamp of acceptance. (When
submittals are returned from Engineer "Correct as Noted", corrected inserts shall be
included.)
4. All parts and maintenance manuals for items of equipment.
5. Warranties (without starting dates)
6. Certifications that have been completed. Submit forms and outlines of certifications
that have not been completed.
7. Operating and maintenance procedures.
8. Form of Owner's Training Program Syllabus (including times and dates).
9. Control operations/equipment wiring diagrams.
10. Schedule of filters for each item of equipment.
11. Schedule of belts for each item of equipment.
12. Other required operating and maintenance information that are complete.
B. Copy will be returned to the Contractor within 15 days with comments for corrections.
C. Submit three (3) completed manuals in final form to the Architect/Engineer one day after
substantial completion, and prior to Owner's instructions. include all specified data, test and
balance reports, drawings, dated warranties, certificates, reports, along with other materials
and information.
D. The Architect/Engineer will review the manuals for completeness within fifteen (15) days.
E. The Contractor shall be notified of any missing or omitted materials. The Manuals shall be
reworked by the Contractor, as required, in the office of the Architect / Engineer. The
manuals will not be retransmitted.
F. Two (2) complete Manuals will be delivered to the Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
HVAC OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
VLK Architects, 2009 23 0100 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
ABM Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
2.01 BINDERS
A. Commercial quality black three-ring binders with clear overlay plastic covers.
B. Minimum ring size: 1 ".
Maximum ring size: 3".
C. When multiple binders are used, correlate the data into related groupings.
D. Label contents on spine and face of binder with full size insert. Label under plastic cover.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A. Form for Manuals:
1. Prepare data in form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's personnel.
2. Format:
a. Size: 8-1/2" x 11".
b. Text: Manufacturer's printed data or neatly typewritten.
3. Drawings:
a. Provide reinforced punched binder tab and bind in text.
b. Fold larger drawings to size of text pages.
4. Provide flyleaf indexed tabs for each separate product or each piece of operating
equipment.
5. Cover: Identify each volume with typed or printed title "Operating and Maintenance
Instructions". List:
a. Title of Project
b. Identity of separate structures as applicable.
C. Identity of general subject matter covered in the manual.
6. Binder as specified.
B. Content of Manual:
1. Neatly typewritten Table of Contents for each volume arranged in systematic order
as outlined in the specifications.
a. Contractor, name of responsible principal, address and telephone number.
b. A list of each product required to be included, indexed to content of the
volume.
C. List with each product, name, address and telephone number of:
1) Subcontractor or installer.
2) Maintenance contractor as appropriate.
3) Identify area of responsibility of each.
4) Local source of supply for parts and replacement.
d. Identify each product by product name and other identifying symbols as set
forth in Contract Documents.
2. Product Data:
a. Include those sheets pertinent to the specific product.
b. Annotate each sheet to:
1) Identify specific product or part installed.
2) Identify data applicable to installation.
3) Delete references to inapplicable information. (All options not
supplied with equipment shall be marked out indicated in some
manner.
3. Drawings:
a. Supplement product data with drawings as necessary to illustrate:
1) Relations of component parts of equipment and systems.
HVAC OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
VLK Architects, 2009 23 0100 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
AW Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
2) Control and flow diagrams.
b. Coordinate drawings with information in Project Record Documents to
assure correct illustration of completed installation.
C. Do not use Project Record Documents as maintenance drawings.
4. Written text, as required to supplement product data for the particular installation:
a. Organize in consistent format under separate headings for different
procedures.
b. Provide logical sequence of instructions for each procedure.
5. Copy of each warranty, bond and service contract issued.
a. Provide information sheet for Owner's personnel, giving:
1) Proper procedures in event of failure.
2) Instances that might affect validity of warranties or bonds.
6. Shop drawings, coordination drawings and product data as specified.
C. Sections for Equipment and Systems.
1. Content for each unit of equipment and system as appropriate:
a. Description of unit and component parts.
1) Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions.
2) Performance curves, engineering data and tests.
3) Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable
parts.
b. Operating procedures:
1) Start up, break-in, routine and normal operating instructions.
2) Regulation, control, stopping, shut down and emergency
instructions.
3) Summer and winter operating instructions.
4) Special operating instructions.
C. Maintenance procedures:
1) Routine operations
2) Guide to trouble -shooting.
3) Disassembly, repair and reassembly.
4) Alignment, adjusting and checking.
5) Routine service based on operating hours.
d. Servicing and lubrication schedule. List of lubricants required.
e. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions.
f. Description of sequence of operation by control manufacturer.
g. Original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings and
diagrams required for maintenance.
1) Predicted life of part subject to wear.
2) Items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.
h. As installed control diagrams by controls manufacturer.
i. Complete equipment internal wiring diagrams.
j. Schedule of filters for each air handling system.
k. Schedule of belts for each item of equipment.
1. Each Contractor's coordination drawings.
M. As installed color coded piping diagrams.
n. Charts of valve tag number, with location and function of each valve.
o. List of original manufacturer's spare parts and recommended quantities to
be maintained in storage.
p. Other data as required under pertinent sections of the specifications.
2. Prepare and include additional data when the need for such data becomes apparent
during instruction of Owner's personnel.
3. Additional requirements for operating and maintenance data as outlined in respective
sections of specifications.
4. Provide complete information for products specified in Division 23.
5. Provide certificates of compliance as specified in each related section.
HVAC OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
VLK Architects, 2009 23 0100 - 3 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
6. Provide start up reports as specified in each related section.
7. Provide signed receipts for spare parts and material.
8. Provide training report and certificates.
END OF SECTION
HVAC OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
VLK Architects, 2009 23 0100 - 4 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 23 0500
MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Except as modified in this Section, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions,
applicable provisions of the General Requirements, and other provisions and requirements of
the contract documents apply to work of Division 23 Mechanical.
B. Applicable provisions of this section apply to all sections of Division 23, Mechanical.
1.02 CODE REQUIREMENTS, AND FEES
A. Perform work in accordance with applicable statutes, ordinances, codes and regulations of
governmental authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Mechanical work shall comply with applicable inspection services:
1. Underwriters Laboratories
2. National Fire Protection Association
3. State Health Department
4. Local Municipal Building Inspection Department
5. Texas Department of Licensing & Regulations (ADA)
C. Resolve any code violations discovered in contract documents with the Engineer prior to
award of the contract. After Contract award, any correction or additions necessary for
compliance with applicable codes shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner.
D. This Contractor shall be responsible for being aware of and complying with asbestos
NESHAP regulations, as well as all other applicable codes, laws and regulations.
E. Obtain all permits required.
1.03 CONTRACTOR'S QUALIFICATIONS
A. An approved contractor for the work under this division shall be:
1. A specialist in this field and have the personnel, experience, training, skill, and
organization to provide a practical working system
2. Able to furnish evidence of having contracted for and installed not less than 3
systems of comparable size and type that have served their Owners satisfactorily for
not less than 3 years
1.04 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS AND STANDARDS
A. Materials which are specified by reference to Federal Specifications; ASTM, ASME, ANSI, or
AWWA Specifications; Federal Standards; or other standard specifications must comply with
latest editions, revisions, amendments or supplements in effect on date bids are received.
Requirements in reference specifications and standards are minimum for all equipment,
material, and work. In instances where specified capacities, size, or other features of
equipment, devices, or materials exceed these minimums, meet specified capacities.
1.05 CONTRACT DRAWINGS
A. Contract drawings are diagrammatic only and do not give fully dimensioned locations of
various elements of work. Determine exact locations from field measurements.
MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
VLK Architects, 2009 23 0500 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
1.06 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Maintain at the job site a separate set of white prints (blue line or black line) of the contract
drawings for the sole purpose of recording the "as -built" changes and diagrams of those
portions of work in which actual construction is at variance with the contract drawings. Mark
the drawings with a colored pencil. Prepare, as the work progresses and upon completion of
work, reproducible drawings clearly indicating locations of various lines, valves, ductwork,
traps, equipment, and other pertinent items, as installed. Include flow -line elevation of sewer
lines. Record existing and new underground and under slab piping with dimensioned
locations and elevations of such piping.
B. At the conclusion of project, obtain without cost to the Owner, erasable mylars of the original
drawings and transfer as -built changes to these. Prior to transmittal of corrected drawings,
obtain 3 sets of blue -line prints of each drawing, regardless of whether corrections were
necessary and include in the transmittal (2 sets are for the Owner's use and one set is for the
Architect/Engineer's records). Delivery of these as -built prints and reproducibles is a condition
of final acceptance. Provide record drawings on one set each (reproducible Dayrex mylar film
positives) and AutoCad 2000 files on disk (CD Rom).
C. As -Built drawings should indicate the following information as a minimum:
1. Indicate all addendum changes to documents.
2. Remove Engineer's seal, name, address and logo from drawings.
3. Mark documents AS -BUILT DRAWINGS.
4. Clearly indicate: DOCUMENT PRODUCED BY
5. Indicate all changes to construction during construction. Indicate actual routing of all
piping, ductwork, etc. that were deviated from construction drawings.
6. Indicate exact location of all underground mechanical piping and elevation.
7. Indicate exact location of all underground electrical raceways and elevations.
8. Correct schedules to reflect (actual) equipment furnished and manufacturer.
9. Location and size of all ductwork and mechanical piping above ceiling including
exact location of isolation of domestic and mechanical valves.
10. Exact location of all electrical equipment in and outside of the building.
11. Exact location of all roof mounted equipment, wall, roof and floor penetrations.
12.
Cloud all changes.
1.07 SPACE REQUIREMENTS
A. Consider space limitations imposed by contiguous work in selection and location of
equipment and material. Do not provide equipment or material that is not suitable in this
respect.
1.08 RELATION WITH OTHER TRADES
A. Carefully study all matters and conditions concerning the project. Submit notification of
conflict in ample time to prevent unwarranted changes in any work. Review other Divisions of
these specifications to determine their requirements.
B. Because of the complicated relationship of this work to the total project, conscientiously study
the relation and cooperate as necessary to accomplish the full intent of the documents.
C. Provide sleeves and inserts in forms as required for the work. Stub up and protect open ends
of pipe before any concrete is placed. Furnish sizes of required equipment pads. Furnish and
locate bolts and fittings required to be cast in them.
D. Locate and size openings required for installation of work specified in this Division in
sufficient time to prevent delay in the work.
MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
VLK Architects, 2009 23 0500 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
E. Refer to other Divisions of the specifications for the scope of required connections to
equipment furnished under that Division. Determine from the Contractor for the various
trades, the Owner, and by direction from the Architect/Engineer, the exact location of all
items.
1.09 CONCEALED AND EXPOSED WORK
A. When the word "concealed" is used in connection with insulating, painting, piping, ducts and
the like, the work is understood to mean hidden from sight as in chases, furred spaces or
above ceilings. "Exposed" is understood to mean open to view.
1.10 GUARANTEE
A. Guarantee work for 1 year from the date of substantial completion of the project. During that
period make good any faults or imperfections that may arise due to defects or omissions in
material, equipment or workmanship. At the Owner's option, replacement of failed parts or
equipment shall be provided.
1.11 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
A. Furnish new and unused materials and equipment meeting the requirements of the
paragraph specifying acceptable manufacturers. Where two or more units of the same type
or class of equipment are required, provide units of a single manufacturer.
1.12 NOISE AND VIBRATION
A. Select equipment to operate with minimum noise and vibration. If objectionable noise or
Vibration is produced or transmitted to or through the building structure by equipment, piping,
ducts or other parts of work, rectify such conditions at no additional cost. If the item of
equipment is judged to produce objectionable noise or vibration, demonstrate at no additional
cost that equipment performs within designated limits on a vibration chart.
1.13 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers names and catalog number specified under sections of Division 23 are used
to establish standards of design, performance, quality and serviceability and not to limit
competition. Equipment of similar design, equal to that specified, manufactured by a named
manufacturer will be acceptable on approval. A request for prior approval of equipment not
listed must be submitted ten (10) days before bid due date. Submit complete design and
performance data to the Engineer.
1.14 OPERATING TESTS
A. After all mechanical systems have been completed and put into operation, subject each
system to an operating test under design conditions to ensure proper sequencing and
operation throughout the range of operation. Tests shall be made in the presence of the
Architect/Engineer. Make adjustments as required to ensure proper functioning of all
systems. Special tests on individual systems are specified under individual sections. Submit 3
copies of all certifications and _test reports adequately in advance of completion of the work to
allow for remedial action as required to correct deficiencies discovered in equipment and
systems.
1.15 WARRANTIES
A. Submit 3 copies of all warranties and guarantees for systems, equipment, devices and
materials. These shall be included in the Operating and Maintenance Manuals.
MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
VLK Architects, 2009 23 0500 - 3 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
1.16 BUILDING CONSTRUCTION
A. It shall be the responsibility of each sub -contractor to consult the Architectural and
Engineering drawings, details, and specifications and thoroughly familiarize himself with the
project and all job related requirements. Each sub -contractor shall cooperate with the
General Contractor to verify that all piping and other items are placed in the walls, furred
spaces, chases, etc., so there will be no delays in the job.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS — NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 OPENINGS
A. Framed, cast or masonry openings for ductwork, equipment or piping are specified under
other divisions. Drawings and layout work for exact size and location of all openings are
included under this division.
3.02 AIR FILTERS AND PIPE STRAINERS
A. Immediately prior to substantial completion of the project, inspect, clean and service air filters
and strainers. Replace air filters.
3.03 LUBRICATION, REFRIGERANT AND OIL
A. Provide a complete charge of correct lubricant for each item of equipment requiring
lubrication.
B. Provide a complete and working charge of proper refrigerant, free of contaminants, into each
refrigerant system. After each system has been in operation long enough to ensure
completely balanced conditions, check the charge and modify for proper operation as
required.
C. Provide a complete charge of special oil for refrigeration use, suitable for operation with
refrigerant, in each system.
3.04 HOUSEKEEPING PADS
A. Provide equipment housekeeping pads under all floor mounted and ground mounted HVAC
and plumbing equipment, and as shown on the drawings.
B. Concrete work as specified
C. Concrete pads:
1. 4" thick unless otherwise indicated on the drawings.
2. Chamfer strips at edges and corner of forms.
3. Smooth steel trowel finish.
3.05 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL
A. Prior to final inspection, conduct an on -site training program to instruct the Owner's operating
personnel in the operation and maintenance of the mechanical systems.
1. Provide the training during the Owner's regular working day.
2. The Instructors shall each be experienced in their phase of operation and
maintenance of building mechanical systems and with the project.
MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
VLK Architects, 2009 23 0500 - 4 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
B. Time to be allocated for instructions.
1. Minimum of 24 hours dedicated instructor time.
2. 8 hours on each of 3 days.
C. Before proceeding with the on -site training program, submit the program syllabus; proposed
time and dates; and other pertinent information for review and approval.
1. One copy to the Owner.
2. One copy to the Architect/Engineer.
D. The Owner will provide a list of personnel to receive instructions, and will coordinate their
attendance at the agreed upon times.
E. Use the operation and maintenance manuals as the basis of instruction. Review contents of
manual with personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance.
F. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble -shooting, servicing,
maintenance, and shut down of each item of equipment.
G. Demonstrate equipment functions (both individually and as part of the total integrated
system).
H. Prepare and insert additional data in the operating and maintenance manuals when the need
for additional data becomes apparent during instructions.
I. Submit a report within one week after completion of the training program that instructions
have been satisfactorily completed. Give time and date of each demonstration and hours
devoted to the demonstration, with a list of people present.
J. At the conclusion of the on -site training program, have the person designated by the Owner
sign a certificate to certify that he/she has a proper understanding of the system, that the
demonstrations and instructions have been satisfactorily completed, and the scope and
content of the operating and maintenance manuals used for the training program are
satisfactory.
K. Provide a copy of the report and the certificate in an appropriately tabbed section of each
Operating and Maintenance Manual.
3.06 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
A. Provide a laminated engraved plastic nameplate on each piece of equipment and starter.
1. Designation approved by Architect/Engineer.
2. Equipment includes, but is not limited to, air handling units, fan coil units, variable
volume boxes, fans, pumps, boilers and chillers.
3. Submit schedule of equipment to be included and designations.
B. Provide nameplates with 1/2" high letters and fastened with epoxy or screws.
3.07 OBSTRUCTIONS
A. The drawings indicate certain information pertaining to surface and subsurface obstructions
which has been taken from available drawings. Such information is not guaranteed, however,
as to accuracy of location or complete information.
1. Before any cutting or trenching operations are begun, verify with Owner's
representative, utility companies, municipalities, and other interested parties that all
available information has been provided.
MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
VLK Architects, 2009 23 0500 - 5 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
2. Should obstruction be encountered, whether shown or not, alter routing of new work,
reroute existing lines, remove obstruction where permitted, or otherwise perform
whatever work is necessary to satisfy the purpose of the new work and leave existing
services and structures in a satisfactory and serviceable condition.
B. Assume total responsibility for and repair any damage to existing utilities or construction,
whether or not such existing facilities are shown.
3.08 PROTECTION
A. Protect work, equipment, fixtures, and materials. At work completion, work must be clean and
in original manufacturer's condition.
3.09 INDOOR AIR QUALITY
A. All equipment and ductwork shall be installed to allow sufficient space for testing,
maintenance, and commissioning functions. Access doors or panels shall be installed in
ventilation equipment, ductwork, and plenum enclosures for inspection and cleaning of
outdoor air intakes, mixing plenums, up and downstream of coils, filters, drain pans and fans.
B. Practice source control and eliminate potential contaminants in material selection, installation,
and maintenance.
C. Provide installation and disposal instructions for all materials and chemicals that are potential
contaminants.
D. Obtain and conform to the requirements of the Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDSs) in the
use of materials.
E. Utilize manufacturer's recommendations and provide installation instructions for all
chemicals, compounds, and potential contaminants including pre -installation degassing if
required.
F. Ventilate completed building prior to final completion using no less than design outside air for
at least 48 hours before occupancy.
G. Make provisions for controls to prevent the entry of air contaminants into the HVAC air
distribution system.
H. Steps shall be taken to ensure that the HVAC system continues to function effectively and
are not damaged or contaminated during construction activities.
END OF SECTION
MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
VLK Architects, 2009 23 0500 - 6 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 23 0510
HVAC CONTRACT QUALITY CONTROL
PART 1-GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Contract quality control including workmanship, manufacturer's instructions, mock-ups and
demonstrations.
1.02 QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAM
A. Maintain quality control over supervision, subcontractors, suppliers, manufacturers, products,
services, site conditions and workmanship to produce work in accordance with contract
documents.
1.03 WORKMANSHIP
A. Comply with industry standards except when more restrictive tolerances or specified
requirements indicate more rigid standards or more precise workmanship.
B. Perform work by persons qualified to produce workmanship of specified quality.
C. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand
stresses, vibration, and racking. Under no conditions shall material or equipment be
suspended from structural bridging.
D. Provide finishes to match approved samples. All exposed finishes shall be approved by the
Architect. Submit color samples as required.
1.04 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS
A. Comply with instructions in full detail, including each step in sequence.
B. Should instruction conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect I
Engineer before proceeding.
1.05 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATES
A. When required in individual Specification Sections, submit manufacturer's certificate in
duplicate, certifying that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
1.06 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES
A. When required in individual Specification Sections, manufacturer shall provide qualified
personnel to observe:
1. Field conditions.
2. Condition of installation.
3. Quality of workmanship.
4. Start-up of equipment.
5. Testing, adjusting, and balancing of equipment.
B. Representative shall make written report of observations and recommendations to Architect /
Engineer.
HVAC CONTRACT QUALITY CONTROL
VLK Architects, 2009 23 0510 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
1.07 MOCK-UPS
A. Assemble and erect the specified equipment and products complete, with specified
anchorage and support devices, seals and finishes.
B. Do not proceed with any work involving a mock-up, until the related mock-up has been
approved in writing.
C. Acceptable mock-ups in place shall be retained in the completed work.
D. Perform tests and submit results as specified.
1.08 SCHEDULING OF MOCK-UPS
A. Schedule demonstration and observation of mock-ups, in phases, with Architect / Engineer.
1. Rough -in.
2. Finish with all appurtenances in place.
3. Insulation installed.
4. Demonstrations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 REFERENCE APPLICABLE SPECIFICATION SECTIONS.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PROTECTION OF EQUIPMENT
A. Do not deliver equipment to the project site until progress of construction has reached the
stage where equipment is actually needed or until building is closed in enough to protect the
equipment from weather. Equipment allowed to stand in the weather will be rejected, and the
Contractor is obligated to furnish new equipment of a like kind at no additional cost to the
Owner.
B. Adequately protect equipment from damage after delivery to the project. Cover with heavy
tarpaulins, drop cloths or other protective coverings as required to protect from plaster, paint,
mortar and/or dirt. Do not cover with plastic materials and trap condensate and cause
corrosion.
END OF SECTION
HVAC CONTRACT QUALITY CONTROL
VLK Architects, 2009 23 0510 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 23 0511
MECHANICAL ALTERATIONS PROJECT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Inspect and service existing equipment and materials that are to remain or to be reused.
B. Disposal of equipment, materials, or housekeeping pads to be abandoned. Prior to
disposal, the Contractor shall verify with the Owner what is to be salvaged by the Owner
and what is to become the property of the Contractor.
C. Handling of equipment and materials to be removed.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Coordination with the Owner prior to the disconnection or shutdown of existing equipment,
or to the modification of existing operational systems.
1.03 CONTRACT DRAWINGS
A. There is the possibility that existing conditions and devices are affected by the work
indicated on the drawings and called for in the specifications (project manual) that do not
appear on the drawings. It is the Contractor's responsibility to visit the site and determine
all of the existing conditions and to consider these existing conditions when making and
presenting a proposal, to have a complete proposal.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Material used to upgrade and repair existing equipment shall conform to that specified.
B. Material used to upgrade and repair existing equipment shall not void existing warranties
or listings of the equipment to be upgraded or repaired.
C. Material used to upgrade and repair existing equipment shall be new and shall be of the
same manufacturer of the existing equipment, shall be acquired through the existing
original equipment manufacturer's approved distribution channels, shall have
manufacturer's warranties for the new material being used, and shall be listed for the use
intended.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Existing materials and equipment indicated on the drawings or in the specifications to be
reused shall be inspected for damaged or missing parts. Contractor shall notify the
Architect/Engineer, in writing, accordingly.
B. if using materials specified or shown on the drawing voids or diminishes the warranty or
operation of remaining equipment or systems, the Contractor shall notify the
Architect(Engineer, in writing.
MECHANICAL ALTERATIONS PROJECT PROCEDURES
VLK Architects, 2009 23 0511 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
C. Verify field measurements, above and underground piping connections and flows.
D. Demolition Drawings are based on casual field observation, and when available, existing
record documents. Report discrepancies to Architect before disturbing existing
installation, and immediately after such discrepancies are discovered.
E. Field verify existing conditions and actual utility uses prior to final connections. Existing
drawings may not have been available for all required information. Use pipe inspection
camera system to field verify existing sanitary / grease waste connections. Verify actual
HVAC supply and return piping connections. Verify flow direction and depth prior to
connection to existing plumbing systems.
3.02 APPLICATION
A. Existing materials and equipment indicated on the drawings or in the specifications to be
reused shall be cleaned and reconditioned, including cleaning of piping systems and
HVAC coils prior to installation and reuse.
B. Material and equipment removed that is not to be salvaged for Owner's use or for reuse
on the project shall become the property of the Contractor and be removed from the site.
C. Material or equipment salvaged for Owner's use shall be carefully handled and stored
where directed by the Owner or the Architect / Engineer. Relocate material and / or
equipment as directed by Owner.
D. Materials and equipment not indicated to be removed or abandoned shall be reconnected
to the new system.
E. Materials, equipment and housekeeping pads not to be reused or reconnected shall be
removed for Owner's review and salvaged by Contractor.
F. Prior to start of construction, Contractor shall walk areas to be renovated with Owner to
identify and document items to be salvaged for Owner's use.
G. Clean and repair existing materials and equipment that remain or are to be reused.
H. Contractor shall utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations,
for maintenance, and for repairs.
3.03 SEQUENCE AND SCHEDULE
A. Coordinate utility service outages with Utility Company, Architect and Owner.
B. Provide additional or temporary valves, piping, ductwork and connections to maintain
existing systems in service during construction.
C. Existing HVAC and Plumbing Service: Refer to drawings for work in remodeled areas.
Where facilities in these areas are to remain in service, any related work to keep the
facilities in operation is specified in this Division. Maintain existing system in service until
new system is complete and ready for service. Disable system only to make switchovers
and connections. Obtain permission from Owner at least 48 hours before partially or
completely disabling system. Minimize outage duration. Make temporary connections to
maintain service in areas adjacent to work area. Maintain acceptable temperature and
humidity control within existing building during renovation activities.
D. Remove and replace existing Mechanical systems and appurtenances as occasioned by
MECHANICAL ALTERATIONS PROJECT PROCEDURES
VLK Architects, 2009 230511 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
new or remodeled construction. Re-establish service that may be interrupted by
remodeled construction.
E. Refer to other drawings series for work in remodeled areas. Where facilities in these
areas are required to remain in service, any related work required to keep these facilities
in operation is specified in this Division.
F. Remove and replace existing piping, grilles, boxes and ductwork coincident with the
construction.
G. Remove or relocate existing piping, grilles, ductwork or housekeeping pads as
occasioned by new or remodeled construction. Cap unused HVAC or domestic piping and
duct beyond the new finish line.
H. Relocate all HVAC and or domestic piping, grilles, boxes and ductwork as required to
accommodate new work requiring precedence.
Remove concrete housekeeping pad where materials or equipment have been removed.
J. Remove all known utilities, which do not provide service to the buildings that remain.
K. Remove existing plumbing or mechanical vent penetrations through roof not to be reused.
3.04 DEMOLITION AND EXTENSION OF EXISTING MECHANICAL WORK
A. The Contractor shall modify, remove, and/or relocate all materials and items so indicated
on the drawings or required by the installation of new facilities. All removals and/or
dismantling shall be conducted in a manner as to produce maximum salvage. Salvage
materials shall remain the property of the Owner, and shall be delivered to such
destination as directed by the Owner's representative unless they are not wanted, then it
will be the responsibility of this Contractor to remove such items and properly dispose of
them. Materials and/or items scheduled for relocation and which are damaged during
dismantling or reassembly operations shall be repaired and restored to good operative
condition. The Contractor may, at his discretion, and upon approval of the Owner's
representative substitute new materials and/or items of like design and quality in lieu of
materials and/or items to be relocated.
B. All items to be relocated shall be carefully removed in reverse to original assembly or
placement and protected until relocated. The Contractor shall clean, repair, and provide
all new materials, fittings, and appurtenances required to complete the relocations and to
restore them to good operative order. All relocations shall be performed by workmen
skilled in the work and in accordance with standard practice of the trades involved.
C. When items scheduled for relocation and/or reuse are found to be in damaged condition
before work has been started on dismantling, the Contractor shall call the attention of the
Owner's representative to such items and receive further instructions before removal.
Items damaged in repositioning operations are the contractor's responsibility and shall be
repaired or replaced by the contractor as approved by the owner's representative, at no
additional cost to the Owner.
D. HVAC, Plumbing, piping, ductwork and appurtenances to be removed, salvaged, or
relocated shall be removed to points indicated on the drawings, specified, or acceptable
to the Owner's representative. Piping and ductwork not scheduled for reuse shall be
removed to the points at which reuse is to be continued or service is to remain. Such
services shall be sealed, capped, or otherwise tied -off or disconnected in a safe manner
acceptable to the Construction Inspector. All disconnections or connections into the
MECHANICAL ALTERATIONS PROJECT PROCEDURES
VLK Architects, 2009 23 0511 - 3 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
existing facilities shall be done in such a manner as to result in minimum interruption of
services to adjacent occupied areas. Services to existing areas or facilities that must
remain in operation during the construction period shall not be interrupted without prior
specific approval of the Owner's representative hereinbefore specified.
E. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during demolition and extension
work.
F. Maintain access to mechanical installations that remain active. Modify installation or
provide access panel as appropriate.
G. Extend existing installations using materials and methods compatible with existing
mechanical installations, or as specified.
H. Existing mechanical piping and devices found to need additional hangers installed should
be added at no additional cost to the Owner.
3.05 PROTECTION OF THE WORK
A. Provide adequate temporary support and auxiliary structure as necessary to ensure
structural value or integrity of affected portion of work.
B. Provide devices and methods to protect other portions of work from damage.
C. Execute fitting and adjustment of products to provide a finished installation to comply with
specified products, functions, tolerances and finishes.
3.06 IDENTIFICATION OF EQUIPMENT IN RENOVATED AREAS
A. Identification of Equipment: Provide new identification of all existing equipment to be
reused and located within the renovated areas. Do not include the description "existing".
Provide new nameplates for all existing mechanical equipment in renovated areas as
specified in Section 23 05 00 Mechanical General Provisions.
3.07 REFRIGERANT DISPOSAL
A. Contractor shall dispose of refrigerant from all DX equipment including refrigerant piping
per OSHA, EPA, Federal, State and Local Codes.
END OF SECTION
MECHANICAL ALTERATIONS PROJECT PROCEDURES
VLK Architects, 2009 23 0511 - 4 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 23 0512
SHOP DRAWINGS, COORDINATION DRAWINGS & PRODUCT DATA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Prepare submittals as required by these specifications as outlined below.
B. The term submittal, as used herein, refers to all:
1. Shop Drawings
2. Coordination Drawings
3. Product data
C. Submittals shall be prepared and produced for:
1. Distribution as specified
2. Inclusion in the Operating and Maintenance Manual, as specified, in the related
section
1.02 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Present drawings in a clear and thorough manner. Identify details by reference to sheet and
detail, schedule, or room numbers shown on Contract Drawings.
B. Show all dimensions of each item of equipment on a single composite Shop Drawing. Do not
submit a series of drawings of components.
C. Identify field dimensions; show relationship to adjacent features, critical features, work, or
products.
D. Submit shop drawings in plan, elevation and sections, showing equipment in mechanical
equipment areas.
1.03 COORDINATION DRAWINGS
A. Present in a clear and thorough manner. Title each drawing with project name. Identify each
element of drawings by reference to sheet number and detail, or room number of contract
documents. Minimum drawing scale:'/a" = V-0".
B. Prepare coordination drawings to coordinate installations for efficient use of available space,
for proper sequence of installation, and to resolve conflicts. Coordinate with work specified in
other sections and other divisions of the specifications.
C. For each mechanical room and for each outside equipment pad where equipment is located,
submit plan and elevation drawings. Show:
1. Actual mechanical equipment and components to be furnished
2. Service clearance
3. Relationship to other equipment and components
4. Roof drains and leader piping
5. Fire protection piping and equipment
D. Identify field dimensions. Show relation to adjacent or critical features of work or products.
E. Related requirements:
1. Ductwork shop drawings
2. Coordination drawing specified in Division 26
SHOP DRAWINGS, COORDINATION DRAWINGS & PRODUCT DATA
VLK Architects, 2009 23 0512 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
F. Submit shop drawings in plan, elevation and sections, showing equipment in mechanical
equipment areas.
G. Gas piping sketch indicating proposed location of piping prior to proceeding with the
installation.
1.04 PRODUCT DATA AND INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION
A. Submit only pages which are pertinent to the project. All options which are indicated on the
product data shall become part of the contract and shall be required whether specified are
not.
B. Mark each copy of standard printed data to identify pertinent products, referenced to
specification section and article number.
C. Show reference standards, performance characteristics and capacities; wiring and piping
diagrams and controls; component parts; finishes; dimensions and required clearances.
D. Modify manufacturer's standard schematic drawings and diagrams to supplement standard
information and to provide information specifically applicable to the work. Delete information
not applicable.
E. Mark up a copy of the specifications for the product. Indicate in the margin of each paragraph
the following: "Comply, "Do Not Comply", or "Not Applicable". Explain all "Do Not Comply"
statements.
F. Provide a separate transmittal for each submittal item. Transmittals shall indicate product by
specification section name and number. Separate all submittals into appropriate specification
section number. Do not combine specification sections.
1.05 MANUFACTURERS INSTRUCTIONS
A. Submit Manufacturer's instructions for storage, preparation, assembly, installation, start-up,
adjusting, calibrating, balancing and finishing.
1.06 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Review submittals prior to transmittal.
B. Determine and verify:
1. Field measurements
2. Field construction criteria
3. Manufacturer's catalog numbers
4. Conformance with requirements of Contract Documents
C. Coordinate submittals with requirements of the work and of the Contract Documents.
D. Notify the Architect/Engineer in writing at time of submission of any deviations in the
submittals from requirements of the Contract Documents.
E. Do not fabricate products, or begin work for which submittals are specified, until such
submittals have been produced and bear contractor's stamp. Do not fabricate products or
begin work scheduled to have submittals reviewed until return of reviewed submittals with
Architect/Engineers acceptance.
SHOP DRAWINGS, COORDINATION DRAWINGS & PRODUCT DATA
VLK Architects, 2009 23 0512 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
F. Contractor's responsibility for errors and omissions in submittals is not relieved whether
Architect/Engineer reviews submittals or not.
G. Contractor's responsibility for deviations in submittals from requirements of Contract
Documents is not relieved whether Architect/Engineer reviews submittals or not, unless
Architectiengineer gives written acceptance of the specific deviations on reviewed
documents.
H. Submittals shall show sufficient data to indicate complete compliance with Contract
Documents:
1. Proper sizes and capacities
2. That the item will fit in the available space in a manner that will allow proper service
3. Construction methods, materials and finishes
Schedule submissions at least 15 days before date reviewed submittals will be needed.
1.07 SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS
A. Make submittals promptly in accordance with approved schedule, and in such sequence as
to cause no delay in the Project or in the work of any other Contractor.
B. Number of submittals required:
1. Shop Drawings and Coordination Drawings: Submit one reproducible transparency
and three opaque reproductions.
2. Product Data: Submit the number of copies which the contractor requires, plus those
which will be retained by the Architect/Engineer.
C. Accompany submittals with transmittal letter, in duplicate, containing:
1. Date
2. Project title and number
3. Contractor's name and address
4. The number of each Shop Drawing, Project Datum and Sample submitted
5. Other pertinent data
D. Submittals shall include:
1. The date of submission
2. The project title and number
3. Contract Identification
4. The names of:
a. Contractor
b. Subcontractor
C. Supplier
d. Manufacturer
5. Identification of the product
6. Field dimensions, clearly identified as such
7. Relation to adjacent or critical features of the work or materials
8. Applicable standards, such as ASTM or federal specifications numbers
9. Identification of deviations from contract documents
10. Suitable blank space for General Contractor and Architect/Engineer stamps
11. Contractor's signed and dated Stamp of Approval
E. Coordinate submittals into logical groupings to facilitate interrelation of the several items:
1. Finishes which involve Architect/Engineer selection of colors, textures or patterns
2. Associated items which require correlation for efficient function or for installation
SHOP DRAWINGS, COORDINATION DRAWINGS & PRODUCT DATA
VLK Architects, 2009 23 0512 - 3 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
1.08 SUBMITTAL SPECIFICATION INFORMATION
A. Every submittal document shall bear the following information as used in the project manual:
1. The related specification section number
2. The exact specification section title
B. Submittals delivered to the Architect/Engineer without the specified information will not be
processed. The Contractor shall bear the risk of all delays, as if no submittal had been
delivered.
1.09 RESUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS
A. Make re -submittals under procedures specified for initial submittals.
1. Indicate that the document or sample is a re -submittal
2. Identify changes made since previous submittals
B. Indicate any changes which have been made, other than those requested by the
Architect/Engineer.
1.10 CONTRACTOR'S STAMP OF APPROVAL
A. Contractor shall stamp and sign each document certifying to the review of products, field
measurements and field construction criteria, and coordination of the information within the
submittal with requirements of the work and of Contract Documents.
B. Contractor's stamp of approval on any submittal shall constitute a representation to Owner
and Architect/Engineer that Contractor has either determined and verified all quantities,
dimensions, field construction criteria, materials, catalog numbers, and similar data or
assumes full responsibility for doing so, and that Contractor has reviewed or coordinated
each submittal with the requirements of the work and the Contract Documents.
C. Do not deliver any submittals to the Architect/Engineer that do not bear the Contractor's
stamp of approval and signature.
D. Submittals delivered to the Architect/Engineer without Contractor's stamp of approval and
signature will not be processed. The Contractor shall bear the risk of all delays, as if no
submittal had been delivered.
1.11 ARCHITECT/ENGINEER REVIEW OF IDENTIFIED SUBMITTALS
A. The Architect/Engineer will:
1. Review identified submittals with reasonable promptness and in accordance with
schedule
2. Affix stamp and initials or signature, and indicate requirements for re -submittal or
approval of submittal
3. Return submittals to Contractor for distribution or for resubmission
B. Review and approval of submittals will not extend to design data reflected in submittals which
is peculiarly within the special expertise of the Contractor or any party dealing directly with the
Contractor.
C. Architect/Engineer's review and approval is only for conformance with the design concept of
the project and for compliance with the information given in the contract.
1. The review shall not extend to means, methods, sequences, techniques or
procedures of construction or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto.
SHOP DRAWINGS, COORDINATION DRAWINGS & PRODUCT DATA
VLK Architects, 2009 23 0512 - 4 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
2. The review shall not extend to review of quantities, dimensions, weights or gauges,
fabrication processes or coordination with the work of other trades.
D. The review and approval of a separate item as such will not indicate approval of the
assembly in which the item functions.
1.12 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Do not make requests for substitution employing the procedures of this Section.
B. The procedure for making a formal request for substitution is specified in Div. 1.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED.
PART 3 - EXECUTION - NOT USED
END OF SECTION
SHOP DRAWINGS, COORDINATION DRAWINGS & PRODUCT DATA
VLK Architects, 2009 23 0512 - 5 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 23 0513
ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS OF HVAC WORK
PART 1-GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Electrical provisions to be provided as mechanical work are indicated in other Division 23
sections, on drawings, and as specified.
B. Types of work, normally recognized as electrical but provided as mechanical, specified or
partially specified in this Section, include but are not necessarily limited to the following:
1. Motors for mechanical equipment.
2. Starters for motors of mechanical equipment, but only where specifically
indicated to be furnished integrally with equipment.
3. Wiring from motors to disconnect switches or junction boxes for motors of
mechanical equipment, but only where specifically indicated to be furnished
integrally with equipment.
4. Wiring of field -mounted float control switches, flow control switches, and similar
mechanical -electrical devices provided for mechanical systems, to equipment
control panels.
5. Wiring of smoke detectors for shutdown of air handling equipment when a fire
alarm system is not included in the project.
6. Pipe heat tracing.
C. Refer to Division 23 Controls Sections for related control system wiring.
D. Refer to Division 23 sections for specific individual mechanical equipment electrical
requirements.
E. Refer to Division 26 sections for motor starters and controls not furnished integrally with
mechanical equipment.
F. Refer to Division 26 sections for junction boxes and disconnect switches required for
motors and other electrical units of mechanical equipment.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Wherever possible, match elements of electrical provisions of mechanical work with
similar elements of electrical work specified in Division 26 sections for electrical work not
otherwise specified.
B. For electrical equipment and products, comply with applicable NEMA standards, and
refer to NEMA standards for definitions of terminology. Comply with National Electrical
Code (NFPA 70) for workmanship and installation requirements.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Include in listing of motors, voltage, notation of whether motor starter is furnished or
installed integrally with motor or equipment containing motors.
ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS OF HVAC WORK
VLK Architects, 2009 23 0513 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MOTORS
A. Provide motors for mechanical equipment manufactured by one of the following:
1.
Baldor Electric Company.
2.
Century Electric Div., Inc.
3.
General Electric Co.
4.
Louis Allis Div.; Litton Industrial Products, Inc.
5.
Lincoln Electric
6.
Marathon Electric Mfg. Corp.
7.
Reliance Electric Co.
8.
Westinghouse Electric Corp.
B. Motor Characteristics. Except where more stringent requirements are indicated, and
except where required items of mechanical equipment cannot be obtained with fully
complying motors, comply with the following requirements for motors of mechanical work:
C. Temperature Rating. Rated for 40 Degrees C environment with maximum 50 Degrees C
temperature rise for continuous duty at full load (Class A Insulation).
D. Provide each motor capable of making starts as frequently as indicated by automatic
control system, and not less than 5 starts per hour for manually controlled motors.
E. Phases and Current Characteristics. Provide squirrel -cage induction polyphase motors
for 3/4hp and larger, and provide capacitor -start single-phase motors for 1/2hp and
smaller, except 1/6hp and smaller may, at equipment manufacturer's option, be split -
phase type. Coordinate current characteristics with power specified in Division 26
sections, and with individual equipment requirements specified in other Division 23
requirements. For 2-speed motors provide 2 separate windings on polyphase motors. Do
not purchase motors until power characteristics available at locations of motors have
been confirmed, and until rotation directions have been confirmed.
F. Service Factor. 1.15 for polyphase motors and 1.35 for single-phase motors.
G. Motor Construction. Provide general purpose, continuous duty motors, Design "B" except
"C" where required for high starting torque.
1. Frames. NEMA #56.
2. Bearings are to be ball or roller bearings with inner and outer shaft seals,
regreasable except permanently sealed where motor is inaccessible for regular
maintenance. Where belt drives and other drives produce lateral or axial thrust in
motor, provide bearings designed to resist thrust loading. Refer to individual
section of Division 23 for fractional -hp light -duty motors where sleeve -type
bearings are permitted.
3. Except as indicated, provide open drip -proof motors for indoor use where
satisfactorily housed or remotely located during operation, and provide guarded
drip -proof motors where exposed to contact by employees or building occupants.
Provide weather -protected Type I for outdoor use, Type II where not housed.
Refer to individual sections of Division 23 for other enclosure requirements.
4. Provide built-in thermal overload protection and, where indicated, provide internal
sensing device suitable for signaling and stopping motor at starter.
5. Noise Rating: Provide "Quiet" rating on motors.
H. All motors shall be premium efficiency.
ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS OF HVAC WORK
VLK Architects, 2009 23 0513 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
2.02 EQUIPMENT FABRICATION
A. Fabricate mechanical equipment for secure mounting of motors and other electrical items
included in work. Provide either permanent alignment of motors with equipment, or
adjustable mountings as applicable for belt drives, gear drives, special couplings and
similar indirect coupling of equipment. Provide safe, secure, durable, and removable
guards for motor drives. Arrange for lubrication and similar running -maintenance without
removal of guards.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install motors on motor mounting systems in accordance with motor manufacturer's
instructions, anchored to resist torque, drive thrusts, and other external forces inherent in
mechanical work. Secure sheaves and other drive units to motor shafts with keys and
Allen set screws on flat surface of shaft. Unless otherwise indicated, set motor shafts
parallel with machine shafts.
B. Verify voltage with Electrical Plans.
END OF SECTION
ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS OF HVAC WORK
VLK Architects, 2009 23 0513 - 3 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 23 0514
HVAC CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPING SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide and install air conditioning condensate drains.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Division 23 - Mechanical.
1. Insulation
2. Fan/Coil Units
3. Air Handling Units
4. Equipment Drain Pans
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPE MATERIAL
A. Type K Copper with drainage pattern fittings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install the system to facilitate easy removal.
1. Use threaded plugged tee at each change of direction to permit cleaning.
2. Install a cleanout every 50 feet of straight run piping
3. Maintain a positive slope on all piping
B. Install a water seal trap leg based on the fan pressure.
1. Size the length of the trap leg 1 inch larger than the actual system pressure.
C. Install traps and cleanout as shown in the drawing details.
1. Confirm requirements with manufacturer's installation instructions
3.02 SIZE PIPE AS SHOWN ON DRAWINGS.
A. Do not install piping sized smaller than the unit drain connection size.
3.03 SECONDARY DRAINS
A. Provide secondary drains where required by code, shown on the drawings, or where
equipment has secondary drain connections.
END OF SECTION
HVAC CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPING SYSTEM
VLK Architects, 2009 23 0514 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 23 0517
HVAC ACCESS DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install access doors in wall or ceiling locations as required or shown for
access to valves, controls, fire dampers, air distribution devices and other equipment
requiring maintenance, adjustment or operation.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.01 NON -FIRE RATED ACCESS DOORS
A. 16-Gauge frames
B. 14-gauge steel panels
C. Continuous fully concealed hinges
D. Flush screwdriver cam lock & cylinder lock for Owner selection
E. Automatic closing and latching mechanism
F. Prime coat finish
G. Brushed satin stainless steel finish for restroom, kitchen or cafeteria installation
H. Material suitable for wall and/or ceiling mounting
2.02 FIRE RATED ACCESS DOORS
A. UL listed, 1-1/2 hour Label "B", access doors
B. 16-Gauge stainless steel
C. 20-Gauge insulated sandwich -type door panel.
D. Two inch thick with fire rated insulation
E. Continuous fully concealed hinge
F. Automatic closing and latching mechanism
G. Knurled knob and recessed key operation for Owner selection
H. Interior latch release slide for opening from inside
I. Prime coat finish
J. Material suitable for wall and/or ceiling mounting
HVAC ACCESS DOORS
VLK Architects, 2009 23 0517 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
2.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Milcor
B. MIFAB
C. Acudor
D. Elmdor
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Access doors specified in Division 23 will be installed by other crafts. Not all required
access doors are shown. Coordinate with the Contractor to locate access doors for ease
of operation and maintenance of concealed equipment.
B. Installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions.
C. Minimum size required:
01. 36" x 24" for Mechanical HVAC equipment related items
END OF SECTION
HVAC ACCESS DOORS
VLK Architects, 2009 23 0517 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 23 0593
TESTING, BALANCING AND ADJUSTING (TAB) OF ENVIRONMENTAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Balance, adjust and test the air distribution system including the exhaust system.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. COORDINATION OF TESTING AND BALANCING
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. History of the TAB organization.
B. Agency certification.
C. Personnel qualifications.
D. TAB data forms.
E. Instrumentation list.
F. Name of the project supervising engineer.
G. Name and address and contact person of five successfully completed projects of similar
size and scope.
H. To perform required professional services, the balancing agency shall have a minimum of
one test and balance engineer certified by the Associated Air Balance Council.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 TAB TOLERANCES
A. The outside air, supply air, return air, and exhaust air for each system shall be adjusted
to within +/- 5% of the value scheduled on the drawings.
3.02 SITE VISITS
A. During construction, the balancing agency shall inspect the installation of the piping
systems, sheetmetal work, temperature controls, energy management system, and other
component parts of the heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems. One inspection
shall take place when 60% of the ductwork is installed and another inspection shall take
place when 90% of the equipment is installed. The balancing agency shall submit a brief
written report of each inspection to the architect and engineer.
B. Upon completion of the installation and start-up of the mechanical equipment by the
mechanical contractor, the balancing agency shall test and balance the system
components to obtain optimum conditions in each conditioned space of the building. If
construction deficiencies are encountered that preclude obtaining optimum conditions,
TESTING AND BALANCING (TAB) OF ENVIRONMENTAL SYSTEMS
VLK Architects, 2009 23 0593 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
and the deficiencies cannot be corrected by the mechanical contractor within a
reasonable period of time, the balancing agency shall cease testing and balancing
services and advise the architect, engineer, general contractor and owner, in writing, of
the deficiencies.
C. Note proper piping installation, location of valves, and flow measuring instruments.
D. Make one series of visits, phased as required by construction progress, prior to
installation of the ceiling. Note proper installation of balancing dampers.
E. Continue the site visits up to completion of project. In each succeeding report, list
corrections made from previous reports.
3.03 TESTING INSTRUMENTS
A. Submit a list of all instruments to be used for the test and balance procedures.
1. Catalog sheets
2. Certificate of last calibration
3. Calibration within a period of six months prior to balancing
B. Testing equipment shall be in good working order and tested for accuracy prior to start of
work.
3.04 COORDINATION WITH OTHER SPECIFICATION SECTIONS
A. Review the related ductwork shop drawings and piping shop drawings. Make
recommendations concerning suitability with respect to the testing, balancing and
adjusting work.
B. Make tests to verify proper placement of the static pressure sensors for the variable air
volume fan system control.
C. In cooperation with the work specified in Building Management and Control System
section, a systematic listing of the testing and verification shall be included in the final
TAB report. The TAB firm shall provide a laptop computer to operate with the Building
Management and Control System. Building Management and Control System shall
provide all necessary software and special interface cables, as required, to communicate
with the DDC system:
1. Work with the temperature control contractor to ensure the most effective total
system operation within the design limitations, and to obtain mutual
understanding of the intended control performance.
2. Verify that all control devices are properly connected.
3. Verify that all dampers, valves, and other controlled devices, are operated by the
intended controller.
4. Verify that all dampers and valves are in the position indicated by the controller
(open, closed or modulating).
5. Verify the integrity of valves and dampers in terms of tightness of close -off and
full open positions. This includes dampers in multizone units, terminal boxes and
fire/smoke dampers.
6. Observe that all valves are properly installed in piping system in relation to
direction of flow and location.
7. Observe the calibration of all controllers.
8. Verify the proper application of all normally opened and normally closed valves.
9. Observe the locations of all thermostats and humidistats for potential erratic
operation from outside influences such as sunlight, drafts or cold walls.
10. Observe the location of all sensors to determine whether their position will allow
TESTING AND BALANCING (TAB) OF ENVIRONMENTAL SYSTEMS
VLK Architects, 2009 23 0593 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
them to sense only the intended temperatures or pressures of the media. Control
contractor will relocate as deemed necessary by the Engineer.
11. Verify that the sequence of operation for any control mode is in accordance with
the approved shop drawings and specifications. Verify that no simultaneous
heating and cooling occurs.
12. Verify the correct operation of all interlock systems and installation is per the
manufacturer recommendations.
13. Check all dampers for free operation.
14. Verify that all controller setpoints meet the design intent.
15. Perform variable volume system verification to assure the system and its
components track with changes from full flow to minimum flow.
D. Upon completion of the testing and balancing, submit three days prior notice that the
systems are ready for a running test. A qualified representative of the test and balance
organization shall be present, with a representative from the engineers office, to field
verify TAB report readings. Specific and random selections of data recorded in the
certified test and balance report will be reviewed.
3.05 INSTRUMENT TEST HOLES
A. When it is required to make holes in the field to measure temperature, static pressure or
velocity in the ducts:
1. Drill holes, plug and tape external duct insulation.
2. Repair damaged insulation to Engineer's approval.
3.06 TESTING THE AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
A. The TAB agency shall verify that all ductwork, dampers, grilles, registers, and diffusers
have been installed per design and set full open. The TAB agency shall perform the
following TAB procedures in accordance with the AABC National Standards and all
results shall be recorded in the TAB report:
1. Supply Fans:
a. Fan speeds: Test and adjust fan RPM to achieve design CFM
requirements.
b. Current and Voltage: Test and record motor voltage and amperage, and
compare data with the nameplate limits to ensure fan motor is not in or
above the service factor.
C. Pitot-Tube Traverse: Perform a Pitot-Tube traverse of the main supply
and return ducts, as applicable, to obtain total CFM. If a Pitot-Tube
traverse is not practical, an explanation of why a traverse was not made
must appear on the appropriate data sheet. Measurements must be
recorded with an Inclined Manometer or an Inclined/Vertical Manometer.
d. Outside Air: Test and adjust the outside air on applicable equipment
using a Pitot-Tube traverse. If a Pitot-Tube traverse is not practical, an
explanation of why a traverse was not made must appear on the
appropriate data sheet. If a traverse is not practical, use the mixed air
temperature method, if the inside and outside temperature difference is
at least 20°F, or use the difference between Pitot-tube traverse of the
supply and return ducts.
e. Static Pressure: Test and record system static pressure, including the
static pressure profile of each supply fan.
2. All Other Fans:
a. Fan speeds: Test and adjust fan RPM to achieve design CFM
requirements.
b. Current and Voltage: Test and record motor voltage and amperage, and
compare data with the nameplate limits to ensure fan motor is not in or
TESTING AND BALANCING (TAB) OF ENVIRONMENTAL SYSTEMS
VLK Architects, 2009 23 0593 - 3 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
above the service factor.
C. Pitot-Tube Traverse: Perform a Pitot-Tube traverse of the main return
ducts, as applicable, to obtain total CFM. If a Pitot-Tube traverse is not
practical, an explanation of why a traverse was not made must appear
on the appropriate data sheet. Measurements must be recorded with an
Inclined Manometer or an Inclined/Vertical Manometer.
d. Static Pressure: Test and record system static pressure, including the
static pressure profile of each return fan.
3. Diffusers, Registers and Grilles:
a. Tolerances: Test, adjust, and balance each diffuser, grille, and register to
within 5% of design requirements. Minimize drafts. Observe throws are in
direction as indicated on drawings.
4. Coils (including electric coils):
a. Air Temperature: Once air flows are set to acceptable limits, take wet
bulb (cooling coil only) and dry bulb air temperatures on the entering and
leaving side of each coil. Calculate the sensible and latent (cooling coil
only) capacity of the coil. Provide information in TAB report.
B. Record preliminary air handler data, including fan RPM and static pressures across filter,
fans and coils.
C. Perform a velocity traverse of the main supply ducts using a pitot-tube and inclined
manometer to establish initial air delivery. Perform a Pitot-tube traverse of main supply
and return ducts, as applicable, to obtain total CFM. If a pitot-tube traverse is not
practical, a detailed explanation of why a traverse was not made must appear on the
appropriate data sheet.
D. Make adjustments in fan RPM and damper settings, as required, to obtain design supply
air, return air, and outside air.
E. Measure and adjust all supply and return branches to design air delivery
F. Measure and adjust all diffusers to design air delivery to +/- 5% of design requirements.
G. Make a set of recordings showing final system conditions.
3.07 EQUIPMENT POWER READINGS
A. Record the following information for each motor:
1. Equipment designation.
2. Manufacturer.
3. Unit model number and serial number and frame.
4. Motor nameplate horsepower; nameplate voltage; phase and full load amperes.
5. Heater coil in starter.
a. Rating in amperes.
b. Manufacturer's recommendation.
6. Motor RPM/driven equipment RPM.
7. Power reading (voltage, amperes of all legs at motor terminals).
3.08 DUCT TEST
A. Test and Balancing Contractor shall verify and record the duct test results. A copy of the
duct test results, as completed, shall be submitted to the engineer for review within five
days. Provide a complete report of all the duct test results in the final TAB report.
TESTING AND BALANCING (TAB) OF ENVIRONMENTAL SYSTEMS
VLK Architects, 2009 23 0593 - 4 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
3.09 DIRECT EXPANSION EQUIPMENT
A. With each unit operating at near design conditions, measure and record the following:
1. Manufacturer, model number, serial number and all nameplate data.
2. Ambient temperature, condenser discharge temperature.
3. Amperage and voltage for each phase.
4. Leaving and entering air temperatures.
5. Suction and discharge pressures and temperatures.
6. Tons of cooling.
7. Verification that moisture indicator shows dry refrigerant.
3.11 TAB REPORT
A. The activities described in this specification shall be recorded in a report form; and four
individually bound copies shall be provided to the Architect and Engineer. Neatly type
and arrange data. Include with the data the date tested, personnel present, weather
conditions, nameplate record of the test instruments used and list all measurements
taken after all corrections are made to the system. Record all failures and corrective
action taken to remedy any incorrect situation. The intent of the final report is to provide a
reference of actual operating conditions for the Owner's operations personnel. Provide a
"Preface" which shall include a general discussion of the system and any abnormalities
or problems encountered.
B. All measurements and recorded readings (of air, electricity, etc.) that appear in the report
must have been recorded on site by the permanently employed technicians or engineers
of the TAB firm.
C. Submit reports on forms approved by the engineer that will include the following data as a
minimum:
1. Title Page
a. Company Name
b. Company Address
C. Company telephone number
d. Project name
e. Project location
f. Project Manager
g. Project Engineer
h. Project Contractor
I. Project Identification Number
2. Summary of the TAB report data
3. Index
4. Instrument List
a. Instrument
b. Manufacturer
C. Model
d. Serial Number
e. Range
f. Calibration Date
g. What test instrument is to be used for:
5. Fan Data
a. Location
b. Manufacturer
C. Model
d. Air flow, specified and actual
e. Total static pressure (total external) specified and actual
f. Inlet pressure
TESTING AND BALANCING (TAB) OF ENVIRONMENTAL SYSTEMS
VLK Architects, 2009 23 0593 - 5 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consoklated High School
College Station Independent School District
g.
Discharge pressure
h.
Fan RPM
6.
Return Air/Outside Air Data
a.
Identification/location
b.
Design return air flow
C.
Actual return air flow
d.
Design outside air flow
e.
Actual outside air flow
f.
Return air temperature
g.
Outside air temperature
h.
Required mixed air temperature
1.
Actual mixed air temperature
7.
Electric Motors
a.
Manufacturer
b.
HP/BHP
C.
Phase, voltage, amperage, nameplate, actual
d.
PM
e.
Service Factor
f.
Starter size, heater elements, rating
8.
V-Belt Drive
a.
Identification/location
b.
Required driven RPM
C.
Drive sheave, diameter and RPM
d.
Belt, size and quantity
e.
Motor sheave, diameter and RPM
f.
Center -to -center distance, maximum, minimum and actual
9.
Duct
Traverse
a.
System zone/branch
b.
Duct size
C.
Area
d.
Design velocity
e.
Design air flow
f.
Test velocity
g.
Test air flow
h.
Duct static pressure
I.
Air correction factor
10.
Air Distribution Test Sheet
a.
Air terminal number
b.
Room number/location
C.
Terminal type
d.
Terminal size
e.
Correction factor
f.
Design velocity
g.
Design air flow
h.
Test (final) velocity
i.
Test (final) air flow
11.
Sound Level Report
a.
Location (Location established by the design engineer)
b.
N C curve for eight (8) bands -equipment off
C.
N C curve for eight (8) bands -equipment on
12.
Vibration Test on equipment having 10 HP motors or greater in size.
a.
Location of points:
1) Fan bearing, drive end
2) Fan bearing, opposite end
3) Motor bearing, center (if applicable)
4) Motor bearing, drive end
TESTING AND BALANCING (TAB) OF ENVIRONMENTAL SYSTEMS
VLK Architects, 2009 23 0593 - 6 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
5) Motor bearing, opposite end
6) Casing (bottom or top)
7) Casing (side)
8) Duct after flexible connection (discharge)
9) Duct after flexible connection (suction)
b.
Test readings:
1) Horizontal, velocity and displacement
2) Vertical, velocity and displacement
3) Axial, velocity and displacement
C.
Normally acceptable readings, velocity and acceleration
d.
Unusual conditions at time of test
e.
Vibration source (if non -complying)
14. Control verification indicating date performed and any abnormalities identified.
a.
Point Location/Description
b.
EMS Readout (Setpoint and Actual)
C.
Actual Readout of all points
d.
Interlocks
e.
Safeties
f.
Variable speed drive tracking with EMS input
g.
Variable speed drive Bypass operation
h.
Sequence of operation
END OF SECTION
TESTING AND BALANCING (TAB) OF ENVIRONMENTAL SYSTEMS
VLK Architects, 2009 23 0593 - 7 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 23 0594
COORDINATION OF TESTING AND BALANCING
PART 1 - TESTING, BALANCING AND ADJUSTING
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Balancing and adjusting of the environmental systems shall be preformed by mechanical
contractor. Refer to Section 23 0593 for testing and balancing requirements.
B. Coordination of the work is specified in this Section.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS / NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 COORDINATION
A. Bring the work to a state of readiness for testing, balancing, and adjusting.
1. Install air terminal devices.
2. Provide specified filters in air handling equipment. Install clean filters just prior to
the start of the test and balance work.
3. Verify lubrication of equipment.
4. Install permanent instrumentation.
5. Complete "Start-up" of equipment.
6. Check rotation and alignment of rotating equipment and tension of belted drives.
7. Verify ratings of overload heaters in motor starters.
8. Verify that safety and operating control set points are as designed and automatic
control sequences have been checked.
9. Provide control diagrams and sequence of operation.
10. Collect material for maintenance manuals and prepare one manual especially for
use in testing and balancing.
11. Verify that graphic operational data such as start/stop instructions, valve tag
schedules, and piping identification schedules have been provided where needed.
12. Verify that equipment identification work has been completed with valve tags,
schedules, and piping identification system.
13. Comb out fins on extended -surface heat transfer coils where damaged.
14. Remove all temporary filters from HVAC equipment.
15. Provide start-up reports listing all start-up information and manufacturer's
information attached.
B. Provide and install new pulleys and belts as required to effect the correct speed ratio.
Adjustments where no belt or pulley change is required, is specified in Section 23 0593.
C. Verify that the systems are ready for balancing and adjusting.
D. Submit a letter stating:
01. The specified pieces of equipment have been checked, started, and adjusted by
the manufacturer.
02. Other equipment has been checked and started.
03. The systems have been operated for the specified period of time.
04. The automatic controls system has been adjusted, calibrated, and checked, and
is operating as specified.
E. Provide the services of a technician full time at all times at the project when testing,
COORDINATION OF TESTING AND BALANCING
VLK Architects, 2009 23 0594 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
balancing and adjusting work is being conducted.
F. Provide instrumentation and services to take readings of the required data for the
refrigerant circuits.
G. Provide and install volume dampers required for balancing by the TAB Contractor.
3.02 START-UP OF EQUIPMENT
A. Pre -start & Start-up equipment using the procedures as recommended by the
manufacturers.
B. Complete start-up of equipment prior to start of testing & balancing.
C. Submit start-up procedures as outlined by the manufacturers and complete the "HVAC
FAN / AIR HANDLING / START-UP REPORT FORM" to Engineer.
COORDINATION OF TESTING AND BALANCING
VLK Architects, 2009 23 0594 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
Equipment
DescrIption
Disc.
switch._.Condition
:•
•
,
nt
To Roof•al
•
Filter
•M..
mill
r-rvv yr .7Ct, i iVIV
COORDINATION OF TESTING AND BALANCING
VLK Architects, 2009 23 0594 - 3 2737.03
SECTION 23 0713
EXTERNAL DUCT INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
A. Furnish and install external insulation on supply, return and fresh air ductwork.
B. External insulation of concealed and exposed ducts is included in this Section. Internal
acoustic duct lining is specified under ductwork and not included in this Section.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. FINISHES. Painting and Color Coding.
B. Division 23 - Mechanical
1. Air Handling Units. Internal insulation for air units is specified in the sections on air
handling units. The units do not require external insulation.
2. Internal Duct Liner. Internal duct liner is specified in the section on ductwork.
3. Insulation. Refer to specific sections on individual insulation types.
4. Refer to insulation and liner plan detail.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The intent of insulation specifications is to obtain superior quality workmanship, resulting in
an installation that is absolutely satisfactory in both function and appearance. Provide
insulation in accordance with the specifications for each type of service and apply as
recommended by the manufacturer and as specified.
B. An approved contractor for this work under this Division shall be:
1. A specialist in this field and have the personnel, experience, training, skill, and the
organization to provide a practical working system.
2. Able to furnish evidence of having contracted for and installed not less than 3
systems of comparable size and type that have served their Owners satisfactorily for
not less than 3 years.
C. All duct insulation used on the project inside the building must have a flame spread rating not
exceeding 25 and a smoke developed rating not exceeding 50 as determined by test
procedures ASTM E84, NFPA 255 and UL 723. These ratings must be as tested on the
composite of insulation, jacket or facing, and adhesive. Components such as adhesives,
mastics and cements must meet the same individual ratings as the minimum requirements
and bear the UL label.
D. Condensation on any insulated system is not approved.
E. Replace insulation damaged by either moisture or other means. Insulation that has been wet,
whether dried or not, is considered damaged. Make repairs where condensation is caused by
improper installation of insulation. Also repair any damage caused by the condensation.
F. Where existing insulated ductwork or other services are tapped, remove existing insulation
back to undamaged sections and replace with new insulation of the same type and thickness
as existing insulation. Apply as specified for insulation of the same service.
EXTERNAL DUCT INSULATION
VLK Architects, 2009 23 0713 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
AW Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
1.04 APPROVALS
A. Submittals. Submit product data on each insulation type, adhesive, and finish to be used in
the work. Make the submittal as specified in General Requirements and obtain approval
before beginning installation. Include product description, list of materials and thickness for
each service and location, and the manufacturer's installation instructions for each product.
B. Sample Application. Make an application of each type of insulation to display the material,
quality and application method. Obtain approval of the sample application before proceeding
with installation of the work.
PART 2PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Glass fiber rigid duct insulation.
1. Minimum density of 3 pcf, installed R value to be 6.0 or better at 75°F mean, facing
of 0.7 mil aluminum foil reinforced with glass yarn mesh and laminated to 40 lbs. fire-
resistant kraft. R-value to be indicated on exterior side of insulation to be verified by
City inspector.
2. Schuller 814 spin-glas FSK.
3. Owens-Corning Type 703 board RKF.
4. Knauf 3 PCF FSK.
B. Glass fiber blanket duct insulation.
1. Minimum density of 1.0 pcf, installed R value to be 6.0 or better at 750F mean, facing
of 0.35 mil foil reinforced with glass yarn mesh and laminated to 40 lbs. fire resistant
kraft. R-value to be indicated on exterior side of insulation to be verified by City
inspector.
2. Manville R-series Microlite FSKL.
3. Owens-Corning ED100 RKF.
4. Knauf 1.0 PCF FSK.
C. Fiberglass reinforcing cloth mesh.
1. Perma Glass Mesh.
2. Alpha Glass Mesh.
3. Childers Chil-Glas.
4. Vimasco.
D. Mastics and adhesives.
1. Childers.
2. Foster.
3. Vimasco.
E. Fireboard Insulation
1.
Totally encapsulated with foil facing.
2.
Two hour rated fire protection.
3.
Zero clearance to combustible protection.
4.
Partak Insulation, Inc. Paroc Fireboard
5.
Thermal Ceramics FireMaster 3M
6.
Premier Refractories International, Pyroscat.
F. Rigid Closed Cell Insulation
1. Dow Thymer.
EXTERNAL DUCT INSULATION
VLK Architects, 2009 23 0713 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
2. Phenolic Foam
G. Reinforced Foil Tape
1. Venture 1525CW
2. 3" FSK
3. Thickness 6.5 mils
4. Color: silver
2.02 COATING AND ADHESIVE
A. Coating. Provide Childers CP-35 vapor barrier coating.
B. Adhesive. Provide Childers CP-82 vapor barrier adhesive.
C. Glass Cloth. Provide 10 x 10 white glass cloth.
2.03 OUTDOOR DUCT LAMINATED JACKETING
A. Rubberized bitumen compound material:
1.
Ultraviolet resistant
2.
Weatherproof
3.
Vapor retarding jacketing
4.
Laminated jacketing
5.
Cross -laminated high strength polyethylene film
6.
Laminated to aluminum foil
7.
Minimum 60-mil thickness
8.
Alumaguard 60
9.
Flex Clad 400
10.
Venture Clad 1577CW
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 FIRE SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not extend duct coverings through walls or floors required to be fire -stopped or required to
have a fire resistance rating. Interrupt duct coverings in the immediate vicinity of heat sources
such as electric resistance or fuel -burning heater.
3.02 CONCEALED DUCT
A. Provide flexible glass fiber insulation with factory -applied, reinforced UL labeled Foil-Skrim-
Kraft (FSK) facing.
B. Standing Seams. Insulate standing seams and stiffeners, which protrude through the
insulation with 0.6 lb. per cubic foot density, 1-1/2" thick, faced, flexible blanket insulation.
Insulation shall not prevent adjustment of damper operators.
C. Insulation shall be wrapped tightly on the ductwork with all circumferential joints butted and
longitudinal joints overlapped a minimum of 2". In addition, secure insulation to the bottom of
rectangular ductwork by the use of either weld pins with washers or cup -head pins welded to
the ductwork or perforated based insulation hangers glued to the duct on twelve inch centers
to prevent sagging of insulation.
D. On circumferential joint, the 2" flange on the facing shall be stapled with 9/16" outward clinch
steel staples on 2" centers and taped using 3" wide foil tape applied with additional adhesive
of Foster 85-75. Cover all seams, joints, pin penetrations and other breaks with foil tape and
EXTERNAL DUCT INSULATION
VLK Architects, 2009 23 0713 - 3 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
glue.
E. Ductwork in mechanical rooms is considered concealed spaces.
3.03 EXPOSED DUCT INSULATION
A. Ductwork in exposed locations is to be insulated with fiberglass rigid / semi -rigid board
insulation.
01. Apply fabric and mastic to provide a smooth surface for painting.
B. Standing Seams: Insulate standing seams and stiffeners which protrude through the
insulation with 0.6 lb per cubic foot density, 1-1 /2 inch thick, faced insulation. As a vapor seal,
use glass cloth with vapor barrier coating. Insulation shall not prevent adjustment of damper
operators.
C. Insulation shall be wrapped tightly on the ductwork. Adhere insulation to ductwork with
adhesive. In addition, secure insulation to the bottom of rectangular ductwork by the use of
either weld pins with washers or cup -head pins welded to the ductwork or perforated based
insulation hangers glued to the duct on 12 inch centers to prevent sagging of insulation.
D. Cover all seams, joints, pin penetrations and other breaks with coating reinforced with glass
fabric. Fabric shall not be visible after coating.
3.04 OUTDOOR DUCTWORK COVERING
A. Cover all supply and return ductwork outdoors:
01. 1-1/2" thick, rigid closed cell insulation with reinforced foil facing.
B. Install a high point in center and slope in both directions so water will not stand on horizontal
surfaces.
C. Impale the insulation over mechanical fasteners and washers.
01. A minimum of 2 rows of fasteners per side on 12-inch centers.
02. Seal all breaks, joints and punctures by applying a 1/8" thick vapor barrier mastic
coating, embedded in open mesh glass fabric.
D. Standing S, or flanged connections shall be covered with the same thickness of insulation
overlapped a minimum of 4".
E. Apply a tack coat of Childers CP-10/11 weather barrier mastic over the entire surface.
1. While this coat is still tacky, Childers #5 glass fiber reinforcing mesh shall be
smoothly applied and pressed into the mastic. The cloth shall be taut with adjacent
edges overlapped a minimum of 4".
2. After the first coat of mastic has taken its set, the second coat shall be applied over
the cloth by palm, trowel, or spray to sufficient thickness that, when dried, the
combined thickness of mastic and cloth is not less than 1/8".
3. Upon completion, the openings in the cloth shall be completely sealed and the yarn
shall not be visible. The completed work shall be completely smooth and present a
plane surface.
4. Aluminum gray or white finish as approved by the Architect.
F. Standing water on horizontal surfaces is not approved.
G. Apply outdoor duct laminated jacketing protection over entire insulation surface. Apply
rubberized bitumen compound, applied to a cross -laminated high strength polyethylene film,
laminated to aluminum foil.
EXTERNAL DUCT INSULATION
VLK Architects, 2009 23 0713 - 4 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
3.05 GENERAL INSTALLATION
A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Apply insulation on clean, dry surfaces only.
C. Continue insulation with vapor barrier through penetrations.
D. Neatly finish insulation at supports, protrusions and interruptions.
E. Install insulation on clean, dry surfaces, and only after building is weatherproofed sufficiently
to preclude any rainwater on insulation.
F. Apply mastic over the fiberglass cloth fabric to a thickness where fabric is not visible after
completion.
END OF SECTION
EXTERNAL DUCT INSULATION
VLK Architects, 2009 23 0713 - 5 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 23 0933
BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE
A. Connect to existing Building Management and Control System (BMCS).
B. Temperature Control System components:
1. Electronic instruments as specified
2. Electric instruments as specified
3. Microcomputer instruments as specified
C. All control devices of the same type product shall be of a single manufacture.
D. Control, power and interlock wiring necessary to accomplish sequences specified in this
Section shall be provided and installed by the Control Subcontractor. Materials and
methods of execution as specified in Division 26, Electrical.
1. Coordinate current characteristics of all electrical instruments and equipment with
Division 26 of the specifications and related electrical drawings.
E. The manufacturer of the building automation system shall provide documentation
supporting compliance with ISO-9002 (Model for Quality Assurance in Production,
Installation, and Servicing). The intent of this specification requirement is to ensure that
the products from the manufacturer are delivered through a Quality System and
Framework that will assure consistency in the products delivered for this project.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Division 23, Mechanical.
B. Division 26, Electrical.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit items of the Building Management and Control System (BMCS).
1. Temperature control equipment & Field devices.
2. Wiring & Flow diagrams.
3. Sequence of operation.
4. Complete, detailed, control and interlock -wiring diagram.
5. Indicate mechanical and electrical equipment furnished and electrical interlocks,
indicating terminal designation of equipment. Respective equipment
manufacturers shall furnish through the Mechanical Contractor, approved
drawings of equipment to be incorporated in this diagram.
6. Submit Input / Output summary of all points.
7. Submit an outline of testing procedures from section Testing And Acceptance.
8. Mark up a copy of the specifications for the product. Indicate in the margin of
each paragraph the following: "Comply,"Do Not Comply", or "Not Applicable".
Explain all "Do Not Comply" statements.
9. Submit sample of space temperature sensor and guards for review prior to
purchase or installation.
BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM
VLK Architects, 2009 23 0933 -1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
1.04 COOPERATION WITH OTHER TRADES
A. Furnish control valves, temperature sensing element wells, flow and pressure sensing
devices, dampers and other similar devices to the Mechanical Contractor in a timely
manner for installation under the Building Management and Control System (BMCS),
Subcontractor's supervision.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Delta installed by T.E.A.M. Solutions, Inc.
2.02 SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE
A. The system shall match and expand the existing Delta Controls System. All new panels
must communicate seamlessly as part of the Delta Controls network and use the existing
programming, setup and graphical interfacing tools. The new panels will exchange data
and accept all editing commands from the existing Delta Controls Operator Workstation
located in the Owner's office.
B. The Building Management and Control System (BMCS) shall consist of an information -
sharing network of stand-alone Direct Digital Control Panels (DDCP) to monitor and
control equipment as specified of the control sequence and input/output summary. This
project is an extension of an existing campus wide area network.
B. "Information sharing" shall be defined as: The function of each DDCP to exchange data
on the network trunk with other DDCP's without the need for additional devices such as
network managers, gateways or central computers.
C. "Stand-alone" shall be defined as: The function of each DDCP to independently monitor
and control connected equipment through its own microcomputer.
2.03 COMMUNICATIONS PROCESSING
A. The BMCS shall operate as a true token -pass peer -to -peer communication network.
Resident processors in each DDCP shall provide for full exchange of system data
between other DDCP's on the network trunk. Systems that limit data exchange to a
defined number of system points are not acceptable.
B. Systems that operate via polled response or other types of protocols that rely on a central
processor or similar device to manage DDCP to DDCP communications may be
considered only if a similar device is provided as a stand-by. Upon a failure of malfunction
of the primary device, the stand-by shall automatically, without any operator intervention,
assume all BMCS network management activities.
C. The failure of any DDCP on the network shall not affect the operation of other DDCP's. All
DDCP failure shall be annunciated at the specified alarm printers and terminals.
D. Network shall support a minimum communications speed of 115.2 Kbps.
E. The network shall support a minimum of 100 DDC controllers and PC workstations.
F. Each PC workstation shall support a minimum of 4 peer -to -peer networks, either by
hardwired connection or dial up.
BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM
VLK Architects, 2009 23 0933 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
G. The system shall support integration of third party systems BACnet Systems.
2.04 BUILDING CONTROLLERS (DDCP)
A. Provide an adequate number of Building Controllers to achieve the performance specified
in the Part 1 Article on "System Performance." Each of these panels shall meet the
following requirements.
1. The Energy Management and Control System shall be comprised of one or more
independent, standalone, microprocessor -based Building Controllers to manage
the global strategies described in the System Software section.
2. The Building Controller shall have sufficient memory to support its operating
system, database, and programming requirements.
3. Data shall be shared between networked Building Controllers.
4. The operating system of the Building Controller shall manage the input and output
communication signals to allow distributed controllers to share real and virtual
object information, and allow central monitoring and alarms.
5. Controllers that perform scheduling shall have a real-time clock.
6. The Building Controller shall communicate with other BACnet objects on the
internetwork using the Read (Execute and Initiate) and Write (Execute and
Initiate) Property services as defined in Clauses 15.5 and 15.8, respectively, of
ASHRAE Standard 135-2001.
7. BACnet Functional Groups. The Building Controller shall support the following
BACnet functional groups: Clock, Event Initiation, COV Event Response, Files,
Device Communication and Time Master.
B. Communication
1. Each Building Controller shall support direct Ethernet or a communications card.
The communications card shall be connected to the Building Controller by a PC-
104 bus connection. The Building Controller shall be connected to the BACnet
network using the ISO 8802-3 (Ethernet) Data Link/ Physical layer protocol.
2. Each Building Controller with a communications card shall perform BACnet
routing if connected to a network of Custom Application and Application Specific
Controllers.
3. The controller shall provide a service communication port using BACnet Data
Link/ Physical layer protocol P-T-P for connection to a hand-held workstation/
and/or modem.
4. The Building Controller secondary communication network shall support BACnet
MS/TP.
C. Environment. Controller hardware shall be suitable for the anticipated ambient conditions.
1. Controllers used outdoors and/or in wet ambient conditions shall be mounted
within waterproof enclosures, and shall be rated for operation at 0°C to 400C
[32°F to 100OF] and 10 to 90% RH.
2. Controllers used in conditioned space shall be mounted in dust -proof enclosures,
and shall be rated for operation at 0 °C to 50 °C [32 OF to 120 OF].
D. Building Controllers shall be fully peer -to -peer.
E. Provide diagnostic LEDs for power, communication, and processor. All wiring
connections shall be made to field- removable, modular terminal strips — or to a
termination card connected by a ribbon cable.
F. The Building Controller shall have as a minimum standard SRAM of 256 KB, standard
DRAM of 1 MB and standard non-volatile 1 MB of flash memory in lieu of EPROM.
Memory shall be user extendible through RAM chip sockets and SIMMS for future
memory expansion.
BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM
VLK Architects, 2009 23 0933 - 3 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
G. immunity to power and noise. Controller shall be able to operate at 90% to 110% of
nominal voltage rating and shall perform an orderly shutdown below 80% nominal voltage.
The Building Controller shall maintain all database information including BIOS and
programming information in the event of a power loss for at least 72 hours. Operation
shall be protected against electrical noise of 5 to 120 Hz and from keyed radios up to 5 W
at 1 m [3 ftj.
H. Inputs/Outputs.
1. Inputs. Controller input/output board shall support dry contact, 0-5 VDC and 0-10
VDC- voltage, 4-20 mA- current and thermistor-resistive signal types on an
individual basis for connecting any status or sensing device. Analog resolution
shall be 10-bit A to D.
2. Outputs. Controller input/output board shall support plug -and -play 1/0 modules or
built in HOA modules configured with manual -auto -off override switch,
potentiometer and input channel for feedback status or and unrelated analog or
digital input. Output supported shall be 0-10 VDC. All HOA's shall be supervised.
3. Diagnostics. Controller input/output board shall have red LEDs providing input
status indication.
4. External Power. Controller input/output board shall have one on -board 24 VDC
terminal for directly connected active transducers.
5. Building Controller shall have the capability to create, delete and support the
following BACnet Objects:
a. ANALOG INPUT, ANALOG OUTPUT AND ANALOG VALUE: These
objects shall have the following writeable properties: Object Name;
Object Value; Description; COV Increment; Out of Service and Units. In
addition, these objects shall support the properties: Device type;
Reliability; Min./Max. Values; Update Interval and Resolution.
b. BINARY INPUT, BINARY OUTPUT AND BINARY VALUE: These objects
shall have the following writeable properties: Object Name; Object Value;
Description; Polarity; Default Value; Min On/Off and Out of Service. In
addition, these objects shall support the properties: Device Type;
Reliability; Active/Inactive Texts; Update Interval; Resolution; Change -of -
State Time; Count Times and Time Reset.
C. CALENDAR: This object shall have the following writeable properties:
Object Name; Object Value; Description; and Date List.
d. DEVICE: This object shall have the following writeable properties: Object
Name; Description; Location; and UTC Offset.
e. EVENT ENROLLMENT: This object shall have the following writeable
properties: Object Name; Object Value; Description; Out -of -Service;
Event & Notify Types; Parameters; Property Ref; Enable; and Notification
Class.
f. FILE: This object shall have the following writeable properties: Object
Name; Description; File Type; and File Access.
g. LOOP (PID): This object shall have the following writeable properties:
Object Name; Object Value; Description; Polarity; Output and Input Refs.;
Input Value & Units; Setpoint Value; PID Values; Bias; Write Priority and
COV Increment. In addition, this object shall support the properties:
Reliability; Update Interval; Proportional Constant & Units; Derivative
Constant & Units.
h. NOTIFICATION CLASS: This object shall have the following writeable
properties: Object Name; Object Value; Description; Priority and Ack
Required.
BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM
VLK Architects, 2009 23 0933 - 4 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
i. PROGRAM: This object shall have the following writeable properties:
Object Name; Object Value and Description. In addition, this object shall
support the property Reliability.
j. SCHEDULE: This object shall have the following writeable properties:
Object Name; Object Value and Description; Effective period; Schedule;
Exception; Controlled Properties and Write Properties.
k. TREND LOG: This object shall have the following writeable properties:
Object Name; Description; Log Enable; Start/stop Times; Log Device
Object Property; Log Interval; Stop When Full; Buffer Size; and Record
Count.
2.05 POINT EXPANSION MODULES
A. Capable of extending its input/output capabilities via special purpose modules.
1. Modules may be mounted remote from the DDCP.
2. Shall communicate with the DDCP over a pair of twisted cables.
2.06 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONTROLLERS
A. Provide for control of each piece of equipment, including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Rooftop Units
B. Include the following items:
1. All input and outputs necessary to perform the specified control sequences.
a. Analog outputs shall be industry standard signals such as 24V floating
control.
2. Sufficient memory to accommodate point database, operating programs, local
alarming and local trending.
3. All databases and programs shall be stored in non-volatile EEPROM, EPROM
and PROM, or minimum of 100-hour battery backup shall be provided.
4. Return to full normal operation without user intervention after a power outage of
unlimited duration.
5. Operation programs shall be field selectable for specific applications.
6. Specific control strategy requirements, allowing for additional system flexibility.
7. Controllers that require factory changes of all applications are not acceptable.
2.07 ELECTRONIC DAMPER ACTUATORS
A. Two position damper operators:
1. Spring return to full travel position.
2. Built in auxiliary switches (motor end switches)
a. Switch shall be fully adjustable so that cut-in/cut-out points may be preset
at any point within angular travel of the motor.
3. Minimum torque 60-in-lb
B. Modulating damper operators:
1. Sized with sufficient reserve power to provide smooth modulating action and tight
close off against the system pressure
2. Select the operator with available torque to exceed the maximum required
operating torque by not less than 50%
3. Minimum torque 100 in -lb
2.08 HOST COMPUTER AND PERIPHERALS
A. Shall be provided by owner.
BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM
VLK Architects, 2009 23 0933 - 5 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
2.09 CONTROL CABINETS
A. Fully enclosed NEMA 1 for indoors, NEMA 4 for outdoors.
1. Powder coat painted on all sides
2. Cabinet with continuously piano type hinged door
3. Locking latch
4. All locks shall use a common key
5. Devices on the panel face must be identified with engraved nameplates.
6. Panels or termination panels must be identified with engraved nameplates.
7. Provide enamel beige finish and extruded aluminum alloy frame UL 50 certified.
2.10 TEMPERATURE LOW LIMIT SWITCH
A. Responsive to the coldest 1' section of its length.
1.
Double pole single throw switch
2.
20' capillary
3.
Line voltage with bellows actuated switch
4.
Auto reset for outdoor installation
5.
Manual reset for indoor installation
2.11 TEMPERATURE AND HUMIDITY SENSORS
A. Space Temperature Sensors
1. Thermistor with resistance of 10,000 ohms at 77°F.
2. Accuracy shall be +/-1/2°F.
3. Range of 550 to 950 F.
4. Provide manufacturers calibration certificate.
5. Surface Mounted
a. Digital temperature display
b. Ventilation ring for fast response
C. Setpoint slide adjustment
d. Override button
e. Internal RJ11 Communication jack at sensor for communications
f. Color to be approved by Architect / Owner
6. Stainless steel flush mount sensor
7. Location and height to be approved by Architect/Engineer prior to installation.
B. Space / Duct Humidity Sensor
1. Capacitance element in the space or duct as required and output a 4 to 20 MA
signal proportional to 0 to 100% RH to the DDC.
2. Capacitance element shall be field replaceable and not require calibration.
3. Accuracy shall be +/-2% in the range from 20 to 95% RH.
4. Relative humidity sensors shall have the sensing element of inorganic resistance
media.
5. Provide locking metal covers suitable for institutional use.
6. Provide manufacturers calibration certificate.
7. Provide metal guards in the following locations:
a. Corridors
b. Gymnasium.
C. Duct Temperature Sensors
1. Range of 200 to 120°F.
2. Single point sensing of temperature.
3. Averaging elements of sufficient length to sense temperature across 2/3 duct
width.
4. Averaging elements of sufficient length to provide accurate, representative
BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM
VLK Architects, 2009 23 0933 - 6 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
indication and control.
5. Averaging elements of sufficient length to prevent variances in temperature or
stratification.
D. Outside Air / Freezer / Cooler Sensors
1. Range of -580 to 122°F.
2. Weatherproof sun shield.
3. External trim material corrosion resistant with all parts assembled into water tight,
vibration -proof, heat resistant assembly.
4. Minimum of 8' long leads.
5. Encapsulated into Type 304 stainless steel tubes with low conductivity moisture
proofing material and lag extension for thickness of insulation.
2.12 CURRENT SENSITIVE RELAYS:
A. Ensure compatibility with VFD applications for variable speed motor status.
1. Provide with adjustable set point.
2. Relays must be mounted and not hung by power wires thru CT.
3. Provide split -core type current sensors.
4. Loop powered.
5. LED Status.
6. Acceptable Manufacturer: Veris Industries / Hawkeye
7. Relays shall close status contacts in response to current flow in power leads to
the equipment being monitored.
2.13 ELECTRIC REMOTE BULB THERMOSTAT
A. Two position remote bulb thermostat:
1. Bimetal controlled.
2. Sealed mercury switches.
3. Provide specified control action.
4. Adjustment can be made by removing unit cover.
5. Element with capillary length as required for the location.
2.14 ELECTRIC SPACE THERMOSTAT
A. Two position space thermostat.
1. Single Pole switch actuated by bi-metal sensing element.
2. Range shall be 60OF to 90"F.
3. Removable external knob adjustment means.
2.15 CONTROL DAMPERS
A. Opposed blade dampers.
1. Frames of 13-gauge galvanized sheet metal.
2. Provisions for duct mounting.
3. Damper blades not exceeding 8" in width.
4. Blades of two sheets of 16-gauge galvanized sheet metal.
5. Blades suitable for high velocity performance.
6. Bearings of nylon or oil -impregnated, sinthered bronze.
7. Shafts of 1/2" zinc -plated steel.
8. Leakage does not exceed 1/2% based on 2000 fpm and 4" static pressure.
9. Replaceable resilient seals along top, bottom and sides of frame and blade edge.
10. Submit leakage and flow characteristics data with shop drawings.
11. Linkage shall be concealed out of the air stream within damper frame.
12. Acceptable Model is Ruskin Model CD60.
BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM
VLK Architects, 2009 23 0933 - 7 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. The control system shall be installed and final adjustments made by full-time employees
of the factory -approved BMCS Building Management Control Subcontractor.
B. The contractor shall collaborate through Architect / Engineer and Owner to determine the
Owner's preference for naming conventions, etc. before entering the data in to the
system.
C. Due to room conditions, it may be necessary for the Contractor to make controller
adjustments, change the location or type of sensor to obtain proper operation and
coverage of the system in each room, therefore labor allowances should be made for
such changes and adjustments.
3.02 INTERLOCK AND SAFETY CIRCUITS
A. Close the outdoor air dampers when the related HVAC unit supply fan is de -energized:
1. The damper and actuators are specified in this section.
2. Outdoor air damper shall be fully opened before related air handling unit fan is
energized for 100% outside air use.
B. Exhaust/Supply Fans
1. Interlock the related exhaust and supply fans and the related outside air damper.
2. Interlock the exhaust fans with the related air -handling unit through software.
3. Interlock related exhaust fan for dishwasher with time delay off relay.
4. Interlock related exhaust fan for kiln with time delay off relay
5. Provide additional interlocks as indicated on fan schedule and on drawings.
3.03 GRAPHICS
A. Furnish as -built drawings indicating finally corrected "as installed" diagram(s) of the
complete Building Management Control System.
1. Modification of existing control systems shall be included.
2. These must be as -built and any changes during the warranty period drawings
must be revised and updated.
3. Provide final sequence of operation in written format.
B. Provide a set of the "as installed" diagram(s) of the complete control system laminated in
plastic and hung in the main mechanical room or as directed by Owner.
C. Provide a color -coded floor plan of the building showing the location of each system, and
the area served by each AHU or related zone. These must be of professional quality.
Floor plan to hang in room as directed by owner.
D. Provide computer graphics for each system.
3.04 IDENTIFICATION
A. Provide a laminated engraved nameplate on all control panels and devices shown on the
"as installed" control diagrams. Coordinate engraving with nomenclature used on the
diagrams.
BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM
VLK Architects, 2009 23 0933 8 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
B. A black -white -black laminated plastic engraved identifying nameplate shall be secured to
each terminal cabinet, and control panels. Identifying nameplates shall have'/z inch high,
engraved letters.
3.05 WIRING FOR BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEMS
A. Furnish and install all wire, conduit, raceways and cable systems required for the
complete operation of the Building Management and Control System.
B. All wiring for the Building Management and Control System is specified in this section and
includes, but is not limited to:
1. Wiring of interlock system.
2. Wiring of control instruments.
3. Wiring of control panels.
4. Wiring of related power supplies, i.e. transformers.
5. Wiring of 120 VAC power circuits for control panels and devices.
C. All materials and methods specified in this section shall comply with the requirements
specified in Division 26 of this specification.
D. All power supply requirements shall be connected to the building electrical distribution
system in an approved manner. Do not connect control equipment of circuits common
with other building loads or devices.
E. Temperature control wiring shall be jacketed cables installed with or without conduit as
specified below or single conductors installed in conduit. Control wiring shall have
minimum 300V insulation for low voltage wiring and 600V insulation for line voltage wiring.
F. All line voltage control wiring, all low voltage control wiring which is exposed in the central
plant, penthouse, and other similar spaces; all low voltage control wiring which is routed
through concealed inaccessible locations shall be installed in conduit.
G. All low voltage control wiring which is routed through concealed accessible locations may
be run without conduit provided that the wiring run without conduit is properly supported
from the building structure on maximum 5' centers and does not depend upon the ceiling
grid or the ceiling support system for support. Wiring run in plenum spaces shall be
plenum rated. Support all plenum wiring in accessible locations in bridle rings, J-hooks, D
rings. Plenum wiring is not to be supported within building structure or attached to conduit
raceways. All low voltage wiring must be installed through supports. Wires shall be
supported on 5' centers and identified at each termination point and at 50' centers
minimum. Install wire parallel or perpendicular to the structural features of the building.
H. Line and low voltage control wiring shall not be installed in the same conduit with control
wiring and shall not be installed in the same conduit with power wiring.
I. All wiring associated with building management and control system cover shall be as
follows:
1. Sensor jacket color, Green
2. LAN communications, Yellow
3. All THHN wiring shall comply with Division 26 insulation color identification
3.06 EXHAUST AND SUPPLY FANS:
A. Provide interlocks as scheduled on the plans unless shown on the electrical drawings.
BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM
VLK Architects, 2009 23 0933 - 9 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
B. Provide BMCS override to disable operation of all exhaust and supply fans interlocked
and/or specified throughout project.
C. Provide local override push button as indicated on plans. Override button shall enable
exhaust fan to operate for scheduled length of time (adjustable).
3.07 DX ROOFTOP UNITS
A. Each roof top unit is furnished with a low voltage thermostat. The BMCS shall provide
start/stop control. Provide a temperature sensor in the space to provide optimum
start/stop.
POIPIT pESCRIPTQN
TYPES
DEVICE
Start/Stop
DO
Control Relay
Space Temperature
Al
Space Thermistor
Supply Air Temperature
Al
Duct Sensor
Space CO2 Sensor
Al
Wall Mount CO2
Fan Start/Stop
BO
Cooling Stage
BO
Heating Stage
BO
3.08 START-UP AND POINT VERIFICATION
A. Final startup and point verification shall include the following information.
1. Field panel checkout.
a.
Verify enclosure is not mounted on vibrating surface.
b.
Verify class I and class II wiring is separated within enclosure.
C.
Check for shorts/groundsfinduced voltages/proper voltages.
d.
Verify proper point terminations in accordance with as-builts.
e.
Verify that all modules are in proper place and addressed.
f.
Verify proper power voltage.
g.
Load database and programming.
h.
Startup the panel.
i.
Point and device checkout.
2. Analog input point checkout
a.
Verify the correct wiring terminations per the design documentation
package, at the field panel. Verify that all wiring and terminations are neat
and dressed.
b.
Verify the point address by checking that the analog input instrument is
wired to the correct piece of field equipment. Do this by altering the
environment at the sensing element or by disconnecting one of the wires
at the sensor, and verifying that the reading at the field panel has reacted
to this change.
C.
Verify the point database to be correct, (i.e., alarmability, alarm limits,
slope/intercept, engineering units, etc.). Verify that the correct change of
value (COV) limit has been defined.
BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM
VLK Architects, 2009 23 0933 - 10 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
d. Verify the sensor has the correct range and input signal. (i.e., 20-120°F, 4
- 20 ma). Verify that the device is mounted in the correct location and is
wired and installed correctly per the design documentation package.
e.
Set-up and/or calibrate any associated equipment (i.e., panel LCD
meters, loop isolators, etc.). Verify that these auxiliary devices are
mounted in the correct location and are wired and installed correctly per
the design documentation package.
f.
Verify the correct reading at the field panel using appropriate MMI
devices. Verify that any associated LCD panel meters indicate the correct
measured value.
3. Digital input point checkout
a.
Verify the device is correctly wired and terminated as shown in the design
documentation package. Verify that all wiring and terminations are neat
and properly secured.
b.
Verify the point address by verifying that the digital input is correctly
terminated at the controlled piece of equipment.
C.
Verify the point database is correct (i.e., point name, address,
alarmability, etc.).
d.
Set-up and/or calibrate the associated equipment, i.e. smoke detector,
high/low temp detector, high/low static switch, flow switch, end switch,
current relay, pressure switch, etc. is mounted in the correct location, and
is wired and installed correctly per the control system installation
drawings.
e.
With the controlled equipment running or energized as described in the
digital output checkout procedures, verify the correct operation of the
digital input point and associated equipment by putting the digital input
monitored equipment into its two states. Verify that the proof or status
point indicates the correct value at the operator's terminal and that the
status led is giving the proper indication in each mode of operation
(on/off).
4. Digital output point checkout
a.
Verify that device is correctly wired and terminated as shown in the
design documentation package.
b.
Verify that the correct voltage is utilized in the circuit.
C.
Verify the point database to be correct (i.e. point name, address, etc.).
d.
Check and verify that the end device responds appropriately to the digital
output(s).
e.
After verifying the set-up and operation of any associated digital
input/proof points, check and verify correct operation of the logical point
and associated equipment by commanding the point to all possible states
(i.e. off, on, fast, slow, auto, etc.). Verify that the defined proof delay is
adequate for all modes of operation.
f.
If any interlocked equipment exists that has independent hand -off -auto or
auxiliary control wiring, verify correct operation of same. Also check that
any interlocked equipment such as EP switches for damper operation or
exhaust and return fans are wired correctly and operate correctly.
g.
Verify that the controlled piece or pieces of equipment can not be cause
to change state via the digital output if an associated hand -off -auto switch
is in the hand /on or hand/off mode of operation, unless specified as a
fireman's override point etc.
5. Analog output point checkout
a.
Verify the correct wiring or piping terminations per the design
documentation package, at the field panel. Verify that all wiring and piping
BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM
VLK Architects, 2009 23 0933 - 11 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
terminations are neat and dressed.
b.
Insure that the correct output device(s) are installed per the Control
System Installation Drawings. (i.e., I/P or P/I transducers, transformers,
power supply, etc.). Verify that these devices are installed, wired and
piped correctly. Verify that any configuration jumpers are in the proper
settings for the required application. Verify related transformers are fused
in accordance with installation drawings.
C.
Verify the point database to be correct. Verify that the correct COV limit
has been defined.
d.
Verify the point address by checking that the analog output is wired
and/or piped to the correct output transducer and/or equipment.
e.
Verify that the controlled device is calibrated (i.e., 3-8PSI valve, 8-13 PSI
damper motor, 4-20 ma variable frequency drive, etc.) and is in the
correct location, and is wired or piped and installed correctly per the
design documentation package. If the controlled device is not calibrated,
then a three-point (high, low and mid -point) calibration procedure must
take place. Verify proper operation of the end device. When calibration
has been verified, ensure that installation drawings, point database, and
PPCL have been updated.
f.
Set-up and or calibrate any associated equipment, (i.e., panel LCD
meters, loop isolators, pneumatic gauges, etc.). Also verify that these
auxiliary devices are mounted in the correct location, and are wired or
piped and installed correctly per the design documentation package.
g.
After verifying the set-up and operation of any associated equipment
check for the correct operation of the logical point and associated
equipment by commanding the analog output to the top and bottom of its
range. Verify that the control device(s) responded appropriately as
indicated by the design documentation package. Check to insure that all
network terminals, host console devices, etc. can also command these
outputs.
h.
Check that all pneumatic gauges, pilot positioners and LCD panel meters
indicate the correct values.
6. Terminal equipment controller checkout
a.
Load program database
b.
Enable programs
C.
Verify sequence of operations
7. Programming checkout
a.
Provide checkout for each system and sequence of operation.
b.
The following are sample sequence of operations tests. The intent of
these procedures is to provide a plan of action to verify system
operations via block checks of the project specific sequence of
operations. The procedures may be used in this format, or one procedure
to a page should more detail be required. The procedures outlined below
should be verified for accuracy, and may be modified to meet your
specific requirements.
C.
DESCRIPTION OF TEST: AHU Alarm Checkout. Verify AHU-1 discharge
air temperature alarming is operational and is received at the designated
terminal.
d.
INPUT TO TRIGGER TEST: Change discharge temperature high alarm
limit through software to a value below the current discharge temperature
(discharge temperature - 100F).
e.
EXPECTED OUTCOME: A high temperature alarm will be received per
the Alarm Definition Report at its designated terminal.
BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM
VLK Architects, 2009 23 0933 - 12 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
f. Provide signoff sheet with indication for test Pass, Fail, Date of test and
Initials for signoff.
8. Workstation checkout
a. Verify the operation of all trunk interface equipment.
b. Verify all workstation software, including options, based upon the
installation instructions for the PC.
C. Perform software backup (site, options, etc.)
d. Complete workstation configuration report for owner signoff.
e. Provide verification that all graphics have been created, as required by
project bid documents.
3.14 TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE
A. General
1. After completion of installation and start-up procedures, commence the specified
3-phase verification and testing sequence leading to final acceptance.
a. Follow in the order specified.
b. Each testing phase shall be satisfactorily completed before entering the
next phase.
2. Prior to entering each phase of the sequence, submit for approval, a written
agenda describing in detail the procedure to be followed to meet the requirements
for each specified verification, test or demonstration.
3. Submit for approval, a sample of the form on which the test will be reported.
a. Identify project.
b. Provide a list of all points, arrange in numerical order of point addresses.
1) Show point descriptor and location of each.
2) Indicate DDC panel that processes each point.
3) Use the list as a basis for the specified report form.
C. Signatures of participants and observers.
d. Results.
e. Description of adjustment or corrections of points in error.
I. Date.
4. Provide schedule of tests. Estimate dates of significant events.
5. Test, calibrate and adjust each point in the system as specified.
6. Provide documentation of all tests and verifications as specified.
7. Provide trend reports indicating proper control of all points for an extended period
of time.
B. Phase 1 - Testing, Calibrating, and Adjusting
1. Operate each analog point in the entire system.
a. At a point in the upper quarter of its range.
b. At a point in the lower quarter of its range.
C. At its operating point.
2. Provide personnel and diagnostic instruments at both the central and remote
locations.
3. Provide testing stimulants for alarms.
4. Use digital meters of double the accuracy of the instruments being calibrated.
5. Provide an approved test device for simulating high and low temperatures.
6. When the function is performed, read values at the central control and observe
the actual function at the field instrument.
7. Exercise each binary point and observe indication at console and simultaneously
observe operation in the field.
8. Submit an operation report for each point in the system, in approved format, and
describe any corrective or adjusting action taken.
9. Test all power transducers with a Dranetz Power Analyzer.
BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM
VLK Architects, 2009 23 0933 -13 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
C. Phase 2 - Equipment and Point Verification
1. Verify calibration or function of each point.
a. Verify analog points at operating value.
b. Record on specified form.
C. Make approved adjustments to out of tolerance points.
1) Identify these points for ready reference.
2. After verification procedure in completed:
a. Verify corrected points.
b. Record on specified form.
C. Points requiring correction.
1) Replace sensor or actuator if electrical measurements indicated
components are out of specified tolerance.
D. Phase 3 - Software Verification
1. Submit agenda and report format for software demonstrations.
2. Demonstrate to the Owner and the Engineer that all software programs and
automatic control sequences function as specified.
3. Demonstrate compliance with response time specifications.
a. Simulate normal heavy load conditions.
b. Initiate at least ten successive occurrences on normal heavy load
conditions as specified, and measure response time of typical alarms and
status changes.
4. Provide written documentation of demonstration, signed by representatives of the
Contractor and Engineer.
E. Provide the following reports to Engineer at final completion of all Testing.
1. List of all points.
2. List of all points currently in alarm.
3. List of all disabled points.
4. List of all points in over -ride status.
5. List of all points currently locked out.
6. List of user accounts and access levels.
7. List all weekly schedules.
8. List of holiday programming schedules.
9. List of limits and deadbands.
10. System diagnostics reports including, list of DDC panels on line and
communicating, status of all DDC terminal units device points.
11. List of programs.
12. Provide trend data reports to ensure proper operation and sequence control of
BMCS.
F. Substantial Completion of the BMCS will not occur until completion and acceptance of all
testing and acceptance procedures.
3.15 TRAINING
A. The contractor shall provide factory -trained instructor to give full instruction to designated
personnel in the operation of the system installed. Instructors shall be thoroughly familiar
with all aspects of the subject matter they are to teach. The contractor shall provide all
students with a student binder containing product specific training modules for the system
installed. All training shall be held during normal working hours of 8:00 am to 4:30 PM
weekdays.
BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM
VLK Architects, 2009 23 0933 - 14 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
B. Provide 4 hours of training for Owner's designated operating personnel. Training shall
include:
Explanation of drawings, operations and maintenance manuals
Walk-through of the job to locate control components
Operator workstation and peripherals
DDC controller and ASC operation/function
Operator control functions including graphic generation and field panel programming
Operation of portable operator's terminal
Explanation of adjustment, calibration and replacement procedures
Student binder with training modules
C. Since the Owner may require personnel to have more comprehensive understanding of
the hardware and software, additional training must be available from the Contractor.
3.21 PROJECT MANAGEMENT
A. Provide a designated project manager who will be responsible for the following:
1. Construct and maintain project schedule.
2. Authorized to accept and execute orders or instructions from General Contractor,
Owner / Architect & Engineer.
3. Attend project meetings as necessary to avoid conflict and delays.
4. Make necessary field decisions relating to this section.
5. Coordination / Single point contact.
6. Have Internet access for project management.
END OF SECTION
BUILDING MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM
VLK Architects, 2009 23 0933 - 15 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 23 1123
GAS PIPING AND APPURTENANCES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install steel gas pipe inside buildings, including the supply line from the
meter, service lines to gas equipment and appliances, termination of the service line with
a plug valve, drip leg, and final connection to equipment and appliances with unions.
B. Coordinate service line from utility main and extend to meter. Coordinate installation of
the service line and meter with Gas Company.
C. Extend steel gas piping from meter to inside the building to all fixtures, appliances and
equipment requiring gas.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Division 22 - Plumbing
1. Pipe and Pipe Fittings.
2. Valves, Strainers and Vents.
B. Division 23 — Mechanical
1. Valves, Strainers and Vents
1.03 UTILITY CONNECTIONS
A. Make arrangements for and pay all fees and connection charges for obtaining service to
the building.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPE AND FITTINGS - ABOVE GRADE
A. Pipe 2 inch and Smaller:
1. Schedule 40 ASTM A 53 black steel pipe
2. Factory fabricated socket weld fittings.
B. Pipe Larger than 2 inch:
1. Schedule 40 ASTM A 53 black steel pipe.
2. Factory fabricated butt weld fittings for welded steel pipes shall conform to ASTM
A-234 WPB (seamless weld fittings).
C. Unions:
1. Standard 150 lb. (300 lb. water, oil or gas) malleable iron.
2. Ground joint unions, with bronze seat.
3. Flange joints for pipe larger than 2 inch in diameter.
D. Flanges:
1. Steel flanges. ANSI B16.5 and ASTM A-105.
2.02 PIPE AND FITTINGS - BELOW GRADE OUTSIDE BUILDING
A. Polyethylene pipe shall be ASTM D3350 Grade PE24 cell classification and ASTM
D1248 Class B material classification.
GAS PIPING AND APPURTENANCES
VLK Architects, 2009 23 1123 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
B. Pipe shall be medium density polyethylene manufactured by Poly Pipe Industries, Inc. or
Performance Pipe.
2.03 VALVES
A. See Sections 22 0523 and 23 0523
2.05 GAS PRESSURE REGULATOR
A. Size the gas pressure regulator in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations
for flow quantities and reduced pressure as required for all equipment. Coordinate final
equipment gas pressure requirements prior to ordering regulators. Provide American
Meter Company regulators or approved equal, suitable for outdoor installation.
Regulators outside exposed to weather shall be installed with vent in vertical down
position.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Installation Standards: Install gas piping in accordance with recommendations of the
National Fire Protection Association.
B. Drip Legs: Install a capped drip leg 6 inches long at the base of each vertical rise.
C. Coating and Wrapping. Coat and wrap underground piping in accordance with the service
utility company standards.
D. Sleeves.
1. Encase gas piping running in or through solid partitions with thin wall metal
conduit. Sleeve piping and fittings shall be two pipe sizes, but not less than 1
inch larger than encased gas piping.
2. Encase gas piping running below slab in Schedule 40 PVC, minimum size two
pipe sizes larger than gas pipe. Vent PVC sleeve to atmosphere with a 1-1/2 inch
vent with 1-1/2 inch return bend above building roof. Seal ends of sleeve with UL
fire rated caulk.
E. Do not install gas piping exposed to view inside public area, or occupied spaces, without
prior written approval.
F. Weld all gas piping above grade.
G. Provide test ports and isolation valves to enable proper testing of system in the future.
H. Provide isolation valve and unions across regulators for proper removal.
Provide transition risers where below grade polyethylene pipe changes to steel pipe
above grade.
3.02 TESTING GAS PIPING
A. Preliminary gas test as required by Code, but minimum test pressure of 50 PSI held for
not less than eight hours without noticeable drop.
B. Test joints with a soap solution while lines are under pressure.
GAS PIPING AND APPURTENANCES
VLK Architects, 2009 23 1123 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
C. Repair leaks.
D. Final gas test shall be with a 24 inch column of mercury or a diaphragm gauge with a
minimum dial size of 3-1/2 inches with a set hand and a pressure range not to exceed
twenty (20) psig with 2/10-pound increments. The minimum test pressure shall not be
less than ten (10) psi and the maximum test pressure shall not exceed twelve (12) psig.
This test will be observed for no less than (30) thirty minutes with no drop in pressure.
E. Provide copy of gas pressure test reports in Operations & Maintenance Manual.
3.03 IDENTIFICATION CONDUCTOR
A. Spiral A #12 AWG insulated copper conductor the full length of the thermoplastic piping
system. Fasten to the pipe at 3 foot intervals with plastic tie wraps.
B. Terminate at each end in a 12 inch x 12 inch x 4 inch FRP junction box.
1. Bolted gasketed cover with stainless steel screws.
2. Screw type terminal strip.
3. Legend on cover "gas pipe identification conductor."
C. Set in concrete pad.
3.04 UNDERGROUND STEEL PIPE
A. Reference Specification Section Underground Steel Pipe Corrosion Protection.
3.05 PAINT EXPOSED OUTSIDE GAS PIPE
A. Gas pipe on wall to roof and gas pipe on roof shall be protected from rust.
B. Paint pipe with a flat alkyd coating, clean pipe prior to painting by preparing surface by
hand tool cleaning per SSPC-SP2-82, applying one coat of Glidden Y-590 Rustmaster
Metal Primer White and top coat of Yellow Alkyd Flat Enamel.
END OF SECTION
GAS PIPING AND APPURTENANCES
VLK Architects, 2009 23 1123 - 3 2737.03
SECTION 23 3113
DUCTWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
A. Duct construction, support and accessories. Dimensions shown on the drawings are free
area dimensions.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Division 23 Mechanical
1. Air Devices
2. Insulation
3. Fan Coil Units
4. Fans
5. Packaged Rooftop Air Conditioners
6. Testing, Balancing And Adjusting (TAB) of Environmental Systems
B. Finishes, Painting and Color Coding
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The intent of ductwork specifications is to obtain superior quality workmanship resulting in
an installation that is absolutely satisfactory in both function and appearance. Provide
ductwork in accordance with the specifications for each type of service.
B. An approved contractor for this work under this division shall be:
1. A specialist in this field and have the personnel, experience, training, skill, and
the organization to provide a practical working system.
2. Able to furnish evidence of having contracted for and installed not less than 5
systems of comparable size and type that have served their owners satisfactorily
for not less than 5 years.
1.04 GUARANTEE
A. Guarantee ductwork for 1 year from the date of substantial completion. The guarantee
covers workmanship, noise, chatter, whistling, or vibration. Ductwork shall be free from
pulsation under conditions of operation.
1.05 CONTRACTOR COORDINATION
A. Erect ducts in the general locations shown, but conform to structural and finish conditions
of the building. Before fabricating any ductwork, check the physical conditions at the job
site and make necessary changes in cross sections, offsets, and similar items, whether
they are specifically indicated or not.
B. Coordinate location of ductwork with structural members and Architectural drawings and
requirements.
1.06 SHOP DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES
A. Submit shop drawings of all ductwork layouts, including enlarged plans and elevations of
all air handling equipment, and summit details of duct fittings, including particulars such
DUCTWORK
VLK Architects, 2009 23 3113 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
as gauge sizes, welds, and configurations prior to starting work.
B. Submit product data and sealing materials to be used.
C. Submit sound attenuation data.
D. Submit shop drawings in plan, elevation and sections, and three-dimensional view
showing equipment in mechanical equipment areas.
PART 2 - DUCTS
2.01 STANDARDS AND CODES
A. Except as otherwise indicated, sheet metal ductwork material and installation shall
comply with the latest edition of SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards. Air
distribution devices (such as dampers) included in this specification shall comply with the
latest applicable SMACNA Fire, Smoke and Radiation Damper Installation Guide for
HVAC Systems and NFPA 90A.
2.02 DUCT MATERIAL AND CONSTRUCTION
A. Except for the special ducts specified below use lock forming quality prime galvanized
steel sheets or coils up to 60" wide. Stencil each sheet with gauge and manufacturer's
name. Stencil coils of sheet steel throughout on 10' centers with gauge and
manufacturer's name. Provide certification of duct gauge and manufacturer for each size
duct.
B. Rectangular low and medium pressure duct constructed of sheet metal in accordance
with the latest edition of SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards.
C. Low pressure round ducts shall be shop fabricated with snap lock longitudinal seams.
Ducts shall be constructed for a minimum of 2" w.g. static pressure.
E. Dishwasher Hood Exhaust System: Welded 304 Stainless steel.
F. Kitchen exhaust duct: Welded Black steel, minimum 16 gauge.
2.03 ACOUSTICAL DUCT
A. Duct and fittings:
1. Double wall acoustically treated.
2. Annular space packed with fiberglass insulation.
3. Perforated metal liner to provide specific acoustic impedance
B. Pressure rating and tests as specified for single wall ductwork.
2.04 DUCT SEALING OF SEAMS AND JOINTS
A. Follow seal classification as indicated in Table 1-2 of SMACNA "HVAC AIR DUCT
LEAKAGE TEST MANUAL". Use seal class A for 4" w.g. static. All longitudinal and
transverse joints and seams shall be sealed by use of a fireproof, non -hardening, and
non -migrating elastomeric sealant. With the exception of continuously welded joints and
machine made spiral lock seams, joints and seams made air tight with duct sealer. Duct
sealer shall be Benjamin Foster 32-14.
1. Indoor applications — Benjamin Foster 32-14
2. Outdoor applications — Benjamin Foster 32-17
DUCTWORK
VLK Architects, 2009 23 3113 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
2.05 FLEXIBLE DUCT LOW PRESSURE
A. Construction:
1. Continuous galvanized spring steel wire helix, with reinforced metalized cover
a. The fabric shall be mechanically fastened to the steel helix without the
use of adhesives.
2. UL 181 Class I air duct label
3. Reinforced vapor barrier jacket
4. Rated for use at system pressure (6" we minimum)
5. Flexible duct connections from lateral taps to variable volume boxes or terminal
boxes shall be rated at twice the maximum pressure rating of the medium
pressure system.
B. Fire hazard classification:
1. Flame spread rating 25 maximum.
2. Smoke developed rating 50 maximum.
C. Thermal characteristics:
1. R-6 BTU/hr/sq. ft./°F
2. 2" wall thickness insulation with 1" overlap
D. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. Flexmaster
2. Hart & Cooley
3. Omniair
2.06 FIRE DAMPERS
A. Fire dampers for required wall ratings that are 95% minimum free area. Provide Type B
or Type C UL dampers for low, medium and high-pressure rectangular, square or round
ducts. Dampers shall be activated by a fusible link designed to react at 165°F. Install per
manufactures recommendations to provide a UL assembly. Provide sealed sleeve to
meet desired leakage performance.
B. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1.
Ruskin
2.
Prefco Products
3.
Air Balance
4.
Greenheck, Inc.
5.
Nailor Industries
6.
Pottoroff
2.07 DUCT LINING
A. Duct lining shall be 1" thick, 1-1/2 lb. density, flexible lining coated on the air stream side
to reduce attrition. Liner shall be Schuler Lina-Coustic, Certain -Teed Ultralite, or equal
meeting requirements of NFPA 90-A. Provide I.A.Q. rated liner.
2.08 VOLUME DAMPERS
A. Manual balancing dampers that meet or exceed the following minimum construction
standards:
1. Frame 16-gauge
2. Blades 16-gauge
DUCTWORK
VLK Architects, 2009 23 3113 - 3 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
3. Bearings corrosion resistant
4. Concealed linkage
5. Opposed blade dampers
B. Acceptable manufacturer:
1. Ruskin Model MD-35 or approved equal, by
2. Arrow
3. American Warming and Ventilating
4. Nailor Industries
5. Pottoroff
2.09 ACCESS DOORS
A. Round spin -in door of galvanized steel.
1.
Fire proof sealing gaskets and quick fastening locking devices
2.
Insulated door
3.
Conform to the requirements of the NFPA
4.
Identification and use of each access door
5.
UL label to match the construction in which it is installed
6.
Cable attached to door and outer frame
7.
Low leakage Access Door
B. Acceptable Manufacturer
1.
Flex master, Inspector Series
2.
Approved Equal
2.10 COMBINATION FIRE/SMOKE DAMPERS
A. Combination fire/smoke dampers meeting the following requirements:
1. Each combination fire/smoke damper shall be 1-1/2 hour fire rated under UL
Standard 555, 4th Edition, and shall be further classified by Underwriters
Laboratories as a leakage Rated Damper for use in smoke control systems under
the latest version of UL555S, and bear a UL label attesting to same. The damper
manufacturer shall have tested, and qualified with UL, a complete range of
damper sizes covering all dampers required by this specification. Testing and
qualifying a single damper size is not acceptable. The leakage rating under
UL555S shall be Leakage Class II.
2. The damper frame shall be a minimum of 16 gauge, galvanized steel, formed into
a structural hat channel shape with tabbed corners for reinforcement, as
approved in testing by Underwriters Laboratories. Bearings shall be integral high
surface area non -electrolytic materials construction to incorporate a friction free
frame blade lap seal, or molybdenum disulfide impregnated stainless steel or
bronze oilite sleeve type turning in the damper frame. The dampers shall be
opposed blade type. The blades shall be constructed with a minimum of 16-
gauge galvanized steel. The blade edge seal material shall be able to withstand
450°F. The jamb seals shall be flexible stainless steel compression type.
3. As part of the UL qualification, dampers shall have demonstrated a capacity to
operate (open and close) under HVAC system operation conditions, with
pressures of at least 4" water gauge in the closed position, and 2,000 fpm air
velocity in the open position.
4. Each combination fire/smoke damper shall be equipped with a controlled 7 to 15
second heat -actuated release device. The electric EFL shall close and lock the
fire/smoke damper during test, smoke detection, power failure or fire conditions
through actuator closure springs. To prevent duct and HVAC component
damage, the damper shall at all times be connected to the actuator for controlled
DUCTWORK
VLK Architects, 2009 23 3113 - 4 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
closure in not less than 7 seconds and no more than 15 seconds. Instantaneous
damper closure is unacceptable. After exposure to high temperature of fire, the
damper must be inspected prior to reset to ensure proper operation. Release
temperature is 165°F.
5. Provide UL555S qualified electric actuator at 120 VAC.
6. Provide air -foil type blades.
B. Provide integral sleeves
C. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Ruskin
2. Air Balance, Inc.
3. Greenheck, Inc.
4. Nailor Industries
5. Pottoroff
2.11 SMOKE DAMPERS
A. Smoke dampers meeting the following requirements.
1. Each smoke damper shall be classified by Underwriters Laboratories as a
leakage Rated Damper for use in smoke control systems under the latest version
of UL555S, and bear a UL label attesting to same. The damper manufacturer
shall have tested, and qualified with UL, a complete range of damper sizes
covering all dampers required by this specification. Testing and qualifying a
single damper size is not acceptable. The leakage rating under UL555S shall be
Leakage Class II.
2. The damper frame shall be a minimum of 16 gauge, galvanized steel, formed into
a structural hat channel shape with tabbed corners for reinforcement, as
approved in testing by Underwriters Laboratories. Bearings shall be integral high
surface area non -electrolytic materials construction to incorporate a friction free
frame blade lap seal, or molybdenum disulfide impregnated stainless steel or
bronze oilite sleeve type turning in the damper frame. The dampers shall be
opposed blade type. The blades shall be constructed with a minimum of 16
gauge, galvanized steel. The blade edge seal material shall be able to withstand
450°F. The jamb seals shall be flexible stainless steel compression type.
3. As part of the UL qualification, dampers shall have demonstrated a capacity to
operate (open and close) under HVAC system operation conditions, with
pressures of at least 4" water gauge in the closed position, and 2,000 fpm air
velocity in the open position.
4. Provide UL555S qualified electric actuator at 120 VAC.
5. Provide air -foil type blades.
B. Provide integral sleeves.
C. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1.
Ruskin
2.
Air Balance, Inc.
3.
Greenheck, Inc.
4.
Nailor Industries
5.
Pottoroff
2.12 DIFFUSER FITTINGS LOW PRESSURE TAPS
A. Fitting shall meet or exceed the following minimum construction standards:
1. Conical with a base diameter two inches larger than the tap diameter.
DUCTWORK
VLK Architects, 2009 23 3113 - 5 2737.03
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
Construct fitting and damper of galvanized steel in accordance with ASTM A 527,
G90 finish.
a. Fitting with a 3/16-inch high stop bead approximately 2-1/2-inches from
the discharge end of the fitting
b. Provide the fitting with a butterfly damper, damper rod, end bearings and
heavy duty locking quadrant.
C. Size the length of the straight section of the fitting to match the damper
blade diameter. Center the damper blade in the straight section.
Match the fitting body gauge to the SMACNA duct gauge, but not less than:
a. Through 8 inches: 26 gauge; Damper blade 22 gauge
b. 10 inches and 12 inches: 24 gauge; Damper blade 22 gauge
C. 14 inches and 16 inches: 22 gauge; Damper blade 22 gauge
d. 18 inches and 20 inches: 20 gauge; Damper blade 20 gauge
Fasten damper blade to a 3/8 X 3/8 continuous square rod with minimum (2)
galvanized U-bolts.
Support the damper rod to the fitting with airtight nylon end bushings / bearings.
Provide the damper with a self-locking regulator and handle.
Provide a 2" sheet metal stand-off to extend the regulator.
Flex duct grip area — 2 inches behind retaining bead
Flex duct retaining bead —1 inch from end
Conical length of at least 3 inches
Barrel length of at -least 9 inches
A. Use construction methods and requirements as outlined in SMACNA HVAC Duct
Construction Standards as well as SMACNA Balancing and Adjusting publications,
unless indicated otherwise in the specifications. Refer to details on the drawings for
additional information.
B. Reinforce ducts in accordance with recommended construction practice of SMACNA.
Provide additional reinforcement of large plenums as required to prevent excessive
flexing and or vibration.
C. Cross break or bead sheet metal for rigidity, except ducts that are 12 or less in the
longest dimension.
D. Where ducts pass through walls in exposed areas, install suitable escutcheons made of
sheet metal angles as closers. At locations where ductwork passes through floors,
provide watertight sleeves projecting 3" above finished floor and flush with bottom of floor
slab. Fabricate sleeves of 1/8" thick steel, galvanized after fabrication. Anchor into
adjacent floor slab as required. Sleeves are required inside as well as outside chases.
Support ducts where passing through floors with steel structural angles of adequate
bearing surface. Structural angles shall be galvanized after fabrication. Do not rest
structural angles on top of the sleeve.
E. Metal or lined ductwork exposed to view through grilles, registers, and other openings
shall be painted flat black. Do not install grilles, registers, or similar items until painting is
complete.
F. Fire Dampers shall be installed per manufacturer's recommendations to create a UL
rated assembly.
DUCTWORK
VLK Architects, 2009 23 3113 - 6 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
G. Install end bearing at all location where damper shaft penetrates duct wall.
H. Clean duct to remove accumulated dust. Ducts shall be closed on ends between phases
of fabrication to assure that no foreign material enters the ducts.
3.02 DUCTWORK
A. Construct rectangular ducts and round ducts in accordance with the latest SMACNA
HVAC Duct Construction Standards. Use the static pressure specified on the air handling
unit schedule or fan schedules as a minimum for duct construction. All ductwork between
the variable volume air handling units and the terminal units shall be constructed to the
medium pressure ductwork specification.
B. Provide adjustable, galvanized splitter-dampers, pivoted at the downstream end with
appropriate control device at each supply duct split.
C. For branch ducts wider than 18", and when shown on drawings provide extractors with an
appropriate control device at each rectangular zone or branch supply duct connection.
Provide controllers for extractors. Branch ducts shall have a 450 angle in the direction of
flow. Do not provide extractor at branch ducts to sidewall registers where the registers
are within 10 feet of the main duct.
D. Shop manufactured curved blade scoops may be used for branch duct takeoffs up to 18"
wide. Taper scoop blade to the end, to prevent any sagging that may cut into, or damage
duct liner if specified during operation.
1. Construct shop manufactured scoops and splitter blades of galvanized sheet
metal 2 full gauges heavier than equivalent sheet metal gauge of branch duct (up
to 16 gauge).
2. Check extractors, scoops and splitter blades thoroughly for freedom of operation.
Oil bearing points before installing.
E. Use pushrod operator with locking nut and butt hinges assembly.
F. Provide opposed -blade volume dampers with an appropriate control device in each of the
following locations:
1. Return air ductwork
2. Outside air branch duct
3. Exhaust branch duct
4. Exhaust connections to hoods except kitchen grease hoods or equipment
5. In each zone at multi -zone unit discharge installed downstream of duct mounted
re -heat coils
6. At each outside air and return air duct connection to plenum of constant volume
units
7. At discharge side of constant volume boxes
8. Where otherwise indicated or required for balancing coordinate location of
additional dampers required by TAB Contractor.
9. Provide multi -blade dampers when blade width exceeds 12". Provide end bearing
where damper shaft penetrates duct wall.
G. Elbows
1. Rectangular: Where square elbows are shown, or are required for good airflow,
provide and install single -wall or airfoil turning vanes. Job -fabricated turning
vanes, if used, shall be single -thickness vanes of galvanized steel sheets of the
same gauge metal as the duct in which they are installed. Furnish vanes
fabricated for the same angle as the duct offset. The use of radius elbows with a
DUCTWORK
VLK Architects, 2009 23 3113 - 7 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M ConsoAdated High School
College Station Independent School District
centerline radius of not less than 1-1/2 times the duct width may provided in
lieu of vaned elbows where space and air flow requirements permit.
2. Round Oval Duct. Provide elbows with a centerline radius of 1-1/2 times the duct
diameter or duct width. For round ducts, furnish smooth elbows or 5 piece, 900
elbows and 3 piece, 450 elbows.
H. For control devices concealed by ceilings, furring, or in other inaccessible locations,
furnish extension rods and appropriate recessed -type Young regulators, mounted on the
surface of the ceiling or the furring, unless specified, or shown otherwise. Provide with
chrome plated cover plates. Use only one mitered gear set for each control device.
I. Install streamline deflectors at any point where dividing a sheet metal duct around piping
or where other such obstruction is permitted. Where such obstructions occur in insulated
ducts, fill space inside streamliner and around obstructions with glass fiber insulation.
J. Insulated Flexible Duct
1. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, and the terms of its UL
listing. Duct shall not exceed 6' in length. Make connections by use of sheet
metal collars and stainless steel circular screw clamps. Clamps shall encircle the
duct completely and be tightened with a worm gear operator to the point that will
provide an airtight connection without unnecessary deformation of the duct.
Provide one clamp on flexible duct and one clamp on external insulation. Vapor
barrier jacket shall be tucked inside to conceal insulation material.
2. Construct bends over 450 with sheet metal elbows.
K. Duct Supports.
1. Horizontal ducts up to 40". Support horizontal ducts up to and including 40" in
their greater dimension by means of #18 U.S. gauge galvanized iron strap
hangers attached to the ducts by a minimum of two locations per side by means
of screws, rivets or clamps, and fastened to inserts with toggle bolts, beam
clamps or other approved means. Place supports on at least 8' centers. Use
clamps to fasten hangers to reinforcing on sdaled ducts.
2. Horizontal ducts larger than 40". Support horizontal ducts larger than 40" in their
greatest dimension by means of hanger rods bolted to angle iron trapeze
hangers. Place supports on at least 8' centers in accordance with SMACNA
Standards.
3. Support vertical ducts where they pass through the floor lines with 1-1/2" x 1-1/2"
x 1/4" angles for ducts up to 60". Above 60", the angles shall be increased in
strength and sized on an individual basis considering space requirements.
4. Supports shall be suspended from structural or by independent support. Do not
support from structural bridging. Upper attachments should be selected with a
safety factor of 4 or 5 times actual load conditions and subject to Engineers
approval. Double wrap straps over open web of joist.
L. Branch connections for medium pressure ductwork shall be made with a conical lateral.
Field installed conical branch ducts shall be minimum 20-gauge galvanized sheet metal,
"Everdur" welded and coated with "Galvabar".
3.03 PLENUMS
A. Return air plenums shall be rectangular galvanized sheet metal ductwork.
B. Fabricate plenums upstream of fan of 16-gauge material.
C. Fabricate plenums upstream of filters minimum 18-gauge material.
DUCTWORK
VLK Architects, 2009 23 3113 - 8 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
3.04 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS
A. Where ducts connect to fans or air handling units that are not internally isolated, make
flexible airtight connections using "Ventglas" fabric. The fabric shall be fire-resistant,
waterproof and mildew resistant with a weight of approximately 30 ounces per square
yard. Provide a minimum of 1/2" slack in the connections, and a minimum of 2-1/2"
distance between the edges of the ducts. Also, provide a minimum of 1" slack for each
inch of static pressure on the fan system. Fasten fabric to apparatus and to adjacent
ductwork by means of galvanized flats or draw bands. Where connections are made in
outdoor locations, seal fabric to metal with mastic.
3.05 ACCESS DOORS
A. Install ductwork access doors in structural angle frames and provide with sash locks and
hinges arranged for convenient access. Construct doors that occur in insulated ducts with
an insulation filler. Stencil each door for specific use. Install access doors in each of the
following locations:
1. Fire Dampers
2. Smoke Dampers
3. Smoke/fire Dampers
4. Outside Air Dampers
5. Duct Mounted Coils (up -stream)
6. Control Dampers
B. Minimum size of access door 12" or 1" smaller than duct.
C. Construct access door air tight, and conform to recommendations of NFPA and
SMACNA.
D. Demonstrate suitability of access for the intended purpose. Install multiple access doors
as required.
3.06 DUCT LINING
A. Install glass fiber acoustical lining where shown on drawings. Secure to duct surfaces
with Benjamin Foster 85-62 adhesive and sheet metal fasteners on 12" centers. Coat
exposed edges and leading edges of cross joints with adhesive.
B. Provide metal nosing that is either channeled or "Z" profiled or are integrally -formed from
the duct wall securely installed over transversely oriented liner edges facing the air
stream at fan discharge and at any interval of lined duct preceded by unlined duct.
C. Refer to Insulation & Liner Detail on drawings for locations requiring liner to be installed.
D. Do not install liner in multi -zone unit ductwork.
3.07 SEALING OF SEAMS AND JOINTS
A. Seal supply, return, exhaust and outside air duct systems.
3.08 FLUES
A. Provide and install flues for all gas fired equipment.
DUCTWORK
VLK Architects, 2009 23 3113 - 9 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
B. Refer to plans for all related locations.
C. Coordinate size with selected equipment manufacturer.
D. All fittings and accessories shall be manufactured by the flue manufacturer. The flue shall
be installed per manufacturer's instruction.
3.09 ACOUSTICAL DUCT
A. Install acoustical ductwork where indicated on the drawings.
3.10 SCREENS
A. Furnish and install screens on all duct, fan, etc., openings furnished by the Contractor
that lead to, or are, outdoors; screens shall be No. 16 gauge, one-half inch (1/2") mesh in
removable galvanized steel frame. Provide safety screens meeting OSHA requirements
for protection of maintenance personnel on all fan inlets and fan outlets to which no
ductwork is connected.
END OF SECTION
DUCTWORK
VLK Architects, 2009 23 3113 - 10 2737.03
SECTION 23 3416
FANS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
A. Furnish and install fans, including centrifugal, axial and propeller types, with supplemental
equipment.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Division 23 Mechanical:
1. Ductwork
2. Vibration Isolation
3. Air Balance
4. Electrical Provisions of Mechanical Work
1.03 PERFORMANCE
A. Provide fan type, arrangement, rotation, capacity, size, motor horsepower, and motor
voltage as shown. Fan capacities and characteristics are scheduled on the drawings.
Provide fans capable of accommodating static pressure variations of +10% of scheduled
design at the design air flow.
B. Rate fans according to appropriate Air Moving and Conditioning Association, Inc. (AMCA),
approved test codes and procedures. Supply fans with sound ratings below the
maximums permitted by AMCA Standards. All fans provided must be licensed to bear the
Certified Ratings Seal.
C. Statically and dynamically balance all fans.
D. Motors shall be sized so that they do not operate within the motor service factor.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit fan performance curves with system operating point plotted on curves.
B. Submit manufacturer's printed installation instructions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Cook
B. Greenheck
C. Penn Ventilator
D. Acme
E. Carnes
FANS
VLK Architects, 2009 23 3416 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
2.02 PROTECTIVE COATINGS
A. Manufacturer's Standard. Apply to fans, motors and accessories, the manufacturer's
standard prime coat and finish, except on aluminum surfaces or where special coatings
are required.
B. Galvanizing. After fabrication of the parts, hot -dip coat surfaces that require galvanizing.
Where galvanizing is specified, a zinc coating may be used. After fabrication, apply the
zinc coating and air-dry the coating to 95% pure zinc. Acceptable zinc coatings include
Zincilate, Sealube, Amercoat, Diametcoat, or an approved equal.
2.03 SUPPLEMENTAL EQUIPMENT
A. Motor Covers. Provide weatherproof motor covers for installations out of doors. Apply the
same finish as used on the fan.
B. Belt Drives:
1. Unless otherwise specified for belt -driven fans, equip the fan motors with variable
pitch sheaves. Select the sheave size for the approximate midpoint of adjustment
and to provide not less than 20% speed variation from full open to full closed.
Size drives for 150% of rated horsepower. Key the fan sheave to the fan shaft.
2. Nonadjustable motor sheaves may be used for motor sizes over 15 horsepower,
at the Contractor's option. However, if changing a nonadjustable sheave
becomes necessary to produce the specified capacity, the change must be made
at no additional cost.
3. Provide belt guards and apply the same finish as used on the fan.
4. Oil and heat resistant, nonstatic type belts.
5. Bearings shall be designed and individually tested specifically for use in air
handling applications. Construction shall be heavy duty, regreasable, ball type, in
a pillow block, cast iron housing, selected for a minimum L50 life in excess of
200,000 hours at maximum catalog operating speed.
C. Safety Disconnect Switch: Provide a factory -wired to motor, safety disconnect switch on
each unit.
D. Relief Vents and Air Inlets: Provide vents and inlets with aluminum frames and 1/2" mesh,
galvanized bird screens. Include dampers where shown.
E. Prefabricated Roof Curbs: Furnish prefabricated roof curbs as detailed. The minimum
height is 14". Include a resilient pad on each roof curb so the equipment can be mounted
on the top flange for proper seal. Coordinate roof slope and curb to ensure equipment is
installed in level position. Provide double shell to protect insulation from damage.
F. Dampers. Where automatic backdraft damper is scheduled:
1. Multi -bladed.
2. Heavy duty.
3. Roll formed aluminum blades.
4. Nylon bearings.
5. Neoprene weather strip on blade edge.
G. Where motorized damper is scheduled:
1. The motor and damper are specified in the Building Management and Control
System Specification.
H. All fans are to be provided with a durable, deep etched, .025" thick, factory installed
FANS
VLK Architects, 2009 23 3416 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
aluminum identification plate with the following information. Plates are to be furnished with
four mounting holes.
1. Fan mark as indicated on the Contract Drawings.
2. Serial number
3. Model number
4. Capacity (CFM) and static pressure.
5. Motor HP
6. Motor Amps
7. Manufacturer
8. Motor phase
9. Number of Belts/Make/Size
10. Motor volts
2.04 VENTILATION AND EXHAUST FANS
A. Provide the ventilation and exhaust fans shown on the drawings.
B. Provide each motor with internal overload protection.
C. Provide each belt driven fan with approved, totally enclosed belt guard.
D. Provide approved safety screen where inlet or outlet is exposed.
E. Provide duct flanges where required for connections.
F. Furnish kitchen hood exhaust fans with vented curb extension that meets NFPA 96,
cleanout port, grease tap, curb seal, drain connection and hinge kit.
G. Furnish supply fans with 1" aluminum, washable filter section.
2.05 ROOFTOP VENTILATION AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS
A. Provide the rooftop ventilation and exhaust systems shown on the drawings.
B. Provide each motor with internal overload protection.
C. Components:
1. Aluminum, stainless steel or plastic coated bird guard.
2. Screws and fasteners of stainless steel or nonferrous material.
3. All aluminum construction unless indicated otherwise on fan schedule.
D. Welded construction, corrosion resistant fasteners, minimum 16 gauge marine allow
aluminum.
E. Aluminum base shall be continuously welded curb cap corners.
2.06 GRAVITY ROOF -TOP INTAKE AND RELIEF VENTS
A. Provide the rooftop intake and relief vent systems shown on the drawings.
B. Provide with aluminum, stainless steel or plastic coated bird guard.
1. Screws and fasteners of stainless steel or nonferrous material
2. All aluminum construction
C. Welded construction, corrosion resistant fasteners, minimum 16-gauge marine alloy
aluminum.
FANS
VLK Architects, 2009 23 3416 - 3 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
D. Aluminum base shall be continuously welded curb cap comers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install fans according to the manufacturer's instructions and in the locations shown on the
drawings.
B. Do not operate fans or fan powered devices for any purpose until ductwork is clean, filters
in place, bearings lubricated and the fan has been run under observation.
C. Roof mounted fans and gravity roof -top intake and relief vents shall be secured to the
curb with stainless steel lag screws at a minimum of 6-inches on center. Follow
manufacturer's installation instructions if they are more stringent. Install roof mounted
equipment in a level position. Units shall be seated on properly sized curb. Gap between
base of the fan and top of the curb shall be sealed with neoprene V x Ya" gasket. Gasket
shall be glued or attached with pressure sensitive adhesive.
D. Install curbs and equipment in level position.
E. Ceiling mounted in -line centrifugal blowers
1. Shall be suspended from structure with 1/2-inch zinc plated all -thread rods
secured to structure.
2. Provide sub -structure where required.
3. Mount bottom of fan no more than 18-inches above the finished ceiling height.
3.02 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Provide two sets of belts for each fan, not including the set installed on the fans. Tag set
to identify fan.
END OF SECTION
FANS
VLK Architects, 2009 23 3416 - 4 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 23 3713
AIR DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install air distribution devices, including grilles, diffusers, registers, dampers,
and extractors.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Division 23 Mechanical.
1. Ductwork.
2. Air Balance.
3. Electrical Requirements for Mechanical Work.
1.03 COOPERATION WITH OTHER TRADES
A. Coordinate this work with work under Division 26 Electrical, to ensure that intended
functions of lighting and air systems are achieved.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data for outlets, grilles, registers, control devices, and similar equipment
for review prior to placement of purchase order.
B. Submittal shall include performance sheet for each air device type. Performance sheet
shall include NC levels, throw, and total pressure loss at various air flows.
1.05 FINISHES
A. Paint exposed devices with factory standard prime coat, or factory finish coat, as
specified.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 DIFFUSERS, GRILLES AND REGISTERS - Refer to Drawing Schedule
2.02 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A.
Tuttle and Bailey.
B.
Titus.
C.
Krueger.
D.
Metal -Aire.
E.
Nailor Industries.
F.
Price
AIR DEVICES
VLK Architects, 2009 23 3713 -1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Supply Grille Extractors. Provide supply grilles with an air control device capable of
positively regulating the volume of air extracted from the supply duct.
Select extractors similar to Titus Model AG25, tight -closing in the minimum position.
Include a key -operated or worm -gear adjusting mechanism to facilitate positioning from
the grille opening. Where adjustment is not accessible at the grille opening, provide a
square control rod equipped with a locking quadrant.
B. Mounting Frames. Provide each grille or register not equipped with a removable core with
a companion, all-purpose mounting frame constructed like grille frame to facilitate
installation and removal of the grille or register without marring adjacent mounting
surfaces.
01. Furnish frames with 1/2" thick sponge rubber gasket to prevent air leakage.
02. Provide a frame that neatly fits the grille. Mounting frames will not be required for
grilles or registers mounted directly on exposed ductwork.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Do not install ceilings adjacent to fixtures until installation of fixtures, air supply
assemblies, return -air blank -off strips and flexible duct have been approved. Remove and
reinstall any part of the installation found incorrect.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Louvered diffuser outlets mount tight against the ceiling. Fasten outlets to ductwork with
sheet metal screws. For perforated diffusers, attach the frame assembly by a concealed
hinge assembly to an outer frame compatible with the type of ceiling on which the diffuser
is installed.
END OF SECTION
AIR DEVICES
VLK Architects, 2009 23 3713 -2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 23 4100
AIR FILTRATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install air filters.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Division 23 Mechanical.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's product data sheets and capacity information as specified.
B. Submit recommended Dirty Filter pressure drop.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 AIR FILTERS
A. The filter cells:
1. Permanent frame with renewable media.
2. 18-gauge galvanized steel holding frame.
3. 11-gauge galvanized steel wire grids to support the media.
4. Front grid hinged and secured with a latch.
B. The renewable viscous coated glass fiber media:
1. Graduated density from front to back.
2. Initial resistance not to exceed 0.17" WG at 500 fpm velocity.
3. UL listed Class 11.
C. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. Cam -Farr.
2. AAF.
D. Spare filter:
1. Provide the following material to the Owner for use during the warranty period.
a. Sufficient media of each thickness, in original cartons, for a complete
change.
2.02 AIR FILTERS
A. Filter cells:
1. Permanent, impingement, washable.
2. Metal, panel type.
3. Electro galvanized 14 mesh steel screen media arranged in alternate layers of
flat and herringbone -crimp screens, 4 layers of each per inch.
4. 1/8" rod reinforced.
5. Enclosed 16 gauge galvanized steel frames.
6. Coated with high flash point adhesive.
B. Resistance to air flow of clean filter not to exceed 0.10" WG at 500 fpm.
1. Maximum face velocity 500 fpm.
AIR FILTRATION
VLK Architects, 2009 23 4100 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
C. Provide one complete set of spare filters for each unit.
2.03 AIR FILTERS
A. The filter cells:
1. Disposal media and frame.
2. Coated with high flash point adhesive.
B. Resistance to air flow of a clean filter not to exceed 0.12" WG at 300 fpm.
C. UL listed Class II rated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install the filters in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
END OF SECTION
AIR FILTRATION
VLK Architects, 2009 23 4100 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 23 8119
SINGLE PACKAGE ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide and install a single -package, single -zone, electric air conditioner with gas heat for
rooftop application.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Division 23 Mechanical.
1. Ductwork.
2. Air Balance.
3. Electrical provisions for mechanical work.
4. Air filtration.
1.03 PERFORMANCE
A. As scheduled on drawings, with head pressure control to enable unit start and operate down
to 20 degrees F ambient.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer's certified capacity data
B. Submit manufacturer's installation, start-up and service instructions.
C. Submit recommended clearance dimensions for air flow and service.
D. Submit coordination drawings as specified. Give consideration to adjacent structures as they
affect air flow patterns.
E. Submit internal wiring diagram of Control Center
F. Submit sequence of operation in narrative form.
G. Mark-up a copy of the specifications indicating in the margin of each paragraph the following:
COMPLY, DO NOT COMPLY, NOT APPLICABLE.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Trane.
B. York.
2.02 COMPRESSOR
A. Provide a thermally protected, serviceable semi -hermetic compressor or hermetic
compressor with service valves, vibration isolation, crankcase heaters, slight glass and filter
drier. Provide with a 5-year warranty.
SINGLE PACKAGE ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONERS
VLK Architects, 2009 23 8119 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
2.03 EVAPORATOR AND CONDENSER COILS
A. Provide copper tubes with mechanically bonded aluminum fins for evaporator and condenser
coils.
B. Provide hail guards for condenser coils.
2.04 EVAPORATOR FANS
A. Provide a belt -driven, forward -curved, centrifugal evaporator fan, with adjustable motor
sheaves. Motor shall contain permanently lubricated bearings. Provide motor HP as indicated
on the drawings.
2.05 GAS HEATING SECTION
A. Unit shall be equipped with stainless steel burners and heat exchangers.
B. Gas Controls.
1. Automatic gas valve and pressure regulator.
2. A manual shutoff valve.
3. Pilot valve.
4. Two flame rollout limit switches.
5. An adjustable fan control.
6. Fixed high limit controls
C. Unit shall be equipped with an electric spark pilot ignition system.
1. Electronic flame detection.
2. 100% safety shutoff.
D. Combustion air shall be induced by a positive pressure power venting fan.
1. Pre -purge of combustion chamber.
2.06 CASING FILTERS AND DUCT CONNECTION
A. Provide a cabinet constructed of galvanized or zinc -coated steel, primed and coated with
baked enamel and suitable for outdoor installation.
B. Provide duct connections on the bottom of each unit, as indicated on drawings.
C. Provide manually operated outdoor air dampers.
D. Furnish 2" thick filters as specified.
E. Furnish through -the -bottom electrical service connection.
2.07 ROOF CURB
A. Install a roof curb of the same manufacture as the air conditioning unit.
1. Curb to support the unit and provide a watertight enclosure to protect ductwork and
utility services.
2. Use a design complying with National Roofing Contractors Association requirements.
3. Level curb according to manufacturer's recommendations.
4. Curb height shall be minimum 14".
SINGLE PACKAGE ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONERS
VLK Architects, 2009 23 8119 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
2.08 OUTDOOR FANS
A. Provide propeller type with direct -driven permanently lubricated motor. Fan shall discharge
upward.
2.09 HEAD PRESSURE CONTROL
A. Provide solid state outdoor air fan speed control to permit unit to operate down to -20°F.
2.10 SHORT CYCLE CIRCUIT
A. Provide circuit to prevent compressor from short cycling as a result of a rapid change in
thermostat setting. Circuit also prevents compressor restart at least 5 minutes after
shutdown.
2.12 CONVENIENCE OUTLET
A. Provide 115V outlet in unit cabinet.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install according to manufacturer's recommendations and as shown on drawings.
END OF SECTION
SINGLE PACKAGE ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONERS
VLK Architects, 2009 23 8119 - 3 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 23 8216
HEATING AND COOLING COILS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install heating and cooling coils.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's product data sheets and unit capacity information as specified.
B. Submit manufacturer's Installation, Start -Up and Service Instructions.
C. Submit internal wiring diagram.
1. Electrical interlocks. *
1.03 RELATED WORK
A. Division 23 Mechanical.
1. Air Handling Units.
2. Fan Coil Units.
3. Weatherproof Roof Mounted Air Handling Units.
4. Ductwork.
5. Terminal Boxes.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 DIRECT EXPANSION COOLING COILS
A. DX cooling coils.
1. Constructed of copper tubes and aluminum fins.
2. Designed and circuited for use with direct expansion refrigeration.
B. Cooling coil face velocity.
1. Not of magnitude to cause moisture to be carried off the coil.
2. Maximum velocity as scheduled.
C. Circuit cooling coil with interlaced tubes so the entire face is active under all modes of
unloading. Refer to the schedule on the drawings.
D. Coils shall be constructed in casings as required for installation.
E. Where coils are stacked, provide intermediate drain pans with drop tubes to drain
condensate to the main drain pan without flooding the lower coil.
2.02 ELECTRIC HEATERS
A. Capacity shall be as scheduled on the drawings. Heater shall have 80% nickel, 20%
chromium, open resistance coils insulated by floating ceramic bushings, and be supported in
an aluminum steel frame.
B. Ceramic bushings shall be recessed into embossed openings and staked into supporting
brackets spaced 3-1/2" maximum center to center.
HEATING AND COOLING COILS
VLK Architects, 2009 23 8216 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
C. Coil shall be machine -crimped into threaded terminals and insulated with phenolic bushings.
All terminal hardware shall be stainless steel.
D. Heater shall be listed by the Underwriters Laboratories for zero clearance to combustible
surfaces and for use with central air conditioners.
E. For primary protection, furnish a disk -type automatic reset thermal cutout for pilot duty only.
F. For secondary protection, load -carrying manual reset thermal cutouts shall be wired in series
with each heater circuit. Cutouts shall be rated at 480 volts minimum.
G. Voltage, phase and number of heating stages shall be furnished in accordance with duct
heater schedule. Three-phase heaters shall have single-phase circuits for operation from a 3-
phase, 4-wire power source. Circuits shall be rated at 48 amperes maximum. Furnish one set
of line terminals to feed all circuits. Heater shall be tested dielectrically at 2000 volts before
shipment. Field -installed conductors feeding the heater shall be sized for 125% of the
connected load.
H. Built-in components shall be factory wired to terminal blocks for field connection. All internal
wiring shall be insulated for 105°C. Built-in magnetic contactors shall disconnect all
ungrounded conductors to each circuit. Furnish heaters with an air flow switch that will not
allow heaters to energize without proof of air flow. Built-in transformer shall be dry industrial
type, sized to carry full contactor holding coil load. Primary windings shall be fused at the
factory. Built-in fuses shall be factory wired to each circuit to protect all underground
conductors. Type NON or NOS fuses to be factory installed in phenolic fuse blocks. Built-in
disconnect switch to be snap action, industrial type. Provide a door interlock mechanism to
prevent hinged terminal box cover from being opened when the switch is on. Switch shall be
unfused.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install the duct heaters in accordance with the manufacturer's Installation, Start -Up and
Service Instructions.
END OF SECTION
HEATING AND COOLING COILS
VLK Architects, 2009 23 8216 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 26 0100
ELECTRICAL OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Compile electrical product data and related information appropriate for Owner's operation
and maintenance of products furnished under Contract. Prepare electrical operating and
maintenance data as specified in this Section and as referenced in other sections of
specifications.
B. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation and maintenance of equipment and systems.
C. Submit 5 copies of complete manual in final form.
1.02 ELECTRICAL OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE
A. Thirty (30) days after receipt of reviewed submittals bearing the Architect / Engineer's
stamp of acceptance (including resubmittals), submit for review 1 copy of the first draft of
the Electrical Operating and Maintenance Manual. This copy shall contain as a minimum:
1. Table of Contents for each element
2. Contractor information
3. All shop drawings, coordination drawings and product data, bearing the
Architect/Engineer's stamp of acceptance.
4. All parts and maintenance manuals for items of equipment
5. Warranties (without starting dates)
6. Certifications that have been completed; submit forms and outlines of
certifications that have not been completed
7. Operating and maintenance procedures.
8. Form of Owner's Training Program Syllabus (including times and dates)
9. Control operations / equipment wiring diagrams
10. Coordination Drawings
11. Schedule of Lamps
12. Schedule of Ballasts
13. Schedule of Fuses
14. Other required operating and maintenance information that are complete.
B. Copy will be returned to the Contractor within 15 days with comments for corrections.
C. Submit the (5) completed manuals in final form to the Architect / Engineer.
1. Prior to substantial completion for Owner's use after the Owner accepts facility
maintenance.
2. Include all specified data, test reports, drawings, dated warranties, certificates,
along with other materials and information.
D. The Architect/Engineer shall review the manuals for completeness within 15 days.
E. The Contractor shall be notified of any missing or omitted materials. The Manuals shall
be reworked by the Contractor, as required, in the office of the Architect / Engineer. The
manuals will not be retransmitted.
F. Four complete manuals shall be delivered to the Owner.
ELECTRICAL OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
VLK Architects, 2009 26 0100 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 BINDERS
A. Commercial quality black, 3-ring binders with clear, durable, cleanable plastic covers.
B. Minimum ring size: 1 ".
Maximum ring size: 3".
C. When multiple binders are used, correlate the data into related groupings.
D. Label contents on spine and face of binder with full size insert. Label under plastic cover.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 ELECTRICAL OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A. Form for Manuals:
1. Prepare data in form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's personnel.
2. Format:
a. Size: 8-1/2" x 11"
b. Text: Manufacturer's printed data or neatly typewritten.
3. Drawings:
a. Provide reinforced punched binder tab and bind in text.
b. Fold larger drawings to size of text pages.
4. Provide flyleaf indexed tabs for each separate product or each piece of operating
equipment.
5. Cover: Identify each volume with typed or printed title "Operating and
Maintenance Instructions". List:
a. Title of Project
b. Identity of separate structures as applicable
C. Identity of general subject matter covered in the manual.
6. Binder as specified
B. Content of Manual:
1. Neatly typewritten Table of Contents for each volume arranged in systematic
order as outlined in the specifications.
a. Contractor, name of responsible principal, address and telephone
number
b. A list of each product required to be included, indexed to content of the
volume.
C. List with each product, name, address and telephone number of:
1) Subcontractor or installer
2) Maintenance contractor as appropriate
3) Identify area of responsibility of each.
4) Local source of supply for parts and replacement
d. Identify each product -by-product name and other identifying symbols as
set forth in Contract Documents.
2. Product Data:
a. Include those sheets pertinent to the specific product.
b. Annotate each sheet to:
1) Identify specific product or part installed.
2) Identify data applicable to installation.
3) Delete references to inapplicable information.
ELECTRICAL OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
VLK Architects, 2009 26 0100 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
3. Drawings:
a. Supplement product data with drawings as necessary to illustrate:
1) Relations of component parts of equipment and systems
2) Control and flow diagrams
b. Coordinate drawings with information in Project Record Documents to
assure correct illustration of completed installation.
C. Do not use Project Record Documents as maintenance drawings.
4. Written text as required to supplement product data for the particular installation:
a. Organize in consistent format under separate headings for different
procedures.
b. Provide logical sequence of instructions for each procedure.
5. Copy of each warranty, bond and service contract issued
a. Provide information sheet for Owner's personnel, giving:
1) Proper procedures in event of failure
2) Instances that might affect validity of warranties or bonds
6. Shop drawings, coordination drawings and product data as specified.
C. Sections for Equipment and Systems
1. Content for each unit of equipment and system as appropriate:
a.
Description of unit and component parts:
1) Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting
conditions.
2) Performance curves, engineering data and tests.
3) Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable
parts.
b.
Operating procedures:
1) Start up, break-in, routine / normal operating instructions
2) Regulation, control, stopping, shut down and emergency
instructions
3) Summer and winter operating instructions
4) Special operating instructions
C.
Maintenance procedures:
1) Routine operations
2) Guide to trouble -shooting
3) Disassembly, repair and reassembly
4) Alignment, adjusting and checking
5) Routine service based on operating hours
d.
Servicing and lubrication schedule
1) List of lubricants required
e.
Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions.
f.
Copies of typed circuit directories of panel board to reflect actual room
graphics numbers and room names (not architectural room numbers
from the drawings).
1) Electrical
2) Controls
3) Communications
g.
Original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings and
diagrams required for maintenance.
1) Predicted life of part subject to wear
2) Items recommended to be stocked as spare parts
h.
Schedule of fuses
i.
Complete equipment field accessible internal wiring diagrams
j.
Schedule of lamps
k.
Schedule of ballasts
I.
Each Contractor's coordination drawings
ELECTRICAL OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
VLK Architects, 2009 26 0100 - 3 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
1) As installed color coded piping diagrams.
m. List of original manufacturer's spare parts and recommended quantities
to be maintained in storage
n. Other data as required under pertinent sections of the specifications
2. Prepare and include additional data when the need for such data becomes
apparent during instruction of Owner's personnel
3. Additional requirements for operating and maintenance data as outlined in
respective sections of specifications
4. Provide complete information for products specified in Division 26.
5. Provide certificates of compliance as specified in each related section.
6. Provide start up reports as specified in each related section.
7. Provide signed receipts for spare parts and material.
8. Provide training report and certificates.
END OF SECTION
ELECTRICAL OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
VLK Architects, 2009 26 0100 - 4 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 26 0500
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Except as modified in this Section, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions,
applicable provisions of Division 1 General Requirements, and other provisions and
requirements of the Contract Documents apply to work of Division 26 Electrical.
B. Applicable provisions of this section apply to all sections of Division 26, Electrical.
1.02 CODE REQUIREMENTS, AND FEES
A. Perform work in accordance with applicable statutes, ordinances, codes and regulations of
governmental authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Electrical work shall comply with applicable inspection services:
1. Underwriters Laboratories.
2. National Fire Protection Association.
3. State Health Department.
4. Local Municipal Building Inspection Department adopted codes with amendments.
5. National Electrical Code with local amendments.
6. State Regulatory Agencies
7. Where the project is located outside a municipal jurisdiction, and has no municipal
inspection services, the National Electrical Code with amendments of the
municipality with extraterritorial jurisdiction shall govern.
8. Where the project is located outside any municipal jurisdiction, including
extraterritorial jurisdictions, the National Electrical Code with local adopted
amendments of the largest municipality located in the same county or parish shall
govern.
9. International Energy Conservation Code
C. Resolve any code violations discovered in contract documents with the Engineer prior to
award of the contract. After Contract award, any correction or additions necessary for
compliance with applicable codes shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner.
D. This Contractor shall be responsible for being aware of and complying with asbestos
NESHAP regulations, as well as all other applicable codes, laws and regulations.
E. Obtain all permits required.
1.03 CONTRACTOR'S QUALIFICATIONS
A. An approved contractor for the work under this division shall be:
1. A specialist in this field and have the personnel, experience, training, and skill, and
the organization to provide a practical working system.
2. Able to furnish evidence of having contracted for and installed not less than 3
systems of comparable size and type that have served their Owners satisfactorily for
not less than 3 years.
1.04 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS AND STANDARDS
A. Materials which are specified by reference to Federal Specifications; ASTM, ASME, ANSI, or
AW W A Specifications; Federal Standards; or other standard specifications must comply with
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
VLK Architects, 2009 26 0500 -1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
latest editions, revisions, amendments or supplements in effect on date proposals are
received. Requirements in reference specifications and standards are minimum for all
equipment, material and work. In instances where specified capacities, size or other features
of equipment, devices or materials exceed these minimums, meet specified capacities.
1.05 CONTRACT DRAWINGS
A. Contract drawings are diagrammatic only and do not give fully dimensioned locations of
various elements of work. Determine exact locations from field measurements.
B. Every effort has been made by the Engineer to indicate wiring of all receptacles, light fixtures,
switches, telephone outlets, HVAC equipment, kitchen equipment, elevator equipment, and
all other devices / appliances requiring electrical power. It is the intent of the Engineer that all
light fixtures be powered and controlled unless specifically noted on the plans; that all wiring
devices (receptacles and direct connected equipment) be circuited to a power source of the
correct voltage, unless specifically noted on the drawings; and that all HVAC, kitchen and
elevator equipment be properly wired to the correct voltage power source; that all
communications and security systems devices and equipment and all fire alarm system
devices and equipment are installed, wired and systems are fully operational.
C. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to review the architectural drawings (reflected ceiling
plans) for light fixtures, casework elevation details for electrical devices which are not
indicated on the electrical drawings; to review the mechanical and plumbing documents and
kitchen equipment drawings to determine the electrical rough -ins for all equipment requiring
power connections, and to include in their proposals the correct and complete electrical
rough -ins for all of these items which were inadvertently not indicated on the electrical
drawings, OR the Contractor shall specifically enumerate each item requiring electrical rough -
in which is not specifically shown on the electrical drawings, and indicate the electrical
provisions of these items as specifically excluded from his proposal.
D. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to compare the scale of all electrical drawings with the
scale of the architectural drawings and make adjustments to all electrical drawings which
have the incorrect drawing scale so that his material takeoffs are not in error due to an
incorrectly labeled drawing scale and his proposal is complete.
E. No proposal shall be accepted which specifically excludes any of the provisions of
paragraphs B, C, or D above.
1.06 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Maintain at the job site a separate set of white prints (blue line or black line) of the contract
drawings for the sole purpose of recording the "as -built" changes and diagrams of those
portions of work in which actual construction is significantly at variance with the contract
drawings. Mark the drawings with a colored pencil. Prepare, as the work progresses and
upon completion of work, reproducible drawings clearly indicating locations of various major
and minor feeders, equipment, and other pertinent items, as installed. Record underground
and underslab service and feeders installed, dimensioning exact location and elevation of
such installations.
B. At conclusion of project, obtain without cost to the Owner, electronic AutoCAD CAD files of
the original drawings and transfer as -built changes to these. Provide the following as -built
documents including all contract drawings regardless of whether corrections were necessary
and include in the transmittal: "2 sets of CDs and prints for Owner's use, one set of CDs,
prints, and mylars for Architect / Engineers Records". Delivery of these as -built electronic,
reproducible and prints is a condition of final acceptance.
1. 3 sets of electronic AutoCAD (2004 dwg) CAD drawing files, on CD-ROM media, of
each contract as -built drawing.
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
VLK Architects, 2009 26 0500 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
2. One reproducible Dayrex mylar film positive of each contract as -built drawing.
3. Three sets of blue -line prints of each contract as -built drawing.
C. As -Built Drawings should indicate the following information as a minimum:
1. Indicate all addendum changes to documents.
2. Remove Engineer's Seal, name, address, and logo from drawings.
3. Mark documents AS -BUILT DRAWINGS.
4. Clearly indicate: DOCUMENT PRODUCED BY:
5. Indicate all changes to construction during construction. Indicate actual routing of all
conduit, etc that were deviated from construction drawings.
6. Indicate exact location of all underground electrical raceways, and elevations.
7. Correct schedules to reflect (actual) equipment furnished and manufacturer.
8. During the execution of work, maintain a complete set of Drawings and
specifications upon which all locations of equipment, devices, and all deviations and
changes from the construction documents in the work shall be recorded.
9. Exact location of all electrical equipment in building. Label panel schedules to
indicate actual location.
10. Exact location of all electrical equipment in and outside of the building.
11. Exact location of all outdoor lighting poles and equipment.
12. Location, size and routing of all feeder conduits, equipment, etc. shall be accurately
and neatly shown to dimension.
13. Exact location of all roof mounted equipment, wall, roof and floor penetrations.
14. Cloud all changes.
15. Update all panel schedules with all additional circuits added or deleted through
construction. Identify each circuit to include all information specified for directory
cards for circuit identification in panelboards.
1.07 SPACE REQUIREMENTS
A. Consider space limitations imposed by contiguous work in selection and location of
equipment and material. Do not provide equipment or material that is not suitable in this
respect.
1.08 RELATION WITH OTHER TRADES
A. Carefully study all matters and conditions concerning the project. Submit notification of
conflict in ample time to prevent unwarranted changes in any work. Review other Divisions of
these specifications to determine their requirements. Extend electrical services and final
connections to all items requiring same.
B. Because of the complicated relationship of this work to the total project, conscientiously study
the relation and cooperate as necessary to accomplish the full intent of the documents.
C. Provide sleeves and inserts in forms as required for the work. Stub up and protect open ends
of pipe before any concrete is placed. Furnish sizes of required equipment pads. Furnish and
locate bolts and fittings required to be cast in them.
D. Locate and size openings required for installation of work specified in this Division in
sufficient time to prevent delay in the work.
E. Refer to other Divisions of the specifications for the scope of required connections to
equipment furnished under other Division. Determine from the General Contractor /
Construction Manager for the various trades, the Owner, and by direction from the Architect /
Engineer, the exact location of all items. The construction trades involved shall furnish all
roughing -in drawings and wiring diagrams required for proper installation of the electrical
work.
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
VLK Architects, 2009 26 0500 - 3 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
1. Make final electrical connections to all electrically operated equipment indicated on
the drawings, except as noted.
2. The responsibility for alignment of motor and driven equipment is specified in the
related division.
Request all Shop Drawings required in ample time to permit proper installation of all electrical
provisions.
G. Extend services as indicated to the various items of equipment furnished by others. Rough -in
for the various items and make final connections ready for operation upon placing of the
equipment.
1.09 CONCEALED AND EXPOSED WORK
A. When the word "concealed" is defined as hidden from sight as in chases, furred spaces or
above ceilings. "Exposed" is defined as open to view, in plain sight.
1.10 GUARANTEE
A. Guarantee work for 1 year from the date of substantial completion of the project. During that
period make good any faults or imperfections that may arise due to defects or omissions in
material, equipment or workmanship. At the Owner's option, replacement of failed parts or
equipment shall be provided. .
1.11 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
A. Furnish new and unused materials and equipment meeting the requirements of the
paragraph specifying acceptable manufacturers. Where two or more units of the same type
or class of equipment are required, provide units of a single manufacturer.
1.12 NOISE AND VIBRATION
A. Select equipment to operate with minimum noise and vibration. If noise or vibration is
produced or transmitted to or through the building structure by equipment, piping, ducts or
other parts of work, and judged objectionable by the Owner, Architect, or Engineer, rectify
such conditions at no additional cost to the Owner. If the item of equipment is judged to
produce objectionable noise or vibration, demonstrate at no additional cost that equipment
performs within designated limits on a vibration chart.
1.13 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers names and catalog number specified under sections of Division 26 are used
to establish standards of design, performance, quality and serviceability and not to limit
competition. Equipment of similar design, materials, energy efficiency characteristics (where
applicable) and lighting performance characteristics (where applicable) equal to that
specified, manufactured by a named manufacturer shall be acceptable on approval. A
request for prior approval of equipment not listed must be submitted ten (10) days before
proposal due date. Submit a marked -up set of the relevant specification section indicating all
variances, a comparison to the specified product, and of construction and performance
criteria, complete design and performance data for the specified product and the proposed
substitution for comparison to the Engineer. The Architect issues approvals of acceptable
manufacturers as addenda to the Construction Proposal Documents.
1.14 UTILITIES, LOCATIONS AND ELEVATIONS
A. Locations and elevations of the various utilities included within the scope of this work:
1. Obtained from utility maps and other substantially reliable sources.
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
VLK Architects, 2009 26 0500 - 4 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
2. Are offered separate from the Contract Documents as a general guide only without
guarantees to accuracy.
Examine the site and verify the location and elevation of all utilities and of their relation to the
work. Existing utilities indicated on the site plans are for reference only and shall be field
verified by the Contractor with the respective public or private utility.
1.15 OPERATING TESTS
A. After all electrical systems have been completed and put into operation, subject each system
to an operating test under design conditions to ensure proper sequencing and operation
throughout the range of operation. Tests shall be made in the presence of the Architect /
Engineer and Owner. Provide minimum 24-hour advance notice of scheduling of all tests.
Make adjustments as required to ensure proper functioning of all systems. Special tests on
individual systems are specified under individual sections. Submit 3 copies of all certifications
and test reports adequately in advance of completion of the work to allow for remedial action
as required to correct deficiencies discovered in equipment and systems.
1.16 WARRANTIES
A. Submit 3 copies of all warranties and guarantees for systems, equipment, devices and
materials. These shall be included in the Operating and Maintenance Manuals.
1.17 BUILDING CONSTRUCTION
A. It shall be the responsibility of the sub -contractor to consult the Architectural and Engineering
drawings, details and specifications and thoroughly familiarize himself as to the construction
and all job related requirements. All construction trades shall cooperate with the General
Contractor / Construction Manager job site superintendent and lay out work so that all piping
and other items are placed in the walls, furred spaces, chases, etc., so that there shall be no
delay in the job.
1.18 TEMPORARY FACILITIES
A. General: Refer to Division 1 for general requirements on temporary facilities.
B. Temporary Wiring: Temporary power and lighting for construction purposes shall be provided
under this Division. Installation of temporary power shall be in accordance with NEC Article
527.
C. Temporary facilities, wire, lights and devices are the property of this Contractor and shall be
removed by this Contractor at the completion of the Contract.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS — NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 IDENTIFICATION OF EQUIPMENT
A. Identification of Equipment:
1. A I major equipment shall have a manufacturer's label identifying the manufacturer's
address, equipment model and serial numbers, equipment size, and other pertinent
data. Take care not to obliterate this nameplate. The legend on all nameplates or
tags shall correspond to the identification shown on the Operating Instructions.
2. A black -white -black (red -white -red for emergency circuits) 3 layer laminated plastic
engraved identifying nameplate shall be permanently secured to each switchboard,
distribution panel, motor control center, transformer, panelboard, safety disconnect
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
VLK Architects, 2009 26 0500 - 5 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
switch, enclosed circuit breaker, wireway, busduct plug, terminal cabinet, TVSS
protection device, capacitor, individual motor controller, contactor, fire alarm panels
(main and remote booster), and communications (voice, data, video) cabinet or rack
with stainless steel screws.
a. Identifying nameplates shall have 1/2-inch high, engraved letters for
equipment designation and 1/4-inch letters indicating source circuit
designation, (ie: "PANEL HA —served from MDP-6 located in Mech. Rm.
100").
b. Each switchboard, distribution panel, and motor control center branch circuit
device shall have a nameplate showing the load and location of load served
in 1/4-inch high, engraved letters.
C. Each section of multiple section panelboards shall also indicate panelboard
section number (ie: Panel "HA -Section 2 — served from MDP-6 located in
Mech. Rm. 100")
d. Enclosed switches, starters, circuit breakers and contactors: Provide neatly
typed label inside each motor starter and contactor enclosure door
identifying motor or load served, nameplate horsepower, full load amperes,
code letter, service factor, and voltage / phase rating. Provide Phenolic
nameplate on cover exterior to indicate motor or load served, location of
load served, panel(s) and circuit(s) serving load(s), description and location
of control controlling contactor (i.e.: contactor controlled by switch in Room
A107.), and panel and circuit feeding line side of control transformer.
Example of label for lighting / receptacle contactor: Lighting Contactor
Panel HA 2,4,6
Control circuit — Panel HA 2,4
Location — West parking Lot Pole Lights
Switched - BMCS
3. Cardholders and directory cards shall be furnished for circuit identification in
panelboards. Cardholder shall be located on inside of panel door and shall be in a
metal frame with clear plastic front. Circuit lists shall be typewritten. Circuit
descriptions shall include explicit description and identification of items controlled by
each individual breaker, including final graphics room number or name designation
and name of each item served. If no building appointed room number or name is
given, list locations per the following examples — A. Storage in Rm 100 — B. Office in
Rm 100 — C. Storage west of Rm. 100. List corridors as "corridors". Identify circuits
controlled by contactors using a separate notation for each contactor used. List
notation at bottom of schedule stating the circuits are controlled by a contactor, list
exact location of contactor, and how switched. Do not use architectural room number
designation shown on plans. Obtain final graphics room number identification from
Architect's final room number graphics plan. All locations served by breakers shall be
listed on schedule. Panel schedule shall be large enough to contain all information
required.
4. Permanent, waterproof, black markers shall be used to identify each lighting and
power grid junction box, gutter and wireway. Clearly indicate the panel and branch
circuit numbers available at that junction box, gutter or wireway. Where low voltage
relay panels are used for lighting control, identify the low voltage relay panel and
number in addition to the branch circuit panel and number.
5. Pull Boxes, Transformers, Disconnect Switches, etc.: Field work each with a name
plate showing identity, voltage and phase and identifying equipment connected to it.
The transformer rating shall be shown on the panels or enclosures. For an enclosure
containing a motor starter, the nameplate shall include the Owner's motor number,
motor voltage, number of motor phases, motor load being serviced, motor
horsepower, and motor full load current. Nameplates shall also indicate where panel
is fed from.
B. Prohibited Markings: Markings intended to identify the manufacturer, vendor, or other source
from whom the material has been obtained are prohibited for installation in public, tenant, or
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
VLK Architects, 2009 26 0500 - 6 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
common areas within the project. Also prohibited are materials or devices that bear evidence
that markings or insignias have been removed. Certification, testing (example, Underwriters
Laboratories), and approval labels are exceptions to this requirement.
C. Warning Signs: Provide warning signs where there is hazardous exposure associated with
access to or operation of electrical facilities. Provide text of sufficient size to convey adequate
information at each location; mount permanently in an appropriate and effective location.
Comply with industry standards for color and design.
D. Wire and Cable Markers: Provide vinyl cloth markers with split sleeve or tubing type, except
in manholes provide stainless steel with plastic ties.
E. Wire and Cable Labeling: Provide wire markers on each conductor in all boxes, pull boxes,
gutters, wireways, contactors, and motor controllers and load connection. Identify with
panelboard / switchboard branch circuit or feeder number for power and lighting circuits, and
with control wire number as indicated on equipment manufacturer's shop drawings for control
wiring.
F. Underground Warning Tape: Thomas and Betts or approved equal. Six-inch wide plastic
tape, colored red or orange with suitable warning legend describing buried electrical lines;
telephone lines and data lines. All underground electrical conduits shall be so identified. Tape
shall be buried at a depth of 6-inches below grade and directly above conduits or ductbanks.
Provide magnetic marking tape below all underground electrical conduits.
3.02 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. General: Comply with the requirements of Division 1 for the cutting and patching of other
work to accommodate the installation of electrical work. Except as authorized by the Architect
/ Engineer, cutting and patching of electrical work to accommodate the installation of other
work is not permitted.
3.03 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL
A. Prior to substantial completion, conduct an on -site training program to instruct Owner's
operating personnel in the operation and maintenance of the electrical systems.
1. Provide the training during regular working day.
2. The Instructors shall be experienced in their phase of operation and maintenance of
the electrical systems and with the project.
B. Time to be allocated for instructions.
1. Minimum of 20 hours dedicated instructor time
2. 4 hours on each of 5 days
3. Additional instruction time for specific systems as specified in other Sections.
C. Before on -site training, submit the program syllabus; proposed time and dates; for review and
approval, minimum 48 hours prior to proposed training time and date.
1. One copy to the Owner
2. One copy to the Architect / Engineer
D. The Owner shall provide a list of personnel to receive instructions, and shall coordinate their
attendance at the agreed upon times.
E. Use operation and maintenance manuals as the basis of instruction. Review manual with
personnel in detail. Explain all aspects of operation and maintenance.
F. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble -shooting, servicing,
maintenance, and shut down of each item of equipment.
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
VLK Architects, 2009 26 0500 - 7 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
G. Demonstrate equipment functions (both_ individually and as part of the total integrated
system).
H. Prepare and insert additional data in the operating and maintenance manuals when the need
for additional data becomes apparent during instructions.
Submit a report within one week after completion of training. List time and date of each
demonstration, hours devoted to the demonstration, and a list of people present, with their
respective signatures.
J. At the conclusion of the on -site training program, have the person designated by the Owner
sign a certificate to certify that he / she has a proper understanding of the system, that the
demonstrations and instructions have been satisfactorily completed, and the scope and
content of the operating and maintenance manuals used for the training program are
satisfactory.
K. Provide a copy of the report and the certificate in an appropriately tabbed section of each
Operating and Maintenance Manual.
3.04 OPENINGS
A. Framed, cast or masonry openings for boxes, equipment or conduits are specified under
other divisions. Drawings and layout work for exact size and location of all openings are
included under this division.
3.05 HOUSEKEEPING PADS
A. Provide concrete equipment housekeeping pads under all floor and outdoor mounted
electrical equipment.
B. Concrete and reinforcing steel shall be as specified in Division 3, or as indicated or noted.
C. Concrete pads:
f . 6-inches thick minimum indoors; 8-inches thick minimum outdoors, or as indicated
on the drawings or in other sections of the specifications.
2. Chamfer strips at edges and corner of forms.
3. Smooth steel trowel finish.
4. Extend 34nches minimum indoors beyond perimeter of equipment unless otherwise
shown.
5. 6-inch x 6-inch #8 wire reinforcement mesh.
3.06 OBSTRUCTIONS
A. The drawings indicate certain information pertaining to surface and subsurface obstructions,
which has been taken from available drawings. Such information is not guaranteed, however,
as to accuracy of location or complete information.
1. Before any cutting or trenching operations are begun, verify with Owner's
representative, utility companies, municipalities, and other interested parties that all
available information has been provided.
2. Should obstruction be encountered, whether shown or not, alter routing of new work,
reroute existing lines, remove obstruction where permitted, or otherwise perform
whatever work is necessary to satisfy the purpose of the new work and leave existing
services and structures in a satisfactory and serviceable condition.
B. Assume total responsibility for and repair any damage to existing utilities or construction,
whether or not such existing facilities are shown.
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
VLK Architects, 2009 26 0500 - 8 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
3.07 VANDAL RESISTANT DEVICES
A. Where vandal resistant screws or bolts are employed on the project, deliver to the Owner 2
suitable tools for use with each type of fastener used, and 25 percent spare fasteners.
B. Proof of delivery of these items to the Owner shall be included in the Operating and
Maintenance Manuals.
3.08 PROTECTION
A. Protect work, equipment, fixtures, and materials. At work completion, work must be clean and
in original manufacturer's condition.
B. Do not deliver equipment to this project site until progress of construction has reached the
stage where equipment is actually needed or until building is closed in enough to protect the
equipment from weather. Equipment allowed to stand in the weather shall be rejected, and
the contractor is obligated to furnish new equipment of a like kind at no additional cost to the
Owner.
3.09 COORDINATION OF BRANCH CIRCUIT OVERCURRENT AND PROTECTION DEVICES
A. Review with equipment specified which requires electrical connections. Review equipment
shop drawings and manufacturer's nameplate data and coordinate exact branch circuit
overcurrent protective device and conductors with equipment provided.
1. Provide equipment manufacturer's recommended overcurrent protective device
indicated on nameplate at no additional cost to the Owner.
2. If branch circuit conductors and / or conduit sizing is less than the minimum required
by equipment manufacturer, notify the Architect / Engineer immediately, prior to
rough -in.
3. If equipment manufacturer is a substitution to the specified equipment manufacturer,
provide the greater of the conductors specified or those required for the installed
equipment manufacturer's minimum circuit conductors, at no additional cost to the
Owner.
4. If conductors indicated on plans are in excess of that permitted by equipment
manufacturer, notify Architect / Engineer immediately, prior to rough -in.
5. If conductors indicated on plans are in excess of that permitted by the equipment
manufacturer, provide the maximum conductors permitted by the equipment
manufacturer based on NEC ampacity tables, either in a single set, or as a set of
parallel conductors as permitted by the NEC. Conductor size and quantity entering
the equipment enclosures shall not exceed the equipment manufacturer's maximum
recommendations.
3.10 OVERCURRENT DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY
A. Contractor shall provide a coordination study and fault current analysis report, conducted and
prepared by the switchgear manufacturer. The coordination study and fault current analysis
shall include the manufacturer's recommendations for all adjustable overcurrent devices
specified or provided.
B. Contractor shall adjust all overcurrent device settings based on manufacturer's
recommendations, or as directed by Owner / Architect at no additional cost to Owner.
C. Submittals: Submit four copies of certified coordination study results to the Architect for
review.
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
VLK Architects, 2009 26 0500 - 9 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
3.11 EQUIPMENT BACKBOARDS
A. Backboards: 3/4 inch, fire retardant, exterior grade plywood, painted gray, both sides.
1. Provide minimum of two 44 by 84 sheets of plywood for each new telephone
terminal location.
2. Provide minimum of two 44 by 44 sheets of plywood for each new data / voice /
video / communications equipment location / cable TV head end equipment, or
security equipment location.
3.12 TESTING
A. The contractors for the various sub -systems shall submit proposed testing procedures for
their systems, subject to review and approval and Owner acceptance. The contract will not be
declared to be substantially complete until the functional operation of the subsystems have
been demonstrated and verified and reports have been provided, reviewed and accepted.
B. The project will not be declared substantially complete until the following has taken place.
1. The "As -Built" drawings have been submitted, reviewed and accepted by the
Architect / Owner / Owner's Construction Representative.
2. The various systems have been commissioned and accepted to include the
following:
a. Building Emergency Lighting System
3.13 LOAD BALANCING
A. Balance load on all phases in each panel to within 10% of respective phase loads.
END OF SECTION
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
VLK Architects, 2009 26 0500 - 10 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 26 0505
ELECTRICAL ALTERATIONS PROJECT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Inspection and service of existing equipment and materials to remain or be reused.
B. Handling of equipment and materials to be abandoned.
C. Handling of equipment and materials to be removed.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Coordination with the Contractor prior to the disconnection or shutdown of existing
equipment, or to the modification of existing operational systems.
1.03 CONTRACT DRAWINGS
A. There is the possibility that there do exist conditions and devices that are affected by the
work indicated on the drawings and called for in the specifications (project manual) that
do not appear on the drawings. It is the Contractors responsibility to visit the site and
determine all of the existing conditions and to consider these existing conditions when
making and presenting a proposal, to have a complete proposal.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Material used to upgrade and repair existing equipment shall conform to that specified.
B. Material used to upgrade and repair existing equipment shall not void existing warranties
or listings of the equipment to be upgraded or repaired.
C. Material used to upgrade and repair existing equipment shall be new and shall be of the
same manufacturer of the existing equipment, shall be acquired through the existing
original equipment manufacturer's approved distribution channels, shall have
manufacturer's warranties for the new material being used, and shall be listed for the use
intended. .
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Existing materials and equipment indicated on the drawings or in the specifications to be
reused shall be inspected for damaged or missing parts. Notify the Architect / Engineer, in
writing, accordingly.
B. If using materials specified or shown on the drawing voids or diminishes the warranty or
operation of remaining equipment or systems, the Contractor shall notify the Architect /
Engineer, in writing.
C. Verify field measurements and circuiting arrangements.
ELECTRICAL ALTERATIONS PROJECT PROCEDURES
VLK Architects, 2009 26 0505 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
D. Verify that abandoned wiring, panelboards, switchboards, disconnect switches, and
equipment serve only abandoned facilities. Where abandoned wiring, panelboards,
switchboards, and equipment which serve existing facilities are to remain, Contractor
shall provide means and methods to ensure existing facilities remain energized with the
correct voltage, overcurrent protection, conductors, and circuit ampacity required by the
existing facilities to remain.
E. Demolition Drawings are based on casual field observation, and when available, existing
record documents. Report discrepancies to Architect before disturbing existing
installation, and immediately after such discrepancies are discovered.
3.02 APPLICATION
A. Existing materials and equipment indicated on the drawings or in the specification to be
reused shall be cleaned and reconditioned, including tightening of feeder and bus bar lugs
prior to installation and reuse in the modified system.
B. Remove existing luminaries for alterations/renovations. Use mild detergent to clean all
exterior and interior surfaces; rinse with clean water and wipe dry. For each luminarie that
is taken down for alteration and then reinstalled, replace damaged parts, provide new
lamps and, with matching paint, touch-up scratched or abraded areas, and replace
cracked, broken or missing lenses or diffusers. Replace unrepairable fixtures with new
fixtures
C. Material and equipment removed that is not to be salvaged for Owner's use or for reuse
on the project shall become the properly of the Contractor and shall be removed from the
site.
D. Prior to start of construction, Contractor shall walk areas to be renovated with Owner to
identify and document items to be salvaged for Owner's use.
E. Material or equipment salvaged for Owner's use shall be carefully handled and stored
where directed by the Owner.
F. Materials and equipment not indicated to be removed or abandoned shall be reconnected
to the new system.
G. Clean and repair existing materials and equipment that remain or are to be reused.
H. Panelboards Reused and Modified for Renovation: Clean exposed surfaces and check
tightness of electrical connections. Replace damaged circuit breakers and provide closure
plates for vacant positions. Provide typed circuit directory showing revised circuiting
arrangement.
3.03 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate utility service outages with Utility Company, Architect and Owner.
B. Provide temporary wiring and connections to maintain existing systems in service during
construction. When work must be performed on energized equipment or circuits, use
personnel experienced in such operations.
C. Existing Electrical Service: Refer to drawings for work in remodeled areas. Where
facilities in these areas are to remain in service, any related work to keep the facilities in
operation is specified in this Division. Maintain existing system in service until new system
is complete and ready for service. Disable system only to make switchovers and
ELECTRICAL ALTERATIONS PROJECT PROCEDURES
VLK Architects, 2009 26 0505 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
connections. Obtain written permission from Owner at least 10 business days before
partially or completely disabling system. Minimize outage duration. Make temporary
connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area. Disclose the extent, exact
time and expected duration of the outage in a written request to the Owner.
D. Remove and replace existing conduit wiring, outlets, devices, lighting fixtures, panels and
appurtenances as occasioned by new or remodeled construction. Re-establish service to
lights, switches and devices that may be interrupted by remodeled construction.
E. Disconnect electrical systems in walls, floors and ceilings scheduled for removal. When
outlets are removed, wire shall be pulled out of the conduit back to the nearest remaining
box or cabinet.
1. Remove exposed conduit that has been abandoned.
2. Cap conduit beyond the finish line.
3. Provide unswitched circuit leg for emergency battery powered equipment. Circuit
from same branch circuit breaker as switched normal lighting circuit.
F. Where new/existing luminaries or devices are shown being connected to existing circuits:
1. Field verify existing system voltage
2. Provide ballast / device to match system voltage
G. Verify the loading of each circuit affected by remodeling work. The maximum load of any
branch circuit shall not exceed 80% of its rating.
H. Remove equipment, systems, conductors, wiring, raceways, etc. abandoned or not
required for existing or new systems. Coordinate with Architect / Owner for salvage by
Owner.
I. Existing Power, and Lighting and Appliance Branch Circuit Distribution System: Maintain
existing system in service unless as noted or specified otherwise. Disable system only to
make switchovers and connections. Notify Owner at least 72 hours before partially or
completely disabling system. Minimize outage duration. Make connections to maintain
service in areas adjacent to work area.
J. Existing Lighting System: Maintain existing system in service unless as noted or specified
otherwise. Disable system only to make switchovers and connections. Notify Owner at
least 72 hours before partially or completely disabling system. Minimize outage duration.
Make connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area.
K. Existing Fire Alarm System: Maintain existing system in service. Disable system only to
make switchovers and connections. Notify Owner and local fire service at least 72 hours
before partially or completely disabling system. Minimize outage duration. Make
connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area.
L. Existing Telephone System: Maintain existing system in service. Disable system only to
make switchovers and connections. Notify Owner and Telephone Company at least 72
hours before partially or completely disabling system. Minimize outage duration. Make
connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area.
M. Existing Paging System: Maintain existing system in service. Disable system only to
make switchovers and connections. Notify the Owner at least 72 hours before partially or
completely disabling system. Minimize outage duration. Make connections to maintain
service in areas adjacent to work area.
N. Existing Data Network: Maintain existing system in service. Disable system only to make
switchovers and connections. Notify the Owner at least 72 hours before partially or
ELECTRICAL ALTERATIONS PROJECT PROCEDURES
VLK Architects, 2009 26 0505 - 3 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
completely disabling system. Minimize outage duration. Make connections to maintain
service in areas adjacent to work area.
O. Existing Video Distribution System: Maintain existing system in service. Disable system
only to make switchovers and connections. Notify the Owner at least 72 hours before
partially or completely disabling system. Minimize outage duration. Make connections to
maintain service in areas adjacent to work area.
P. Existing Security System: Maintain existing system in service. Disable system only to
make switchovers and connections. Notify the Owner at least 72 hours before partially or
completely disabling system. Minimize outage duration. Make connections to maintain
service in areas adjacent to work area.
Q. Existing Video Surveillance System: Maintain existing system in service. Disable system
only to make switchovers and connections. Notify the Owner at least 72 hours before
partially or completely disabling system. Minimize outage duration. Make connections to
maintain service in areas adjacent to work area.
3.04 DEMOLITION AND EXTENSION OF EXISTING ELECTRICAL WORK
A. The Contractor shall modify, remove, and/or relocate all materials and items so indicated
on the drawings or required by the installation of new facilities. All removals and/or
dismantling shall be conducted in a manner as to produce maximum salvage. Salvage
materials shall remain the property of the Owner, and shall be delivered to such
destination as directed by the Owner's representative unless they are not wanted, then it
will be the responsibility of this Contractor to remove such items and properly dispose of
them. Materials and/or items scheduled for relocation and which are damaged during
dismantling or reassembly operations shall be repaired and restored to good operative
condition. The Contractor may, at his discretion, and upon approval of the Owner's
representative substitute new materials and/or items of like design and quality in lieu of
materials and/or items to be relocated.
B. All items to be relocated shall be carefully removed in reverse to original assembly or
placement and protected until relocated. The Contractor shall clean, repair, and provide
all new materials, fittings, and appurtenances required to complete the relocations and to
restore them to good operative order. All relocations shall be performed by workmen
skilled in the work and in accordance with standard practice of the trades involved.
C. When items scheduled for relocation and/or reuse are found to be in damaged condition
before work has been started on dismantling, the Contractor shall call the attention of the
Owner's representative to such items and receive further instructions before removal.
Items damaged in repositioning operations are the contractor's responsibility and shall be
repaired or replaced by the contractor as approved by the owner's representative, at no
additional cost to the Owner.
D. Conduit and wiring to items to be removed, salvaged, or relocated shall be removed to
points indicated on the drawings, specified, or acceptable to the Owner's representative.
Conduit and wiring not scheduled for reuse shall be removed to the points at which reuse
is to be continued or service is to remain. Such services shall be sealed, capped, or
otherwise tied -off or disconnected in a safe manner acceptable to the Construction
Inspector. All disconnections or connections into the existing facilities shall be done in
such a manner as to result in minimum interruption of services to adjacent occupied
areas. Services to existing areas or facilities that must remain in operation during the
construction period shall not be interrupted without prior specific approval of the Owner's
representative hereinbefore specified.
ELECTRICAL ALTERATIONS PROJECT PROCEDURES
VLK Architects, 2009 26 0505 - 4 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
E. Disconnect abandoned outlets and remove devices. Remove abandoned outlets if conduit
servicing them is abandoned and removed. Provide blank cover for abandoned outlets
that are not removed. Replace existing wiring devices and cover plates with new wiring
devices and new cover plates in renovated areas. Any corridor, room, or area indicated to
have any new wiring devices installed shall have all of the existing wiring devices and
cover plates replaced with new wiring devices and new cover plates.
F. Disconnect and remove abandoned panelboards and distribution equipment.
G. Disconnect and remove electrical devices and equipment serving utilization equipment
that has been removed.
H. Disconnect and remove abandoned luminaries. Remove brackets, stems, hangers, and
other accessories.
Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during demolition and extension
work.
J. Maintain access to existing electrical installations that remain active. Modify installation or
provide access panel as appropriate.
K. Extend existing installations using materials and methods compatible with existing
electrical installations, or as specified.
L. Existing conduit raceway found to need additional hangers installed and/or junction box
covers shall be added at no additional cost to the Owner.
3.05 PROTECTION OF THE WORK
A. Provide adequate temporary support and auxiliary structure as necessary to ensure
structural value or integrity of affected portion of work.
B. Provide devices and methods to protect other portions of work from damage.
C. Execute fitting and adjustment of products to provide a finished installation to comply with
specified products, functions, tolerances and finishes.
3.06 IDENTIFICATION OF EQUIPMENT IN RENOVATED AREAS
A. Identification of Equipment: Provide new, typed panel directory cards (and card holders if
needed) for existing panelboards located within the renovated areas. Ring out all new and
existing circuits within these panelboards as specified in Section 26 05 00 Electrical
General Provisions. Do not include the description "existing". Provide new nameplates for
all existing electrical equipment in renovated areas as specified in Section 26 05 00
Electrical General Provisions.
END OF SECTION
ELECTRICAL ALTERATIONS PROJECT PROCEDURES
VLK Architects, 2009 26 0505 - 5 2737.03
SECTION 26 0510
CONTRACT QUALITY CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
A. Contract quality control including workmanship, manufacturer's instructions, mock-ups
and demonstrations.
1.02 QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAM
A. Maintain quality control over supervision, subcontractors, suppliers, manufacturers,
products, services, site conditions and workmanship to produce work in accordance with
contract documents.
1.03 WORKMANSHIP
A. Comply with industry standards except when more restrictive tolerances or specified
requirements indicate more rigid standards or more precise workmanship.
B. Perform work by persons qualified to produce workmanship of specified quality.
C. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to
withstand stresses, vibration, and racking. Under no conditions shall material or
equipment be suspended from structural bridging.
D. Provide finishes to match approved samples; all exposed finishes shall be approved by
the Architect / Engineer. Submit color samples as required.
1.04 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS
A. Comply with instructions in full detail, including each step in sequence.
B. Should instruction conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect /
Engineer before proceeding.
1.05 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATES
A. When required in individual Specification Sections, submit manufacturer's certificate in
duplicate, certifying that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
1.06 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES
A. When required in individual Specification Sections, manufacturer shall provide
manufacturer's qualified personnel to observe:
1. Field conditions
2. Condition of installation
3. Quality of workmanship
4. Start-up of equipment
5. Testing, adjusting, and balancing of equipment
B. Manufacturer's qualified personnel shall make written report of observations and
recommendations to Architect / Engineer.
CONTRACT QUALITY CONTROL
VLK Architects, 2009 26 0510 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
1.07 MOCK UPS
A. Assemble and erect the specified equipment and products complete, with specified
anchorage and support devices, seals and finishes.
B. Do not proceed with any work involving a mock-up, until the related mock up has been
approved in writing.
C. Acceptable mock-ups in place shall be retained in the completed work.
D. Perform tests and submit results as specified.
1.08 SCHEDULING OF MOCK-UPS
A. Schedule demonstration and observation of mock-ups, in phases, with Architect /
Engineer.
1. Rough -in
2. Finish with all appurtenances in place
3. Demonstrations
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL
A. Comply with recognized National rating and approval agencies as well as all codes and
ordinances at the federal, state and city levels.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 ADJUSTMENTS AND MODIFICATIONS
A. Contractor shall provide all adjustments and modifications as requested by the
manufacturer's qualified personnel at no additional cost to Owner.
B. Coordination Drawings:
1. Electrical room size and location required and to scale
2. Equipment and accessories, switchgear and piping
3. Indicate clearances and service access.
3.02 CITY INSPECTIONS
A. Contractor shall notify design prime consultant and associated Architect / Owner's
Construction Manager when he requests an inspection by the City Inspector.
3.03 MOCK-UPS
A. Mock up the light fixture fireproofing for each type of light fixture to be located in fire rated
ceilings. Demonstrate that the fire proofing material does not interfere with the
mechanical operation of light fixture doors, hinges, or latches.
B. Mock up a typical classroom and computer lab with all wiring devices, cover plates,
rough -in boxes, conduits, etc. Provide all conductors from all wiring devices to above
ceiling space to demonstrate conduit routing and conductor fill.
END OF SECTION
CONTRACT QUALITY CONTROL
VLK Architects, 2009 26 0510 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station independent School District
SECTION 26 0512
SHOP DRAWINGS, COORDINATION DRAWINGS & PRODUCT DATA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Prepare submittals as required by Specifications and as outlined below.
B. Submit product data shop drawings only for the following and for items specifically requested
elsewhere in the Contract Drawings and Specifications. Architect / Engineer reserves the
right to refuse shop drawings not requested for review and to imply that materials shall be
provided as specified without exception.
C. The term submittal, as used herein, refers to all:
1. Shop Drawings
2. Coordination Drawings
3. Product data
D. Submittals shall be prepared and produced for:
1. Distribution as specified
2. Inclusion in the Operating and Maintenance Manual, as specified, in the related
section
1.02 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Present drawings in a clear and thorough manner. Identify details by reference to sheet and
detail, schedule, or room numbers shown on Contract Drawings.
B. Show all dimensions of each item of equipment on a single composite Shop Drawing. Do not
submit a series of drawings of components.
C. Identify field dimensions; show relation to adjacent or critical features or work or products.
1.03 COORDINATION DRAWINGS
A. Present in a clear and thorough manner. Title each drawing with project name. Identify each
element of drawings by reference to sheet number and detail, or room number of contract
documents. Minimum drawing scale: 1/4"=V-0".
B. Prepare coordination drawings to coordinate installations for efficient use of available space,
for proper sequence of installation and to resolve conflicts. Coordinate with work specified in
other sections and other divisions of the specifications.
C. For each room containing major electrical switchgear and each outside equipment pad with
major electrical switchgear and equipment, submit plan and elevation drawings. Show:
1. Actual electrical switchgear, equipment and components to be furnished.
2. NEC working space and NEC access to NEC working space.
3. Relationship to other equipment and components and openings, doors and
obstructions
4. Housekeeping pad location and dimensions
D. Identify field dimensions. Show relation to adjacent or critical features of work or products.
E. Verify location of wiring devices, telephone outlets and other work specified in this Division.
1. Coordinate with drawing details, site conditions and millwork shop drawings prior to
installation.
SHOP DRAWINGS, COORDINATION DRAWINGS & PRODUCT DATA
VLK Architects, 2009 26 0512 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
2. Where required for clarification, submit shop drawings prior to rough -in and
fabrication.
F. Submit shop drawings in plan, elevation and sections, showing receptacles, outlets and other
electrical devices in casework, cabinetwork and built-in furniture.
1.04 PRODUCT DATA
A. All product options specified shall be indicated on the product data submittal. All options
listed on the standard product printed data not clearly identified as not part of the product
data submitted shall become part of the Contract and shall be provided.
B. Mark each copy of standard printed data to identify pertinent products, referenced to
specification section and article number.
C. Show reference standards, performance characteristics and capacities; wiring and piping
diagrams and controls; component parts; finishes; dimensions and required clearances.
D. Modify manufacturer's standard schematic drawings and diagrams to supplement standard
information and to provide information specifically applicable to the work. Delete information
not applicable.
E. Mark up a copy of the specifications for the product to indicate a) acknowledgement of the
specification requirement (Comply), or b) acknowledgement that the particular specification
requirement does not apply to this specific project (Not Applicable) or, c) acknowledgement
that the specification requirement cannot be made or that a variance is being submitted for
review to the Architect/Engineer/Owner (Does Not Comply, Explanation:)
1.05 MANUFACTURERS INSTRUCTIONS
A. Submit Manufacturer's instructions for storage, preparation, assembly, installation, start-up,
adjusting, calibrating, balancing and finishing.
1.06 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Review submittals prior to transmittal.
B. Determine and verify:
1. Field measurements
2. Field construction criteria
3. Manufacturer's catalog numbers
4. Conformance with requirements of Contract Documents
C. Coordinate submittals with requirements of the work and of the Contract Documents.
D. Notify the Architect/Engineer in writing at time of submission of any deviations in the
submittals from requirements of the Contract Documents.
E. Do not fabricate products, or begin work for which submittals are specified, until such
submittals have been produced and bear contractor's stamp. Do not fabricate products or
begin work scheduled to have submittals reviewed until return of reviewed submittals with
Architect/Engineer's acceptance.
F. Contractor's responsibility for errors and omissions in submittals is not relieved whether
Architect/Engineer reviews submittals or not.
G. Contractor's responsibility for deviations in submittals from requirements of Contract
Documents is not relieved whether Architect/Engineer reviews submittals or not, unless
SHOP DRAWINGS, COORDINATION DRAWINGS & PRODUCT DATA
VLK Architects, 2009 26 0512 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
Architectlengineer gives written acceptance of the specific deviations on reviewed
documents.
H. Submittals shall show sufficient data to indicate complete compliance with Contract
Documents:
1. Proper sizes and capacities
2. That the item will fit in the available space in a manner that will allow proper service
3. Construction methods, materials and finishes
Schedule submissions at least 15 days before date reviewed submittals will be needed.
1.07 SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS
A. Make submittals promptly in accordance with approved schedule, and in such sequence as
to cause no delay in the Project or in the work of any other Contractor.
B. Number of submittals required:
1. Shop Drawings and Coordination Drawings: Submit one reproducible transparency
and three opaque reproductions.
2. Product Data: Submit the number of copies the contractor requires, plus those to be
retained by the Architect / Engineer.
C. Accompany submittals with transmittal letter, in duplicate, containing:
1. Date
2. Project title and number
3. Contractor's name, address and telephone number
4. The number of each Shop Drawing, Project Datum and Sample submitted
5. Other pertinent data
D. Submittals shall include:
1. The date of submission
2. The project title and number
3. Contract Identification
4. The names of:
a. Contractor
b. Subcontractor
C. Supplier
d. Manufacturer
5. Identification of the product
6. Field dimensions, clearly identified as such
7. Relation to adjacent or critical features of the work or materials
8. Applicable standards, such as ASTM or federal specifications numbers
9. Identification of deviations from contract documents
10. Suitable blank space for General Contractor and Architect/Engineer stamps
11. Contractor's signed and dated Stamp of Approval
E. Coordinate submittals into logical groupings to facilitate interrelation of the several items.
1. Finishes which involve Architect / Engineer selection of colors, textures or patterns
2. Associated items requiring correlation for efficient function or for installation
1.08 SUBMITTAL SPECIFICATION INFORMATION
A. Every submittal document shall bear the following information as used in the project manual:
1. The related specification section number
2. The exact specification section title
B. Submittals delivered to the Architect / Engineer without the specified information will not be
processed. The Contractor shall bear the risk of all delays, as if no submittal had been
SHOP DRAWINGS, COORDINATION DRAWINGS & PRODUCT DATA
VLK Architects, 2009 26 0512 - 3 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
delivered.
1.09 RESUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS
A. Make resubmittals under procedures specified for initial submittals.
1. Indicate that the document or sample is a resubmittal
2. Identify changes made since previous submittals
B. Indicate any changes which have been made other than those requested by the Architect /
Engineer.
1.10 CONTRACTOR'S STAMP OF APPROVAL
A. Contractor shall stamp and sign each document certifying to the review of products, field
measurements and field construction criteria, and coordination of the information within the
submittal with requirements of the work and of Contract Documents.
B. Contractor's stamp of approval on any submittal shall constitute a representation to Owner
and Architect / Engineer that Contractor has either determined and verified all quantities,
dimensions, field construction criteria, materials, catalog numbers, and similar data or
assumes full responsibility for doing so, and that Contractor has reviewed or coordinated
each submittal with the requirements of the work and the Contract Documents.
C. Do not deliver any submittals to the Architect / Engineer that do not bear the Contractors
stamp of approval and signature.
D. Submittals delivered to the Architect / Engineer without Contractors stamp of approval and
signature will not be processed. The Contractor shall bear the risk of all delays, as if no
submittal had been delivered.
1.11 ARCHITECT/ENGINEER REVIEW OF IDENTIFIED SUBMITTALS
A. The Architect/Engineer will:
1. Review identified submittals with reasonable promptness and in accordance with
schedule. Specific equipment submittals that may be required to be expedited shall
be submitted separately without other submittal items not requiring the same prompt
attention.
2. Affix stamp and initials or signature, and indicate requirements for resubmittal or
approval of submittal
3. Return submittals to Contractor for distribution or for resubmission
B. Review of submittals will not extend to design data reflected in submittals that is peculiarly
within the special expertise of the Contractor or any party dealing directly with the Contractor.
C. Architect / Engineers review is only for conformance with the design concept of the project
and for compliance with the information given in the contract.
1. The review shall not extend to means, methods, sequences, teohniques or
procedures of construction or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto.
2. The review shall not extend to review of quantities, dimensions, weights or gauges,
fabrication processes or coordination with the work of other trades.
D. The review and approval of a separate item as such will not indicate approval of the
assembly in which the item functions.
1.12 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Do not make requests for substitution employing the procedures of this Section.
SHOP DRAWINGS, COORDINATION DRAWINGS & PRODUCT DATA
VLK Architects, 2009 26 0512 - 4 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
B. The procedure for making a formal request for substitution is specified in other Divisions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA
A. Submittals shall not be combined or bound together with any other material submittal.
B. Submit individually bound shop drawings and product data for the following when specified or
provided:
1. Enclosed Motor Controllers
2. Panelboards and enclosures
3. Wiring devices
4. Transformers
5. Switchboards
6. Lighting fixtures, ballasts and lamps
7. Site Lighting poles and equipment
08. Motor control centers
09. Transient Voltage Surge Suppression and Filtering
10. Electrical Contactors
11. Lighting Controls and Occupancy Sensors
3.02 COORDINATION DRAWINGS
A. Submit coordination drawings as specified.
END OF SECTION
SHOP DRAWINGS, COORDINATION DRAWINGS & PRODUCT DATA
VLK Architects, 2009 26 0512 - 5 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 26 0519
CONDUCTORS AND CONNECTORS — 600 VOLT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide electrical conductors, wire and connector work as shown, and specified.
B. Types: The types of conductors and connectors required for the project include the following:
1. 600V building conductors
2. 600V building conductor connectors
C. Application: The applications for conductors and connectors required on the project are as
follows:
1. Power distribution circuitry
2. Lighting branch circuitry
3. Appliance, receptacle, and equipment branch circuitry
4. Motor branch circuitry
5. Control wiring
6. Line voltage
D. Refer to other specific specification sections for voice, video, data, alarm and instrumentation
cables.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. UL Label: Conductors and connectors shall be UL labeled.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. Refer to other specific specification sections regarding specialized wiring and connections.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Essex
B. General Cable
C. Southwire
D, American Wire and Cable
E. Polywater
2.02 CONDUCTORS AND CONNECTORS:
A. General: Except as indicated, provide conductors and connectors of manufacturer's standard
materials, as indicated by published product information, designed and constructed as
instructed by the manufacturer, and as required for the installation.
B. Conductors: Provide factory -fabricated conductors of the size, rating, material, and type as
indicated for each use. Conductors shall be soft or annealed copper wires meeting, before
stranding, the requirements of ASTM B 3, Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed
CONDUCTORS AND CONNECTORS
VLK Architects, 2009 26 0519 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
Copper Wire for Electrical Purposes, latest edition.
1. Conductors for control wiring sized #14 AWG through #10 AWG shall be stranded.
2. Conductors for power and lighting shall be stranded. Stranding shall be Class B
meeting the requirements of ASTM B 8, Standard Specification for Concentric -Lay -
Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium Hard, or Soft.
C. Insulation: Insulation shall meet or exceed the requirements of UL 83, Standard for
Thermoplastic Insulated Wires.
1. Insulation for conductors shall be UL Type THHN/THWN, 75 degrees C.
2. All wiring inside lighting fixtures shall be temperature rated per NEC.
D. Cable Lubricant: Fire resistant, nonflammable, water based, Polywater type J or 3M type
WL WLC/WLX.
2.03 COLOR CODES FOR CONDUCTORS FOR BRANCH CIRCUITS AND FEEDERS
A. Provide color coding for conductors as required by NEC 210.5. Color coding for phase and
voltage shall be as required by local codes and standards. Where such standards do not
exist, color coding shall be as follows:
-orF
d
Lh1U
4R 4#`C.JI,
�
e�u-
{,- -�s `'
�'ii la � ��
- ,b
,� s"'�®
Table
F "' }, Egf
�
M"s
� � i� ��
s s F�
y
Y x��
��
i✓^""-�xE' a r ,�� 'ri
•
®®®®
a.d`S
'7 't
+rs4�.f
�,
�rF k'-s ;..��u ...�.;;">;•.
•
Stripe
White
Green/Yell •
w/color
Stripe
stripe
(Note 03)
White
Green/Yello
tj
Notes to Color Code Table-
1. Phase and Neutral Wire size #8 and larger, black conductors with color marking tape
at each termination and where accessible; colors as noted above.
2. Ground Wire sizes #4 and larger, black conductor with green marking tape at each
termination and where accessible.
3. Neutral Conductor: Provide three continuous white stripe on other than green
insulation when 120/208V system is not present at this installation.
4. Switched legs of phase conductors for lighting and appliance branch circuits shall be
of the same color as described above throughout the entire circuit.
5. Neutral Conductor 277V: Provide- gray conductor insulation to identify 277 volt
system neutral from 120 volt system neutral where each system shares a conduit,
raceway, junction box, pull box or cabinet.
6. The use of phasing tape is not allowed for conductor color identification for
conductor size #10 and smaller.
7. Conductors shall be the same color from breaker to device.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install electrical conductors and connectors as shown, in accordance with the
manufacturer's written instructions, the requirements of NEC, the NECA Standard of
CONDUCTORS AND CONNECTORS
VLK Architects, 2009 26 0519 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
Installation, and industry practices.
B. Coordination: Coordinate conductor installation work with electrical raceway and equipment
installation work, as necessary for interface.
C. Conductors:
1.
Pull conductors together when more than one is being installed in a raceway.
Whenever possible, pull conductors into their respective conduits by hand. Use
pulling lubricant when necessary.
2.
Before any conductor is pulled into any conduit, thoroughly swab the conduit to
remove foreign material and to permit the wire to be pulled into a clean, dry conduit.
3.
Run feeders their entire length in continuous section without joints or splices.
4.
No wire smaller than #12 AWG shall be permitted for any lighting or circuit. No
power
wire smaller than #14 AWG shall be used for any control circuit, unless shown
otherwise.
5.
For 15 and 20 amp branch circuits operating at 150V or less, provide #10 AWG wire
when the first outlet is over 75-feet from the panelboard. For branch circuits
operating at 150 to 600 volts, provide #10 AWG wire when the first outlet is over
150-feet from the panelboard.
6.
All neutrals installed in 120/208 volt circuits shall be size #10 AWG. Up to three 120-
Volt circuits of different phases may share a common neutral unless noted
otherwise. Up to three 277 Volt circuits of different phases may share a common
neutral, unless noted otherwise. Neutral conductors for non -linear loads shall be
considered a current carrying conductor as required by the NEC.
7.
Branch circuit voltage drop shall not exceed 3% of rated voltage.
8.
No tap or splice shall be made in any conductor except in outlet boxes, pull boxes,
junction boxes, splice boxes, or other accessible locations. Make taps and splices
using an approved compression connector. Insulate taps and splices equal to the
adjoining conductor. Make splices or taps only on conductors that are a component
part of a single circuit, protected by approved methods. Taps or splices in feed
through branch circuits for connection to light switches or receptacles shall be made
by pigtail connection to the device.
9.
Support conductors in vertical raceways, as required by the NEC.
10.
Do not permit conductors entering or leaving a junction or pull box to deflect to
create pressure on the conductor insulation.
11.
Make joints in branch circuits only where circuits divide. These shall consist of one
through circuit to which the branch from the circuit shall be spliced.
12.
Make connections in conductors up to a maximum of one #6 AWG wire with two #8
AWG wires using twist -on pressure connectors of required size.
13.
Make connections in conductors or combinations of conductors larger than specified
using cable fittings of type and size required for specific duty.
14.
After a splice is made, insulate entire assembly with UL-approved insulating tape to a
value equivalent to the adjacent insulation.
15.
Make splices and connections in control circuit conductors using UL-approved
solderless crimp connectors.
16.
Make grounding connections using ground clamps, connectors, or exothermic welds
of a suitable type UL-approved for the duty.
17.
All conduits shall be installed with an insulated ground conductor. The ground
conductor shall be identified with green colored insulation for wire sizes No.10 AWG
and smaller. Ground conductors size No. 8 AWG and larger shall be identified as
required by the NEC. All 120V circuits shall have dedicated neutral, common neutral
conductors for 120V phase conductors are prohibited. All 277V circuits may share a
common neutral unless noted or required otherwise. Neutral conductors for non-
linear loads shall be considered a current carrying conductor as required by NEC.
18.
No more than six current carrying conductors shall be installed in a single raceway.
When four, five, or six current carrying conductors are installed in a single raceway,
their current carrying ampacities shall be derated as required by the NEC for non -
CONDUCTORS AND CONNECTORS
VLK Architects, 2009
26 0519 - 3 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
diversified loads. Minimum wire size shall be #10 AWG. The installed wire size shall
have a nominal ampacity rating of 125% of that required or specified when four or
more current carrying conductors are installed in a single raceway. Neutral
conductors shall be considered a current carrying conductor in all non -linear loaded
circuits as required by the NEC. Maximum number of current carrying conductors in
any conduit shall not exceed eight.
19. When more than three (3) phase conductors are size #10 AWG, they shall be
installed in a one -inch conduit.
20. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment and panelboards.
21. Clean conductor surfaces before installing lugs and connectors.
22. Make splices, taps and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors with no
perceptible temperature rise.
23. Provide stranded conductors connected with mechanical type copper connecting
lugs correctly sized to the diameter of the bare conductors. Run mains and feeders
their entire length in continuous pieces without splices or joints. Provide the same
size wire form the panelboard to last outlet on circuit. Color code conductors.
24. Do not install a pull string in conduits containing conductors.
25. Conductors shall be the same color from load side of overcurrent protection device
to outlet or utilization equipment.
26. Spare conductors shall not be installed in any conduit, gutter, raceway, panel or
enclosure unless noted otherwise.
D. Identification: label each phase conductor in each junction box with corresponding circuit
number, using self-adhesive wire markers.
3.02 TESTING:
A. Pre-Energization Check: Before energizing, check cable and conductors for circuit continuity
and short circuits. Correct malfunctions.
B. Service Entrance and Feeder Insulation Resistance Test: Each main service entrance
conductor and each feeder conductor shall have its insulation resistance tested after the
installation is complete except for connection at its source and point of termination.
1. Make tests using a Biddle Megger or equivalent test instrument at a voltage of not
less than 1000 VDC. Measure resistance from conductor to conductor, conductor to
neutral (if present) and from conductor to ground. Insulation resistance shall not be
less than the following:
Wire Size Insulation
(AWG) Resistance (Ohms)
#8 250 K
#6 through #2 100 K
#1 through #4/0 50 K
Larger than #4/0 25 K
2. Conductors that do not meet or exceed the insulation resistance values listed above
shall be removed, replaced, and retested.
C. Submittals: Contractor shall furnish instruments and personnel required for tests. Submit 4
copies of certified test results to Architect for review. Test reports shall include conductor
tested, date and time of test, relative humidity, temperature, and weather conditions.
D. Voltage and Current Values: The voltage and current in each conductor shall be measured
and recorded after connections have been made and the conductor is under load.
CONDUCTORS AND CONNECTORS
VLK Architects, 2009 26 0519 - 4 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
DC HIGH VOLTAGE CABLE TEST REPORT
(Specification Paragraph 3.2, C)
Date
Contract and Work Location: _
Contract (Project) No.: _
Circuit Identification: _
(Dwg., Title, Number and Ckt. Number)
Test Equipment:
(Make, Model, Serial No., Etc.)
Applied Test Voltage
Normal Oper. Voltage
Cable Installation: New Used
(Date) (No. Years)
Cable Size AWG
Cable Length Ft.
Temperature Humidity
TEST DATA - RESISTANCE IN KILO OHMS
K-OHMS
0
0
z
0
U
A-N
B-N
C-N
A-G
B-G
C-G
A-B
B-C
A-C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
END OF SECTION
CONDUCTORS AND CONNECTORS
VLK Architects, 2009 26 0519 - 5 2737.03
SECTION 26 0520
STEEL METAL CLAD CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
. CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
A. At the Contractor's option, steel metal clad (MC) cables may be utilized for single circuit
branch circuit wiring downstream of the home run outlet or junction box in concealed,
indoor areas as defined in NEC 330, subject to acceptance by the State and Local
Codes.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Metal Clad Cable shall be constructed in strict accordance with Underwriter's
Laboratories, Inc., Standard for Metal Clad Cables, UL 1569. The cable shall bear the UL
label and the manufacturer's "E" number.
B. Further, the product shall have passed UL test procedure 1479, Through Penetration Fire
Rating, and meet NEC 330.22(C) Environmental Air Handling Spaces.
1.03 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section
with minimum fifteen years experience.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS — METAL CLAD
A. AFC
2.02 GENERAL
A. Steel Construction
B. Minimum conductor size shall be #12 AWG.
C. All MC cable shall have an insulated ground conductor.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install MC cable and fittings only for single circuit branch circuits, downstream of hone
run outlet or junction box. Install MC Cable and fittings in accordance with local codes
and applicable sections of the NECA "Standard of Installation" in concealed locations
only. MC cable shall not be used in any kitchen or food preparation areas, natatoriums, or
vocational shop areas.
1. Fasten MC cable supports to building structure and surfaces.
2. Do not support MC Cable with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove wire used
for temporary supports.
3. Do not attach MC Cable to ceiling support wires.
4. Arrange MC Cable to maintain head room and present neat appearance.
STEEL METAL CLAD CABLES
VLK Architects, 2009 26 0520 -1 27337.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
5. Maintain 12-inch clearance between MC Cable and surfaces with temperatures
exceeding 104 degrees F.
6. Cut MC Cable square using manufacturer recommended tools and methods; de -
burr cut ends.
7. Ground and bond MC Cable as required.
8. Identify MC Cable as required.
9. Route all MC Cable perpendicular or parallel to building lines.
B. Group related MC Cable; support using conduit rack or cable tray. Construct rack using
steel channel; provide space on each for 25 percent additional conduits.
C. Securely fasten MC Cable, supports and boxes, to ceiling, walls, with Rawl Plugs or
approved equal anchors. Use lead cinch anchors or pressed anchors. Use only cadmium
plated or galvanized bolts, screws. Plastic anchors and lead anchors shall not be used for
overhead applications.
D. Provide separate MC Cables for each of the following when specified, indicated or
required:
1. 120/208 volt circuits
2. 277/480 volt circuits
E. Do not install MC Cable in or below concrete slabs, outdoors, at wet or damp locations,
or in exposed areas.
F. In suspended ceilings, support conduit runs from the structure, not the ceiling system
construction.
1. Do not support from structural bridging.
2. Do not support from metal roof deck.
G. Hold horizontal and vertical MC Cables as close as possible to walls, ceilings and other
elements of the building construction.
H. Install all MC Cable perpendicular or parallel to building lines in the most direct, neat and
workmanlike manner.
1. Install MC Cable to conserve building space and not obstruct equipment service
space or interfere with use of space. MC Cable shall not be routed on floors,
paved areas or grade.
1. Run MC Cable to avoid proximity to heat producing equipment, piping, and flues, keeping
a minimum of 8-inches clear.
J. Conceal MC Cable in all areas. MC Cable can be exposed in mechanical and electrical
rooms for lighting circuits only.
K. Support MC Cable on galvanized channel, using compatible galvanized fittings (bolts,
beam clamps, and similar items), and galvanized threaded rod pendants at each end of
channel and secure raceway to channel and channel to structure. Where rod pendants
are not used, channel supports are to be secured to structure at each end. MC Cable
supports are to be secured to structure using washers, lock washers, nuts and bolts or
rod pendants (use of toggle bolt "wings" are not acceptable. Support single MC Cable
runs using a properly sized galvanized conduit hanger with galvanized closure bolt and
nut and threaded rod. Raceway support system materials shall be galvanized and
manufactured by Kindorf, Unistrut, Superstrut, Caddy, or Spring Steel Fasteners, Inc. Do
not support MC Cable from structural bridging or fire rated ceiling system. Do not support
more than one MC Cable from a single all -thread rod support. Channel supports shall
STEEL METAL CLAD CABLES
VLK Architects, 2009 26 0520 - 2 27337.03
CATE Renovations
AW Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
have cut ends filed smooth.
L. MC Cable for lighting fixture connection shall be supported from the structure with #13
AWG galvanized iron wire pendants and "Caddy clips". MC Cable for lighting fixture
connection can be supported from the ceiling suspension system using "Caddy clips". Do
not support MC Cable from structural bridging.
END OF SECTION
STEEL METAL CLAD CABLES
VLK Architects, 2009 26 0520 - 3 27337.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 26 0527
EXPANSION OF EXISTING ELECTRICAL GROUNDING SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Grounding shall conform to the requirements of:
1. National Electrical Code
2. Governing local codes
3. Local Utility Company
B. Ground effectively and permanently.
1. Verify existing neutral conductor bonding at the main service disconnect and at
other new/relocated or reused separately derived systems.
2. All new/relocated conduit or cable tray systems
3. All new/relocated electrical equipment and related current carrying supports or
structures
4. All new / relocated metal piping systems
5. All new building structural metal frames
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ANSI/IEEE Standard 142 - "Recommended Practice for Grounding of Industrial and
Commercial Power Systems."
B. ANSI/UL 467 - "Safety Standard for Grounding and Bonding Equipment."
C. Article 250 of the NEC (NFPA 70) for grounding.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GROUNDING ELECTRODES
A. Driven Rod Electrode
1. 314" x 10'-0" copper clad grounding electrode
2. UL listed
3. UL listed grounding electrode connector
4. Approved thermal fusion methods (exothermic)
B. Metal Frame of Building
C. Existing grounding electrode system
2.02 DRIVEN ELECTRODE ACCESS BOX AND COVER
A. Concrete H-20 traffic rated pull box
B. Provide cast iron H-20 traffic rated cover with "GROUND" embossed on top.
2.03 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS
A. Reference other sections of this specifications for materials specified there.
B. Heavy-duty, copper, two bolt type, copper alloy or bronze compression lugs for grounding
EXPANSION OF EXISTING ELECTRICAL GROUNDING SYSTEM
VLK Architects, 2009 26 0527 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
and bonding applications, in configurations required for particular installation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SYSTEMS 600 VOLTS OR LESS
A. In the existing service equipment, field verify existing condition of ground bus.
1. Field verify existing bond of the ground bus to the existing service grounding
conductor, to the neutral bar.
2. Tighten existing ground lugs and connections.
B. Connect the grounding electrode conductor between the ground bus and the grounding
electrode system.
1. In rigid PVC conduit.
2. Provide thermo fusion connection for each rod ground electrode.
a. All rod electrodes shall be located outside the building in non -paved
areas where available. Access cover top shall be flush with finish grade
or floor.
b. Install rod electrodes as indicated. Install additional rod electrodes as
required to achieve specified resistance to ground.
C. The minimum distance between driven ground rod electrodes shall be
10'.
3. The total ground resistance shall not exceed 10 Ohms for service entrance
grounds and 25 Ohms for equipment grounds.
a. Where this condition cannot be obtained with one electrode, install a
longer electrode, deep -driven sectional electrodes, or additional
grounding electrodes until the required ground resistance is obtained.
C. Field verify the grounding electrode conductor between the ground bus and the grounding
electrode systems are in compliance with the NEC.
D. Provide an insulated grounding conductor inside all new conduits, raceways, and surface
raceways. The ground wire shall be bonded to each box. All bonding jumpers shall be
routed inside conduit or raceway.
E. Provide an insulated, isolated equipment grounding conductor in addition to the insulated
equipment grounding conductor for all isolated grounding feeders, branch circuits, outlets
and receptacles.
F. Provide all new/relocated conduit terminating in switchgear, transformers, switchboards,
and panelboards with grounding bushings, where required and ground wire extended to
ground bus in equipment.
G. Where modifications to the main service disconnect are required, main bus and building
grounding electrode conductor installation shall be witnessed by the Architect / Engineer.
H. Interface with lightning protection system when lightning protection system is specified.
I. Locate and install anchors, fasteners, and supports in accordance with NECA "Standard
of Installation".
J. Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, or conduit.
K. Do not use spring steel clips and clamps.
L. Do not use powder -actuated anchors.
EXPANSION OF EXISTING ELECTRICAL GROUNDING SYSTEM
VLK Architects, 2009 26 0527 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
M. Do not drill or cut structural members.
N. Do not use compression or mechanical connectors underground.
3.02 SYSTEMS OVER,600 VOLTS
A. Provide insulated grounding bushings at each now/relocated conduit ;termination. The
grounding system shalt be'made continuous with bare copper jumpers.
1. Connect the copper grounding jumpers to the ground bus in the equipment.
B. , install a grounding conductor in each conduit.
i . 600 V code gauge Type XHHW.
2. Green insulation.
C. Connect the grounding conductor to
1. Each new/relocated/reused splice or pull box enclosure.
2. Each new/relticated/reused transform-er enclosure.
3. All new/relocaied/reused primary switchgear enclosures.
3.03 MISCELLANEOUS REQUIREMENTS
A. Continuity of the building equipment grounding system shall be maintained throughout the
project. Grounding jumpers shall be inside conduit, fittings and boxes and shall be
installed across conduit expansion fittings, liquid -tight flexible metal and flexible metal
conduit, light fixture pigtails in excess of 6', and other non -electrically continuous raceway
fittings.
B. Grounding conductors and grounding electrode conductor shall be stranded copper
conductors and run in a suitable PVC raceway. Grounding conductors and grounding
electrode conductor shall be continuous, without joints or splices over their entire length,
except as allowed by NFPA 70/NEC.
C. For separately derived alternating current system grounds, bond the case and neutral of
each transformer secondary winding directly to the nearest available effectively grounded
structural metal member as required in NEC 250.
D. Technology/Data/Voice Communications, CATV, CCTV, and MATV Equipment
Grounding: Provide grounding electrode conductor from the communications service
equipment to the building grounding system as required. Provide #6 ground conductor
from telephone/voice/CATV/data company demarcation point to building electrical service
entrance ground electrode connection and as required by all local utility companies.
1. MDF Closets Telecommunications Main Ground Bar (TMGB): Provide Erico
Cadweld #B544A027 ground bar, wall mounted to the telecommunications
plywood backboard. Provide one #3 AWG insulated ground conductor from
ground bar to building steel. Provide #210 AWG insulated ground conductor to the
building electrical service ground at the main electrical service disconnect.
2. OF Closets Telecommunications Ground Bar (TGB): Provide Erico Cadweld
#B542A004 ground bar mounted to the telecommunications plywood backboard.
Provide one #6 AWG insulated ground conductor from ground bar to building
steel.
3. Provide #2/0 AWG insulated ground conductor between each TMGB and all
TGBs.
4. Provide #2/0 AWG insulated ground conductor from TMGB to electrical service
ground bus at main electrical service switch.
5. Bond each equipment rack with #6 AWG insulated ground conductor to the
EXPANSION OF EXISTING ELECTRICAL GROUNDING SYSTEM
VLK Architects, 2009 26 0527 - 3 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
TMGB/TGB.
6. Route TMGB — TGB ground conductor using the shortest route practical with long
radius curves.
E. Ground new and removed/replaced lighting fixture bodies to the conduit grounding
system.
F. Receptacles: Provide a ground wire bonded to the conduit ground system, except where
and insulated isolated grounding receptacle is specified.
G. Motor Frames: Ground the frame of each motor with a properly sized separate ground
wire around flexible conduit.
H. Provide grounding access well for each driven ground electrode, if used.
1. Access well top shall be flush with finish grade.
2. Provide thermal fusion (exothermic) connectors approved for direct burial.
Ground all light poles and all exterior metal structures supporting conduit, switchgear, or
light fixtures.
J. Exterior Electrical Equipment Racks:
1. Provide driven ground electrode.
K. Ground connections to building steel, grounding electrodes and all underground
connections shall be by thermal fusion (exothermic).
3.04 COORDINATION
A. General: Coordinate installation of grounding connections for equipment with equipment
installation work.
3.05 TESTING
A. Ground Resistance Test: Perform a ground resistance test for comparison to future
inspection and testing data by the Owner. Test shall be performed using a Biddle Megger
Earth Tester or equivalent test instrument. The test shall not be performed within 48 hours
after the last rainfall
1. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS except Section 4
2. Grounding and Bonding: Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS,
Section 7.13
B. The Root Mean Square (RMS) AC measurements: The True RMS AC Measure test
should be performed for all bonding conductors. The recommended maximum AC current
value on any bonding conductor should be less than 1 ampere (A). The recommended
maximum DC current value should be less than 500 milliamperes (mA). If abnormally
high AC current levels are present on any bonding conductor, a dangerous faulty wiring
condition likely exists within the room.
C. Two -Point Bonding Measurements: The two -Point Bonding test should a performed for all
bonding conductors. This test should be performed using an earth grounding resistance
tester configured for a continuity test. The test is performed by connecting the meter leads
between the nearest available grounding electrode (e.g., structural steel) and the TMGB
or TGB. The recommended maximum value for the bonding resistance between these
two points is 0.1 ohms (100 milliohms).
D. Submittals: Furnish instruments and personnel required for tests. Personnel shall be
EXPANSION OF EXISTING ELECTRICAL GROUNDING SYSTEM
VLK Architects, 2009 26 0527 - 4 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
trained in all aspects of testing grounding systems and shall be formally trained on using
all test equipment required. Submit 2 copies of certified test results for Owner's record
and submit 4 copies of certified test results to Architect / Engineer for review. Test reports
shall include date and time of tests, relative humidity, temperature, and weather
conditions.
END OF SECTION
EXPANSION OF EXISTING ELECTRICAL GROUNDING SYSTEM
VLK Architects, 2009 26 0527 - 5 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 26 0533
CONDUIT SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install a complete system of electrical conduits and fittings.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. National Electrical Code.
B. Local codes and ordinances.
C. UL.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Raceways
1. Allied, Triangle, Carton, Wheatland, Can -Tex, Perma-cote, Certain -Teed,
Anamet, Inc., Electra -Flex Co.
B. Fittings
1. Appleton, Crouse Hinds, Steel City, O.Z. Gedney, Carton, Raco, Inc.
2.02 GENERAL
A. The minimum conduit size shall be 3/4-inch.
B. The minimum conduit size for Technology/Voice/Data/Video shall be 1-1/4 inch.
C. The minimum conduit size for flexible metallic conduit for tap connections to light fixtures
shall be inch.
D. Electrical nonmetallic tubing, flexible polyethylene or PVC tubing shall not be used on this
project.
E. BX and AC cable shall not be used on this project.
F. PVC elbows and fittings, except for threaded/slip-on/glue or straight conduit slip-on / glue
fittings, shall not be used on this project.
G. Intermediate metal conduit (IMC) shall not be used on this project.
2.03 RIGID STEEL CONDUIT
A. UL labeled, Schedule 40.
1. Mild steel pipe.
2. Zinc coated inside and out.
3. Threaded ends
4. Insulated bushings
CONDUIT SYSTEMS
VLK Architects, 2009 26 0533 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
B. Fittings shall meet the same requirements as rigid steel conduits.
1. UL labeled.
2. Threaded fittings
2.04 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT)
A. UL labeled, standard weight.
1.
Cold rolled steel tubing.
2.
Zinc coated inside and out.
B. Fittings shall meet the same requirements as EMT conduits.
1.
UL labeled
2.
Set Screw Fittings
3.
Steel fittings with setscrews with lock nuts on threaded ends, no snap locks.
4.
Cast metal fittings are not approved.
5.
Uni-couple type connectors are not approved.
6.
Split ring, anti -short bushings are not approved.
7.
Insulated throat connectors
2.05 PVC COATED RIGID STEEL WITH URETHANE INTERIOR COATING
A. UL labeled, Schedule 40 zinc coated with 40 mil thick PVC exterior coating, 2 mil thick
urethane interior and thread coating, threaded ends.
B. Threaded fittings shall meet the same requirements as rigid steel conduits, with PVC
exterior coating, urethane interior coating and UL label.
C. Insulated bushings
D. Touch-up compounds for interior urethane and exterior.
E. Manufacturer: Perma-cote
2.06 FLEXIBLE CONDUIT
A. Steel flexible metallic conduit.
1. Zinc coated inside and out.
2. 18-inches minimum length, 36-inches maximum length
B. Steel flexible metallic conduit for tap connections to light fixtures:
1. 18 inches minimum length, 6 feet maximum length.
C. Liquid tight flexible steel conduit.
1. Type L.A. - Grounded - UL Approved.
2. 18-inches minimum length, 24-inches maximum length
2.07 PVC CONDUIT
A. UL labeled Schedule 40
B. PVC fittings'and solvent welded joints.
C. Acceptable PVC condulet manufacturer: Cantex
CONDUIT SYSTEMS
VLK Architects, 2009 26 0533 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
2.08 CONDULETS AND CONDUIT BODIES
A. UL Labeled
B. Approved Manufacturer
1. Appleton
2.09 ROOF MOUNTED CONDUIT AND BOX SUPPORTS
A. Conduit supports and pads suitable for direct sunlight, conduit size, weight, quantity and
roof system with unistrut supports and accessories. Conduit supports shall allow for
conduit expansion and contraction..
B. Approved Manufacturer:
1. Portable Pipe Hangers
2. Cooper B-Line C-Port
3. Miro Industries Models 2.5, 2.5-5, 2.5-AH, 12-AH, 16-AH
2.10 ALUMINUM CONDUIT
A. UL Labeled
B. Fittings shall meet the same requirements of aluminum conduits
1. UL Labeled
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install electrical conduits and fittings for all wiring of any type unless specifically specified
or instructed to do otherwise. Instal conduits and fittings in accordance with local codes
and applicable sections of the NECA "Standard of Installation", concealed where
possible.
1. Fasten conduit supports to building structure and surfaces.
2. Arrange supports to prevent misalignment during wiring installation.
3. Do not support conduit with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove wire used for
temporary supports.
4. Do not attach conduit to ceiling support wires.
5. Arrange conduit to maintain head room and present neat appearance.
6. Maintain 12-inch clearance between conduit and surfaces with temperatures
exceeding 104 degrees F.
7. Cut conduit square using saw or pipe cutter; de -burr cut ends.
8. Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings; fasten securely.
9. Use conduit hubs to fasten conduit to sides and tops of electrical equipment,
device, box, gutter, wireway, disconnect, etc. in damp and wet locations.
10. Use suitable caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and
moisture.
11. Ground and bond conduit as required.
12. Identify conduit as required.
13. Route all conduits perpendicular or parallel to building lines.
14. Do not use no -thread couplings and connectors for galvanized steel, PVC coated
galvanized steel, or aluminum rigid conduit.
CONDUIT SYSTEMS
VLK Architects, 2009 26 0533 - 3 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
B. Group related conduits; support using conduit rack. Construct rack using steel channel;
provide space on each for 25 percent additional conduits.
C. In areas where raceway systems are exposed and acoustical or thermal insulating
material is to be installed on walls, partitions, and ceilings, raceways shall be blocked out
proper distance to allow insulating material to pass without cutting or fitting. Also provide
Kindorf galvanized steel channels to serve as standoffs for panels, cabinets and gutters.
D. Securely fasten conduits, supports and boxes, to ceiling, walls, with Rawl Plugs or
approved equal anchors. Use lead cinch anchors or pressed anchors. Use only cadmium
plated or galvanized bolts, screws. Plastic anchors and lead anchors shall not be used for
overhead applications.
E. Provide separate raceway systems for each of the following when specified, indicated or
required:
1. 120/208 volt circuits
2. 277/480 volt circuits
3. Emergency
a. Life safety branch
b. Critical branch
C. Equipment branch
4. Voice/Data
5. Sound reinforcement / Theatrical and Architectural Dimming Controls
6. MATV/CATV
7. Security CCTV
8. Security System
9. Communications / PA Systems / Sound System Line Input and Speakers
10. Fire Alarm
F. Unless shown otherwise, do not install conduit in or below concrete slabs.
G. Unless shown otherwise, do not install conduit horizontally in concrete slabs.
H. Roof penetrations shall be made in adequate time to allow the roofing installer to make
proper flashing. Conduit for equipment mounted on roof curbs shall be routed through the
roof curb. Conduit, gutters, pull boxes, junction boxes, etc. shall not be routed on roof
unless specified otherwise. Where specifically indicated to be routed or mounted on the
roof, supports shall be as specified, as recommended by roofing manufacturer and roof
support manufacturer and as required by NEC. Place supports every five feet along
conduit run and within 3 feet of all bends, condulets, and junction boxes. Provide roofing
pad under stands at directed by Architect and as recommended by roofing manufacturer
and roof support manufacturer. Provide additional unistrut supports and accessories as
required.
PVC coated conduit shall have all nicks and cuts to the protective coating repaired using
manufacturer's approved touch-up material as recommended by manufacturer. Provide a
minimum two -wraps of 3M-50 type over touch-up.
J. Conduit terminations at switchgear, pull boxes, outlet boxes, stub -up, and stub -outs, or
where wire size is #4 or larger:
1. Provide insulated throat connectors for EMT conduits.
2. Provide insulated bushing on all rigid conduit terminations.
3. Provide locknuts inside and outside of all boxes and enclosures.
4. Provide threaded type plastic bushing at all boxes and enclosures
CONDUIT SYSTEMS
VLK Architects, 2009 26 0533 - 4 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
K. In suspended ceilings, support conduit runs from the structure, not the ceiling system
construction.
1. Do not support from structural bridging.
2. Do not support from metal roof deck.
L. Completely install each conduit run prior to pulling conductors. All boxes are to be
accessible after completion of construction.
M. All conduits must be kept dry and free of water or debris with approved pipe plugs or
caps. Cap or plug conduit ends prior to concrete pours.
N. Ream ends of conduits after cutting and application of cutting die to remove rough edges.
O. Hold horizontal and vertical conduits as close as possible to walls, ceilings and other
elements of the building construction.
P. Install all conduits perpendicular or parallel to building lines in the most direct, neat and
workmanlike manner.
1. Install conduits to conserve building space and not obstruct equipment service
space or interfere with use of space. Conduit shall not be routed on floors, paved
areas or grade.
2. Where a piece of equipment is wired from a switch or box on adjacent wall, the
wiring shall go up the wall from the box, across at or near the ceiling, and back
down to the equipment. Wiring shall not block the walkway between wall and
equipment.
3. Horizontal runs of conduit on exposed walls shall be kept to a minimum.
4. Conduit for mechanical/plumbing equipment installed outdoors shall be routed
with the associated mechanical/plumbing pipe support rack system where
practical, coordinate with Division 23.
5. Conduits installed in public areas, not concealed by architectural ceilings, shall
be supported by galvanized steel channel racks tight to bottom of roof deck or
floor deck. Conduits shall be grouped for neat workman -like appearance.
Q. Install expansion and deflection fittings and bonding jumpers on straight runs which
exceed 200-feet, on center, and at 200-feet maximum, on center, on straight runs which
exceed 400-feet, and where conduits cross building expansion joints.
R. Provide grounding bushings at concentricleccentric knockouts or where reducing
washers are used.
S. Run conduit to avoid proximity to heat producing equipment, piping, and flues, keeping a
minimum of 8-inches clear.
T. Install conduit as a complete system, without conductors, continuous from outlet to outlet
and from fitting to fitting. Make up threaded joints of conduit carefully in a manner to
ensure a tight joint. Fasten the entire conduit system into position. A run of conduit
between outlet and outlet, between fitting and fitting, or between outlet and fitting shall
not contain more than the equivalent of four quarter bends, including those bends located
immediately at the outlet or fitting.
U. Conceal conduit systems in finished areas. Conduit can be exposed in mechanical and
electrical rooms and where otherwise shown or indicated only. Run the conduit parallel
and perpendicular to the structural features of the building and support with malleable
CONDUIT SYSTEMS
VLK Architects, 2009 26 0533 - 5 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consoklated High School
College Station Independent School District
iron conduit clamps at intervals as required by NEC or on conduit racks, neatly racked
and bent in a smooth radius at corners.
V. Conduit bends shall be factory elbows or shall be bent using equipment specifically
designed to bend conduit of the type used to maintain the conduit's UL listing.
W. Support conduit on galvanized channel, using compatible galvanized fittings (bolts, beam
clamps, and similar items), and galvanized threaded rod pendants at each end of channel
and secure raceway to channel and channel to structure. Where rod pendants are not
used, channel supports are to be secured to structure at each end. Conduit supports are
to be secured to structure using washers, lock washers, nuts and bolts or rod pendants
(use of toggle bolt "wings" are not acceptable. Support single conduit runs using a
properly sized galvanized conduit hanger with galvanized closure bolt and nut and
threaded rod. Raceway support system materials shall be galvanized and manufactured
by Kindorf, Unistrut, Superstrut, Caddy, or Spring Steel Fasteners, Inc. Provide chrome
or nickel -plated escutcheon plates on conduit passing through walls and ceilings in
finished areas. Do not support conduit from structural bridging or fire rated ceiling system.
Do not support more than one conduit from a single all -thread rod support. Provide
electrical insulating sleeve or wrapping for aluminum conduit supported by zinc coated
supports or fasteners. Channel supports shall have cut ends filed smooth. When installed
outside of the building, or in areas subject to moisture, the cut ends shall be painted with
ZRC galvanized paint or equivalent.
X. Flexible conduit for lighting fixture connection shall be supported from the structure with
#13 AWG galvanized iron wire pendants and "Caddy clips". Do not support conduit from
structural bridging. Flexible conduit shall not be longer than 6 feet and shall contain an
equipment grounding conductor.
Y. Terminate all motor connection conduits in mechanical room spaces with a floor pedestal
and with "Tee" conduit at motor outlet height for flexible conduit.
Z. Where conduit is not embedded in concrete or masonry, conduit shall be firmly secured
by approved clamps, half -straps or hangers. Tie wire and short pieces of conduit used as
supports and or hangers are not approved.
AA. Where "LB" condulets are used, 2-inches and larger shall be type "LBD".
BB. No more than 12 conduits containing branch circuits may be installed in junction boxes,
pull boxes or gutters.
CC. "Daisy Chaining" light fixtures installed for lay -in ceiling areas is not allowed. Each light
fixture shall have it's own fixture whip form junction box. The only exception being light
fixtures installed end to end using chase nipples between them, or light fixtures recessed
in non -accessible ceilings.
DD. Flexible metal conduit and liquid tight flexible metal conduit shall only be used for final
connections from junction box to equipment, light fixtures, power poles, etc. They are not
to be used in lieu of conduit runs. They shall not be used for wall or roof penetrations
unless they are installed in a conduit sleeve at least one size larger than the OD of the
flexible conduit.
EE. Where 3-1/2-inch conduit is specified and the required or specified material is Schedule
80 PVC, provide 4-inch conduit.
CONDUIT SYSTEMS
VLK Architects, 2009 26 0533 - 6 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
3.02 CONDUITS
A. Conduit above grade indoors:
1. Concealed Conduits: EMT with set screw fittings
2. Exposed conduits:
a. Below nine feet AFF where not directly attached and against building
walls, ceiling, or structure: Rigid galvanized conduit.
b. Where subject to physical damage: Rigid galvanized conduit.
C. Wet locations: PVC coated galvanized rigid steel
d. Damp Locations: EMT with steel compression fittings
e. Exposed conduits in mechanical rooms shall be rigid galvanized steel
when installed below four feet above finished floor.
B. Conduit run outside the building underground; conduit where indicated beneath the
building slab:
1. PVC Coated Galvanized rigid steel or PVC.
a. PVC conduit and fittings shall be used only for straight horizontal runs.
Provide PVC coated rigid galvanized steel conduit and fittings with
urethane interior coating at all changes in direction and at all vertical runs
to 18 inches above finished floor elevation. For slab penetrations,
provide continuous PVC coated rigid galvanized steel conduit and fittings
with urethane interior coating from change in direction to 18 inches
above finished floor elevation.
b. Change in direction for all underground conduit shall be with long sweep
radius.
C. Conduit for all floor boxes shall be routed below building slab from floor
box to nearest column, wall, or as indicated.
d. Conduits shall not be routed in building slab.
2. Encase all underground conduits in concrete.
a. Concrete shall be dyed red throughout with a ratio of 10 pounds of dye
per yard of concrete.
b. Provide minimum 3-inch concrete encasement around conduits.
C. Provide conduit spacers for parallel branch/feeder conduits.
d. When prior written approval from Owner and Architect to omit concrete
encasement of conduits below building slab is given, conduits either
specified or approved in writing to be routed under building slab without
concrete encasement for electrical branch circuits or voice / data / video /
communications horizontal drops or outlets shall be installed 18 inches
below finished floor and on select fill. All other conduits, including but not
limited to electrical feeders, voice / data / video / communications
vertical, riser, tie, trunk, or service cable conduits shall be installed 48-
inches below finished floor and on select fill.
e. Use suitable manufactured separators and chairs installed 4 feet on
centers. Band conduit together with suitable banding devices. Securely
anchor conduit at each chair to prevent movement during concrete
placement.
3. Install building voice / data / video / communications main service conduits and
electrical service transformer primary and secondary conduits with top of
concrete encasement minimum 48-inches below finished grade or pavement.
Voice / data / video / communications conduits and electrical service primary
conduits for utility owned electrical service transformers shall also comply with
the respective utility company requirements and standards. All other
underground conduits outside of building other than voice / data / video /
CONDUIT SYSTEMS
VLK Architects, 2009 26 0533 - 7 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
communications main service conduits and electrical service transformer primary
and secondary conduits shall have top of concrete encasement at 36 inches
minimum below finished grade or pavement.
4. Provide two "caution" plastic tapes at 6-inches and 18-inches below finished slab,
grade, or pavement; identify as specified.
5. Provide magnetic locator tape at top of first compacted layer of backfill or
concrete.
6. Changes in direction of underground conduit runs exceeding a total of 10
degrees, either vertical or horizontal, shall be accomplished by long sweep bends
having a minimum radius of curvature of 5-feet and shall be separated by a
minimum of 10-feet straight section of conduit.
7. During construction, partially completed underground conduits shall be protected
from the entrance of debris such as mud, sand, and dirt by means of conduit
plugs. As each section of the underground conduit is completed, a testing
mandrel with diameter 1/4-inch smaller than the conduit, shall be drawn through
each conduit. A brush with stiff bristles shall be drawn through until conduit is
clear of particles of earth, sand, or gravel. Conduit plugs shall then be installed.
8. Utility underground conduit for Utility Company cable shall be installed per Utility
Company standards, and their specifications for this project.
9. Concrete shall be Portland Cement conforming to ASTM-C-150, Type 1, Type III
or Type V if specified. Cement content shall be sufficient to product minimum
strength of 2,500 PSI.
10. Contractor shall stake out routing and location of underground conduits using
actual field measurements. He shall obtain approval of the Owner and Architect
before beginning trenching and excavation.
11. Verify location and routing of all new and existing underground utilities with the
Owner and Architect on the job site. Stake out these existing utilities so that they
will not be damaged. Stake out new utilities to provide coordination with other
trades and with new and existing utilities, easements, property lines, restricted
land use areas, and right-of-ways.
12. Where long sweep turns are specified or required, change in direction of runs,
either vertical or horizontal, shall be accomplished by long sweep bends having a
minimum radius of curvature of 25 feet and a maximum arc of 22.5 degrees. The
long sweep bends may be made up of one or more curbed PVC coated
galvanized steel or straight PVC sections. Manufactured bends shall have the
largest radius possible.
C. Conduit installed above grade outdoors:
1. Galvanized rigid steel where subject to physical damage or where located less
than four feet above finished floor.
2. Aluminum where not subject to physical damage and where located four feet
above finished floor.
D. Conduit shown in concrete floor or roof slab:
1. PVC Coated Galvanized Rigid steel.
E. Conduits within 100 feet of cooling towers, at designated corrosive locations, or where
conduit penetrates concrete slab.
1. PVC coated galvanized rigid steel
F. Connections to equipment mounted on roof, rotating equipment, transformers, and
kitchen or food processing equipment, or where flexible conduit is required outdoors.
1. Liquid tight flexible metal conduit (1/2 inch may be used for roof top supply /
exhaust fans only)
CONDUIT SYSTEMS
VLK Architects, 2009 26 0533 - 8 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
2. Liquid tight flexible metal conduit 24-inch maximum length
G. Light fixture whips:
1. Yz-inch flexible conduit
2. Length not to exceed 6-feet 0-inches
3. Dedicated ground wire inside conduit
4. Light fixture whips shall not be supported from the ceiling suspension system.
Provide support from structure with "Caddy" clips. Light fixture whips shall not
rest on ceiling grid or tile.
H. Conduits at Natatorium or therapeutic pool areas; conduit within 100 feet of Natatorium or
therapeutic pool exhaust equipment openings; conduit at Natatorium or therapeutic pool
HVAC, pumping and water treatment areas:
1. PVC coated galvanized rigid steel conduit, fittings and accessories
Conduits in classified hazardous (Classified) locations:
1. Conduit fittings and seals UL listed for the classification
3.03 CONDUIT PENETRATIONS, SLEEVES AND ESCUTCHEONS
A. Furnish sleeves for placing in construction for all conduit passing through concrete or
masonry walls, partitions, beams, grade level other than floor, and roofs. A conduit sleeve
shall be one size larger than the size of conduit, which it serves except where larger sizes
are required for manufactured water, fire, or smoke stop fittings.
1. Sleeves set in concrete floor construction shall be minimum Schedule 40
galvanized steel.
2. Sleeves shall extend 3-inches above the finished floor.
B. Sleeves in concrete or masonry walls shall be Schedule 40 galvanized steel. Sleeves
shall be set flush with finished wall.
C. Install manufactured UL listed water, fire, and smoke stop fittings, or caulk around conduit
or cables in sleeves with sufficient UL listed fire safe insulation or foam to maintain wall or
floor slab fire or smoke rating. Refer to Architecture drawings for locations of rated walls.
D. Provide Linkseal Mechanical Seals around conduit penetrations through walls below
grade. Provide a pull box to serve as a water stop inside wall penetration. Internally seal
low voltage cabling conduit penetrations with waterproof caulking.
E. Sleeves penetrating walls or grade beams below grade shall be Schedule 40 black steel
pipe with 1/4-inch thick steel plate secured to the pipe with continuous fillet weld. The plate
shall be located in the middle of the wall and shall be 2-inches wider all around than the
sleeve that it encircles. The sleeve should extend a minimum of 24-inches on either side
of the penetration. The entire assembly shall be hot -dipped galvanized after fabrication.
F. Conduit passing through the housing on connected equipment shall pass through a
cleanly cut hole protected with an approved grommet. Route conduit through roof
openings, for piping and ductwork or through suitable roof jack, with pitch pocket.
Coordinate location with roofing installation as required.
G. Conduit passing through fire rated wall shall be sealed with Fire Stop. Route conduit to
preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and
methods under the provisions of Division 7.
CONDUIT SYSTEMS
VLK Architects, 2009 26 0533 - 9 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
3.04 POWER UNDERGROUND CONDUIT SYSTEMS AND SERVICE ENTRANCE UNDERGROUND
CONDUIT
A. Power underground conduits and service entrance shall be of individual conduit encased
in concrete. Unless shown otherwise, the type of conduit used shall not be mixed in any
one underground conduit and shall be the size indicated on the drawings. The concrete
encasement surrounding the underground conduit shall be rectangular in cross-section,
having a minimum concrete thickness of 3-inches, except that conduit for 120V and
above shall be separated from control and signal conduits by a minimum concrete
thickness of 3-inches. Encasement concrete shall be tinted in red.
B. During construction, partially completed underground conduits shall be protected from the
entrance of debris such as mud, sand, and dirt by means of conduit plugs. As each
section of the underground conduit is completed, a testing mandrel shall be drawn
through until each conduit is clear of particles of earth, sand, or gravel. Conduit plugs
shall then be installed.
C. Furnish the exact dimensions and location of power underground conduit to be encased
in time to prevent delay in the concrete work.
D. Conduit for service entrance underground conduits shall be as indicated on the drawings.
E. Primary power underground conduit shall be installed in accordance with utility company
standards and the utility company specifications for this project.
3.05 TECHNOLOGYNOICE/DATANIDEO COMMUNICATIONS, SIGNAL, LOW VOLTAGE AND
EMPTY CONDUIT SYSTEM RACEWAYS
A. Conduit shall be installed in accordance with the specified requirements for conduit and
with the additional requirements that no length of run shall exceed 100-feet for 1 inch or
smaller trade sizes, and shall not contain more than two 90-degree bends or the
equivalent. Pull or junction boxes shall be installed to comply with these requirements.
Provide plastic bushings at all conduit terminations. Provide a grounding bushing on each
data and voice conduit.
B. Conduits shall be installed from outlet box to above an accessible ceiling. All cables
routed through open spaces (no -ceiling below roof deck or above floor deck) shall be
routed in conduit. Technology, telephone, communication systems, CATV, CCTV, fire
alarm and BMCS cables can be installed above accessible ceilings without conduit.
Cables installed above accessible ceiling shall be plenum rated. Conduit rough in of
these cables shall include a 90-degree turn -out to an accessible location with insulated
bushings on the end of the conduit.
1. Provide conduit from each telephone / voice outlet box to accessible ceiling
plenum.
2. Provide conduit from each technology / data / communications outlet box to
accessible ceiling plenum.
3. Provide conduit from each cable TV / video / audio outlet box to accessible
ceiling plenum.
4. Provide conduit from each security / surveillance device outlet box to accessible
ceiling plenum.
5. Provide two conduits for each combination data/voice/video outlet box and each
outlet box indicated to contain more than four data, voice, or video drops to
accessible ceiling plenum.
CONDUIT SYSTEMS
VLK Architects, 2009 26 0533 - 10 2737.03
CATE Renovations
AW Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
C. All conduit in which cable is to be installed by others shall have pull string installed. The
nylon pull string shall have not less than 200 lb. tensile strength. Not less than 12-inches
of slack shall be left at each end. Provide blank cover plate before substantial completion
if box is for a future installation after substantial completion of the project. Conduit shall
extend to a minimum six inches above nearest accessible ceiling, and be turned
horizontally with plastic bushing at terminations.
D. Conduits for Building Entrance Facilities:
1. Outside Plant: Install a pull box every 300-feet or after 180 degree turns. All turns
should be large sweeps (not sharp 90s) with the radius of the sweep at least 1 OX
the diameter of the conduit. Hence a 4-inch conduit requires a 40-inch radial
sweep. If field conditions absolutely mandate a sharp 90 bend to be installed,
then a pull box shall be installed at that location regardless of distance.
2. Inside Plant: Install a pull box every 150-feet or after 180 degree turns. All turns
shall be large sweeps, not sharp 90s, with the radius of the sweep at least 10X
the diameter of the conduit. Hence, a 4-inch conduit requires a 40-inch radial
sweep. If field conditions absolutely mandate a sharp 90 degree bend to be
installed, then a pull box shall be installed at that location regardless of distance.
3. Building entrance facilities shall not terminate in an IDF or any other space
except the MDF.
4. Coordinate the termination location of the building entrance facilities in the MDF
with the room layout and equipment configuration.
5. Provide (3) one -inch ribbed innerducts in each 4-inch conduit.
3.06 IDENTIFICATION
A. Conduit Systems: Provide adequate marking of major conduit exposed or concealed in
interior accessible spaces to distinguish each run as either a power or
signal/communication conduit. Except as otherwise indicated, use orange banding with
black lettering. Provide self-adhesive or snap -on type plastic markers. Locate markers at
ends of conduit runs, near switches and other control devices, near items of equipment
served by the conductors, at points where conduit passes through walls or floors or
enters non -accessible construction, and at spacing of not more than 50-feet along each
run of exposed conduit. Switch -leg conduit and short branches for power connections
need not be marked, except where conduit is larger than 1-inch.
END OF SECTION
CONDUIT SYSTEMS
VLK Architects, 2009 26 0533 - 11 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 26 0534
ELECTRICAL FLOOR BOXES AND FITTINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide electrical floor box and fitting work as required, scheduled, indicated, and
specified.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. UL Label: Electrical boxes and fittings shall be UL labeled.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Thomas & Betts, Memphis, TN
B. Hubbell
C. Wiremold
2.02 MATERIALS - FLOOR BOXES
A. Floor boxes used in floors with waterproof membranes shall be cast iron, painted inside
and out with weatherproof paint intended for use on metal as indicated on the plans.
B. Floor boxes used in floors without waterproof membranes shall be formed steel with zinc
or cadmium plate at least .0005" thick on the outside and .00015" thick on the inside as
indicated on the plans.
C. Construction shall be as required by UL 514A.
D. Carpet or the frame shall be brass.
E. Cover assembly shall protect against the ingress of water or foreign material with a
gasket and shall be UL listed as mop tight.
F. Thomas & Betts 640 / 840 Series
2.03 GENERAL DESIGN - FLOOR BOXES
A. Shall deliver electric power from receptacles installed at the surface of the floor or from
service fittings.
B. Telephone/data cable without interference from electric power delivery.
C. Cubic inch capacity shall be as required.
D. Boxes shall accept conduit sizes as required.
E. Shall be listed by UL
ELECTRICAL FLOOR BOXES AND FITTINGS
VLK Architects, 2009 26 0534 -1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
2.04 MATERIALS - FLOOR BOXES - CONCEALED SERVICE
A. Shall be electro-galvanized, 14 gauge sheet steel except at waterproof membrane floors
where they shall be cast iron.
B. Construction shall be as required by UL 514A.
C. Carpet frame shall be nylon UL Recognized Component QMFZ2.
D. Hinged outer cover shall be reinforced with a 5/32" steel plate.
E. Series 665SC/667SC as manufactured by Thomas & Betts
2.05 GENERAL DESIGN - FLOOR BOXES - CONCEALED SERVICE
A. Shall deliver electric power from duplex receptacles installed below the surface of the
floor.
B. Shall deliver telephone or data cable without interference from the electric power delivery
C. Shall protect delivery of both services by a hinged cover with a retractable opening and
foam plastic dust seal
D. Hinged cover shall accept carpet or file to match floor covering and be 180 degrees
reversible.
E. Shall accept conduit sizes up to 1-1 /4 inches
F. Box shall be listed by UL
G. When hinged cover is closed and no services in place, device shall have no obstructions
above surface of floor.
2.06 GENERAL DESIGN - FIRE RATED, POKE -THROUGH SERVICE FITTINGS
A. Shall be UL classified for use in up to four hour rated concrete floors, and up to three
hour rated steel and concrete floors.
B. Shall be UL listed for use with power and low voltage in a single service fitting and shall
protect against ingress of water or foreign material with a neoprene gasket at base of
fitting.
C. Shall be installed in a single core drilled hole
D. Shall permit use with "H" cut opening in carpet so carpet can be restored if position is
vacated
E. Shall have interchangeable service fitting accessories including hinged guard and low
voltage communication inserts
F. Service fitting head shall be bronze.
G. Low voltage channel shall accept one 50 pair, 24 AWG cable through communication
raceway.
ELECTRICAL FLOOR BOXES AND FITTINGS
VLK Architects, 2009 26 0534 -2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
H. Shall be the Poke-Thru Series as offered by Thomas & Betts — FPT Series
2.07 MATERIALS - SERVICE FITTING HEADS
A. Shall be brushed aluminum
2.08 GENERAL DESIGN - SERVICE FITTINGS
A. Shall deliver electrical power from receptacles as designated on the plans
B. Shall deliver telephone/data through precut bushed opening
C. Shall be furnished standard with required receptacles
D. Shall be furnished standard with conduit nipple for direct screw threading into T&B cover
assembly
E. Shall be listed by UL
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Locate position for floor boxes and runs of conduit as shown on the plans, or as required.
Coordinate with the Architect for dimensional locations of floor boxes prior to cutting or
pouring slab.
B. Select appropriate size of floor boxes, poke -through, or multiple services floor boxes for
quantity of wiring devices indicated and as recommended by manufacturer.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Position floor boxes and conduit runs
B. After concrete pour, pull wires and install devices according to manufacturer's
recommendations.
C. Activate in accordance with the National Electrical Code.
D. Coordinate with floor covering contractor to complete installation.
E. Core drill openings for poke -through service fitting and install in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
1. Minimum spacing of 2' on center and not more than one unit per each 65 square
feet of floor area in each span; required by Fire Resistance Directory.
END OF SECTION
ELECTRICAL FLOOR BOXES AND FITTINGS
VLK Architects, 2009 26 0534 -3 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 26 0535
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Electrical connections as required and scheduled, and as specified.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Refer to other Divisions for specific individual equipment electrical requirements.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. UL Label: Products shall be UL labeled to the extent possible.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS
A. General: For each electrical connection indicated, provide a complete assembly
including, but not limited to, pressure connectors, terminals (lugs), electrical insulating
tape, heat -shrinkable insulating tubing, cable ties, solderless wire nuts, and other items
and accessories needed to complete splices and terminations.
B. Raceways: Refer to related sections.
C. Conductors and Connectors: Refer to related section.
D. Terminals: Provide electrical terminals as indicated by the terminal manufacturer for the
application.
PART 3 - EXECUTION:
3.01 INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS:
A. General: Install electrical connections as shown, in accordance with applicable portions
of the NECA Standard of Installation, and industry practices.
B. Conductors: Connect electrical power supply conductors to equipment conductors in
accordance with equipment manufacturer's written instructions and wiring diagrams.
Where possible, match conductors of the electrical connection for interface between the
electrical supply and the installed equipment.
C. Splice Insulation: Cover splices with electrical insulation equivalent to, or of a higher
rating than, insulation on the conductors being spliced.
D. Appearance: Prepare conductors by cutting and stripping covering, jacket, and insulation
to ensure a uniform and neat appearance where cables and wires are terminated.
E. Routing: Trim cables and wires to be as short as practical. Arrange routing to facilitate
inspection, testing, and maintenance.
F. Motor Connections: Where possible, terminate conduit in conduit boxes at motors. Where
motors are not provided with conduit boxes, terminate the conduit in a suitable condulet,
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT
VLK Architects, 2009 26 0535 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
and make motor connections. Conduit passing through the housing on connected
equipment shall pass through a cleanly cut hole protected with an approved grommet.
G. Coordination: Coordinate installation of electrical connections for equipment with
equipment installation work.
H. Identification: Refer to Electrical General Provisions for identification of electrical power
supply conductor terminations with markers approved as to type, color, letter and marker
size by the Architect. Fasten markers at each termination point, as close as possible to
each connecting point.
Equipment and Furnishings: Refer to other Divisions. Coordinate power and control
provisions shown for equipment and furnishings with the provisions required for the
furnished equipment and furnishings. Where the power and control requirements are less
than or equal to those specified, modifications to power and control provisions shall be
made at no cost as a part of coordination. Where power and control requirements are in
excess of those shown, notify the Architect in writing of the requirements.
END OF SECTION
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT
VLK Architects, 2009 26 0535 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 26 0537
ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide electrical box and fitting work as required, scheduled, indicated, and specified.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. UL Label: Electrical boxes and fittings shall be UL labeled.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 FABRICATED MATERIALS
A. Interior Outlet Boxes: Provide galvanized steel interior outlet wiring boxes, of the type,
shape, and size, including depth of box, to suit respective locations and installation.
Construct with stamped knockouts in back and sides. Provide gang boxes where devices
are shown grouped. Single box design; sectional boxes are not acceptable
1. Type of Various Locations:
a. Ceilings: 4-inch square, 2-1/8-inch deep.
b. Plaster Walls: 4-inch square, 2-1/8-inch deep, with raised plaster cover;
set with face flush with finished surface, shallow boxes where necessary.
C. Dry -wall Construction Walls: Standard galvanized switch box, 2-1/8-inch
deep, and shallow boxes where necessary.
d. Masonry Walls: Galvanized switch boxes made especially for masonry
installations; depths of boxes must be coordinated for each installation.
e. Surface: Type FS or FD box with surface cover.
f. Corrosive locations or natatorium areas: Aluminum or 304 stainless steel
construction suitable for the installation.
g. Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Explosion proof boxes, seals and
fittings.
h. Special: Where above types are not suitable, boxes as required, taking
into account space available, appearance, and Code requirements
2. Interior Outlet Box Accessories: Outlet box accessories required as for
installation, including covers or wall device plates, mounting brackets, wallboard
hangers, extension rings, plaster rings for boxes in plaster construction, fixture
studs, cable clamps and metal straps for supporting outlet boxes. Accessories
shall be compatible with outlet boxes used and meet requirements of individual
wiring.
B. Damp Location Outlet and Damp or Wet Location Switch Boxes: Deep type hot dipped
galvanized cast -metal weatherproof outlet wiring boxes, of type, shape, and size
required. Include depth of box, threaded conduit ends, and stainless steel cover plate
with spring -hinged waterproof caps suitable for application. Include faceplate gasket and
corrosion -resistant fasteners.
C. Wet Location Outlet Boxes: Hot dipped galvanized cast-iron weatherproof outlet wiring
boxes, of type, shape, and size required. Include depth of box, threaded conduit ends,
and rain tight while -in -use cover plate Leviton 5977/5997-GY. Include faceplate gasket
and corrosion -resistant fasteners.
ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS
VLK Architects, 2009 26 0537 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
D. Junction and Pull Boxes: Galvanized sheet steel junction and pull boxes, with screw -on
covers, of type, shape, and size, to suit respective location and installation.
Type for Various Locations:
a. 100 Cubic Inches in Volume or Smaller: Standard outlet boxes with
stamped knockouts.
b. 101 Cubic Inches in Volume or Larger: Code gauge steel with sides
formed and welded, screw covers unless shown or required to have
hinged doors. Boxes with covers of 12-inches or more in any dimension
shall have hinged doors with locking device same as furnished on
panelboards. Knockouts factory stamped or formed in field with a cutting
tool to provide a clean symmetrically cut hole.
C. Exterior or Wet Areas: 304 stainless steel NEMA 4X construction with
gaskets and corrosion -resistant fasteners
E. Conduit Bodies: Provide galvanized cast -metal conduit bodies, of type, shape, and size,
to suit location and installation. Construct with threaded conduit ends, removable cover,
and corrosion -resistant screws.
F. Bushings, Knockout Closures, and Locknuts: Provide corrosion -resistant punched -steel
box knockout closures, conduit locknuts, and insulated conduit bushings of type and size
to suit use and installation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION OF BOXES AND FITTINGS
A. Install electrical boxes and fittings as shown and as required, in compliance with NEC
requirements, in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions, in accordance
with industry practices.
B. Junction and pull boxes above 2-foot x 2-foot grid ceilings shall be mounted within 18-
inches of ceiling grid. Junction and pull boxes above 2-foot x 4-foot grid ceiling shall be
mounted within 30-inches of ceiling grid. All junction box or pull box openings shall be
side or bottom accessible.
C. Use outlet and switch boxes for junctions on concealed conduit systems except in utility
areas where exposed junction or pull boxes can be used.
D. Determine from the drawings and by measurement the location of each outlet. Locate
electrical boxes to accommodate millwork, fixtures, marker boards, and other room
equipment at no additional cost to the Owner. The outlet locations shall be modified from
those shown to accommodate changes in door swing or to clear interferences that arise
from construction as well as modifying them to center in rooms. The modifications shall
be made with no cost as part of coordination. Check the conditions throughout the job
and notify the Architect of discrepancies. Verify modifications before proceeding with
installation. Set wall boxes in advance of wall construction, blocked in place and secured.
Set all wall boxes flush with the finish and install extension rings as required extending
boxes to the finished surfaces of special furring or wall finishes. Provide wall box support
legs attached to stud to prevent movement of box in wall.
E. Unless noted or directed otherwise at installation, place outlet boxes as indicated on
architectural elevations and as required by local codes.
F. Outlets above counters, mount long axis horizontally. Refer to architectural elevations
and coordinate to clear backsplash and millwork.
ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS
VLK Architects, 2009 26 0537 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
G. Provide pull boxes, junction boxes, wiring troughs, and cabinets where necessary for
installation of electrical systems. Surface mounted boxes accessible to the public shall
not have stamped knockouts.
H. Provide weatherproof boxes for interior and exterior locations exposed to weather or
moisture.
Provide knockout closures to cap unused knockout holes where blanks have been
removed.
J. Locate boxes and conduit bodies to ensure access to electrical wiring. Provide minimum
12-inch clearance in front of box or conduit body access.
K. Secure boxes to the substrate where they are mounted, or embed boxes in concrete or
masonry.
L. Boxes for any conduit system shall not be secured to the ceiling system, HVAC ductwork
or piping system.
M. Provide junction and pull boxes for feeders and branch circuits where shown and where
required by NEC, regardless of whether or not boxes are shown.
N. Coordinate locations of boxes in fire rated partitions and slabs to not affect the fire rating
of the partition or slab. Notify the Architect in writing where modification or construction is
required to maintain the partition or slab fire rating.
O. Exterior boxes installed within 50-feet of cooling towers or water treatment areas shall be
of 304 stainless steel, of weatherproof NEMA 4X construction.
P. Identification: Paint the exterior and cover plates of building interior junction boxes and
pull boxes to correspond to the following colors:
1. Orange: - 480/277 VAC systems
2. Blue: - 240 VAC three phase delta systems.
3. Red - Emergency circuits and exit lights, fire alarm system.
4. Green - 120/208 VAC 3 phase and 120/240 VAC single-phase systems
5. Blue - Mechanical and miscellaneous equipment power branch circuits
6. White - Security and Surveillance equipment circuits
Q. All boxes shall be labeled with each circuit number and each circuit relay number if
applicable on the cover plate, visible from the outside of the box.
R. Align adjacent wall mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats, and similar devices.
S. Use flush mounting outlet box in finished areas unless specifically indicated as being
used with exposed conduit.
T. Locate flush -mounting box in masonry wall to require cutting of masonry unit corner only.
Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat opening.
U. Do not install flush mounting box back-to-back in walls; provide minimum 6 inches
separation. Provide minimum 24 inches separation in acoustic rated walls.
V. Secure flush mounting box to interior wall and partition studs. Accurately position to allow
for surface finish thickness.
ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS
VLK Architects, 2009 26 0537 - 3 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
W. Use stamped steel bridges to fasten flush mounting outlet box between studs.
X. Install flush mounting box without damaging wall insulation or reducing its effectiveness.
Y. Use adjustable steel channel fasteners for hung ceiling outlet box.
Z. Do not fasten boxes to ceiling support wires.
AA. Support boxes independently of conduit.
BB. Use gang box where more than one device is mounted together. Do not use sectional
box.
CC. Use gang box with plaster ring for single device outlets.
DD. Large Pull Boxes: Use hinged enclosure in interior dry locations, surface -mounted cast
metal box in other locations.
EE. Anchor outlets in suspended ceilings to the building construction.
FF. In finished areas not receiving furred ceilings, install outlet boxes on concrete deck of the
floor or roof above. Exercise extreme care in locating outlet boxes.
GG. Mount boxes to the building structure with supporting facilities independent of the
conduits entering or leaving the boxes.
HH. Where multiple feeders are in one pull box, conductors shall be wrapped with 3M No.
7700 Arc and fireproof tape.
If. Where required, provide plaster rings of suitable depth on outlet boxes. Face of outlet
box or plaster ring shall be not more than 1/8 inch from finished surface.
JJ. Equip boxes supporting fixtures designed to accept fixture studs with 3/8-inch stud
(galvanized malleable iron) inserted through back of box and secured by locknut. Boxes
not equipped with outlets shall have level metal covers with rust -resisting screws.
KK. Do not mount junction boxes above inaccessible ceilings or in inaccessible spaces. Do
not mount junction boxes above ceilings accessible only by removing light fixture. At
inaccessible spaces use junction box furnished with light fixture or light fixture wiring
compartment UL listed for through wiring.
LL. No more than 12 conduits containing branch circuits may be installed in any junction or
pull box.
MM. Junction boxes shall be protected from building finish painters' over spray; ie: mechanical
rooms, to comply with item "P" in this section.
3.02 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust flush -mounting outlets to make front flush with finished wall material.
B. Install knockout closures in unused box openings.
END OF SECTION
ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS
VLK Architects, 2009 26 0537 - 4 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 26 0540
ELECTRICAL GUTTERS AND WIREWAYS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide electrical gutter work as shown, as specified and as required.
B. Application: The types of electrical gutters required for the project include the following:
1. Electrical wiring gutters
2. Voice / Data / Video / Communication and signal distribution wireway
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. UL Label: Gutters and wireways shall be UL labeled.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ELECTRICAL GUTTERS AND WIREWAYS
A. General: Provide hinged galvanized steel electrical gutters and wireways in the types and
sizes indicated or required, minimum 16 gauge thickness, with rounded edges and smooth
surfaces; constructed in compliance with applicable standards; with features required.
B. Size: Provide size indicated. Where size is not indicated, construct in accordance with the
NEC and other standards. Gutters shall be of manufacturer's standard lengths, without field
cutting or field extensions.
C. Accessories: Provide gutter and wireway accessories where indicated, constructed of same
metal and finish as gutters or wireways.
D. Supports: Provide gutter and wireway supports indicated, conforming to NEC, and as
recommended by the manufacturer, and as specified in Section 26 0533 Conduit Systems.
E. Materials and Finishes: NEMA 1 gutters and wireways shall have gray powder coat finish
over galvanized steel. Gutters and wireways installed outside or inside natatorium areas shall
be of 304 stainless steel NEMA 4X construction.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Provide gutters and wireways only where specified or required. Use of gutters and wireways
shall be kept to a minimum.
B. Finishing: Remove burrs and sharp edges of gutters and wireways wherever they could be
injurious to conductor insulation or jacket.
C. Installation: Install gutters and wireways where shown or required, in accordance with the
manufacturer's written instructions, NEC, NECA "Standard of Installation," and with
recognized industry practices to ensure that the gutters and wireways comply with the
specified requirements. Comply with requirements of NEMA and the NEC pertaining to
installation of electrical gutters.
D. Grounding: Electrically ground gutters and wireways to ensure continuous electrical
ELECTRICAL GUTTERS AND WIREWAYS
VLK Architects, 2009 26 0540 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
conductivity. Provide equipment grounding conductor.
E. Conductors:
1. Complete gutter and wireway installation before starting the installation of
conductors.
2. Provide sufficient space to permit access for installing, splicing, and maintaining the
conductors.
F. A maximum of 12 conduits containing branch circuits shall be allowed to be installed in any
gutter or wireway.
END OF SECTION
ELECTRICAL GUTTERS AND WIREWAYS
VLK Architects, 2009 26 0540 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 26 0550
FIRESTOPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide firestop as required, and as specified. Refer to Architectural drawings for all fire
and smoke rated partitions, walls, floors, etc.
B. Types: Firestop required for the project includes smokestop.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. UL Label: Firestops shall be UL labeled.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Nelson.
B. 3M (Minnesota Mining Manufacturing).
C. Hilti
D. Specified Technologies, Inc.
2.02 MATERIAL AND COMPONENTS
A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide firestop manufacturer's standard
materials and components as indicated by published product information, designed and
constructed as recommended by the manufacturer, and as required for installation.
2.03 FIRESTOP
A. Conduits: Provide a soft, permanently flexible sealant for 1-1/2 to 2 hour rated
fireproofing for steel conduits (up to 4" diameter).
B. Low Voltage Cables, Fiber Optic Cable and Innerduct: Provide Specified Technologies,
Inc. EZ-Path single, double, or triple pathways as required.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION OF FIRESTOPS
A. General: Install firestops in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions
and industry practices to ensure that the firestops comply with requirements. Comply with
UL and NFPA standards for the installation of firestops.
END OF SECTION
FIRESTOPS
VLK Architects, 2009 26 0550 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 26 0923
LIGHTING OCCUPANCY SENSORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide occupancy sensing control devices so that lighting is turned off automatically in
individual rooms or sections of rooms after a reasonable time delay when the last person
leaves the room or area.
B. Occupancy sensing controls shall accommodate for irregular use of rooms or areas, all
individual work habits, and all occupancy habits or conditions of space utilization.
Occupancy sensors must provide full volumetric coverage.
1.02 SCOPE
A. Contractor shall furnish and install a complete and operable occupancy sensing lighting
control devices, as described in the specifications herein.
B. Work included: All labor, materials, appliances, tools, equipment necessary for and
incidental to performing all operations in connection with furnishing, delivery and
installation of the work of this Section, complete, as shown on the drawings and/or
specified herein. Work includes, but is not necessarily limited to the following:
1. Examine all other specification sections and drawings for related work required to
be included as work under Division 26.
2. General provisions and requirements for electrical work.
3. Refer to Wiring Devices for wall switch cover plates.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Product manufacturer shall have a minimum of (5) years experience in the manufacturing
of occupancy sensors.
B. All components shall be UL listed, meet all state and local applicable code requirements.
C. All components shall offer a five (5) year manufacturer's warranty.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit applicable manufacturer's specifications sheets, installation instruction, wiring
diagrams and performance data for all components required.
B. Submit floor plans indicating ceiling heights and coverage patterns of all occupancy
sensors to indicate complete coverage of small motion. Occupancy sensor layout shall be
prepared by the manufacturer. Minimum size floor plans 11x17 inch; minimum scale one
inch equals 16 feet.
C. Provide a complete written item -by -item, line -by-line specification review stating
compliance or deviation in full description. Any deviations to this specification must be
clearly stated in writing. It is the contractor's responsibility to provide submittals that meet
or exceed the specifications herein prior to commencement of work.
LIGHTING OCCUPANCY SENSORS
VLK Architects, 2009 26 0923 - 1 2737.03 '
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
D. Submit a sample of each style and color of occupancy sensor and switch with related
cover plate. Attach plate to wiring device and label backside of plate with job description
with permanent black marker.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A.
Novitas
B.
Watt Stopper
C.
My -Tech
D.
Hubbell
E.
Leviton
F.
Sensor Switch
2.02 OCCUPANCY SENSORS
A. Part numbers based on Novitas. Device color shall be white.
B. Ceiling Mounted Dual Technology Sensors*** 01-300, 01-310
C. High Bay Sensor*** 01-320
D. Extreme Temperature Sensor*** 01-340
* For use with Novitas 13-041 and heavy duty 13-051 Switchpacks only.
«* For use with GE RR7 and Sierra 1070E compatible relays only
*«* Can be powered by heavy duty 13-051 Switchpacks
2.03 FEATURES AND PERFORMANCE PARAMETERS
A. Sensors shall provide an override feature that will force lights on in the event of sensor
malfunction.
B. Ceiling sensors shall provide no -gap minor motion coverage throughout the entire
controlled area.
C. Ceiling, Dual Technology, and High Bay sensor electronics shall be mounted on snap -out
circuit boards, which are replaceable, in the event of failure, without disturbing hard wiring
or sensor mounting.
D. Ceiling, Dual Technology, and High Bay sensors shall be available in more than one
frequency to enable individual control of adjacent spaces without gaps in coverage.
E. Sensors shall operate on 15 VDC as supplied by Novitas Switchpacks.
F. All ceiling sensors shall have a manual override switch to allow the load to be turned on
without the use of tools or pins in the event of sensor malfunction.
G. Sensors shall have easily accessible, adjustable controls for time delay and sensitivity.
Controls shall be recessed to limit tampering.
LIGHTING OCCUPANCY SENSORS
VLK Architects, 2009 26 0923 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
H. Sensor housings shall comply with UL 94VO and shall be equipped with a protective grill
to shield detectors from damage.
I. All sensors shall be provided with an indicator light to verify that motion is being detected
and that the unit is in operation.
J. Sensors shall contain timing circuitry to provide adjustable "time to lights off" delay of 15
seconds to 30 minutes.
K. All ultrasonic sensors shall be crystal controlled to within +/- 0.005% tolerance to assure
constant and stable performance.
L. The High Bay Sensor and Extreme Temperature Sensor shall be HID Bi-Level dimming
compatible with HID dimming ballasts/systems.
M. Dual Technology, High Bay and Extreme Temperature sensors shall include an Internal
pull-up switch or jumper for choosing an open collector with or without pull-up when
connecting to a BAS system.
N. Designer series, Dual Technology, High Bay and Extreme Temperature sensors shall
include a lighting sweep function that shall ensure that lights remain off immediately after
power on sweeps.
O. All ceiling sensors shall be mounted through a single hole.
P. High bay and Extreme Temperature sensors shall feature versatile mounting options to
surface, 2S or 4S junction box.
Q. Dual Technology and High Bay sensors shall include a Self -Adjusting Time Delay that
shall reset the time delay automatically to 10 minutes after an hour of lights staying off, if
left at the minimum setting.
R. Extreme temperature sensors shall include a Self -Adjusting Time Delay that shall reset
the time delay automatically to 6 minutes after an hour of lights staying off, if left at the
minimum setting.
S. The Extreme Temperature Sensor shall include built in temperature compensation
circuitry and algorithm that shall minimize false activation caused by natural factors such
as wind, temperature change, etc.
T. The High Bay Sensor shall be available with an independently adjustable two-way
coverage pattern.
U. The High Bay Sensor shall be able to detect the major types of motion (i.e., driving a
forklift or walking into an aisle) of people in controlled areas of a warehouse or other High
Bay area.
V. Dual Technology, High Bay and Extreme Temperature sensors shall self -adjust sensitivity
to optimize performance.
W. All sensors shall utilize the NEMA WD 7 Guide and robotic method to verify coverage
patterns.
X. All sensors and Switchpacks shall be manufactured by the same company and shall be
aesthetically compatible, i.e., from the same product line or generation of products.
LIGHTING OCCUPANCY SENSORS
VLK Architects, 2009 26 0923 - 3 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
2.03 SWITCHPACKS
A. Part numbers based on Novitas:
BAS 13-041 *
Heavy Duty 13-051 *
*For use with Novitas Designer, Standard and Airflow Tolerant series, and Dual
Technology, High Bay and Extreme Temperature sensors.
B. For ease of mounting, installation and future service, Switchpacks shall be able to
externally mount through a 1/2" knock -out on a standard electrical enclosure and shall be
an integrated, self contained unit consisting internally of a load switching relay and
transformer to provide low voltage power of 15 VDC. Switchpacks shall power up to five
(5) sensors.
C. Relay contacts shall be isolated and have ratings of:
13-051:
15 Amps: 120 VAC Tungsten
20 Amps: 120 VAC Ballast
20 Amps: 277 VAC Ballast
1 HP: 120 VAC
2HP: 250 VAC
D. Control wiring between sensors and Switchpacks shall be Class 2, 18 AWG stranded UL
classified, Teflon Jacketed cable suitable for use in plenum ceilings.
E. Enclosures for Switchpacks shall be pressed steel, NEMA I Construction with mounting
plates and barriers to provide separation between line and low voltage wiring or standard
4" deep junction box with Switchpack mounting through a 1/2" knockout.
F. The Heavy Duty Switchpack shall have a heavy duty Form A relay and zero crossing
circuitry that forces the relay contacts to engage and disengage at the zero crossing point
of the AC voltage source, minimizing the magnitude of the inrush current and increasing
the life of the Switchpack.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Provide the quantity of occupancy sensors required for complete and proper volumetric
coverage to completely cover the controlled areas. Contractor shall verify room coverage
and ceiling heights with manufacturer and provide the quantity of occupancy sensors
compatible with space and area to be covered. Rooms shall have one hundred (100)
percent volumetric coverage of small motion detection to completely cover the controlled
areas to accommodate all occupancy habits of single or multiple occupants at any
location within the room(s). The locations and quantities of sensors shown on the
drawings are diagrammatic and indicate only rooms that are to be provided with sensors.
Proper judgment must be exercised in executing the work so as to ensure the best
possible installation in the available space and to overcome local difficulties due to space
limitations or interference of structural or architectural components. Provide additional
LIGHTING OCCUPANCY SENSORS
VLK Architects, 2009 26 0923 - 4 2737.03
CATE Renovations
AW Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
sensors of the specific type as required to provide complete and proper volumetric
coverage.
B. Exact locations of Switchpack boxes shall be based on observing good installation
practice and shall be consistent throughout the project. Switchpacks shall be located in
accessible ceiling spaces. Attention shall be paid to all aspects of installation to ensure
that there is the minimum aesthetic impact of the hardware on the appearance of the
affected rooms. All control unit hardware shall be completely contained within a suitable
NEMA-type enclosure, with no exposed wire other than low voltage Class 2 wiring.
C. Control units used for the security or fire systems shall be powered from the emergency
power source as indicated on the drawings. Other control units shall be powered from the
lighting circuit, which they control.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. All occupancy sensors and switchpacks shall be of the same manufacturer throughout
unless otherwise noted.
B. Install occupancy sensors in areas shown, in accordance with manufacturer's written
instructions, requirements of NEC, and in accordance with industry practices. Do not
install devices until wall construction and wiring is completed.
C. Install occupancy sensors and switches only in electrical boxes that are clean, free from
excess building materials, debris, and similar matter.
D. Install occupancy sensors plumb and aligned in the plane of the wall, floor, or ceiling in
where they are installed.
E. Unless indicated otherwise, circuit switchpacks ahead of local control switches - source —
switchpack — local toggle switch(s).
3.03 SENSOR TESTING AND ADJUSTMENT
A. At the time of installation the contractor shall test and adjust each sensor for proper
detection of motion appropriate to room usage. The contractor shall follow the testing and
adjustment procedures as written in the manufacturer's installation instructions for each
sensor model.
B. Prior to testing and adjusting, verify with Owner/Architect the initial settings for each type
of area based on its intended function and use.
C. Verify with Owner all adjustable functions of each type of occupancy sensor prior to
installation. Set all adjustable functions of each type of occupancy sensor as directed by
Owner. Initial settings unless directed by Owner / Architect:
1. Time delay = maximum
2. Zero Time Delay = Off
3. Auto -On = Off
4. Manual -On = On
5. Self -Adjust = On
6. Disable Self -Adjust = Off
7. Energy Saver (Dual Level) = On
8. Manual Override = Off
D. Before energizing, check for continuity of circuits, short circuits, and grounding
connections. After energizing, check devices to demonstrate proper operation.
LIGHTING OCCUPANCY SENSORS
VLK Architects, 2009 26 0923 - 5 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
END OF SECTION
LIGHTING OCCUPANCY SENSORS
VLK Architects, 2009 26 0923 - 6 2737.03
SECTION 26 0925
ELECTRICAL CONTACTORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
A. Miscellaneous electrical contactors as shown, required, scheduled, and as specified.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Provide products produced by one of the following:
Square D
2.02 CONTACTORS:
A. Provide contactors as shown, required, and specified. The number of poles, ampere -ratings,
and pole arrangements shall be as required. Contactors shall conform to the following:
i . Rated for continuous duty at full rated current in an unventilated enclosure. Eight -
hour duty ratings are not acceptable.
2. Contacts shall be readily replaceable, self -aligning, silver alloy.
3. Load contactors shall be rated for not less than 30A continuous rating. Auxiliary
contacts shall be rated for not less than 10 amperes.
4. Contactors rated for lighting and mixed loads shall have an interrupting capacity of
150% of their continuous duty rating.
5. Contactors shall be capable of successfully handling inrush currents at 20 times
rating.
6. Provide a minimum of two spare load contacts on each individual contactor rated
60A or less for future use.
B. Electrically -held Devices shall conform to the following:
1. AC operated units shall have laminated low loss electrical steel core pieces with
machine ground pole faces and shading coils.
2. Units rated at 300A and above shall have DC operating coils and include the
necessary rectifier for the AC/DC operation.
3. Normally open contactors shall be spring -loaded open and magnetically closed.
4. Contactors for emergency lighting or power shall be normally closed.
C. LED Pilot Lights: Provide 30.5mm run and stop pilot lights for all individual contactors
operated by automatic controls. Pilot lights shall be mounted in the contactor enclosure
cover. Pilot lights shall be operated from an interlock on the contactor and not be wired
across the operating coil.
Green - OFF
Red - ON
D. Controls: Individual contactors operated by automatic controls shall have 30.5mm HAND-
OFF -AUTOMATIC switches, otherwise provide HAND-OFF switches. Contactor controls shall
be mounted in the contactor enclosure cover.
E. Control Power. A single-phase control power transformer shall be included with each
individual contactor operated by manual or automatic controls for 120V control power. The
primary shall be single phase 277 VAC connected to the line side of the contactor. The
secondary shall have one leg fused and one leg grounded.
ELECTRICAL CONTACTORS
VLK Architects, 2009 26 0925 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
F. Enclosure:
1. Contactors and control enclosures installed in indoor locations shall be NEMA 1
heavy-duty enclosures unless shown otherwise.
2. Contactors and control enclosures installed at kitchen and food preparation
locations, hose down areas, cooling towers, exterior locations, and in other corrosive
areas shall be NEMA 4X, stainless steel.
G. Minimum interrupting rating shall be 35KAIC.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION OF MISCELLANEOUS ELECTRICAL CONTROLS
A. Provide electrically held contactors, with line side wiring complete, in accordance with the
National Electrical Code and manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Fuses: Install fuses where coil control power is fed from line side of contactor.
C. Adjustment: Adjust operating mechanisms for free mechanical movement.
D. Coordinate contactor control and operation requirements with the Building Management
Control System.
E. Identify each contactor as specified in Section 26 0500.
3.02 INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR LIGHTING CONTROL
A. Parking lot lighting, building mounted exterior fighting, and exterior signage shall be controlled
by the specified Building Management and Control System. Interior lighting as noted on the
plans shall be controlled as noted on the plans and as specified by the Building Management
and Control System. Contractor shall circuit all systems to be controlled by the Building
Management and Control System through contactors compatible with system controls and
shall ensure the control and operation of lighting control system is complete.
B. Provide mechanically held contactors where control is three -wire, momentary control signal.
C. Provide electrically held contactors where control is two -wire, constant control signal for open
or close.
D. Provide normally closed contactors for emergency lighting and power circuits where
contactors are indicated or required.
E. Provide normally closed contactors for circuits controlled by "emergency power off" or teacher
control switches in science classrooms, computer labs, and vocational instructional areas.
F. Provide control contactors and cabling for bi-level or tri-level HID ballast. Bi / tri level control
contactors for exterior lighting shall be controlled by the Building Management Control
System, with local BMCS manual override for both "ON" and "HIGH" settings. Bi / tri level
controls for interior lighting shall be controlled by occupancy sensors and local control switch.
END OF SECTION
ELECTRICAL CONTACTORS
VLK Architects, 2009 26 0925 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 26 2416
PANELBOARDS AND ENCLOSURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Panelboard and enclosure work, including cabinet, as shown, scheduled, indicated, and
specified.
B. Types: Panelboards and enclosures required for the project include the following:
1. Power distribution panelboards.
2. Lighting and appliance panelboards.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. UL Standards: Panelboards and enclosures shall confirm to all applicable UL standards
and shall be UL labeled.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Square D
2.02 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS
A. General: Lighting and appliance panelboards shall be dead -front safety -type equipped
with molded case circuit breakers as shown and scheduled. Power distribution
panelboards shall be dead -front type equipped with fusible switches or circuit breakers as
shown and scheduled.
B. Bussing Assembly: Panelboard and power distribution panelboard bussing shall be
copper. Bus structure and mains shall have ratings as shown and scheduled. Ratings
shall be established by heat rise tests with maximum hot spot temperature on any
connector or busbar not to exceed 650C rise above 400C ambient. Heat rise test shall be
conducted in accordance with UL 67. The use of conductor dimensions is not accepted in
lieu of actual heat tests. Furnish a bare uninsulated ground bus inside each panelboard
enclosure. Two section panelboards shall be connected with copper cable, with an
ampacity meeting or exceeding the main bus ampacity. Panelboards serving non -linear
loads and fed with neutrals greater than 100% shall have 200% neutral bussing and
isolated ground bus.
C. Circuit Breakers: Circuit breakers shall be molded case, thermal magnetic type equipped
with individually insulated, braced, and protected connectors. The front faces of circuit
breakers shall be flush with each other. Tripped indication shall be shown by the breaker
handle taking a position between ON and OFF. Make prepared space provisions for
additional breakers so that no additional connectors will be required to add breakers.
Circuit breakers in lighting and appliance panelboards shall have bolt -in breakers. Two
and three pole breakers shall have internal common trips. External handle ties will not be
accepted. Circuit breakers for distribution panelboards shall have plug -on circuit
breakers.
1. Provide lighting and appliance panelboard branch circuit breakers with
interrupting capacity as shown, but in no case less than the following symmetrical
amperes RMS:
PANELBOARDS AND ENCLOSURES
VLK Architects, 2009 26 2416 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
Voltaae (volts) Interrupting Caaacity
120/208/240 10,000 AIC
277/480 14,000 AIC
2. Circuit breakers for lighting circuits shall be UL listed switch duty (SWD).
3. Ground fault interrupter (GFI) circuit breakers, where shown, shall be 5 mA
ground fault trip and shall include a TEST button.
4. Provide distribution panel circuit breakers with high interrupting capacity, or
integral current limiters as shown. Circuit breakers shall have interrupting
capacity not less than the following symmetrical amperes RMS:
CONVENTIONAL
FRAME SIZE/
VOLTAGE
INTEGRAL
INTERRUPTING
CAPACITY
100A/240V
10,000 AIC
225A/240V
25,000 AIC
400AI240V
65,000 AIC
600A/240V
65,000 AIC
800A/240V
65,000 AIC
1000A1240V
65,000 AIC
1200A/240V
65,000 AIC
100A1480V
18,000 AIC
225A/480V
35,000 AIC
400A/480V
35,000 AIC
600A/480V
65,000 AIC
800A/480V
65,000 AIC
1000A/480V
65,000 AIC
1200A/480V
65,000 AIC
D. Fusible Switches: Fusible switches shall be quick -make, quick -break type. Each switch
shall be enclosed in a separate steel enclosure. The enclosure shall employ a hinged
cover for access to the fuses. Interlock cover with the operating handle to prevent
opening the cover when the switch is in the ON position. This interlock shall be
constructed so that it can be overridden for testing fuses without interrupting service. The
switches shall have padlocking provisions in the OFF position. Switches shall include
positive pressure rejection type fuse clips for use with UL Class R fuses and be UL
labeled for 200,000 AIC.
E. Spaces: Where space for future breakers or switches is shown, panelboard enclosure
shall include removable blank panels or knockouts to allow installation of future breakers
or switches, prepared spaces, and panelboard busing shall be complete, including
required connectors.
F. Integrated Equipment Rating: Each panelboard, as a complete unit, shall have a short-
circuit rating equal or greater than the available short circuit current. Rating shall have
been established by tests on similar panelboards with the circuit breakers or fusible
switches installed. Series rated panelboards and their protective upstream devices shall
be labeled as required by the NEC.
G. Panelboard Enclosures: Provide sheet steel enclosures, minimum 16-gauge nominal
PANELBOARDS AND ENCLOSURES
VLK Architects, 2009 26 2416 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
AW Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
thickness, with multiple knockouts, unless shown otherwise. Provide all panelboard fronts
with piano hinged door in hinged trim to box, spring -loaded door pulls, and flush lock and
key, panelboard enclosures keyed alike to match the Owner's standard key system;
coordinate with Owner. Equip with interior circuit directory frame, card, and clear plastic
covering for lighting and appliance panelboards. Provide gray powder coat finish over a
rust inhibitor. Panelboards located in kitchen preparation or natatorium areas shall have
stainless steel door and trim (NEMA 1). Enclosures at exterior locations shall be NEMA
4X. Enclosure shall be for recessed or surface mounting as shown. Enclosures shall be
fabricated by the same manufacturer as panelboards to be enclosed. Multi -section
panelboards shall have same physical dimensions.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION OF PANELBOARDS AND ENCLOSURES
A. General: Install panelboards and enclosures, as shown, including electrical connections,
in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions, the requirements of NEC,
NECA Standard of Installation, and industry practices.
B. Coordination: Coordinate installation of panelboards and enclosures with conductor and
raceways installation work.
C. Anchoring: Anchor enclosures to walls and structural surfaces ensuring that they are
permanently and mechanically secured.
D. Directory Card: Provide a typed circuit directory card(s) upon completion of work.
Directory card shall be of super heavy -weight index card stock, 110 lb, white. Directory
shall include type of load (ie: receptacles, lighting, exhaust fan, etc.) and location (ie:
Room 102, Gymnasium, etc.) Room number shall be identified as the actual graphics
room number assigned to the space and not the room number identified on the Plans.
Circuits with shunt trip shall be identified with the control circuit operating the shunt trip
(ie: Kitchen Hood No. 2). Shunt trip breakers with common trip circuit shall be grouped in
the panelboard (ie: circuits 1, 3, 5 and 7).
E. Fuses: Install fuses, of the ratings and class shown, in each power distribution and motor
control panelboard.
F. Circuit Arrangement: Arrange branch circuit connections to 3-phase lighting and
appliance panelboards so that when two or three circuits are run with a common neutral,
each circuit is connected to a different phase unless shown otherwise. Branch circuits
shall be connected to the circuit breakers in the lighting and appliance panelboard to
provide the best possible phase balance, unless shown otherwise.
G. Spare Conduits: Provide (3) 1-inch and (3) 3/4-inch spare conduits capped to 6-inches
above accessible ceiling space and (3) 1-inch and (3) 3/4-inch conduits capped down to
ceiling space on floor below for all recessed lighting and appliance panelboards and all
lighting and appliance panelboards located above ground floor.
H. Arrange each phase conductor to enter each circuit breaker or fuse switch at a 90-
degree angle. Conductors shall be bent neatly opposite the fuse or circuit breaker to
which they are to be attached. Vertically installed conductors should be neatly tie -
wrapped. Conductors shall be connected in a neat and professional manner. Provide
excess wire in panelboard for each circuit. Conductors brought in from the top or bottom
of the cabinet shall be bent neatly opposite the fuse or circuit breaker to which they are to
be attached. Excess conductor length shall be equal to the height plus the width of the
cabinet. Each conductor shall be run along the panel and looped back 180 degrees
PANELBOARDS AND ENCLOSURES
VLK Architects, 2009 26 2416 - 3 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
before being connected to its fuse or circuit breaker. Panelboard shall be cleaned of all
construction debris prior to substantial completion review. Neutral and grounding
conductors shall be installed similar to the phase conductors except omit the excess wire
length.
Circuit breakers and conductors installed for TVSS devices shall be located at the top or
bottom of the panelboard in respect to the location of the TVSS device. Route all
conductors to the TVSS device using long sweep bends and the shortest conductor
length possible.
J. Install ground bus for ground conductors. Ground conductors size #1 and larger are to be
landed to can with mechanical lugs and not to ground buss.
K. Install panels so that breaker number 1 is the top left breaker. Panel interiors shall not be
installed where breaker number 1 is the bottom right breaker.
L. In panels that contain multi -layered neutral bus install neutrals beginning with the back
neutral bus row and work forward. Do not make up neutrals on front neutral bus row
unless all other rows are full.
M. Label breaker mounting space with stick -on number labels.
3.02 TESTING
A. Before energizing, energization, check for continuity of circuits and short circuits.
END OF SECTION
PANELBOARDS AND ENCLOSURES
VLK Architects, 2009 26 2416 - 4 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 26 2425
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Safety and disconnect switch work where required, scheduled, indicated, and specified.
B. UL Approved: Safety and disconnect switches shall have UL approval and the UL label.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Square D
2.02 ENCLOSED SWITCHES
A. General: Provide heavy duty type, dead -front, sheet steel enclosed, surface -mounted
safety switches of the type and size indicated. Safety switches shall be rated for the
voltage of the circuit where they are installed. Safety switches used as motor disconnects
shall be horsepower rated for the motor served.
B. Switch Mechanism:
1. Safety switches shall be quick -make, quick -break type with permanently attached
arc suppressor. Constructed so that switch blades are visible in the OFF position
with the door open. The operating handle shall be an integral part of the box, not
the cover. Switch shall have provision to padlock in the OFF position. Safety
switches shall have a cover interlock to prevent unauthorized opening of the
switch door when the switch mechanism is in the ON position, or closing of the
switch mechanism when the switch door is open.
2. Cover interlock shall have an override mechanism to permit switch inspection by
authorized personnel. Current -carrying parts shall be constructed of high
conductivity copper with silver-plated switch contacts. Lugs shall be suitable for
copper conductors and front removable.
C. Fusing: Provide fusible safety switches where required or indicated. Fuse clips shall be
positive pressure rejection type fuse clips suitable for use with UL Class R or Class J
fuses.
D. Neutral: Provide safety switches with number of switched poles indicated. Where a
neutral is present in the circuit, provide a solid neutral with the safety switch. Where a
ground conductor is present in the circuit, provide a separate solid ground with the safety
switch.
2.03 ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A. Molded -Case Circuit Breaker: NEMA AB 1, with interrupting capacity to meet available
fault currents.
1. Thermal -Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time -current element for low-level
overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable
magnetic trip setting for circuit -breaker frame sizes 250A and larger.
2. Adjustable Instantaneous -Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front -
mounted, field -adjustable trip setting.
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
VLK Architects, 2009 26 2425 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
3. Electronic Trip Unit Circuit Breakers: RMS sensing; field -replaceable rating plug;
with the following field -adjustable settings:
a. Instantaneous trip
b. Long -and short -time pickup levels.
C. Long -and Short -time time adjustments.
d. Ground -fault pickup level, time delay and I� response
B. Molded -Case Circuit Breaker Features and Accessories: Standard frame izes, trip ratings
and number of poles.
1. Lugs: Mechanical style suitable for number, size, trip ratings and material of
conductors.
2. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching
fluorescent lighting loads; Type HACR for heating, air-conditioning, and
refrigerating equipment.
2.04. ENCLOSURES
A. Enclosures in indoor locations shall be NEMA 1 heavy duty enclosures unless shown
otherwise.
B. Enclosures in exterior locations shall be NEMA 4X stainless steel, heavy duty.
C. Enclosures at kitchen and food preparation locations, hose down areas, cooling towers,
and in other corrosive areas shall be NEMA 4X, stainless steel.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install safety and disconnect switches where required or indicated, in
accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions, requirements of the NEC, NECA
Standard of Installation, and industry practices. Provide fuse identification label showing
type and size inside door of each switch. Include devices in coordination study to indicate
overcurrent devices will selectively coordinate.
B. Location: Provide safety switches where shown and at each motor out of sight of, or more
than 50' from the switch or panel from which the motor circuit is fed.
C. Supports: Provide all safety and disconnect switches with galvanized angle or other
supports where mounting on wall or other rigid surface is impractical. Switches shall not
be supported by conduit alone. Where safety and disconnect switches are mounted on
equipment served, the switch shall not inhibit removal of service panels or interfere with
access areas. Provide mounting hardware that will allow removal of safety and
disconnect switches. Do not utilize drive pin anchors through enclosure.
D. Safety and Disconnect Switches: Install disconnect switches used with motor -driven
appliances, motors and controllers within sight of the controller position unless indicated
otherwise.
E. Coordination: Coordinate safety and disconnect switch installation work with electrical
raceway and cable work as necessary for interface.
F. Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) Warning Plaque: Yellow -White -Yellow 3-layer laminated
plastic engraved plaque "WARNING" (1/2 Inch Letters). "TURN OFF VFD BEFORE
OPENING THIS SWITCH FOR MAINTENANCE." (1/4 inch letters). Provide VFD warning
plaque at safety disconnect switches which are located down -stream of VFDs. Secure
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
VLK Architects, 2009 26 2425 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
plaque to disconnect switch or immediately adjacent to disconnect switch with fasteners.
G. Provide disconnect switch for all electric duct heaters.
3.02 TESTING
A. General: Before energizing, check for continuity of circuits and short circuits.
END OF SECTION
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
VLK Architects, 2009 26 2425 - 3 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 26 2430
FUSES
PART 1-GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Fuse work as shown and scheduled, and as specified.
B. Types: Fuses required for the project include the following:
1. 250 volt current limiting fuses.
2. 600 volt current limiting fuses.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Provide products produced by Bussman.
2.02 CURRENT LIMITING FUSES - 600 VOLTS AND LESS
A. General: Provide 200,000 amperes interrupting capacity (AIC) current -limiting fuses of
the current ratings shown and voltage rating equal to or greater than the voltage at the
point of application.
B. Types:
1. Fuses in circuits supplying individual motors, groups of motors, or loads including
motors, 600 amperes or less, shall be UL Class RK1 or Class J, time delay
fuses, Bussman LPS-RK (600V) LPJ-SP (600V), LPN-RK (250V), or Gould A60
(600V), A21) (250V).
2. Fuses in circuits supplying individual motors, groups of motors, or loads including
motors, 601 to 4000 amperes, shall be UL Class L time delay fuses, Bussman
KRPC "HI -CAP", or Gould A4BQ.
3. Fuses in circuits supplying other than motor loads, 600 amperes or less, shall be
UL Class RK1, time delay fuses, Bussman LPS-RK (600V), LPN-RK (250V), or
Gould A6D (600V), A21) (250V).
4. Fuses supplying transient voltage surge suppressor devices (TVSS) shall be
surge rated for use with TVSS devices.
2.03 SPARE FUSES
A. General: Provide spare fuses in the amount of 10% of each type and size installed, but
not less than 3 spares of a specific size and type. Deliver to the Owner at the time of
project acceptance. Fuses shall be encased in a labeled steel enclosure with padlock
provision, to be wall mounted where directed.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install fuses in fuse holders immediately before energizing of the circuit where
the fuses are installed. Fuses shall not be installed and shipped with equipment.
B. Labels: Place fuse identification labels, showing fuse size and type installed, inside the
cover of each switch.
FUSES
VLK Architects, 2009 26 2430 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
END OF SECTION
FUSES
VLK Architects, 2009 26 2430 - 2 2737.03
SECTION 26 2773
WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
A. Provide wiring device work as shown, scheduled, indicated, and specified.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. UL Label: Wiring devices shall be UL labeled.
B. NEMA Standard WD1.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit a sample of each style and color of 120V, 20A duplex receptacle and each
120/277V switch with related cover plate. Attach plate to wiring device and label back side
of plate with job description with permanent black marker.
B. Submit manufacturer's product data sheet for each style of device and plate on the
project.
C. Submit drawings of plans, elevation and sections of receptacles and outlets in casework,
cabinetwork and built-in place furniture. Coordinate dimensions with millwork shop
drawings and related architectural drawing series.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Leviton, Mfg. Co., Inc.
B. Pass and Seymour, Inc.
C. Hubbell, Inc.
D. Cooper
E. Lutron, Inc. (Dimming)
2.02 WIRING DEVICE COLOR
A. Device color shall be gray except 20A, 125V receptacles which are directly supplied from
an emergency source shall be red. Provide equivalent hospital grade devices where red is
not available in grade specified. Verify with Architect prior to submitting for approval.
2.03 RECEPTACLES
A. Industrial grade receptacles, 2 pole, 3 wire grounding, with green hexagonal equipment
ground screw, ground terminals and poles internally connected to mounting yoke, with
metal mounting straps, back and side wired with screw type terminals, molded phenolic
compound, NEMA configuration indicated.
1. 20A, 125V grounded duplex NEMA #5-20R: Leviton #5362X
WIRING DEVICES
VLK Architects, 2009 26 2773 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
2. 20A, 125V isolated ground duplex NEMA #5-20R: Leviton #5362-IGX
3. 20A, 125V ground fault circuit interruption (GFCI) NEMA #5-20R: Leviton #8898-
HGX
B. Heavy -Duty Simplex: Single heavy-duty type receptacles, with green hexagonal
equipment ground screw, with metal mounting straps, back wiring, black molded phenolic
compound, NEMA configuration as indicated.
1. 30A, 125V grounded single NEMA #5-30R: Leviton #5371 with #80728X cover
plate.
2. 30A, 250V, grounded, 3-wire, 2-pole NEMA #6-30R: Leviton #5372 with #80728X
cover plate or weatherproof cover plate.
3. 20A, 125/250V, grounded, 4-wire, 3-pole NEMA #14-20R: Hubbell #8410 with
Leviton #84004-40 cover plate.
4. 20A, 125V, grounded, NEMA 5-20R, Leviton #5801 W with Leviton #84004-40
cover plate.
C. Hospital grade receptacles, 2 pole, 3 wire grounding, with green hexagonal equipment
ground screw, ground terminals and poles internally connected to mounting yoke, with
metal mount straps, back and side wired with screw type terminals, molded phenolic
compound, NEMA configuration indicated.
1. 20A, 125V grounded duplex NEMA #5-20R: Leviton #8300-X
2. 20A, 125V isolated ground duplex NEMA #5-20R: Leviton #8300-LIG (orange)
3. 20A, 125V ground fault circuit interruption (GFCI) with indicator light: Leviton
NEMA 5-20R-8898-HGX
4. 20A/125V Tamper Resistant Duplex NEMA 5-20R: Leviton 8300-SGX
2.04 WALL SWITCHES
A. Toggle: Specification grade flush toggle switches, with mounting yoke insulated from
mechanism, equipped with plaster ears, switch handle, back and side -wired screw
terminals.
1. Single -pole, 120/277V, 20A switch: Leviton #1221-2X
2. Double Pole 1201277V, 20A switch: Leviton #1222-2X
3. Three-way, 120/277V, 20A switch: Leviton #1223-2X
4. Four-way, 120/277V, 20A switch: Leviton #1224-2G
5. Single -pole, 120/277V, 20A switch, red pilot light: Leviton #1221-PL
6. Rotary key operated switch.
a. Single -pole, 120/277V, 20A key operated switch: Leviton #1221-2KL
b. Two -pole, 120/277, 20A key operated, Leviton #1222-2KL.
C. Three-way, 120/277V, 20A key operated switch: Leviton #1223-2KL
d. Four-way, 120/277V, 20A key operated switch: Leviton #1224-2KL
e. Key switches shall be all keyed alike to match the Owner's standard key
system. Coordinate with Owner.
2.05 WALL DIMMERS
A. Wall Box Dimmers: Self-contained, wall box mounted, linear slide square law dimmers
with a positive OFF position at the end of travel. Dimmers shall operate continuously of
rated load in an ambient temperature up to 400C and an input of 100 to 130V.
1. Single -pole, 120V, 1000 watt incandescent: Lutron #N-1000-X.
2. Single -pole, 120V, 2000 watt: Lutron #N-2000-X.
3. Single -pole, 120V, 16A for Lutron Electronic Dimming Ballast, Lutron #NF-10-X.
4. Single -pole, 277V, 8A for Lutron Electronic Dimming Ballast, #NF-10-277.
5. Three way, four way, Lutron to match above.
WIRING DEVICES
VLK Architects, 2009 26 2773 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
2.06 GFCI — GROUND FAULT CIRCUIT INTERRUPTER, BLANK FACE
A. 20A, 125V, GFCI, switch rated, blank face feed through with circuit lock -out, Leviton only:
Leviton #8590-w
2.07 INTERIOR WALL COVER PLATES
A. Satin finish Type 302 stainless steel only
1. Type 302 stainless steel screws satin finish.
2.08 EXTERIOR COVER PLATES
A. Refer to Specification 26 0537 - Electrical Boxes and Fittings
B. Heat trace or other loads continuously plugged in outdoors: Provide Crouse -Hinds
WRLD-1 cover. Install round plug on cord supplied with heat trace or other equipment to
match weatherproof bushing on receptacle cover.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. All wiring devices for receptacles and wall switches shall be of the same manufacturer
throughout unless otherwise noted.
1. Lutron dimming controls shall be used with Lutron dimming electronic ballast.
2. Key switches shall be as specified and as approved by Owner.
3. Submit color sample for each specified color to Architect.
B. Install wiring devices where shown, in accordance with manufacturer's written
instructions, requirements of NEC, and in accordance with industry practices. Do not
install devices until wall construction and wiring is completed.
C. Install receptacles and switches only in electrical boxes that are clean, free from excess
building materials, debris, and similar matter.
D. Install wiring devices plumb and aligned in the plane of the wall, floor, or ceiling in where
they are installed.
E. Install switches in boxes on the strike side of doors as hung. Install a uniform position so
the same direction will open and close the circuit throughout the project. Where more
than one switch is in the same location, install switches in a multi -gang box with a single
cover plate.
F. Provide a plate for every receptacle, switch, telephone outlet and other wiring devices.
Fasten all plates outdoors with type 302 Allen Head "tamper -proof" screws.
G. Mounting heights of all wiring devices shall comply with current Accessibility Standards
and local codes.
H. Provide tamper resistant receptacles protected upstream by switch rated, GFCI blank
face feed through device in all child day care, pre -kindergarten and similar areas
designated for occupancy by pre-K or child day care occupants.
I. Refer to Architectural drawing, elevations, etc. for exact location of wiring devices where
indicated on the Architectural plans. Coordinate location of all wiring devices with other
WIRING DEVICES
VLK Architects, 2009 26 2773 - 3 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
specialty items and millwork and avoid conflicts. Coordinate with all trades to avoid
conflicts during construction.
J. Locate receptacles for electric water coolers so that the receptacle is accessible and
concealed as much as practical from public view.
K. Provide weatherproof NEMA 3R, GFCI, 20A, 125V duplex receptacles outdoors where
indicated and within 25' of all new electrically operated equipment mounted outdoors and
on roofs.
L. Provide GFCI, 20A, 125V duplex receptacles at all receptacle locations indicated on
drawings in mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, custodial rooms, instructional food
preparation areas, science prep and science room work counters, kitchen and food
preparation areas, and all locations where receptacles indicated are within six feet of
water sources, sinks, lavatories, faucets, eyewash locations and mop sinks.
M. Install wall box dimmers to achieve full rating specified and indicated after de -rating for
ganging as instructed by manufacturer.
N. Do not share neutral conductor on dimming circuits.
O. Install receptacles with grounding pole as directed by Owner. If installed horizontally,
install with neutral on top.
P. Connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit equipment grounding
conductor.
Q. Connect wiring devices by wrapping ground conductor around screw terminal or lug.
Provide pigtail to each receptacle and each switch. Neutral and phase conductors shall
be installed using side or rear entry lugs only. Do not wrap conductors around screw
terminals. Tighten all screws and lugs as recommended by manufacturer.
R. Provide nameplate engraving for emergency outlets at locations indicating panelboard
and circuit number.
S. All receptacles and switches shall have a minimum of two wraps of Scotch 33 or
equivalent tape around terminal screws.
T. Provide disconnect toggle switch within sight of all trap primers, circulation pumps, 120
volt motors and motorized equipment.
3.02 TESTING
A. Before energizing, check for continuity of circuits, short circuits, and grounding
connections. After energizing, check wiring devices to demonstrate proper operation and
receptacles for correct polarization. Test GFCI receptacle operation with simulated
ground fault tester.
B. Operate each wall switch with circuit energized and verify proper operation.
C. Verify that each receptacle device is energized.
D. Test each receptacle device for proper polarity.
E. Test each GFCI receptacle device for proper operation.
END OF SECTION
WIRING DEVICES
VLK Architects, 2009 26 2773 - 4 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 26 2913
COMBINATION MOTOR CONTROLLERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Motor controller work as required, scheduled and specified.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Square D
2.02 MOTOR CONTROLLERS
A. General: Combination motor controllers shall consist of an integrally mounted, thermal
magnetic or magnetic only circuit breaker disconnect or disconnect switch as specified in
Section 16170; magnetic, full voltage non -reversing (FVNR) or two speed controller as
required, in a heavy duty type, dead front enclosure, surface -mounted; size and number of
poles as required. Controllers shall be constructed and tested in accordance with NEMA
Standards. Refer to Division 23 for Variable Frequency Inverter furnished by Division 23,
installed by Division 26.
B. Contacts: Magnetic controller contacts shall be silver alloy, and not require any filing,
dressing, or cleaning for the life of the controller.
C. Operating Coils: Operating coils shall be 120V, pressure molded and designed so that
accidental exposure to excessive voltage up to 480V will not damage the coil. Design
controller so that when a coil fails due to over voltage, the controller shall open, and not
freeze in the closed position.
D. Overload Relays: Controllers shall have manual -reset, trip -free, solid state, overload relays in
each phase conductor. Three phase FVNR controllers shall have three overload relays.
Single-phase FVNR controllers shall have an overload relay, in each ungrounded conductor.
Two speed, full -voltage magnetic controllers shall have overload relays for all six ungrounded
conductors. Overload relays shall not be field -convertible from manual to automatic reset.
Provide reset button located in front cover to reset all overload relays.
E. LED Pilot Lights: Provide 30.5mm run and stop pilot lights for all motor controllers. Furnish
additional pilot lights for motor controllers as shown. Provide FAST and SLOW pilot lights for
two -speed controllers. Pilot lights shall be mounted in the controller enclosure cover. Pilot
lights shall be operated from an interlock on the motor controllers, and not be wired across
the operating coil.
Green - Stop
Red - Run
Yellow - Slow
Blue - Fast
F. Controls: Controllers shall have 30.5mm HAND -OFF -AUTOMATIC switches. Provide for
FAST -SLOW, REMOTE -LOCAL speed selection from HVAC control system for two -speed
controllers. Two -speed controllers shall have deceleration relays between fast and slow
speeds. Coordinate motor controller controls with the requirements of Division 23. Motor
controller controls shall be mounted in the controller enclosure cover.
COMBINATION MOTOR CONTROLLERS
VLK Architects, 2009 26 2913 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
G. Control Power: A single phase control power transformer shall be included with each
controller for 120V control power. The primary shall be connected to the line side of the motor
controller through two fuses; the secondary shall have one leg fused and one leg grounded.
Arrange transformer terminals so that wiring to terminals is not located above the
transformer.
H. Auxiliary Contacts: Each controller shall have two normally open and two normally closed
nonconvertible auxiliary contact in addition to the number of contacts required for the holding
interlock and control wiring. One or more additional auxiliary contacts can be field installed
without removing existing wiring, or removing the controller from its enclosure.
Phase Failure Monitors: Provide a 3 phase failure monitor for each motor controller. Monitor
on any or all phases, for phase reversal from A-B-C sequence, under/over voltage, and
phase failure. Provide adjustable relay for trip range. Provide automatic reset upon
restoration of power to all phases. Where solid state overload relays provide this specified
requirement, separate phase failure relays may be omitted.
Unit Wiring: Unit shall be completely pre -wired to terminals to eliminate any interior field
wiring except for: connection of power supply conductors to switch line side terminals; motor
leads to the controller load side terminals; and control conductors to holding coil terminals.
K. Enclosure:
1. Motor Controllers installed in indoor locations shall be NEMA 1 heavy duty
enclosures unless shown otherwise.
2. Motor Controllers installed at kitchen and food preparation locations, hose down
areas, cooling towers, exterior locations, and in other corrosive areas shall be NEMA
4X, stainless steel.
L. Minimum interrupting rating shall be 35KAIC.
2.03 MANUAL MOTOR CONTROLLERS
A. General: Manual motor controllers shall consist of an integral controller and overload
protection in a common enclosure, surface mounted. Size and number of poles shall be as
shown and required with pilot light.
B. Manual Motor Controller: Manual motor controller with overload protection, 1 HP maximum,
115 or 230V; General Electric Model #CK101Y1-(1) Pole, CR101H1-(2) Pole; General
Electric Model #CR101Y11-(1) Pole, with pilot light, CR101H11-(2) Pole; with pilot light.
C. Enclosures:
1. Manual motor controllers installed in indoor locations shall be NEMA 1 heavy duty
enclosures unless shown otherwise.
2. Manual motor controllers installed at kitchen and food preparation locations, hose
down areas, cooling towers, exterior locations, and in other corrosive areas shall be
NEMA 4X, stainless steel.
D. Disconnect Switch: For self -protected motors where one pole toggle motor control switch is
allowed, the switch shall be horsepower rated and as specified for toggle switches in Section
16140.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION OF MOTOR CONTROLLERS
A. General: Install combination motor controllers where required or indicated and in accordance
with the manufacturer's written instructions, requirements of the NEC and NECA Standard of
COMBINATION MOTOR CONTROLLERS
VLK Architects, 2009 26 2913 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
Installation, and industry practices.
B. Overloads: Install overload relays with manual reset in each phase of motor controller.
Overload adjustable settings shall be based on actual motor nameplate full load amps. Field
verify nameplate full load amps and adjust all relay settings accordingly.
C. Phase Failure Relay: Adjust phase failure relay to 10 percent over voltage and 10 percent
under voltage.
D. Coordination: Motor controllers shall be provided to coordinate with motors furnished by
Division 23. Motor controller controls shall be provided to coordinate with controls specified in
Division 23.
E. Supports: Provide individual and combination motor controllers with galvanized angle or other
suitable supports if mounting on wall or other rigid surface is impractical. Controllers shall not
be supported by conduit alone. Where motor controllers are mounted on equipment served,
the switch shall not inhibit removal of any service panels or interfere with any required access
areas. Manual motor controllers shall be installed plumb and aligned in the plane of the wall
where they are installed.
F. Identify each motor controller as specified in Section 26 0500.
G. Where motor controllers are indicated to be installed as part of a Motor Control Center, refer
to the Motor Control Center specification.
3.02 TESTING
A. Pre-Energization Check: Check motor controllers for continuous circuits and short circuits.
B. Post Hook -Up Test: After wire and cable hook-ups, energize motor controller to show it
functions as specified.
END OF SECTION
COMBINATION MOTOR CONTROLLERS
VLK Architects, 2009 26 2913 - 3 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 26 4300
TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION AND FILTERING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Hybrid high-energy suppression filter system that integrates transient voltage surge
suppression (TVSS) with high -frequency electrical line noise filtering. The unit shall be
connected in parallel with the facility's wiring system. The unit shall be manufactured in
the USA by a qualified manufacturer of suppression filter system equipment, which has
been engaged in the commercial design and manufacture of such products for a
minimum of five years.
1.02 CODES AND STANDARDS
A. The specified unit shall be designed, manufactured, tested, and installed in compliance
with the following standards:
1. American National Standards Institute and Institute of Electrical and Electronic
Engineers (ANSI/IEEE C62.41-2002 and C62.45-2002).
2. Federal Information Processing Standards Publication 94 (FIPS PUB 94).
3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA), Standard LS-1-1992.
4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA 70 (NEC), 75, and 78).
5. Underwriters Laboratories (UL 1449, 2"d Edition 2005).
6. UL 1283 — Electromagnetic Interference Filters
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Provide detailed compliance or exception statements to all provisions of this specification.
Additionally, manufacturers shall submit independent test data from a nationally
recognized testing laboratory verifying the following. Failure to do so will result in product
disapproval.
1. Life cycle testing.
2. Overcurrent protection, when specified.
3. UL 1449 2N' Edition TVSS ratings, with UL test report file number.
4. Noise Attenuation, NEMA LS-1, 1992
5. Single Impulse Surge Current Capacity, ANSI/IEE C62.41-1991 Standards UL
1449 Suppressed Voltage Ratings.
6. End of life mode testing, minimum repetitive surge current capacity testing based
on ANSI/IEEE C62.45 —1987 Standards.
7. NEMA Standard LS-1-1992 testing data and unit performance ratings.
8. Blank copy of Factory start-up and diagnostic test report to be included in the
Electrical Operations and Maintenance Manual.
9. Line by line specification review indicating compliance or deviation. Deviation
shall include full description of the deviation.
10. Documentation of UL 1449 Short Circuit Ratings
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Current Technology
B. Liebert
C. LEA
TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION AND FILTERING
VLK Architects, 2009 26 4300 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
D. Square D
2.02 TVSS DEVICES
A. The nominal unit operating voltage and configuration shall be equivalent to the system for
which the unit is connected.
B. The maximum continuous operating voltage (MCOV) of all suppression components
utilized in the unit shall not be less than 115% on 277V systems and 125% on 120V
systems of the facility's nominal operating voltage.
C. Tested Single -Pulse Surge Current Capacity. Based on ANSI/IEEE C62.41-2002's
Category C3 current waveform, and in accordance with NEMA Publication #LS 1-1992,
the tested single -pulse surge current capacity, in amps, of the unit shall be no less than
as follows:
1. Lowest Exposure (EGPE2-80-L1)(LGPE 801
Mode of Protection
L-L
L-N
L-G
N-G
Tested Single Pulse Surge
Current Amps
80,000
80,000
80,000
80,000
2. Medium Ex sure TG125-L1-DM SI025
Mode of Protection
L-L
L-N
L-G
N-G
Tested Single Pulse Surge
Current Amps
125,000
125,000
125,000
125,000
3 High Exposure TG200-L1-DM SI040
Mode of Protection
L-L
L-N
L-G
N-G
Tested Single Pulse Surge
Current
200,000
200,000
200,000
200,000
D. NEMA LS-1-1992 Unit Performance Ratings. The units published performance ratings
shall be the UL 1449 2nd Edition listed suppression ratings. The suppression rating for
Ringwaves or Combination Waves shall be, for each mode of protection as follows:
1. Lowest Exposure (EGPE2-80-L1)(LGPE 801
Nominal System
L-N
L-G
N-G
L-L
Voltage
ULB3
UIJB3
U VB3
UL/63
120/2081240
400/300
400/400
400/325
700/425
277/480
800/500
1000/825
600/650
1500/700
2. Medium Exposure TG125-L1-DM SI025
Nominal System
L-N
L-G
N-G
L-L
Voltage
ULB3+C1
UL/B3+C1
UL/B3+C1
UL/B3+C1
120/208/240
400/425
400/425
400/425
800/825
277/480
800/850
800/850
600/850
1500/1650
3. High Ex osure TG200-L1-DM SI040
Nominal System L-N L-G N-G
Voltage UL/C3 UL/C3 UL/C3
TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION AND FILTERING
VLK Architects, 2009 26 4300 - 2
L-L
UL/C3
2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
120/208/240
277/480
400/750
800/1150
400/800
800/1175
400/700
1000/1050
800/1200
1500/2100
E. Life Expectancy Testing: The unit shall be life -cycle tested to protect against and survive
at least 15,000 ANSI/IEEE C62.41-2002 and C62.45-2002 Category C3 biwave
(20kv,10kA) surges without failing or degrading the UL 1449 Surge Suppression Rating
by more than 10%.
F. Internal Impedance. The unit shall provide a path of extremely low impedance and shall
not utilize printed circuit boards, quick type disconnects or small gauge wire in the surge
current diversion path. All internal paths shall be low impedance copper conductor or
copper bus bar.
G. High Frequency Extended Range Tracking Filter. The unit shall include a high frequency
extended range tracking filter and shall be UL 1283 listed as an Electromagnetic
Interference Filter.
H. Field Connections. The unit shall include mechanical lugs for each phase, neutral and
ground, if applicable.
Enclosure. Panelboard EGPE2/LGPE extension series shall be NEMA 1. TG series units
shall be provided in a NEMA 4 enclosure.
J. Unit Status Indicators. The unit shall include solid state, long life, LED visual status
indicators that monitor the on-line status of each phase of the unit, dry contacts for
remote monitoring and audible alarm.
K. Units other than panel board extensions shall have internal fused disconnects.
L. UL 1449 Short Circuit Rating shall be 200 KAIC minimum.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 FIELD INSTALLATION
A. The unit shall be installed as close as practical to the facility's wiring system in
accordance with applicable national/local electrical codes and the manufacturer's
recommended installation instructions. Connection shall not be any longer than
necessary, avoiding unnecessary bends. Minimum wire size and overcurrent protection
shall be provided and as indicated or recommended by the manufacturer.
B. TVSS units specified for lighting and appliance panel boards shall be integral mounted or
mounted directly above or below the first section of the panel board it is protecting. Any
other mounting location will not be acceptable and shall be corrected, without exception,
at no additional cost to the Owner.
C. TVSS units specified power distribution panelboards or switchboards shall be mounted
directly above or adjacent to the power distribution panelboard or switchboard using
unistrut supports secured to structure as required. Conduit length between power
distribution panelboard or switchboard shall be less than six -inches.
D. Overcurrent device and conductors for TVSS devices shall be the maximum
recommended by the manufacturer. Manufacturer's recommendations shall prevail over
the information given in the plans and specifications.
3.02 TESTING
TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION AND FILTERING
VLK Architects, 2009 26 4300 - 3 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
A. Factory Trained Representative shall provide start-up to include initial verification of
proper installation and initiate factory warranty. A copy of the Factory diagnostic test
report and written approval of the installation shall be included with the Electrical
Operating and Maintenance Manual. The Contractor shall make all adjustments,
changes, corrections, etc. as required by the Factory Trained Representative so that the
installation is in compliance with the manufacturer's installation and operation instructions
without additional charge to the Owner.
3.03 WARRANTY
A. The manufacturer shall provide a Limited Ten -Year on site warranty for parts and labor
from date of substantial completion against failure when installed in compliance with
applicable national/local electrical codes and the manufacturer's Installation, Operation
and Maintenance Instructions.
END OF SECTION
TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION AND FILTERING
VLK Architects, 2009 26 4300 - 4 2737.03
SECTION 26 5113
LIGHTING FIXTURES AND LAMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
A. Work Included: Lighting fixture work is as shown, scheduled and specified.
B. Applications: The applications of lighting fixtures required for the project include the
following:
1. General lighting
2. Emergency lighting
3. Outdoor area lighting
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. CBM Label: Provide fluorescent ballasts that comply with Certified Ballast Manufacturers
Association (CBM) standards and carry the CBM mark on the label.
B. UL Standards: Lighting fixtures shall conform to applicable UL standards, and be UL
labeled.
C. Emergency light fixtures shall conform to the requirements of NFPA 101, and 70 (NEC).
D. ANSI Standards: All HID ballasts shall be designed and manufactured in accordance with
ANSI Standard for HID Ballasts, ANSI C82.4.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. In addition to product data, submit a 4" x 4" sample of all fluorescent lenses for review
and comparison to lenses installed on the project.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Provide products produced by manufacturers shown or scheduled for
each type of lighting fixture. Where fluorescent ballasts are indicated as generic
electronic ballast (GEB) or otherwise indicated using manufacturer's nomenclature,
provide products produced by one of the following for ballasts and lamps:
1. Fluorescent Ballasts:
Advance Transformer Co.
Universal Lighting Technology
Sylvania
2. HID Ballast
Universal Lighting Technology
Advance Transformer Company
3. Fluorescent Dimming Ballast:
Lutron
4. Fluorescent Emergency Battery Packs:
Bodine
IOTA
Chloride
Lithonia
5. Fluorescent, HPS Lamps:
LIGHTING FIXTURES AND LAMPS
VLK Architects, 2009 26 5113 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
General Electric Co.
Osram Sylvania
Philips Lighting
6. Pulse Start Metal Halide Lamps (all wattages in vertical burn position and 50-150
watt in universal burn position), and non -pulse start metal Halide lamps (all
wattages):
General Electric Co.
Sylvania
Philips Lighting
Venture
7. Pulse Start metal Halide Lamps 200-500 watt horizontal burning position:
Venture
Sylvania
8. Incandescent Lamps
General Electric Co.
Osram Sylvania
Philips Lighting
9. Emergency Generator Transfer Devices:
Bodine
Nine 24 Inc.
Entertainment Networks
IOTA
2.02 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS
A. General: Provide lighting fixtures of the size, type, and rating indicated, complete with,
but not limited to, lamps, lamp holders, reflectors, ballasts, starters, and wiring.
B. Fixture Types:
1. Fluorescent Fixtures: Provide fluorescent fixtures complete with lamps and
ballasts.
a. Fluorescent fixture lenses, where required, shall be extruded virgin
acrylic, prismatic type nominal 0.125" thick, 7.8-ounces per square foot
minimum. Reduced profile lensed fluorescent fixtures designed
specifically for T8 lamps shall have reversed apex geometry lenses to
decrease lamp imagery.
b. Fluorescent fixtures in continuous rows shall be supplied with fixture
couplings, chase nipples, and accessories recommended by the
manufacturer for continuous row installation.
C. Parabolic fixtures shall have both ballast housing reflector covers
installed including fixtures requiring single ballast. Louvers shall be 4-
inch low iridescent anodized aluminum with specular silver finish.
d. Wire guard at fixtures in mechanical and electrical rooms, gymnasiums
and high abuse areas.
e. Fluorescent fixtures located outdoors, in interior unconditioned spaces,
and in wet locations shall be of aluminum construction.
f. Fluorescent fixture door frame shall be of aluminum construction, white
finish.
2. HID Fixtures: Provide HID fixtures complete with lamps and ballasts.
a. HID fixtures in gymnasiums shall be protected with wire guards and/or
cages and safety chains to ballast and reflector.
3. Downlight Fixtures: Provide recessed downlight fixtures with trim rings
compatible with the ceiling material where fixture is to be installed.
4. LED Exit Signs: The exit lighting fixtures shall meet the requirements of Federal,
State, and Local Codes.
a. Gymnasiums, locker rooms, athletic/PE wing and associated corridors,
black box theaters, auditorium stages, cafetoriums and kitchens: Vandal
LIGHTING FIXTURES AND LAMPS
VLK Architects, 2009 26 5113 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
resistant, wet location cast aluminum with polycarbonate protective cover
exit signs, Lithonia Extreme Series.
5. Emergency Lighting Units: Lead Calcium batteries with self -diagnostics. Provide
full light output at 90 minutes of battery operation.
6. All gymnasium light fixtures shall be totally enclosed with wire guards.
C. Electronic Ballast - Fluorescent:
1. Provide programmed rapid start, low noise, high power factor, normal light
output, Class P, thermally protected, electronic ballasts for fluorescent lighting
fixtures.
2. Ballast shall have a Class A sound rating.
3. Five-year warranty replacement program.
4. Fluorescent ballast shall be rated for 0 degrees F minimum starting temperature,
parallel, programmed rapid start.
5. Linear fluorescent T-8 lamp ballast, Advance #RN CNXS32SC Series
6. Ballast factor 0.88 minimum.
7. Total Harmonic Distortion, 10% or less
8. Power Factor, greater than 0.98.
9. Linear fluorescent lamps shall be rated for 50,000 starts.
10. Compact fluorescent lamps shall be rated for 100,000 starts.
D. Ballasts - HID:
1. Provide high power factor ballasts with a minus 20OF temperature rating.
2. Ballasts for lamps up to 250 watts, shall have a Class 8 sound rating, unless
otherwise noted. Ballasts for lamps 300 watts and larger shall have a Class C
sound rating, unless noted otherwise.
3. Metal Halide ballast 50-100 watt shall be Electronic.
4. Metal Halide ballast, 150 through 1000 watt shall be Electronic or Pulse Start,
Super Constant Wattage Auto transformer (SCWA) or electronic.
5. Metal halide ballast of 1500-2000 watts shall be constant wattage
autotransformer (CWA).
E. Voltage: Ballasts for use on 120V systems shall be suitable and guaranteed for voltage
range of 100V to 130V. Ballasts for use on 277V systems shall be suitable and
guaranteed for voltage range of 225V to 290V.
F. Lamps:
1. Provide lamps of the wattage, type, color, and reflector lamps with type of beams
indicated, as shown, scheduled, and complying with the light fixture's
recommendations. Any deviation between the lamps specified and those
recommended by the light fixture manufacturer shall be brought to the attention
of the Architect/Engineer prior to submission of shop drawings.
2. Similar wattage and type fluorescent lamps shall be from the same manufacturer
and production run.
3. Fluorescent lamps shall be low mercury, lead free, TCLP Passing. Minimum
color rendering index shall be 82.
4. Linear T8 fluorescent lamps shall have an average rated life of 24,000 hours at
3-hours per start.
5. Metal Halide lamps 50 watt through 1000-watt lamps shall be Pulse Start except
for tubular °T-Type" metal halide lamps where those lamps are not available.
6. Metal halide lamps shall be phosphor coated except for outdoor area, and
exterior wall mounted fixtures, and wherever light fixture manufacturer
recommends clear lamps.
7. Similar wattage and type metal halide lamps shall be from the same
manufacturer and production runs.
8. High pressure sodium lamps 70-400 watt shall be rated at 30,000 hours, low
mercury, lead free, TCLP passing. HPS lamps 70-400 watt shall not cycle at end
LIGHTING FIXTURES AND LAMPS
VLK Architects, 2009 26 5113 - 3 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
of life.
9. Incandescent lamps shall be extended service, inside frosted, unless noted
otherwise.
G. Light fixture housing for exterior use: Provide aluminum or stainless housing. Where
stainless steel hardware is used, both male and female fasteners shall be stainless steel.
H. Emergency Fluorescent Battery Ballasts - Fluorescent: Full light output 90-minute
minimum operation. Nominal 1250-1400 lumen battery ballasts for emergency linear
fluorescent or long compact fluorescent lighting fixtures. Provide minimum 3400 lumen
battery ballasts for emergency fluorescent lighting fixtures in gymnasiums, cafeterias, and
areas where the ceiling height is 14' or greater. Where pendant mounted direct / indirect
fixtures are mounted above 14-feet, provide two 1400 lumen emergency battery packs for
each 4-foot emergency lighting segment indicated. Locate each 1400 lumen battery pack
in two separate 4-foot segments, as required. Provide minimum 700-lumen emergency
battery ballast for small compact fluorescent lighting fixtures 3-year replacement
warranty.
Emergency fluorescent battery ballasts shall illuminate two lamps for fixtures with two or
more lamps.
J. Emergency Battery Packs — Exit Signs: Nickel Cadmium battery with self- diagnostics;
Minimum 3-year non -prorated replacement warranty.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install lighting fixtures of the types indicated, where shown, and at indicated
heights in accordance with the fixture manufacturer's written instructions and industry
practices to ensure that the fixtures meet the specifications. Fixtures shall fit the type of
ceiling system scheduled.
B. Standards: Comply with NEMA standards, applicable requirements of NEC pertaining to
installation of interior lighting fixtures, and with NECA Standard of Installation.
C. Attachment: Fasten fixtures to the indicated structural support members of the building.
Provide four separate wire supports for recessed ceiling mounted lighting fixtures, one at
each comer of fixture. Check to ensure that solid pendant fixtures are plumb. Provide T-
bar locking clips on all four sides for fluorescent lay -in fixtures.
D. Coordination: Field coordinate and locate lighting fixtures in open ceiling areas including
mechanical and electrical rooms so that light is not obstructed by piping, ductwork, etc.
E. Final adjustment of all aimable exterior light fixtures shall be in coordination with, and to
the satisfaction of, the Owner's designated representative. Pre -aim all fixtures prior to
scheduled final aiming and adjustment with Architect/owner. Verify that all rotatable
optics are in their proper orientation prior to final aiming.
F. Fluorescent Dimming Circuits — Fluorescent lamps with dimming ballasts shall be burned -
in at 100 percent light level for 100 hours prior to dimming. Where fluorescent emergency
ballasts are used in conjunction with fluorescent dimming ballast, verify all wiring
connections with both the fluorescent emergency ballast and dimming ballast
manufacturer. The charging circuit for the emergency ballast shall be the same un-
switched, non -dimmed branch circuit providing operational power to the dimming ballast,
unless directed otherwise by the ballast manufacturers.
LIGHTING FIXTURES AND LAMPS
VLK Architects, 2009 26 5113 - 4 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
G. Provide wire guards for emergency lighting units. Provide vandal resistant exit signs
without wire guards in all physical education and athletic sports areas, including egress
corridors adjacent to these areas, black box theaters, auditorium stages, cafetoriums and
kitchens.
H. Provide exit sign directional arrows as required.
1. install in accordance with manufacturers instructions.
J. Install suspended luminaries using pendants supported from swivel hangers. Provide
pendant length required to suspend luminary at indicated height.
K. Locate recessed ceiling luminaries as indicated on the Architectural reflected ceiling plan.
L. Install surface mounted luminaries plumb and adjust to align with building lines and with
each other. Secure to prohibit movement.
M. Exposed Grid Ceilings: Support surface mounted luminaries on grid ceiling directly from
building structure. Provide auxiliary members spanning ceiling Ts to support surface
mounted luminaries. Fasten surface mounted luminaries to ceiling T using bolts, screws,
rivets, or suitable clips.
N. Install recessed luminaries to permit removal from below.
O. Install recessed luminaries using accessories and fire stopping materials to meet
regulatory requirements for fire rating.
P. Install wall -mounted luminaries at height as directed by Architect.
Q. Install accessories furnished with each luminary.
R. Connect luminaries to branch circuit outlets using flexible conduit as specified.
S. Make wiring connections to branch circuit using building wire with insulation suitable for
temperature conditions within luminaries.
T. Bond products and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.
U. Provide generator transfer devices for light fixtures powered by generator or inverter
emergency lighting circuits which are used for normal lighting and to be switched with the
switched normal lighting circuit in the same room, corridor or area.
3.02 TESTING -
A. General: Upon installation of lighting fixtures, and after building circuits are energized,
apply electrical energy to demonstrate proper operations of lighting fixtures, emergency
lighting, and controls. When possible, correct malfunctioning units at the site, then retest
to demonstrate proper operation; otherwise, remove and replace with new units, and
proceed with retesting.
B. Lamps: Install new incandescent lamps before final inspection. Fluorescent HID lamps
may be used to finish the building. Replace gaseous discharge lamps that are defective,
show discolorations, or have exceeded more than 1/3 of their rated life, in accordance
with construction inspector's records, with new lamps for final inspection.
LIGHTING FIXTURES AND LAMPS
VLK Architects, 2009 26 5113 - 5 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
C. Pre -Inspection Tasks: Immediately before final inspection, clean fixtures inside and out,
including plastics and glassware, adjust trim to fit adjacent surfaces, replace broken or
damaged parts, and lamp and test fixtures for electrical and mechanical operations. Any
fixtures, or parts of fixtures that show signs of rust or corrosion at the time of completion,
shall be removed, and replaced with protected metal parts.
D. Final aiming and Adjustment: Aim and adjust aimable and adjustable lighting fixtures for
their intended purpose. Re -aim and re -adjust as required to the satisfaction of the
Architect/Owner, including nighttime adjustment of exterior lighting in the presence of the
Architect/Owner.
END OF SECTION
LIGHTING FIXTURES AND LAMPS
VLK Architects, 2009 26 5113 - 6 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 27 0500
COMMUNICATIONS GENERAL PROVISIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Except as modified in this Section, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions,
applicable provisions of Division 01 General Requirements, and other provisions and
requirements of the Contract Documents apply to work of Division 27 Communications.
B. Applicable provisions of this section apply to all sections of Division 27, Communications.
C. The general provisions of the Contract and the requirements of the following Sections
apply to the Work specified in this Section. See Division 26 for related general and
specific requirements.
1.02 CODES AND STANDARDS:
A. All equipment and work performed shall comply with all of the current and applicable
Codes, Rules, Ordinances, Regulations and Standards (including those not specifically
listed in this Specification) as interpreted and enforced by the authorities having
jurisdiction including:
1. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)
2. Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) - Local
3. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
4. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM) Communications Cables -
B694, B736, D4565, D4566, D4730, D4731, D4732
5. Building Industry Consulting Services International (BICSI)
6. Code of Federal Regulations - Title 47
7. Electronics Industries Association (EIA) Standard Test Procedures for Fiber
Optic Fibers, Cables, Transducers, Connecting and Terminating Devices - EIA-
455 Series
8. Federal Communications Commission (FCC) - Communications Act and FCC
Rules
9. Federal Information Processing Standards (FIPS) Federal Building Standard for
Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces - FIPS PUB 175, FIPS PUB 176
10. The Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA) Communications Cable
Stands - P-47-434, S-56-434, S-80-576, S84-608, S-85-625, S-86-634, S-87-
640, S-89-648, S-90-661, S-98-688, S-99-689, S-100-685
11. International Electro-technical Commission (IEC)
12. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) Local Area
Networks/Metropolitan Networks Standards Collection - LAN/MAN 802 Series
13. International Organization for Standardization (ISO) (ISO/IEC) Premise Wiring
Core and LAN/MAN Core Equivalents-11801, 8802, 14763-1
14. International Telecommunication Union (ITU-T) Telecommunications
Standardization
15. National Electrical Code (NEC) National Electrical Code - NFPA 70
16. National Electrical Contractor's Association (NECA) Standards of Installation
17. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) Performance Standard for
Twisted Pair Premise Voice and Data Communications Cable -WC 63.1, WC
63.2, INC 66
18. National Electrical Safety Code (NESC)
19. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) - National Fire Alarm Code NFPA
72, Life Safety Code NFPA 101
20. Society of Cable Telecommunications Engineers (SCTE)
COMMUNICATIONS GENERAL PROVISIONS
VLK Architects 2008 2790500 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
21. Local Accessibility Standards
22. Telecommunications Industries Association (TIA) (ANSI/TIA/EIA) Wiring and
Cabling Standards - 526, 568, 569, 570, 571, 598, 606, 607, 758, TSB 31-B, 63,
67, 72, 75 and 95
23. Uniform Building Code (UBC)
24. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (U.L.) - 497A, 910, 1077, 1863, 1283, 1459,
1604, 1651, 1681, 1690, 1778, 1977
B. Resolve any code violations discovered in contract documents with the Engineer prior to
award of the contract. After Contract award, any correction or additions necessary for
compliance with applicable codes shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner.
C. This Contractor shall be responsible for being aware of and complying with asbestos
NESHAP regulations, as well as all other applicable codes, laws and regulations.
D. Obtain all permits required.
1.03 SUMMARY:
A. Provide complete and working Communications Systems including equipment, conduit,
wiring, material, labor and training as described in this Specification and the Drawings.
The Communications Systems Drawings and Specifications are the sole property of the
Architect and are not to be duplicated, scanned, loaned or in any way made available to
persons not designated as authorized by the Architect. All Communications Systems
plans and specifications are to be returned to the Architect following completion of bid.
1.04 SPACE REQUIREMENTS
A. Consider space limitations imposed by contiguous work in selection and location of
equipment and material. Do not provide equipment or material that is not suitable in this
respect.
1.05 RELATION WITH OTHER TRADES
A. Carefully study all matters and conditions concerning the project. Submit notification of
conflict in ample time to prevent unwarranted changes in any work. Review other
Divisions of these specifications to determine their requirements. Extend electrical
services and final connections to all items requiring same.
B. Because of the complicated relationship of this work to the total project, conscientiously
study the relation and cooperate as necessary to accomplish the full intent of the
documents.
C. Provide sleeves and inserts in forms as required for the work. Stub up and protect open
ends of pipe before any concrete is placed. Furnish sizes of required equipment pads.
Furnish and locate bolts and fittings required to be cast in them.
D. Locate and size openings required for installation of work specified in this Division in
sufficient time to prevent delay in the work.
E. Refer to other Divisions of the specifications for the scope of required connections to
equipment furnished under other Division. Determine from the General Contractor /
Construction Manager for the various trades, the Owner, and by direction from the
Architect/Engineer, the exact location of all items. The construction trades involved shall
furnish all roughing -in drawings and wiring diagrams required for proper installation of the
electrical work.
COMMUNICATIONS GENERAL PROVISIONS
VLK Architects 2008 2790500 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
1. Make final connections to all communications equipment indicated on the
drawings, except as noted.
F. Request all Shop Drawings required in ample time to permit proper installation of all
electrical provisions.
G. Extend services as indicated to the various items of equipment furnished by others.
Rough -in for the various items and make final connections ready for operation upon
placing of the equipment.
1.06 CONCEALED AND EXPOSED WORK
A. When the word "concealed" is defined as hidden from sight as in chases, furred spaces
or above ceilings. "Exposed" is defined as open to view, in plain sight.
1.07 GUARANTEE
A. Guarantee work for a minimum of two years or as noted longer elsewhere from the date
of substantial completion of the project. During that period make good any faults or
imperfections that may arise due to defects or omissions in material, equipment or
workmanship. At the Owner's option, replacement of failed parts or equipment shall be
provided.
1.08 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
A. Furnish new and unused materials and equipment meeting the requirements of the
paragraph specifying acceptable manufacturers. Where two or more units of the same
type or class of equipment are required, provide units of a single manufacturer.
1.09 NOISE AND VIBRATION
A. Select equipment to operate with minimum noise and vibration. If noise or vibration is
produced or transmitted to or through the building structure by equipment, piping, ducts
or other parts of work, and judged objectionable by the Owner, Architect, or Engineer,
rectify such conditions at no additional cost to the Owner. If the item of equipment is
judged to produce objectionable noise or vibration, demonstrate at no additional cost that
equipment performs within designated limits on a vibration chart.
1.10 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers names and catalog number specified under sections of Division 27 are
used to establish standards of design, performance, quality and serviceability and not to
limit competition. Equipment of similar design, equal to that specified, manufactured by a
named manufacturer shall be acceptable on approval. A request for prior approval of
equipment not listed must be submitted ten (10) days before proposal due date. Submit
complete design and performance data to the Architect. The Architect and Owner issue
approvals of acceptable manufacturers as addenda to the Construction Proposal
Documents.
1.11 UTILITIES, LOCATIONS AND ELEVATIONS
A. Locations and elevations of the various utilities included within the scope of this work:
1. Obtained from utility maps and other substantially reliable sources.
2. Are offered separate from the Contract Documents as a general guide only
without guarantees to accuracy.
COMMUNICATIONS GENERAL PROVISIONS
VLK Architects 2008 2790500 - 3 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
B. Examine the site and verify the location and elevation of all utilities and of their relation to
the work. Existing utilities indicated on the site plans are for reference only and shall be
field verified by the Contractor with the respective public or private utility.
1.12 CONTRACT DRAWINGS
A. Contract drawings are diagrammatic only and do not give fully dimensioned locations of
various elements of work. Determine exact locations from field measurements.
B. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to compare the scale of all electrical drawings with
the scale of the architectural drawings and make adjustments to all electrical drawings
which have the incorrect drawing scale so that his material takeoffs are not in error due to
an incorrectly labeled drawing scale and his proposal is complete.
1.13 ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS:
Abbreviations:
A/V -
Audio/Visual
AWG -
American Wire Gauge
BCR -
Building Communications Room
CATV - Cable Antenna Television
CCTV - Closed Circuit Television
CMP -
Communications Media Plenum
CMR -
Communications Media Riser
dB -
Decibel
EMI -
Electromagnetic Interference
ER-
Equipment Room
FACP - Fire Alarm Control Panel
FCR -
Floor Communications Room
Hz -
Hertz
IC -
Intermediate Cross -connect
IDF -
Intermediate Distribution Frame
IM -
Information Management
is-
Information Systems or Information Services (also see MIS)
IT -
Information Technology
Km -
Kilometer
LCD -
Liquid Crystal Display
LED -
Light Emitting Diode
M -
Micron
MATV -Master Antenna Television (A. K.A. Main Antenna Television)
Mbps -
Million Bits Per Second
MC -
Main Cross -connect
MDF -
Main Distribution Frame
MHz -
Megahertz
MIS -
Management Information Systems or Services
NEXT - Near -End Cross Talk
nm -
Nano -meter
OFN -
Optical Fiber Non-conductive
OFNP - Optical Fiber Non-conductive Plenum
OFNR -Optical Fiber Non-conductive Riser
OTDR -Optical Time Domain Reflectometer
PBX -
Private Branch Exchange
POS -
Point of Sale
PSELFEXT -
Power Sum Equal Level Far -End Cross Talk
PSNEXT -
Power Sum Near -End Cross Talk
SMATV -
Satellite Main Antenna Television
TC -
Telecommunications Closet (Now referred to as TR)
COMMUNICATIONS GENERAL PROVISIONS
VLK Architects 2008 2790500 - 4 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
TR - Telecommunications Room (AXA. TC
Telecommunication Closet)
UTP - Unshielded Twisted Pair Wire
Definitions:
Administration Subsystem - Cable, connectors, cross -connect and inter -connect
hardware, patch cords, and other equipment that allows easy reconfiguration of the
telecommunications system to accommodate personnel and floor plans changes.
Campus Backbone Subsystem - Connects telecommunications processing equipment in
different buildings on the same campus.
Communications Cabling - Any fiber optic, copper, coaxial or other transmission media
used for transmitting or receiving communications systems data.
Communications System - Communications Systems and associated wired or wireless
interconnection.
Communications Drawings - All floor plans, elevations, details, schematics, block
diagrams, legends, tables, notes or attachments associated with any or all of the
Communications Systems.
Distribution Cable - The telecommunications UTP wiring between the
telecommunications room and the outlet connectors.
Equipment Subsystem - Telecommunications cable, connectors, support hardware,
blocks, and protective devices that serve to connect the network interface and the
backbone subsystem through the administrative subsystem.
Horizontal Subsystem - Telecommunications cable, outlets and distribution cords that
extend the riser backbone from the administrative points in the TRs to work stations.
Information Systems - Software systems including operating systems, programs, data
manipulation and management systems, control software and various forms of
proprietary and off -the -shelf software.
Information Technology - The practical application of knowledge associated with
designing, installing and maintaining the equipment, hardware and infrastructure utilized
for control, distribution, or display of telecommunications, audio, video and data signals.
Because computers are central to information management, computer departments
within companies and universities are often called (IT Departments) and are responsible
for MIS or IS personnel and services.
Low Voltage Wire - Wire or cable used for one or more systems that operate on 24 volts
or less. Low Voltage Wire is used to install and interconnect one or more of the
Communications Systems. Low Voltage Wire includes patch cords, jumpers and all
portions of cable or wire used to make the Communications Systems operational or for
system communications.
Management Information Systems - A class of software that provides managers with
tools for organizing and evaluating their department. Typically, MIS systems are written in
COBOL and run on mainframes or minicomputers. Within companies and large
organizations, the department responsible for computer systems is sometime called the
MIS department. Another name for MIS is Information Services (IS).
COMMUNICATIONS GENERAL PROVISIONS
VLK Architects 2008 2790500 - 5 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
Multiplexer - A communications device that multiplexes (combines) several signals for
transmission over a single medium. A multiplexer is sometimes called a "mux". A
demultiplexer is required to complete the process by separating multiplexed signals from
a transmission line. Frequently a multiplexer and demultiplexer are combined into a
single device capable of processing both outgoing and incoming signals.
Riser Backbone Subsystem - Telecommunications cable, splice enclosures, and
associated hardware that provide the main cable routes in a building. It interconnects
building floors and larger areas of a single floor. It also interconnects administrative
points in satellite TRs to the administrative points in the building main equipment room.
Station Cable - The wiring between the outlet connections and the work area equipment.
Communications Systems - One or more of the following and associated equipment:
Data/Networking Systems, Telecommunications Systems, Paging / Intercom Systems,
Clock/Control Systems, Master Antenna Television Systems, Cable Antenna Television
Systems, Broadcast Video Systems, Audio/Visual Presentations Systems,
Microwave/Wireless Systems.
Telecommunications - The transmission, emission or reception of signs, signals, images,
sound or intelligence of any nature by wire, radio, optical or other technical transmission
system.
Work Area - Location of an employee or student and their data/telecommunications
equipment or devices.
Work Area Subsystem - Station mounting cords, extension cords, connectors, adapters,
and interface units that provide physical and electrical connectivity between workstation
equipment and the horizontal subsystem.
1.14 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Equipment Standards:
1. System and all components shall be brand new stock from manufacturer.
2. All electronics shall be 100% solid state.
3. System and all components shall bear a UL Label.
B. Contractor Qualifications:
At the time of Proposal, the Contractor shall:
1. Have manufactured, supplied or installed at least three (3) other systems of
similar size, complexity, and general operation as the systems described in these
specifications. The Contractor shall furnish in writing to Architect proof of
compliance with this paragraph at the time of proposal.
2. Hold all legally required Texas State Contractor's licenses necessary to
accomplish the installation and activation of the described system at the facilities
indicated. The Contractor shall submit copies of licenses to the Architect prior to
the start of work
3. Hold all legally required state registrations to meet local requirements for
submittal drawings.
4. Have a local office within fifty (50) miles of the project site staffed with factory
trained technicians who have experience on systems of similar complexity and
function as the systems described in these specifications. These technicians
shall be fully capable of system engineering support, installation supervising,
system start-up, and providing the Owner with training and service on both
hardware and software for the systems specified.
5. Certify complete and total compliance with the provisions of these specifications
by letter or submittal of the proposal response forms, signed by an officer of the
COMMUNICATIONS GENERAL PROVISIONS
VLK Architects 2008 2790500 - 6 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
corporation, or a principal if other ownership currently exists. In addition, the
letter or forms shall include a complete listing of exceptions, if any.
1.15 SUBMITTALS:
A. Provide SUBMITTALS according to Division 01 and the following.
B. Requirements:
1. Submit paragraph -by -paragraph specification review indicating compliance or
deviation with explanation.
2. Submit proof that all system components and cables are U.L. Listed.
3. An equipment list with names of manufacturers, model numbers, and technical
information on all equipment proposed. Clearly mark exact model number
proposed to be installed.
4. Product technical information sheets for each principal components in the
proposed system, including cable, wire, terminal marking, and wire marking
material.
5. Certification from the manufacturer stating that the system Contractor is an
authorized distributor or installer of the proposed system when such certifications
exist.
6. A statement listing every technical and operational parameter wherein the
submitted equipment varies from that which was originally specified. If the
submitter fails to list a particular variance and his submittal is accepted, but is
subsequently deemed to be unsatisfactory because of the unlisted variance, the
submitter shall replace or modify such equipment at once and without cost to the
Owner.
1.16 EXAMINATION OF SITE:
A. The Contractor shall have visited the site and familiarized himself with all existing
conditions prior to submitting his proposal and shall be prepared to carry out the work
within the existing limitations. Failure or neglect to do so shall not relieve the Contractor
of his responsibilities not entitle him to additional compensation for work overlooked and
not included in his proposal.
B. The Contractor shall confirm the availability of the proper power source for each piece of
specified equipment, through site visits and Drawings as necessary. Where proper power
does not exist, the Contractor shall provide the required power, circuits, outlets, conduits,
and wire as specified under Division 26.
1.17 DATA ACCURACY:
A. Absolute accuracy of information regarding existing conditions cannot be guaranteed.
The Drawings and Specifications are for the assistance and guidance of the Contractor
and exact locations, distances, elevations, etc., shall be governed by actual field
conditions. Where variations from the contract documents are required, such variations
shall be approved by the ArchitecUOwner.
1.18 SECURITY:
A. The Contractor is responsible for complying with all of the Owner's and facility security's
requirements to prevent theft or damage to equipment, tools and materials. If any
deviation from facility security requirements is necessary, approval for such deviation
shall be coordinated with the Owner. .
B. The Contractor shall not disclose any confidential information of the Owner. The
Contractor acknowledges that such action is highly injurious and can do damage to the
COMMUNICATIONS GENERAL PROVISIONS
VLK Architects 2008 2790500 - 7 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
Owner. The Contractor will agree to and comply with the standard policies and provisions
of the Owner regarding outside Contractors and Consultants.
1.19 UTILITIES:
A. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide all temporary connection and
cables, lighting, light stands and power. The facilities shall be used in accordance with all
applicable regulations regarding operations, safety and fire hazards of the governmental
Authorities Having Jurisdiction, provided they are not used in a wasteful manner.
1.20 PERMITS:
A. All permits required for the specified performance and completion of the work shall be
secured by the Contractor. These permits shall be presented and reviewed at the initial
project progress meeting.
1.21 NOTIFICATION:
A. The Contractor shall not shut off any existing systems. The Contractor shall give the
Owner at least ten (10) calendar day's notice of any requirements to shut off or
interference with existing alarm, regulating, computer or other service systems. The
Owner will arrange and execute any shutdown. All work such as splicing, connections,
etc., necessary to establish or re-establish any system shall be completed by the
Contractor in close coordination with the Owner.
1.22 INTERFERENCES WITH THE OWNER:
A. Transportation and storage of materials at the facility, work involving the facility, and all
other matters affecting the habitual use by the Owner of its buildings, shall be conducted
so as to cause the least possible interference, and at times and in a manner acceptable
to the Owner. The Contractor shall make every effort to delivery equipment per the
schedule required by the project.
1.23 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Maintain at the job site a separate set of white prints (blue line or black line) of the
contract drawings for the sole purpose of recording the "as -built" changes and diagrams
of those portions of work in which actual construction is significantly at variance with the
contract drawings. Mark the drawings with a colored pencil. Prepare, as the work
progresses and upon completion of work, reproducible drawings clearly indicating
locations of various major and minor feeders, equipment, and other pertinent items, as
installed. Record underground and underslab cables installed, dimensioning exact
location and elevation of such installations.
B. At conclusion of project, obtain without cost to the Owner, electronic AutoCAD CAD files
of the original drawings and transfer as -built changes to these. Provide the following as -
built documents including all contract drawings regardless of whether corrections were
necessary and include in the transmittal: "2 sets of CDs and prints for Owner's use, one
set of CDs, prints, and mylars for Architect/Engineers Records". Delivery of these as -built
electronic, reproducible and prints is a condition of final acceptance.
1. 3 sets of electronic AutoCAD (2000 dwg) CAD drawing files, on CD-ROM media,
of each contract as -built drawing.
2. One reproducible Dayrex mylar film positive of each contract as -built drawing.
3. Three sets of blue or black -line prints of each contract as -built drawing.
C. As -Built Drawings should indicate the following information as a minimum:
1. Indicate all addendum changes to documents.
COMMUNICATIONS GENERAL PROVISIONS
VLK Architects 2008 2790500 - 8 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
2. Remove Engineer's Seal, name, address, and logo from drawings.
3. Mark documents AS -BUILT DRAWINGS.
4. Clearly indicate: DOCUMENT PRODUCED BY:
5. Indicate all changes to construction during construction. Indicate actual routing of
all conduit and cables, etc that were deviated from construction drawings.
6. Indicate exact location of all underground communications raceways, and
elevations.
7. Correct schedules to reflect (actual) equipment furnished and manufacturer.
8. During the execution of work, maintain a complete set of Drawings and
specifications upon which all locations of equipment, devices, and all deviations
and changes from the construction documents in the work shall be recorded.
9. Exact location of all communications equipment in building. Label panel
schedules to indicate actual location.
10. Exact location of all communications equipment in and outside of the building.
11. Location, size and routing of all communications cables, conduits, equipment,
etc. shall be accurately and neatly shown to dimension.
12. Exact location of all roof mounted equipment, wall, roof and floor penetrations.
13. Cloud all changes.
1.24 OPERATING TESTS
A. After all communications systems have been completed and put into operation, subject
each system to an operating test under design conditions to ensure proper sequencing
and operation throughout the range of operation. Tests shall be made in the presence of
the Architect/Engineer and Owner. Provide minimum 24-hour advance notice of
scheduling of all tests. Make adjustments as required to ensure proper functioning of all
systems. Special tests on individual systems are specified under individual sections.
Submit 3 copies of all certifications and test reports adequately in advance of completion
of the work to allow for remedial action as required to correct deficiencies discovered in
equipment and systems.
1.25 WARRANTY
A. All equipment shall be covered for the full manufacturers warranty period and systems
shall be warranted by the Contractor for a period of two years commencing with the filing
date of substantial completion. The Warranty shall cover all costs for warranty service,
including parts, labor, prompt field service, pick-up, transportation, delivery, reinstallation,
and retesting. A contract for service shall cover the period starting with the first expected
activation of each system and shall continue without interruption to cover the period to
the end of the two-year warranty as defined above. The end of the warranty period shall
be handled such that a smooth transition to a maintenance agreement with the Owner
shall be achieved with no lapse in coverage.
B. Submit 3 copies of all warranties and guarantees for systems, equipment, devices and
materials. These shall be included in the Operating and Maintenance Manuals.
1.26 BUILDING CONSTRUCTION
A. It shall be the responsibility of the sub -contractor to consult the Architectural and
Engineering drawings, details and specifications and thoroughly familiarize himself as to
the construction and all job related requirements. All construction trades shall cooperate
with the General Contractor / Construction Manager job site superintendent and lay out
work so that all piping, cables, pathways, raceways, and other items are placed in the
walls, furred spaces, chases, etc., so that there shall be no delay in the job.
COMMUNICATIONS GENERAL PROVISIONS
VLK Architects 2008 2790500 - 9 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
1.27 TEMPORARY FACILITIES
A. General: Refer to Division 01 for general requirements on temporary facilities.
B. Temporary Wiring: Temporary power and lighting for construction purposes shall be
provided under Division 26. Installation of temporary power shall be in accordance with
NEC Article 305.
C. Temporary facilities, wire, lights and devices are the property of this Contractor and shall
be removed at the completion of the Contract.
1.28 EXTRA MATERIALS:
Keys: Provide three (3) sets of all keys for system cabinets.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.01 WORK INCLUDED:
All materials listed in PART 2 - PRODUCTS of this Division Sections and on the Drawings shall
be provided by the Contractor unless specifically excluded or modified in other portions of this
Specification or Addendums.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION:
A. This project has a critical path, which must be closely followed in order to meet the
completion date. The Contractor shall review the proposed schedule at the Award of
Contract meeting and be prepared to staff his work force according to the schedule
constraints presented at that time.
B. Aesthetics are an important consideration in this installation. All components shall be
installed so as to have aesthetically pleasing results as determined by the Owner and
Architect. Actual locations of all visible components shall be coordinated in advance with
the Owner and Architect.
C. Install, make fully operational and test the system as indicated on the Drawings and in
the Specifications. Where information is not available the worst -case condition must be
assumed to ensure a complete, functional system.
D. Any interfacing with other systems shall be the Contractor's responsibility under this
contract, and the details, both logical and physical, of such interfaces shall be reflected in
the Submittals and As -Built drawings.
E. If appropriate, interfaces with the Owner's Data Network, Telecommunications and
Communications System shall be coordinated with the Owner and Architect.
F. All necessary back boards, back -boxes, pull -boxes, connectors, supports, conduit, cable
and wire shall be furnished and installed to provide a complete and reliable system. Exact
location of all backboards, boxes, conduit and wiring runs shall be presented to the
Owner/Architect for approval in advance of any installation. Provide as required and as
specified in Division 26.
COMMUNICATIONS GENERAL PROVISIONS
VLK Architects 2008 2790500 - 10 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
G. Where required provide 120-VAC, 60 Hz power from nearest electrical panel through a
junction box, to the system devices. Provide as required and as specified in Division 26.
H. Where required, install conduit, cable and wire parallel and square with building lines,
including raised floor areas. Conduit fills shall not exceed 40%.
1. All equipment shall be mounted with sufficient clearance to minimize EMI as well as meet
all applicable codes and facilitate observation and testing. Securely hand and/or fasten
with appropriate fittings to ensure positive grounding, free of ground loops, throughout the
entire system. Units shall be installed parallel and square to building lines.
J. Quiet and vibration -free operation of all equipment is a requirement of this installation.
Properly adjust, repair, balance or replace any equipment producing objectionable (in the
judgment of the Owner or Architect) noise or vibration in any of the occupied areas of any
building and provide additional brackets and bracing if necessary. Any such additions or
changes shall be at no additional cost to the Owner.
K. Installation shall comply with the CODES AND STANDARDS portion of this Section.
Where more than one code or regulation if applicable, the more stringent shall apply.
L. Where new equipment is replacing old equipment, the Contractor is responsible for
removing and disposing of the old equipment and doing whatever repair work is
necessary as specified by the Owner/Architect.
M. Install firestopping, as specified in Division 26 for all penetrations in slabs and firewalls to
meet code at the completion of work and prior to final testing demonstration to the
Owner.
N. The installation shall be performed in a professional manner.
O. On a daily basis, clean up and deposit in appropriate containers all debris from work
performed under the appropriate specification sections. Stack and organize all parts,
tools and equipment when not being used.
P. Preparation, handling and installation shall be in accordance with the Manufacturer's
written instructions and technical data appropriate to the product specified.
Q. All work shall conform to the National Electrical Contractor's Association "Standard of
Installation" for general installation practice.
R. At the conclusion of the installation, all work areas, including all enclosures and boxes,
shall be vacuumed and cleaned to remove all debris and grease.
3.02 COORDINATION WITH OWNER/ARCHITECT
A. Close coordination with the Owner/Architect is vital to achieve a complete, aesthetically
pleasing job. The Contractor shall ensure that the Owner/Architect is kept fully apprized
of job progress.
3.03 CUTTING, PAINTING, AND PATCHING:
A. Structural members shall not be drilled, bored or notched in such a manner that shall
impair their structural value. Cutting of holes in structural members, if required, shall be
done with core drills and only with the specific approval of the Owner/Architect for each
instance.
COMMUNICATIONS GENERAL PROVISIONS
VLK Architects 2008 2790500 - 11 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
B. All walls that require cutting or repair during the installation process shall be returned to
their original condition, including the matching of colors and finishes to the satisfaction of
the Owner/Architect, and at no additional cost to the Owner.
3.04 WIRE AND CABLE:
A. All low voltage cable shall be low smoke plenum rated, limited energy, with 300-volt
insulation.
B. All wires in exposed areas shall run through conduit as specified in Division 26.
C. Provide conduits, cable trays, raceways, wireways, boxes and outlets as specified in
Division 26.
D. After installation, and before termination, all wiring shall be checked and tested to insure
there are no grounds, opens, or shorts on any conductors. In addition, all wires between
buildings or underground and all coax cables shall have insulation tested with a
megohmeter (megger) and a reading of greater than 20 megohms shall be required to
successfully complete the test.
E. Run wires continuously from termination to termination without splices.
F. Wire and cable shall be supported in each equipment and terminal cabinet and in each
terminal and pull box in vertical risers and horizontal runs with wire duct and strap -type
supports. At any point where wire duct is required for good wire management, whether
shown on elevations or not, install appropriate duct. Where terminal boards are used,
wire ducts shall be supplied on both sides and at not rime shall wires cross over terminal
boards. Arrange cables neatly to allow inspection, removal and replacement. Lace cables
as required. Spot tie wire bundles with plastic cable ties and securely affix to panels. If
screw type terminals are specified, terminal strip connections shall be locking, tongue
style, pressure crimp, and solderless spade lug.
G. Visually inspect wire and cable for faulty insulation prior to installation. Protect cable ends
at all times with acceptable end caps except during actual termination. At no time shall
any coaxial cable be subjected to a bend less than a 6-inch radius. Protect wire and
cable from kinks. Install 1 pull rope for all 2" or larger sized conduits.
H. Provide plastic bushings and strain relief material at all conduit exit points and where
necessary, to avoid abrasion of wire and excess tension on wire and cable.
I. Cables above accessible ceilings shall not rest on ceiling tiles. Use Velcro tie wraps to
hold cables. Provide independent support for all cables. Support is to be from building
structure (do not support from pipes or conduits). Communications cables shall not tie off
on HVAC supports, all -thread, ceiling grid hanger wire or electrical / mechanical piping
system.
J. Ground and bond equipment and circuits in accordance with NEC and Division 26.
3.05 IDENTIFICATION AND TAGGING:
A. All cables, wires, wiring forms, terminal blocks and terminals shall be identified by labels,
tags to other permanent markings in accordance with TIA/EIA-606. The markings shall
clearly indicate the function, source, or destination of all cabling, wiring and terminals. All
cables and wires shall be identified, utilizing heat -shrink, machine printed, polyolefin wire
markers (Brady Type B-32 or equao. Hand written tags are not acceptable.
COMMUNICATIONS GENERAL PROVISIONS
VLK Architects 2008 2790500 - 12 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
B. Should a situation arise where the wire tagging format as shown on the drawings cannot
be used, a substitute format shall be submitted which complies with the intent to provide
documentation that will permit end -to -end tracing of all Communications Systems wiring.
C. All panels shall be provided with permanently attached engraved lamacoid labels with
identifying names and functions. All terminal points shall be appropriately labeled. Labels
shall be consistent in form, color, and typeface throughout the system and all must
contain the name of the system or subsystem as part of the label textual information.
Design, color, font and layout shall be coordinated with, and approved by, the Owner.
D. Identification of Equipment:
1. All major equipment shall have a manufacturer's label identifying the
manufacturer's address, equipment model and serial numbers, equipment size,
and other pertinent data. Take care not to obliterate this nameplate. The legend
on all nameplates or tags shall correspond to the identification shown on the
Operating Instructions.
2. A black -white -black 3 layer laminated plastic engraved identifying nameplate
shall be permanently secured to each wireway, terminal cabinet, and
communications (voice, data, video) cabinet or rack.
a. Identifying nameplates shall have 1/2-inch high, engraved letters. For
equipment designation and '/a -inch letters indicating source circuit
designation, (ie: "IDF(FCR) XXYY —served from MDF (BCR) XXGG).
3. Permanent, waterproof, black markers shall be used to identify each
communications grid junction box, clearly indicating the type of system available
at that junction box.
4. Pull Boxes: Field work each with a nameplate showing identity, and identifying
equipment connected to it. Nameplates shall also indicate where pull box is fed
from.
E. Prohibited Markings: Markings intended to identify the manufacturer, vendor, or other
source from whom the material has been obtained are prohibited for installation in public,
tenant, or common areas within the project. Also prohibited are materials or devices that
bear evidence that markings or insignias have been removed. Certification, testing
(example, Underwriters Laboratories), and approval labels are exceptions to this
requirement.
F. Warning Signs: Provide warning signs where there is hazardous exposure associated
with access to or operation of communications facilities. Provide text of sufficient size to
convey adequate information at each location; mount permanently in an appropriate and
effective location. Comply with industry standards for color and design.
G. Wire and Cable Labeling: Provide wire markers on each conductor in all boxes, pull
boxes, gutters, wireways. Identify with drop/circuit number.
H. Underground Warning Tape: Thomas and Betts or approved equal. Six-inch wide plastic
tape, colored red or orange with suitable warning legend describing buried
communications lines. All underground conduits shall be so identified. Tape shall be
buried at a depth of 6-inches below grade and directly above conduits or ductbanks.
Provide magnetic marking tape below all underground conduits.
3.06 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. General: Comply with the requirements of Division 01 for the cutting and patching of
other work to accommodate the installation of electrical work. Except as authorized by
the Architect/Engineer, cutting and patching of electrical work to accommodate the
installation of other work is not permitted.
COMMUNICATIONS GENERAL PROVISIONS
VLK Architects 2008 2790500 - 13 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
3.07 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL
A. Prior to substantial completion, conduct an on -site training program to instruct Owner's
operating personnel in the operation and maintenance of the communications systems.
1. Provide the training during regular working day.
2. The Instructors shall be experienced in their phase of operation and maintenance
of the electrical systems and with the project.
B. Time to be allocated for instructions.
1. Minimum of 3 hours dedicated instructor time
2. 1 hour on each of 3 days
3. Additional instruction time for specific systems as specified in other Sections.
C. Before on -site training, submit the program syllabus; proposed time and dates; for review
and approval, minimum 48 hours prior to proposed training time and date.
1. One copy to the Owner
2. One copy to the Architect/Engineer
D. The Owner shall provide a list of personnel to receive instructions, and shall coordinate
their attendance at the agreed upon times.
E. Use operation and maintenance manuals as the basis of instruction. Review manual with
personnel in detail. Explain all aspects of operation and maintenance.
F. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble -shooting, servicing,
maintenance, and shut down of each item of equipment.
G. Demonstrate equipment functions (both individually and as part of the total integrated
system).
H. Prepare and insert additional data in the operating and maintenance manuals when the
need for additional data becomes apparent during instructions.
I. Submit a report within one week after completion of training. List time and date of each
demonstration, hours devoted to the demonstration, and a list of people present, with
their respective signatures.
J. At the conclusion of the on -site training program, have the person designated by the
Owner sign a certificate to certify that he/she has a proper understanding of the system,
that the demonstrations and instructions have been satisfactorily completed, and the
scope and content of the operating and maintenance manuals used for the training
program are satisfactory.
K. Provide a copy of the report and the certificate in an appropriately tabbed section of each
Operating and Maintenance Manual.
3.08 OPENINGS
A. Framed, cast or masonry openings for boxes, equipment or conduits are specified under
other divisions. Drawings and layout work for exact size and location of all openings are
included under this division.
3.09 OBSTRUCTIONS
COMMUNICATIONS GENERAL PROVISIONS
VLK Architects 2008 2790500 - 14 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
A. The drawings indicate certain information pertaining to surface and subsurface
obstructions, which has been taken from available drawings. Such information is not
guaranteed, however, as to accuracy of location or complete information.
1. Before any cutting or trenching operations are begun, verify with Owner's
representative, utility companies, municipalities, and other interested parties that
all available information has been provided.
2. Should obstruction be encountered, whether shown or not, alter routing of new
work, reroute existing lines, remove obstruction where permitted, or otherwise
perform whatever work is necessary to satisfy the purpose of the new work and
leave existing services and structures in a satisfactory and serviceable condition.
B. Assume total responsibility for and repair any damage to existing utilities or construction,
whether or not such existing facilities are shown.
3.10 VANDAL RESISTANT DEVICES
A. Where vandal resistant screws or bolts are employed on the project, deliver to the Owner
2 suitable tools for use with each type of fastener used.
B. Proof of delivery of these items to the Owner shall be included in the Operating and
Maintenance Manuals.
3.11 PROTECTION
A. Protect work, equipment, fixtures, and materials. At work completion, work must be clean
and in original manufacturer's condition.
B. Do not deliver equipment to this project site until progress of construction has reached
the stage where equipment is actually needed or until building is closed in enough to
protect the equipment from weather. Equipment allowed to stand in the weather shall be
rejected, and the contractor is obligated to furnish new equipment of a like kind at no
additional cost to the Owner.
3.12 EQUIPMENT BACKBOARDS
A. Backboards: 3/4 inch, fire retardant, exterior grade plywood, painted gray, both sides.
1. Provide minimum of two 4-ft. by 8-ft. sheets of plywood for each location shown.
2. Provide minimum of two 44 by 44 sheets of plywood for each communications
location.
3.13 SITE MANAGEMENT RESPONSIBILITY:
A. The Contractor shall provide an on -site Project Manager as defined in SUPERVISION OF
WORK portion of this Section.
3.14 START-UP RESPONSIBILITY:
A. The Contractor shall initiate System operation. The Contractor shall provide competent
Start -Up personnel on each consecutive working day until all Communications Systems
are functional and ready to start the acceptance test phase. If the Contractor, in the
Owner/Architect's judgment, is not demonstrating progress in solving any technical
problems, the Contractor shall supply Manufacturer's factory technical representation and
diagnostic equipment at no cost to the Owner, until resolution of those defined problems.
Where appropriate, the Contractor shall bring the Systems on-line in their basic state
(i.e., alarm reporting, facility code access control, etc.) It is the responsibility of the Owner
COMMUNICATIONS GENERAL PROVISIONS
VLK Architects 2008 2790500 - 15 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
to provide the specific database information that will be utilized for initial system
programming.
B. Properly ground each piece of electronic equipment prior to applying power. Properly
ground all shielded wire shields to the appropriate earth ground at the hub end only, not
at the remote or device end.
C. Use a start-up sequence that incrementally brings each portion of the system on-line in a
logical order that incorporates checking individual elements before proceeding to
subsequent elements until the entire system is operational. The basic steps should
include:
1. Establish ground planes at the equipment rooms and hub end of the systems as
specified in Division 26.
2. Disconnect power, connect the first device, reconnect power, and verify
operational correctness. Repeat until the entire system is verified and
operational.
3.15 PREPARATION FOR ACCEPTANCE (SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION):
A. All systems, equipment, and devices shall be in full and proper adjustment and operation,
and properly labeled and identified.
B. All materials shall be neat, clean and unmarred, and parts securely attached.
C. All extra material as specified shall be delivered and stored at the premises as directed.
D. Test reports of each system and each system's components and As -Built Project
Drawings shall be complete and available for inspection and delivery as directed by the
Owner.
3.16 SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE REQUIREMENTS:
A. Before final acceptance or work, the Contractor shall perform and/or deliver each of the
following in the order stated.
B. The Contractor shall deliver three (3) composite "System Operations and Maintenance"
manuals in three-ring binders, sized to hold the material below, plus 50% excess. Each
manual shall contain in appropriately tabbed sections:
1. A statement of Guarantee including date of termination and the name and phone
number of the persons to be called in the event of equipment failure.
2. A set of Operating procedures for the overall System that includes all required
Owner activities, and that allows for the Owner operation of all attributes and
facilities of the System.
3. A section for each specific type of equipment containing the vendor manuals,
instruction sheets, and any related literature that cam in the original shipping
container for that piece of equipment. Include all warranty cards.
C. Testing:
1. The Contractor shall perform all tests required by Division 26 and those
submitted as part of this Section.
2. The Contractor shall activate all devices for proper system operation, including
supervisory and trouble circuit tests. Similarly, audible alarms will not be
activated except on a one-time, coordinated basis, to check the actual sounding
devices.
3. A test report for each piece of equipment shall be prepared by the Contractor and
submitted to the Owner. This report shall include a complete listing of every
device, the date it was tested, by whom and the results. The final test reports
COMMUNICATIONS GENERAL PROVISIONS
VLK Architects 2008 2790500 - 16 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
shall indicate that every device tested successfully. Failure to completely test and
document the tests will result in a delay of final testing and acceptance.
D. As -Built Drawings:
1. After completion of all the tests listed above, and prior to the final acceptance
test, The Contractor shall submit the complete As -Built drawings as identified in
PART 1 — PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS.
2. The final As -Built Drawings shall consist on one set of reproducible prints, two (2)
sets of Point -to -Point Detail Drawings, Equipment Schedules, and the complete
detailed technical data that was shipped by the manufacturer with all installed
equipment.
E. Final Acceptance Test: The Final Acceptance Test shall demonstrate the installed and
activated System's performance and compliance with System Specifications. However,
before this testing can begin the following must have received and reviewed by the
Owner.
1. System Operations and Maintenance Manuals
2. System Test Reports
3. As -Built Drawings
3.17 NOTICE OF COMPLETION
A. When the Final System Acceptance Requirements described above including the Final
Acceptance Test described above have been satisfactorily completed. The
Owner/Architect shall issue a Letter of Completion to the Contractor indicating the date of
such completion. The Notice of Completion shall be recorded by the Contractor upon
receipt of the Owner/Architect completion letter. This date of record shall be the start of
the warranty period.
END OF SECTION
COMMUNICATIONS GENERAL PROVISIONS
VLK Architects 2008 2790500 - 17 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 27 0501
TELECOMMUNICATIONS, CATV, VOICE, DATA, VIDEO UTILITY COORDINATION
AND SERVICE ENTRANCE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. General: Provide infrastructure, conduit, ductbanks and pathways from public street right-
of-way to building for telecommunications, CATV, voice, data, and video.
B. Utility Company Data: Obtain from utility company information and installation standards
for telecommunication, CATV, voice, data, video service installation.
C. Responsibilities: Determine what equipment and labor is provided by utility company and
what equipment and labor is required of this Contractor.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Utility Data: Ensure that utility company service data is accurate and verified.
2.02 UTILITY INFRASTRUCTURE
A. General: Division 26 shall make provisions for utilities as required by utility company,
including, but not limited to permanent or removable/lockable vehicular barriers,
grounding rods, grounding conductors, sleeves, conduits, concrete ductbanks, pull boxes
and manholes.
B. The utility company shall provide cabling and connections to the Owner's demarcation
point of service.
C. General: Division 26 shall provide telecommunication, CATV, voice, data, video
conductors beyond the utility company's point of demarcation as specified elsewhere in
Division 26.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Standards: The installation of the service entrance provisions shall comply with the
published standards and requirements of the utility company, the utility company's
specific construction requirements for this project, and with requirements of this Division.
B. Correction: Any failure to meet the standards and requirements shall be corrected to the
satisfaction of the utility company and Owner without any additional cost to the Owner.
C. Contractor shall provide all construction materials and labor that the utility company
determines to be the responsibility of the customer, at no additional cost to the Owner.
D. The materials and labor required by the utility company that shall be provided by the
contractor includes, but is not limited to permanent or removable / lockable vehicular
barriers, grounding rods, grounding conductors, sleeves, concrete pads, concrete
reinforced ductbanks, conduits, racks and metering enclosures, pull boxes and
TELECOMMUNICATIONS, CATV, VOICE, DATA, VIDEO UTILITY COORDINATION
AND SERVCE ENT37.03
VLK Architects, 2008 27 0501 - 1 2736.00
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
manholes.
E. Utility pole and utility conduits and/or ductbank locations shall be staked and surveyed
prior to utility installations by the Contractor to verify their proper placement is within the
Owner's property and respective utility easements. Contractor shall verify by survey that
the pole, conduit and ductbank location and easements do not interfere with existing
easements, right-of-ways, or other restricted properties. Conflicts with existing easements
and restrictions shall be brought to the attention of the Architect prior to construction.
F. Contractor shall initiate contact with the utility provider (retail seller), utility transmission
and distribution, and Owner within 14 days of Notice to Proceed to ensure all utilities will
be available to the site. Any delays resulting from lack of this coordination shall be the
responsibility of the Contractor.
END OF SECTION
TELECOMMUNICATIONS, CATV, VOICE, DATA, VIDEO UTILITY COORDINATION
AND SERVCE ENT37.03
VLK Architects, 2008 27 0501 - 2 2736.00
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 27 0507
COMMUNICATIONS SHOP DRAWINGS, COORDINATION DRAWINGS & PRODUCT DATA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Prepare submittals as required by Division 01 and as outlined below.
B. Submit product data shop drawings only for the following and for items specifically requested
elsewhere in the Contract Drawings and Specifications. Architect/Engineer reserves the right
to refuse shop drawings not requested for review and to imply that materials shall be
provided as specified without exception.
C. The term submittal, as used herein, refers to all:
1. Shop Drawings
2. Coordination Drawings
3. Product data
D. Submittals shall be prepared and produced for:
1. Distribution as specified
2. Inclusion in the Operating and Maintenance Manual, as specified, in the related
section
1.02 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Present drawings in a clear and thorough manner. Identify details by reference to sheet and
detail, schedule, or room numbers shown on Contract Drawings.
B. Show all dimensions of each item of equipment on a single composite Shop Drawing. Do not
submit a series of drawings of components.
C. Identify field dimensions; show relation to adjacent or critical features or work or products.
1.03 COORDINATION DRAWINGS
A. Present in a clear and thorough manner. Title each drawing with project name. Identify each
element of drawings by reference to sheet number and detail, or room number of contract
documents. Minimum drawing scale: 1/4"=V-0".
B. Prepare coordination drawings to coordinate installations for efficient use of available space,
for proper sequence of installation and to resolve conflicts. Coordinate with work specified in
other sections and other divisions of the specifications.
C. For each room containing technology equipment and each rack with technology equipment,
submit plan and elevation drawings. Show:
1. Actual technology equipment and components to be furnished.
2. NEC working space and NEC access to NEC working space.
3. Relationship to other equipment and components and openings, doors and
obstructions
4. Rack location and dimensions
D. Identify field dimensions. Show relation to adjacent or critical features of work or products.
E. Verify location of communications station devices, telephone outlets and other work specified
COMMUNICATIONS SHOP DRAWINGS, COORDINATION DRAWINGS & PRODUCT DATA
VLK Architects 2008 2790507 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
in this Division.
1. Coordinate with drawing details, site conditions and millwork shop drawings prior to
installation.
2. Where required for clarification, submit shop drawings prior to rough -in and
fabrication.
F. Submit shop drawings in plan, elevation and sections, showing outlets and other devices in
casework, cabinetwork and built-in furniture.
1.04 PRODUCT DATA
A. All product options specified shall be indicated on the product data submittal. All options
listed on the standard product printed data not clearly identified as not part of the product
data submitted shall become part of the Contract and shall be provided.
B. Mark each copy of standard printed data to identify pertinent products, referenced to
specification section and article number.
C. Show reference standards, performance characteristics and capacities; wiring and piping
diagrams and controls; component parts; finishes; dimensions and required clearances.
D. Modify manufacturer's standard schematic drawings and diagrams to supplement standard
information and to provide information specifically applicable to the work. Delete information
not applicable.
E. Mark up a copy of the specifications for the product to indicate a) acknowledgement of the
specification requirement (Comply), or b) acknowledgement that the particular specification
requirement does not apply to this specific project (Not Applicable) or, c) acknowledgement
that the specification requirement cannot be made or that a variance is being submitted for
review to the Architect/Engineer/Owner (Does Not Comply, Explanation:)
1.05 MANUFACTURERS INSTRUCTIONS
A. Submit Manufacturer's instructions for storage, preparation, assembly, installation, start-up
and adjusting.
1.06 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Review submittals prior to transmittal.
B. Determine and verify:
1. Field measurements
2. Field construction criteria
3. Manufacturer's catalog numbers
4. Conformance with requirements of Contract Documents
C. Coordinate submittals with requirements of the work and of the Contract Documents.
D. Notify the Architect/Engineer in writing at time of submission of any deviations in the
submittals from requirements of the Contract Documents.
E. Do not fabricate products, or begin work for which submittals are specified, until such
submittals have been produced and bear contractor's stamp. Do not fabricate products or
begin work scheduled to have submittals reviewed until return of reviewed submittals with
Architect/Engineer's acceptance.
COMMUNICATIONS SHOP DRAWINGS, COORDINATION DRAWINGS & PRODUCT DATA
VLK Architects 2008 2790507 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
F. Contractor's responsibility for errors and omissions in submittals is not relieved whether
Architect/Engineer reviews submittals or not.
G. Contractor's responsibility for deviations in submittals from requirements of Contract
Documents is not relieved whether Architect/Engineer reviews submittals or not, unless
Architect/engineer gives written acceptance of the specific deviations on reviewed
documents.
H. Submittals shall show sufficient data to indicate complete compliance with Contract
Documents:
1. Proper sizes and capacities
2. That the item will fit in the available space in a manner that will allow proper service
3. Construction methods, materials and finishes
Schedule submissions at least 15 days before date reviewed submittals will be needed.
1.07 SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS
A. Make submittals promptly in accordance with approved schedule, and in such sequence as
to cause no delay in the Project or in the work of any other Contractor.
B. Number of submittals required:
1. Shop Drawings and Coordination Drawings: Submit four opaque reproductions.
2. Product Data: Submit the number of copies the contractor requires, plus those to be
retained by the Architect/Engineer.
C. Accompany submittals with transmittal letter, in duplicate, containing:
1. Date
2. Project title and number
3. Contractor's name, address and telephone number
4. The number of each Shop Drawing, Project Datum and Sample submitted
5. Other pertinent data
D. Submittals shall include:
1. The date of submission
2. The project title and number
3. Contract Identification
4. The names of:
a. Contractor
b. Subcontractor
C. Supplier
d. Manufacturer
5. Identification of the product
6. Field dimensions, clearly identified as such
7. Relation to adjacent or critical features of the work or materials
8. Applicable standards, such as ASTM or federal specifications numbers
9. Identification of deviations from contract documents
10. Suitable blank space for General Contractor and Architect/Engineer stamps
11. Contractor's signed and dated Stamp of Approval
E. Coordinate submittals into logical groupings to facilitate interrelation of the several items.
1. Finishes which involve Architect/Engineer selection of colors, textures or patterns
2. Associated items requiring correlation for efficient function or for installation
COMMUNICATIONS SHOP DRAWINGS, COORDINATION DRAWINGS & PRODUCT DATA
VLK Architects 2008 2790507 - 3 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
1.08 SUBMITTAL SPECIFICATION INFORMATION
A. Every submittal document shall bear the following information as used in the project manual:
1. The related specification section number
2. The exact specification section title
B. Submittals delivered to the Architect/Engineer without the specified information will not be
processed. The Contractor shall bear the risk of all delays, as if no submittal had been
delivered.
1.09 RESUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS
A. Make resubmittals under procedures specified for initial submittals.
1. Indicate that the document or sample is a resubmittal
2. Identify changes made since previous submittals
B. Indicate any changes which have been made other than those requested by the
Architect/Engineer.
1.10 CONTRACTOR'S STAMP OF APPROVAL
A. Contractor shall stamp and sign each document certifying to the review of products, field
measurements and field construction criteria, and coordination of the information within the
submittal with requirements of the work and of Contract Documents.
B. Contractor's stamp of approval on any submittal shall constitute a representation to Owner
and Architect/Engineer that Contractor has either determined and verified all quantities,
dimensions, field construction criteria, materials, catalog numbers, and similar data or
assumes full responsibility for doing so, and that Contractor has reviewed or coordinated
each submittal with the requirements of the work and the Contract Documents.
C. Do not deliver any submittals to the Architect/Engineer that do not bear the Contractor's
stamp of approval and signature.
D. Submittals delivered to the Architect/Engineer without Contractor's stamp of approval and
signature will not be processed. The Contractor shall bear the risk of all delays, as if no
submittal had been delivered.
1.11 ARCHITECT/ENGINEER REVIEW OF IDENTIFIED SUBMITTALS
A. The Architect/Engineer will:
1. Review identified submittals with reasonable promptness and in accordance with
schedule. Specific equipment submittals that may be required to be expedited shall
be submitted separately without other submittal items not requiring the same prompt
attention.
2. Affix stamp and initials or signature, and indicate requirements for resubmittal or
approval of submittal
3. Return submittals to Contractor for distribution or for resubmission
B. Review of submittals will not extend to design data reflected in submittals that is peculiarly
within the special expertise of the Contractor or any parry dealing directly with the Contractor.
C. Architect/Engineer's review is only for conformance with the design concept of the project
and for compliance with the information given in the contract.
1. The review shall not extend to means, methods, sequences, techniques or
COMMUNICATIONS SHOP DRAWINGS, COORDINATION DRAWINGS & PRODUCT DATA
VLK Architects 2008 2790507 - 4 2737.03
CATE Renovations
Ai£M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
procedures of construction or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto.
2. The review shall not extend to review of quantities, dimensions, weights or gauges,
fabrication processes or coordination with the work of other trades.
D. The review and approval of a separate item as such will not indicate approval of the
assembly in which the item functions.
1.12 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Do not make requests for substitution employing the procedures of this Section.
B. The procedure for making a formal request for substitution is specified in Division 1.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA
A. Submittals shall not be combined or bound together with any other material submittal.
B. Submit individually bound shop drawings and product data for the following when specified or
provided:
1. Structural Cabling
3.02 COORDINATION DRAWINGS
A. Submit coordination drawings as specified.
END OF SECTION
COMMUNICATIONS SHOP DRAWINGS, COORDINATION DRAWINGS & PRODUCT DATA
VLK Architects 2008 2790507 - 5 2737.03
SECTION 27 0509
CONTRACT QUALITY CONTROL
PART 1 -GENERAL.
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
A. Contract quality control including workmanship, manufacturer's instructions, mock-ups
and demonstrations.
1.02 QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAM
A. Maintain quality control over supervision, subcontractors, suppliers, manufacturers,
products, services, site conditions and workmanship to produce work in accordance with
contract documents.
1.03 WORKMANSHIP
A. Comply with industry standards except when more restrictive tolerances or specified
requirements indicate more rigid standards or more precise workmanship.
B. Perform work by persons qualified to produce workmanship of specified quality.
C. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to
withstand stresses, vibration, and racking. Under no conditions shall material or
equipment be suspended from structural bridging.
D. Provide finishes to match approved samples; all exposed finishes shall be approved by
the Architect / Engineer. Submit color samples as required.
1.04 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS
A. Comply with instructions in full detail, including each step in sequence.
B. Should instruction conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from
Architect/Engineer before proceeding.
1.05 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATES
A. When required in individual Specification Sections, submit manufacturer's certificate in
duplicate, certifying that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
1.06 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES
A. When required in individual Specification Sections, manufacturer shall provide a
manufacturer's qualified personnel to observe:
1. Field conditions.
2. Condition of installation.
3. Quality of workmanship.
4. Start-up of equipment.
5. Testing and adjusting of equipment.
B. Manufacturer's qualified personnel shall make written report of observations and
recommendations to Architect/Engineer.
CONTRACT QUALITY CONTROL
VLK Architects, 2009 27 0509 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 REFERENCE APPLICABLE SPECIFICATION SECTIONS.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 ADJUSTMENTS AND MODIFICATIONS
A. Contractor shall provide all adjustments and modifications as requested by the
manufacturer's qualified personnel at no additional cost to Owner.
END OF SECTION
CONTRACT QUALITY CONTROL
VLK Architects, 2009 27 0509 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 271300
DATA AND VOICE STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEM - LAN
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY OF WORK
A. Provide a complete and tested Category 6e structured cable system (SCS) for data and
analog voice interconnections (Local Area Network). The structured cable system shall
include fully terminated fiber optic or copper twisted pair cables, raceways, conduit, UTP
termination devices, data communications outlets, patch panels, patch cables, racks,
multi -media cabling connectors and cables, and other incidental and miscellaneous
premises wiring system hardware as required for a complete and usable system. The
installation shall comply with applicable codes and standards in effect at the job site and
as indicated in the Drawings and Specifications.
B. Provide MDF to IDF fiber optic cable interconnections. The fiber strands shall be
terminated and clearly marked on each IDF and MDF patch panel.
C. Provide and locate all IDFs as required for a complete system. Additional IDF locations
must be approved. Locate in Mechanical/Electrical type room. Contractor is responsible
for any additional power requirements.
D. Network electronics equipment shall be furnished by the Owner. The Contractor shall
coordinate with other system vendors, where appropriate, to facilitate equipment
installation, scheduling, protection of equipment and access to the project site in order to
provide the Owner a substantially complete project in a timely manner.
E. Provide media presentation connectivity where indicated, specified or required.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications:
1.
The Structured Cable System Installer shall be licensed and shall meet all
applicable regulations. The Contractor shall be a member of BICSI and a firm
normally employed in the low voltage and data cabling industry.
2.
The contractor shall be certified by the manufacturing company in all aspects of
design, installation and testing of the products described herein, and have a
minimum of five (5) years experience on similar SCS cabling systems.
3.
The contractor must be certified by the manufacturer of the adhere to
products,
the engineering, installation and testing procedures and utilize the authorized
manufacturer components and distribution channels in provisioning this Project.
4.
The contractor shall be experienced in all aspects of this work and shall be
required to demonstrate direct experience on recent systems of similar type and
size. The contractor shall own and maintain tools and equipment necessary for
successful installation and testing of optical and metallic premise distribution
systems and have personnel who are adequately trained in the use of such tools
and equipment.
5.
A resume of qualifications shall be submitted with the Contractor's proposal
indicating the following:
a. A list of five recently completed projects of similar type and size with
contact names and telephone numbers for each.
b. A list of test equipment proposed for use in verifying the installed integrity
of metallic and fiber optic cable systems on this project.
C. A technical resume of experience for the contractor's Project Manager
and on -site installation supervisor who shall be assigned to this project.
d. A list of technical product training attended by the contractor's personnel
DATA AND VOICE STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEM - LAN
VLK Architects, 2009
27 1300 -1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
that shall install the SCS system shall be submitted.
e. Any subcontractor who shall assist the SCS contractor in performance of
this work shall have the same training and certification as the SCS
contractor.
6. The Proposer without use of sub -contractors shall install the entire Data Cable
system. The contractor shall employ full time local technicians and installers. The
manufacturer shall maintain a full time factory certified employed service staff for
product support and service.
B. The Contractor shall attend a mandatory pre -construction meeting with individuals
deemed necessary by the Owner's representative prior to the start of the work.
1. T568A and T568B are the two wiring standards for an 8-position modular
connector, permitted under the TIA-568-A wiring standards document. Provide
T568A unless directed otherwise by the Owner / Architect. Coordinate with owner
correct color pair termination prior to final terminations.
2. Items requested by the Owner/Architect to finalize rack equipment configuration,
rack cable management, rack cable terminations and other miscellaneous minor
changes shall become part of the Contract Documents as supplementary
information.
C. The products specified in Part 2 of this Specification shall be supplied by a single
manufacturer, with the exception of 1) data racks and other hardware that is not defined
as part of the channel test configuration by TIA/EIA TSB67, Transmission Performance
Specifications for Field Testing of unshielded Twisted -Pair Cabling Systems; 2) Outside
plant (OSP) copper cable. Manufacturer shall have a minimum of seven (7) years
experience and shall be ISO 9001 Certified.
D. The Owner's representative reserves the right to reject all or a portion of the work
performed, either on technical or aesthetic grounds.
E. Warranty
1. The selected system installer shall be factory certified by the system component
manufacturer, and shall provide an end -to -end performance warranty of not less
than Twenty (20) years. The proposer shall provide certification documentation.
The performance warranty shall be issued by the manufacturer and shall warrant
that all cable links have been tested end -to -end using a Level 4 tester, per TSB-
67, and that all test results conform to the most current TIA/EIA-568-A and/or
TSB-67 Link values.
2. The warranty shall also cover multimode fiber optic cabling. Performance testing
shall be conducted in accordance with ANSI/EIA/TIA-526-14 Standard, Method B.
3. The warranty shall stipulate that all products used in this installation meet the
prescribed mechanical and transmission specifications for such products as
described in ISO/IEC 11801, ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-A, or EN 50173. Quality and
workmanship evaluation shall be solely by the Owner / Architect / Engineer and
designated representatives.
1.03 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Standards: All work shall be performed in accordance with the latest revisions of the
following standards and codes:
1. Local Building Code
2. Local Electrical Code
3. NEC National Electrical Code
B. Other references:
1. TIA/EIA-568-3 - Commercial Building Telecommunications Wiring Standard
2. EIA/TIA-569 - Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways
DATA AND VOICE STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEM - LAN
VLK Architects, 2009 27 1300 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
and Spaces.
3. TIAIEIA-606-A - The Administration Standard for the Telecommunications
Infrastructure of Commercial Buildings
4. TIAIEIA-607 - Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for
Telecommunications
5. EIA/TIA 455-A - Standard Test Procedure for Fiber Optic Fibers, Cables,
Transducers, Sensors, Connecting and Terminating Devices and Other Fiber
Optic Components.
6. TIA/EIA TSB 67 - Transmission Performance Specification for Field Testing of
Unshielded Twisted -Pair Cabling Systems.
7. TIA/EIA TSB 72 - Centralized Optical Fiber Cabling Guidelines
8. ISO/IEC 11801 - Generic Cabling Standard
9. EN 50173 - Generic Cabling Standards for Customer Premises
10. ANSVEIA/TIA - Optical power Loss Measurements of Installed Multimode Fiber
526-14 Cable Plan
11. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE 802.xLAN)
C. Governing Codes and Conflicts: If the requirements of these specifications or the Project
Drawings exceed those of the governing codes, regulations, and manufacturer installation
requirements, then the requirements of these specifications and the drawings shall
govern. However, nothing in the drawings or specifications shall be construed to permit
work not conforming to all governing codes, regulations, and manufacturer installation
requirements.
1.04 ABBREVIATIONS
A. The following abbreviations are used in this document:
DC
Direct Current
IDF
Intermediate Distribution Frame
MDF
Main Distribution Frame
PBX
Private Branch Exchange
UTP
Unshielded Twisted Pair
SCS
Structured Cabling System
1.05 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Structured Wiring Systems
1.
Leviton Telcom.
2.
AMP Netconnect
3.
Hubbell
4.
Panduit
5.
Nordx
6.
Systimax
7.
Ortronics
8.
Siemon
9.
ADC
B. Support Systems
1. Caddy
2. Panduit - Vertical & Horizontal Enhanced WMP Series
3. Leviton - Versi-Duct
4. AMP Netconnect
5. ADC
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit the following items, for Owner review and approval, within twenty-
eight (28) days of Notice to Proceed:
DATA AND VOICE STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEM - LAN
VLK Architects, 2009 27 1300 - 3 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
1. Proposed circuit routing and circuit grouping plan prepared by a BICSI certified
RCDD (Registered Communications Distribution Designer). The RCDD
certification must have been granted on or before five years previous of proposal
due date.
2. Products: Provide standard manufacturer's cut sheets or other descriptive
information.
3. Testing: UTP cable test result forms, fiber optic cable test result forms and a list
of instrumentation to be used for systems testing.
4. Provide a line -by-line item specification review indicating compliance or deviation
with full description of deviation.
5. Samples: Complete manufacturer's product literature and samples of patch
panel, fiber terminations and station jacks with cover plate.
B. Documentation: Contractor shall provide documentation to include test results, and as -
built drawings. An example of test results as they will be presented should be included
with the shop drawings.
1. Fiber Test Results: hand written results are not acceptable. Copies of test results
are not acceptable. Results to be provided on disk and printed form.
2. Work Station Cable Results: The results of the workstation cable tests shall be
provided in the form of printouts from the test equipment.
C. Project Completion: As a condition for project acceptance, the Contractor shall submit the
following for review and approval:
1. Complete manufacturer's product literature for all products installed during the
course of the Project for Operation & Maintenance.
2. Inspection and Test Reports: During the course of the Project, the Contractor
shall maintain an adequate inspection system to insure that the materials
supplied and the work performed conforms to contract requirements. The
Contractor shall provide written documentation that indicates that materials
acceptance testing was conducted as specified. The Contractor shall also provide
documentation, which indicates that all cable termination testing was completed
and that all irregularities were corrected prior to job completion.
3. Operating and Maintenance Instructions for all devices within the system. These
instructions shall reflect any changes made during the course of construction, and
shall be provided to the Owner, for their use, in a three-ring binder labeled with
the project name and description. (4 copies)
4. As -built Drawings shall include fiber and copper backbone cable routes, data
outlet locations with correct labeling and MDFADF locations. The as -built
drawings shall be prepared using Auto Cad 2000 electronic format or later on CD.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Materials shall be as listed or shall be approved equivalent products of other
manufacturers meeting the intent and quality level of the TIA/EIA specifications.
B. Ratings: All products shall be new and brought to the job site in the original
manufacturer's packaging. Electrical components (including innerduct) shall bear the
Underwriter's Laboratories label. All communications cable shall bear flammability testing
ratings as follows:
CM Communications Cable
CMP Plenum Rated Communications Cable
CMR Riser -Rated Communications Cable
OSP Outside Plant Cable
C. Initial Cable Inspection: The Contractor shall inspect all cable prior to installation to verify
DATA AND VOICE STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEM - LAN
VLK Architects, 2009 27 1300 - 4 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
that it is identified properly on the reel identification label, that it is of the proper gauge,
containing the correct number of pairs, etc. Note any buckling of the jacket that would
indicate possible problems. Damaged cable or any other components failing to meet
specifications shall not be used in the installation.
D. Cable Lubricants specifically designed for installing communications cable may be used
to reduce pulling tension as necessary when pulling cable into conduit.
1. Approved Products
Twisted Pair Cable Lubricant: Dyna-Blue or American Polywater
Optical Fiber Cable Lubricant: Optic -tube or Ideal
E. Fire Wall Sealant: Any penetration through fire walls (including those in sleeves) shall be
resealed with an Underwriter Laboratories (UL) approved sealant.
1. Approved Products: Flameseal.
2.02 DATA CLOSET (MDF/IDF) TERMINATION HARDWARE
A. Equipment Racks. Provide and install equipment racks in locations required and indicated
on the attached Drawings. Racks shall be equipped as detailed and hereafter specified.
Racks shall be 19" x 84" floor -mount. Provide enclosed patch panels in areas accessible
by students and/or non -approved personnel.
B. Distribution Rack Grounding: Rack shall be grounded using stranded #6 AWG insulated
copper conductor. Provide all required bonding materials and hardware and bond to
building grounding electrode subsystem and at building electrical service entrance.
C. Fiber Optic Patch Panels: The enclosures used shall provide termination panels for SC
type connectors or as directed by Owner, and be of sufficient size and capacity to
terminate the fiber count of the inside or outside fiber optic cables. Patch panels must be
19" rack mountable. Provide all termination accessories, enclosures and test for a
complete fiber optic distribution system.
D. Patch Panels shall consist of face plates pre -assembled with communication port
housings and shall be 19" rack mountable. Workstation patch panels shall terminate all
workstation communications outlets. Furnish units that adhere to the performance
requirements TIA/EIA-568A standards.
1. 48 - Port
E. A Power Strip shall be installed vertically at the back of each data rack or horizontally at
the base of the rack.
F. Soft Cinch Velcro cable Management (IDF & MDF Rooms)
1. Velcro, lengths as required.
2. Blue color for data cables.
2.03 CABLE ROUTING/PATHWAY
A. Cable Tray - Ladder Racks: Metal cable tray shall be provided to affix to the top of all floor
mount racks. Cable tray shall be used to brace racks to walls and to route cable from
walls to racks in communications closets.
B. Cable Support System: Cable saddles, Bridle Rings shall be used to route all exposed
cables (cable not in conduit or cable tray) in open access environments as well as in
communications closets.
1. Flexible and non-metallic loop
2. Hold up to 5" diameter bundle of cable
3. Without sagging, bending or damaging cable
DATA AND VOICE STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEM - LAN
VLK Architects, 2009 271300 - 5 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
C. Cable Ties
1. Velcro, lengths as required.
2. Blue color for data cables.
3. Plenum rated ties in concealed locations.
D. Provide cable management panels as required for horizontal and vertical cable
management at all racks.
1. Slotted duct configuration for copper and fiber cabling systems.
2.04 STATION CABLE
A. The cable provided for all outlets shall be unshielded twisted pair, four -pair, 24 AWG solid
copper conductor, meeting the intent and quality level of the TIA/EIA-568-A Commercial
Building Wiring Standard. One (1) cable shall be installed for each port shown on the
Drawings. Plenum rated CMP
1. Outer jacket color.
a. Light Blue
2. Approved products:
a. Belden CDT
b. CommScope
C. Berk-Tek
d. Superior Essex
2.05 STATION HARDWARE
A. Flush mount jacks shall be high quality 8p 8c modular jacks with circuit board construction
and IDC style or 110-style wire, T568A or T568B terminations. Jacks shall meet EIA/TIA
TSB40 recommendations for connecting hardware.
1. Multimedia inserts shall be Decora style, color to match building standard wiring
device color.
2. Face plates shall match building standard wiring device faceplates manufacturer
for 8p 8c outlets at all locations. Refer to section 26 2773 for wiring device
faceplate specification. Verify color with ArchitecVOwner.
3. Blank insert covers shall be provided for unused workstation ports.
4. Submit samples for approval prior to purchase
5. Provide necessary accessories for floor -mounted boxes
6. Minimum four ports or as noted if greater
7. 8-conductor Connector
8. Wall mount phone faceplate, 8-conductor
2.06 FIBER OPTIC PRODUCTS
A. Multi -mode Fiber Optic Cable shall be UL listed type OFNP; 62.5/125 micron graded
index multi -mode fibers, each with a color -coded PVC buffer. Maximum attenuation shall
be 3.75 dB/km at 850 nm and 1.0 dB/km at 1300 nm. Minimum bandwidth shall be 160
MHZ/km at 850 nm and 500 MHZ/km at 1300 nm and contain no metallic elements. Fiber
optic cable outer jacket shall be orange. Cable routed outside, between buildings, etc.
shall be rated OSP (outside plant cable).
B. Single Mode Fiber Optic Cable shall be UL listed type OFNP, 9.0 micron and single mode
fibers, each with a color -coded PVC tight buffer. Maximum attenuation shall be 1.0 dB/km
at 1310 nm and 10 Gbe transmission distance greater than 10km at 1300 nm. Fiber optic
cable outer jacket shall be orange. Cable routed outside, between buildings, etc. shall be
rated OSP (outside plant cable).
C. Interlock armor fiber optic cables.
DATA AND VOICE STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEM - LAN
VLK Architects, 2009 27 1300 - 6 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
1.
Steel or Aluminum
2.
Riser -Rated or Plenum Rated
3.
Orange Plenum rated jacket
4.
Outer and inner jacket
5.
Orange Colored Armor
6.
Colored Jacket
D. Number of Fibers
1. Fiber between IDF & MDF.
a. 12
2. Single Mode Fiber between MDF & Outside Plant Locations.
a. 12
E. Fiber Optic Connectors shall be SC or ST type connectors.
1. Coordinate connector type with Owner
2.07 CABLING
A. All cabling used throughout this project shall comply with the requirements as outlined in
the National Electric code (NEC) Articles 725, 760, 770, and 800 and the appropriate local
codes. All copper cabling shall bear CMP (Plenum Rated), CM/CMR (Riser Rated), OSP
(Outside Plant Cable Rated) and/or appropriate markings for the environment in which
they are installed. All fiber optic cabling shall be OFNP (Plenum Rated), OFNR (Riser
Rated), OSP (Outside Plant Rated) and/or appropriate markings for the environment in
which they are installed.
2.08 VGA AND AUDIO HARDWARE
A. Audio cable shall be as specified for data cabling. VGA cabling shall be Category 6 STP
minimum or shielded pre -fabricated, molded connector cable.
B. Audio jacks shall be high quality RCA type modular jacks with circuit board construction
and IDC style or 110 style wire terminations.
1. Blank insert covers shall be provided for unused workstation ports.
2. Submit samples for approval prior to construction
3. Provide necessary accessories for floor -mounted boxes.
4. Minimum six ports or as noted if greater.
5. RCA jack(s) for audio shall be white in color. Jack shall be gold plated with red
stripe (right audio), black stripe (left audio).
2.09 LABELS
A. Durable laser printable cable labels.
1.
Designed to function in most desktop laser printers.
2.
Durable Polyester label stock.
3.
Self -Laminating wrap around design.
4.
Available in US letter sheet size of 8.5" x 11 ".
5.
Clear Polyester with White and Colored Print -on areas.
6.
Polyester rated for OF to 275F for indoor and outdoor applications.
7.
Patch Panel Port Identification.
8.
Face Plate and Port Labels.
9.
110 & NS6-110 Cross Connect Labels
10.
Rack and Cabinet Labels.
11.
Fiber Adapter Labels.
12.
Pre -Printed Port Labeling.
DATA AND VOICE STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEM - LAN
VLK Architects, 2009 27 1300 - 7 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. The system shall utilize a network of fiber optic, and unshielded twisted pair, riser, tie and
station cables. Cables and terminations shall be provided and located as shown and in
the quantities indicated on the drawings. Fiber cables shall terminate on Fiber Distribution
Centers (FDCs) and/or modular patch panels located in all demarcation and termination
points shown on the drawings or as required. All cables, and terminations, shall be
identified at all locations. All cables shall terminate in an alphanumeric sequence at all
termination locations. All copper cable terminations shall comply with, and be tested to
TIA/EIA 568A and TSB-67 standards. Available and unused pairs between the ER and
TC(s) shall terminate and shall be identified as spare at each location.
B. Provide one (2) - 25 pair cable run from existing true telephone company demarc to MDF
location in each building. These tie cables will be terminated on split-50 blocks and so
labeled. Punch blocks shall be wall mounted in demarc room and in MDF on plywood. All
voice lines shall use standard 25-pair color schemes.
C. Voice only (POT) cables shall be home runs, from outlet at final termination to IDF or
MDF, whichever is closest. Punch blocks shall be wall mounted in demarc room and in
MDF on plywood. Then TIE cables will be provided in order for 2 voice pairs per drop to
be cross connected simultaneously from each IDF to the MDF. This means:
1. If there are 50 voice drops going to IDF1, then there should be enough be cable
pairs terminated from that IDF1 to the MDF to fully patch 2 times (100) the
amount of the voice pairs through to MDF.
D. The termination pinout will be:
Pair 1
pin 1:
White Green
pin 2:
White Orange
Pair 2
pin 3:
Blue White
pin 4:
White Blue
Pair 3
pin 5:
Orange White
pin 6:
Green White
White Brown and Brown coiled inside gang box/outlet. (RJ11)
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Furnish and install complete with all accessories a Structured Cabling System (SCS). The
SCS shall serve as a vehicle for transport of data, video and telephony signals throughout
the network from designated demarcation points to outlets located at various desk,
workstation and other locations as indicated on the contract drawings and described
herein. Applications standards supported should include, but be not limited to, IEEE
802.3, 10Base5, 10BASE-T, IEEE 802.5, 4 Mbps, 16Mbps 328 ft. [100mj, and TP-PMD.
In addition, these links/channels shall be capable of supporting applications such as 100
Base-T and 52/155 Mbps ATM AND 77 Channel Analog Broadband Video to 550 Mhz.
Gigabit cable performance shall be capable of supporting applications including AES/EBU
Digital Audio, 270 Mbps Digital video, 622 Mbps 64-CAP ATM, 1000BASE-T Gigabit
Ethernet and 1.2 Gigabit ATM.
B. The cabling shall be installed per requirements of the manufacturer and the Project
DATA AND VOICE STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEM - LAN
VLK Architects, 2009 27 1300 - 8 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
Documents, utilizing material meeting all applicable TIA/EIA standards. The Contractor is
responsible for providing all incidental and/or miscellaneous hardware not explicitly
specified below as required for a complete and operational system.
C. Contractor shall not hang cabling on pipes or wiring looms. Provide and install separate J-
Hooks, cable saddles or cable trays to carry cable plant that is installed. Cable support
shall be secured to building structure.
D. Cable shall run parallel and perpendicular to building lines. Cable runs shall be free of
splices, kinks, excessive slack, and damage to the outer jacket. Changes in direction will
be made with smooth bends, not exceeding minimum bend radius.
E Cable shall not run in close proximity (6 inches perpendicular, 12 inches parallel) to power
conduits (and other electrical noise sources).
F. Cables shall be placed with sufficient bending radius so as not to kink, shear or damage
the cable jacket or to otherwise diminish the transmission capability of the wire inside.
G. Cables shall be of a different color than those used by the non-IP, telephone, video cables
or electrical cables in order to easily identify the data network wiring.
H. Cable and/or cable bundles shall not be attached to any electrical wiring or light fixtures,
nor will its vertical deflection allow it to come in contact with HVAC mechanical equipment,
electrical wiring, conduits, piping, or fluorescent light fixtures.
All data and VoIP cables shall be home runs from outlet at final termination to patch panel
at IDF (intermediate distribution frame) or home runs from outlet at final termination to
MDF.
Cable Termination:
1. Number of twists per foot shall be maintained all the way to cable termination
point.
2. Provide 1-meter service loop above ceiling for each drop.
K. All as -built documentation and test results are to be approved and stamped by a
Registered communications Distribution Designer (RCDD).
L. If there is no IDF or MDF within 90-meter cable limitations of drop, contractor shall be
responsible for additional IDF's as required for a complete system. Locate additional IDFs
in Mechanical/ Electrical Rooms or as directed by Owner. Provide additional 120 volt
power and receptacles as required for additional IDF locations, similar to those IDF's
indicated or specified elsewhere.
M. Between MDF and IDF(s) provide mufti -mode fiber cable using armored cable encasing
all fiber cable.
N. Fiber paths shall be routed separate from copper paths.
O. Cable Pathway:
1. In suspended ceiling and raised floor areas where duct, cable trays or conduit are
not available, the Contractor shall bundle, in bundles of 50 or less, station wiring
with cable ties snug, but not deforming the cable geometry. Cable bundles shall
be supported and attached to the building structure and framework at a maximum
of five (5) foot intervals. The Contractor shall adhere to the manufacturer's
requirements for bending radius and pulling tension of all cables.
2. Cables shall not be attached to lift out ceiling grid supports or laid directly on the
ceiling grid.
DATA AND VOICE STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEM - LAN
VLK Architects, 2009 27 1300 - 9 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
Cables shall not be attached to or supported by fire sprinkler heads or delivery
systems or any environmental sensor located in the ceiling air space.
P. Fire Wall Penetrations: the Contractor shall avoid penetration of fire rated walls and floors
wherever possible. Contractor shall also seal all floor, ceiling and wall penetrations in fire
or smoke barriers and in the wiring closet.
Q. Wall Penetrations: Where penetrations are necessary, they shall be sleeved with metallic
conduit and resealed with an Underwriter Laboratories (UL) approved sealant.
R. Allowable Cable Bend Radius and Pull Tension: In general, communications cable cannot
tolerate sharp bends or excessive pull tension during installation. Refer to the cable
manufacturer's allowable bend radius and pull tension data for the maximum allowable
limits.
S. After installation, exposed cable and other surfaces must be cleaned free of lubricant
residue.
T. Provide pull strings in all new conduits, including all conduits with cable installed as part of
this contract. Pull test is not to exceed 200 pounds.
U. Conduit sleeves shall be provided from outside IDF/MDF location to below ceiling area
above ladder rack inside IDF/MDF. Minimum conduit size for data cabling sleeves shall
be 4 inch.
V. Damage:
1. The Contractor shall replace or rework cable showing evidence of improper
handling including stretches, kinks, short radius bends, over -tightened bindings,
loosely twisted and over -twisted pairs at terminals and excessive cable sheath
has been removed.
2. The Contractor shall replace any damaged ceiling files that are broken during
cable installation. Ceiling files shall match existing or new as specified elsewhere.
W. All clean-up activity related to work performed shall be the responsibility of the Contractor
and must be completed daily before leaving the facility.
X. Cable Termination:
1. Cable shall be terminated using tools specified by the cable manufacturer.
2. Number of twists per foot shall be maintained all the way to cable termination
point.
Y. Mounting heights shall conform to the Local Building Code Accessibility Standards.
Mounting height shall match adjacent wiring devices unless noted otherwise.
Z. Double duplex receptacle(s) shall be installed at all IDF locations and circuited to the
nearest computer power panel board.
AA. No patch panel, cable, outlet or punch block shall be within 6 feet of transformers or 12
inches of fluorescent lights, light fixtures, A/C wiring, radio systems or any other RF
emitting device in ceilings or in/on walls.
BB. Conduit for cable shall be concealed inside walls for drops unless otherwise noted.
CC. All as -built documentation and test results are to be approved and stamped by a
Registered communications Distribution Designer (RCDD). Provide Auto Cad 2000 as
built drawings and electronic format test results.
DD. Provide owner with total count of ports used per IDF / MDF location.
DATA AND VOICE STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEM - LAN
VLK Architects, 2009 27 1300 - 10 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
EE. Emergency phone copper / Vo-IP
1. All 25-pair "tie -cables" (between telephone company demarc and network racks)
are to be terminated at a patch panel in the network rack.
2. Tie -cables should be terminated using 1-pair at each port; the 251' pair should be
doubled up on the last port (in a 24-port panel).
3. Emergency phone locations.
a. Locations as indicated.
b. Fire Alarm Panel
C. Building Management Control Panel.
d. Security System.
FF. Wireless Access Points: Provide orange outlets in patch panel for identification of wireless
access point cables. Install each outlet above ceiling in outlet box with terminal of same
design as station hardware except with orange outlets.
GG. VoIP: Provide green outlets in patch panels for identification of VoIP cables.
HH. PoE: Provide red outlets in patch panels for identification of miscellaneous PoE outlets.
II. Any data cabling installed in any conduit that is run underground in or under building slab
shall be sealed at each end with approved gel cable/conduit sealant.
JJ. All patch panels shall be provided with 25% spare capacity for future growth.
KK. Media interface: Provide outlets, connectors, cable, etc., as required for the intended
function of audio / visual presentation.
3.03 VOICE ONLY (POT) PREMISE WIRE COMPONENTS
A. Connecting Blocks:
1. Punch down blocks shall be assembled and mounted on backboards in locations
shown on the drawings and or as required. Each backboard rack / punch down
block shall be securely mounted to the wall on plywood. Blocks / backboards shall
be mounted such that the side rails are plumb. Blocks shall be grounded in
accordance with NEC requirements.
2. Wall mount cabinets will be securely mounted to vertical surfaces in accordance
with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Cabinets shall be
mounted such that the cabinet sides are plumb. The cabinet top will be mounted
7 feet from the finished floor. Cabinets shall be grounded in accordance with NEC
requirements.
3. Backboards shall be used to mount 66-type connecting blocks and for horizontal
jumper runs. Provide a different color for identification of functional areas in
cross -connected fields. Blue = station, Green tie -cable.
3.04 DOCUMENTATION
A. Labels: The Contractor shall label all outlets using permanent machine engraved labels
approved by the Owner. Label patch panels in the wiring closet to match those on
corresponding data outlets. The font shall be at least one -eighth inch (1/8") in height,
block. All labels shall correspond to as-builts and to final test reports.
B. Contractor shall ensure complete durable laser printable cable labels typed labeling of all
outlets and cables with numbers that correspond to locations on the punch down block.
Labeling system shall correspond to the Owner's labeling system. Verify with Owner.
Provide tags (black letters on white labels, plastic coated) on all cables and outlets.
DATA AND VOICE STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEM - LAN
VLK Architects, 2009 27 1300 - 11 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
C. Final system room designations shall be based on actual room number graphics. (Do not
use Architectural drawing room designations).
D. All cables shall be labeled at both ends and all terminations shall be stenciled with a typed
label for quick circuit identification. Labeling shall conform to TIA/EIA standard 606 and
include interconnect cable identification numbers.
E. A floor plan, clearly labeled with all outlet jack numbers, shall be included in the as -built
plans. Install additional copy of floor plan in each IDF & MDF.
3.05 EQUIPMENT RACK CONFIGURATION
A. Equipment Racks:
1. Floor Mounted Equipment racks shall be assembled and mounted in IDF/MDF
locations as required in locations indicated on the drawings. Each rack shall be
securely mounted to the floor and braced to the wall with cable tray in accordance
with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Racks shall be
mounted such that the side rails are plumb. Racks and cable tray shall be
grounded in accordance with NEC requirements. Rack shall be installed for future
expansion and with proper access behind after electronic equipment is installed.
2. Wall Mount Cabinets shall be securely mounted to vertical surfaces in
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Cabinets
shall be mounted such that the cabinet sides are plumb. The cabinet top shall be
mounted 7 feet from the finished floor. Cabinets shall be grounded in accordance
with NEC requirements.
3. Provide at least 50% of mounting space remaining after patch panel's installation
for later placement of hubs/routers etc in each rack.
a. Provide vertical patching of data cables, instead of horizontal patching;
this requires that each network rack be populated with no more than 50%
of patch panels, leaving 50% of the available rack space for customer
equipment
b. Upper 50% of each rack shall house cable patch panels
C. Lower 50% of each rack shall house Owner's equipment
4. Provide additional racks, 3 total, for Owner provided equipment in each MDF
location.
5. Provide coordination drawing with IDF/MDF equipment layout for approval prior to
installation.
B. Wire Management Components: Horizontal cable management panels shall be installed
directly above and below each patch panel. Vertical cable management panels shall be
installed on each side of the rack. In instances where more than one rack is installed in a
single location, vertical cable management shall be installed between the racks.
C. Cable Placement: Cable installation in the wiring closet must conform to the Project
Drawings. All cabling shall be routed so as to avoid interference with any other service or
system, operation, or maintenance location. Avoid crossing areas horizontally just above
or below any riser conduit. Lay and dress cables to allow other cables to enter the
conduit/dser without difficulty at a later time by maintaining a working distance from these
openings.
D. Cable shall be routed as closely as possible to the ceiling, floor or corners to ensure that
adequate wall or backboard space is available for current and future equipment. All cable
runs within the wiring closet shall be horizontal or vertical within the constraints of
minimum cable bending radii. Minimum bend radius shall be observed. Cables shall not
be tie -wrapped to electrical conduit or other equipment.
DATA AND VOICE STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEM - LAN
VLK Architects, 2009 27 1300 - 12 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
E. All incoming cables shall be routed on the cable tray and neatly dressed down to the
patch panels.
F. Provide rack and jack panel hardware as required for all data station wiring.
G. Backboard: Provide an equipment backboard at each MDF, IDF and telephone equipment
location. Backboard shall be 3/a" x 8' x 4' Grade A fire retardant plywood, with fire retardant
paint. Coordinate placement of all equipment with Owner.
3.06 STATION WIRING INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Cabling between wiring closet and workstation locations shall be made as
individual home runs. No intermediate punch down blocks or splices may be
installed or utilized between the wiring closet and the communications outlet at
the workstation location.
02. All cable must be handled with care during installation so as not to change
performance specifications. Factory twists of each individual pair must be
maintained up to the connections points at both ends of the cable. There shall
never be more than one and one-half inches of unsheathed UTP cable at either
the wiring closet or the workstation termination locations.
B. Exposed Cable: All cabling shall be installed inside walls or ceiling spaces whenever
possible. Exposed station cable shall only be run where indicated on the Drawings.
Additional exposed cable runs shall require Owner approval, and shall only be allowed
when no other options exist. Cabling shall be installed concealed at all times, except in
unfinished mechanical rooms or wiring closets where cable shall be installed exposed and
located to avoid conflicts with pass -through cabling, etc. Tie wraps shall be used to
provide a neat appearance. Provide Velcro straps to dress the cable.
C. Placement: All cabling and associated hardware shall be placed so as to make efficient
use of available space. All cabling and associated hardware shall be placed so as not to
impair the Owner's efficient use of their full capacity.
D. Cable Routes: All cabling placed in ceiling areas must be in conduit, cable tray, or
properly supported. Cable supports shall be permanently anchored to building structure or
substrates. Provide attachment hardware and anchors designed for the structure to which
attached and that are suitably sized to carry the weight of the cables to be supported.
Attaching cable to pipes or other mechanical items is not permitted. Cable shall be routed
so as to provide a minimum of 18" spacing from light fixtures, sources of heat, power
feeder conduits and EMI sources. Cabling shall not be attached to ceiling grid support
wires. Cable runs shall be parallel or perpendicular to building structure. Band multiple
cables together every 6 feet.
3.07 STATION CABLE
A. Provide station patch cable at each station. Cable shall be tested as part of the SCS.
Leave cable installed in station jack, neatly coiled and be wrapped. Provide one-third
quantities of each (one -meter, two -meter, and three -meter) station cable lengths.
Coordinate with Owner the locations for each length of station cable.
B. Provide VGA and left and right channel audio station cables for the video and audio wiring
devices indicated or required at each initiation and receiving station (one patch cable for
each wiring device).
1. Station cables shall be highly flexible factory molded cable assemblies. Contacts
shall be gold plated. Cable outer jacket shall be black.
2. For each pair of station cables, provide one 2-meter (receiving station) and one 3-
meter station cable (initiation station).
DATA AND VOICE STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEM - LAN
VLK Architects, 2009 27 1300 - 13 _ 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
3. Station cables shall be left connected in the jack, coiled, dressed and tie -wrapped
as directed by the Owner/Architect.
4. Provide patch cord as required.
3.08 PATCH CABLES
A. Patch Cables shall be provided by Contractor for each station outlet and each patch panel
jack (i.e. 2 cables per drop/tie cable). Patch cables shall be pinned per EIA 568B or A
standards (Verify with Owner / Architect) and shall be terminated with 8p8c non -keyed
plugs at both ends. Patch cords shall be a length suitable to neatly run from farthest two
jacks on patch panel and still provide slack to dress cable. Patch cables for outlets shall
be same in configuration except shall vary in length. Provide 25% of the total required at
nominal 5 feet, 50% of the total required at nominal 7 feet, 25% of the total required at
nominal 10 feet long to insure enough cables of correct distance to fit most
circumstances.
B. Patch cables shall be managed and dressed at patch panel to insure neat appearance.
C. Patch Cords
1. Outer jacket color.
a. Blue
3.09 STATION HARDWARE
A. Flush mount jacks shall be mounted in a faceplate with back box.
B. Placement: Where possible, the communications outlet shall be located so that its
centerline is 18" above floor level or 12" above permanent bench surfaces. Outlets shall
not be mounted on temporary, movable, or removable surfaces, doors, or access
hatches. Verify exact location with architectural elevation drawings, millwork and
furnishings.
C. 8p 8c Jack Pin Assignments:
1. Pin connections for data station cable outlets and patch panels shall match
EIA/TIA 568A modular jack wiring recommendation T568B unless directed
otherwise by Owner / Architect.
2. Pin connections at data jack patch panels shall match pin connections at outlets
(straight through wiring).
3.10 FIBER OPTIC CABLE INSTALLATION
A. Provide multi -mode fiber between MDF and IDFs.
B. Fiber optic cable rated underground shall be installed in conduit. Conduit shall contain
three inner ducts or provide multi -cell conduit unless specified otherwise.
C. Cable terminations shall be performed by manufacturer trained and certified technicians.
Terminations shall be made in a controlled environment. The Contractor may choose to
have the cables assembled off -site, although testing must be completed with the cable in
its final installed condition.
D. Warning Tags: At each location where fiber cable is exposed to human intrusion, it shall
be marked with warning tags. These tags shall be yellow or orange in color, and shall
contain the warning: "CAUTION FIBER OPTIC CABLE". The text shall be permanent,
black, block characters, and at least 3/16" high. A warning tag shall be permanently
affixed to each exposed cable or bundle of cables, at intervals of not less than five (5)
DATA AND VOICE STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEM - LAN
VLK Architects, 2009 27 1300 - 14 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
feet. Any section of exposed cable that is less than five (5) feet in length shall have at
least one warning tag affixed to it.
E. Fiber paths shall be separate from copper paths.
3.10 CABLE TESTING
A. Notification: The Owner/Architect/Engineer shall be notified one week prior to any testing
so that the testing may be witnessed.
B. Final Acceptance: Before requesting a final acceptance, the Contractor shall perform a
series of end -to -end installation performance tests. The Contractor shall submit for
approval a proposal describing the test procedures, test result forms and timetable for all
copper and fiber optic cabling.
C. Procedures: Trained personnel shall perform all testing. Acceptance of the test
procedures discussed below is predicated on the Contractor's use of the recommended
products and adherence to the inspection requirements and practices set forth.
Acceptance of the completed installation shall be evaluated in the context of each of
these factors.
D. Errors: When errors are found, the source of each error shall be determined, corrected
and the cable retested. All defective components shall be replaced and retested. Retest
results must be entered on the test results form. All corrections shall be made prior to
final acceptance test.
E. Twisted Pair Cable Testing
1. At a minimum, the Contractor shall test all station drop cable pairs from data
closet termination patch panel port to station insert. Products shall be tested for
compliance to ANSI/TIA/EIA 568A and ISO/IEC 11801 for a rated installation.
Test equipment used shall meet TIA/EIA TSB-67, Level 4 accuracy. Further, the
Contractor shall have a copy of TSB-67 in their possession and be familiar with its
contents. Testing shall be against either appropriate category standards or the
manufacturer's specifications whichever is more stringent and applicable.
2. Each wire/pair shall be tested at both ends for the following:
a. Wire map (pin to pin connectivity)
b. Length (in feet)
C. Attenuation
d. Near end cross talk (NEXT)
e. Power Sum
f. Structural Return Loss
g. Delay Skew
h. PSNEXT
i. ACR
j. PSACR
k. Equal Level Far End Crosstalk (ELFEXT)
I. PSELFEXT
M. Far End Crosstalk (FEXT)
n. Propagation Delay
3. Test equipment shall provide an electronic and printed record of these tests. Test
equipment calibration documentation shall be available for on -site inspection.
4. Test results of each four -pair UTP cable must be submitted with identification to
match labels on all patch panel ports and 8p8c jacks and must match as-builts
associated with that cable.
F. Fiber Optic Cable Testing
1. Testing device for OSP fiber optic cables shall be a high quality OTDR (Optical
Time -Domain Reflectometer) equipped with a printer. The printed data shall
DATA AND VOICE STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEM - LAN
VLK Architects, 2009 271300 -15 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
show, in addition to any summary information, the complete test trace and all
relevant scale settings. The OTDR must have the capability to take
measurements from bare fiber strands as well as ST or SC connector
terminations.
2. All fiber optic cable shall be tested on the reel before installation to ensure that it
meets the specifications outlined herein.
3. After installation, the Contractor shall test each intra-building fiber strand with a
power meter in accordance with EIA 455-171 Method D procedures (bi-directional
testing) at both 850 and 1300 nm. A form shall be completed for each cable
showing data recorded for each strand including length, total segment (end to
end) loss (dB) and connector losses (dB) at each end. In addition, the printed
data strip for each strand shall be attached to the form. Patch cables shall also be
tested.
4. Acceptable fiber optic cable and connector loss shall not exceed 1.5 dB. The
Contractor is responsible for obtaining minimum loss in fiber connections and
polishing per manufacturer specifications.
G. Acceptance of the Data Communications Cabling System shall be based on the results of
testing, functionality, and the receipt of documentation. With regard to testing, all fiber
segments and all workstation data cables must meet the criteria specified. With regard to
functionality, the contractor must demonstrate to the Owner that 100 Base-T data signals
can be successfully transmitted, bi-directionally, from the MDF and from some number of
individual data outlets. The number of outlet locations to be tested shall be determined by
the Owner.
3.11 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide data outlet to central plant area; coordinate final location with Building
Management Control System.
B. Provide data cable to the following locations. Coordinate final location.
1. Main Fire Alarm Panel.
2. Intrusion Alarm Panel.
3. CCTV Digital Video Recorder.
C. Provide data wiring from each cash register (POS System — Point of Sale) to nearest IDF
or MDF location. Provide wire and wiring methods approved by the Owner.
D. Provide data cable from master employee time clock to slave time clock as directed by
Owner.
3.12 INSPECTION
A. Conformance to the installation practices covered above is to be verified when completed.
In some cases, the Owner/Architect/Engineer may observe before acceptance.
3.13 STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION
A. Coordinate with Architect and Owner's Information Systems Department the required
SCS identification prior to construction. Exact nomenclature for identification shall be
submitted in writing to the Architect for review prior to final identification.
B. Cable Drop Label Nomenclature:
1. Each port shall be identified using the following convention:
2. IDF# - Floor# (only if IDF serves multiple floors) - Blade# - Port#
(Example: IDF101-61-P1)
3. Each port on the "front" or facing side of each patch panel shall be identified
using the following convention:
DATA AND VOICE STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEM - LAN
VLK Architects, 2009 27 1300 - 16 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
a. Room # (Graphic #); Label for wireless jack shall be of contrasting color
4. Each patch panel or "blade" shall be identified on the "front" or facing side using
the following convention:
a. MDF#-Blade# (Example: MDF# - B1)
b. IDF#-Blade# (Example: IDF# - 61)
5. In each rack, blade numbering should begin with blade #1 occupying the upper
left patch panel (as viewed from the "front" of the patch panels), extending down
vertically through each rack's complement of patch panels, and sequencing to the
upper patch panel in the next adjacent rack.
6. All data cable jackets should be labeled at both terminations:
a. Cable end at faceplate termination should be labeled to match faceplate
designation.
b. Cable end at IDF/patch panel termination should be labeled to match
back port designation on patch panel.
E. Label fiber on each IDF and MDF patch panel. Label in a manner that designates clearly
which IDF they are originating from and where they are going - i.e. From IDF# to Room
# or to MDF Room #
3.14 WARRANTY
A. A twenty (20) year Extended Product Warranty and Application Assurance for this wiring
system shall be provided as follows:
1. The Extended Product Warranty shall ensure against product defects, that all
approved cabling components exceed the specifications of TIA/EIA 568A and
ISO/IEC IS 11801, exceed the attenuation and NEXT requirements of TIA/EIA
TSB 67 and ISO/IEC IS 11801 for cabling links/channels, that the installation shall
exceed the loss and bandwidth requirements of TIA/EIA TSB 67 and ISO/IEC IS
11801 for fiber links/channels. The warranty shall apply to all passive SCS
components.
2. The Extended Product Warranty shall cover the replacement or repair of
defective product(s) and labor for the replacement or repair of such defective
product(s).
B. The Extended Warranty Application Assurance shall cover the failure of the wiring system
to support the application which it was designed to support by recognized standards or
user forums that use the ITA/EiA 568A or ISO/IEC IS 11801 component and link /
channel specifications for cabling, for a twenty (20) year period.
C. Upon successful completion of the installation and subsequent inspection, the customer
shall be provided with a numbered certificate, from the manufacturing company,
registering the installation.
END SECTION
DATA AND VOICE STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEM - LAN
VLK Architects, 2009 27 1300 - 17 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 27 4133
TWO WAY BROADBAND TELEVISION AND CATV DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The General Provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions, and Division O and Division 1, apply to the work specified in this Section.
B. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, test equipment and services
necessary for or incidental to the installation of a complete and operating television
broadband distribution system built to commercial standards. The system shall be as
shown or indicated on the drawings and/or as specified.
C. Equipment specified herein is designed to provide specific functional and operational
characteristics. It is the responsibility of the Television Broadband Distribution System
contractor to provide all features and functions as outlined in these specifications.
D. The Electrical Contractor shall provide all conduit systems, standard electrical boxes, and
operating power for the system as outlined on the project drawings. The Television
Broadband Distribution System contractor shall coordinate all system requirements with
and provide special back boxes to the Electrical Contractor prior to installation of conduit.
E. Testing, as described in Part 3, for all requirements shall be performed with all amplifiers,
cable runs, and wiring devices in place.
F. Provide all documentation and training as outlined in these specifications.
1.02 CODES AND REGULATIONS
A. NFPA 70, National Electrical Code.
B. FCC Rules, Part 76.
C. Americans with Disabilities Act.
D. Texas Accessibility Standards.
E. Local and State Building Codes.
F. All requirements of the local Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).
G. All applicable parts will be FCC Class B approved.
H. All equipment, cable, devices, and accessories provided shall be listed and labeled by
Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. for the intended use under the latest appropriate testing
standard.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Signal strength calculations for each run to determine balance and tap values.
2. Drawing location of all components and labeling of cable system; indicate value
for each tap.
TWO WAY BROADBAND TELEVISION AND CATV DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
VLK Architects, 2009 27 4133 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
3. Equipment list and data sheets on system devices, racks, special boxes, wire,
and other material as requested by the Architect, including manufacturer, model
number, indication of all options and accessories, and catalog data sheets with
photograph.
1.04 QUALIFICATIONS OF CONTRACTOR
A. The Contractor, as a business entity, shall be an authorized and designated
representative of the equipment manufacturer and shall have been actively engaged in
the business of selling, installing, and commercial building systems for a period of at least
five years.
B. The Contractor shall have an office within 150 miles of the job site, staffed with trained
technicians who are qualified and licensed to supervise the installation, to be responsible
that the system is installed as submitted, to conduct system start-up and perform a 100%
operational audit of all installed devices, to instruct the Owner's representatives in the
proper operation of the system, and to provide services throughout the warranty period.
C. The Contractor shall be fully experienced in the design and installation of the system
herein specified, and shall furnish with the proposal an itemized list of the installations of
the type specified herein. This list shall include the name of the project, date of
completion, the amount of the contract, the name, and telephone number of the person to
contact for reference. This list must contain at least two (2) projects within a 150- mile
radius of the school district to allow Architect/Owner's Representatives to visit the job site
for review of the system installation and service.
D. The Contractor shall employ full time local technicians and installers. The manufacturer
shall maintain a full time factory certified employed service staff for product support and
service.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Provide only materials that are new, of the type and quality specified.
B. All basic equipment for which there are Underwriters' Laboratories Standard
requirements shall be listed by UL and be so labeled, or shall conform to their
requirements, in which case, certified statements to the effect shall be furnished by the
manufacturer with a copy of an examination report by a recognized laboratory acceptable
to the Local Authority.
C. All basic equipment shall be new and shall be the latest product of a manufacturer of
established reputation and experience of quality electronic equipment. The manufacturer
shall have supplied similar apparatus to comparable installations rendering satisfactory
service for at least three (3) years.
D. System Description: Television broadband distribution equipment and cable plant
compatible with two-way signal transmission of local origination and cable television
signals. All channels in the 10-900 MHZ frequency range shall be supported. The system
shall be capable of distribution of the specified signal strength to each outlet shown on
plans. The system shall comply with all FCC rules and meet current FCC requirements
regarding radiation losses and shielding requirements. Media to be CATV application
coaxial cable of the types specified. Wiring to extend from a single connection (at the
amplifiers) in iDF rooms to each television signal outlet. Room drops to each wall plate
shall be in a star topology from each directional tap mounted in -line at main trunks inside
TWO WAY BROADBAND TELEVISION AND CATV DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
VLK Architects, 2009 27 4133 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
IDF rooms in an accessible location. Patch panel racks used for Cat5e cabling are not to
be used for this system. Contractor to provide a single point RG-11/U trunk line
connection in the head -end room at amplifier(s).
E. Band width of all passive devices shall be a minimum of 10 MHZ to 900 MHZ.
F. All wire shall be UL listed for CATV applications. Follow the manufacturer's instructions.
All wire exposed in attic spaces shall be plenum rated non -conduit per NEC.
G. All cable shall have labels on both ends utilizing self -laminating, flexible vinyl film and
non -smear nylon marking pens. Utilize Tyton Corporation Part No. R0175 Rite -On labels
and Part No. FTP1 nylon marking pens or equivalent.
H. Installation subject to approval, inspection, and test of the Architect/Engineer
2.02 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. All reference to manufacturers or suppliers model numbers and other pertinent
information herein are supplied to establish minimum standards of performance, function
and quality. The model numbers used are those of Blonder -Tongue Laboratories, Inc, Old
Bridge, New Jersey. The intent is to establish a standard of quality, function and features.
It is the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that the proposed product meets or
exceeds every standard of these products and requirements as set forth in these
specifications.
B. The functions and features specified are vital to the operation of this facility therefore
inclusion in the list of acceptable manufacturers does not release the Contractor from
strict compliance with the requirements of this specification.
C. The following are acceptable manufacturers any other proposed suppliers must be pre -
approved:
1. Blonder -Tongue
2. General Instrument/Jerrold Electronics
3. Pico Macom/Tru-spec
4. Scientific Atlanta
5. Wiremold Interlink
2.03 CABLE AND DEVICES
A. Plenum Long Distance RF Trunk Cable: Main trunk runs exceeding 300 feet shall be .500
semi -flex coaxial CAN trunk cable, NEC type CL2P, CMP, or CATVP, 15 AWG solid
copper clad aluminum center conductor at 1.32 OHM/M nominal D.C.R., solid 100%
aluminum shielded at .40 OHM/M' nominal D.C.R., 75 OHM Nominal impedance, with
nominal signal attenuation not to exceed 2.52 dB per 100 feet at 600 Hz. CommScope
No. 2312K or equivalent by Belden, Comtran, or Hitachi.
B. Plenum RF Trunk Cable: (Main trunk runs not exceeding 300 feet) Type RG-11/U coaxial
CATV cable, NEC type CL2P, CMP, or CATVP. 14 AWG solid bars copper center
conductor at 2.6 OHM/M' nominal D.C.R., double shielded, 100% aluminum polyester foil
coverage plus 65% (+/-5%) aluminum braid, 75OHM nominal impedance, with nominal
signal attenuation not to exceed 4.3 dB per 100 feet at 600 Hz. CommScope No. 2286K,
West Penn Wire No. 25821 or equivalent by Belden, Comtran, or Hitachi.
C. Plenum RF Room Drop Cable: Type RG-6/U coaxial CATV cable, NEC type CL2, CM, or
CAN, 18 AWG solid bare copper center conductor at 6.5 OHM/M' nominal D.C.R.,
TWO WAY BROADBAND TELEVISION AND CATV DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
VLK Architects, 2009 27 4133 - 3 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
double shielded, 100% aluminum polyester foil coverage plus 65% (+/-5%) aluminum
braid, 75OHM nominal impedance, with nominal signal attenuation not to exceed 5.6 dB
per 100 feet at 600 MHZ. Comm Scope No. 2278K, West Penn Wire No. 25841 or
equivalent by Belden, Comtran, or Hitachi.
D. Broadband Cable Connectors: Connectors for .500 aluminum trunk cable shall feature a
one piece body and separate center conductor pin, type F. connectors for RU-11/U cable
shall feature a one piece body and separate center conductor pin, Type F. Connectors for
RU-6/U cable shall feature a one piece body with attached crimp ring, Type F. all
connectors shall be stripped and crimped according to the manufacturer's
recommendations for the cable and fitting. Connections and fittings to be Blonder -Tongue
Model No. BR-500-BAFF for .500 aluminum trunk cable #BTF-110 Hex for RU-11/U
cable and Model #BTF-56 Hex for RG-6/U cable or equivalent.
E. Splitters: Provide, as required to route trunk cable, and as required at drops for RF input.
Splitters shall be Blonder -Tongue Model SUV-x or XRS-x series or equivalent providing
10 to 900 MHZ band width.
F. Directional Tap -offs: Provide as required (typically four drop or two drop units) directional
tap -offs in trunk cable with a tap for each room drop. Tap -offs shall be Blonder -Tongue
Model CRT-xA series or equivalent, tap values of 9 to 32 dB as required.
G. Provide Blonder -Tongue Model 4670 or equivalent 75 OHM terminators on all unused F
connections.
H. Wall Plates: Wiremold Intedink with audio/video inserts as required. Color shall match
building standard for wiring devices.
1. Provide a connection to system the same as a room tap for a system monitor television in
the distribution rack.
J. Provide Broadband Combiner / Amplifier for the system to combine and distribute the
signal to all areas. Amplifier shall be of push-pull, hybrid IC module design. Amplifier shall
be 19" rack mounted and designed in such a way to augment the dissipation of heat. Unit
shall have front access gain and slope control. Band width shall be 10 to 450 MHZ.
K. The Contractor shall select frequencies that are unused by local television transmitters or
any known or detected signal source that will interfere with proper signal transmission
and as directed by Owner / Architect. Provide for distribution of all program sources
simultaneously over separate standard TV Channels.
L. The system shall provide for an input from a remote local origination system (future) and
be capable of retransmitting the modulated sub -band signals over a designated standard
television channel.
M. HEAD END EQUIPMENT RACK: Furnish and Install one (1) complete head end
equipment rack located as indicated, confirm exact location with Owner prior to rough in.
Components shall consist of:
1. EIA standard 19" floor cabinet:
a. 77" high rack space
b. Rear door and lift-off side panels
C. Filler panels in front as required
d. Constructed of 16 gauge CRS throughout
e. Hinges shall be bolted and not welded for strength
f. Rear section shall be of one piece construction with electric welding at all
seams
TWO WAY BROADBAND TELEVISION AND CATV DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
VLK Architects, 2009 27 4133 - 4 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
g. Panel mounting rails shall be tapped for 10-32 screws
h. Overall dimensions shall be: 81.25 inches high, 22.313 inches wide, and
18.5 inches deep each
i. Equipment rack shall be an Atlas/Soundolier model #502-778-962 with
542-77B side panels or equivalent
j. Mount the broadband amplifier in the top of rack; all other equipment and
filler panels.
k. Finish to be Atlas/Soundolier Color #96 textured black backing enamel.
1. Provide a minimum of three modulators for owner inputs.
N. VIDEO TOWER: Furnish and Install one (1) complete video tower located as indicated,
confirm exact location with Owner prior to rough in. Provide manufacturer's replacement
part number if model numbers have changed or become obsolete. Components shall
consist of:
1. Two (2) Blonder -Tongue AP-60-550B Agile Processor, Part #59817
2. One (1) Blonder-TongueAP-OPT-17 Sub Band Input Option for AP-60-5506, Part
#59177
3. One (1) Blonder Tongue OC-12D Twelve Port Passive Combiner, Part #5953
4. Seven (7) Blonder -Tongue AM-60-550B Agile Audio/Video Modulators, Part
#59417
5. One (1) Blonder -Tongue DSV VHF Sub -Channel Diplexer, Part #4375
6. One (1) Blonder Tongue AB-4 Coaxial Two -Channel Switch, Part #4017
7. One (1) Middle Atlantic W MK-44SA-32WRK Series Floor Standing Equipment
Rack
8. One (1) Middle Atlantic 44-RR44 Additional Rail Kit
9. One (1) Middle Atlantic MW-VT Vented Rack Top Panel
10. One (1) Middle Atlantic SPN-44-312 Pair of Rack Side Panels
11. One (1) Middle Atlantic MW-VT Vented Rear Rack Door
12. One (1) Middle Atlantic CBS WRK-32 Caster Wheel Base (w/4 casters)
13. One (1) Middle Atlantic HP-500 10-32 M.S. Black Rack Screw Kit
14. Eight (8) U2 Two Rack Unit, Rack Shelf
15. Four (4) Middle Atlantic VT-1 One Rack Unit, Vent Panel
16. One (1) Middle Atlantic PDI 41 5C Rack Mt. Vertical A.C. Power Plug Strip, 14-
outlets
17. One (1) Toshiba 1 3A2513" Color TV
18. 1 Triplite "SMART3000RM2U Smart Uninterruptible Power Supply or Equivalent
O. CAMERA CART: Furnish and Install one (1) complete camera cart. Locate as directed
by Owner. Components shall consist of:
1. One (1) Wheelit 1110 Video Camera Adjustable Column
2. One (1) Wheelit 3126 Video Camera Micro Fluid Pan -Tilt Adjustable Head
3. One (1) Wheelit 518-6 6' Equipment Strap
4. One (1) Wheelit 550 Footman's Loop with Screw
5. One (1) DA-LITE PM2-42 Pixmate Adjustable Height 3-Shelf Cart
6. One (1) Blonder Tongue AM-60-550B Agile Audio/Video Modulator, Part #5941 7
7. One (1) Blonder -Tongue AM-OPT-04 Sub Band Output Option for AM-60-5508,
Part #5904
8. One (1) Blonder -Tongue DSV VHF Sub Channel Diplexer, Part #4375
9. One (1) SIMA SVS-14 4 IN X 1 Out Audio -Video Passive Switcher
10. One (1) Shure SCM268 4-Input MIC Mixer
11. Two (2) Shure SM-58s Dynamic Cardioid Handheld Microphone With On/Off
Switch
12. One (1) Sure SLX124/85/SM58-H5 Combo Wireless Microphone System
Includes:
1-SLX4 UHF Agile Diversity Receiver (1-15-Band, 518-542 MHz)
TWO WAY BROADBAND TELEVISION AND CATV DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
VLK Architects, 2009 27 4133 - 5 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
1-PS20 In -Line Power Supply
1 Rack Mount Hardware Kit
1-SLX-1-H5 Bodypack Transmitter
1-W L185 Cardioid Lavalier Condenser Mic.
1-SW-21SM58-H5 Handheld Mic & Transmitter
13. One (1) Atlas DS-7 Microphone Desk Stand
14. One (1) Atlas MS- 10C Microphone Floor Stand
15. One (1) Nady XC-6 6' Long, XLR Connector Microphone Cable
16. One (1) Nady XC-25 25' Long XLR Connector Microphone Cable
17. One (1) Middle Atlantic PD615C A.C. Power Plug Strip, 6-Outlets
18. One (1) Middle Atlantic RK-4 4-Rack Space Studio Rack
19. One (1) Toshiba 13A25 Color Video Monitor
20. One (1) Sony DCR-HC46 Mini DV Digital Camcorder
21. One (1) Sony MSX-M512S 512 Mb Memory Stick Pro Duo Media
P. Provide patch cord between wall outlet and TV / VCR with RG-6 cable.
2.04 SURGE AND AMPERAGE PROTECTION
A. Provide surge and amperage protection for any wiring that exits from one building and
where the wiring enters another. Each surge protector shall be bonded to the building
grounding system.
B. Surge protectors for television distribution cable shall be American Power Conversion
model P-CATV Surge Arrest RF protectors or equivalent. Note: Include signal attenuation
from these devices in signal strength calculations.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 CABLE INSTALLATION AND ATTACHMENTS
A. System wiring and equipment installation shall be in accordance with good engineering
practices as established by the EIA and the NEC. Wiring shall meet all state and local
electrical codes. All wiring shall test free from all grounds and shorts. All television signal
cable and devices shall be supported from the building structure and bundled. The
support system shall provide a protective pathway to eliminate stress that could damage
the cabling. The cable shall not be crushed, deformed, skinned, crimped, twisted, or
formed into tight radius bands that could compromise the integrity of the cabling.
Television signal cables shall not be run loose on ceiling grid or ceiling tiles. Support shall
be provided by appropriate fasteners that may be loaded with multiple cables. The
required support wires for the ceiling grid or light fixtures shall not be utilized. All cabling
and supports must be positioned at least 12 inches above the ceiling grid.
B. Television signal cables shall be run in bundles above accessible ceilings and supported
from building structure. Cabling shall be loosely bundled with wire wraps randomly
spaced at 30 to 48 inches on center; wire wraps shall not be tight enough to deform
cabling and shall not be used to support the ceiling.
C. Attachments for cabling support shall be spaced at 48 to 60 inches on center. The cable
bundle shall not be allowed to sag more than 12" mid -span between attachments.
Attachments shall be sized as follows:
1. Bundles up to W' dia. (Ten 1/a" cables) — 2" bridle ring, Caddy #4BRT32 or
equivalent.
2. Bundles up to 3/a" dia. (Sixteen 1/a" cables) - 3/a" J-Hook, Caddy #CAT12 or
equivalent.
3. Split bundles greater than 34" diameter or provide cable tray.
TWO WAY BROADBAND TELEVISION AND CATV DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
VLK Architects, 2009 27 4133 - 6 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
D. Do not mix different signal strength cables on the same J-Hook (i.e. fire alarm with
television signal cable). Multiple J-Hooks can be on the same attachment point up to the
rated weight of the attachment device.
E. Television signal cables shall be run in conduit stubs, where stubs are provided, from
wall -mounted devices to above accessible ceilings. Conduit shall be required only within
walls and concealed spaces to provide access. Provide a plastic snap bushing or sleeve
on the end of each conduit stub such as Thomas & Betts Catalog #443-3/4", 242-1 ", 425-
1-1/4", 4272" or equivalent.
F. Conduit shall be used for television signal cable in exposed areas.
G. All conduit and raceways shall be supported from the structure at industry standard
intervals for the size specified, utilizing proper anchoring devices and techniques for each
type of cable used.
H. All penetrations through fire rated walls or floors shall feature a short length of metal
conduit. The hole shall be neatly cut, not oversize or irregular. Seal the interior of the
conduit sleeve around the cables and around the outside of the sleeve on each side of
the penetration with fire -stop caulk or putty, such as Minnesota Mining & Mfg. Co. (3M) —
CP 25W V+ caulk, MPS-2+ putty, or equivalent. Install according to the manufacturer's
instructions.
All cabling and equipment shall be located and installed as follows:
1. All cable shall have a label on both ends utilizing self -laminating, flexible vinyl film
and non -smear nylon marking pens; Tyton Corporation Part #130175 Rite -On
labels and Part #FTP1 nylon marking pens or equivalent.
2. Each cable run shall include a 3' service loop with wire tie located in the ceiling
above the rack. This is to allow for future re -termination or repair.
3. Mount all equipment firmly in place. Route cable in a professional, neat and
orderly installation.
4. All cabling shall be placed with regard to the environment, EMI/RFI interference
and its effect on communication signal transmission.
5. Do not route any cable within 2' of any light fixture, HVAC unit, service access
area, electrical panel, or any device containing a motor or transformer.
6. Television signal cable shall not be installed in the same conduit with line voltage
electrical cable.
7. Maximum pulling tension should not exceed 25 lb/ft. or manufacturer's
recommendation, whichever is less.
8. Any pulling compounds utilized must be approved by the cable manufacturer and
shall not degrade the strength or electrical characteristics of the cable.
9. Cable bends shall not exceed the manufacturer's suggested bend radius.
10. Provide for adequate ventilation to all equipment and take precautions to prevent
electromagnetic or electrostatic hum.
J. Termination practices:
1. Strip back only as much cable jacket as required to terminate.
2. Preserve wire twists as closely as possible to point of termination (0.5"
maximum) to keep signal impairment to a minimum.
3. Avoid twisting cable during installation.
3.02 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE
A. All like materials shall be of one manufacturer; do not mix approved brands.
TWO WAY BROADBAND TELEVISION AND CATV DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
VLK Architects, 2009 27 4133 - 7 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
B. Use RG/11 cable for main trunk lines to connect all directional taps at IDF. Room outlet
drops to be RG/6 cable runs not to exceed 250 feet. Use bushings when exiting junction
boxes and at top of conduit stubs provided by Electrical Contractor.
C. All wiring will be placed with regard to the environment, EMI/RFI interferences and its
effect on operation.
D. The system designed for -46 dB cross -modulation or greater and a carrier to noise ratio
of at least 46 dB.
E. The system shall deliver a composite RF signal across a bandwidth of 10-900 MHZ at a
minimum +6dB to every outlet. All levels shall be across a characteristic 75 OHM
Impedance.
F. Isolation between any two outlets in the system shall be a minimum of 25 dB on any
frequency between 10 and 300 MHZ. Isolation between any two outlets shall exceed 20
dB over a total range of 5 Hz to 400 MHZ.
G. Equipment shall also be capable of providing two-way communication over a single
cable. System shall be compatible with video all -page and distance learning system
equipment. The system shall deliver a +10 dB composite RF signal at the head end
(backhaul) when a +38 dB signal is input at each outlet.
H. System radiation shall not exceed the following limits:
5 MHZ to 54 MHz 15 V/meter @ 100 ft.
54 MHZ to 216 MHz 20 V/meter @ 100 ft.
216 MHZ to 400 MHz 15 V/meter @ 100 ft.
All unused ports to be terminated with 75 ohm terminators.
3.03 TESTING, WARRANTY, SERVICE
A. All equipment will carry a one-year warranty or manufacturer's warranty whichever is
greater.
B. A qualified representative of the contractor shall supervise the final connections and
testing of the system and it shall be subject to the final acceptance of the
Architect/Engineer and Owner.
C. The System contractor shall make a thorough inspection of the complete installation to
ensure the following:
1. Complete and functional system.
2. Installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3. All wiring shall test free from all grounds, crosses and shorts.
4. Each signal outlet shall be tested at a frequency range of 50-900 MHZ. Testing
will require use of a signal generator at the head end and a Wavetek 1880 tester
or equivalent at the far end.
5. Testing for continuity and signal strength shall be performed and recorded for
each outlet. A representative of the owner shall be present for all testing. Testing
shall verify design and performance requirements as specified.
D. The contractor shall provide a warranty of the installed system against defects in material
or workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the date of acceptance. Any equipment
or wiring shown to be defective shall be replaced, repaired, or adjusted free of charge. All
TWO WAY BROADBAND TELEVISION AND CATV DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
VLK Architects, 2009 27 4133 - 8 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
labor and materials shall be provided at no expense to the Owner. All equipment will
carry a one-year warranty or manufacturer's warranty whichever is greater.
3.04 DRAWINGS, MANUALS, AND TRAINING
A. Upon completion of the installation and prior to final inspection, this Contractor shall
furnish five (5) copies of as -built drawings. Provide one vellum reproducible and four
prints. In addition, this Contractor shall furnish four (4) copies of a manual giving
complete instructions for the operation, inspection, testing and maintenance of the
system including wiring diagrams. Insert test results in manuals. Provide the Owner with
electronic versions of the as-builts on CDs.
B. All cables shall have both ends labeled and included in the as -built documentation.
C. All cable paths and wiring methodology shall be documented.
D. Formal on -site training sessions shall be conducted by this Contractor. Provide
documented general instruction as follows:
1. Provide instruction to the Owner's designated personnel to include the location,
inspection, maintenance, testing, and operation of all system components.
Provide a minimum of two (2) hours.
2. Provide instruction to the designated users on the operation of the system and
how to utilize the system to their best benefit. Provide a minimum of two (2)
hours.
END OF SECTION
TWO WAY BROADBAND TELEVISION AND CATV DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
VLK Architects, 2009 27 4133 - 9 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 27 5116
SOUND REINFORCEMENT SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install a complete local sound reinforcement system as required.
1. A complete system includes items such as wiring, microphones, speakers,
amplifiers, racks, and mounting shelves.
2. integrate all components to provide a complete and functioning system.
B. Locate equipment to accommodate millwork, fixtures, marker boards and other room
equipment at no additional cost to the Owner.
C. Integrate the sound reinforcement system with the school communications system.
D. Plenum rated cable may be used as an option at the contractor's discretion. Wherever
cabling is run exposed, conduit shall be used to cover and protect wiring.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide the system by a company that has been designing and supplying similar systems
for a period of 3 years. Provide, upon request by Owner or Architect / Engineer, names
and addresses of similar installations.
B. Provide central processing control console wiring connections by factory engineers or
authorized factory trained personnel.
1.03 WARRANTY
A. Warranty equipment for a period of 1 year, from date of substantial completion.
B. Correct defects in material or workmanship with a minimum loss of operating time at no
cost to Owner.
C. On site service.
1.04 SUBMITTAL
A. Submit shop drawings as specified.
B. Submittals include, but are not limited to, marked product data on equipment and cables.
C. Submit wiring diagrams and scaled area plans indicating the approximate routing of
conduits and cables, equipment locations, speakers, and accessories.
1.05 REFERENCES
A. National Electrical Code.
B. UL
SOUND REINFORCEMENT SYSTEM
VLK Architects, 2009 27 5116 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Dukane
B. Rauland/Biamp
C. Atlas/Soundolier
D. Shure
E. Electrovoice
F. TOA
G. KDM Electronics
H. Bogen
I. Peavey
J. QSC
K. Sennheiser
2.02 CAFETORIUM AND GYMNASIUM - REMOTE SOUND REINFORCEMENT SYSTEMS
A. In -wall self-contained 150-watt mixer/amplifier with the following at each venue:
1. Master Volume Control
2. Less than 21% distortion at 45-20KHz.
3. Frequency response of 35-20KHz +/- 2dB.
4. Six low-z mic inputs.
5. Two hi-z auxiliary inputs.
6. Remote override from administrative communications system.
7. Amplifier Compressor module with attack time of 500 ms, release time 3-5
seconds, compression ratio of 10 to 1, and fixed gain -20dB below threshold.
8. Octave filter set with nine octaves of control with content'Q' control. Filter shall
cover octave bands from 50-12.8KHz.
9. Provide optional input/controls as noted on the drawings.
a. Auxiliary input.
b. Auxiliary output.
10. Phantom power for condenser type microphones.
B. Cafetorium Speakers:
1. Soundolier C803AT827 high compliance 8- inch coaxial speakers, 8 watt 25 volt
transformer with 62-8 baffles, 95-8-7 backbox and #81-8R the bridge, as indicated
on the drawings.
2. Suspend from structure. Do not suspend from ceiling grid or tile.
C. Gymnasium Speaker:
1. Speaker to be suspended from structure with drivers just below structural steel to
prevent sound transmission interference. Coverage to be in a 3600 radius and be
able to handle 175 Watt RMS and 350 watts of program peak power. Auxiliary
Gymnasium speaker to be KDM Octasound #SP820A.
SOUND REINFORCEMENT SYSTEM
VLK Architects, 2009 27 5116 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
2.03 CABLES AND CONTROL WIRING
A. All cabling is to be installed in conduit.
1. LF and HF reinforcement cabling to be at least #12 twisted pair.
2. Other speaker cables to be #16 jacketed equal to West Penn 225 or 25225
plenum.
3. Microphone and communication cabling to be shielded at least #22 gauge
jacketed cable equal to West Penn 452 or 25291.
4. Control wiring to be #18 jacketed equal to West Penn 224 or 25224 plenum.
5. Outer insulation cover of sound reinforcement system cable color shall be gray.
B. Cables, wiring and interconnect terminal strips to be logically, legibly and indelibly labeled
for immediate identification by a direct hot -stamp method or a factory stamped closed
sleeve method as approved. Adhesive strip labels are acceptable only if sealed with
transparent heat -shrinkable tubing to hold the marker in its position. Provide all wiring
labeling information on schematic diagram in project record drawings. Labeling equal to:
1. Brady PM-1 M "Porta-Mark".
2. T&B heatshrink markers.
3. Or approved equal.
2.04 HEARING ASSIST SYSTEM (One for each Venue)
A. The hearing assist system is to consist of an FM transmitter with one antenna. The
transmitter will broadcast in the FM band from 72.1 MHZ to 75.9 MHZ. Exact location of
mounting for cafetorium, and auxiliary gymnasium to be verified with Architect and Owner.
Provide mounting shelf and power supplies.
1. Williams Sound PPA 375E system with PPAR35 receivers, one RPK005 rack
mount kit, and one ANT 005 whip antenna.
2. Remote antenna located in an accessible above -ceiling space
2.05 MICROPHONES AND ACCESSORIES
A. Microphones, provide for each venue:
1. (2) Shure — Cardioid Dynamic microphones and locking on/off switch with
neodymium alloy magnet and 2 year warranty.
2. (2) Shure — SLX Wireless UHF diversity wireless receiver with rack mount kit.
3. (2) Shure - Hand held microphone transmitter.
4. (2) Shure - head set microphone with body pack transmitter.
5. (2) Shure — Lavalier microphone with body pack transmitter.
B. Hanging microphones above stage:
1. (4) Shure MX202B/C
C. Microphone Outlets for each Venue:
1. Soundolier #S501-13C outlets for wall mounting and Thomas & Betts multiple
service floor boxes for floor mounting.
D. Microphone extension cables - provide for each venue:
1. (4) 25' extension cables with male/female connectors.
E. Microphone stands - provide for each venue:
1. Two (2) floor stands with 10" base and 62" height adjustment.
2. Two (2) table top stands with base.
F. Remote Source Audio Mixer for each Venue:
SOUND REINFORCEMENT SYSTEM
VLK Architects, 2009 27 5116 - 3 2737.03
CATE Renovations
AW Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
1. KDM Electronics MX120A-02, dual source remote mixer, recessed mount with
lockable cover. Phantom Powered.
G. Flush mounted wall cabinet for wireless microphone receives and hearing assist
transmitter for each wall mounted amp/mixer venue.
1. Atlas-Soundolier #AW R-3A flush mounted wall cabinet with locking door and
three (3) standard rack unit capacity.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Provide and install Sound Reinforcement Systems as required. All equipment and their
controls shall be labeled with 1/4" lamicoid strips engraved with 1/8" high block letters
indicating device operation and level control function. Verify exact location of equipment
and remote source control panel with Architect prior to rough -in.
B. Speaker Installation: Install speaker types as required. Select speaker taps to match
amplifier maximum output and space conditions.
C. Conduit and Cables
1. Install conduit, fittings and boxes as specified in Division 26.
2. Single system cables may be grouped together in a common conduit of adequate
capacity to facilitate the ease of installation and prevent conductor or insulation
damage.
a. In no case shall the conduit fill exceed 50% capacity.
b. Do not group conductors or cables of different systems in a common
conduit.
3. Cable:
a. Install cables as recommended by the system manufacturer. Conductor
quantities specified are minimum required. Conductors to be installed
shall be coordinated with the system equipment supplier.
b. Cables installed on exposed surfaces, in inaccessible locations, or
underground shall be installed in conduit.
C. All microphone and line level cables shall be installed in conduit. Speaker
cables installed above accessible ceiling space may be installed without
conduit. All speaker cables not installed in conduit shall be plenum rated.
4. Cables not installed in conduit shall be grouped, bundled and run to a central
distribution junction box. Cable shall be bundled on a maximum of 2'-6" on center
and secured to the structure at a maximum of 5' on center. Bundling and support
shall be with plenum rated cable ties.
5. Cables installed in hollow wall spaces shall be installed in conduit to an
accessible location.
6. Tag each circuit at each end and at each terminal with a separate tag indicating
the area served.
7. Color code wires in accordance with IPCEA standards.
8. Terminate speaker cables in a junction box.
D. Coordinate final connection of power and ground wiring to "equipment. Power and ground
wiring shall terminate inside equipment racks, and be hard -wired directly to ground
busses to ensure uninterrupted operation.
E. All equipment and enclosures described in this specification section shall be permanently
attached to the structure and held firmly in place. Supports shall be adequate to support
their loads with a safety factor of at least three.
F. The process of equalizing and testing the Audio Sound System may necessitate moving
SOUND REINFORCEMENT SYSTEM
VLK Architects, 2009 27 5116 - 4 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
and adjusting certain component parts (e.g. loudspeakers). This shall be done at no
additional cost to the Owner.
G. Take such precautions as are necessary to prevent and guard against electromagnetic
and electrostatic noise.
H. Exercise care in wiring to avoid damage to the cables and to the equipment. Isolate
cables carrying signals at different levels and separate to restrict channel bleed -through
the feedback oscillation in any amplifier section. Connect all loudspeakers electrically in -
phase, using the same wire color code for speaker wiring throughout the project. Make all
joints and connections with resin -core solder or with approved mechanical connectors.
Keep wiring separated into four groups of conduit for microphone level circuits (level
below -20 dBm), line level circuits up to +30 dBm), loudspeaker circuits (above +30 dBm),
and power circuits.
J. Locate wireless microphone system and hearing assist system antennas at or above
ceiling or at bar joist height in areas without ceilings. Coordinate exact location with
Owner to provide adequate coverage in the area served by the system. Provide adequate
protective vandal guards. Adjust antenna location for best possible reception/transmission
in area of coverage.
K. Provide hearing assist transmitter(s) and receivers for each sound reinforcement system.
The quantity of hearing assist receivers for each system shall be equal to a minimum of
four (4) percent of the total seating capacity, but in no case less than ten (10) receivers
for the area of coverage of each local sound reinforcement system.
L. Locate all wireless microphone receivers and/or antennas for best possible reception for
area of coverage. Coordinate exact location with Owner/Architect. Provide adequate
protective vandal guards at exposed locations in gymnasiums, cafetoriums and high
activity areas. Adjust each antenna as required for maximum reception.
3.02 TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE
A. General
1. After completion of installation and start-up procedures, commence a verification
and testing sequence leading to final acceptance.
2. Submit for approval, a sample of the form on which the test will be reported.
a. Identify project.
b. Signatures of participants and observers.
C. Results.
d. Description of adjustment or corrections of defective components.
e. Date.
4. Provide schedule of tests. Estimate dates of significant events.
a. All testing shall be performed in the presences of the Owner/Architect/
Engineer.
5. Test, calibrate and adjust each device in the system.
6. Verify operation of all specified functions.
7. Provide documentation of all tests and verifications as specified.
B. The following tests and adjustments shall be performed by the Contractor. All equipment
required supplied by the Contractor. Follow EIA standard RS-160 and RS-219 in
performing the tests. Make all necessary corrections to bring systems into specification
compliance. Record the results of these tests in project record drawings. Submit written
results of tests to Architect prior to scheduled equalization and final inspection date.
1. Measure and record impedance of each speaker line at frequency of 1,000 Hz,
with loudspeakers connected to their respective lines.
SOUND REINFORCEMENT SYSTEM
VLK Architects, 2009 27 5116 - 5 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
2. Measure and record overall system hum and noise level of each input channel
with controls set so that -50 dBm microphone input or +4 dBm input would drive
the system to full amplifier output. Terminate inputs with resistor (150 to 600
ohms) and disconnect power to noise generator for this test.
3. Adjust the gain of each active device to provide both optimum signal - to noise
ratio, and at least 10 dZB headroom at each active device. Observe the output of
each active device with an oscilloscope of 5 MHZ band width, and verify visually
that the signal required for full amplifier output is free of overload, clipping,
parasitics, and radio frequency components. Adjust gain structure of all active
components and record the input and output signal levels of all active
components and record the input and output signal levels of all active
components in both dBm and volts, during normal program levels.
4. Measure and record system electrical frequency response for each input channel
through power amplifier. Required is flat response with permissible deviation of
+/-1 d6 within the range of 30 Hz to 16 kHz.
5. Check system to assure freedom from oscillations or stray RF pickup. Check
inputs with no signal and with typical program material driving system to full
output. Detect unwanted signals on oscilloscope at termination.
6. Check phasing of loudspeakers by applying constant power per octave (pink)
noise to system and walking through the transition areas of coverage from one
loudspeaker to the next. Transition should be smooth with no apparent shift in
source from one speaker to the next. Apply sine wave sweet signal to each
loudspeaker system sweeping from 50 Hz to 5,000 Hz and at a level of 10 dB
below full amplifier output, and listen for rattle or objectionable noises. Correct if
apparent.
7. Achieve uniform distribution of sound from each loudspeaker (with bleachers in
their extended position in gymnasium where applicable). Drive system with
broadband, constant power per octave (pink) noise, and measure the SPL using
a sound level meter incorporating an octave -band filter centered at 4 kHz. Adjust
noise level until the meter readings are between 75 and 80 dB. Use a sound level
meter filter that meets ANSI S1.4-1971 Type 2 and ANSI S1.11-1971 standards
set for slow meter damping. Take all readings at seated ear height. Adjust
speaker as necessary to achieve +/-3 d6 over entire area covered by this system.
3.03 EQUALIZATION PROCEDURES
A. The following equalization procedures will be performed by the Sound Reinforcement
System Contractor. Contractor to provide personnel familiar with the installed system to
perform the adjustments and make final modifications. The fidelity test to be run consists
of driving the system with constant power per octave (pink) noise and measuring the
sound -pressure level in each one-third octave band from 40 to 16,000 Hz. One-third
octave filters shall be used to adjust the response as necessary to fit the requirements of
the space.
3.04 INSTRUCTIONS
A. Provide 8 hours, 4 hours on each of two days, of instruction to the Owner designated user
and maintenance personnel on the use and operation of the system. Instructing personnel
shall be a competent engineer on technician familiar with the installed system. Instruction
times shall be arranged by the Owner.
3.05 ACCEPTANCE BY OWNER
A. Upon completion of initial tests and delivery of all documents, diagrams, and project
record drawings, notify the Architect in writing that the installation has been completed in
accordance with the requirements of the specification and is ready for equalization and
inspection by representatives of the Owner.
SOUND REINFORCEMENT SYSTEM
VLK Architects, 2009 27 5116 - 6 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
1. Acceptance testing will include operation by the Owner of each major system and
other components (microphones, consoles, racks, loudspeakers, etc.) deemed
necessary. Contractor will assist as necessary in this testing.
2. In the event the need for further adjustments or work becomes evident during
acceptance testing, the Contractor will continue his work until system is
acceptable, at no additional cost to the Owner.
3.06 EXTRA WARRANTY PROVISIONS
A. Labor and materials provided under this section to be warranted for not less than one (1)
year after final acceptance of the work by The Owner. Defects occurring in labor or
materials within the one-year warranty are to be rectified by replacement or repair. This
Contractor, within the warranty period, is required to answer all service calls and requests
for information within a 24 hour period, and repair or replace any faulty item within a 24
hour period, without charge, including parts and labor.
END OF SECTION
SOUND REINFORCEMENT SYSTEM
VLK Architects, 2009 27 5116 - 7 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 27 5123
SCHOOL COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install a complete school communications system.
1. A complete system includes items such as wiring, push/call buttons, handsets,
control consoles, and main distribution equipment.
2. Integrate all components to provide a complete and functioning system.
B. Locate equipment to accommodate millwork, fixtures, marker boards and other room
equipment at no additional cost to the Owner.
C. Integrate the communications system with the following systems:
1. Clock and Bell System
2. Owner's phone system
3. Local sound reinforcement sound systems
D. Return air plenum cable may be used as an option at the contractor's discretion.
Wherever cabling is run exposed, conduit shall be used to cover and protect wiring.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide the system by a company that has been designing and supplying similar systems
for a period of 3 years. Provide, upon request by Owner or Architect / Engineer names
and addresses of similar installations.
B. Provide central processing control console wiring connections by factory engineers or
authorized factory trained personnel.
1.03 WARRANTY
A. Warranty equipment for a period of 1 year, from date of substantial completion.
B. Correct defects in material or workmanship with a minimum loss of operating time at no
cost to Owner.
C. On site service.
1.04 SUBMITTAL
A. The installing contractor and/or equipment supplier shall provide complete and detailed
shop drawings and include:
1. Wiring and interconnection schematics.
2. Complete point-to-point wiring diagrams
3. Riser diagrams.
4. Complete floor plan drawings locating all system devices.
5. Factory data sheets on each piece of equipment proposed.
6. Detailed system operational description. Any specification differences and
deviations shall be clearly noted and marked.
7. Complete system bill of material.
8. Line by line specification review stating compliance or deviation.
B. All submittal data will be in bound form with Contractor's name, Supplier's name, and
project name adequately identified.
SCHOOL COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
VLK Architects, 2009 27 5123 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
C. Minimum size drawings: 11" x 17".
1.05 COORDINATION
A. It shall be the responsibility of the installing contractor to coordinate all requirements
surrounding installation of the communication system with all other trades.
B. Pre -installation meeting: Schedule a pre -installation meeting specifically for the School
Communication System with Owner and Architect.
1.06 REFERENCES
A. National Electrical Code.
B. UL
C. Communication systems connected to a telephone utility company shall comply with the
Federal Communications Commission rules Section 68 and the corresponding UL listing.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A.
Dukane
B.
Rauland
C.
Telecor.
D.
Bogen
E.
Simplex
F.
Atlas/Soundolier
G.
Valcom
2.02 CENTRAL CONTROL EQUIPMENT
A. The central equipment shall be mounted in a standard 19" equipment rack. The central
equipment shall consist of but not be limited to:
1. The equipment housing.
2. A power supply to provide operating DC power for the circuitry contained within
the central equipment housing and all administrative control stations (ACSs) shall
be provided.
3. A central microprocessor unit containing all solid-state memory and components
necessary to provide the features specified herein.
4. Zone circuit boards as required to meet the system requirements for remote
stations and/or communications linkage.
5. The provision for terminating the cabling from up to 128 remote stations and 8
administrative control stations (ACSs) shall be provided.
6. The provisions to automatically activate a selectable program source between
class changes.
2.03 EXTERNAL PAGING AMPLIFIER
A. External paging amplifiers shall be provided as required to meet the load requirements of
SCHOOL COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
VLK Architects, 2009 27 5123 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
the system when activated in the all -page mode. The system shall be equipped with
equipment required for (one) program channel.
B. Program/paging amplifiers shall have the following:
1. Power output shall be capable of providing sufficient power for the speakers
required to the project and include an additional 25% capacity.
2. Maximum .5% harmonic distortion from 20-20KHz.
3. Frequency response of 20Hz to 20KHz +/-1 dB.
4. 90 dB signal to noise ratio at 20Hz to 20 KHz.
5. IV RMS input sensitivity at 1 KHz.
6. Master volume control.
2.04 PROGRAM SOURCES
A. AM/FM tuner - Denon T000150ORD
B. CD / Cassette / MP3 playback, Tascam CC-22 mklll
2.05 EMERGENCY TONE GENERATOR
A. Provide tone generator. It shall incorporate a multi -tone generator with priority relay to
override any paging or program function of the system.
B. The tone generator shall be activated from an external contact closure provided by the
(fire alarm panel/emergency pushbutton).
2.06 EQUIPMENT RACK
A. The central equipment shall be housed in a 19-inch W X 72-inch H equipment rack with
casters. The rack shall be of sufficient vertical size to contain all of the specified
equipment to be housed within. The rack shall be equipped with a locking rear door and
removable side panels. All unused front panel space shall be filled with the appropriate
size blank panels.
B. Telephone Type 66 blocks shall be mounted inside lockable, hinged panel with 3/4"
painted plywood backboard.
C. The program sources shall be remotely located from the control equipment. The rack
shall be a wood grain finish, table top rack located as directed by the Owner.
2.07 SPEAKERS
A. Ceiling speakers:
1. General Purpose Speaker: 8" speaker with 5 oz. magnet complete with line
matching transformer. Program rating shall be 15 watts continuous. Provide a
white round recessed steel baffle with each unit. The speaker shall be a
Soundolier SD72W. Provide Soundolier CS95-8 enclosure system and 81-8R
speaker supports for each speaker. 25/70V transformers shall have primary taps
of 0.25, 0.5, 1, 2 and 5 watts. Tap speaker at 0.25 watt.
2. Classroom, office, conference, telephone, teacher lounge, workroom speakers: 8
ohm speaker with 5 oz. magnet, complete with line matching transformer.
Program rating shall be 12 watts continuous. Provide a white, round, steel,
recessed baffle with each unit. The speaker shall be a Soundolier SD72WV, with
integral volume control. Provide Soundolier CS95-8 enclosure system and 81-8R
speaker supports for each speaker. 25/70V transformers shall have primary taps
of 0.25, 0.5, 1, 2, 5 watts; tap speaker at 0.5 watt.
B. Recessed Vandal proof Wall Speaker: Soundolier APF-15T flush mount horn with
SCHOOL COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
VLK Architects, 2009 27 5123 - 3 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
multitap line matching transformer. Provide with each unit a Soundolier VP161-APF baffle
and 193-8-6 recessed backbox. Tap at 1.8 watts.
C. Surface mount speaker/horn: Soundolier AP- 15TC surface mount wide-angle
loudspeaker with multitap line matching transformer with armored cable adaptor.
D. Wall mounted volume control: Soundolier AT- 10PA or approved equal recessed
autotransformer volume control. Volume control shall have public address (PA)
emergency override of volume control.
E. Remote Source Output Volume Control: Rack mounted in remote source rack. Provide
line level volume control of output of each remote source device. Label each volume
control for each output device.
2.08 CALL -IN DEVICES
A. Push to call button: Momentary call switch mounted on a stainless steel plate, with
engraved PUSH -TO -CALL on plate.
B. Wall mounted handset (Switch Hook): Intercom station telephone.
C. Desk mounted handset (Switch Hook): Staff telephone station.
D. Administrative Control Station (ACS)
1. The administrative control station (ACS) shall be the control center for
communications, paging, and signaling functions for the system. The ACS shall
contain control panel with buttons for functional control and user programming.
2. For voice intercom, the ACS shall be equipped with a handset, keypad, speaker,
microphone, and a TALK/LISTEN button.
3. Each ACS shall be equipped with a sounder for audible annunciation of incoming
calls.
4. The ACS shall be capable of answering the next call in the calls waiting stack by
depressing only one button.
5. An ACS shall have the ability to forward its call -in coverage to another ACS. An
indication shall be shown in both the ACS forwarding coverage of calls as well as
the ACS to which call coverage is being forwarded to. When in the forward
coverage mode, an ACS shall still visibly annunciate incoming calls, and it can be
used to make and answer calls or other assigned functions.
6. It shall be possible to manually activate and sound the time event signal to any of
the 8 time zones from the ACS.
7. The ACS shall be equipped with a built-in tone generator, which provides for both
time signal tone and user accessible tones (single chime, repetitive chime, steady
tone, hi-lo, alarm, wail, and warble) for use as manually activated emergency or
other signals.
8. All ACSs shall have a dedicated control labeled "ALL PAGE". The operation of
this control shall gather all speakers for distribution of tone signaling distress or
emergency signals, and emergency voice announcements. This control shall be
defeatable as to restrict access into the all -page function only to assigned ACSs.
9. A designated ACS within the system shall have the ability to enter the user
accessible functions for data input and programming. A "Security Code" number
shall be required to enter this programming mode.
2.09 ANTENNA
A. Roof Mounted FM Antenna.
1. Gain of not less that 6.5DB at frequencies of 88 to 108 MHZ and 20 DB front to
back rejection ratio.
2. Coaxial antenna lead-in.
SCHOOL COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
VLK Architects, 2009 27 5123 - 4 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
B. Loop type indoor AM antenna oriented and located as required.
2.10 MASTER CLOCK SYSTEM
A. The system shall contain an integral Master Clock and Programmer that shall be capable
of performing the following functions:
1. Provide 500 discrete time event entries for programming functions based upon:
a. The time of day in hours and minutes
b. The day or combination of seven days of the week on which the event is
to occur
C. The selection of any one or any combination of 32 zones or (8) outputs to
be activated
d. The selection of any one or combination of 16 schedules to allow for
maximum flexibility due to special circumstances or seasonal changes.
e. The selection of 16 user -programmable Event Tones
1) Any combination of time schedules may be active simultaneously
2) Event Tones are programmable from a library of 25 Tone Types
B. Provide for Automatic Daylight Savings Time adjustment with Leap Year programming.
C. Provide momentary contact closures for external device operation. Provide four inputs,
four outputs and four flex -puts.
1. Inputs shall be programmable by the user to initiate any desired system activity
(e.g. Page, Tone, Program, Event, System Reset, etc.)
2. Outputs shall be programmable by user to activate during any desired system
activity (e.g. Page, Tone, Program, Time of Day, etc.)
a. Display the time of day in either 12 or 24-hour format at each
Administrative telephone
b. Master Clock will interface with an existing master clock to allow the two
systems to synchronize
C. Master clock shall correct compatible secondary clocks, analog, digital, or
both
D. The system shall provide for an editing and review routine to permit the user to change
and edit time events, zones, and schedules.
E. The system shall allow pre -selected program material to be distributed according to pre-
programmed schedules, i.e. March to Music, National Anthem, etc.
F. Synchronous single and double face 24VAC run/24 VAC/DC correct, analog, corrective,
12-inch display. Provide vandal guards in high activity areas, gymnasiums.
1. Wall or ceiling mounted as required.
2. Provide vandal guards in athletic and high activity areas.
3. Power input shall be 24VDC.
4. Faraday clocks are not acceptable.
G. Clock power supply: Provide secondary clock 24VDC power supply. Power supply shall
be sized in quantity to meet the load requirements of the system.
H. Master Clock system shall be Dukane MCS 350.
Clock face shall be 24D40.
2.11 UPS BATTERY BACK-UP
A. Provide UPS Battery back up for the communications system to operate a minimum of 24
hours stand-by then 20 minutes of operation upon loss of power.
SCHOOL COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
VLK Architects, 2009 27 5123 - 5 2737.03
CATE Renovations
AW Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
B. Acceptable Manufacturers: Liebert, PowerWare, Best Power
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INTERCOM SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. The intercom system shall consist of a central equipment cabinet, microprocessor control
unit, power supply, zone modules, administrative control stations (ACSs), amplifiers, and
station loudspeaker assemblies. Provide all associated material hardware, wiring, and
options as described herein to provide a complete working system, which shall meet the
specified requirements.
B. The intercom system shall provide the following communications paths and functions.
1. ACS to remote loudspeaker station (provide two channels).
2. Administrative control station to administrative control station.
3. Remote speaker to administrative control station.
4. Zone paging.
C. The system shall be designed so as to accomplish any combination or all of the above
functions simultaneously.
D. The system shall provide the facilities for the paging or sounding emergency signals or
time event signals to selected groups or all remote speakers.
E. The system shall provide facilities for the control and distribution of up to two program
channels to individual, selected groups, or all remote speakers, as well as intercom
communications and class change signals.
F. The system shall include the facilities of a built-in master clock and programmer capable
of correcting appropriate secondary clock displays and controlling events based on user
programmed time schedule programs.
G. Provide remote control of program distribution. Distribution of the program source shall be
possible from any administrative control station (ACS).
H. Zone system as follows:
1. All speakers in corridors shall be zone area designation. (ie. all speakers in
corridors in the 100 series rooms, all speakers in corridors in the 200 series
rooms. etc. etc.)
2. Electrical Rooms, Mechanical Rooms, Telephone Closets, Data Closets, Janitor's
Rooms, and Storage Rooms shall be zoned with the nearest corridor zone.
3. All outside horns shall be one zone.
4. Each individual room such as and not limited to classrooms, cafeteria, office,
conference room and gymnasium shall be an individual zone.
3.02 INTERCOM SYSTEM FUNCTIONS
A. The base system shall provide one simultaneous open voice speech paths between
administrative control station and station loudspeakers within each 24-zone / classroom
group.
1. The speech channels shall be true multiple, simultaneous, UNRESTRICTED,
amplified voice channels requiring no automatic queue or call stacking to access
the intercom amplifier.
2 The system shall come equipped to provide modular expansion to eight (8)
simultaneous open voice speech paths and a minimum expansion capability of
128 additional stations.
3 An intercom amplifier shall be provided integral with each ACS.
SCHOOL COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
VLK Architects, 2009 27 5123 - 6 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
B. The system shall provide the capacity for both a loudspeaker station and a pushbutton at
each remote location. Each remote station shall be assigned an architectural or ID
number to communicate with its assigned ACSs. The system shall permit user selection
of 2, 3, 4, or 5-digit architectural dialing.
C. The system shall allow preselected coverage of calls from remote station to ACS on a
remote station basis. A remote station shall be able to report to multiple administrative
control stations simultaneously. Functions of an unattended ACS may be forwarded by
the user to an attended ACS. This provides overlapping or distinct coverage of remote
stations by administrative control stations. Systems not allowing programmable flexibility
of remote station coverage shall be unacceptable.
D. The system shall incorporate all necessary circuitry to prevent monitoring of remote
stations equipped with call origination switches with privacy mode.
E. The system shall have 8 user assignable groups of stations for zoned audio paging with
any remote station belonging to more than one group. A separate group/zoning shall be
user assignable for 8 zones of class change signals.
F. The system shall allow for user definable pre -selective access to "zone" and "all -page"
functions. This feature will prevent unauthorized paging from designated ACSs.
G. The system shall provide facilities so that the user has access for sounding selected
tones from any ACS on either all -page or by zone basis for use as emergency or other
alarm signals.
H. Provisions shall be provided inherent to the system, to allow for the use of a priority
override inputs (i.e. principal's microphone and telephone extension). This circuit, when
activated by an external source, shall gather all speakers for distribution of the signal
information provided by the external source. This priority override input shall preempt
other functions currently under way in the system. Upon conclusion of the priority override
function, all pre-empted functions shall be automatically restored.
The system shall have the capability to operate with external paging amplifiers to increase
the audio output available for paging. Adequate audio amplification shall be provided as
required.
J. The system shall be equipped with control point outputs and activate outboard devices
such as priority override muting relays on remote local sound reinforcement systems. The
control point outputs shall be activated when the system is placed in the emergency page
mode or if the emergency tone generator is activated and shall mute the output of the
local sound reinforcement system.
K. The system shall be equipped with RS-232 ports to allow for the following:
1. Diagnostics via a standard computer terminal.
2. Modem interface to allow remote factory engineering assistance. Systems not
providing a port of access to the system shall not be acceptable.
L. System must allow simultaneous operation of both diagnostic and functional routines
(paging, zone page, time events, call -in, etc.).
M. The system shall have the ability to perform scan functions from the administrative control
stations or computer terminal for:
1. Review of call -in coverage assignments to an ACS.
2. Review ID numbers of remote stations assigned to either of the two program
channels.
3. Review that ACSs are forwarding coverage.
SCHOOL COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
VLK Architects, 2009 27 5123 - 7 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
4. Edit and review master clock time programs.
N. Higher priority calls shall not cancel when the "Clear All Calls" routine is used. Only
normal calls shall clear and cancel.
O. Line loss on two-way communications circuits to be no greater than .5dB per 500 feet of
circuit length.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install new communication system components in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions.
1. Terminate all field wiring on telephone punch blocks mounted in an enclosure as
specified.
2. Provide 25-pair cabling from telephone switch to local telephone terminal board.
3. Label cables and wiring logically, legibly, and permanently for ease of
identification, using adhesive strip type labels.
4. All communications wires and cables, which are to be routed in the ceiling spaces
shall be identified and tagged every 50 feet. The identification shall include the
room number on markers similar to T&B sleeve marker.
5. Provide integration of clock and bell, telephone system.
6. Provide integration of local sound reinforcement system override.
B. Speaker Installation:
1. Install new speakers types as indicated on the drawings.
2. Speakers in high ambient noise areas (cafetorium, gymnasiums, etc.) Shall be
tapped as required to overcome the ambient noise generated by the public.
C. Conduit and Cables
1. Install conduit, fittings and boxes as specified in Division 26.
2. Single system cables may be grouped together in a common conduit of adequate
capacity to facilitate the ease of installation and prevent conductor or insulation
damage.
a. In no case shall the conduit fill exceed 50% capacity.
b. Do not group conductors or cables of different systems in a common
conduit.
3. Cable:
a. Install cables as recommended by the system manufacturer. Conductor
quantities specified are minimum required. Conductors to be installed
shall be coordinated with the system equipment supplier.
b. Cables installed on exposed surfaces, in inaccessible locations, or
underground shall be installed in conduit.
C. Cables installed above accessible, ceiling spaces may be installed
without conduit. All cables not installed in conduit shall be plenum rated.
4. Cables not installed in conduit shall be grouped and bundled. Cable shall be
bundled on a maximum of 2'-6" on center and secured to the structure at a
maximum of 5' on center. Bundling and support shall be with plenum rated cable
ties.
5. Cables installed in hollow wall spaces shall be installed in conduit to an
accessible location.
6. Tag each circuit at each end and at each terminal with a separate tag indicating
the area served.
3.04 INSTRUCTIONS
A. Provide eight hours instruction to the operating/maintenance personnel, which shall
include initial programming of eight schedules.
SCHOOL COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
VLK Architects, 2009 27 5123 - 8 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
3.05 TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE
A. General
1. After completion of installation and start-up procedures, commence a verification
and testing sequence leading to final acceptance.
2. Submit for approval, a sample of the form on which the test will be reported.
a. Identify project.
b. Provide a list of all system devices, arrange in numerical order of point
addresses.
1) Show descriptor and location of each.
C. Signatures of participants and observers.
d. Results.
e. Description of adjustment or corrections of defective components.
f. Date.
3. Provide schedule of tests. Estimate dates of significant events.
a. All testing shall be performed in the presences of the Owner / Engineer.
4. Test, calibrate and adjust each device in the system.
5. Verify operation of all specified functions.
6. Provide documentation of all tests and verifications as specified.
3.06 ROOM NUMBER DESIGNATION
A. Final system room designations shall be based on actual room number graphics. (Do not
use Architectural drawing room designations).
3.07 GROUNDING OF EQUIPMENT
A. Racks and cabinets shall be grounded to the metallic structure of the building or to the
building system power ground in accordance with NEC section 250. Securely bond
equipment to the ground system through a minimum 14 gauge green insulated conductor.
B. Electronic systems shall be grounded to the building system ground, with a maximum
resistance of 0.1 ohm. Systems ground may be a driven ground rod, building steel, or
other approved ground of the building power systems ground.
3.08 ANTENNA
A. Furnish and install the Antenna as specified.
3.09 MASTER CLOCK
A. Provide all final connections as required for integration with communications system.
B. Provide clocks as indicated on the drawings.
C. Provide guards over clocks located in high activity areas.
D. Provide clock power supplies in equipment rack and/or mechanical/electrical rooms.
Provide 120V, 20A dedicated circuit.
3.11 SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE
A. The contractor shall provide a 1-year warranty of the installed system against defects in
material and workmanship. All labor and materials shall be provided at no expense to the
Owner during normal working hours. The warranty period shall begin on the date of
acceptance by the Owner/Engineer.
SCHOOL COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
VLK Architects, 2009 27 5123 - 9 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
B. The contractor shall, at the Owner's request, make available a service contract offering
continuing factory authorized service of this system after the initial warranty period.
C. The installing contractor shall submit evidence that he maintains in his service department
the following items:
1. Central Switch Assembly
2. Station Line Card
3. Master Station Module
4. System Control Card
END OF SECTION
SCHOOL COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
VLK Architects, 2009 27 5123 - 10 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 28 0100
ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Compile Electronic Safety and Security (ESS) product data and related information
appropriate for Owner's operation and maintenance of products furnished under
Contract. Prepare ESS operating and maintenance data as specified in this Section and
as referenced in other sections of specifications.
B. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation and maintenance of equipment and systems.
C. Submit 5 copies of complete manual in final form.
1.02 ESS OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE
A. Thirty (30) days after receipt of reviewed submittals bearing the Architect/Engineer's
stamp of acceptance (including resubmittals), submit for review 1 copy of the first draft of
the ESS Operating and Maintenance Manual. This copy shall contain as a minimum:
1. Table of Contents for each element.
2. Contractor information.
3. All shop drawings, coordination drawings and product data, bearing the
Architect/Engineer's stamp of acceptance.
4. All parts and maintenance manuals for items of equipment.
5. Warranties (without starting dates).
6. Certifications that have been completed. Submit forms and outlines of
certifications that have not been completed.
7. Operating and maintenance procedures.
8. Form of Owner's Training Program Syllabus (including times and dates).
9. Control operations / equipment wiring diagrams.
10. Coordination Drawings.
11. Schedule of Low Voltage Wire and Cable
12. Schedule of ESS Equipment
13. Schedule of ESS Field Devices
14. Other required operating and maintenance information that are complete.
B. Copy will be returned to the Contractor within 15 days with comments for corrections.
C. Submit the (5) completed manuals in final form to the Architect/Engineer.
1. Prior to substantial completion for Owner's use after the Owner accepts facility
maintenance.
2. Include all specified data, test reports, drawings, dated warranties, certificates,
along with other materials and information.
D. The Architect/Engineer shall review the manuals for completeness within 15 days.
E. The Contractor shall be notified of any missing or omitted materials. The Manuals shall
be reworked by the Contractor, as required, in the office of the Architect / Engineer. The
manuals will not be retransmitted.
F. Four complete manuals shall be delivered to the Owner.
ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
VLK Architects, 2009 28 0100 -1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 BINDERS
A. Commercial quality black, 3-ring binders with clear, durable, cleanable plastic covers.
B. Minimum ring size: 1 ".
Maximum ring size: 3".
C. When multiple binders are used, correlate the data into related groupings.
D. Label contents on spine and face of binder with full size insert. Label under plastic cover.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 ESS OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A. Form for Manuals:
1. Prepare data in form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's personnel.
2. Format:
a. Size: 8-1 /2" x 11 ".
b. Text: Manufacturer's printed data or neatly typewritten.
3. Drawings:
a. Provide reinforced punched binder tab and bind in text.
b. Fold larger drawings to size of text pages.
4. Provide flyleaf indexed tabs for each separate product or each piece of operating
equipment.
5. Cover: Identify each volume with typed or printed title "Operating and
Maintenance Instructions". List:
a. Title of Project
b. Identity of separate structures as applicable.
C. Identity of general subject matter covered in the manual.
6. Binder as specified.
B. Content of Manual:
1. Neatly typewritten Table of Contents for each volume arranged in systematic
order as outlined in the specifications.
a. Contractor, name of responsible principal, address and telephone
number.
b. A list of each product required to be included, indexed to content of the
volume.
C. List with each product, name, address and telephone number of:
1) Subcontractor or installer.
2) Maintenance contractor as appropriate.
3) Identify area of responsibility of each.
4) Local source of supply for parts and replacement.
d. Identify each product by product name and other identifying symbols as
set forth in Contract Documents.
2. Product Data:
a. Include those sheets pertinent to the specific product.
b. Annotate each sheet to:
1) Identify specific product or part installed.
2) Identify data applicable to installation.
3) Delete references to inapplicable information.
3. Drawings:
a. Supplement product data with drawings as necessary to illustrate:
ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
VLK Architects, 2009 28 0100 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
1) Relations of component parts of equipment and systems.
2) Cable Plant Layout
b. Coordinate drawings with information in Project Record Documents to
assure correct illustration of completed installation.
C. Do not use Project Record Documents as maintenance drawings.
4. Written text as required to supplement product data for the particular installation:
a. Organize in consistent format under separate headings for different
procedures.
b. Provide logical sequence of instructions for each procedure.
5. Copy of each warranty, bond and service contract issued.
a. Provide information sheet for Owner's personnel, giving:
1) Proper procedures in event of failure.
2) Instances which might affect validity of warranties or bonds.
6. Shop drawings, coordination drawings and product data as specified.
C. Sections for Equipment and Systems.
1. Content for each unit of equipment and system as appropriate:
a. Description of unit and component parts.
1) Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting
conditions.
2) Performance data, engineering data and tests.
3) Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable
parts.
b. Operating procedures:
1) Start up, routine and normal operating instructions.
2) Regulation, control, stopping, shut down and emergency
instructions.
3) Special operating instructions.
C. Maintenance procedures:
1) Routine operations
2) Guide to trouble -shooting.
3) Disassembly, repair and reassembly.
4) Adjusting and checking.
5) Routine service
d. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions.
e. Original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings and
diagrams required for maintenance.
1) Items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.
f. Schedule of low voltage wire and cable
g. Schedule of ESS equipment
h. Schedule of ESS field devices
i. Each Contractor's coordination drawings.
1) As installed color coded wiring and cabling diagrams.
j. List of original manufacturer's spare parts and recommended quantities
to be maintained in storage.
k. Other data as required under pertinent sections of the specifications.
2. Prepare and include additional data when the need for such data becomes
apparent during instruction of Owner's personnel.
3. Additional requirements for operating and maintenance data as outlined in
respective sections of specifications.
4. Provide complete information for products specified in Division 28.
5. Provide certificates of compliance as specified in each related section.
6. Provide start up and testing reports as specified in each related section.
7. Provide signed receipts for spare parts and material.
8. Provide training report and certificates.
END OF SECTION
ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
VLK Architects, 2009 28 0100 - 3 2737.03
CCATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 28 0500
ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY GENERAL PROVISIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Except as modified in this Section, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions,
applicable provisions of Division 01 General Requirements, and other provisions and
requirements of the Contract Documents apply to work of Division 28.
B. Applicable provisions of this section apply to all sections of Division 28.
C. The general provisions of the Contract and the requirements of the following Sections
apply to the Work specified in this Section. See Division 26 for related general and
specific requirements.
1.02 CODES AND STANDARDS:
A. All equipment and work performed shall comply with all of the current and applicable
Codes, Rules, Ordinances, Regulations and Standards (including those not specifically
listed in this Specification) as interpreted and enforced by the authorities having
jurisdiction including:
1. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)
2. Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) - Local
3. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
4. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM) Communications Cables -
B694, B736, D4565, D4566, D4730, D4731, D4732
5. Building Industry Consulting Services International (BICSI)
6. Code of Federal Regulations - Title 47
7. Electronics Industries Association (EIA) Standard Test Procedures for Fiber
Optic Fibers, Cables, Transducers, Connecting and Terminating Devices - EIA-
455 Series
8. Federal Communications Commission (FCC) - Communications Act and FCC
Rules
9. Federal Information Processing Standards (FIPS) Federal Building Standard for
Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces - FIPS PUB 175, FIPS PUB 176
10. The Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA) Communications Cable
Stands - P-47-434, S-56-434, S-80-576, S84-608, S-85-625, S-86-634, S-87-
640, S-89-648, S-90-661, S-98-688, S-99-689, S-100-685
11. International Electro-technical Commission (IEC)
12. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) Local Area
Networks/Metropolitan Networks Standards Collection - LAN/MAN 802 Series
13. International Organization for Standardization (ISO) (ISO/IEC) Premise Wiring
Core and LAN/MAN Core Equivalents-11801, 8802, 14763-1
14. International Telecommunication Union (ITU-T) Telecommunications
Standardization
15. National Electrical Code (NEC) National Electrical Code - NFPA 70
16. National Electrical Contractor's Association (NECA) Standards of Installation
17. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) Performance Standard for
Twisted Pair Premise Voice and Data Communications Cable -WC 63.1, WC
63.2, WC 66
18. National Electrical Safety Code (NESC)
19. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) - National Fire Alarm Code NFPA
72, Life Safety Code NFPA 101
20. Society of Cable Telecommunications Engineers (SCTE)
ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY GENERAL PROVISIONS
VLK Architects, 2009 28 0500 - 1 2737.03
CCATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
21. Local Accessibility Standards
22. , Telecommunications Industries Association (TIA) (ANSI/T1A/EIA) Wiring and
Cabling Standards - 526, 566, 569, 570, 571, 598, 606, 607, 758, TSB 31-B, 63,
67, 72, 75 and 95
23. Uniform Building Code (UBC)
24. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (U.L.) - 497A, 910, 1077, 1863, 1283, 1459,
1604, 1651, 1681, 1690, 1778, 1977
B. Resolve any code violations discovered in contract documents with the Engineer prior to
award of the contract. After Contract award, any correction or additions necessary for
compliance with applicable codes shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner.
C. This Contractor shall be responsible for being aware of and complying with asbestos
NESHAP regulations, as well as all other applicable codes, laws and regulations.
D. Obtain all permits required.
1.03 SUMMARY:
A. Provide complete and working ESS Systems including equipment, conduit, wiring,
material, labor and training as described in this Specification and the Drawings. The ESS
Systems Drawings and Specifications are the sole property of the Architect and are not to
be duplicated, scanned, loaned or in any way made available to persons not designated
as authorized by the Architect. All ESS Systems plans and specifications are to be
returned to the Architect following completion of bid.
1.04 SPACE REQUIREMENTS
A. Consider space limitations imposed by contiguous work in selection and location of
equipment and material. Do not provide equipment or material that is not suitable in this
respect.
1.05 RELATION WITH OTHER TRADES
A. Carefully study all matters and conditions concerning the project. Submit notification of
conflict in ample time to prevent unwarranted changes in any work. Review other
Divisions of these specifications to determine their requirements. Extend electrical
services and final connections to all items requiring same.
B. Because of the complicated relationship of this work to the total project, conscientiously
study the relation and cooperate as necessary to accomplish the full intent of the
documents.
C. Provide sleeves and inserts in forms as required for the work. Stub up and protect open
ends of pipe before any concrete is placed. Furnish sizes of required equipment pads.
Furnish and locate bolts and fittings required to be cast in them.
D. Locate and size openings required for installation of work specified in this Division in
sufficient time to prevent delay in the work.
E. Refer to other Divisions of the specifications for the scope of required connections to
equipment furnished under other Division. Determine from the General Contractor J
Construction Manager for the various trades, the Owner, and by direction from the
Architect/Engineer, the exact location of all items. The construction trades involved shall
furnish all roughing -in drawings and wiring diagrams required for proper installation of the
electrical work.
ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY GENERAL PROVISIONS
VLK Architects, 2009 28 0500 - 2 2737.03
CCATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
01. Make final connections to all ESS equipment indicated on the drawings, except
as noted.
F. Request all Shop Drawings required in ample time to permit proper installation of all
electrical provisions.
G. Extend services as indicated to the various items of equipment furnished by others.
Rough -in for the various items and make final connections ready for operation upon
placing of the equipment.
1.06 CONCEALED AND EXPOSED WORK
A. When the word "concealed" is defined as hidden from sight as in chases, furred spaces
or above ceilings. "Exposed" is defined as open to view, in plain sight.
1.07 GUARANTEE
A. Guarantee work for a minimum of two years or as noted longer elsewhere from the date
of substantial completion of the project. During that period make good any faults or
imperfections that may arise due to defects or omissions in material, equipment or
workmanship. At the Owner's option, replacement of failed parts or equipment shall be
provided.
1.08 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
A. Furnish new and unused materials and equipment meeting the requirements of the
paragraph specifying acceptable manufacturers. Where two or more units of the same
type or class of equipment are required, provide units of a single manufacturer.
1.09 NOISE AND VIBRATION
A. Select equipment to operate with minimum noise and vibration. If noise or vibration is
produced or transmitted to or through the building structure by equipment, piping, ducts
or other parts of work, and judged objectionable by the Owner, Architect, or Engineer,
rectify such conditions at no additional cost to the Owner. If the item of equipment is
judged to produce objectionable noise or vibration, demonstrate at no additional cost that
equipment performs within designated limits on a vibration chart.
1.10 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers names and catalog number specified under sections of Division 28 are
used to establish standards of design, performance, quality and serviceability and not to
limit competition. Equipment of similar design, equal to that specified, manufactured by a
named manufacturer shall be acceptable on approval. A request for prior approval of
equipment not listed must be submitted ten (10) days before proposal due date. Submit
complete design and performance data to the Architect. The Architect and Owner issue
approvals of acceptable manufacturers as addenda to the Construction Proposal
Documents.
1.11 UTILITIES, LOCATIONS AND ELEVATIONS
A. Locations and elevations of the various utilities included within the scope of this work:
I. Obtained from utility maps and other substantially reliable sources.
2. Are offered separate from the Contract Documents as a general guide only
without guarantees to accuracy.
ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY GENERAL PROVISIONS
VLK Architects, 2009 28 0500 - 3 2737.03
CCATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
B. Examine the site and verify the location and elevation of all utilities and of their relation to
the work. Existing utilities indicated on the site plans are for reference only and shall be
field verified by the Contractor with the respective public or private utility.
1.12 CONTRACT DRAWINGS
A. Contract drawings are diagrammatic only and do not give fully dimensioned locations of
various elements of work. Determine exact locations from field measurements.
B. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to compare the scale of all electrical drawings with
the scale of the architectural drawings and make adjustments to all electrical drawings
which have the incorrect drawing scale so that his material takeoffs are not in error due to
an incorrectly labeled drawing scale and his proposal is complete.
1.13 ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS:
Abbreviations:
A/V -
Audio/Visual
AWG -
American Wire Gauge
BCR -
Building Communications Room
CMP -
Communications Media Plenum
CMR -
Communications Media Riser
dB -
Decibel
EMI -
Electromagnetic Interference
ER -
Equipment Room
ESS -
Electronic Safety and Security
FACP - Fire Alarm Control Panel
FCR -
Floor Communications Room
Hz -
Hertz
IDF -
Intermediate Distribution Frame
Km -
Kilometer
LCD -
Liquid Crystal Display
LED -
Light Emitting Diode
M -
Micron
MDF -
Main Distribution Frame
MHz -
Megahertz
NEXT - Near -End Cross Talk
nm -
Nano -meter
OFN -
Optical Fiber Non-conductive
OFNP - Optical Fiber Non-conductive Plenum
OFNR -Optical Fiber Non-conductive Riser
OTDR -Optical Time Domain Reflectometer
TC -
Telecommunications Closet (Now referred to as TR)
TR -
Telecommunications Room (A.K.A. TC - Telecommunication Closet)
UTP -
Unshielded Twisted Pair Wire
Definitions:
Low Voltage Wire - Wire or cable used for one or more systems that operate on 24 volts
or less. Low Voltage Wire is used to install and interconnect one or more of the ESS
Systems. Low Voltage Wire includes patch cords, jumpers and all portions of cable or
wire used to make the ESS Systems operational or for system communications.
Electronic Safety and Security Systems - One or more of the following and associated
equipment: Fire Detection/Alarm Systems, Intrusion Detection/Alarm Systems, Access
Control Systems, Video Surveillance Systems,
ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY GENERAL PROVISIONS
VLK Architects, 2009 28 0500 - 4 2737.03
CCATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
1.14 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Equipment Standards:
System and all components shall be brand new stock from manufacturer.
2. All electronics shall be 100% solid state.
System and all components shall bear a UL Label.
B. Contractor Qualifications:
At the time of Proposal, the Contractor shall:
1. Have manufactured, supplied or installed at least three (3) other systems of
similar size, complexity, and general operation as the systems described in these
specifications. The Contractor shall furnish in writing to Architect proof of
compliance with this paragraph at the time of proposal.
2. Hold all legally required Texas State Contractor's licenses necessary to
accomplish the installation and activation of the described system at the facilities
indicated. The Contractor shall submit copies of licenses to the Architect prior to
the start of work
3. Hold all legally required state registrations to meet local requirements for
submittal drawings.
4. Have a local office within fifty (50) miles of the project site staffed with factory
trained technicians who have experience on systems of similar complexity and
function as the systems described in these specifications. These technicians
shall be fully capable of system engineering support, installation supervising,
system start-up, and providing the Owner with training and service on both
hardware and software for the systems specified.
5. Certify complete and total compliance with the provisions of these specifications
by letter or submittal of the proposal response forms, signed by an officer of the
corporation, or a principal if other ownership currently exists. In addition, the
letter or forms shall include a complete listing of exceptions, if any.
1.15 SUBMITTALS:
A. Provide SUBMITTALS according to Division 1 and the following.
B. Requirements:
1. Submit paragraph -by -paragraph specification review indicating compliance or
deviation with explanation.
2. Submit proof that all system components and cables are U.L. Listed.
3. An equipment list with names of manufacturers, model numbers, and technical
information on all equipment proposed. Clearly mark exact model number
proposed to be installed.
4. Product technical information sheets for each principal components in the
proposed system, including cable, wire, terminal marking, and wire marking
material.
5. Certification from the manufacturer stating that the system Contractor is an
authorized distributor or installer of the proposed system when such certifications
exist.
6. A statement listing every technical and operational parameter wherein the
submitted equipment varies from that which was originally specified. If the
submitter fails to list a particular variance and his submittal is accepted, but is
ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY GENERAL PROVISIONS
VLK Architects, 2009 28 0500 - 5 2737.03
CCATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
subsequently deemed to be unsatisfactory because of the unlisted variance, the
submitter shall replace or modify such equipment at once and without cost to the
Owner.
1.16 EXAMINATION OF SITE:
A. The Contractor shall have visited the site and familiarized himself with all existing
conditions prior to submitting his proposal and shall be prepared to carry out the work
within the existing limitations. Failure or neglect to do so shall not relieve the Contractor
of his responsibilities not entitle him to additional compensation for work overlooked and
not included in his proposal.
B. The Contractor shall confirm the availability of the proper power source for each piece of
specified equipment, through site visits and Drawings as necessary. Where proper power
does not exist, the Contractor shall provide the required power, circuits, outlets, conduits,
and wire as specified under Division 26.
1.17 DATA ACCURACY:
A. Absolute accuracy of information regarding existing conditions cannot be guaranteed.
The Drawings and Specifications are for the assistance and guidance of the Contractor
and exact locations, distances, elevations, etc., shall be governed by actual field
conditions. Where variations from the contract documents are required, such variations
shall be approved by the Architect/Owner.
1.18 SECURITY:
A. The Contractor is responsible for complying with all of the Owner's and facility security's
requirements to prevent theft or damage to equipment, tools and materials. If any
deviation from facility security requirements is necessary, approval for such deviation
shall be coordinated with the Owner.
B. The Contractor shall not disclose any confidential information of the Owner. The
Contractor acknowledges that such action is highly injurious and can do damage to the
Owner. The Contractor will agree to and comply with the standard policies and provisions
of the Owner regarding outside Contractors and Consultants.
1.19 UTILITIES:
A. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide all temporary connection and
cables, lighting, light stands and power. The facilities shall be used in accordance with all
applicable regulations regarding operations, safety and fire hazards of the governmental
Authorities Having Jurisdiction, provided they are not used in a wasteful manner.
1.20 PERMITS:
A. All permits required for the specified performance and completion of the work shall be
secured by the Contractor. These permits shall be presented and reviewed at the initial
project progress meeting.
1.21 NOTIFICATION:
A. The Contractor shall not shut off any existing systems. The Contractor shall give the
Owner at least ten (10) calendar day's notice of any requirements to shut off or
interference with existing alarm, regulating, computer or other service systems. The
Owner will arrange and execute any shutdown. All work such as splicing, connections,
ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY GENERAL PROVISIONS
VLK Architects, 2009 28 0500 - 6 2737.03
CCATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
etc., necessary to establish or re-establish any system shall be completed by the
Contractor in close coordination with the Owner.
1.22 INTERFERENCES WITH THE OWNER:
A. Transportation and storage of materials at the facility, work involving the facility, and all
other matters affecting the habitual use by the Owner of its buildings, shall be conducted
so as to cause the least possible interference, and at times and in a manner acceptable
to the Owner. The Contractor shall make every effort to delivery equipment per the
schedule required by the project.
1.23 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Maintain at the job site a separate set of white prints (blue line or black line) of the
contract drawings for the sole purpose of recording the "as -built" changes and diagrams
of those portions of work in which actual construction is significantly at variance with the
contract drawings. Mark the drawings with a colored pencil. Prepare, as the work
progresses and upon completion of work, reproducible drawings clearly indicating
locations of various major and minor feeders, equipment, and other pertinent items, as
installed. Record underground and underslab cables installed, dimensioning exact
location and elevation of such installations.
B. At conclusion of project, obtain without cost to the Owner, electronic AutoCAD CAD files
of the original drawings and transfer as -built changes to these. Provide the following as -
built documents including all contract drawings regardless of whether corrections were
necessary and include in the transmittal: "2 sets of CDs and prints for Owner's use, one
set of CDs, prints, and mylars for Architect/Engineers Records". Delivery of these as -built
electronic, reproducible and prints is a condition of final acceptance.
1. 3 sets of electronic AutoCAD (2000 dwg) CAD drawing files, on CD-ROM media,
of each contract as -built drawing.
2. One reproducible Dayrex mylar film positive of each contract as -built drawing.
3. Three sets of blue or black -line prints of each contract as -built drawing.
C. As -Built Drawings should indicate the following information as a minimum:
1. Indicate all addendum changes to documents.
2. Remove Engineer's Seal, name, address, and logo from drawings.
3. Mark documents AS -BUILT DRAWINGS.
4. Clearly indicate: DOCUMENT PRODUCED BY:
5. Indicate all changes to construction during construction. Indicate actual routing of
all conduit and cables, etc that were deviated from construction drawings.
6. Indicate exact location of all underground ESS raceways, and elevations.
7. Correct schedules to reflect (actual) equipment furnished and manufacturer.
8. During the execution of work, maintain a complete set of Drawings and
specifications upon which all locations of equipment, devices, and all deviations
and changes from the construction documents in the work shall be recorded.
9. Exact location of all ESS equipment in building. Label panel schedules to indicate
actual location.
10. Exact location of all ESS equipment in and outside of the building.
11. Location, size and routing of all ESS cables, conduits, equipment, etc. shall be
accurately and neatly shown to dimension.
12. Exact location of all roof mounted equipment, wall, roof and floor penetrations.
13. Cloud all changes.
1.24 OPERATING TESTS
ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY GENERAL PROVISIONS
VLK Architects, 2009 28 0500 - 7 2737.03
CCATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
A. After all ESS systems have been completed and put into operation, subject each system
to an operating test under design conditions to ensure proper sequencing and operation
throughout the range of operation. Tests shall be made in the presence of the
Architect/Engineer and Owner. Provide minimum 24-hour advance notice of scheduling
of all tests. Make adjustments as required to ensure proper functioning of all systems.
Special tests on individual systems are specified under individual sections. Submit 3
copies of all certifications and test reports adequately in advance of completion of the
work to allow for remedial action as required to correct deficiencies discovered in
equipment and systems.
1.25 WARRANTY
A. All equipment shall be covered for the full manufacturers warranty period and systems
shall be warranted by the Contractor for a period of two years commencing with the filing
date of substantial completion. The Warranty shall cover all costs for warranty service,
including parts, labor, prompt field service, pick-up, transportation, delivery, reinstallation,
and retesting. A contract for service shall cover the period starting with the first expected
activation of each system and shall continue without interruption to cover the period to
the end of the two-year warranty as defined above. The end of the warranty period shall
be handled such that a smooth transition to a maintenance agreement with the Owner
shall be achieved with no lapse in coverage.
B. Submit 3 copies of all warranties and guarantees for systems, equipment, devices and
materials. These shall be included in the Operating and Maintenance Manuals.
1.26 BUILDING CONSTRUCTION
A. It shall be the responsibility of the sub -contractor to consult the Architectural and
Engineering drawings, details and specifications and thoroughly familiarize himself as to
the construction and all job related requirements. All construction trades shall cooperate
with the General Contractor / Construction Manager job site superintendent and lay out
work so that all piping, cables, pathways, raceways, and other items are placed in the
walls, furred spaces, chases, etc., so that there shall be no delay in the job.
1.27 TEMPORARY FACILITIES
A. General: Refer to Division 01 for general requirements on temporary facilities.
B. Temporary Wiring: Temporary power and lighting for construction purposes shall be
provided under Division 26. Installation of temporary power shall be in accordance with
NEC Article 305.
C. Temporary facilities, wire, lights and devices are the property of this Contractor and shall
be removed at the completion of the Contract.
1.28 EXTRA MATERIALS:
Keys: Provide three (3) sets of all keys for system cabinets.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 WORK INCLUDED:
All materials listed in PART 2 - PRODUCTS of this Division Sections and on the Drawings shall
be provided by the Contractor unless specifically excluded or modified in other portions of this
Specification or Addendums.
ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY GENERAL PROVISIONS
VLK Architects, 2009 28 0500 - 8 2737.03
CCATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION:
A. This project has a critical path, which must be closely followed in order to meet the
completion date. The Contractor shall review the proposed schedule at the Award of
Contract meeting and be prepared to staff his work force according to the schedule
constraints presented at that time.
B. Aesthetics are an important consideration in this installation. All components shall be
installed so as to have aesthetically pleasing results as determined by the Owner and
Architect. Actual locations of all visible components shall be coordinated in advance with
the Owner and Architect.
C. Install, make fully operational and test the system as indicated on the Drawings and in
the Specifications. Where information is not available the worst -case condition must be
assumed to ensure a complete, functional system.
D. Any interfacing with other systems shall be the Contractor's responsibility under this
contract, and the details, both logical and physical, of such interfaces shall be reflected in
the Submittals and As -Built drawings.
E. If appropriate, interfaces with the Owner's Data Network or Telecommunications System
shall be coordinated with the Owner and Architect.
F. All necessary back boards, back -boxes, pull -boxes, connectors, supports, conduit, cable
and wire shall be furnished and installed to provide a complete and reliable system. Exact
location of all backboards, boxes, conduit and wiring runs shall be presented to the
Owner/Architect for approval in advance of any installation. Provide as required and as
specified in Division 26.
G. Where required provide 120-VAC, 60 Hz power from nearest electrical panel through a
junction box, to the system devices. Provide as required and as specified in Division 26.
H. Where required, install conduit, cable and wire parallel and square with building lines,
including raised floor areas. Conduit fills shall not exceed 40%.
I. All equipment shall be mounted with sufficient clearance to minimize EMI as well as meet
all applicable codes and facilitate observation and testing. Securely hand and/or fasten
with appropriate fittings to ensure positive grounding, free of ground loops, throughout the
entire system. Units shall be installed parallel and square to building lines.
J. Quiet and vibration -free operation of all equipment is a requirement of this installation.
Properly adjust, repair, balance or replace any equipment producing objectionable (in the
judgment of the Owner or Architect) noise or vibration in any of the occupied areas of any
building and provide additional brackets and bracing if necessary. Any such additions or
changes shall be at no additional cost to the Owner.
K. Installation shall comply with the CODES AND STANDARDS portion of this Section.
Where more than one code or regulation if applicable, the more stringent shall apply.
ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY GENERAL PROVISIONS
VLK Architects, 2009 28 0500 - 9 2737.03
CCATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
L. Where new equipment is replacing old equipment, the Contractor is responsible for
removing and disposing of the old equipment and doing whatever repair work is
necessary as specified by the Owner/Architect.
M. Install firestopping, as specified in Division 26 for all penetrations in slabs and firewalls to
meet code at the completion of work and prior to final testing demonstration to the
Owner.
N. The installation shall be performed in a professional manner.
O. On a daily basis, clean up and deposit in appropriate containers all debris from work
performed under the appropriate specification sections. Stack and organize all parts,
tools and equipment when not being used.
P. Preparation, handling and installation shall be in accordance with the Manufacturer's
written instructions and technical data appropriate to the product specified.
Q. All work shall conform to the National Electrical Contractor's Association "Standard of
Installation" for general installation practice.
R. At the conclusion of the installation, all work areas, including all enclosures and boxes,
shall be vacuumed and cleaned to remove all debris and grease.
3.02 COORDINATION WITH OWNER/ARCHITECT
A. Close coordination with the Owner/Architect is vital to achieve a complete, aesthetically
pleasing job. The Contractor shall ensure that the Owner/Architect is kept fully apprized
of job progress.
3.03 CUTTING, PAINTING, AND PATCHING:
A. Structural members shall not be drilled, bored or notched in such a manner that shall
impair their structural value. Cutting of holes in structural members, if required, shall be
done with core drills and only with the specific approval of the Owner/Architect for each
instance.
B. All walls that require cutting or repair during the installation process shall be returned to
their original condition, including the matching of colors and finishes to the satisfaction of
the Owner/Architect, and at no additional cost to the Owner.
3.04 WIRE AND CABLE:
A. All low voltage cable shall be low smoke plenum rated, limited energy, with 300-volt
insulation.
B. All wires in exposed areas shall run through conduit as specified in Division 26.
C. Provide conduits, cable trays, raceways, wireways, boxes and outlets as specified in
Division 26.
D. After installation, and before termination, all wiring shall be checked and tested to insure
there are no grounds, opens, or shorts on any conductors. In addition, all wires between
buildings or underground and all coax cables shall have insulation tested with a
megohmeter (megger) and a reading of greater than 20 megohms shall be required to
successfully complete the test.
E. Run wires continuously from termination to termination without splices.
ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY GENERAL PROVISIONS
VLK Architects, 2009 28 0500 - 10 2737.03
CCATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
F. Wire and cable shall be supported in each equipment and terminal cabinet and in each
terminal and pull box in vertical risers and horizontal runs with wire duct and strap -type
supports. At any point where wire duct is required for good wire management, whether
shown on elevations or not, install appropriate duct. Where terminal boards are used,
wire ducts shall be supplied on both sides and at not rime shall wires cross over terminal
boards. Arrange cables neatly to allow inspection, removal and replacement. Lace cables
as required. Spot tie wire bundles with plastic cable ties and securely affix to panels. If
screw type terminals are specified, terminal strip connections shall be locking, tongue
style, pressure crimp, and solderless spade lug.
G. Visually inspect wire and cable for faulty insulation prior to installation. Protect cable ends
at all times with acceptable end caps except during actual termination. At no time shall
any coaxial cable be subjected to a bend less than a 6-inch radius. Protect wire and
cable from kinks. Install 1 pull rope for all 2" or larger sized conduits.
H. Provide plastic bushings and strain relief material at all conduit exit points and where
necessary, to avoid abrasion of wire and excess tension on wire and cable.
I. Cables above accessible ceilings shall not rest on ceiling tiles. Use Velcro tie wraps to
hold cables. Provide independent support for all cables. Support is to be from building
structure (do not support from pipes or conduits). ESS cables shall not tie off on HVAC
supports, all -thread, ceiling grid hanger wire or electrical / mechanical piping system.
J. Ground and bond equipment and circuits in accordance with NEC and Division 26.
3.05 IDENTIFICATION AND TAGGING:
A. All cables, wires, wiring forms, terminal blocks and terminals shall be identified by labels,
tags to other permanent markings in accordance with TIA/EIA-606. The markings shall
clearly indicate the function, source, or destination of all cabling, wiring and terminals. All
cables and wires shall be identified, utilizing heat -shrink, machine printed, polyolefin wire
markers (Brady Type B-32 or equao. Hand written tags are not acceptable.
B. Should a situation arise where the wire tagging format as shown on the drawings cannot
be used, a substitute format shall be submitted which complies with the intent to provide
documentation that will permit end -to -end tracing of all ESS Systems wiring.
C. All panels shall be provided with permanently attached engraved lamacoid labels with
identifying names and functions. All terminal points shall be appropriately labeled. Labels
shall be consistent in form, color, and typeface throughout the system and all must
contain the name of the system or subsystem as part of the label textual information.
Design, color, font and layout shall be coordinated with, and approved by, the Owner.
D. Identification of Equipment:
1. All major equipment shall have a manufacturer's label identifying the
manufacturer's address, equipment model and serial numbers, equipment size,
and other pertinent data. Take care not to obliterate this nameplate. The legend
on all nameplates or tags shall correspond to the identification shown on the
Operating Instructions.
2. A black -white -black 3 layer laminated plastic engraved identifying nameplate
shall be permanently secured to each wireway, terminal cabinet, and ESS
cabinet or rack.
a. Identifying nameplates shall have 1/2-inch high, engraved letters.
3. Permanent, waterproof, black markers shall be used to identify each ESS grid
junction box, clearly indicating the type of system available at that junction box.
ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY GENERAL PROVISIONS
VLK Architects, 2009 28 0500 - 11 2737.03
CCATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
4. Pull Boxes: Field work each with a nameplate showing identity, and identifying
equipment connected to it. Nameplates shall also indicate where pull box is fed
from.
E. Prohibited Markings: Markings intended to identify the manufacturer, vendor, or other
source from whom the material has been obtained are prohibited for installation in public,
tenant, or common areas within the project. Also prohibited are materials or devices that
bear evidence that markings or insignias have been removed. Certification, testing
(example, Underwriters Laboratories), and approval labels are exceptions to this
requirement.
F. Warning Signs: Provide warning signs where there is hazardous exposure associated
with access to or operation of ESS facilities. Provide text of sufficient size to convey
adequate information at each location; mount permanently in an appropriate and effective
location. Comply with industry standards for color and design.
G. Wire and Cable Labeling: Provide wire markers on each conductor in all boxes, pull
boxes, gutters, wireways. Identify with drop/circuit number.
H. Underground Warning Tape: Thomas and Betts or approved equal. Six-inch wide plastic
tape, colored red or orange with suitable warning legend describing buried ESS lines. All
underground conduits shall be so identified. Tape shall be buried at a depth of 6-inches
below grade and directly above conduits or ductbanks. Provide magnetic marking tape
below all underground conduits.
3.06 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. General: Comply with the requirements of Division 01 for the cutting and patching of
other work to accommodate the installation of electrical work. Except as authorized by
the Architect/Engineer, cutting and patching of electrical work to accommodate the
installation of other work is not permitted.
3.07 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL
A. Prior to substantial completion, conduct an on -site training program to instruct Owner's
operating personnel in the operation and maintenance of the ESS systems.
1. Provide the training during regular working day.
2. The Instructors shall be experienced in their phase of operation and maintenance
of the electrical systems and with the project.
B. Time to be allocated for instructions.
1. Minimum of 12 hours dedicated instructor time
2. 4 hours on each of 3 days
3. Additional instruction time for specific systems as specified in other Sections.
C. Before on -site training, submit the program syllabus; proposed time and dates; for review
and approval, minimum 48 hours prior to proposed training time and date.
1. One copy to the Owner
2. One copy to the ArchitecUEngineer
D. The Owner shall provide a list of personnel to receive instructions, and shall coordinate
their attendance at the agreed upon times.
E. Use operation and maintenance manuals as the basis of instruction. Review manual with
personnel in detail. Explain all aspects of operation and maintenance.
ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY GENERAL PROVISIONS
VLK Architects, 2009 28 0500 - 12 2737.03
CCATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
F. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble -shooting, servicing,
maintenance, and shut down of each item of equipment.
G. Demonstrate equipment functions (both individually and as part of the total integrated
system).
H. Prepare and insert additional data in the operating and maintenance manuals when the
need for additional data becomes apparent during instructions.
Submit a report within one week after completion of training. List time and date of each
demonstration, hours devoted to the demonstration, and a list of people present, with
their respective signatures.
J. At the conclusion of the on -site training program, have the person designated by the
Owner sign a certificate to certify that he/she has a proper understanding of the system,
that the demonstrations and instructions have been satisfactorily completed, and the
scope and content of the operating and maintenance manuals used for the training
program are satisfactory.
K. Provide a copy of the report and the certificate in an appropriately tabbed section of each
Operating and Maintenance Manual.
3.08 OPENINGS
A. Framed, cast or masonry openings for boxes, equipment or conduits are specified under
other divisions. Drawings and layout work for exact size and location of all openings are
included under this division.
3.09 HOUSEKEEPING PADS
A. Provide concrete equipment housekeeping pads under outdoor mounted ESS equipment.
B. Concrete and reinforcing steel shall be as specified in Division 03, or as indicated or
noted.
C. Concrete pads:
1. 6-inches thick minimum indoors; 8-inches thick minimum outdoors, or as
indicated on the drawings or in other sections of the specifications.
2. Chamfer strips at edges and corner of forms.
3. Smooth steel trowel finish.
4. Extend 3-inches minimum indoors beyond perimeter of equipment unless
otherwise shown.
5. 6-inch x 6-inch #8 wire reinforcement mesh.
3.10 OBSTRUCTIONS
A. The drawings indicate certain information pertaining to surface and subsurface
obstructions, which has been taken from available drawings. Such information is not
guaranteed, however, as to accuracy of location or complete information.
1. Before any cutting or trenching operations are begun, verify with Owner's
representative, utility companies, municipalities, and other interested parties that
all available information has been provided.
2. Should obstruction be encountered, whether shown or not, alter routing of new
work, reroute existing lines, remove obstruction where permitted, or otherwise
perform whatever work is necessary to satisfy the purpose of the new work and
leave existing services and structures in a satisfactory and serviceable condition.
ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY GENERAL PROVISIONS
VLK Architects, 2009 28 0500 - 13 2737.03
CCATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
B. Assume total responsibility for and repair any damage to existing utilities or construction,
whether or not such existing facilities are shown.
3.11 VANDAL RESISTANT DEVICES
A. Where vandal resistant screws or bolts are employed on the project, deliver to the Owner
2 suitable tools for use with each type of fastener used.
B. Proof of delivery of these items to the Owner shall be included in the Operating and
Maintenance Manuals.
3.12 PROTECTION
A. Protect work, equipment, fixtures, and materials. At work completion, work must be clean
and in original manufacturer's condition.
B. Do not deliver equipment to this project site until progress of construction has reached
the stage where equipment is actually needed or until building is closed in enough to
protect the equipment from weather. Equipment allowed to stand in the weather shall be
rejected, and the contractor is obligated to furnish new equipment of a like kind at no
additional cost to the Owner.
3.13 EQUIPMENT BACKBOARDS
A. Backboards: 3/4 inch, fire retardant, exterior grade plywood, painted gray, both sides.
1. Provide minimum of two 44 by 84 sheets of plywood for each location shown.
2. Provide minimum of two 4-ft. by 44 sheets of plywood for each ESS location.
3.14 SITE MANAGEMENT RESPONSIBILITY:
A. The Contractor shall provide an on -site Project Manager as defined in SUPERVISION OF
WORK portion of this Section.
3.15 START-UP RESPONSIBILITY:
A. The Contractor shall initiate System operation. The Contractor shall provide competent
Start -Up personnel on each consecutive working day until all ESS Systems are functional
and ready to start the acceptance test phase. If the Contractor, in the Owner/Architect's
judgment, is not demonstrating progress in solving any technical problems, the
Contractor shall supply Manufacturer's factory technical representation and diagnostic
equipment at no cost to the Owner, until resolution of those defined problems. Where
appropriate, the Contractor shall bring the Systems on-line in their basic state (i.e., alarm
reporting, facility code access control, etc.) It is the responsibility of the Owner to provide
the specific database information that will be utilized for initial system programming.
B. Properly ground each piece of electronic equipment prior to applying power. Properly
ground all shielded wire shields to the appropriate earth ground at the hub end only, not
at the remote or device end.
C. Use a start-up sequence that incrementally brings each portion of the system on-line in a
logical order that incorporates checking individual elements before proceeding to
subsequent elements until the entire system is operational. The basic steps should
include:
1. Establish ground planes at the equipment rooms and hub end of the systems as
specified in Division 26.
ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY GENERAL PROVISIONS
VLK Architects, 2009 28 0500 - 14 2737.03
CCATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
2. Disconnect power, connect the first device, reconnect power, and verify
operational correctness. Repeat until the entire system is verified and
operational.
3.16 PREPARATION FOR ACCEPTANCE (SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION):
A. All systems, equipment, and devices shall be in full and proper adjustment and operation,
and properly labeled and identified.
B. All materials shall be neat, clean and unmarred, and parts securely attached.
C. All extra material as specified shall be delivered and stored at the premises as directed.
D. Test reports of each system and each system's components and As -Built Project
Drawings shall be complete and available for inspection and delivery as directed by the
Owner.
3.17 SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE REQUIREMENTS:
A. Before final acceptance or work, the Contractor shall perform and/or deliver each of the
following in the order stated.
B. The Contractor shall deliver three (3) composite "System Operations and Maintenance"
manuals in three-ring binders, sized to hold the material below, plus 50% excess. Each
manual shall contain in appropriately tabbed sections:
1. A statement of Guarantee including date of termination and the name and phone
number of the persons to be called in the event of equipment failure.
2. A set of Operating procedures for the overall System that includes all required
Owner activities, and that allows for the Owner operation of all attributes and
facilities of the System.
3. A section for each specific type of equipment containing the vendor manuals,
instruction sheets, and any related literature that cam in the original shipping
container for that piece of equipment. Include all warranty cards.
C. Testing:
1. The Contractor shall perform all tests required by Division 28 and those
submitted as part of this Section.
2. The Contractor shall activate all devices for proper system operation, including
supervisory and trouble circuit tests. Similarly, audible alarms will not be
activated except on a one-time, coordinated basis, to check the actual sounding
devices.
3. A test report for each piece of equipment shall be prepared by the Contractor and
submitted to the Owner. This report shall include a complete listing of every
device, the date it was tested, by whom and the results. The final test reports
shall indicate that every device tested successfully. Failure to completely test and
document the tests will result in a delay of final testing and acceptance.
D. As -Built Drawings:
1. After completion of all the tests listed above, and prior to the final acceptance
test, The Contractor shall submit the complete As -Built drawings as identified in
PART 1 — PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS.
2. The final As -Built Drawings shall consist on one set of reproducible prints, two (2)
sets of Point -to -Point Detail Drawings, Equipment Schedules, and the complete
detailed technical data that was shipped by the manufacturer with all installed
equipment.
ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY GENERAL PROVISIONS
VLK Architects, 2009 28 0500 - 15 2737.03
CCATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
E. Final Acceptance Test: The Final Acceptance Test shall demonstrate the installed and
activated System's performance and compliance with System Specifications. However,
before this testing can begin the following must have received and reviewed by the
Owner.
1. System Operations and Maintenance Manuals
2. System Test Reports
3. As -Built Drawings
3.18 NOTICE OF COMPLETION
A. When the Final System Acceptance Requirements described above including the Final
Acceptance Test described above have been satisfactorily completed. The
Owner/Architect shall issue a Lefler of Completion to the Contractor indicating the date of
such completion. The Notice of Completion shall be recorded by the Contractor upon
receipt of the Owner/Architect completion letter. This date of record shall be the start of
the warranty period.
END OF SECTION
ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY GENERAL PROVISIONS
VLK Architects, 2009 28 0500 - 16 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 28 0507
SHOP DRAWINGS, COORDINATION DRAWINGS & PRODUCT DATA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Prepare submittals as required by Division 1 and as outlined below.
B. Submit product data shop drawings only for the following and for items specifically requested
elsewhere in the Contract Drawings and Specifications. Architect/Engineer reserves the right
to refuse shop drawings not requested for review and to imply that materials shall be
provided as specified without exception.
C. The term submittal, as used herein, refers to all:
1. Shop Drawings
2. Coordination Drawings
3. Product data
D. Submittals shall be prepared and produced for:
1. Distribution as specified
2. Inclusion in the Operating and Maintenance Manual, as specified, in the related
section
1.02 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Present drawings in a clear and thorough manner. Identify details by reference to sheet and
detail, schedule, or room numbers shown on Contract Drawings.
B. Show all dimensions of each item of equipment on a single composite Shop Drawing. Do not
submit a series of drawings of components.
C. Identify field dimensions; show relation to adjacent or critical features or work or products.
1.03 COORDINATION DRAWINGS
A. Present in a clear and thorough manner. Title each drawing with project name. Identify each
element of drawings by reference to sheet number and detail, or room number of contract
documents. Minimum drawing scale: 1/4"=V-0".
B. Prepare coordination drawings to coordinate installations for efficient use of available space,
for proper sequence of installation and to resolve conflicts. Coordinate with work specified in
other sections and other divisions of the specifications.
C. For each room containing ESS equipment and each rack with ESS equipment, submit plan
and elevation drawings. Show:
1. Actual ESS equipment and components to be furnished.
2. NEC working space and NEC access to NEC working space.
3. Relationship to other equipment, and components and openings, doors and
obstructions
4. Rack location and dimensions
D. Identify field dimensions. Show relation to adjacent or critical features of work or products.
E. Verify location of ESS station devices and other work specified in this Division.
1. Coordinate with drawing details, site conditions and millwork shop drawings prior to
installation.
SHOP DRAWINGS, COORDINATION DRAWINGS & PRODUCT DATA
VLK Architects, 2009 28 0507 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
2. Where required for clarification, submit shop drawings prior to rough -in and
fabrication.
F. Submit shop drawings in plan, elevation and sections, showing outlets and other devices in
casework, cabinetwork and built-in furniture.
1.04 PRODUCT DATA
A. All product options specified shall be indicated on the product data submittal. All options
listed on the standard product printed data not clearly identified as not part of the product
data submitted shall become part of the Contract and shall be provided.
B. Mark each copy of standard printed data to identify pertinent products, referenced to
specification section and article number.
C. Show reference standards, performance characteristics and capacities; wiring and piping
diagrams and controls; component parts; finishes; dimensions and required clearances.
D. Modify manufacturer's standard schematic drawings and diagrams to supplement standard
information and to provide information specifically applicable to the work. Delete information
not applicable.
E. Mark up a copy of the specifications for the product to indicate a) acknowledgement of the
specification requirement (Comply), or b) acknowledgement that the particular specification
requirement does not apply to this specific project (Not Applicable) or, c) acknowledgement
that the specification requirement cannot be made or that a variance is being submitted for
review to the Architect/Engineer/Owner (Does Not Comply, Explanation:)
1.05 MANUFACTURERS INSTRUCTIONS
A. Submit Manufacturer's instructions for storage, preparation, assembly, installation, start-up
and adjusting.
1.06 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Review submittals prior to transmittal.
B. Determine and verify:
1. Field measurements
2. Field construction criteria
3. Manufacturer's catalog numbers
4. Conformance with requirements of Contract Documents
C. Coordinate submittals with requirements of the work and of the Contract Documents.
D. Notify the Architect/Engineer in writing at time of submission of any deviations in the
submittals from requirements of the Contract Documents.
E. Do not fabricate products, or begin work for which submittals are specified, until such
submittals have been produced and bear contractor's stamp. Do not fabricate products or
begin work scheduled to have submittals reviewed until return of reviewed submittals with
Architect/Engineer's acceptance.
F. Contractor's responsibility for errors and omissions in submittals is not relieved whether
Architect/Engineer reviews submittals or not.
G. Contractor's responsibility for deviations in submittals from requirements of Contract
Documents is not relieved whether Architect/Engineer reviews submittals or not, unless
SHOP DRAWINGS, COORDINATION DRAWINGS & PRODUCT DATA
VLK Architects, 2009 28 0507 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
Architect/engineer gives written acceptance of the specific deviations on reviewed
documents.
H. Submittals shall show sufficient data to indicate complete compliance with Contract
Documents:
1. Proper sizes and capacities
2. That the item will fit in the available space in a manner that will allow proper service
3. Construction methods, materials and finishes
Schedule submissions at least 15 days before date reviewed submittals will be needed.
1.07 SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS
A. Make submittals promptly in accordance with approved schedule, and in such sequence as
to cause no delay in the Project or in the work of any other Contractor.
B. Number of submittals required:
1. Shop Drawings and Coordination Drawings: Submit four opaque reproductions.
2. Product Data: Submit the number of copies the contractor requires, plus those to be
retained by the Architect/Engineer.
C. Accompany submittals with transmittal letter, in duplicate, containing:
1. Date
2. Project title and number
3. Contractor's name, address and telephone number
4. The number of each Shop Drawing, Project Datum and Sample submitted
5. Other pertinent data
D. Submittals shall include:
1. The date of submission
2. The project title and number
3. Contract Identification
4. The names of:
a. Contractor
b. Subcontractor
C. Supplier
d. Manufacturer
5. Identification of the product
6. Field dimensions, clearly identified as such
7. Relation to adjacent or critical features of the work or materials
8. Applicable standards, such as ASTM or federal specifications numbers
9. Identification of deviations from contract documents
10. Suitable blank space for General Contractor and Architect/Engineer stamps
11. Contractor's signed and dated Stamp of Approval
E. Coordinate submittals into logical groupings to facilitate interrelation of the several items.
1. Finishes which involve Architect/Engineer selection of colors, textures or patterns
2. Associated items requiring correlation for efficient function or for installation
1.08 SUBMITTAL SPECIFICATION INFORMATION
A. Every submittal document shall bear the following information as used in the project manual:
1. The related specification section number
2. The exact specification section title
B. Submittals delivered to the Architect/Engineer without the specified information will not be
processed. The Contractor shall bear the risk of all delays, as if no submittal had been
delivered.
SHOP DRAWINGS, COORDINATION DRAWINGS & PRODUCT DATA
VLK Architects, 2009 28 0507 - 3 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
1.09 RESUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS
A. Make resubmittals under procedures specified for initial submittals.
1. Indicate that the document or sample is a resubmittal
2. Identify changes made since previous submittals
B. Indicate any changes which have been made other than those requested by the
Architect/Engineer.
1.10 CONTRACTOR'S STAMP OF APPROVAL
A. Contractor shall stamp and sign each document certifying to the review of products, field
measurements and field construction criteria, and coordination of the information within the
submittal with requirements of the work and of Contract Documents.
B. Contractor's stamp of approval on any submittal shall constitute a representation to Owner
and Architect/Engineer that Contractor has either determined and verified all quantities,
dimensions, field construction criteria, materials, catalog numbers, and similar data or
assumes full responsibility for doing so, and that Contractor has reviewed or coordinated
each submittal with the requirements of the work and the Contract Documents.
C. Do not deliver any submittals to the Architect/Engineer that do not bear the Contractor's
stamp of approval and signature.
D. Submittals delivered to the Architect/Engineer without Contractor's stamp of approval and
signature will not be processed. The Contractor shall bear the risk of all delays, as if no
submittal had been delivered.
1.11 ARCHITECT/ENGINEER REVIEW OF IDENTIFIED SUBMITTALS
A. The Architect/Engineer will:
1. Review identified submittals with reasonable promptness and in accordance with
schedule. Specific equipment submittals that may be required to be expedited shall
be submitted separately without other submittal items not requiring the same prompt
attention.
2. Affix stamp and initials or signature, and indicate requirements for resubmittal or
approval of submittal
3. Return submittals to Contractor for distribution or for resubmission
B. Review of submittals will not extend to design data reflected in submittals that is peculiarly
within the special expertise of the Contractor or any party dealing directly with the Contractor.
C. Architect/Engineer's review is only for conformance with the design concept of the project
and for compliance with the information given in the contract.
1. The review shall not extend to means, methods, sequences, techniques or
procedures of construction or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto.
2. The review shall not extend to review of quantities, dimensions, weights or gauges,
fabrication processes or coordination with the work of other trades.
D. The review and approval of a separate item as such will not indicate approval of the
assembly in which the item functions.
1.12 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Do not make requests for substitution employing the procedures of this Section.
SHOP DRAWINGS, COORDINATION DRAWINGS & PRODUCT DATA
VLK Architects, 2009 28 0507 - 4 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
B. The procedure for making a formal request for substitution is specified in Division 01.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA
A. Submittals shall not be combined or bound together with any other material submittal.
B. Submit individually bound shop drawings and product data for the following when specified or
provided:
1. Low Voltage Wire
2. Electronic Access Control and Intrusion Detection
3. Electronic Surveillance
4. Fire Detection and Alarm
3.02 COORDINATION DRAWINGS
A. Submit coordination drawings as specified.
END OF SECTION
SHOP DRAWINGS, COORDINATION DRAWINGS & PRODUCT DATA
VLK Architects, 2009 28 0507 - 5 2737.03
SECTION 28 0510
CONTRACT QUALITY CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
CCATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
A. Contract quality control including workmanship, manufacturer's instructions, mock-ups
and demonstrations.
1.02 QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAM
A. Maintain quality control over supervision, subcontractors, suppliers, manufacturers,
products, services, site conditions and workmanship to produce work in accordance with
contract documents.
1.03 WORKMANSHIP
A. Comply with industry standards except when more restrictive tolerances or specified
requirements indicate more rigid standards or more precise workmanship.
B. Perform work by persons qualified to produce workmanship of specified quality.
C. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to
withstand stresses, vibration, and racking. Under no conditions shall material or
equipment be suspended from structural bridging.
D. Provide finishes to match approved samples; all exposed finishes shall be approved by
the Architect / Engineer. Submit color samples as required.
1.04 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS
A. Comply with instructions in full detail, including each step in sequence.
B. Should instruction conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from
Architect/Engineer before proceeding.
1.05 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATES
A. When required in individual Specification Sections, submit manufacturer's certificate in
duplicate, certifying that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
1.06 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES
A. When required in individual Specification Sections, manufacturer shall provide a
manufacturer's qualified personnel to observe:
1. Field conditions.
2. Condition of installation.
3. Quality of workmanship.
4. Start-up of equipment.
5. Testing and adjusting of equipment.
B. Manufacturer's qualified personnel shall make written report of observations and
recommendations to Architect/Engineer.
CONTRACT QUALITY CONTROL
VLK Architects, 2009 28 0510 - 1 2737.03
CCATE Renovations
AW Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.01 REFERENCE APPLICABLE SPECIFICATION SECTIONS.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 ADJUSTMENTS AND MODIFICATIONS
A. Contractor shall provide all adjustments and modifications as requested by the
manufacturer's qualified personnel at no additional cost to Owner.
END OF SECTION
CONTRACT QUALITY CONTROL
VLK Architects, 2009 28 0510 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 28 1600
INTRUSION ALARM SECURITY SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. The Contractor shall furnish and install a complete microprocessor based security alarm
system as specified herein. The system shall include, but not be limited to, all control
equipment, power supplies, power circuits, signal initiating and signaling devices, conduit,
wire, fittings, and all other accessories required to provide a complete and operable system.
B. Security system devices indicated are for reference and coordination purposes only. The
installing contractor shall design and provide a complete system, meeting the requirement of
this Section. The Contractor shall provide all security system devices required for complete
system perimeter coverage acceptable to College Station I.S.D. Police Department, all
governing authorities, Engineer and Owner.
C. The system shall include security for all access into building, including but not limited to
doors, roof hatches, windows and interior space motion detection.
1. The Control System shall be the product of a single manufacturer.
2. Tag all conductors or cables at each end.
3. Installation of security panels.
4. Card reader compatible
5. Full coverage of all windows, doors, roof hatches.
6. Preconstruction meeting with Owner's personnel, installing technician and project
superintendent.
D. The system shall be wired as a Class B system for all circuits.
E. DO NOT DEVIATE FROM THE FOLLOWING SYSTEM COMPONENTS:
1. Provide one dry contact per partition for lighting controls relay at the main security
panel location in the MDF. The Building Management Control System will monitor
this contact.
2. Include phone line access to remotely turn intrusion alarm "on" and "off."
3. Provide motion detectors (mostly in corridors) and keypads in locations as shown on
attached floor plan.
4. Stand alone system; not tied to the CCTV system.
5. In case of product failure after warranty or the need arises to expand the system in the
future, system installed should allow for off the shelf motion detectors and other system
components.
6. Power supply should not be in a continuous loop, where one failure could affect
several intrusion alarm components.
7. No Wire Mold or exposed wiring in Public accessible areas.
8. Quality of Products (wiring and components) identified in the Specifications
1.02 CODES AND STANDARDS
The system shall comply with the applicable Codes and Standards as follows:
A. National Fire Protection Association Standards:
1. NFPA 70 National Electric Code
2. NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code
3. NFPA 101 Life Safety Code
B. Local & State Building Codes
INTRUSION ALARM SECURITY SYSTEM
VLK Architects, 2009 28 1600 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
C. Requirements of Local Authorities having Jurisdiction
D. Underwriters Laboratory Requirements and Listings for use in Security Alarm Systems.
E. Requirements of American Disabilities Act (Public law 101-336).
F. Texas Accessibility Standards (T.A.S.)
G. State Fire Marshall.
H. Texas Insurance Code.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Contractor Qualifications:
1. The installing contractor shall be the authorized representative of the Security Alarm
Manufacturer to sell, install, and service the proposed manufacturer's equipment.
The installing contractor shall have represented the security alarm manufacturer's
product for at least five years.
2. The installing contractor shall be licensed by the State of Texas as a security
services contractor to design, sell, install, and service security alarm systems.
3. The installing contractor shall provide 24 hour, 365 day per year emergency service
with factory trained service technicians.
4. The installing contractor shall have been actively engaged in the business of
designing, selling, installing, and servicing security alarm systems.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. The installing contractor and/or equipment supplier shall provide complete and detailed shop
drawings and include:
1. Control panel wiring and interconnection schematics.
2. Complete point-to-point wiring diagrams.
3. Riser diagrams.
4. Complete floor plan drawings locating all system devices.
5. Factory data sheets on each piece of equipment proposed.
6. Detailed system operational description. Any specification differences and deviations
shall be clearly noted and marked.
7. Complete system bill of material.
8. Line by line specification review stating compliance or deviation.
B. All submittal data will be in bound form with Contractor's name, supplier's name, project
name, and state security license number adequately identified.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Ademco Security Panel 1288
B. Field Device
1. Sentrol Devices
2. Intellisense Devices
3. Dual Tech Devices
2.02 CONTROL COMMUNICATOR
A. The unit shall be UL listed for commercial fire alarm and burglar alarm application, and shall
INTRUSION ALARM SECURITY SYSTEM
VLK Architects, 2009 28 1600 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
be FM approved.
1. Integral modem for remote accessibility for the purposes of programming,
diagnostics, and remote control of functions.
2. Equipped with a minimum of eight (8) protective zones and shall have a 1.4-amp
power output capability for alarm signals.
3. Minimum of 1-amp power for auxiliary devices, real-time clock and test timer, battery
charging circuit, on -board diagnostic LED's, automatic resetting circuit breakers,
transformer cover, and RFI protection.
4. Main control panel shall be capable of annunciation alarm, trouble, and supervisory
signals at the local key pad(s) and to a remote security -monitoring center.
5. Main control panel shall incorporate a minimum of four (4) hours standby power.
6. Main control panel shall be located in the Head End Room of the campus or as
directed.
7. Card Reader interface card.
8. Network Interface Module.
9. Remote reset interface module.
B. Programmable features shall include:
1. independently control zones through an independent zone control keypad.
2. Two telephone number dial up for primary and secondary remote receivers.
3. Automatic test reports.
4. Selective zone shunting.
5. Custom text on the associated command centers.
C. Zone Expansion - Expanded to 128 individually annunciated points of protection through the
addition of a two -wire multiplex zone expansion system. Points of protection are annunciated
with custom text at the keypad Command Center and they can be reported to a Receiver.
D. User Pass Codes — One -Hundred Fifty (150) user pass codes shall be available to identify
the user when arming/disarming the system.
E. Protective Circuits shall consist of zones designed for fire and/or panic (holdup, duress, or
emergency) and/or burglary and/or supervisory. Each master zone represents a protective
circuit and shall accommodate normally opened and closed devices. Each of the eight master
zones are programmable as to whether they are controlled versus 24 hours; interior versus
perimeter; instant versus delayed; silent versus audible (and if audible, pulsed or steady); and
local or reporting.
1. Additional programmable parameters for each master zone include the ability to
suppress trouble or restorable reports, designate it as a priority zone (system cannot
be armed if this zone is off -normal), report two separate telephone numbers and
provide for automatic shunting of master zone from the system in the event that the
detection device malfunctions and creates numerous false alarms.
F. Entry/exit delays shall be independently programmable from 10 to 150 seconds. A
pre -warn audible shall be coincident with the entry delay.
G. Programming of all system functions shall be achievable at system site or remotely via the
use of the dial -up telephone network. Minimum programmable functions shall include:
1. User pass codes, entry/exit delay times, master zone personality, day/date/time,
telephone numbers, point of protection text labels, and bell time.
2. A programmable system pass code shall be used to prevent unauthorized remote
programming attempts.
3. Remote programming capability shall be automatic or require user enabling at the
discretion of the user.
H. Remote control via the use of the dial -up telephone network shall include:
1. System arming.
INTRUSION ALARM SECURITY SYSTEM
VLK Architects, 2009 281600 - 3 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
2. Reset of audible signals.
3. Activation/deactivation of eight relay contacts.
4. Interrogation of battery.
5. Zone and armed status.
6. Enable/disable of reporting functions and removing reporting devices for servicing
while the remainder of the system is operative.
Recognitions shall include: UL for central station fire and/or burglary, local burglary and/or
fire; FM for fire, California Fire Marshal for fire; and NYBSA for fire.
J. Miscellaneous built-in features shall include:
1. Real-time clock.
2. Interrogator.
3. Auto -answer modem.
4. Phone line monitor.
5. Loop start/ground start telephone interface.
6. Auto bell test.
7. Lug -in terminal strips, and user controlled zone bypass
K. Command centers shall be microprocessor -based, UL listed, with built in:
1. 16 character illuminated alpha -numeric display.
2. Burglary and fire sounders.
3. Back lighted 15-key touch pad.
4. Pre -warn tone.
5. The arming station shall have the ability to annunciate the English language format
via the 16 character alphanumeric display by the following:
a. Master zone (alarm, service, faulted, and function), (alarm, service, faulted,
missing, extra, function, and location), arm/disarm status (system
diagnostics, time/day/date, and user prompts).
6. Additional features shall include local system test, sensor reset, panic and/or medical
and/or duress alarm initiation, independent master zone by-pass with automatic
restoration to normal status to next system arming, perimeter watch mode, user
changeable pass codes, remote programming initiation, and system/monitoring
service test.
L. Modules and Accessories
1. Zone Expansion
2. Independent zone control
3. Battery charger module
4. Universal enclosure
5. Attack resistant enclosure
6. Relay module - provides eight form "C" dry contact relay outputs for a variety of
programmable responses to alarm, trouble and other system conditions. They shall
be automatically operated through skeds.
7. CRT interface module - provides either RS232 or current loop output for printer
and/or CRT for on -premises recording of events recorded in logger.
8. Provide Printer that connects directly to the Control Panel to provide printed copy of
events recorded in logger.
9. Auxiliary power supplies as required for powering of motion detectors.
10. Keyboard programmer with memory card, case and accessories.
2.03 FIELD DEVICES
A. Directional, wall mounted, long range, dual technology, infra-red/microwave motion sensors:
1. Swivel bracket and single -gang plate as needed to provide aiming flexibility.
2. Protective wire cage as required in areas where damage to detectors is possible due
to activities in corridors, gymnasiums, activity centers, kitchens, etc.
3. Interchangeable lens to be installed on infrared sensor detector to provide full
INTRUSION ALARM SECURITY SYSTEM
VLK Architects, 2009 28 1600 - 4 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
coverage of desired protection area.
B. Directional, ceiling mounted, long range, dual technology infrared sensors / microwave
motion sensors:
1. Bracket for direct mounting to standard 3-1/2" and 4" electrical backboxes.
2. All units to have areas of coverage, which would cause false alarm signals to be
generated, masked out and adjusted to reduce false signals.
3. Mounted in ceilings from 8' to 12' only.
C. Ceiling mounted, 360-degree dual technology, infrared sensors/microwave motion sensors.
1. Bracket for direct mounting to standard 3-1/2" and 4" electrical backboxes.
2. All units to have areas of coverage, which would cause false alarm signals to be
generated, masked out and adjusted to reduce false signals.
2.04 WIRING
A. 4 Conductor / stranded #18 gauge shielded cable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. All wiring shall be in accordance with the National Electrical Code, Local Codes, and article
760 of NFPA Standard 70. All wiring sizes shall conform to recommendations of the
equipment manufacturer, and as indicated on the engineered shop drawings.
B. All wire shall be UL Listed CL2 for limited energy (300V) applications and shall be installed in
conduit. Limited energy MPP wire may be run open in return air ceiling plenums provided
such wire is UL Listed for such applications and is of the low smoke producing fluorocarbon
type and complies with NEC Article 760 if so approved by the local authority having
jurisdiction.
C. No AC wiring or any other wiring shall be run in the same conduit as security alarm wiring.
D. All wire shall be installed in an approved conduittraceway system (except where permitted by
NEC and the local authority having jurisdiction). Maximum conduit "fill" shall not exceed 40%
per NEC.
E. Minimum conduit size shall be 3/4" EMT. Install conduit per engineered shop drawings.
F. Systems utilizing open wiring techniques with low smoke plenum cable shall provide conduit
in all inaccessible locations, inside concealed walls, all mechanical/electrical rooms, or other
areas where wiring might be exposed or subject to damage.
G. All vertical wiring and all main trunk/riser wiring shall be installed in a complete
raceway/conduit system. All riser boxes shall be adequately sized for the number of
conductors transversing the respective box as well as the number of terminations required.
H. Each motion sensor is to be connected into a module for point identification.
I. Motion detectors shall not share one module.
J. All plenum wiring is to be installed parallel and perpendicular to the building structure. Install
wiring tight up against structure for protection. Cable shall be bundled on a maximum of 2'-6"
and secured to the structure at a maximum of 5' on center. Bundling and support shall be
with plenum rated cable ties.
K. Integrate the security system to the College Station ISD Police department for all remote
INTRUSION ALARM SECURITY SYSTEM
VLK Architects, 2009 28 1600 - 5 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
monitoring. Provide all hardware and cabling as required. Coordinate with Owner for
approved remote monitoring service.
3.02 SYSTEM OPERATION
A. When an alarm condition is detected by any of the alarm initiating devices, the following
functions shall occur:
1. The system keypad's interior audible device shall sound until silenced by using
proper security code or after system time out.
2. A custom system alarm message shall be displayed on the LCD display. This display
will show the alarm device location in plain English. Location and partition custom
messages shall be field programmable.
3. The remote signaling tie connection shall be activated at the Owner's approved
central security monitoring location and/or other Owner designated location.
4. Printer shall provide printed copy of events recorded in logger. Install adjacent to
security panel.
3.03 SYSTEM ZONING AND PARTITIONING
A. The system shall employ intelligent initiating devices and interface devices capable of being
recognized and enunciated at the main system keypad and devices partition keypad.
3.04 TESTING
A. Submit a written test report from an authorized representative of the equipment manufacturer
that the system has been 100% tested and approved. Final test shall be witnessed by Owner,
Engineer, and Electrical Contractor and performed by the equipment supplier. Final test
report must be received and acknowledged by the Owner prior to substantial completion.
B. Provide instruction as to proper use and operation of system, for the Owner's designated
personnel.
3.05 WARRANTY
A. Entire system shall be warranted against defects in materials and workmanship for a period
of one (1) year from the date of substantial completion.
3.06 SOFTWARE
A. Provide two electronic copies of the final programming and program software to the Owner's
Security Supervisor after final approval. Provide training as required for programming system.
END OF SECTION
INTRUSION ALARM SECURITY SYSTEM
VLK Architects, 2009 28 1600 - 6 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 28 3102
EXPANSION OF EXISTING FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide all detailed engineering, documentation, materials and devices, installation,
calibration, software programming and check-out necessary for a complete and fully
operational fire detection and alarm system in accordance with the full intent and meaning
of the drawings and specifications including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Supply, install and connect all hardware necessary to provide a complete and
operational fire detection and alarm system.
2. Supply, install and wire all field hardware, power supplies, power circuits, alarm
initiating devices, audible and visual alarm devices, auxiliary control relays, signal
initiating and signaling devices, conduits, wires, fittings and all accessories
required for the system to perform as specified as required. Use and expand the
existing fire alarm control panel.
3. Supply, install, debug and test all software required to provide all software
functions described in accordance with the full intent and meaning of the
drawings and specifications.
4. Coordinate the work specified under this Section with other trades and
contractors to assure a complete and fully operational system.
B. The intent of fire detection and alarm system work is specified in this section and
indicated on the drawings. Fire detection and smoke detection devices indicated are for
design intent, reference and coordination purposes only. The installing contractor shall
design and provide a complete system, meeting the requirement of Specification Section
16726. The Contractor shall provide all fire alarm and initiation devices required for a
complete system acceptable to all governing authorities. Provide proper spacing and
coverage of all devices.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Division 23
B. Sprinkler Systems
1.03 CODES / STANDARDS / REFERENCES (LATEST EDITIONS)
A. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
1.
NFPA 13
Systems, Installation
2.
NFPA 17
Dry Chemical Extinguishing Systems
3.
NFPA 70
National Electrical Code
4.
NFPA 72
National Fire Alarm Code.
5.
NFPA 80
Fire Doors and Fire Windows
6.
NFPA 90A
Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating
Systems.
7.
NFPA 92A
Smoke Control Systems
8.
NFPA 101
Life Safety code.
9.
NFPA 105
Smoke Control Door Assemblies
10.
NFPA 2001
Fire Extinguishing Systems, Clean Agent
B. UL:
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
EXPANSION OF EXISTING FIRE ALARM AND SMOKE DETECTION SYSTEM
VLK Architects, 2009 28 3102 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
1. 217 Single and Multiple Station Smoke Detectors.
2. 268 Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Services.
3. 864 Control Units for Fire Protective Signaling Services.
4 864 Transient protection
5. 1480 Speakers for Fire Protective Signaling Systems
6. UL Fire Protection Equipment Directory.
7. UL Electrical Construction Materials Directory.
C. Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (UFAS).
D. Factory Mutual P7825 Approval Guide
E. American National Standards Institute (ANSI).
F. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA).
G. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE).
H. Electronic Industries Association (EIA-232-C): Interface between Data Terminal
Equipment and Data Communication Equipment Employing Serial Binary Data
Interchange.
I. Requirements of American Disabilities Act (Public Law 101-336).
J. Local Accessibility Standards, Codes, and Ordinances
K. State Fire Marshall or Requirements of Local Authorities having Jurisdiction
L. State Insurance Code.
M. National Building Code.
O. International Building Code.
P. Uniform Building Code.
Q. Local & State Building Codes.
R. Resolve any code or standards deviations discovered in contract documents with the
Engineer 3 days prior to bid of the contract. After bid of Contract, any correction or
additions necessary for compliance with applicable codes shall be made at no additional
cost to the Owner.
S. In addition the above requirements, comply with all local codes. Where discrepancies
exist between codes, drawings or specifications, the more stringent requirement shall
prevail. Installation shall be subject to approval, inspection and test of applicable
regulatory agencies.
1.04 MANUFACTURER'S AND INSTALLER'S QUALIFICATIONS
A. The manufacturer shall regularly and presently produce, as the manufacturer's principle
products, the equipment and material of the type and design specified for this project, and
shall have manufactured the item for at least 5 years. All components of the system shall
be UL compatible with the existing main fire alarm control panel. Manufacturer of all
components shall match existing manufacturer's of similar or same type components
unless otherwise specified or noted on the drawings.
EXPANSION OF EXISTING FIRE ALARM AND SMOKE DETECTION SYSTEM
VLK Architects, 2009 28 3102 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
B. The installing contractor shall have been actively engaged in the business of designing,
selling, installing, and servicing fire alarm systems for at least ten (10) years.
C. The entire Fire Detection and Alarm System shall be installed by a factory authorized
representative of the existing main fire alarm control panel and certified by the
manufacturer to distribute, sell, and install the specified fire alarm and smoke detection
system. Include all components, elements, and testing and acceptance procedures.
D. If the submitted system is being supplied by an authorized distributor of the equipment
manufacturer, the distributor shall have been actively engaged in the sale, installation and
service of the type of system proposed for this project for a minimum of 10 years.
E. Any proposed installer who cannot show evidence of such qualifications may be rejected.
The services of a technician provided and certified by the equipment manufacturer shall
be provided to supervise the installation and tests of the system.
F. Furnish evidence there is an experienced and effective service organization, which carries
a stock of repair parts for the system to be furnished.
G. The installing contractor shall be licensed by the State Fire Marshall to design, sell, install,
and service fire alarm systems as required by the State Insurance Code.
H. The installing contractor shall have on his staff an installation superintendent licensed by
the State Fire Marshall's office for such purpose and under whose supervision installation,
final connections, and check out will take place as required by the State Insurance Code.
I. The installing contractor or equipment supplier shall have on staff a minimum of one (1)
certified NICET Level III state licensed fire alarm planner under whose supervision
system design shall take place. In lieu of a NICET certified state licensed fire alarm
planner, the contractor or supplier may provide design supervision by a registered
professional engineer, who regularly engages in the design of fire alarm systems.
J. The installing contractor shall provide 24-hour, 365 days per year emergency service with
factory trained, state licensed service technicians.
K. Material shall be new and in perfect condition when installed.
L. Electrical or electronic equipment provided under this Division which has been damaged,
exposed to weather, or is, in the opinion of the Architect/Engineer otherwise unsuitable
because of improper fabrication, storage, or installation, shall be removed and replaced
with new equipment, at no additional cost to the owner.
1.05 COORDINATION
A. It shall be the responsibility of the installing contractor to coordinate all requirements
surrounding installation of the fire alarm system with all other trades.
1.06 DEFINITIONS
A. General: Wherever mentioned in this specification or on the drawings, the equipment,
devices and functions shall be defined as follows:
1. Alarm Signal: A signal, which signifies a state of emergency requiring immediate
action and immediate notification of the Fire Department. These are signals such
as:
a. The operation of a manual station.
EXPANSION OF EXISTING FIRE ALARM AND SMOKE DETECTION SYSTEM
VLK Architects, 2009 28 3102 - 3 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
b. The operation of a fire suppression system switch.
2. Pre -Alarm Signal: A signal, which indicates a detection device, has operated.
These signals require and immediate response, but do not require immediate
notification of the Fire Department.
3. Supervisory Signal: A signal, which signifies the impairment of fire protection
system, which may prevent its normal operation.
4. Trouble Signal: A signal, which indicates that a fault, such as an open circuit or
ground, has occurred in the system.
5. Alarm Zone: An alarm initiating device or combination of devices connected to a
single alarm initiating device circuit.
6. Pre -Alarm Zone: A detector or group of detectors connected to a single detector
circuit, which can send an alarm to the central control panel.
7. Supervision Zone: A supervisory signal initiating device or combination of such
devices connected to a single supervisory signal circuit.
8. Communication Zone: A fire alarm indicating device or series of devices arranged
to visually and/or audibly indicate a fire alarm signal.
1.07 SUBMITTALS
A. Fire alarm submittal shall be bound and separate from all other submittals. The installing
contractor and/or equipment supplier shall provide complete and detailed shop drawings
and include:
1. Provide a complete written, item -by -item, line -by-line, specification review stating
compliance or deviation in full description.
2. New control panel wiring and interconnection schematics.
3. Complete point-to-point wiring diagrams of new equipment.
4. Complete floor plan drawings locating all new system devices and existing panels
used for expansion.
5. Complete system bill of material.
6. Detailed system operational description. Any specification differences and
deviations shall be clearly noted and marked.
7. Provide a complete description of system operation.
8. Manufacturer's installation instruction.
9. Bound form with contractor's name, supplier's name, project name, state fire
alarm license, Fire Alarm Planning Superintendent license and all Technician(s)
license adequately identified.
10. Submittal sheets sequentially numbered with the format: sheet number of number
total. For example: 1 of 3.
11. Complete set of manufacturer's operating instructions, circuit diagrams and the
information necessary for proper installation, operation and maintenance.
12. Field and factory wiring diagrams of all new systems and for typical devices
showing all connections with all terminals and interconnections identified.
13. Complete schematic circuit diagrams for all new equipment, including panel
modules.
14. Floor plan drawings including all existing main and new panel and device
locations, conduit sizes between devices and panels; number, size and type of
conductors between devices and panels; walls, doors and graphic room numbers;
exact power requirements and conduit routing with the location of all junction
boxes and exact locations of devices and equipment. Submit a floor plan drawing
circuiting/zoning shall be identified on the drawings.
15. Complete wiring, routing, and schematic diagrams, software descriptions, and
details required to demonstrate that the system has been coordinated and will
function as a system.
16. Manufacturers catalog cut sheets shall be provide for each piece of equipment
with the appropriate model or part number highlighted in cases where multiple
model numbers or part numbers are shown.
EXPANSION OF EXISTING FIRE ALARM AND SMOKE DETECTION SYSTEM
VLK Architects, 2009 28 3102 - 4 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
17. Detailed list of all hardware components, which are included.
18. Installation details for each type of field mounted device installed under this
contract.
19. Point-to-point termination schedules with cable identification numbers and
terminal strip numbers.
20. New fire detection and alarm system's panel configuration complete with
peripheral devices, batteries, power supplies, and interconnection diagrams.
21. Submit a riser diagram of trunk wiring and device -to -device wiring and device to
fire alarm control panel wiring. Riser shall show:
a. Conduit sizes and types.
b. Number, size and type of conductors.
C. Fire detection and alarm devices arranged in the required
circuiting/zoning, as defined in the specifications and on the drawing.
d. Battery calculations to show compliance with the requirements of the
specifications for both alarm and supervisory mode.
22. Submit sound and visual level to confirm that number and location of signaling
devices will provide required sound and visual levels throughout the building.
23. Sample of proposed graphic/text annunciation.
1.08 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Submit complete sets of operation and maintenance manuals. Manual, less as-builts, and
sign -off sheets, shall be provided upon completion of the work and not less than 30 days
prior to final acceptance testing of the system. Approval of the manual will be required
prior to final approval.
B. The Operation and Maintenance Manual shall consist of the following:
1. The manual shall include the names, addresses and telephone numbers of each
Contractor installing products, and of the nearest service representative for each
product. The manual shall have a Table of Contents and tab sheets. Update
manuals to include modifications made during installation, checkout and
acceptance. The manual shall include the sections described in the following
paragraphs.
2. The Functional Design Section shall identify the operational requirements for the
system and explain the theory of operation, design philosophy, and specific
functions. Hardware and software functions, interfaces, and requirements shall be
provided for system operating modes.
3. The Hardware Section shall describe equipment provided, including general
description and specifications, installation and checkout procedure, electrical
schematics and layout drawings. Alignment and calibration procedures,
manufacturer's repair parts list indicating source of supply, interface definition,
signal identification and wiring diagrams. Also, include a complete parts list of all
components as well as a list of recommended spare parts. The spare parts list
shall include, for each item, the manufacturer's name, the model of the part, and
serial number, if appropriate, and a physical and electrical description of the part.
4. The Software Section shall describe programming and testing, starting with a
system overview and proceeding to a detailed description of each software
module, to instruct the user on programming or reprogramming any portion of the
system and other information necessary to enable proper system usage.
5. The Operation Section shall provide instructions for operation of the system,
including system start-up procedures, use of system and applications software,
alarm presentation (where applicable), failure and recovery procedures,
preventive maintenance schedule, parameter schedules and sequence definition,
and system access requirements.
6. The Maintenance Section shall provide descriptions of maintenance for
equipment including inspection, periodic preventive maintenance, fault diagnosis,
EXPANSION OF EXISTING FIRE ALARM AND SMOKE DETECTION SYSTEM
VLK Architects, 2009 28 3102 - 5 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
and repair or replacement of defective components.
7. The Shop Drawings section shall include copies of all approved shop drawings
and submittal materials updated to"AS BUILT".
1.09 AS -BUILT DRAWINGS
A. Prepare and submit detailed "As -Built" drawings. The drawings shall include certified test
of the system, testing and acceptance sign -off sheets, and other items specified
elsewhere to be performed after initial submission of operation and maintenance
manuals, complete wiring diagrams showing connections between all devices and
equipment, both factory and field wired. Include a riser diagram and drawings showing the
as built location of all devices and equipment. The drawings shall show the system as
installed, including all deviations from both the project drawings and the approved shop
drawings. The drawings shall be prepared on uniform sized sheets, the same size as the
project drawings. These drawings shall be submitted to be inserted in the specified
Operations and Maintenance Manuals.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS & SOURCE MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers acceptable contingent upon Products' compliance with the specifications:
1. Match Existing main fire alarm panel manufacturer.
2. Private labeled signaling devices manufactured by Gentex Corp. are not
acceptable.
3. Atlas Soundolier — speakers only
2.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. System shall be a completely multiplexed addressable fire detection and alarm system,
tested and left in first class operating condition.
B. The system shall provide communication with initiating and control devices individually. All
of these devices shall be individually annunciated at the fire alarm control panel.
Annunciation shall include the following conditions for each point:
1. Alarm
2. Trouble.
3. Open
4. Short
5. Device missing/failed.
C. System circuits shall be wired as follows: Initiating device circuit (IDCs) shall be Style B,
indicating appliance circuit (IACs) shall be Style Y, and signal line circuit (SLCs) shall be
Style 4 as describe in NFPA 72.
D. The system shall contain independently supervised initiating device circuits. The alarm
activation of any initiation circuit shall not prevent the subsequent alarm operation of any
other initiation circuit.
E. There shall be supervisory service initiation device circuits for connection of all sprinkler
water flow switches and valves. Device activation shall cause a general alarm at the fire
alarm control panel. Each flow and tamper switch shall have an individual address.
F. There shall be independently supervised and independently fused indicating appliance
circuits for all alarm signaling devices. Disarrangement conditions of any circuit shall not
affect the operation of other circuits.
EXPANSION OF EXISTING FIRE ALARM AND SMOKE DETECTION SYSTEM
VLK Architects, 2009 28 3102 - 6 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
G. Auxiliary manual controls shall be supervised so that an "off normal' position of any switch
shall cause an "off normal" system trouble.
H. The incoming power to the system shall be supervised so that any power failure must be
audibly and visually indicated at the fire alarm control panel. A green "power on" LED shall
be displayed continuously while incoming power is present at the building fire alarm
control panel.
I. The system batteries shall be supervised so that a low battery condition or disconnection
of the battery shall be audibly and visually indicated at the building fire alarm control
panel.
J. The system modules shall be electrically supervised for module placement. Should a
module become disconnected, the system trouble indicator shall illuminate and the
audible trouble signal shall sound.
K. The system shall have provisions for disabling and enabling all circuits individually for
maintenance or testing purposes.
L. The system shall be provided with sufficient battery capacity to operate the entire system
upon loss of normal 120 VAC power in a normal or supervisory mode for a period of 24
hours with 20 minutes of alarm operation at the end of this period as a minimum. The
system shall automatically transfer to the standby batteries upon power failure. All battery
charging and recharging operations shall be automatic. If batteries are fully discharged,
the charger shall recharge them back to full charge in four hours.
M. All external circuits requiring system operating power shall be 24 VDC and shall be
individually fused at the respective fire alarm control panel.
N. All addressable devices shall have the capability of being disabled or enabled individually
from the fire alarm control panel.
O. A maximum of 90 addressable devices shall be multi -dropped from a single pair of wires.
Systems that require factory reprogramming to add or delete devices within the capability
of the designed system are unacceptable. Expansion of the designed system shall be
accomplished by factory reprogramming.
P. The communication format to the addressable devices shall be a completely digital
poll/response protocol to allow t-tapping of the circuit wiring. A high degree of
communication reliability must be obtained by using parity data bit error checking routines
for address codes and check sum routines for the data transmission portion of the
protocol.
Q. Each addressable device must be uniquely identified by an address code. The system
must verify that proper type device is in place and matches the desired software
configuration. All remote or external panels shall have an individual address for
monitoring.
R. Wiring type, distances, survivability, and wiring configuration types shall be approved by
the equipment manufacturer. The system shall allow a line distance of up to 2,500 feet to
the furthest addressable device on a Style Y circuit. Plenum rated fire alarm cable shall
have an outer jacket insulation color of red. Minimum wire size shall be #18 AWG.
S. Each panel extender shall have an individual address.
EXPANSION OF EXISTING FIRE ALARM AND SMOKE DETECTION SYSTEM
VLK Architects, 2009 28 3102 - 7 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
2.03 FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL (FACP)
A. Existing to remain.
B. The fire alarm control panel shall be left with 25% spare module and battery capacity for
future use. Space module(s) shall be provided in panel with terminals labeled. Each new
initiating circuit shall have 25% spare capacity. Space modules shall be provided in the
fire alarm control panel with terminals labeled.
C. New power supplies (if required) shall provide all control panel and peripheral power
needs with filtered power as well as unregulated 24VDC power for external audio-visual
devices. The audio-visual power shall be increased as needed by adding additional
modular expansion power supplies. All power supplies shall be designed to meet UL and
NFPA requirements for POWER -LIMITED operation on all external signaling lines,
including initiating circuits and indicating circuits. Design the system power supplies and
power trunk wiring for all annunciation devices required, and to add a minimum of two (2)
110cd visual devices in the future. Individual circuit design loading shall not exceed 70%
of power supply and system wiring capacity when including the additional spare capacity
for the 110cd visual devices
1. Input power shall be 120VAC 60Hz. The power supply shall provide internal
supervised batteries and automatic charger. The power supply shall provide
positive and negative ground fault supervision, battery/charger fail condition, and
AC power fail indicators. The power supply shall also provide supervision of
modular expansion power supplies as may be required.
2. Surge protection shall be integral to the control panels.
3. Each power supply shall be monitored and have an individual address.
2.04 DIGITAL FIRE ALARM COMMUNICATOR
A. Existing to remain.
2.05 EMERGENCY VOICE ALARM COMMUNICATION SYSTEM:
A. Existing to remain.
2.06 FIELD DEVICES
A. All devices shall be supervised for trouble conditions. The fire alarm control panel shall be
capable of displaying the type of trouble condition (open, short, device missing/failed).
Should a device fail, it shall not hinder the operation of other system devices.
B. Visual Signals
1. Strobe lights shall be of the electronic flashing xenon strobe type and operate on
24 VDC. The strobe light shall be capable of producing 75 candela on axis to
comply with ADA and UL 1638 requirements, and 15, 30, or 110 candela to
comply with UL 1971 requirements. Visual signals in common areas of
illumination shall have synchronized flash. Provide white with red letters.
2. All wall mounted strobe units installed in students toilets, gymnasiums, corridors,
student locker/dressing rooms, kitchen preparation and serving areas, vocational
shops, athletic/drill team training rooms, in cafeterias, and commons areas, shall
have a protective cover, STI Stopper #STI1221 E Series. Provide enviro kit for
locations where dampness, water or dust are present.
C. Combination Alarm Signal and High Intensity Visual Signals
1. Strobe lights shall be of the electronic flashing xenon strobe type and operate on
24 VDC. The strobe light shall be capable of producing 75 candela on axis to
EXPANSION OF EXISTING FIRE ALARM AND SMOKE DETECTION SYSTEM
VLK Architects, 2009 28 3102 - 8 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
comply with ADA requirements, and 15, 30 or 110 candela to comply with UL
1971 requirements. Visual signals in common areas of illumination shall have
synchronized flash. Each unit shall provide a Code 3 Temporal tone. The horn
shall be capable of an output of 95dB at 10', and intensity adjusted accordingly for
the area of coverage. Electronic Mini -Sounder or horn set on low setting shall be
provided in interior rooms 900 square feet or less. Mini -sounder shall not be used
in any corridors, mechanical electrical rooms and similar large spaces and areas
of high ambient noise level. Provide white with red letters.
2. All wall mounted combination units installed in student toilets, gymnasiums,
corridors, student locker/dressing rooms, kitchens, preparation and serving area,
vocational shops, athletic/drill team training rooms, cafeterias, and commons
areas, shall have a protective cover, STI Stopper #STI1220E Series. Provide
enviro kit for locations where dampness, water or dust are present.
3. The audible emergency alarms shell produce a sound that exceeds the prevailing
sound level in the room or space by at least 15 dba or shall exceed any maximum
sound level with a duration of 60 seconds by 5 dba, whichever is louder. Sound
levels for alarm signals shall not exceed 110 dba at the minimum hearing
distance from the audible appliance.
D. Exterior Audible Signal:
1. Provide semi -flush mounted, molded of high impact red thermoplastic and listed
for weatherproof locations.
E. Combination Voice Signal and High Intensity Visual Signals
1. Strobe lights shall be of the electronic flashing xenon strobe type and operate on
24 VDC. The strobe light shall be capable of producing 75 candela on axis to
comply with ADA requirements, and 15, 30 or 110 candela to comply with UL
1971 requirements. Visual signals in common areas of illumination shall have
synchronized flash.
2. All combination units installed in student toilets, gymnasiums, corridors, student
locker / dressing rooms, kitchens, vocational shops, athletic / drill team training
rooms, cafeterias, commons areas, shall have a protective cover, STI Stopper
#STI1220E Series. Provide enviro kit for locations where dampness, water or
dust are present.
3. The visual signal lens housing shall be white with red lettered FIRE or as
approved by Architect. The speaker and visual signal shall be mounted to a
common white speaker baffle. The visual signal shall flash at a rate of minimum
of 1 Hz and maximum of 3 Hz, and shall use a xenon strobe type lamp or other
high intensity long life light source. The lamp intensity shall be a minimum of 75
candela.
4. The speaker shall be UL 1480 compatible with the control equipment. Unit shall
operate within a temperature range of 150OF to -30°F. High output speakers, UL
minimum 87dB at 10 feet with speaker taps of .33.66/1.25/2.5 watts. Standard
output speakers, UL 75-81 dB at 10 feet with speaker taps of .5/1/1.75/2.75
watts. 400-4kHz frequency response. Capacitor for line supervision.
F. Ceiling mounted recessed mounted speakers shall be UL 1480 compatible with the
control equipment. Unit shall operate within a temperature range of 150OF to -30°F. UL
minimum 78-87 dB at 10 feet with speaker taps of .25, .5/1.0/2.0 watts, 400-4kHz
frequency response. Round, white baffle with UL enclosure, tile bridge supports when
recessed in lay -in ceiling tiles Capacitor for line supervision.
G. Surface mounted speakers shall be UL 1480 compatible with the control equipment. Unit
shall operate within a temperature range of 150OF to -30OF UL minimum 100 dB at 15
watts at 10 feet. Speaker taps via 7-position selector switch, 25-vol., .48/.94/1.8/7.5/15
EXPANSION OF EXISTING FIRE ALARM AND SMOKE DETECTION SYSTEM
VLK Architects, 2009 28 3102 - 9 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
watts. 400-4kHz frequency response. Fully enclosed wiring terminals. Capacitor for line
supervision.
H. Manual Pull Station: Addressable pull stations shall contain electronics that communicate
the station's status (alarm, normal) to the control panel over two wires which also provide
power to the pull station. They shall be manufactured from high impact red Lexan with
white lettering. Station shall mechanically latch upon operation and remain so until
manually reset by opening with a key common to all system locks. Pull stations shall be
double action without glass rods. The front of the station shall be hinged to a back plate
assembly and shall be opened with a key to reset the station. The key shall be common
with the control panels. The addressable manual station shall have address setting
programmed electronically and automatically from the fire alarm control panel. Manual
stations shall be designed for semi -flush (surface) mounting on standard electrical box.
All pull stations units shall have a protective cover, STI Stopper II #STI-1130 surface
mounted cover with local alarm horn. Provide STI, Weather Stopper II #STI3150 for
locations where dampness, water or dust are present.
Intelligent Photoelectric Smoke Detectors
1. The detectors shall use the photoelectric principal to measure smoke density and
shall, on command from the control panel, send data to the panel representing
the ANALOG level of smoke density. The detector shall provide automatic
sensitivity "drift" compensation. The detector shall also provide a "maintenance
alert" feature whereby the detector shall initiate a trouble condition should the
unit's sensitivity approach the outside limits of the normal sensitivity window.
2. The detectors shall provide address -setting means electronically and
automatically at the control panel.
3. The detectors shall provide operational status and alarm state LED. Under
normal conditions, the LED shall flash, indicating the detector is operational and
in regular communication with the control panel. An output connection shall also
be provided in the base for connecting an external remote alarm LED.
4. The detector shall be semi -flush ceiling mounted and be provided with modular
detector head with twist -lock base. No radioactive material shall be used.
5. Voltage and RF transient suppression techniques shall be employed as well as
smoke signal verification circuit and an insect screen.
J. Duct photoelectric smoke detectors:
1. Detectors shall be analog addressable type.
2. To minimize nuisance alarms, detectors shall have an insect screen and be
designed to ignore invisible airborne particles or smoke densities that are below
the factory set alarm point. No radioactive material shall be used.
3. Removal of the detector head shall interrupt the supervisory circuit of the fire
alarm detection loop and cause a trouble signal at the control panel.
4. Voltage and RF transient suppression techniques shall be employed as well as
smoke signal verification circuit and an insect screen.
5. Remote alarm/power LED indicator shall be provided. Unit shall be wall or ceiling
mounted in readily visible and accessible area near the location of detector; exact
location of unit to be approved by the Architect/Engineer.
6. Detectors shall operate on the same principles and exhibit the same basic
characteristics as area type photoelectric smoke sensors. The detector shall
operate in air velocities of 300 FPM to 4,000 FPM. Each detector shall interface
directly to the system SLC loop without the requirement of interface zone
modules.
7. The unit shall consist of a clear molded plastic enclosure (or remote mounted
LED status indicator shall be provided next to the smoke detector) with integral
conduit knockouts to provide visual viewing of detector/sensor for monitoring
sensor operation and chamber condition. The duct housing shall be provided with
EXPANSION OF EXISTING FIRE ALARM AND SMOKE DETECTION SYSTEM
VLK Architects, 2009 28 3102 - 10 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
gasket seals to insure proper seating of the housing to the associated ductwork.
Each units sampling tubes shall extend the width of the duct and be provided with
porosity filters to reduce sensor/chamber contamination.
8. The detectors shall provide alarm and power status indication by LED. Under
normal conditions, the LED shall flash, indicating the detector is operational and
in regular communication with the control panel. Steady illumination of the LED
shall indicate that the control panel has detected and verified an alarm condition.
An output connection shall also be provided in the base for connecting an
external remote alarm LED.
9. The detectors shall provide address setting means electronically and
automatically from the control panel.
K. Intelligent Thermal Detectors
1. The detectors shall use dual electronic thermostats to measure temperature
levels in its chamber and shall, on command from the control panel, send data to
the panel representing the analog temperature level.
2. The detectors shall provide address -setting means electronically and
automatically at the control panel.
3. The detectors shall provide operational status and alarm state LED. Under
normal conditions, the LED shall flash, indicating the detector is operational and
in regular communication with the control panel. An output connection shall also
be provided in the base for connecting an external remote alarm LED.
4. The detector shall be semi -flush ceiling mounted and be provided with modular
detector head with twist -lock base.
5. Thermal Detectors shall be combination rate -of -rise and fixed -temperature- rated
at 1350F for areas where ambient temperatures do not exceed 100°F and shall
be 200OF for areas where ambient temperatures exceed 100°F but not 150°F.
The fixed temperature element shall consist of a fusible alloy retainer and
actuator shaft. Detectors shall have a smooth ceiling rating of 2,500 square feet.
Detectors shall be located as shown on the drawings and where required by local
code authority.
6. Provide fixed temperature 190°F detector in kitchen and kiln room in lieu of
combination rate -of -rise / fixed -temperature type.
L. Auxiliary AHU Relays: Air Products model MR-101C relays shall be provided for HVAC
and AHU control and interface. Relays shall be heavy-duty type with contacts rated up to
10 amps at 120V AC, 60 HZ. Relays shall be provided with NEMA I dust cover assembly
and be provided with DPDT contacts as well as activated LED indicator.
M. Monitor Module:
1. Addressable monitor modules shall be provided where required to interface to
contact alarm devices. The monitor module shall be used to connect a
supervised zone of conventional initiating devices to an intelligent SLC loop.
2. The monitor module shall provide address -setting means electronically and
automatically at the control panel. A statustalarm LED shall be provided which
shall indicate that the monitor module is operational and in regular
communication with the control panel, and indicate detection of an alarm
condition.
N. Control Module
1. Control/relay modules shall be provided where required to provide audible alarm
interface and/or relay control interface. The control module shall be used to
connect a supervised zone of conventional indicating devices to an intelligent
loop. The zone may be wired class A or class B - field selected. The control
module may be optionally wired as dry contact (form C) relay.
EXPANSION OF EXISTING FIRE ALARM AND SMOKE DETECTION SYSTEM
VLK Architects, 2009 28 3102 - 11 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
2. The control module shall provide address -setting means electronically and
automatically at the control panel. A statuslalarm LED shall be provided which
shall indicate that the control module is operational and in regular communication
with the control panel and indicate when the device is actuated via the fire alarm
control panel.
O. Auxiliary Interface Points: All auxiliary input points (kitchen hoods, water flow, tamper
switches, fire extinguishing systems etc.) shall be connected as required, and addressed
as a separate initiating point of annunciation at the fire alarm panel and any remote
annunciator as required.
P. Water flow switches / Valve supervisory switches shall be provided and installed by the
fire protection contractor and connected by the fire alarm contractor. Wiring of these field
devices to the fire alarm system shall be the responsibility of the fire alarm contractor. It is
the responsibility of this contractor to ensure the proper function of the system. Each fire
protection zone (flow switch) and (Valve switch) shall be addressed electronically and
automatically at the control panel as a separate point of annunciation at the fire alarm
panel. Coordinate exact location with fire protection contractor and civil drawings.
Q. Beam detectors:
1. Microprocessor based beam detectors, consisting of a separate transmitter and
matching receiver.
2. Coverage up to 350 ft. X 60 ft.
3. LED status indicators for normal (green), alarm (red), and trouble (yellow).
4. The detectors shall provide address setting means electronically and
automatically at the control panel.
2.07 MAGNETIC DOOR HOLDERS, AUTOMATIC FIRE DOORS / SHUTTERS, AND SECURITY
GRILLES WITH AUTOMATIC EMERGENCY EGRESS ELECTRIC LOCK EMERGENCY
EGRESS DOORS
A. Magnetic fire door hold open devices, interface for automatic roll down fire doors/shutters,
and interface for security grilles with emergency egress shall be provided. Coordinate with
Division 8 and Architectural Drawings for exact location.
B. The operation of any alarm, pre -alarm, or supervisory device in the fire alarm system shall
cause the following:
1. Release of the magnetic fire door holding devices, permitting the fire doors to be
closed by the door closer.
2. Permit the automatic roll down fire doors/shutters to close automatically.
3. Permit the security grilles with emergency egress to open automatically_
C. The magnetic door holders, automatic roll down fire doors/shutters, and securi"rilles
with emergency egress, shall be associated with two smoke detectors located on the
ceiling with one on either side of the fire door/shutter or security grille opening. The
operation of either of these detectors shall also cause the magnetic holder to release the
fire door, the automatic fire door/shutter to close, and the security grille with emergency
egress to open.
D. The operation of smoke detectors associated with a magnetic door holder, automatic roll
down fire door, or security grille shall transmit a pre -alarm signal to the fire alarm panel.
2.08 REMOTE ALPHA -NUMERIC DISPLAY ANNUNCIATORS
A. (Where indicated or required by Local Authority Having Jurisdiction) Remote
alpha -numeric annunciator(s) to annunciate all system events and duplicate the displayed
EXPANSION OF EXISTING FIRE ALARM AND SMOKE DETECTION SYSTEM
VLK Architects, 2009 28 3102 - 12 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
status at the main FACP. The annunciator(s) shall be an 80-character display similar to
the main FACP and operate via the system RS485 or RS232 serial output terminal from
the main FACP. The unit shall operate from FACP 24VDC power and function during
system power failure while the system resides on standby batteries. The remote
annunciator(s) shall include:
1. Integral time -date clock
2. System reset
3. System silence
4. System acknowledge
5. Display/step switch
6. Integral trouble buzzer
7. LCD contrast adjust
8. Fire Drill Operation
B. Annunciator shall upon command display the first system alarm, last alarm, and system
alarm count. The following primary controls shall be visible through a front access panel:
1. 80 character alphanumeric display, LCD, LED, or gas plasma
2. Individual red system alarm LED
3. Individual yellow supervisory service LED
4. Individual yellow trouble LED
5. Green "POWER ON" LED
6. Alarm acknowledge key
7. Trouble acknowledge key
8. Alarm silence key
9. System reset key
10. LED test
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXPANSION OF EXISTING SYSTEM
A. Testing of existing systems:
1. Provide complete operational test of existing fire alarm system prior to any
demolition or construction. Verify operation of each device, control panel,
distribution equipment and associated accessories.
2. Provide a complete written report to the Architect, indicating any deficiencies of
the existing system in relation to each component's intended function. In addition,
provide deficiencies of the existing system with regard to current Code, ADA, and
TAS requirements. Provide the written report 14 days prior to any work related to
the expansion of the existing system.
3. Testing of the existing system shall include all areas and building served by the
existing system.
B. Expand the existing system to include requirement specified and as required by the local
authority having jurisdiction. Verify compatibility of new equipment with existing system.
C. Install remote alarm indicators for smoke detectors in readily accessible locations as
required by the local authority having jurisdiction.
3.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Installation shall include the delivery, storage, setting in place, fastening to the building
structure, interconnection of the system components, alignment, adjustment and all other
work, whether or not expressly specified, which is necessary to result in a tested and
operational system.
EXPANSION OF EXISTING FIRE ALARM AND SMOKE DETECTION SYSTEM
VLK Architects, 2009 28 3102 - 13 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
B. All installation practices shall be in accordance with, but not limited to, the specifications
and drawings. Installation shall be performed in accordance with the applicable standards,
requirements and recommendations of the National Electrical Code and any authorities
having jurisdiction. Proper protection against corrosion shall be provided on all electrical
equipment in accordance with the requirements of the National Electrical Code. The
installation shall conform to all manufacturers recommendations.
C. All equipment shall be firmly secured in place unless requirements of portability dictate
otherwise. Fastenings and support shall be adequate to support their loads with a safety
factor of at least three.
D. All boxes, equipment, etc., shall be plumb and square. The contractor must take such
precautions as are necessary to prevent and guard against electrostatic hum, to supply
adequate ventilation, and to install the equipment to provide reasonable safety for the
operator.
E. In the installation of equipment and cables, coordinate with Architectural drawings for
possible conflicts with millwork, casework, marker boards, furniture, lockers, etc., and
notify the architect of any discrepancies. Verify modifications before proceeding with
installation.
F. Mount end -of -line resistor for each box circuit in backbox above ceiling located at the last
manual alarm station or automatic initiating device in a circuit. Mark device accordingly in
the field.
G. Contractor shall submit on completion of system verification, a point -by -point check list
indicating the date and time of each item inspected and issue a certificate confirming that
the inspection has been completed and the system is installed and functioning in
accordance with the Specifications prior to date of substantial completion.
H. Provide remote alphanumeric display annunciators as required by the Local Authority
Having Jurisdiction and/or where indicated on the drawings.
I. Visual signals, where wall mounted shall be 80" AFF. Where visual signals are ceiling
mounted, maximum height shall be 30-feet. All visual signaling devices shall be installed
per NFPA 72.
J. Detectors shall be installed per NFPA 90A and be listed with the fire alarm control panel.
K. Power for magnetic door holders should be provided from the nearest receptacle circuit
wired through fire alarm relay.
L. Smoke detectors shall be mounted to a 4-inch octagon box with hanger bar or with box
secured to building structure.
M. Provide power via 120-volt, 20-Amp dedicated circuits with lock -on provisions at the
respective circuit breaker for each new main fire alarm control panel, each new panel
extender and each new remote power supply at no additional cost to the Owner. The
complete fire alarm system shall be powered under emergency power when emergency
life safety power is available at the project site. When emergency life safety power is not
available at the project site, power shall originate from the nearest available 120-volt
panel.
3.03 CABLE AND BOXES INSTALLATION
A. All circuits shall be protected to avoid interruption of service due to short-circuiting or
EXPANSION OF EXISTING FIRE ALARM AND SMOKE DETECTION SYSTEM
VLK Architects, 2009 28 3102 - 14 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
other conditions, which might adversely affect the connected devices. Each individual
signaling circuit shall be classified as a circuit pair.
B. All cabling in racks, cabinets and junction boxes shall be neatly strapped, dressed and
adequately supported. Cable installation shall conform to good engineering practices and
to the standards of the National Electrical Code.
C. Cables shall be terminated with the proper connector required for the associated
operation of the equipment to which it is connected. Screw terminal blocks shall be
furnished for all cables, which interface with racks, cabinets, consoles or equipment
modules.
D. All cables within a rack, console or junction box shall be grouped according to the signals
being carried to reduce signal contamination.
E. Where shielded conductors enter a panel or enclosure, and where power wiring exists,
provision shall be made to provide physical isolation of signal and power conductors.
F. Supply and install all fittings and accessories whether or not they are specified, required
for proper, safe and reliable operation of the system.
G. All wire shall be installed in an approved conduit/raceway system (except where permitted
by NEC and the local authority having jurisdiction). Maximum conduit fill shall not exceed
40%.
H. Minimum conduit size shall be 3/4" EMT with insulated bushings. Install conduit per
engineered shop drawings.
I. Systems utilizing open wiring techniques with low smoke plenum cable shall provide
conduit in all inaccessible locations, inside concealed walls, all mechanical/electrical
rooms, or other areas where wiring might be exposed to view and or subject to damage.
J. All vertical wiring and all main trunk/riser wiring shall be installed in a complete
raceway/conduit system. All riser boxes shall be adequately sized for the number of
conductors transversing the respective box as well as the number of terminations
required.
K. All junction boxes containing fire alarm wiring are to be painted red.
L. All plenum wiring is to be installed parallel and perpendicular to the building structure.
Cable shall be bundled with cable ties on a maximum of 2'-6". Install cables in D-ring
hangers secured to the structure at a maximum of 5' on center. Cable shall not lie on
ceiling grid or ceiling tiles.
M. The system ground is to be connected to the local ground bus. Under no conditions shall
the AC neutral either in a power panel or in receptacle outlets be used for a reference
ground.
N. All wiring shall be in accordance with NFPA 72, the National Electrical Code, Local
Codes. All wiring sizes shall conform to recommendations of the equipment
manufacturer, and as indicated on the engineered shop drawings.
O. All wire shall be UL Listed FPL for limited energy (300V) and fire alarm applications and
shall be installed in conduit. Limited energy FPLP or MPP wire may be run open in return
air ceiling plenums provided such wire is UL Listed for such applications and is of the low
smoke producing fluorocarbon type and complies with NEC Article 760 and approved by
EXPANSION OF EXISTING FIRE ALARM AND SMOKE DETECTION SYSTEM
VLK Architects, 2009 28 3102 - 15 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
the local authority having jurisdiction.
P. No other wiring shall be run in the same conduit as fire alarm wiring.
Q. All fire alarm wiring to be red. All fire alarm circuits shall be identified at each termination
and at each 25 feet between terminations.
3.04 ALARM SYSTEM SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
A. General:
1. All fire alarm circuits shall be electrically supervised.
2. Automatic response functions shall be accomplished by the first device initiated.
Alarm functions resulting from initiation by the first device shall not be altered by
subsequent alarms. An alarm signal shall be the highest priority. A pre -alarm
signal shall have second priority and supervisory or trouble signals shall have
third and fourth level priority. Signals of a higher level priorityshall take
precedence over signals of lower priority even though the lower priority condition
occurred first.
B. Fire alarm operating sequences shall be as follows:
1. Activation of any automatic detector, manual station, or sprinkler flow switch shall
cause the location of alarm to be identified in an audible and visual manner at the
building fire alarm control panel (FACP), and shall initiate the following events:
a. The system common alarm LED on the CPU Module shall flash. The
internal audible trouble device shall sound. Acknowledging the alarm
condition shall silence the audible trouble device and revert the flashing
common alarm LED to a steady state.
b. The 80-character display shall indicate all applicable information
associated with the alarm condition including: zone, device type, device
location, and time of alarm. Location and zoning messages shall be
custom field programmed to respective premises.
C. Any remote or local annunciator LED's associated with the alarm point
shall be illuminated as herein specified.
d. The remote signaling connection shall be activated relaying the alarm
signal to an approved central station (central station connection and
service provided by Owner). Point ID and descriptor must be sent and
received.
e. All automatic events programmed to the alarm point shall be executed
and the associated indicating devices and/or outputs activated.
f. Activate all audible/Visual alarm devices. Where prerecorded voice
announcement is required or specified, the prerecorded announcement
shall be preceded with attention tone(s), followed by the approved
prerecorded announcement and continue in a cycle until the system is
reset. Manual voice announcement shall interrupt the prerecorded cycle
and the prerecorded cycle shall resume automatically after three minutes.
g. De -activate all HVAC systems.
h. De -energize the kitchen hood supply/exhaust fans as required by local
authority having jurisdiction.
i. Close all related smoke dampers.
j. Close all related smoke/fire dampers.
k. Release all magnetic door hold open devices.
1. Open all security grilles with emergency egress.
m. Activate to close all related fire and smoke doors and shutters.
n. Activate signaling connection to the elevator as required by the local
authority having jurisdiction.
o. Signal the building automation system and security system, and Owner's
EXPANSION OF EXISTING FIRE ALARM AND SMOKE DETECTION SYSTEM
VLK Architects, 2009 28 3102 - 16 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
security/police personnel as directed by Owner/Architect. The audible
alarms shall be inhibited from being silenced for a period of 3 minutes
after commencing operation unless alarm is acknowledged and
appropriate action has been taken.
p. Release the electric strike, unlocking, but not unlatching, locked doors
controlled by an access control system. Release Counter Shutters and
hold -open devices on all fire and smoke doors.
q. Activate automatic recall operation of elevators as required by local
authority having jurisdiction.
r. Record all events on the system printer when an existing printer is part
of the system.
2. Activation of duct mounted smoke detector on the HVAC equipment, or a smoke
detector mounted in the return/supply air stream of any fan shall shut down the
unit as required by NFPA. The activation of one of these detectors shall send a
supervisory signal to the control panel and also initiate the Alarm Sequence of
Operation.
3. Activation of a control valve supervisory switch shall initiate the following events:
a. The activation of any sprinkler valve supervisory (tamper) switch shall
activate the system supervisory service audible signal and illuminate the
LED at the building fire alarm control panel (FACP). Differentiation
between valve tamper activation and opens and/or grounds on the
initiation circuit wiring shall be provided.
b. Activation of a sprinkler system control valve supervisory switch shall not
prevent the events listed under Article 3.04.
C. Restoring the valve to the normal position shall cause the supervisory
service audible signal to pulse, indicating the restoration to normal
position. The supervisory service reset key shall be provided to silence
the audible signal.
4. Activation of the smoke detector and heat detector in the elevator machine room
and at top of elevator shaft shall cause the elevators' controllers to be tripped by
way of the shut trip breaker, and shall also initiate the events listed under Article
3.04.
5. Any subsequent fire alarm shall reactivate the alarm indicating appliances and
activate the respective control sequences described above.
6. Upon reset of the fire alarm control panel, HVAC units shall be capable of being
started, and resume normal operation.
C. Activation of the manual evacuation (drill) switch shall operate the alarm indicating
appliances without causing other control circuits to be activated. However, should true
alarm occur, all alarm functions should occur as described.
D. ALARM VERIFICATION shall be field programmed for each respective detector. Global
verification will not be acceptable. The verification sequence is activated after a "check"
procedure and the panel will wait a field programmable delay period (0-50 seconds) then
proceed to re -sample the detector for continued presence of smoke. If the alarm condition
still exists or a non -verified device is actuated during the verification period, the system
will then initiate all alarm sequences specified herein. The system shall incorporate the
ability to log in memory the number of verification events that have occurred for each
selected device.
3.05 COMMISSIONING THE SYSTEM
A. The installing contractor shall be responsible for verifying that each new or relocated
component of the system is fully operational and in conformity with the specifications. He
shall also be responsible for insuring that all elements function together as a system in
accordance with the specifications.
EXPANSION OF EXISTING FIRE ALARM AND SMOKE DETECTION SYSTEM
VLK Architects, 2009 28 3102 - 17 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
B. A state licensed and factory trained technical representative of the manufacturer shall
supervise the final control panel connections and testing of the system. Upon completion
of the acceptance tests, the owner and/or his representatives shall be instructed in the
proper operation of the system.
C. The installing contractor shall functionally test each and every device in the entire system
for proper operation and response. Any new or relocated items located within the
construction or renovation area found not properly installed or non-functioning shall be
replaced or repaired and retested. The final test indicating a fully functional fire alarm
system shall be recorded and printed and a copy submitted to the Architect, Engineer and
Owner.
D. The installing contractor shall provide a complete written report on the functional test of
the entire system after all existing deficiencies of the existing system have been corrected
by the Owner, or as directed by the Owner. The test report shall be signed and dated by
the licensed fire alarm superintendent responsible for supervising the final system test
and checkout.
E. The installing contractor's fire alarm superintendent shall test the entire system in the
presence of the local authorities having jurisdiction. The contractor shall be responsible
for making any changes, adjustments, or corrections, as may be required by the local
authorities. The Contractor shall affix his certification label and installation certificate to
the interior of the main fire alarm control panel.
F. The testing and acceptance shall be performed within 30 days after the fire alarm
installation is completed. The test shall be performed by a minimum of two qualified fire
alarm system technicians acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. The test which is
a comprehensive 100 percent inspection and test of all fire alarm system equipment, shall
include the following:
1. Fire alarm control equipment: a visual and functional test of the fire alarm control
and auxiliary control equipment.
2. A visual inspection shall be conducted to establish that all electrical connections
and equipment, as required, are properly installed and operating.
3. A functional fault simulation test shall be conducted on all relevant field wiring
terminations to ensure that wiring is properly supervised as required.
4. Indicators shall be tested to ensure proper function and operation.
5. Control panel auxiliary functions shall be functionally tested to verify proper
operation.
6. Control panel supervisory and alarm current readings shall be taken to verify that
the control panel has the appropriate power supplies and standby batteries to
operate the system as required. A three -minute general alarm stress test, both
under AC power and standby power, shall be conducted to further ensure
complete operation of the system.
7. Fire alarm peripheral devices; All fire alarm peripheral devices shall be
functionally tested and the location and testing information recorded for each
device.
8. Manual initiating devices:
a. Each manual fire alarm station shall be functionally tested for alarm
operation.
b. Each manual fire alarm station shall be functionally tested for proper
wiring supervision.
9. Automatic initiating devices:
a. Each automatic initiating device shall be activated in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions to ensure proper operation.
b. Each automatic initiating device shall be functionally tested for proper
EXPANSION OF EXISTING FIRE ALARM AND SMOKE DETECTION SYSTEM
VLK Architects, 2009 28 3102 - 18 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
wiring supervision.
C. Each automatic initiating device shall be inspected to ensure proper
placement and mounting as required by specifications.
10. Alarm signaling devices:
a. Each alarm signaling device shall be tested and decibel reading taken at
10' from the device and recorded to ensure proper operation.
b. Each alarm signaling device shall be functionally tested for proper wiring
supervision.
C. Decibel reading shall be taken to ensure that the alarm signal level can
be clearly heard in all areas of the facility.
d. All visual alarm indicators shall be functionally tested to ensure proper
operation and that they are clearly visible.
11. Reporting: Upon completion of the initial verification audit, a report shall be sent
to the Architect/Engineer indicating that all fire alarm equipment has been tested
and is in 100 percent operation. The report shall also contain the audit testing
information as to the location and operational status of each peripheral device.
The 100 percent audit shall be performed by a factory -trained representative.
G. It is the intent of these specifications and of the Architect/Engineer that a continued
program of system maintenance be provided by the Owner in compliance with NFPA 72.
It is mandatory that the installing Contractor provide such services and make available
these services to the Owner upon completion of the project.
H. Upon completion of installation and full acceptance testing, submit NFPA 72 certificate of
compliance that the total fire alarm system, including any subsystems, is fully functional
and that the components are UL listed for function intended.
3.06 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
A. Each new piece of equipment provided shall be provided with a permanently engraved or
embossed or silkscreen identification tag. The tag shall include the following information:
1. Name of manufacturer.
2. Manufacturer's equipment description.
3. Serial number and model number.
4. Voltage and current rating.
3.07 SPARE PARTS AND TOOLS
A. Interchangeable Parts: All spare parts furnished shall be directly interchangeable with the
corresponding components of the installed system. Spare parts shall be packaged and
identified by nameplate, tagging, or stamping. Spare parts shall be delivered to the site in
unopened cartons for storage as directed by the Owner.
B. Spare Parts: Provide minimum of one, or 5% of renovation area total, whichever is
greater unless noted otherwise.
1. Spare shut down modules
2. Spare detectors of each type in the system
3. Spare alarm indicating devices of each type in the system
4. Spare manual pull stations
5. Spare protective covers of each type in the system.
6. Spare relays/controls required for connection to smoke and fire/smoke dampers
7. Devices listed above are to be installed as directed by Architect/Engineer or local
code authorities at no additional cost to the Owner. Unused spare parts are to be
parts for Owner's cabinet.
8. Provide one telescopic pole for each type of area detector located above 12 feet
AFF to facilitate removal and installation of detector head.
EXPANSION OF EXISTING FIRE ALARM AND SMOKE DETECTION SYSTEM
VLK Architects, 2009 28 3102 - 19 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
C. Provide two copies of the final software programmed into the fire alarm system.
D. Parts list: Furnish a list, in duplicate, of all other parts and accessories the manufacturer
of the system recommends to be stocked for maintenance.
3.08 KEYS
A. Keys and locks for all equipment shall be identical to the existing building master key for
the fire alarm system.
3.09 SMOKE DAMPERS AND FIRE/SMOKE DAMPERS
A. Smoke dampers and combination fire/smoke dampers shall be controlled by an automatic
alarm initiating device. Smoke dampers installed to isolate the air handling system shall
be arranged to close automatically when the system is in alarm.
B. Coordinate motor operator voltage with supplier.
C. Open all dampers prior to starting air handling equipment.
D. Provide 120V power from nearest general purpose 20A receptacle circuit as required, or
as noted otherwise.
3.10 GRAPHIC FLOOR PLANS
A. Provide updated color coded floor plan detailed with actual room names, actual graphic
room numbers as directed by the Owner, and adequate information to direct people to the
fire alarm devices in alarm and to exits with non -fading floor plan media. Do not use
architectural plan room names and numbers.
B. Each plan shall clearly relate the room numbers on the annunciator to the area
description on the floor plan. All fire alarm devices located to correspond with the
annunciator.
C. The floor plan shall be solvent welded in acrylic plastic.
1. Mount in an extruded aluminum frame next to the main fire alarm control panel.
D. Install graphic floor plans as directed by Architect/Owner prior to substantial completion.
Each area or room designation shall be verified with the fire alarm device during testing.
3.11 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS
A. The contractor is to ensure all areas of the renovation and new construction are covered
with visual and audio alarm devices for occupant notification of a fire alarm.
B. Coordinate door hold devices with door and door hardware.
C. Provide interface with and coordinate shunt -trip circuit breakers and control devices with
kitchen hood fire control systems (where new kitchen hood fire control systems are
provided) and elevator equipment (where new elevators are provided).
D. Alarm circuit power supplies and circuiting shall be designed and installed to accept an
additional five (2) 110cd visual devices for future expansion. The initial design shall not
exceed 70% of the rated power supply and circuit capability with the two additional 110cd
devices installed.
EXPANSION OF EXISTING FIRE ALARM AND SMOKE DETECTION SYSTEM
VLK Architects, 2009 28 3102 - 20 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
3.12 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A. Final acceptance of the FIRE ALARM SYSTEM by the owner, local code authorities and
Occupancy Permit has been issued.
B. All fire alarm system shop drawings, operating and maintenance manuals, maps and as -
built drawings shall be submitted to and accepted by the Architect / Owner prior to date of
substantial completion.
3.13 WARRANTY
A. All new fire alarm devices, new panels, new equipment and new accessories, including
labor and material, shall be free from defects in workmanship and materials, under
normal use and service, for a period of one year from the date of substantial completion.
Any equipment or workmanship shown to be defective shall be repaired, replaced or
adjusted during normal working hours at no cost to the owner within 4-hour notification.
B. Repair services and replacement parts for the system to be furnished under this Contract
shall be available for a period of ten years after the date of final acceptance. Service
during the warranty period shall be provided within four hours after notification and all
repairs shall be corrected within 24 hours after notification throughout the warranty
specified in this section.
C. The installing contractor shall provide 24 hour, 365 days per year emergency service with
factory trained, state licensed service technicians.
D. The equipment manufacturer shall be represented by a local service organization and the
name of such shall be furnished to the Owner, Architect, and Engineer.
E. Provide a certified fire alarm test of the complete system at the end of the warranty period
and correct any and all items to bring the system to an approved status at no cost to the
Owner. Clean all smoke detectors and replace all defective parts at no cost to the Owner.
F. Guarantee labor, materials, and equipment provided under this contract against all
defects for a period of one year after the date of final acceptance and receipt and
approval of "As -Built' drawings and schematics of all equipment.
END OF SECTION
EXPANSION OF EXISTING FIRE ALARM AND SMOKE DETECTION SYSTEM
VLK Architects, 2009 28 3102 - 21 2737.03
SECTION 31 1000
SITE CLEARING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
A. Section Includes: Clearing the site of site improvements and obstructions to make way for new work.
1.02 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Existing Conditions: Contractor shall visit the site and verify the nature and extent of clearing work required.
B. Protection: Contractor shall be responsible for the protection of adjoining property and improvements outside
the limits of the work. Protect walks, curbs and paving from damage by heavy equipment and trucks. Take
precautions to prevent injury to trees which are to remain.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not applicable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PERFORMANCE
A. Clearing:
1. Breakup and remove paving and walks and curbs. Dig out and remove buried obstructions to a depth of
24" below natural grade or 24" below the intended excavation elevation, whichever is lower.
2. Refer to SECTION 01 1100 -SUMMARY OF WORK for handling of piping and conduit encountered below
grade.
B. Pavement Removal
1. Bituminous and concrete pavements shall be removed to neatly sawed edges. Saw cuts shall be made
to a minimum depth of 1-1/2". If a saw cut in concrete pavement falls within 3' of an existing score joint,
construction joint, saw joint, cold joint, expansion joint, oredge, the concrete shall be removed to that joint
or edge. All saw cuts shall be parallel and/or perpendicular to the line of existing pavement. If an edge of
a cut is damaged subsequent to saw cutting, the concrete shall again be sawed to a neat, straight line for
the purpose of removing the damaged area.
C. Disposal:
1. Cleanup and remove from the site the broken paving, rubble, and debris that is existing and resulting from
the clearing and grubbing operations.
2. Material to be wasted shall be legally disposed of off site.
3. Burning of combustible materials on the site will not be permitted.
3.02 BACKFILLING
A. All holes, cavities, and depressions in the ground caused by site preparation operations will be backfilled and
tamped to normal compaction and will be graded to prevent ponding of water and to promote drainage. In areas
that are to be immediately excavated, the Architect/Engineer may permit holes, etc., to remain open.
3.03 STORM WATER MANAGEMENT PRACTICES
A. During the progress of the work, the contractor shall provide and maintain storm water erosion and silt control
measures in place at the site and shall provide additional erosion control barriers, silt fences, and other
techniques in accordance with best management practices. Contractor shall remove storm water management
items at completion of project.
END OF SECTION
SITE CLEARING
VLK Architects, 2009 31 1000 -1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 312313
BUILDING SUBGRADE PREPARATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Excavating, filling, backfilling, grading, and compacting of earth at the building site.
1. Building foundations shall consist of:
a. Concrete floor system placed on grade.
b. Provide "Select Fill; Concrete Floor System" under those areas of the building to have concrete floor
slab on grade (not suspended).
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 014523 -Testing and Inspection Services.
2. Section 31 1000 -Site Clearing.
3. Section 31 2300 - Excavation and Fill.
4. Section 31 2300 - Trenching and Backfilling.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Samples: Submit in accordance with SECTION 01 3323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND
SAMPLES. Submit a one gallon sample and material analysis results of imported topsoil from a testing
laboratory indicating compliance with these specifications. Any topsoil delivered to the site which does not
comply with the approved sample shall be re -tested at the Contractor's expense and replaced.
B. Test Reports:
1. Submit copies of test reports in accordance with SECTION 01 4523 - TESTING AND INSPECTION
SERVICES.
2. Submit copies of test reports for select fill material. No select fill material shall be delivered to the site until
after the tests have been made and test reports confirmed.
3. Compaction Tests: Submit copies of compaction test reports.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Laboratory Control: Select fill material and imported topsoil, if required, shall be inspected and tested by an
independent testing laboratory.
1. Testing laboratory shall make tests of the soil from the selected source to determine that it meets the
specified requirements for select fill and imported topsoil.
1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Temporary Sheeting: Shore and sheet excavations to protect utilities and to prevent cave-in. Maintain sheeting
secure until permanent construction is in place. Remove sheeting as excavations are backfllled.
B. Drainage: Provide for adequate surface drainage during construction to keep the site free of surface water
without creating a nuisance in adjacent areas.
C. Pumping: Keep the excavations free of water at all times by pumping or other means. This shall be the
responsibility of the Contractor regardless of the cause, source, or nature of the water.
D. Protection:
1. Property: Protect adjoining property, including improvements outside the limits of the work. Protect walks,
curbs, and paving from damage by heavy equipment and trucks.
2. Trees: Protect tops, trunks, and roots of trees on the site which are to remain. Box or fence trees
vulnerable to damage during construction. Remove interfering branches with care and cover scars with
tree paint. Do not permit fires, storage of materials or excavation within the branch spread of trees to
remain.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 SOIL MATERIALS
A. Select Earth Fill; Concrete Floor System: Clean clayey sand or a very sandy clay soil from a selected borrow
source with a Liquid Limit less than 35 and a Plasticity Index between 10 and 18.
BUILDING SUBGRADE PREPARATION
VLK Architects, 2009 31 2313 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
B. Select Earth Fill; Perimeter Grade Beam: Clean sal from on site or a selected borrow source with a Liquid Limit
between 30 and 49 and a Plasticity Index (PI) between 19 and 30.
C. Unselected Earth Fill: Clean, sandy soil free of organic matter and refuse, roots, clay lumps and rocks larger
than 2".
D. Granular Fill: Clean gravel or crushed rock graded to produce a passing 13/4" sieve and retained on ''/." sieve.
Granular fill for areas to be covered with membrane waterproofing shall be clean pea gravel graded no larger
than %".
E. Free -Draining Fill: Coarse sand or sand and gravel mixture with less than 12% passing a No. 200 sieve, and
a Plasticity Index less than 4.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Remove grass, weeds, roots and other vegetation from areas to be excavated, filled and graded. Fill stump
holes and like small excavations with suitable material placed in lifts and thoroughly tamped.
3.02 EXCAVATION
A. General: Excavate to the lines, grades and sections shown on the drawings. Allow space for the construction
of forms. Excavate as required regardless of the condition or type of material encountered.
1. Cut areas accurately to the indicated cross -sections and grades. Take care to prevent excavation below
the grades indicated. Any bottoms and slopes that are undercut shall be backfilled with earth fill and
compacted.
2. Finish the excavating required for graded areas to a tolerance of 0.10 foot above or below the rough grade.
3. Remove underground obstructions except for piping and conduit which shall be handled as specified in
SECTION 01 1100 - SUMMARY OF WORK.
B. Scarify the subgrade soil in place to a depth of 12" and compact to a minimum of 95% of Standard Density, at
a moisture content in the range of 2 percent belowto 2 percent above optimum moisture content, in accordance
with ASTM D 698.
C. Excavation for Select Fill:
1. Excavate under those areas of the building to have concrete floor slab on grade (not suspended),
2. Replace weak existing soils that were excavated as part of the proof -rolling operations.
3. Excavation should be defined by a perimeter that extends at least five feet horizontal distance away from
the outside face of the structures.
4. All building pad subgrade surfaces exposed after the stripping of the vegetation and the removal of the
existing surfrcial soils and other surficial building foundation, utility, sidewalk, or paving materials should
be proof -rolled with a 10-ton pneumatic roller or equivalent vehicle to identify any areas of soft or weak
soils.
5. The soft or weak soils in the identified areas should then be removed and replaced -with compacted select
fill.
D. Footings: Make excavations for footings to undisturbed soil and leave the bottom bearing surface clean and
smooth, accurately to indicated grade and elevation. If footing excavations are made deeper than intended, only
concrete shall be used as fill to bring bottom bearing surface up to desired elevation.
3.03 FILL AND BACKFILL
A. Filling: Construct compacted fills to the lines, grades and sections shown on the drawings.
1. Complete stripping and wasting operations in advance of fill construction.
2. Deposit and mix fill material in loose lifts less than 6" thick, loose measurement. Manipulate each layer until
the material is uniformly mixed and pulverized.
3. Fill material shall have a moisture content of 1 percent below to 3 percent above optimum, to achieve
specified compaction. If fi►I is too wet, dry by aeration to achieve desired moisture content. If fill is too dry,
add water and mix in by blading and discing to achieve desired moisture content.
4. Exercise care to prevent movement or breakage or walls, trenches, and pipe during filling and compaction.
Place fill near such items by means of light equipment and tamp with pneumatic or hand tampers.
B. Backflling: Construct compacted fill against and around concrete beams below finish grade.
1. Do not backfill until underground construction has been inspected, tested and approved, forms removed,
and the excavations cleaned of trash and debris.
BUILDING SUBGRADE PREPARATION
VLK Architects, 2009 31 2313 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
2. Do not backfill against beams until all of the permanent structural concrete supports and bracing members
are in place or until adequate shoring has been erected tD prevent displacement and deflection of the
beams under horizontal load. Exercise care in the placing and compacting of backfill so as not to damage
the structure in any way.
3. Provide "Select Earth Fill; perimeter grade beam" at backfill for grade beams and footings. Unless noted
otherwise, concrete walls extending five feet or more below the outside grade shall be backfilled with sand
to within two feet of finish grade. The top two feet of backfill against these walls shall be "Select Earth Fill;
perimeter grade beam".
4. Bring backfill to required grades by depositing material in horizontal layers not more than 6" deep, loose
measurement.
5. If subgrade membrane waterproofing over concrete is installed, the Architect shall inspect the waterproofing
before any backfill is placed. Do not puncture or otherwise damage the waterproofing while backfilling.
6. Provide "Select Fill; concrete floor system" at floor system on grade.
3.04 COMPACTION
A. Compact each layer of earth fill and backfill thoroughly and evenly until there is no evidence of further
compaction and a solid and uniform density is secured.
1. Equipment for compacting shall be sheepsfoot and rubber tired rollers or other compactors capable of
obtaining the required density. Compact the fill with power tampers and by hand in areas not accessible
to rollers.
2. Compact each layer of fill to the density listed below as a function of the location. The required density in
each case is indicated as a percentage of the maximum dry unit weight determined using the standard
compaction test ASTM D 698.
3. Compact select fill to the density listed below at a moisture content between 1 percent belowto a maximum
of 3 percent above the optimum moisture content (-1 to +3). Compact select fill at the perimeter grade
beams to the density listed below at a moisture content between 2 percent below to 2 percentage points
above optimum (-2 to +2).
a. Material under the building slab -on -grade ----- 95 to 100%
b. Material adjacent to grade beams ----_________ 93 to 980/6.
3.05 GRADING
A. Grading Under Slabs On Grade: Shape and finish select earth fill to form the subgrade for concrete floor slabs
on grade. Fine grade the areas to the proper elevations and leave the compacted surfaces smooth, without
waves and ruts.
3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Compaction Tests: Field density testing of the select fill material under the building and at perimeter grade
beam shall be performed by an Independent Testing Laboratory.
1. Testing laboratory shall make one in place density test for each 2000 sq. ft. of area per lift, but in no case
less than three tests, and one test per 100 linear feet of backfill area adjacent to grade beams, to insure
that the specified density is obtained.
END OF SECTION
BUILDING SUBGRADE PREPARATION
VLK Architects, 2009 31 2313 - 3 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 313200
SOIL STABILIZATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: In -place lime treatment to stabilize the subgrade under the paving.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 014523 -Testing and Inspection Services.
2. Section 32 1313 -Concrete Paving.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Lime Stabilization for Paving Areas:
1. Hydrated Lime: Type A (dry): Per TSDHPT Item 264-2.
2. Lime should meet the requirements of Items 2.5.2 and 2.5.3 in the North Central Texas Council of
Governments standard specifications for Public Works Construction.
B. Soil: Upper 6" of the material in -place after the subgrade has been established, compacted and shaped.
C. Lime: Hydrated lime made from "high -calcium" type limestone with an unhydrated lime content not exceeding
6% by dry soil weight and a "free" water content notexceeding 40/6 by weight. Waste lime will not be acceptable.
There must be sufficient lime to produce a minimum pH of 12.4 within the upper 6" thickness.
2.02 EQUIPMENT
A. Distributor truck or tank equipped with agitator to maintain a uniform mixture of lime and water.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Insure that surfaces have been brought to approximate rough grades (plus or minus 0.10 feet). Loosen and
pulverize soil to a depth of 6 inches below bottom of designated paving or slab areas, including a distance of
one foot outside perimeter of paving.
B. The percentages of lime indicated in this specification section are for bidding purposes only. Prior to beginning
any soil stabilization, the contractor shall verify with the Owner the amount and type of soil stabilization material
to be used.
3.02 PERFORMANCE - PAVING SUBGRADE
A. General: It is the primary requirement to secure a completed 6" deep subgrade of treated material containing
a uniform lime mixture, free of loose areas, of uniform density and moisture content, well bound for its full depth
and with a smooth surface suitable for placing subsequent paving and slabs to achieve a soils Plasticity Index
of not greater than 15. Construction methods and equipment shall comply to NCTCOG Items 4.6.
B. Scarification: Excavate and scarify the material to be treated down to the secondary grade (proposed bottom
of lime treatment). Wet or unstable material below the secondary grade shall be corrected by scarifying, adding
lime and compacting to uniform stability. Then spread the excavated and scarified material to the desired cross
section. Full depth of treatment shall be 6 inches and full width shall be the entire area to be paved between
points and lines located one foot beyond pavement edges.
C. Placing Lime: Add lime to the scarified material in an amount equal to 6% by dry weight measurement, of 6"
depth of compacted subgrade. Apply lime mixed with water to form a slurry. Spread lime only on that area
where mixing operations can be completed during the same working day.
D. Mixing: Mix the soil and lime thoroughly with suitable road mixers or other approved equipment until a
homogeneous, friable mixture is obtained free from clods and lumps. Aerate or sprinkle the mixture as
necessary to secure the optimum moisture content Necessary optimum moisture content shall be between
optimum and 4% wet of optimum.
SOIL STABILIZATION
VLK Architects, 2009 31 3200 -1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
E. Curing: Allow the mixture to cure fora period of from 48 to 72 hours. During the curing period keep the material
moist.
F. Final Mixing: After the required curing time, mix the material uniformly with a rotary mixer to reduce the size of
the particles so that 100% will pass a 1-3/4" sieve and 60% will pass a No. 4 sieve. Lime -soil mixture pH shall
be 12.4 or greater. If not possible to attain 12.4, maximum pfH attainable shall be validated by laboratory test
for soil being treated.
G. Compacting: Sprinkle the mature as required and compact by rolling and tamping to a minimum of 95%
standard density, ASTM D 698, with moisture content between optimum and 4% wet of optimum. Correct
irregularities and weak spots by scarifying, adding or removing material and re -shaping and re -compacting.
Maintain the surface of the subgrade smooth, free from undulations and ruts and to the established lines and
grades.
H. Surface Moisture: Keep the surface of the compacted subgrade moist by sprinkling until such time as the paving
is placed.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Compaction Tests: Field density testing of the completed stabilized subgrade under paving shall be performed
by an Independent Testing Laboratory.
1. The Laboratory shall make one density test for each 5000 sq. ft. of stabilized subgrade to insure that the
specified density is obtained.
END OF SECTION
SOIL STABILIZATION
VLK Architects, 2009 31 3200 - 2 2737.03
SECTION 32 1313
CONCRETE PAVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
A. Section Includes: Concrete walks, curbs and gutters, paving, approaches, and other concrete flatwork outside
the building.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 03 3000 - Cast -in -place Concrete.
2. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants.
3. Section 31 3200 - Soil Stabilization: lime stabilized subgrade.
4. Section 32 1723 - Pavement Markings.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Samples: Submit in accordance with SECTION 01 3323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND
SAMPLES.
B. Provide a diagram of proposed control joints and expansion joints.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. City Standards: Street sidewalks, curbs and gutters, and approaches shall be constructed to meet or exceed
the requirements of the city standard specifications where the city standards are applicable.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Formwork shall meet the requirements specified in SECTION 03 1100 - CONCRETE FORMING AND
ACCESSORIES.
B. Reinforcing: Install reinforcing to meet the requirements of SECTION 03 2000 - CONCRETE REINFORCING.
Minimum reinforcement at paving, parking, and flatwork shall be #3 rebars at 18" o.c. each way.
C. Concrete shall meet the requirements specified in SECTION 03 3000- CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE. Minimum
compressive strength shall be 3000 psi at 28 days.
D. Expansion Joint Filler:
1. ASTM D 1751 preformed strips of asphalt saturated cane fiberboard for joints in standard finished flatwork
(walks, curbs and gutters).
2. ASTM D 1752, Type I preformed strips of elastic sponge rubber compound for joints to be caulked with
sealant and joints in architectural concrete flatwork.
3. The use of redwood expansion joints is prohibited.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Grade Control: Establish and maintain the lines and grades for concrete site work items by means of line and
grade stakes. Complete any fine grading required to prepare the subgrade. Maintain the finished subgrade
cushions in a satisfactory condition.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Forming: Set forms to lines and grades, and brace and secure to withstand wet concrete without deflection or
leakage. Stake forms securely in position with joints keyed to prevent relative displacement. Clean and oil
forms each time they are used.
1. Walks: 4" thick. Surfaces shall be crowned or sloped to drain.
2. Curbs and Gutters: As detailed.
3. Paving and Drive Approaches: 6-1/2" thick at bus lanes and delivery routes; 5" thick elsewhere. Thicken
edges as required.
CONCRETE PAVING
VLK Architects, 2009 32 1313 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
4. Miscellaneous: Catch basins, flagpole base, and other miscellaneous items of concrete shall be
constructed to detail.
B. Reinforcing: Install reinforcing to meet the requirements of SECTION 03 2000 - CONCRETE REINFORCING
Minimum reinforcement at paving, parking and flatwork shall be #3 rebars at 18" o.c. each way.
C. Concrete: Place concrete to meet the requirements of SECTION 03 3000 - CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE.
1. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 301 and 304. Deposit concrete so that specified slab thickness will
be obtained after vibrating and finishing operations. Minimize handling to prevent segregation. Consolidate
concrete by suitable means to prevent formation of voids or honeycombs. Exercise care to prevent
disturbance of forms and reinforcing and damage to vapor retarder. Place concrete to lines and levels
shown, properly sloped to drain into adjacent yard areas and drainage structures.
2. Hot Weather Placement: ACI 305.
3. Cold Weather Placement: ACI 306.
4. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts, and formed joints are not disturbed during concrete
placement.
5. Place concrete continuously between predetermined construction joints. Do not break or interrupt
successive pours such that cold joints occur.
D. Expansion Joints: Locate expansion joints around fixed objects within or abutting concrete, and at intervals of
not more than 30 ft. o.c. along walks and curbs and 50 ft. o.c. along drive and parking paving.
1. Install preformed filler with the top edge approximately 1/4" below the finished concrete surface to leave
a neat, straight joint.
2. Joints shall be 1/2" wide unless specifically dimensioned otherwise on the drawings. Joint edges shall be
rounded with an edging tool.
3. There shall be no connection by reinforcement or keyway across expansion joints. Joints shall be held in
alignment with sleeved, smooth dowels where required.
E. Scoring:
1. Saw cut walks, approaches, and paving using an abrasive or diamond blade. Cut joint width shall be 1/8"
and depth shall be 1/4" deep at walks and % slab thickness at approaches and paving. Cutting of joints
must be done as soon as concrete surface is firm enough not to be torn or damaged by the blade (within
4 to 12 hours), and before random shrinkage cracks can form in the concrete slab.
a. Score walks at approximately 5 foot intervals each way. Where walks abut curbs, the scoring of walks
and curbs shall align.
b. Score curbs and gutters at approximately 5 foot intervals.
c. Score approaches and paving at approximately 10 foot intervals each way or as shown.
F. Standard Finishing: Strike slabs off true by double screeding to the required level at or belowthe elevations and
grades shown on the drawings. Set edge forms and screed strips accurately to produce the designated
elevations and contours.
1. Walks: Float with wood floats to true planes with no coarse aggregate visible. Hand trowel to produce
smooth surfaces. Brush surfaces with a soft fiber brush to produce a uniformly striated finish. Edge
concrete surfaces with a rounded edging tool.
2. Curbs and gutters: Finish the curb and flow lines of gutters with a steel "S" shaped trowel to the contour
of the curb and gutter and then cross brush surfaces with a soft fiber brush to produce a fine brush finish.
3. Approaches: Screed and float to a monolithic medium float finish and belt with a canvas belt to produce
a herringbone texture finish.
4. Curb Ramps: Score surface, as detailed, to meed the Texas Accessibility Standards. Provide integral
contrasting color, per Specification SECTION 03 3519 - COLORED CONCRETE FINISHING
5. Paving: The surface shall be troweled and edged with a steel trowel and then broomed to obtain a smooth,
uniform brush finish.
G. Curing:
1. Cure concrete 7 days as specified in SECTION 03 3000 - CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE. Coat exposed
surfaces with curing compound and protect surfaces from pedestrian and vehicular traffic during the curing
period. Damaged areas shall be re -sprayed.
2. Concrete surfaces designated to receive chemical stain must be free of curing compound. Accordingly,
finished concrete shall be "Water -cured" or shall be completely sandblasted if cured with a curing compound
membrane.
H. Removing Forms: Forms shall remain in place for at least 12 hours after concrete has been placed and
finished. Remove forms without damaging the concrete. Bars and heavy tools shall not be used to pry against
the concrete in removing the forms.
CONCRETE PAVING
VLK Architects, 2009 32 1313 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Concrete Tests: Testing and acceptance of concrete shall meet the requirements specified in SECTION
03 3000 - CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE.
B. Grade and Smoothness Tests:
1. Plan Grade: Finished surface of the flatwork shall not vary more than 0.04 ft. above or below the plan grade
or elevation. Finished surfaces of abutting pavement and walks shall coincide at their juncture. Where a
new pavement or walk abuts an existing surface, transition pavement or walk strip shall be installed.
2. Surface Smoothness: Finished surface of the flatwork shall have no abrupt changes of more than 1/8" and
shall not deviate from the testing edge of a 12 ft. straight edge more than 1/4" plus or minus tolerance.
Flow line of gutters shall not deviate from the testing edge of a 10 ft. straight edge more than 1/8" plus or
minus tolerance.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Remove debris, scraps, surplus materials, tools and equipmentfrom the premises upon completion of the work.
Clean concrete droppings from walks and curbs. Leave the graded areas free of debris and rubble.
3.05 PROTECTION
A. Immediately after placement, protect concrete under provisions of SECTION 01500 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES
AND CONTROLS from premature, drying, excessive hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury.
END OF SECTION
CONCRETE PAVING
VLK Architects, 2009 32 1313 - 3 2737.03
SECTION 32 1723
PAVEMENT MARKINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Pavement marking on concrete paving.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 32 1313 - Concrete Paving
1.02 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Requirements: Apply paint when ambient temperature is 50°F. or above, and relative humidity
is below 85%.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer: Shall have a minimum of 2 years experience in the layout and striping of parking lots.
B. Job Conditions: Do not apply marking paint when weather is foggy or rainy, or ambient or pavement
temperatures are below 40°F., nor when such conditions are anticipated during eight hours after application.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions.
B. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with SECTION 01 6200 - PRODUCT OPTIONS.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Traffic Paint: Fed. Spec. TT-P-115E, Type III alkyd -chlorinated rubber -chlorinated paraffin marking paint. Fire
lane stripes shall be per city requirements. Provide Premium Chlorinated Rubber Base Paint as manufactured
by Highway Signs & Paint, Inc. (phone 214 446-1605).
B. Cleaning Solvent: VM & P Naphtha.
2.02 EQUIPMENT
A. Applicators: Hand -operated push type marking machine or conventional airless spray equipment with guide
lines and templates.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Surface Conditions: Clean and dry free from dirt, loose paint, oil, grease, wax, and other contaminants.
1. Concrete Surfaces: Allow concrete to cure a minimum of 90 days prior to application of marking paint.
2. Existing Concrete and Asphalt Surfaces: Shall be swept clean of all debris, including grease.
B. Equipment Condition: Clean previously used paint and solvent from application equipment, using VM & P
Naphtha.
C. Paint: Stir contents thoroughly from bottom of container. Do not thin paint.
D. Locate markings as indicated on Drawings. Provide qualified technician to supervise equipment and application
of markings. Lay out markings using guide lines, templates and forms.
E. Allow paving to cure before painting as required by manufacturer of traffic paint.
F. Allow protective coating to cure a minimum of 48 hours prior to application of traffic paint.
PAVEMENT MARKINGS
VLK Architects, 2009 32 1723 - 1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
3.02 APPLICATION
A. Parking Stripes and Symbols: Using approved equipment, apply paint to a minimum thickness of 15 mils.
Stripes shall be 4" wide. Marking edges of stripes and symbols shall be sharply outlined.
B. Firelane Striping: Stripe firelanes as shown on the plans and as required to meet City requirements.
END OF SECTION
PAVEMENT MARKINGS
VLK Architects, 2009 32 1723 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
SECTION 32 9223
SODDING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Grass sodding, where indicated on the drawings.
1.02 DEFINITION OF TERMS
A. Grass area shall mean all areas to be grassed with sod.
B. Materials shall mean all items such as topsoil, fertilizer, herbicide, and grass needed to accomplish the grassing.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Inspection of Grass Sod and Materials: Grass sod is subject to inspection and approval at the place of growth
or upon delivery, for conformity to specification requirements as to quality and variety. Such approval shall not
impair the right of inspection upon delivery at the site during the progress of work or right to rejection due to
damage suffered in handling or transportation. Rejected grass shall be removed immediately from the site.
Materials are subject to inspection and approval upon delivery.
1.04 WARRANTY
A. Grass shall be guaranteed by the Contractorfor 30 days after the date of substantial completion for the project,
or attainment of the required stand of grass, which ever is later. During this time, the Contractor shall be
responsible for all watering, weeding, mowing, fertilization, other maintenance as required, and replanting.
1. At the end of the 30-day warranty period, the grass will be re- inspected by the Owner and any defective
areas will be repaired or replaced by the Contractor.
2. The grass will be re -inspected in subsequent 30-day intervals, as required, until all defective areas comply
with the minimum requirements for the acceptance of grass, as noted in Part 3 - Execution. All costs
associated with the initial 30-day warranty period and subsequent 30-day periods, if required, shall be the
responsibility of the Contractor.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. General: All materials and grass sod shall be of first grade quality, be in prime condition when installed and
when the project is accepted. Any commercial processed or packaged material shall be delivered to the site
in the original unopened containers bearing the manufacturer's guaranteed analysis.
B. Topsoil: Reference SECTION 312300 - EXCAVATION AND FILL.
C. Fertilizer:
1. 16-4-12 or 15-5-10 fertilizer with iron and sulfur, shall be a commercial grade, pelleted or chip type, uniform
in composition, dry and free flowing.
2. Fertilizer shall be delivered to the site in the original unopened containers and bear the manufacturer's
guaranteed analysis. Any fertilizerthat becomes caked or damaged, making it unsuitable for use, will not
be acceptable.
D. Herbicide: "Roundup".
E. Pre -Emergent Herbicide: "Surflan" or "Betasan".
F. Grass Sod: All grass sod shall be 100% type and/or variety shown on the drawings, be fully mature, well
maintained grass, with a good strong root system free of all other grasses, contain no weeds, be evenly cut with
conventional sod -cutting machine to 3/4" thickness. All grass shall be from the same growing ground and
delivered to the project site in prime condition.
G. Water: Suitable waterfor the execution of this work including maintenance shall be furnished by the Contractor.
The Contractor shall be responsible for furnishing his own labor, hose and hose connections from the outlets
where the water will be furnished, if permanent irrigation system is not yet operable.
SODDING
VLK Architects, 2009 32 9223 -1 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION OF SOD
A. Under no circumstances shall installation of sod occur in planting periods other than April 15 to August 15 of
the year of project substantial completion. If installation of sod cannot be accomplished during this period, the
Contractor shall establish an interim stand of winter rye grass. The Contractor shall remove the rye grass and
provide the specified grass during the next period in the following year. The Contractor shall comply with the
requirements of the Maintenance Article in this specification section.
B. Soil Preparation: Remove all Johnsongrass roots and weeds by hand digging or by spraying with Herbicide ten
(10) day prior to beginning soil preparation work. Should it rain the day grass and weeds are sprayed, those
areas which do not show evidence of chemical reaction in three (3) days shall be re -sprayed.
C. Tillage and Grading:
1. Tillage shall be accomplished to loosen the soil, destroy existing vegetation, and prepare an acceptable
bed. All areas shall be tilled with heavy duty disc or chisel -type breaking plow, chisels set not more than
10" apart. Initial tillage shall be done in a crossing pattern for double coverage, then followed by a disc har-
row. Depth of tillage shall be 6". The finished surface shall be 1" below proposed finish grade.
2. Cleaning: All rocks and clods 3/4" in size or larger shall be removed form the fine graded area. Soil shall
be further prepared by the removal of debris, including building materials, rubbish, weeds, concrete chips
and small pieces of wood, regardless of size.
3. Fine Grading: After tillage and cleaning, all areas to be planted shall be leveled, fine graded, and drug with
a weighted spike harrow or float drag. The required result shall be the elimination of ruts or depressions
that would cause water to stand or pond immediately after rainfall oroperation of the lawn irrigation system,
humps, and objectionable soil clods. This shall be the final soil preparation step to be completed before
the commencement of fertilizing and planting.
D. Laying of Sod: All areas to receive sod shall be prepared and finish graded in accordance with these
specifications. Areas to receive sod shall be moist but not muddy. Sod shall be delivered to the site fresh and
shall be laid immediately upon receipt. Sod shall be laid with tight fitting staggered joints and shall be watered
within an hour after being laid. Sod which shows evidence of going through a "heat", is discolored or dehydrated
shall be removed from the project site. After sodding, the finished surface shall be free of depressions.
E. Pre -emergent Herbicide and Fertilizer Applications:
1. All grass areas shall have pre -emergent herbicide applied at the rates recommended by the manufacturer.
Use a broadcast spreader when applying the granular form of pre -emergent.
2. Apply fertilizer with a broadcast spreader at the rate of two pounds per 100 square feet. Apply fertilizer
immediately after grass installation and repeat the application at 6-week intervals until accepted by the
Architect.
Acceptance of grass for the purpose of establishing the date of substantial completion and subsequent
re -inspections shall be based on the following minimum requirements:
1. Grass must indicate weed -free uniform, healthy, and vigorous growth, devoid of discoloration and signs of
dehydration.
2. The grade shall be free of low or hollow places so that water shall not stand or pond during rains or
irrigation operation.
3. Grass shall be firmly rooted so that sections cannot be removed.
4. Grass joints shall be tight fitting and shall show evidence of elimination.
3.02 GRASS REPLACEMENTS
A. All replacements shall be grass of the same type as specified on the drawings. Replacement -grass shall be
furnished and planted as specified under paragraph: Installation of Sod. The cost shall be borne by the
Contractor except for those replacements resulting from civil disobedience, acts of neglect on the part of others,
physical damage by animals, improper Owner maintenance, vehicles, fire, or losses due to curtailment of water
by local authorities or to "Acts of God". Floods, tornadoes, winds of hurricane force, hail, exceptional or untimely
freezes are not normal and the damage they do cannot be calculated in a bid.
3.03 MAINTENANCE
A. During Grass Operations:
1. Maintenance shall begin immediately after grassing is started and shall continue until the work is
substantially completed and accepted. Grass shall be watered, maintained and protected until accepted
by the Architect in writing.
SODDING
VLK Architects, 2009 32 9223 - 2 2737.03
CATE Renovations
A&M Consolidated High School
College Station Independent School District
2. Settled grass shall be reset to proper grade position and dead grass removed. Defective work shall be
corrected as soon as possible after it becomes apparent and weather and season permit. Upon completion
of grassing and prior to substantial completion, the Contractor shall remove from the site excess soil and
debris, and repair any damage to structures, resulting from grassing operations.
3. All lawn areas shall be mowed as required to maintain a maximum height of 2" until accepted by the
Architect.
B. Maintenance Program: Contractor shall supply the Owner's representative with a year's written recommended
maintenance program. Owner's representative must approve the maintenance program before final payment
is made to the Contractor.
3.04 SITE MAINTENANCE
A. The Contractor shall at all times maintain the site in a neat and orderly condition, free from trash and waste
construction materials. Unattended construction materials, equipment and trash shall be left in such a manner
that they do not constitute fire hazards or become or cause nuisance or dangers due to forces of nature such
as rain and wind. Existing improvements, as designated by the Owner's representative, whether on the
construction site or adjacent property, shall be protected in place and shall be provided with adequate access.
Paved areas shall be cleaned of all mud and debris resulting from grassing operations.
3.05 FINAL CLEANUP
A. After completion of thework required under the contract and before acceptance of the work, the Contractor shall
at his own expense cleanup the site of the work and any and all property used during grassing operations to the
satisfaction of the Owner's representative.
B. Contractor shall remove and dispose of all excess materials resulting from his work and shall repair, replace
or restore to the satisfaction of the Owner's representative all property of any type or nature which has been
moved, damaged or altered in any way by his operations including existing slopes. He shall return all roadway
surfaces to their original condition and appearance.
C. All dirt and debris shall be removed from paved surfaces by washing or sweeping as necessary. Ditches
culverts and drainage structures, adjacent to and downstream from the work site, shall be inspected and
cleaned of all material and debris resulting from his operations. Ditches shall be re -shaped if necessary. All
new facilities shall be cleaned of dust, dirt, spilled concrete, oil and other substances as directed by the Owner's
representative.
D. All work and storage areas shall be graded so that they drain. Grades shall be smooth, evenly sloped surfaces,
matching or"equivalent to that existing when work was started.
3.06 DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIAL
A. All waste material shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be disposed of by the Contractor at
local landfill operations in accordance with applicable ordinances and regulations.
END OF SECTION
SODDING
VLK Architects, 2009 32 9223 - 3 2737.03